17 files changed, 22591 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/16878-8.txt b/16878-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5603bc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7115 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Observations upon the Prophecies of Daniel,
+and the Apocalypse of St. John, by Isaac Newton
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Observations upon the Prophecies of Daniel, and the Apocalypse of St. John
+
+Author: Isaac Newton
+
+Release Date: October 15, 2005 [EBook #16878]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OBSERVATIONS UPON THE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Greg Alethoup, Robert Shimmin, Keith Edkins
+and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+OBSERVATIONS
+UPON THE
+PROPHECIES
+OF
+_DANIEL_,
+AND THE
+APOCALYPSE
+OF
+St. _JOHN_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In Two PARTS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+By Sir _ISAAC NEWTON_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_LONDON,_
+
+Printed by J. DARBY and T. BROWNE in _Bartholomew-Close._
+
+And Sold by J. ROBERTS in _Warwick-lane_, J. TONSON in the
+_Strand_, W. INNYS and R. MANBY at the West End of St.
+_Paul's Church-Yard_, J. OSBORN and T. LONGMAN in _Pater-Noster-Row_,
+J. NOON near _Mercers Chapel_ in _Cheapside_,
+T. HATCHETT at the _Royal Exchange_, S. HARDING in St.
+_Martin's lane_, J. STAGG in _Westminster-Hall_, J. PARKER in
+_Pall-mall_, and J. BRINDLEY in _New Bond-Street_.
+
+M.DCC.XXXIII.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+To the Right Honourable
+
+_P E T E R_
+
+Lord _K I N G_,
+
+Baron of _Ockham_, Lord High Chancellor of _Great-Britain._
+
+My Lord,
+
+_I shall make no Apology for addressing the following Sheets to Your
+Lordship, who lived in a long Intercourse of Friendship with the Author;
+and, like him, amidst occupations of a different nature, made Religion your
+voluntary Study; and in all your Enquiries and Actions, have shewn the same
+inflexible Adherence to Truth and Virtue._
+
+_I shall always reckon it one of the Advantages of my Relation to Sir
+_Isaac Newton_, that it affords me an opportunity of making this publick
+acknowledgment of the unfeigned Respect of_,
+
+  My Lord,
+      Your Lordship's
+          most obedient, and
+              most humble Servant,
+                  Benj. Smith.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+PART I.
+
+Observations upon the Prophecies of _Daniel_.
+
+CHAP. I. Introduction concerning, the Compilers of the Books of the Old
+Testament.
+
+CHAP. II. Of the Prophetic Language.
+
+CHAP. III. Of the vision of the Image composed of four Metals.
+
+CHAP. IV. Of the vision of the four Beasts.
+
+CHAP. V. Of the Kingdoms represented by the feet of the Image composed of
+iron and clay.
+
+CHAP. VI. Of the ten Kingdoms represented by the ten horns of the fourth
+Beast.
+
+CHAP. VII. Of the eleventh horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast.
+
+CHAP. VIII. Of the power of the eleventh horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast,
+to change times and laws.
+
+CHAP. IX. Of the Kingdoms represented in _Daniel_ by the Ram and He-Goat.
+
+CHAP. X. Of the Prophecy of the Seventy Weeks.
+
+CHAP. XI. Of the Times of the Birth and Passion of Christ.
+
+CHAP. XII. Of the Prophecy of the Scripture of Truth.
+
+CHAP. XIII. Of the King who did according to his will, and magnified
+himself above every God, and honoured _Mahuzzims_, and regarded not the
+desire of women.
+
+CHAP. XIV. Of the _Mahuzzims_, honoured by the King who doth according to
+his will.
+
+PART II.
+
+Observations upon the _Apocalypse_ of St. _John_.
+
+CHAP. I. Introduction, concerning the time when the _Apocalypse_ was
+written.
+
+CHAP. II. Of the relation which the _Apocalypse_ of _John_ hath to the Book
+of the Law of _Moses_, and to the worship of God in the Temple.
+
+CHAP. III. Of the relation which the Prophecy of _John_ hath to those of
+_Daniel_; and of the Subject of the Prophecy.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART I.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+OBSERVATIONS
+UPON THE
+PROPHECIES
+OF
+_DANIEL._
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+OBSERVATIONS
+
+UPON THE
+
+Prophecies of _DANIEL_
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. I.
+
+_Introduction concerning the Compilers of the books of the Old Testament._
+
+When _Manasses_ [1] set up a carved image in the house of the Lord, and
+built altars in the two courts of the house, to all the host of Heaven, and
+us'd inchantments and witchcraft, and familiar spirits, and for his great
+wickedness was invaded by the army of _Asserhadon_ King of _Assyria_, and
+carried captive to _Babylon_; the book of the Law was lost till the
+eighteenth year of his grandson _Josiah_. Then [2] _Hilkiah_ the High
+Priest, upon repairing the Temple, found it there: and the King lamented
+that their fathers had not done after the words of the book, and commanded
+that it should be read to the people, and caused the people to renew the
+holy covenant with God. This is the book of the Law now extant.
+
+When [3] _Shishak_ came out of _Egypt_ and spoil'd the temple, and brought
+_Judah_ into subjection to the monarchy of _Egypt_, (which was in the fifth
+year of _Rehoboam_) the _Jews_ continued under great troubles for about
+twenty years; being _without the true God, and without a teaching Priest,
+and without Law: and in those times there was no peace to him that went
+out, nor to him that came in, but great vexations were upon all the
+inhabitants of the countries, and nation was destroyed of nation, and city
+of city, for God did vex them with all adversity_. But [4] when _Shishak_
+was dead, and _Egypt_ fell into troubles, _Judah_ had quiet ten years; and
+in that time _Asa_ built fenced cities in _Judah_, and got up an army of
+580000 men, with which, in the 15th year of his reign, he met and overcame
+_Zerah_ the _Ethiopian_, who had conquered _Egypt_ and _Lybia_, and
+_Troglodytica_, and came out with an army of 1000000 _Lybians_ and
+_Ethiopians_, to recover the countries conquered by _Sesac_. And after this
+victory [5] _Asa_ dethroned his mother for idolatry, and he renewed the
+Altar, and brought new vessels of gold and silver into the Temple; and he
+and the people entered into a new covenant to seek the Lord God of their
+fathers, upon pain of death to those who worshiped other Gods; and his son
+_Jehosaphat_ took away the high places, and in the third year of his reign
+sent some of his Princes, and of the Priests and Levites, to teach in the
+cities of _Judah_: and they had the book of the Law with them, and went
+about throughout all the cities of _Judah_, and taught the people. This is
+that book of the Law which was afterwards lost in the reign of _Manasses_,
+and found again in the reign of _Josiah_, and therefore it was written
+before the third year of _Jehosaphat_.
+
+The same book of the Law was preserved and handed down to posterity by the
+_Samaritans_, and therefore was received by the ten Tribes before their
+captivity. For [6] when the ten Tribes were captivated, a Priest or the
+captivity was sent back to _Bethel_, by order of the King of _Assyria_, to
+instruct the new inhabitants of _Samaria_, in _the manner of the God of the
+land_; and the _Samaritans_ had the _Pentateuch_ from this Priest, as
+containing the law or _manner of the God of the land_, which he was to
+teach them. For [7] they persevered in the religion which he taught them,
+joining with it the worship of their own Gods; and by persevering in what
+they had been taught, they preserved this book of their Law in the original
+character of the _Hebrews_, while the two Tribes, after their return from
+_Babylon_, changed the character to that of the _Chaldees_, which they had
+learned at _Babylon_.
+
+And since the _Pentateuch_ was received as the book of the Law, both by the
+two Tribes and by the ten Tribes, it follows that they received it before
+they became divided into two Kingdoms. For after the division, they
+received not laws from one another, but continued at variance. _Judah_
+could not reclaim _Israel_ from the sin of _Jeroboam_, and _Israel_ could
+not bring _Judah_ to it. The _Pentateuch_ therefore was the book of the Law
+in the days of _David_ and _Solomon_. The affairs of the Tabernacle and
+Temple were ordered by _David_ and _Solomon_, according to the Law of this
+book; and _David_ in the 78th Psalm, admonishing the people to give ear to
+the Law of God, means the Law of this book. For in describing how their
+forefathers kept it not, he quotes many historical things out of the books
+of _Exodus_ and _Numbers_.
+
+The race of the Kings of _Edom_, before there reigned any King over
+_Israel_, is set down in the book of [8] _Genesis_; and therefore that book
+was not written entirely in the form now extant, before the reign of
+_Saul_. The writer set down the race of those Kings till his own time, and
+therefore wrote before _David_ conquered _Edom_. The _Pentateuch_ is
+composed of the Law and the history of God's people together; and the
+history hath been collected from several books, such as were the history of
+the Creation composed by _Moses_, _Gen_. ii. 4. the book of the generations
+of _Adam_, _Gen._ v. i. and the book of the wars of the Lord, _Num._ xxi.
+14. This book of wars contained what was done at the Red-sea, and in the
+journeying of _Israel_ thro' the Wilderness, and therefore was begun by
+_Moses_. And _Joshua_ might carry it on to the conquest of _Canaan_. For
+_Joshua_ wrote some things in the book of the Law of God, _Josh._ xxiv. 26
+and therefore might write his own wars in the book of wars, those being the
+principal wars of God. These were publick books, and therefore not written
+without the authority of _Moses_ and _Joshua_. And _Samuel_ had leisure in
+the reign of _Saul_, to put them into the form of the books of _Moses_ and
+_Joshua_ now extant, inserting into the book of _Genesis_, the race of the
+Kings of _Edom_, until there reigned a King in _Israel_.
+
+The book of the _Judges_ is a continued history of the _Judges_ down to the
+death of _Sampson_, and therefore was compiled after his death, out of the
+Acts of the _Judges_. Several things in this book are said to be done _when
+there was no King in _Israel__, _Judg._ xvii. 6. xviii. 1. xix. 1. xxi. 25.
+and therefore this book was written after the beginning of the reign of
+_Saul_. When it was written, the _Jebusites_ dwelt in _Jerusalem_, _Jud._
+i. 21 and therefore it was written before the eighth year of _David_, 2
+_Sam._ v. 8. and 1 _Chron._ xi. 6. The books of _Moses_, _Joshua_, and
+_Judges_, contain one continued history, down from the Creation to the
+death of _Sampson_. Where the _Pentateuch_ ends, the book of _Joshua_
+begins; and where the book of _Joshua_ ends, the book of _Judges_ begins.
+Therefore all these books have been composed out of the writings of
+_Moses_, _Joshua_, and other records, by one and the same hand, after the
+beginning of the reign of _Saul_, and before the eighth year of _David_.
+And _Samuel_ was a sacred writer, 1 _Sam._ x. 25. acquainted with the
+history of _Moses_ and the _Judges_, 1 _Sam._ xii. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12. and
+had leisure in the reign of _Saul_, and sufficient authority to compose
+these books. He was a Prophet, and judged _Israel_ all the days of his
+life, and was in the greatest esteem with the people; and the Law by which
+he was to judge the people was not to be published by less authority than
+his own, the Law-maker being not inferior to the judge. And the book of
+_Jasher_, which is quoted in the book of _Joshua_, _Josh._ x. 13. was in
+being at the death of _Saul_, 2 _Sam._ i. 18.
+
+At the dedication of the Temple of _Solomon_, when the Ark was brought into
+the most holy place, there was nothing in it but the two tables, 1 _Kings_
+viii. 9. and therefore when the _Philistines_ took the Ark, they took out
+of it the book of the Law, and the golden pot of Manna, and _Aaron_'s Rod.
+And this and other losses in the desolation of _Israel_, by the conquering
+_Philistines_, might give occasion to _Samuel_, after some respite from
+those enemies, to recollect the scattered writings of _Moses_ and _Joshua_,
+and the records of the Patriarchs and Judges, and compose them in the form
+now extant.
+
+The book of _Ruth_ is a history of things done in the days of the _Judges_,
+and may be looked upon as an addition to the book of the _Judges_, written
+by the same author, and at the same time. For it was written after the
+birth of _David_, _Ruth_ iv. 17, 22. and not long after, because the
+history of _Boaz_ and _Ruth_, the great grandfather and great grandmother
+of _David_, and that of their contemporaries, could not well be remembered
+above two or three generations. And since this book derives the genealogy
+of _David_ from _Boaz_ and _Ruth_, and omits _David_'s elder brothers and
+his sons; it was written in honour of _David_, after he was anointed King
+by _Samuel_, and before he had children in _Hebron_, and by consequence in
+the reign of _Saul_. It proceeds not to the history of _David_, and
+therefore seems to have been written presently after he was anointed. They
+judge well therefore who ascribe to _Samuel_ the books of _Joshua_,
+_Judges_, and _Ruth_.
+
+_Samuel_ is also reputed the author of the first book of _Samuel_, till the
+time of his death. The two books of _Samuel_ cite no authors, and therefore
+seem to be originals. They begin with his genealogy, birth and education,
+and might be written partly in his lifetime by himself or his disciples the
+Prophets at _Naioth_ in _Ramah_, 1 _Sam._ xix. 18, 19, 20. and partly after
+his death by the same disciples.
+
+The books of the _Kings_ cite other authors, as the book of the Acts of
+_Solomon_, the book of the _Chronicles_ of the Kings of _Israel_, and the
+book of the _Chronicles_ of the Kings of _Judah_. The books of the
+_Chronicles_ cite the book of _Samuel_ the Seer, the book of _Nathan_ the
+Prophet, and the book of _Gad_ the Seer, for the Acts of _David_; the book
+of _Nathan_ the Prophet, the Prophecy of _Ahijah_ the _Shilonite_, and the
+visions of _Iddo_ the Seer, for the Acts of _Solomon_; the book of
+_Shemajah_ the Prophet, and the book of _Iddo_ the Seer concerning
+genealogies, for the Acts of _Rehoboam_ and _Abijah_; the book of the Kings
+of _Judah_ and _Israel_ for the Acts of _Asa_, _Joash_, _Amaziah_,
+_Jotham_, _Ahaz_, _Hezekiah_, _Manasseh_, and _Josiah_; the book of
+_Hanani_ the Seer, for the Acts of _Jehosaphat_; and the visions of
+_Isaiah_ for the Acts of _Uzziah_ and _Hezekiah_. These books were
+therefore collected out of the historical writings of the antient Seers and
+Prophets. And because the books of the _Kings_ and _Chronicles_ quote one
+another, they were written at one and the same time. And this time was
+after the return from the _Babylonian_ captivity, because they bring down
+the history of _Judah_, and the genealogies of the Kings of _Judah_, and of
+the High Priests, to that captivity. The book of _Ezra_ was originally a
+part of the book of the _Chronicles_, and has been divided from it. For it
+begins with the two last verses of the books of _Chronicles_, and the first
+book of _Esdras_ begins with the two last chapters thereof. _Ezra_ was
+therefore the compiler of the books of _Kings_ and _Chronicles_, and
+brought down the history to his own time. He was a ready Scribe in the Law
+of God; and for assisting him in this work _Nehemias_ founded a library,
+and _gathered together the Acts of the Kings and the Prophets, and of
+_David_, and the Epistles of the Kings, concerning the holy gifts_, 2
+_Maccab._ ii. 13. By the Acts of _David_ I understand here the two books of
+_Samuel_, or at least the second book. Out of the Acts of the _Kings_,
+written from time to time by the Prophets, he compos'd the books of the
+Kings of _Judah_ and _Israel_, the _Chronicles_ of the Kings of _Judah_,
+and the _Chronicles_ of the Kings of _Israel_. And in doing this he joined
+those Acts together, in due order of time, copying the very words of the
+authors, as is manifest from hence, that the books of the _Kings_ and
+_Chronicles_ frequently agree with one another in words for many sentences
+together. Where they agree in sense, there they agree in words also.
+
+So the Prophecies of _Isaiah_, written at several times, he has collected
+into one body. And the like he did for those of _Jeremiah_, and the rest of
+the Prophets, down to the days of the second Temple. The book of _Jonah_ is
+the history of _Jonah_ written by another hand. The book of _Daniel_ is a
+collection of papers written at several times. The six last chapters
+contain Prophecies written at several times by _Daniel_ himself: the six
+first are a collection of historical papers written by others. The fourth
+chapter is a decree of _Nebuchadnezzar_. The first chapter was written
+after _Daniel_'s death: for the author saith, that _Daniel_ continued to
+the first year of _Cyrus_; that is, to his first year over the _Persians_
+and _Medes_, and third year over _Babylon_. And, for the same reason, the
+fifth and sixth chapters were also written after his death. For they end
+with these words: _So this _Daniel_ prospered in the reign of _Darius_ and
+in the reign of _Cyrus_ the_ Persian. Yet these words might be added by the
+collector of the papers, whom I take to be _Ezra_.
+
+The Psalms composed by _Moses_, _David_, and others, seem to have been also
+collected by _Ezra_ into one volume. I reckon him the collector, because in
+this collection I meet with Psalms as late as the _Babylonian_ captivity,
+but with none later.
+
+After these things _Antiochus Epiphanes_ spoiled the Temple, commanded the
+_Jews_ to forsake the Law upon pain of death, and caused the sacred books
+to be burnt wherever they could be found: and in these troubles the book of
+the _Chronicles_ of the Kings of _Israel_ was entirely lost. But upon
+recovering from this oppression, _Judas Maccab�us_ gathered together all
+those writings that were to be met with, 2 _Maccab._ ii. 14. and in
+reducing them into order, part of the Prophecies of _Isaiah_, or some other
+Prophet, have been added to the end of the Prophecies of _Zechariah_; and
+the book of _Ezra_ has been separated from the book of _Chronicles_, and
+set together in two different orders; in one order in the book of _Ezra_,
+received into the Canon, and in another order in the first book of
+_Esdras_.
+
+After the _Roman_ captivity, the _Jews_ for preserving their traditions,
+put them in writing in their _Talmud_, and for preserving their scriptures,
+agreed upon an Edition, and pointed it, and counted the letters of every
+sort in every book: and by preserving only this Edition, the antienter
+various lections, except what can be discovered by means of the
+_Septuagint_ Version, are now lost; and such marginal notes, or other
+corruptions, as by the errors of the transcribers, before this Edition was
+made, had crept into the text, are now scarce to be corrected.
+
+The _Jews_ before the _Roman_ captivity, distinguished the sacred books
+into the Law, the Prophets, and the _Hagiographa_, or holy writings; and
+read only the Law and the Prophets in their Synagogues. And Christ and his
+Apostles laid the stress of religion upon the Law and the Prophets, _Matt._
+vii. 12. xxii. 4. _Luke_ xvi. 16, 29, 31. xxiv. 44. _Acts_ xxiv. 14. xxvi.
+22. _Rom._ iii. 21. By the _Hagiographa_ they meant the historical books
+called _Joshua_, _Judges_, _Ruth_, _Samuel_, _Kings_, _Chronicles_, _Ezra_,
+_Nehemiah_, and _Esther_, the book of _Job_, the _Psalms_, the books of
+_Solomon_, and the _Lamentations_. The Samaritans read only the
+_Pentateuch_: and when _Jehosaphat_ sent men to teach in the cities, they
+had with them only the book of the Law; for the Prophecies now extant were
+not then written. And upon the return from the _Babylonian_ captivity,
+_Ezra_ read only the book of the Law to the people, from morning to noon on
+the first day of the seventh month; and from day to day in the feast of
+Tabernacles: for he had not yet collected the writings of the Prophets into
+the volume now extant; but instituted the reading of them after the
+collection was made. By reading the Law and the Prophets in the Synagogues,
+those books have been kept freer from corruption than the _Hagiographa_.
+
+In the infancy of the nation of _Israel_, when God had given them a Law,
+and made a covenant with them to be their God if they would keep his
+commandments, he sent Prophets to reclaim them, as often as they revolted
+to the worship of other Gods: and upon their returning to him, they
+sometimes renewed the covenant which they had broken. These Prophets he
+continued to send, till the days of _Ezra_: but after their Prophecies were
+read in the Synagogues, those Prophecies were thought sufficient. For if
+the people would not hear _Moses_ and the old Prophets, they would hear no
+new ones, no not _tho they should rise from the dead_. At length when a new
+truth was to be preached to the _Gentiles_, namely, _that Jesus was the
+Christ_, God sent new Prophets and Teachers: but after their writings were
+also received and read in the Synagogues of the Christians, Prophecy ceased
+a second time. We have _Moses_, the Prophets, and Apostles, and the words
+of Christ himself; and if we will not hear them, we shall be more
+inexcusable than the _Jews._ For the Prophets and Apostles have foretold,
+that as _Israel_ often revolted and brake the covenant, and upon repentance
+renewed it; so there should be a falling away among the Christians, soon
+after the days of the Apostles; and that in the latter days God would
+destroy the impenitent revolters, and make a new covenant with his people.
+And the giving ear to the Prophets is a fundamental character of the true
+Church. For God has so ordered the Prophecies, that in the latter days _the
+wise may understand, but the wicked shall do wickedly, and none of the
+wicked shall understand_, Dan. xii. 9, 10. The authority of Emperors,
+Kings, and Princes, is human. The authority of Councils, Synods, Bishops,
+and Presbyters, is human. The authority of the Prophets is divine, and
+comprehends the sum of religion, reckoning _Moses_ and the Apostles among
+the Prophets; and _if an Angel from Heaven preach any other gospel_, than
+what they have delivered, _let him be accursed_. Their writings contain the
+covenant between God and his people, with instructions for keeping this
+covenant; instances of God's judgments upon them that break it: and
+predictions of things to come. While the people of God keep the covenant,
+they continue to be his people: when they break it they cease to be his
+people or church, and become _the Synagogue of Satan, who say they are
+_Jews_ and are not._ And no power on earth is authorized to alter this
+covenant.
+
+The predictions of things to come relate to the state of the Church in all
+ages: and amongst the old Prophets, _Daniel_ is most distinct in order of
+time, and easiest to be understood: and therefore in those things which
+relate to the last times, he must be made the key to the rest.
+
+Notes to Chap. I.
+
+[1] 2 Chron. xxxiii. 5, 6, 7.
+
+[2] 2 Chron. xxxiv.
+
+[3] 2 Chron. xii. 2, 3, 4, 8, 9. & xv. 3, 5, 6.
+
+[4] 2 Chron. xiv. 1, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12.
+
+[5] 2 Chron. xv. 3, 12, 13, 16, 18.
+
+[6] 2 Kings xvii. 27, 28, 32, 33.
+
+[7] 2 Kings xvii. 34, 41.
+
+[8] Gen. xxxvi. 31.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. II.
+
+_Of the Prophetic Language._
+
+For understanding the Prophecies, we are, in the first place, to acquaint
+our-selves with the figurative language of the Prophets. This language is
+taken from the analogy between the world natural, and an empire or kingdom
+considered as a world politic.
+
+Accordingly, the whole world natural consisting of heaven and earth,
+signifies the whole world politic, consisting of thrones and people, or so
+much of it as is considered in the Prophecy: and the things in that world
+signify the analogous things in this. For the heavens, and the things
+therein, signify thrones and dignities, and those who enjoy them; and the
+earth, with the things thereon, the inferior people; and the lowest parts
+of the earth, called _Hades_ or Hell, the lowest or most miserable part of
+them. Whence ascending towards heaven, and descending to the earth, are put
+for rising and falling in power and honour: rising out of the earth, or
+waters, and falling into them, for the rising up to any dignity or
+dominion, out of the inferior state of the people, or falling down from the
+same into that inferior state; descending into the lower parts of the
+earth, for descending to a very low and unhappy estate; speaking with a
+faint voice out of the dust, for being in a weak and low condition; moving
+from one place to another, for translation from one office, dignity, or
+dominion, to another; great earthquakes, and the shaking of heaven and
+earth, for the shaking of kingdoms, so as to distract or overthrow them;
+the creating a new heaven and earth, and the passing away of an old one, or
+the beginning and end of the world, for the rise and ruin of the body
+politic signified thereby.
+
+In the heavens, the Sun and Moon are, by interpreters of dreams, put for
+the persons of Kings and Queens; but in sacred Prophecy, which regards not
+single persons, the Sun is put for the whole species and race of Kings, in
+the kingdom or kingdoms of the world politic, shining with regal power and
+glory; the Moon for the body of the common people, considered as the King's
+wife; the Stars for subordinate Princes and great men, or for Bishops and
+Rulers of the people of God, when the Sun is Christ; light for the glory,
+truth, and knowledge, wherewith great and good men shine and illuminate
+others; darkness for obscurity of condition, and for error, blindness and
+ignorance; darkning, smiting, or setting of the Sun, Moon, and Stars, for
+the ceasing of a kingdom, or for the desolation thereof, proportional to
+the darkness; darkning the Sun, turning the Moon into blood, and falling of
+the Stars, for the same; new Moons, for the return of a dispersed people
+into a body politic or ecclesiastic.
+
+Fire and meteors refer to both heaven and earth, and signify as follows;
+burning any thing with fire, is put for the consuming thereof by war; a
+conflagration of the earth, or turning a country into a lake of fire, for
+the consumption of a kingdom by war; the being in a furnace, for the being
+in slavery under another nation; the ascending up of the smoke of any
+burning thing for ever and ever, for the continuation of a conquered people
+under the misery of perpetual subjection and slavery; the scorching heat of
+the sun, for vexatious wars, persecutions and troubles inflicted by the
+King; riding on the clouds, for reigning over much people; covering the sun
+with a cloud, or with smoke, for oppression of the King by the armies of an
+enemy; tempestuous winds, or the motion of clouds, for wars; thunder, or
+the voice of a cloud, for the voice of a multitude; a storm of thunder,
+lightning, hail, and overflowing rain, for a tempest of war descending from
+the heavens and clouds politic, on the heads of their enemies; rain, if not
+immoderate, and dew, and living water, for the graces and doctrines of the
+Spirit; and the defect of rain, for spiritual barrenness.
+
+In the earth, the dry land and congregated waters, as a sea, a river, a
+flood, are put for the people of several regions, nations, and dominions;
+embittering of waters, for great affliction of the people by war and
+persecution; turning things into blood, for the mystical death of bodies
+politic, that is, for their dissolution; the overflowing of a sea or river,
+for the invasion of the earth politic, by the people of the waters; drying
+up of waters, for the conquest of their regions by the earth; fountains of
+waters for cities, the permanent heads of rivers politic; mountains and
+islands, for the cities of the earth and sea politic, with the territories
+and dominions belonging to those cities; dens and rocks of mountains, for
+the temples of cities; the hiding of men in those dens and rocks, for the
+shutting up of Idols in their temples; houses and ships, for families,
+assemblies, and towns, in the earth and sea politic; and a navy of ships of
+war, for an army of that kingdom that is signified by the sea.
+
+Animals also and vegetables are put for the people of several regions and
+conditions; and particularly, trees, herbs, and land animals, for the
+people of the earth politic: flags, reeds, and fishes, for those of the
+waters politic; birds and insects, for those of the politic heaven and
+earth; a forest for a kingdom; and a wilderness for a desolate and thin
+people.
+
+If the world politic, considered in prophecy, consists of many kingdoms,
+they are represented by as many parts of the world natural; as the noblest
+by the celestial frame, and then the Moon and Clouds are put for the common
+people; the less noble, by the earth, sea, and rivers, and by the animals
+or vegetables, or buildings therein; and then the greater and more powerful
+animals and taller trees, are put for Kings, Princes, and Nobles. And
+because the whole kingdom is the body politic of the King, therefore the
+Sun, or a Tree, or a Beast, or Bird, or a Man, whereby the King is
+represented, is put in a large signification for the whole kingdom; and
+several animals, as a Lion, a Bear, a Leopard, a Goat, according to their
+qualities, are put for several kingdoms and bodies politic; and sacrificing
+of beasts, for slaughtering and conquering of kingdoms; and friendship
+between beasts, for peace between kingdoms. Yet sometimes vegetables and
+animals are, by certain epithets or circumstances, extended to other
+significations; as a Tree, when called the _tree of life_ or _of
+knowledge_; and a Beast, when called _the old serpent_, or worshipped.
+
+When a Beast or Man is put for a kingdom, his parts and qualities are put
+for the analogous parts and qualities of the kingdom; as the head of a
+Beast, for the great men who precede and govern; the tail for the inferior
+people, who follow and are governed; the heads, if more than one, for the
+number of capital parts, or dynasties, or dominions in the kingdom, whether
+collateral or successive, with respect to the civil government; the horns
+on any head, for the number of kingdoms in that head, with respect to
+military power; seeing for understanding, and the eyes for men of
+understanding and policy, and in matters of religion for [Greek:
+Episkopoi], Bishops; speaking, for making laws; the mouth, for a law-giver,
+whether civil or sacred; the loudness of the voice, for might and power;
+the faintness thereof, for weakness; eating and drinking, for acquiring
+what is signified by the things eaten and drank; the hairs of a beast, or
+man, and the feathers of a bird, for people; the wings, for the number of
+kingdoms represented by the beast; the arm of a man, for his power, or for
+any people wherein his strength and power consists; his feet, for the
+lowest of the people, or for the latter end of the kingdom; the feet,
+nails, and teeth of beasts of prey, for armies and squadrons of armies; the
+bones, for strength, and for fortified places; the flesh, for riches and
+possessions; and the days of their acting, for years; and when a tree is
+put for a kingdom, its branches, leaves and fruit, signify as do the wings,
+feathers, and food of a bird or beast.
+
+When a man is taken in a mystical sense, his qualities are often signified
+by his actions, and by the circumstances of things about him. So a Ruler is
+signified by his riding on a beast; a Warrior and Conqueror, by his having
+a sword and bow; a potent man, by his gigantic stature; a Judge, by weights
+and measures; a sentence of absolution, or condemnation, by a white or a
+black stone; a new dignity, by a new name; moral or civil qualifications,
+by garments; honour and glory, by splendid apparel; royal dignity, by
+purple or scarlet, or by a crown; righteousness, by white and clean robes;
+wickedness, by spotted and filthy garments; affliction, mourning, and
+humiliation, by clothing in sackcloth; dishonour, shame, and want of good
+works, by nakedness; error and misery, by drinking a cup of his or her wine
+that causeth it; propagating any religion for gain, by exercising traffick
+and merchandize with that people whose religion it is; worshipping or
+serving the false Gods of any nation, by committing adultery with their
+princes, or by worshipping them; a Council of a kingdom, by its image;
+idolatry, by blasphemy; overthrow in war, by a wound of man or beast; a
+durable plague of war, by a sore and pain; the affliction or persecution
+which a people suffers in labouring to bring forth a new kingdom, by the
+pain of a woman in labour to bring forth a man-child; the dissolution of a
+body politic or ecclesiastic, by the death of a man or beast; and the
+revival of a dissolved dominion, by the resurrection of the dead.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. III.
+
+_Of the vision of the Image composed of four Metals._
+
+The Prophecies of _Daniel_ are all of them related to one another, as if
+they were but several parts of one general Prophecy, given at several
+times. The first is the easiest to be understood, and every following
+Prophecy adds something new to the former. The first was given in a dream
+to _Nebuchadnezzar_, King of _Babylon_, in the second year of his reign;
+but the King forgetting his dream, it was given again to _Daniel_ in a
+dream, and by him revealed to the King. And thereby, _Daniel_ presently
+became famous for wisdom, and revealing of secrets: insomuch that _Ezekiel_
+his contemporary, in the nineteenth year of _Nebuchadnezzar_, spake thus of
+him to the King of _Tyre_: _Behold_, saith he, _thou art wiser than
+_Daniel_, there is no secret that they can hide from thee_, Ezek. xxviii.
+3. And the same _Ezekiel_, in another place, joins _Daniel_ with _Noah_ and
+_Job_, as most high in the favour of God, _Ezek._ xiv. 14, 16, 18, 20. And
+in the last year of _Belshazzar_, the Queen-mother said of him to the King:
+_Behold there is a man in thy kingdom, in whom is the spirit of the holy
+gods; and in the days of thy father, light and understanding and wisdom,
+like the wisdom of the gods, was found in him; whom the king
+_Nebuchadnezzar_ thy father, the king, I say, thy father made master of the
+magicians, astrologers, _Chaldeans_ and soothsayers: forasmuch as an
+excellent spirit, and knowledge, and understanding, interpreting of dreams,
+and shewing of hard sentences, and dissolving of doubts, were found in the
+same _Daniel_, whom the king named _Belteshazzar__, Dan. v. 11, 12.
+_Daniel_ was in the greatest credit amongst the _Jews_, till the reign of
+the _Roman_ Emperor _Hadrian_: and to reject his Prophecies, is to reject
+the Christian religion. For this religion is founded upon his Prophecy
+concerning the _Messiah_.
+
+Now in this vision of the Image composed of four Metals, the foundation of
+all _Daniel_'s Prophecies is laid. It represents a body of four great
+nations, which should reign over the earth successively, viz. the people of
+_Babylonia_, the _Persians_, the _Greeks_, and the _Romans_. And by a stone
+cut out without hands, which fell upon the feet of the Image, and brake all
+the four Metals to pieces, and _became a great mountain, and filled the
+whole earth_; it further represents that a new kingdom should arise, after
+the four, and conquer all those nations, and grow very great, and last to
+the end of all ages.
+
+The head of the Image was of gold, and signifies the nations of
+_Babylonia_, who reigned first, as _Daniel_ himself interprets. _Thou art
+this head of gold_, saith he to _Nebuchadnezzar_. These nations reigned
+till _Cyrus_ conquered _Babylon_, and within a few months after that
+conquest revolted to the _Persians_, and set them up above the _Medes_. The
+breast and arms of the Image were of silver, and represent the _Persians_
+who reigned next. The belly and thighs of the Image were of brass, and
+represent the _Greeks_, who, under the dominion of _Alexander_ the great,
+conquered the _Persians_, and reigned next after them. The legs were of
+iron, and represent the _Romans_ who reigned next after the _Greeks_, and
+began to conquer them in the eighth year of _Antiochus Epiphanes_. For in
+that year they conquered _Perseus_ King of _Macedon_, the fundamental
+kingdom of the _Greeks_; and from thence forward grew into a mighty empire,
+and reigned with great power till the days of _Theodosius_ the great. Then
+by the incursion of many northern nations, they brake into many smaller
+kingdoms, which are represented by the feet and toes of the Image, composed
+part of iron, and part of clay. For then, saith _Daniel_, [1] _the kingdom
+shall be divided, and there shall be in it of the strength of iron, but
+they shall not cleave one to another._
+
+_And in the days of these Kings_, saith _Daniel_, _shall the God of heaven
+set up a kingdom which shall never be destroyed: and the kingdom shall not
+be left to other people; but it shall break in pieces, and consume all
+these kingdoms, and it shall stand for ever. Forasmuch as thou sawest that
+the stone was cut out of the mountains without hands, and that it brake in
+pieces the iron, the brass, the clay, the silver and the gold._
+
+Notes to Chap. III.
+
+[1] Chap. ii. 41, &c.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. IV.
+
+_Of the vision of the four Beasts._
+
+In the next vision, which is of the four Beasts, the Prophecy of the four
+Empires is repeated, with several new additions; such as are the two wings
+of the Lion, the three ribs in the mouth of the Bear, the four wings and
+four heads of the Leopard, the eleven horns of the fourth Beast, and the
+son of man coming in the clouds of Heaven, to the Antient of Days sitting
+in judgment.
+
+The first Beast was like a lion, and had eagle's wings, to denote the
+kingdoms of _Babylonia_ and _Media_, which overthrew the _Assyrian_ Empire,
+and divided it between them, and thereby became considerable, and grew into
+great Empires. In the former Prophecy, the Empire of _Babylonia_ was
+represented by the head of gold; in this both Empires are represented
+together by the two wings of the lion. _And I beheld,_ saith [1] _Daniel_,
+_till the wings thereof were pluckt, and it was lifted up from the earth,
+and made to stand upon the feet as a man, and a man's heart was given to
+it_; that is, till it was humbled and subdued, and made to know its human
+state.
+
+The second Beast was like a bear, and represents the Empire which reigned
+next after the _Babylonians_, that is, the Empire of the _Persians_. _Thy
+kingdom is divided_, or broken, saith _Daniel_ to the last King of
+_Babylon_, _and given to the _Medes_ and _Persians__, _Dan._ v. 28. This
+Beast _raised itself up on one side_; the _Persians_ being under the
+_Medes_ at the fall of _Babylon_, but presently rising up above them. [2]
+_And it had three ribs in the mouth of it, between the teeth of it_, to
+signify the kingdoms of _Sardes_, _Babylon_, and _Egypt_, which were
+conquered by it, but did not belong to its proper body. And it devoured
+much flesh, the riches of those three kingdoms.
+
+The third Beast was the kingdom which succeeded the _Persian_; and this was
+the empire of the _Greeks_, _Dan._ viii. 6, 7, 20, 21. It was _like a
+Leopard_, to signify its fierceness; and had four heads and four wings, to
+signify that it should become divided into four kingdoms, _Dan._ viii 22.
+for it continued in a monarchical form during the reign of _Alexander_ the
+great, and his brother _Arid�us_, and young sons _Alexander_ and
+_Hercules_; and then brake into four kingdoms, by the governors of
+provinces putting crowns on their own heads, and by mutual consent reigning
+over their provinces. _Cassander_ reigned over _Macedon_, _Greece_, and
+_Epirus_; _Lysimachus_ over _Thrace_ and _Bithynia_; _Ptolemy_ over
+_Egypt_, _Lybia_, _Arabia_, _Coelosyria_, and _Palestine_; and _Seleucus_
+over _Syria_.
+
+The fourth Beast was the empire which succeeded that of the _Greeks_, and
+this was the _Roman_. This beast was exceeding dreadful and terrible, and
+had great iron teeth, and devoured and brake in pieces, and stamped the
+residue with its feet; and such was the _Roman_ empire. It was larger,
+stronger, and more formidable and lasting than any of the former. It
+conquered the kingdom of _Macedon_, with _Illyricum_ and _Epirus_, in the
+eighth year of _Antiochus Epiphanes_, _Anno Nabonass._. 580; and inherited
+that of _Pergamus_, _Anno Nabonass._ 615; and conquered that of _Syria_,
+_Anno Nabonass._ 679, and that of _Egypt_, _Anno Nabonass._ 718. And by
+these and other conquests it became greater and more terrible than any of
+the three former Beasts. This Empire continued in its greatness till the
+reign of _Theodosius_ the great; and then brake into ten kingdoms,
+represented by the ten horns of this Beast; and continued in a broken form,
+till the Antient of days sat in a throne like fiery flame, and _the
+judgment was set, and the books were opened, and the Beast was slain and
+his body destroyed, and given to the burning flames; and one like the son
+of man came with the clouds of heaven, and came to the Antient of days_
+[3], and received dominion over all nations, and judgment was given to the
+saints of the most high, and the time came that they possessed the kingdom.
+
+_I beheld,_ saith [4] _Daniel_, _till the Beast was slain, and his body
+destroyed, and given to the burning flames. As concerning the rest of the
+Beasts, they had their dominion taken away: yet their lives were prolonged
+for a season and a time_. And therefore all the four Beasts are still
+alive, tho the dominion of the three first be taken away. The nations of
+_Chaldea_ and _Assyria_ are still the first Beast. Those of _Media_ and
+_Persia_ are still the second Beast. Those of _Macedon_, _Greece_ and
+_Thrace_, _Asia_ minor, _Syria_ and _Egypt_, are still the third. And those
+of _Europe_, on this side _Greece_, are still the fourth. Seeing therefore
+the body of the third Beast is confined to the nations on this side the
+river _Euphrates_, and the body of the fourth Beast is confined to the
+nations on this side _Greece_; we are to look for all the four heads of the
+third Beast, among the nations on this side of the river _Euphrates_; and
+for all the eleven horns of the fourth Beast, among the nations on this
+side of _Greece_. And therefore, at the breaking of the _Greek_ empire into
+four kingdoms of the _Greeks_, we include no part of the _Chaldeans_,
+_Medes_ and _Persians_ in those kingdoms, because they belonged to the
+bodies of the two first Beasts. Nor do we reckon the _Greek_ empire seated
+at _Constantinople_, among the horns of the fourth Beast, because it
+belonged to the body of the third.
+
+Notes to Chap. IV.
+
+[1] Chap. vii. 4.
+
+[2] Chap. vii. 5.
+
+[3] Chap. vii. 13.
+
+[4] Chap. vii. 11, 12.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. V.
+
+_Of the Kingdoms represented by the feet of the Image composed of iron and
+clay._
+
+_Dacia_ was a large country bounded on the south by the _Danube_, on the
+east by the _Euxine_ sea, on the north by the river _Neister_ and the
+mountain _Crapac_, and on the west by the river _Tibesis_, or _Teys_, which
+runs southward into the _Danube_ a little above _Belgrade_. It comprehended
+the countries now called _Transylvania_, _Moldavia_, and _Wallachia_, and
+the eastern part of the upper _Hungary_. Its antient inhabitants were
+called _Get�_ by the _Greeks_, _Daci_ by the _Latins_, and _Goths_ by
+themselves. _Alexander_ the great attacked them, and _Trajan_ conquered
+them, and reduced their country into a Province of the _Roman_ Empire: and
+thereby the propagation of the Gospel among them was much promoted. They
+were composed of several _Gothic_ nations, called _Ostrogoths_,
+_Visigoths_, _Vandals_, _Gepides_, _Lombards_, _Burgundians_, _Alans_, &c.
+who all agreed in their manners, and spake the same language, as
+_Procopius_ represents. While they lived under the _Romans_, the _Goths_ or
+_Ostrogoths_ were seated in the eastern parts of _Dacia_, the _Vandals_ in
+the western part upon the river _Teys_, where the rivers _Maresh_ and
+_Keresh_ run into it. The _Visigoths_ were between them. The _Gepides_,
+according to _Jornandes_, were upon the _Vistula_. The _Burgundians_, a
+_Vandalic_ nation, were between the _Vistula_ and the southern fountain of
+the _Boristhenes_, at some distance from the mountain _Crapac_ northwards,
+where _Ptolemy_ places them, by the names of _Phrugundiones_ and
+_Burgiones_.[1] The _Alans_, another _Gothic_ nation, were between the
+northern fountain of the _Boristhenes_ and the mouth of the river _Tanais_,
+where _Ptolemy_ placeth the mountain _Alanus_, and western side of the
+_Palus M�otis_.
+
+These nations continued under the dominion of the _Romans_ till the second
+year of the Emperor _Philip_, and then for want of their military pay began
+to revolt; the _Ostrogoths_ setting up a kingdom, which, under their Kings
+_Ostrogotha_, _Cniva_, _Araric_, _Geperic_, and _Hermanaric_, increased
+till the year of Christ 376; and then by an incursion of the _Huns_ from
+beyond the _Tanais_, and the death of _Hermanaric_, brake into several
+smaller kingdoms. _Hunnimund_, the son of _Hermanaric_, became King over
+the _Ostrogoths_; _Fridigern_ over the _Visigoths_; _Winithar_, or
+_Vinithar_, over a part of the _Goths_ called _Gruthungi_ by _Ammian_,
+_Gothunni_ by _Claudian_, and _Sarmat�_ and _Scythians_ by others:
+_Athanaric_ reign'd over another part of the _Goths_ in _Dacia_, called
+_Thervingi_; _Box_ over the _Antes_ in _Sarmatia_; and the _Gepides_ had
+also their King. The _Vandals_ fled over the _Danube_ from _Geberic_ in the
+latter end of the reign of _Constantine_ the great, and had seats granted
+them in _Pannonia_ by that Emperor, where they lived quietly forty years,
+viz. till the year 377, when several _Gothic_ nations flying from the
+_Hunns_ came over the _Danube_, and had seats granted them in _M�sia_ and
+_Thrace_ by the _Greek_ Emperor _Valens_. But the next year they revolted,
+called in some _Goths_, _Alans_ and _Hunns_, from beyond the _Danube_, and
+routed the _Roman_ army, slew the Emperor _Valens_, and spread themselves
+into _Greece_ and _Pannonia_ as far as the _Alps_. In the years 379 and 380
+they were checkt by the arms of the Emperors _Gratian_ and _Theodosius_,
+and made a submissive peace; the _Visigoths_ and _Thervingi_ returned to
+their seats in _M�sia_ and _Thrace_, the _Hunns_ retired over the _Danube_,
+and the _Alans_ and _Gruthingi_ obtained seats in _Pannonia_.
+
+About the year 373, or 374, the _Burgundians_ rose from their seats upon
+the _Vistula_, with an army of eighty thousand men to invade _Gallia_; and
+being opposed, seated themselves upon the northern side of the _Rhine_ over
+against _Mentz_. In the year 358, a body of the _Salian Franks_, with their
+King, coming from the river _Sala_, were received into the Empire by the
+Emperor _Julian_, and seated in _Gallia_ between _Brabant_ and the _Rhine_:
+and their King _Mellobaudes_ was made _Comes domesticorum_, by the Emperor
+_Gratian_. _Richomer_, another noble _Salian Frank_, was made _Comes
+domesticorum_, and _Magister utriusque Militi�_, by _Theodosius_; and A.C.
+384, was Consul with _Clearchus_. He was a great favourite of _Theodosius_,
+and accompanied him in his wars against _Eugenius_, but died in the
+expedition, and left a son called _Theudomir_, who afterwards became King
+of the _Salian Franks_ in _Brabant_. In the time of this war some _Franks_
+from beyond the _Rhine_ invaded _Gallia_ under the conduct of _Genobald_,
+_Marcomir_ and _Suno_, but were repulsed by _Stilico_; and _Marcomir_ being
+slain, was succeeded in _Germany_ by his son _Pharamond_.
+
+While these nations remained quiet within the Empire, subject to the
+_Romans_, many others continued so beyond the _Danube_ till the death of
+the Emperor _Theodosius_, and then rose up in arms. For _Paulus Diaconus_
+in his _Historia Miscell._ _lib._ xiv. speaking of the times next after the
+death of this Emperor, tells us: _Eodem tempore erant Gothi & ali� gentes
+maxim� trans Danubium habitantes: ex quibus rationabiliores quatuor sunt,
+Gothi scilicet, Huisogothi, Gepides & Vandali; & nomen tantum & nihil aliud
+mutantes. Isti sub Arcadia & Honorio Danubium transeuntes, locati sunt in
+terra Romanorum: & Gepides quidem, ex quibus postea divisi sunt Longobardi
+& Avares, villas, qu� sunt circa Singidonum & Sirmium, habitavere:_ and
+_Procopius_ in the beginning of his _Historia Vandalica_ writes to the same
+purpose. Hitherto the _Western Empire_ continued entire, but now brake into
+many kingdoms.
+
+_Theodosius_ died A.C. 395; and then the _Visigoths_, under the conduct of
+_Alaric_ the successor of _Fridigern_, rose from their seats in _Thrace_
+and wasted _Macedon_, _Thessaly_, _Achaia_, _Peloponnesus_, and _Epirus_,
+with fire and sword for five years together; when turning westward, they
+invaded _Dalmatia_, _Illyricum_ and _Pannonia_; and from thence went into
+_Italy_ A.C. 402; and the next year were so beaten at _Pollentia_ and
+_Verona_, by _Stilico_ the commander of the forces of the _Western Empire_,
+that _Claudian_ calls the remainder of the forces of _Alaric_, _tanta ex
+gente reliquias breves_, and _Prudentius_, _Gentem deletam_. Thereupon
+_Alaric_ made peace with the Emperor, being so far humbled, that _Orosius_
+saith, he did, _pro pace optima & quibuscunque sedibus suppliciter &
+simpliciter orare_. This peace was ratified by mutual hostages; _�tius_ was
+sent hostage to _Alaric_; and _Alaric_ continued a free Prince in the seats
+now granted to him.
+
+When _Alaric_ took up arms, the nations beyond the _Danube_ began to be in
+motion; and the next winter, between A.C. 395 and 396, a great body of
+_Hunns_, _Alans_, _Ostrogoths_, _Gepides_, and other northern nations, came
+over the frozen _Danube_, being invited by _Rufinus_: when their brethren,
+who had obtained seats within the Empire, took up arms also. _Jerome_ calls
+this great multitude, _Hunns_, _Alans_, _Vandals_, _Goths_, _Sarmatians_,
+_Quades_, and _Marcomans_; and saith, that they invaded all places between
+_Constantinople_ and the _Julian Alps_, wasting _Scythia_, _Thrace_,
+_Macedon_, _Dardania_, _Dacia_, _Thessaly_, _Achaia_, _Epirus_, _Dalmatia_,
+and all _Pannonia_. The _Suevians_ also invaded _Rh�tia_: for when _Alaric_
+ravaged _Pannonia_, the _Romans_ were defending _Rh�tia_; which gave
+_Alaric_ an opportunity of invading _Italy_, as _Claudian_ thus mentions.
+
+  _Non nisi perfidi� nacti penetrabile tempus,_
+  _Irrupere Get�, nostras dum Rh�tia vires_
+  _Occupat, atque alio desudant Marte cohortes_.
+
+And when _Alaric_ went from those parts into _Italy_, some other barbarous
+nations invaded _Noricum_ and _Vindelicia_, as the same Poet _Claudian_
+thus writes:
+
+      ----_Jam foedera gentes_
+  _Exuerant, Latiique audit� clade feroces_
+  _Vendelicos saltus & Norica rura tenebant._
+
+This was in the years 402 and 403. And among these nations I reckon the
+_Suevians_, _Quades_, and _Marcomans_; for they were all in arms at this
+time. The _Quades_ and _Marcomans_ were _Suevian_ nations; and they and the
+_Suevians_ came originally from _Bohemia_, and the river _Suevus_ or
+_Sprake_ in _Lusatia_; and were now united under one common King called
+_Ermeric_, who soon after led them into _Gallia_. The _Vandals_ and _Alans_
+might also about this time extend themselves into _Noricum_. _Uldin_ also
+with a great body of _Hunns_ passed the _Danube_ about the time of
+_Chrysostom_'s banishment, that is, A.C. 404, and wasted _Thrace_ and
+_M�sia_. _Radagaisus_, King of the _Gruthunni_ and succesor of _Winithar_,
+inviting over more barbarians from beyond the _Danube_, invaded _Italy_
+with an army of above two hundred thousand _Goths_; and within a year or
+two, A.C. 405 or 406., was overcome by _Stilico_, and perished with his
+army. In this war _Stilico_ was assisted with a great body of _Hunns_ and
+_Ostrogoths_, under the conduct of _Uldin_ and _Sarus_, who were hired by
+the Emperor _Honorius_. In all this confusion it was necessary for the
+_Lombards_ in _Pannonia_ to arm themselves in their own defence, and assert
+their liberty, the _Romans_ being no longer able to protect them.
+
+And now _Stilico_ purposing to make himself Emperor, procured a military
+prefecture for _Alaric_, and sent him into the _East_ in the service of
+_Honorius_ the _Western_ Emperor, committing some _Roman_ troops to his
+conduct to strengthen his army of _Goths_, and promising to follow soon
+after with his own army. His pretence was to recover some regions of
+_Illyricum_, which the _Eastern_ Emperor was accused to detain injuriously
+from the _Western_; but his secret design was to make himself Emperor, by
+the assistance of the _Vandals_ and their allies: for he himself was a
+_Vandal_. For facilitating this design, he invited a great body of the
+barbarous nations to invade the _Western Empire_, while he and _Alaric_
+invaded the _Eastern_. And these nations under their several Kings, the
+_Vandals_ under _Godegisilus_, the _Alans_ in two bodies, the one under
+_Goar_, the other under _Resplendial_, and the _Suevians_, _Quades_, and
+_Marcomans_, under _Ermeric_, marched thro' _Rh�tia_ to the side of the
+_Rhine_, leaving their seats in _Pannonia_ to the _Hunns_ and _Ostrogoths_,
+and joined the _Burgundians_ under _Gundicar_, and ruffled the _Franks_ in
+their further march. On the last of _December_ A.C. 406, they passed the
+_Rhine_ at _Ments_, and spread themselves into _Germania prima_ and the
+adjacent regions; and amongst other actions the _Vandals_ took _Triers_.
+Then they advanced into _Belgium_, and began to waste that country.
+Whereupon the _Salian Franks_ in _Brabant_ took up arms, and under the
+conduct of _Theudomir_, the son of _Ricimer_, or _Richomer_,
+abovementioned, made so stout a resistance, that they slew almost twenty
+thousand of the _Vandals_, with their King _Godegesilus_, in battel; the
+rest escaping only by a party of _Resplendial_'s _Alans_ which came timely
+to their assistance.
+
+Then the _British_ soldiers, alarm'd by the rumour of these things,
+revolted, and set up Tyrants there; first _Marcus_, whom they slew
+presently; then _Gratian_, whom they slew within four months; and lastly
+_Constantine_, under whom they invaded _Gallia_ A.C. 408, being favoured by
+_Goar_ and _Gundicar_. And _Constantine_ having possessed a good part of
+_Gallia_, created his son _Constans C�sar_, and sent him into _Spain_ to
+order his affairs there, A.C. 409.
+
+In the mean time _Resplendial_, seeing the aforesaid disaster of the
+_Vandals_, and that _Goar_ was gone over to the _Romans_, led his army from
+the _Rhine_; and, together with the _Suevians_ and residue of the
+_Vandals_, went towards _Spain_; the _Franks_ in the mean time prosecuting
+their victory so far as to retake _Triers_, which after they had plundered
+they left to the _Romans_. The _Barbarians_ were at first stopt by the
+_Pyrenean_ mountains, which made them spread themselves into _Aquitain_:
+but the next year they had the passage betrayed by some soldiers of
+_Constans_; and entring _Spain_ 4 Kal. _Octob._ A.C. 409, they conquered
+every one what he could; and at length, A.C. 411, divided their conquests
+by lot; the _Vandals_ obtained _Boetica_, and part of _Gall�cia_; the
+_Suevians_ the rest of _Gall�cia_; and the _Alans_ _Lusitania_ and the
+_Carthaginian_ Province: the Emperor for the sake of peace confirming them
+in those seats by grant A.C. 413.
+
+The _Roman Franks_ abovementioned, having made _Theudomir_ their King,
+began strait after their conquest of the _Vandals_ to invade their
+neighbours also. The first they set upon were the _Gauls_ of _Brabant_[2]:
+but meeting with notable resistance, they desired their alliance: and so
+those _Gauls_ fell off from the _Romans_, and made an intimate league with
+the _Franks_ to be as one people, marrying with one another, and conforming
+to one another's manners, till they became one without distinction. Thus by
+the access of these _Gauls_, and of the foreign _Franks_ also, who
+afterwards came over the _Rhine_, the _Salian_ kingdom soon grew very great
+and powerful.
+
+_Stilico_'s expedition against the _Greek_ Emperor was stopt by the order
+of _Honorius_; and then _Alaric_ came out of _Epirus_ into _Noricum_, and
+requested a sum of money for his service. The Senate were inclined to deny
+him, but by _Stilico_'s mediation granted it. But after some time _Stilico_
+being accused of a traiterous conspiracy with _Alaric_, and slain 10 Kal.
+_Sept._ A.C. 408; _Alaric_ was thereby disappointed of his money, and
+reputed an enemy to the Empire; he then broke strait into _Italy_ with the
+army he brought out of _Epirus_, and sent to his brother _Adolphus_ to
+follow him with what forces he had in _Pannonia_, which were not great, but
+yet not to be despised. Thereupon _Honorius_ fearing to be shut up in
+_Rome_, retired to _Ravenna_ in _October_ A.C. 408. And from that time
+_Ravenna_ continued to be the seat of the _Western_ Emperors. In those days
+the _Hunns_ also invaded _Pannonia_; and seizing the deserted seats of the
+_Vandals_, _Alans_, and _Goths_, founded a new kingdom there. _Alaric_
+advancing to _Rome_ besieged it, and 9 Kal. _Sept._ A.C. 410 took it: and
+afterwards attempting to pass into _Africa_, was shipwrackt. After which
+_Honorius_ made peace with him, and got up an army to send against the
+Tyrant _Constantine_.
+
+At the same time _Gerontius_, one of _Constantine_'s captains, revolted
+from him, and set up _Maximus_ Emperor in _Spain_. Whereupon _Constantine_
+sent _Edobec_, another of his captains, to draw to his assistance, the
+_Barbarians_ under _Goar_ and _Gundicar_ in _Gallia_, and supplies of
+_Franks_ and _Alemans_ from beyond the _Rhine_; and committed the custody
+of _Vienne_ in _Gallia Narbonensis_ to his son _Constans_. _Gerontius_
+advancing, first slew _Constans_ at _Vienne_, and then began to besiege
+_Constantine_ at _Arles_. But _Honorius_ at the same time sending
+_Constantius_ with an army on the same errand, _Gerontius_ fled, and
+_Constantius_ continued the siege, strengthned by the access of the
+greatest part of the soldiers of _Gerontius_. After four months siege,
+_Edobec_ having procured succours, the _Barbarian_ Kings at _Ments_, _Goar_
+and _Gundicar_, constitute _Jovinus_ Emperor, and together with him set
+forward to relieve _Arles_. At their approach _Constantius_ retired. They
+pursued, and he beat them by surprize; but not prosecuting his victory, the
+_Barbarians_ soon recovered themselves; yet not so as to hinder the fall of
+the tyrants _Constantine_, _Jovinus_ and _Maximus_. _Britain_ could not be
+recovered to the Empire, but remained ever after a distinct kingdom.
+
+The next year, A.C. 412, the _Visigoths_ being beaten in _Italy_, had
+_Aquitain_ granted them to retire into: and they invaded it with much
+violence, causing the _Alans_ and _Burgundians_ to retreat, who were then
+depopulating of it. At the same time the _Burgundians_ were brought to
+peace; and the Emperor granted them for inheritance a region upon the
+_Rhine_ which they had invaded: and the same, I presume, he did with the
+_Alans_. But the _Franks_ not long after retaking and burning _Triers_,
+_Castinus_, A.C. 415, was sent against them with an army, who routed them
+and slew _Theudomir_ their King This was the second taking of _Triers_ by
+the _Franks_. It was therefore taken four times, once by the _Vandals_ and
+thrice by the _Franks_. _Theudomir_ was succeeded by _Pharamond_, the
+Prince or King of the _Salian Franks_ in _Germany_. From thence he brought
+new forces, reigned over the whole, and had seats granted to his people
+within the Empire near the _Rhine_.
+
+And now the _Barbarians_ were all quieted, and settled in several kingdoms
+within the Empire, not only by conquest, but also by the grants of the
+Emperor _Honorius_. For _Rutilius_ in his _Itinerary_, written in Autumn,
+_Anno Urbis_ 1169, that is, according to _Varro_'s computation then in use,
+A.C. 416, thus laments the wasted fields:
+
+  _Illa quidem longis nimium deformia bellis_;
+
+And then adds,
+
+  _Jam tempus laceris post longa incendia fundis_
+    _Vel pastorales �dificare casas._
+
+And a little after,
+
+  _�ternum tibi Rhenus aret._
+
+And _Orosius_ in the end of his history, which was finished A.C. 417,
+represents now a general pacification of the barbarous nations by the words
+_comprimere_, _coangustare_, _addicere gentes immanissimas_; terming them
+_imperio addictas_, because they had obtained seats in the Empire by league
+and compact; and _coangustatas_, because they did no longer invade all
+regions at pleasure, but by the same compact remained quiet in the seats
+then granted them. And these are the kingdoms, of which the feet of the
+Image were henceforward composed, and which are represented by iron and
+clay intermixed, which did not stick one to another, and were of different
+strength.
+
+Notes to Chap. V.
+
+[1] Procop. l. 1. de Bello Vandalico.
+
+[2] Galli Arborici: _whence the region was named _Arboricbant_, and by
+contraction _Brabant__.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. VI.
+
+_Of the ten Kingdoms represented by the ten horns of the fourth Beast._
+
+Now by the wars above described the _Western_ Empire of the _Romans_, about
+the time that _Rome_ was besieged and taken by the _Goths_, became broken
+into the following ten kingdoms.
+
+  1. The kingdom of the _Vandals_ and _Alans_ in _Spain_ and _Africa_.
+  2. The kingdom of the _Suevians_ in _Spain_.
+  3. The kingdom of the _Visigoths_.
+  4. The kingdom of the _Alans_ in _Gallia_.
+  5. The kingdom of the _Burgundians_.
+  6. The kingdom of the _Franks_.
+  7. The kingdom of the _Britains_.
+  8. The kingdom of the _Hunns_.
+  9. The kingdom of the _Lombards_.
+  10. The kingdom of _Ravenna_.
+
+Seven of these kingdoms are thus mentioned by _Sigonius_. 1_Honorio
+regnante_, _in Pannoniam_ 2_Hunni_, _in Hispaniam_ 3_Vandali_, 4_Alani_,
+5_Suevi_ & 6_Gothi_, _in Galliam_ 4_Alani_ 7_Burgundiones_ & 6_Gothi_,
+_certis sedibus permissis, accepti_. Add the _Franks_, _Britains_, and
+_Lombards_, and you have the ten: for these arose about the same time with
+the seven. But let us view them severally.
+
+1. The Kings of the _Vandals_ were, A.C. 407 _Godegesilus_, 407 _Gunderic_,
+426 _Geiseric_, 477 _Hunneric_, 484 _Gundemund_, 496 _Thrasamund_, 513
+_Geiseric_, 530 _Gelimer_. _Godegesilus_ led them into _Gallia_ A.C. 406,
+_Gunderic_ into _Spain_ A.C. 409, _Geiseric_ into _Africa_ A.C. 427; and
+_Gelimer_ was conquered by _Belisarius_ A.C. 533. Their kingdom lasted in
+_Gallia_, _Spain_ and _Africa_ together 126 years; and in _Africa_ they
+were very potent. The _Alans_ had only two Kings of their own in _Spain_,
+_Resplendial_, and _Ataces_, _Utacus_ or _Othacar_. Under _Resplendial_
+they went into _France_ A.C. 407, and into _Spain_ A.C. 409. _Ataces_ was
+slain with almost all his army by _Vallia_ King of the _Visigoths_ A.C.
+419. And then the remainder of these _Alans_ subjected themselves to
+_Gunderic_ King of the _Vandals_ in _Boetica_, and went afterwards with
+them into _Africa_, as I learn out of _Procopius_. Whence the Kings of the
+_Vandals_ styled themselves Kings of the _Vandals_ and _Alans_; as may be
+seen in the Edict of _Hunneric_ recited by _Victor_ in his _Vandalic_
+persecution. In conjunction with the _Chatti_, these _Alans_ gave the name
+of _Cathalaunia_, or _Catth-Alania_, to the Province which is still so
+called. These _Alans_ had also _Gepides_ among them; and therefore the
+_Gepides_ came into _Pannonia_ before the _Alans_ left it. There they
+became subject to the _Hunns_ till the death of _Attila_ A.C. 454, and at
+length were conquered by the _Ostrogoths_.
+
+2. The Kings of the _Suevians_ were, A.C. 407 _Ermeric_, 458 _Rechila_, 448
+_Rechiarius_, 458 _Maldra_, 460 _Frumarius_, 463 _Regismund_. And after
+some other Kings who are unknown, reigned A.C. 558 _Theudomir_, 568 _Miro_,
+582 _Euboricus_, and 583 _Andeca_. This kingdom, after it had been once
+seated in _Spain_, remained always in _Gall�cia_ and _Lusitania_. _Ermeric_
+after the fall of the _Alan_ kingdom, enlarged it into all _Gall�cia_,
+forcing the _Vandals_ to retire into _Boetica_ and the _Carthaginian_
+Province. This kingdom lasted 177 years according to _Isidorus_, and then
+was subdued by _Leovigildus_ King of the _Visigoths_, and made a Province
+of his kingdom A.C. 585.
+
+3. The Kings of the _Visigoths_ were, A.C. 400 _Alaric_, 410 _Athaulphus_,
+415 _Sergeric_ and _Vallia_, 419 _Theoderic_, 451 _Thorismund_, 452
+_Theoderic_, 465 _Euric_, 482 _Alaric_, 505 _Gensalaric_, 526 _Amalaric_,
+531 _Theudius_, 548 _Theudisclus_, &c. I date this kingdom from the time
+that _Alaric_ left _Thrace_ and _Greece_ to invade the _Western Empire_. In
+the end of the reign of _Athaulphus_ the _Goths_ were humbled by the
+_Romans_, and attempted to pass out of _France_ into _Spain_. _Sergeric_
+reigned but a few days. In the beginning of _Vallia_'s reign they assaulted
+the _Romans_ afresh, but were again repulsed, and then made peace on this
+condition, that they should on the behalf of the Empire invade the
+_Barbarian_ kingdoms in _Spain_: and this they did, together with the
+_Romans_, in the years 417 and 418, overthrowing the _Alans_ and part of
+the _Vandals_. Then they received _Aquitain_ of the Emperor by a full
+donation, leaving their conquests in _Spain_ to the Emperor: and thereby
+the seats of the conquered _Alans_ came into the hands of the _Romans_. In
+the year 455, _Theoderic_, assisted by the _Burgundians_, invaded _Spain_,
+which was then almost all subject to the _Suevians_, and took a part of it
+from them. A.C. 506, the _Goths_ were driven out of _Gallia_ by the
+_Franks_. A.C. 585, they conquered the _Suevian_ kingdom, and became Lords
+of all _Spain_. A.C. 713, the _Saracens_ invaded them, but in time they
+recovered their dominions, and have reigned in _Spain_ ever since.
+
+4. The Kings of the _Alans_ in _Gallia_ were _Goar_, _Sambida_, _Eocharic_,
+_Sangibanus_, _Beurgus_, &c. Under _Goar_ they invaded _Gallia_ A.C. 407,
+and had seats given them near the _Rhine_, A.C. 412. Under _Sambida_, whom
+_Bucher_ makes the successor, if not the son of _Goar_, they had the
+territories of _Valence_ given them by _�tius_ the Emperor's General, A.C.
+440. Under _Eocharic_ they conquered a region of the rebelling _Galli
+Arborici_, given them also by _�tius_. This region was from them named
+_Alenconium, quasi Alanorum conventus_. Under _Sangibanus_ they were
+invaded, and their regal city _Orleans_ was besieged by _Attila_ King of
+the _Hunns_, with a vast army of 500000 men. _�tius_ and the _Barbarian_
+Kings of _Gallia_ came to raise the siege, and beat the _Hunns_ in a very
+memorable battle, A.C. 451, _in campis Catalaunicis_, so called from these
+_Alans_ mixt with the _Chatti_. The region is now called _Campania_ or
+_Champagne_. In that battle were slain on both sides 162000 men. A year or
+two after, _Attila_ returned with an immense army to conquer this kingdom,
+but was again beaten by them and the _Visigoths_ together in a battle of
+three days continuance, with a slaughter almost as great as the former.
+Under _Beurgus_, or _Biorgor_, they infested _Gallia_ round about, till the
+reign of _Maximus_ the Emperor; and then they passed the _Alps_ in winter,
+and came into _Liguria_, but were there beaten, and _Beurgus_ slain, by
+_Ricimer_ commander of the Emperor's forces, A.C. 464. Afterwards they were
+again beaten, by the joint force of _Odoacer_ King of _Italy_ and
+_Childeric_ King of the _Franks_, about the year 480, and again by
+_Theudobert_ King of the _Austrian Franks_ about the year 511.
+
+5. The Kings of the _Burgundians_ were, A.C. 407 _Gundicar_, 436 _Gundioc_,
+467 _Bilimer_, 473 _Gundobaldus_ with his brothers, 510 _Sigismund_, 517
+_Godomarus_. Under _Gundicar_ they invaded _Gallia_ A.C. 407, and had seats
+given them by the Emperor near the _Rhine_ in _Gallia Belgica_, A.C. 412.
+They had _Saxons_ among them, and were now so potent, that _Orosius_ A.C.
+417 wrote of them: '_Burgundionum esse pr�validam manum, Galli� hodieque
+testes sunt, in quibus pr�sumpta possessione consistunt_. About the year
+435 they received great overthrows by _�tius_, and soon after by the
+_Hunns_: but five years after had _Savoy_ granted them to be shared with
+the inhabitants; and from that time became again a potent kingdom, being
+bounded by the river _Rhodanus_, but afterwards extending much further into
+the heart of _Gallia_. _Gundobald_ conquered the regions about the rivers
+_Araris_ and _Rhodanus_, with the territories of _Marseilles_; and invading
+_Italy_ in the time of the Emperor _Glycerius_, conquered all his brethren.
+_Godomarus_ made _Orleans_ his royal seat: whence the kingdom was called
+_Regnum Aurelianorum_. He was conquered by _Clotharius_ and _Childebert_,
+Kings of the _Franks_, A.C. 526. From thenceforward this kingdom was
+sometimes united to the kingdom of the _Franks_, and sometimes divided from
+it, till the reign of _Charles_ the great, who made his son _Carolottus_
+King of _Burgundy_. From that time, for about 300 years together, it
+enjoyed its proper Kings; and was then broken into the Dukedom of
+_Burgundy_, County of _Burgundy_, and County of _Savoy_; and afterwards
+those were broken into other lesser Counties.
+
+6. The Kings of the _Franks_ were, A.C. 407 _Theudomir_, 417 _Pharamond_,
+428 _Clodio_, 448 _Merov�us_, 456 _Childeric_, 482 _Clodov�us_, &c.
+_Windeline_ and _Bucher_, two of the most diligent searchers into the
+originals of this kingdom, make it begin the same year with the _Barbarian_
+invasions of _Gallia_, that is, A.C. 407. Of the first Kings there is in
+_Labbe's Bibliotheca M.S._ this record.
+
+_Historica qu�dam excerpta ex veteri stemmate genealogico Regum Franci�_.
+
+_Genobaldus, Marcomerus, Suno, Theodemeris. Isti duces vel reguli
+extiterunt � principio gentis Francorum diversis temporibus. Sed incertum
+relinquunt historici quali sibi procreations line� successerunt_.
+
+_Pharamundus: sub hoc rege suo primo Franci legibus se subdunt, quas
+primores eorum tulerunt Wisogastus, Atrogastus, Salegastus_.
+
+_Chlochilo. Iste, transito Rheno, Romanos in Carbonaria sylva devicit,
+Camaracum cepit & obtinuit, annis 20 regnavit. Sub hoc rege Franci usque
+Summam progressi sunt_.
+
+_Merovechus. Sub hoc rege Franci Trevirim destruunt, Metim succendunt,
+usque Aurelianum perveniunt_.
+
+Now for _Genobaldus_, _Marcomer_ and _Suno_, they were captains of the
+_Transrhenane Franks_ in the reign of _Theodosius_, and concern us not. We
+are to begin with _Theudomir_ the first King of the rebelling _Salii_,
+called _Didio_ by _Ivo Carnotensis_, and _Thiedo_ and _Theudemerus_ by
+_Rhenanus_. His face is extant in a coin of gold found with this
+inscription, THEUDEMIR REX, published by _Petavius_, and still or lately
+extant, as _Windeline_ testifies: which shews that he was a King, and that
+in _Gallia_; seeing that rude _Germany_ understood not then the coining of
+money, nor used either _Latin_ words or letters. He was the son of
+_Ricimer_, or _Richomer_, the favourite of the Emperor _Theodosius_; and so
+being a _Roman Frank_, and of the _Salian_ royal blood, they therefore upon
+the rebellion made him King. The whole time of his reign you have stated in
+_Excerptis Gregorii Turonensis � Fredigario_, _cap._ 5, 6, 7, 8. where the
+making him King, the tyranny of _Jovinus_, the slaughter of the associates
+of _Jovinus_, the second taking of _Triers_ by the _Franks_, and their war
+with _Castinus_, in which this King was slain, are as a series of
+successive things thus set down in order. _Extinctis Ducibus in Francis,
+denuo Reges creantur ex eadem stirpe qua prius fuerant. Eodem tempore
+Jovinus ornatus regios assumpsit. Constantinus fugam versus Italiam
+dirigit; missis a Jovino Principe percussoribus super Mentio flumine,
+capite truncatur. Multi nobilium jussu Jovini apud Avernis capti, & a
+ducibus Honorii crudeliter interempti sunt. Trevirorum civitas, factione
+unius ex senatoribus nomine Lucii, � Francis capt� & incensa est.--Castinus
+Domesticorum Comes expeditionem accipit contra Francos_, &c. Then returning
+to speak of _Theudomir_, he adds: _Franci electum � se regem, sicut prius
+fuerat, crinitum inquirentes diligenter ex genere Priami, Frigi &
+Francionis, super se crearunt nomine Theudemerum filium Richemeris, qui in
+hoc pr�lio quod supra memini, � Romanis interfectus est_; that is, in the
+battle with _Castinus_'s army. Of his death _Gregory Turonensis_ makes this
+further mention: _In consularibus legimus Theodemerem regem Francorum
+filium Ricimeris quondam, & Ascilam matrem ejus, gladio interfectos_.
+
+Upon this victory of the _Romans_, the _Franks_ and rebelling _Gauls_, who
+in the time of _Theudomir_ were at war with one another, united to
+strengthen themselves, as _Ordericus Vitalis_[1] thus mentions. _Cum Galli
+prius contra Romanos rebell�ssent, Franci iis sociati sunt, & pariter
+juncti, Ferramundum Sunonis ducis filium, sibi regem pr�fecerunt_.
+_Prosper_ sets down the time; _Anno 25 Honorii, Pharamundus regnat in
+Francia_. This, _Bucher_ well observes, refers to the end of the year 416,
+or the beginning of the next year, dating the years of _Honorius_ from the
+death of _Valentinian_; and argues well, that at this time _Pharamond_ was
+not only King by the constitution of the _Franks_, but crowned also by the
+consent of _Honorius_, and had a part of _Gallia_ assigned him by covenant.
+And this might be the cause that _Roman_ writers reckoned him the first
+King: which some not understanding, have reputed him the founder of this
+kingdom by an army of the _Transrhenane Franks_. He might come with such an
+army, but he succeeded _Theudomir_ by right of blood and consent of the
+people. For the above cited passage of _Fredigarius_, _Extinctis Ducibus,
+in Francis denuo Reges creantur ex eadem stirpe qu� prius fuerant_, implies
+that the kingdom continued to this new elected family during the reign of
+more Kings than one. If you date the years of _Honorius_ from the death of
+his father, the reign of _Pharamond_ might begin two years later than is
+assigned by _Bucher_. The _Salique_ laws made in his reign, which are yet
+extant, shew by their name that it was the kingdom of the _Salii_ over
+which he reigned; and, by the pecuniary mulcts in them, that the place
+where he reigned abounded much with money, and consequently was within the
+Empire; rude _Germany_ knowing not the use of money, till they mixed with
+the _Romans_. In the Preface also to the _Salique_ laws, written and
+prefixed to them soon after the conversion of the _Franks_ to the Christian
+religion, that is, in the end of the reign of _Merov�us_, or soon after,
+the original of this kingdom is thus described: _H�c enim gens, qu� fortis
+dum esset & robore valida, Romanorum jugum durissimum de suis cervicibus
+excussit pugnando_, &c. This kingdom therefore was erected, not by invasion
+but by rebellion, as was described above. _Prosper_ in registering their
+Kings in order, tells us: _Pharamundus regnat in Francia; Clodio regnat in
+Francia; Merov�us regnat in Francia_: and who can imagine but that in all
+these places he meant one and the same _Francia_? And yet 'tis certain that
+the _Francia_ of _Merov�us_ was in _Gallia_.
+
+Yet the father of _Pharamond_, being king of a body of _Franks_ in
+_Germany_ in the reign of the Emperor _Theodosius_, as above, _Pharamond_
+might reign over the same _Franks_ in _Germany_ before he succeeded
+_Theudomir_ in the kingdom of the _Salians_ within the Empire, and even
+before _Theudomir_ began his reign; suppose in the first year of
+_Honorius_, or when those _Franks_ being repulsed by _Stilico_, lost their
+Kings _Marcomir_ and _Suno_, one of which was the father of _Pharamond_:
+and the _Roman Franks_, after the death of _Theudomir_, might invite
+_Pharamond_ with his people from beyond the _Rhine_. But we are not to
+regard the reign of _Pharamond_ in _Germany_: we are to date this kingdom
+from its rise within the Empire, and to look upon it as strengthened by the
+access of other _Franks_ coming from beyond the _Rhine_, whether in the
+reign of this King or in that of his successor _Clodio_. For in the last
+year of _Pharamond_'s reign, _�tius_ took from him a part of his possession
+in _Gallia_: but his successor _Clodio_, whom _Fredigarius_ represents as
+the son of _Theudomir_, and some call _Clogio_, _Cloio_, and _Claudius_,
+inviting from beyond the _Rhine_ a great body of _Franks_, recovered all,
+and carried on their conquests as far as the river _Soame_. Then those
+_Franks_ dividing conquests with him, erected certain new kingdoms at
+_Cologn_ and _Cambray_, and some other cities: all which were afterwards
+conquered by _Clodov�us_, who also drove the _Goths_ out of _Gallia_, and
+fix'd his seat at _Paris_, where it has continued ever since. And this was
+the original of the present kingdom of _France_.
+
+7. The Kings of _Britain_ were, A.C. 407 or 408, _Marcus_, _Gratian_, and
+_Constantine_ successively; A.C. 425 _Vortigern_, 466 _Aurelius Ambrosius_,
+498 _Uther Pendraco_, 508 _Arthur_, 542 _Constantinus_, 545 _Aurelius
+Cunanus_, 578 _Vortiporeus_, 581 _Malgo_, 586 _Careticus_, 613 _Cadwan_,
+635 _Cadwalin_, 676 _Cadwallader_. The three first were _Roman_ Tyrants,
+who revolted from the Empire. _Orosius_, _Prosper_ and _Zosimus_ connect
+their revolt with the irruptions of the _Barbarians_ into _Gallia_, as
+consequent thereunto. _Prosper_, with whom _Zosimus_ agrees, puts it in the
+year which began the day after that irruption. The just time I thus
+collect: _Marcus_ reigned not many days, _Gratian_ four months, and
+_Constantine_ three years. He was slain the year after the taking of
+_Rome_, that is A.C. 411, 14 Kal. _Octob._ Whence the revolt was in Spring
+A.C. 408. _Sozomen_ joins _Constantine_'s expedition into _Gallia_ with
+_Arcadius_'s death, or the times a little after; and _Arcadius_ died A.C.
+408 _May_ the 1st. Now tho the reign of these Tyrants was but short, yet
+they gave a beginning to the kingdom of _Britain_, and so may be reckoned
+the three first Kings, especially since the posterity of _Constantine_,
+viz. his sons _Aurelius Ambrosius_, and _Uther Pendraco_, and his grandson
+_Arthur_, reigned afterwards. For from the time of the revolt of these
+Tyrants _Britain_ continued a distict kingdom absolved from subjection to
+the Empire, the Emperor not being able to spare soldiers to be sent thither
+to receive and keep the Island, and therefore neglecting it; as we learn by
+unquestionable records. For _Prosper_ tells us; _A.C._ 410, _Variane Cos.
+Hac tempestate pr� valetudine Romanorum, vires fundit�s attenuat�
+Britanni�_. And _Sigebert_, conjoining this with the siege of _Rome_,
+saith: _Britannorum vires attenuat�, & substrahunt se � Romanorum
+dominatione_. And _Zosimus_ _lib._ 6. _The _Transrhenane Barbarians_
+invading all places, reduced the inhabitants of the island of _Britain_,
+and also certain _Celtic_ nations to that pass, that they fell off from the
+_Roman_ Empire; and being no longer obedient to the _Roman_ laws_, [Greek:
+kat' heauton biateuein], _they lived in separate bodies after their own
+pleasure. The _Britons_ therefore taking up arms, and hazarding themselves
+for their own safety, freed their cities from the imminent _Barbarians_. In
+like manner all _Brabant_ and some other Provinces of the _Gauls_ imitating
+the _Britons_, freed themselves also, ejecting the _Roman_ Presidents, and
+forming themselves into a sort of commonwealth according to their own
+pleasure. This rebellion of _Britain_ and the _Celtic_ nations happened
+when _Constantine_ usurped the kingdom_. So also _Procopius_, _lib._ 1.
+_Vandal._ speaking of the same _Constantine_, saith: Constantine _being
+overcome in battle, was slain with his children:_ [Greek: Bretannian men
+toi R�maioi anas�sasthai ouketi echon; all' ousa hypo tyrannous ap' autou
+emene.] _Yet the _Romans_ could not recover _Britain_ any more, but from
+that time it remained under Tyrants_. And _Beda_, l. 1. _c._ 11. _Fracta
+est Roma � Gothis anno 1164 su� conditionis; ex quo tempore Romani in
+Britannia regnare cessaverunt_. And _Ethelwaldus_: _A tempore Rom� � Gothis
+expugnat�, cessavit imperium Romanorum � Britannia insula, & ab aliis; quas
+sub jugo servitutis tenebant, multis terris_. And _Theodoret_, _serm._ 9.
+_de curand. Gr�c. affect_. about the year 424, reckons the _Britons_ among
+the nations which were not then in subjection to the _Roman_ Empire. Thus
+_Sigonius_: _ad annum 411, Imperium Romanorum post excessum Constantini in
+Britannia nullum fuit_.
+
+Between the death of _Constantine_ and the reign of _Vortigern_ was an
+interregnum of about 14 years, in which the _Britons_ had wars with the
+_Picts_ and _Scots_, and twice obtained the assistance of a _Roman_ Legion,
+who drove out the enemy, but told them positively at their departure that
+they would come no more. Of _Vortigern_'s beginning to reign there is this
+record in an old Chronicle in _Nennius_, quoted by _Camden_ and others:
+_Guortigernus tenuit imperium in Britannia, Theodosio & Valentiniano Coss._
+[viz. A.C. 425.] _& in quarto anno regni sui Saxones ad Britanniam
+venerunt, Felice & Tauro Coss._ [viz. A.C. 428.] This coming of the
+_Saxons_, _Sigebert_ refers to the 4th year of _Valentinian_, which falls
+in with the year 428 assigned by this Chronicle: and two years after, the
+_Saxons_ together with the _Picts_ were beaten by the _Britons_. Afterwards
+in the reign of _Martian_ the Emperor, that is, between the years 450 and
+456, the _Saxons_ under _Hengist_ were called in by the _Britons_, but six
+years after revolted from them, made war upon them with various success,
+and by degrees succeeded them. Yet the _Britons_ continued a flourishing
+kingdom till the reign of _Careticus_; and the war between the two nations
+continued till the pontificate of _Sergius_ A.C. 688.[2]
+
+8. The Kings of the _Hunns_ were, A.C. 406 _Octar_ and _Rugila_, 433
+_Bleda_ and _Attila_. _Octar_ and _Rugila_ were the brothers of _Munzuc_
+King of the _Hunns_ in _Gothia_ beyond the _Danube_; and _Bleda_ and
+_Attila_ were his sons, and _Munzuc_ was the son of _Balamir_. The two
+first, as _Jornandes_ tells us, were Kings of the _Hunns_, but not of them
+all; and had the two last for their successors. I date the reign of the
+_Hunns_ in _Pannonia_ from the time that the _Vandals_ and _Alans_
+relinquished _Pannonia_ to them, A.C. 407. _Sigonius_ from the time that
+the _Visigoths_ relinquished _Pannonia_ A. C. 408. _Constat_, saith he,
+_quod Gothis ex Illyrico profectis, Hunni successerunt, atque imprimis
+Pannoniam tenuerunt. Neque enim Honorius viribus ad resistendum in tantis
+difficultatibus destitutus, prorsus eos prohibere potuit, sed meliore
+consilio, animo ad pacem converso, foedus cum eis, datis acceptisque
+obsidibus fecit; ex quibus qui dati sunt, �tius, qui etiam Alarico tributus
+fuerat, pr�cipue memoratur_. How _�tius_ was hostage to the _Goths_ and
+_Hunns_ is related by _Frigeridus_, who when he had mentioned that
+_Theodosius_ Emperor of the _East_ had sent grievous commands to _John_,
+who after the death of _Honorius_ had usurped the crown of the _Western
+Empire_, he subjoins: _Iis permotus Johannes, �tium id tempus curam palatii
+gerentem cum ingenti auri pondere ad Chunnos transmisit, notos sibi
+obsidiat�s sui tempore & familiari amiciti� devinctos_--And a little
+after: _�tius tribus annis Alarici obses, dehinc Chunnorum, postea
+Carpilionis gener ex Comite domesticorum & Joannis curopalat�._ Now
+_Bucher_ shews that _�tius_ was hostage to _Alaric_ till the year 410, when
+_Alaric_ died, and to the _Hunns_ between the years 411 and 415, and
+son-in-law to _Carpilio_ about the year 417 or 418, and _Curopalates_ to
+_John_ about the end of the year 423. Whence 'tis probable that he became
+hostage to the _Hunns_ about the year 412 or 413, when _Honorius_ made
+leagues with almost all the barbarous nations, and granted them seats: but
+I had rather say with _Sigonius_, that _�tius_ became hostage to _Alaric_
+A.C. 403. It is further manifest out of _Prosper_, that the _Hunns_ were in
+quiet possession of _Pannonia_ in the year 432. For in the first book of
+_Eusebius_'s Chronicle _Prosper_ writes: _Anno decimo post obitum Honorii,
+cum ad Chunnorum gentem cui tunc Rugila pr�erat, post pr�lium cum Bonifacio
+se �tius contulisset, impetrato auxilio ad Romanorum solum regreditur._ And
+in the second book: _�tio & Valerio Coss. �tius deposit� potestate profugus
+ad Hunnos in Pannonia pervenit, quorum amiciti� auxilioque usus, pacem
+principum interpellat� potestatis obtinuit._ Hereby it appears that at this
+time _Rugila_, or as _Maximus_ calls him, _Rechilla_, reigned over the
+_Hunns_ in _Pannonia_; and that _Pannonia_ was not now so much as accounted
+within the soil of the Empire, being formerly granted away to the _Hunns_;
+and that these were the very same body of _Hunns_ with which _�tius_ had,
+in the time of his being an hostage, contracted friendship: by virtue of
+which, as he sollicited them before to the aid of _John_ the Tyrant A.C.
+424, so now he procured their intercession for himself with the Emperor.
+_Octar_ died A.C. 430; for _Socrates_ tells us, that about that time the
+_Burgundians_ having been newly vext by the _Hunns_, upon intelligence of
+_Octar_'s death, seeing them without a leader, set upon them suddenly with
+so much vigour, that 3000 _Burgundians_ slew 10000 _Hunns_. Of _Rugila_'s
+being now King in _Pannonia_ you have heard already. He died A.C. 433, and
+was succeeded by _Bleda_, as _Prosper_ and _Maximus_ inform us. This
+_Bleda_ with his brother _Attila_ were before this time Kings of the
+_Hunns_ beyond the _Danube_, their father _Munzuc_'s kingdom being divided
+between them; and now they united the kingdom _Pannonia_ to their own.
+Whence _Paulus Diaconus_ saith, they did _regnum intra Pannoniam Daciamque
+gerere_. In the year 441, they began to invade the Empire afresh, adding to
+the _Pannonian_ forces new and great armies from _Scythia_. But this war
+was presently composed, and then _Attila_, seeing _Bleda_ inclined to
+peace, slew him, A.C. 444, inherited his dominions, and invaded the Empire
+again. At length, after various great wars with the _Romans_, _Attila_
+perished A.C. 454; and his sons quarrelling about his dominions, gave
+occasion to the _Gepides_, _Ostrogoths_ and other nations who were their
+subjects, to rebel and make war upon them. The same year the _Ostrogoths_
+had seats granted them in _Pannonia_ by the Emperors _Marcian_ and
+_Valentinian_; and with the _Romans_ ejected the _Hunns_ out of _Pannonia_,
+soon after the death of _Attila_, as all historians agree. This ejection
+was in the reign of _Avitus_, as is mentioned in the _Chronicum Boiorum_,
+and in _Sidonius, Carm. 7 in Avitum_, which speaks thus of that Emperor.
+
+  ----_Cujus solum amissas post s�cula multa_
+  _Pannonias revocavit iter, jam credere promptum est._
+  _Quid faciet bellis._
+
+The Poet means, that by the coming of _Avitus_ the _Hunns_ yielded more
+easily to the _Goths_. This was written by _Sidonius_ in the beginning of
+the reign of _Avitus_: and his reign began in the end of the year 455, and
+lasted not one full year.
+
+_Jornandes_ tells us: _Duodecimo anno regni Vali�, quando & Hunni post pene
+quinquaginta annos invasa Pannonia, � Romanis & Gothis expulsi sunt._ And
+_Marcellinus_: _Hierio & Ardaburio Coss. Pannoni�, qu� per quinquaginta
+annos ab Hunnis retinebantur, � Romanis recept� sunt_: whence it should
+seem that the _Hunns_ invaded and held _Pannonia_ from the year 378 or 379
+to the year 427, and then were driven out of it. But this is a plain
+mistake: for it is certain that the Emperor _Theodosius_ left the Empire
+entire; and we have shewed out of _Prosper_, that the _Hunns_ were in quiet
+possession of _Pannonia_ in the year 432. The _Visigoths_ in those days had
+nothing to do with _Pannonia_, and the _Ostrogoths_ continued subject to
+the _Hunns_ till the death of _Attila_, A.C. 454; and _Valia_ King of the
+_Visigoths_ did not reign twelve years. He began his reign in the end of
+the year 415, reigned three years, and was slain A.C. 419, as _Idacius_,
+_Isidorus_, and the _Spanish_ manuscript Chronicles seen by _Grotius_
+testify. And _Olympiodorus_, who carries his history only to the year 425,
+sets down therein the death of _Valia_ King of the _Visigoths_, and
+conjoins it with that of _Constantius_ which happened A.C. 420. Wherefore
+the _Valia_ of _Jornandes_, who reigned at the least twelve years, is some
+other King. And I suspect that this name hath been put by mistake for
+_Valamir_ King of the _Ostrogoths_: for the action recorded was of the
+_Romans_ and _Ostrogoths_ driving the _Hunns_ out of _Pannonia_ after the
+death of _Attila_; and it is not likely that the historian would refer the
+history of the _Ostrogoths_ to the years of the _Visigothic_ Kings. This
+action happened in the end of the year 455, which I take to be the twelfth
+year of _Valamir_ in _Pannonia_, and which was almost fifty years after the
+year 406, in which the _Hunns_ succeeded the _Vandals_ and _Alans_ in
+_Pannonia_. Upon the ceasing of the line of _Hunnimund_ the son of
+_Hermaneric_, the _Ostrogoths_ lived without Kings of their own nation
+about forty years together, being subject to the _Hunns_. And when _Alaric_
+began to make war upon the _Romans_, which was in the year 444, he made
+_Valamir_, with his brothers _Theodomir_ and _Videmir_ the grandsons of
+_Vinethar_, captains or kings of these _Ostrogoths_ under him. In the
+twelfth year of _Valamir_'s reign dated from thence, the _Hunns_ were
+driven out of _Pannonia_.
+
+Yet the _Hunns_ were not so ejected, but that they had further contests
+with the _Romans_, till the head of _Denfix_ the son of _Attila_, was
+carried to _Constantinople_, A.C. 469, in the Consulship of _Zeno_ and
+_Marcian_, as _Marcellinus_ relates. Nor were they yet totally ejected the
+Empire: for besides their reliques in _Pannonia_, _Sigonius_ tells us, that
+when the Emperors _Marcian_ and _Valentinian_ granted _Pannonia_ to the
+_Goths_, which was in the year 454, they granted part of _Illyricum_ to
+some of the _Hunns_ and _Sarmatians_. And in the year 526, when the
+_Lombards_ removing into _Pannonia_ made war there with the _Gepides_, the
+_Avares_, a part of the _Hunns_, who had taken the name of _Avares_ from
+one of their Kings, assisted the _Lombards_ in that war; and the _Lombards_
+afterwards, when they went into _Italy_, left their seats in _Pannonia_ to
+the _Avares_ in recompence of their friendship. From that time the _Hunns_
+grew again very powerful; their Kings, whom they called _Chagan_, troubling
+the Empire much in the reigns of the Emperors _Mauritius_, _Phocas_, and
+_Heraclius_: and this is the original of the present kingdom of _Hungary_,
+which from these _Avares_ and other _Hunns_ mixed together, took the name
+of _Hun-Avaria_, and by contraction _Hungary_.
+
+9. The _Lombards_, before they came over the _Danube_, were commanded by
+two captains, _Ibor_ and _Ayon_: after whose death they had Kings,
+_Agilmund_, _Lamisso_, _Lechu_, _Hildehoc_, _Gudehoc_, _Classo_, _Tato_,
+_Wacho_, _Walter_, _Audoin_, _Alboin_, _Cleophis_, &c. _Agilmund_ was the
+son of _Ayon_, who became their King, according to _Prosper_, in the
+Consulship of _Honorius_ and _Theodosius_ A.C. 389, reigned thirty three
+years, according to _Paulus Warnefridus_, and was slain in battle by the
+_Bulgarians_. _Prosper_ places his death in the Consulship of _Marinianus_
+and _Asclepiodorus_, A.C. 413. _Lamisso_ routed the _Bulgarians_, and
+reigned three years, and _Lechu_ almost forty. _Gudehoc_ was contemporary
+to _Odoacer_ King of the _Heruli_ in _Italy_, and led his people from
+_Pannonia_ into _Rugia_, a country on the north side of _Noricum_ next
+beyond the _Danube_; from whence _Odoacer_ then carried his people into
+_Italy_. _Tato_ overthrew the kingdom of the _Heruli_ beyond the _Danube_.
+_Wacho_ conquered the _Suevians_, a kingdom then bounded on the east by
+_Bavaria_, on the west by _France_, and on the south by the _Burgundians_.
+_Audoin_ returned into _Pannonia_ A.C. 526, and there overcame the
+_Gepides_. _Alboin_ A.C. 551 overthrew the kingdom of the _Gepides_, and
+slew their King _Chunnimund_: A.C. 563 he assisted the _Greek_ Emperor
+against _Totila_ King of the _Ostrogoths_ in _Italy_; and A.C. 568 led his
+people out of _Pannonia_ into _Lombardy_, where they reigned till the year
+774.
+
+According to _Paulus Diaconus_, the _Lombards_ with many other _Gothic_
+nations came into the Empire from beyond the _Danube_ in the reign of
+_Arcadius_ and _Honorius_, that is, between the years 395 and 408. But they
+might come in a little earlier: for we are told that the _Lombards_, under
+their captains _Ibor_ and _Ayon_, beat the _Vandals_ in battle; and
+_Prosper_ placeth this victory in the Consulship of _Ausonius_ and
+_Olybrius_, that is, A.C. 379. Before this war the _Vandals_ had remained
+quiet forty years in the seats granted them in _Pannonia_ by _Constantine_
+the great. And therefore if these were the same _Vandals_, this war must
+have been in _Pannonia_; and might be occasioned by the coming of the
+_Lombards_ over the _Danube_ into _Pannonia_, a year or two before the
+battle; and so have put an end to that quiet which had lasted forty years.
+After _Gratian_ and _Theodosius_ had quieted the _Barbarians_, they might
+either retire over the _Danube_, or continue quiet under the _Romans_ till
+the death of _Theodosius_; and then either invade the Empire anew, or throw
+off all subjection to it. By their wars, first with the _Vandals_, and then
+with the _Bulgarians_, a _Scythian_ nation so called from the river _Volga_
+whence they came; it appears that even in those days they were a kingdom
+not contemptible.
+
+10. These nine kingdoms being rent away, we are next to consider the
+residue of the _Western Empire_. While this Empire continued entire, it was
+the Beast itself: but the residue thereof is only a part of it. Now if this
+part be considered as a horn, the reign of this horn may be dated from the
+translation of the imperial seat from _Rome_ to _Ravenna_, which was in
+_October_ A.C. 408. For then the Emperor _Honorius_, fearing that _Alaric_
+would besiege him in _Rome_, if he staid there, retired to _Millain_, and
+thence to _Ravenna_: and the ensuing siege and sacking of _Rome_ confirmed
+his residence there, so that he and his successors ever after made it their
+home. Accordingly _Macchiavel_ in his _Florentine_ history writes, that
+_Valentinian_ having left _Rome_, translated the seat of the Empire to
+_Ravenna_.
+
+_Rh�tia_ belonged to the _Western_ Emperors, so long as that Empire stood;
+and then it descended, with _Italy_ and the _Roman_ Senate, to _Odoacer_
+King of the _Heruli_ in _Italy_, and after him to _Theoderic_ King of the
+_Ostrogoths_ and his successors, by the grant of the _Greek_ Emperors. Upon
+the death of _Valentinian_ the second, the _Alemans_ and _Suevians_ invaded
+_Rh�tia_ A.C. 455. But I do not find they erected any settled kingdom
+there: for in the year 457, while they were yet depopulating _Rh�tia_, they
+were attacked and beaten by _Burto_ Master of the horse to the Emperor
+_Majoranus_; and I hear nothing more of their invading _Rh�tia_.
+_Clodov�us_ King of _France_, in or about the year 496, conquered a kingdom
+of the _Alemans_, and slew their last King _Ermeric_. But this kingdom was
+seated in _Germany_, and only bordered upon _Rh�tia_: for its people fled
+from _Clodov�us_ into the neighbouring kingdom of the _Ostrogoths_ under
+_Theoderic_, who received them as friends, and wrote a friendly letter to
+_Clodov�us_ in their behalf: and by this means they became inhabitants of
+_Rh�tia_, as subjects under the dominion of the _Ostrogoths_.
+
+When the _Greek_ Emperor conquered the _Ostrogoths_, he succeeded them in
+the kingdom of _Ravenna_, not only by right of conquest but also by right
+of inheritance, the _Roman_ Senate still going along with this kingdom.
+Therefore we may reckon that this kingdom continued in the Exarchate of
+_Ravenna_ and Senate of _Rome_: for the remainder of the _Western Empire_
+went along with the Senate of _Rome_, by reason of the right which this
+Senate still retained, and at length exerted, of chusing a new _Western_
+Emperor.
+
+I have now enumerated the ten kingdoms, into which the _Western Empire_
+became divided at its first breaking, that is, at the time of _Rome_'s
+being besieged and taken by the _Goths_. Some of these kingdoms at length
+fell, and new ones arose: but whatever was their number afterwards, they
+are still called the _Ten Kings_ from their first number.
+
+Notes to Chap. VI.
+
+[1] Apud Bucherum, l. 14. c. 9. n. 8.
+
+[2] Rolevinc's Antiqua Saxon. l. 1. c. 6.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. VII.
+
+_Of the eleventh horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast._
+
+[1]_Now Daniel, considered the horns, and behold there came up among them
+another horn, before whom there were three of the first horns pluckt up by
+the roots; and behold in this horn were eyes like the eyes of a man, and a
+mouth speaking great things,_--and [2] his _look was more stout than his
+fellows,--and the same horn made war with the saints, and prevailed against
+them_: and one who stood by, and made _Daniel_ know the interpretation of
+these things, told him, that [3] _the ten horns were ten kings that should
+arise, and another should arise after them, and be diverse from the first,
+and he should subdue three kings,_ [4] _and speak great words against the
+most High, and wear out the saints, and think to change times and laws: and
+that they should be given into his hands until a time and times and half a
+time_. Kings are put for kingdoms, as above; and therefore the little horn
+is a little kingdom. It was a horn of the fourth Beast, and rooted up three
+of his first horns; and therefore we are to look for it among the nations
+of the _Latin_ Empire, after the rise of the ten horns. But it was a
+kingdom of a different kind from the other ten kingdoms, having a life or
+soul peculiar to itself, with eyes and a mouth. By its eyes it was a Seer;
+and by its mouth speaking great things and changing times and laws, it was
+a Prophet as well as a King. And such a Seer, a Prophet and a King, is the
+Church of _Rome_.
+
+A Seer, [Greek: Episkopos], is a Bishop in the literal sense of the word;
+and this Church claims the universal Bishoprick.
+
+With his mouth he gives laws to kings and nations as an Oracle; and
+pretends to Infallibility, and that his dictates are binding to the whole
+world; which is to be a Prophet in the highest degree.
+
+In the eighth century, by rooting up and subduing the Exarchate of
+_Ravenna_, the kingdom of the _Lombards_, and the Senate and Dukedom of
+_Rome_, he acquired _Peter_'s Patrimony out of their dominions; and thereby
+rose up as a temporal Prince or King, or horn of the fourth Beast.
+
+In a small book printed at _Paris_ A.C. 1689, entitled, _An historical
+dissertation upon some coins of _Charles_ the great, _Ludovicus Pius_,
+_Lotharius_, and their successors stamped at _Rome__, it is recorded, that
+in the days of Pope _Leo_ X, there was remaining in the _Vatican_, and till
+those days exposed to public view, an inscription in honour of _Pipin_ the
+father of _Charles_ the great, in these words: _Pipinum pium, primum fuisse
+qui amplificand� Ecclesi� Roman� viam aperuerit, Exarchatu Ravennate, &
+plurimis aliis oblatis_; "That _Pipin_ the pious was the first who opened a
+way to the grandeur of the Church of _Rome_, conferring upon her the
+Exarchate of _Ravenna_ and many other oblations." In and before the reign
+of the Emperors _Gratian_ and _Theodosius_, the Bishop of _Rome_ lived
+splendidly; but this was by the oblations of the _Roman_ Ladies, as
+_Ammianus_ describes. After those reigns _Italy_ was invaded by foreign
+nations, and did not get rid of her troubles before the fall of the kingdom
+of _Lombardy_. It was certainly by the victory of the see of _Rome_ over
+the _Greek_ Emperor, the King of _Lombardy_, and the Senate of _Rome_, that
+she acquired _Peter_'s Patrimony, and rose up to her greatness. The
+donation of _Constantine_ the Great is a fiction, and so is the donation of
+the _Alpes Cotti�_ to the Pope by _Aripert_ King of the _Lombards_: for the
+_Alpes Cotti�_ were a part of the Exarchate, and in the days of _Aripert_
+belonged to the _Greek_ Emperor.
+
+The invocation of the dead, and veneration of their images, being gradually
+introduced in the 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th centuries, the _Greek_ Emperor
+_Philippicus_ declared against the latter, A.C. 711 or 712. And [5] the
+Emperor _Leo Isaurus_, to put a stop to it, called a meeting of Counsellors
+and Bishops in his Palace, A.C. 726; and by their advice put out an Edict
+against that worship, and wrote to Pope _Gregory_ II. that a general
+Council might be called. But the Pope thereupon called a Council at _Rome_,
+confirmed the worship of Images, excommunicated the _Greek_ Emperor,
+absolved the people from their allegiance, and forbad them to pay tribute,
+or otherwise be obedient to him. Then the people of _Rome_, _Campania_,
+_Ravenna_ and _Pentapolis_, with the cities under them, revolted and laid
+violent hands upon their magistrates, killing the Exarch _Paul_ at
+_Ravenna_, and laying aside _Peter_ Duke of _Rome_ who was become blind:
+and when _Exhileratus_ Duke of _Campania_ incited the people against the
+Pope, the _Romans_ invaded _Campania_, and slew him with his son _Hadrian_.
+Then a new Exarch, _Eutychius_, coming to _Naples_, sent some secretly to
+take away the lives of the Pope and the Nobles of _Rome_: but the plot
+being discovered, the _Romans_ revolted absolutely from the _Greek_
+Emperor, and took an oath to preserve the life of the Pope, to defend his
+state, and be obedient to his authority in all things. Thus _Rome_ with its
+Duchy, including part of _Tuscany_ and part of _Campania_, revolted in the
+year 726, and became a free state under the government of the Senate of
+this city. The authority of the Senate in civil affairs was henceforward
+absolute, the authority of the Pope extending hitherto no farther than to
+the affairs of the Church only.
+
+At that time [6] the _Lombards_ also being zealous for the worship of
+images, and pretending to favour the cause of the Pope, invaded the cities
+of the Exarchate: and at length, viz. A.C. 752, took _Ravenna_, and put an
+end to the Exarchate. And this was the first of the three kingdoms which
+fell before the little horn.
+
+In the year 751 [7] Pope _Zechary_ deposed _Childeric_, a slothful and
+useless King of _France_, and the last of the race of _Merov�us_; and
+absolving his subjects from their oath of allegiance, gave the kingdom to
+_Pipin_ the major of the Palace; and thereby made a new and potent friend.
+His successor [8] Pope _Stephen_ III, knowing better how to deal with the
+_Greek_ Emperor than with the _Lombards_, went the next year to the King of
+the _Lombards_, to persuade him to return the Exarchate to the Emperor. But
+this not succeeding, he went into _France_, and persuaded _Pipin_ to take
+the Exarchate and _Pentapolis_ from the _Lombards_, and give it to St.
+_Peter_. Accordingly _Pipin_ A.C. 754 came with an army into _Italy_, and
+made _Aistulphus_ King of the _Lombards_ promise the surrender: but the
+next year _Aistulphus_, on the contrary, to revenge himself on the Pope,
+besieged the city of _Rome_. Whereupon the Pope sent letters to _Pipin_,
+wherein he told him that if he came not speedily against the _Lombards_,
+_pro data sibi potentia, alienandum fore � regno Dei & vita �terna_, he
+should be excommunicated. _Pipin_ therefore, fearing a revolt of his
+subjects, and being indebted to the Church of _Rome_, came speedily with an
+army into _Italy_, raised the siege, besieged the _Lombards_ in _Pavia_,
+and forced them to surrender the Exarchate and region of _Pentapolis_ to
+the Pope for a perpetual possession. Thus the Pope became Lord of
+_Ravenna_, and the Exarchate, some few cities excepted; and the keys were
+sent to _Rome_, and laid upon the confession of St. _Peter_, that is, upon
+his tomb at the high Altar, _in signum veri perpetuique dominii, sed
+pietate Regis gratuita_, as the inscription of a coin of _Pipin_ hath it.
+This was in the year of Christ 755. And henceforward the Popes being
+temporal Princes, left off in their Epistles and Bulls to note the years of
+the _Greek_ Emperors, as they had hitherto done.
+
+After this [9] the _Lombards_ invading the Pope's countries, Pope _Adrian_
+sent to _Charles_ the great, the son and successor of _Pipin_, to come to
+his assistance. Accordingly _Charles_ entered _Italy_ with an army, invaded
+the _Lombards_, overthrew their kingdom, became master of their countries,
+and restored to the Pope, not only what they had taken from him, but also
+the rest of the Exarchate which they had promised _Pipin_ to surrender to
+him, but had hitherto detained; and also gave him some cities of the
+_Lombards_, and was in return himself made _Patricius_ by the _Romans_, and
+had the authority of confirming the elections of the Popes conferred upon
+him. These things were done in the years 773 and 774. This kingdom of the
+_Lombards_ was the second kingdom which fell before the little horn. But
+_Rome_, which was to be the seat of his kingdom, was not yet his own.
+
+In the year 796, [10] _Leo_ III being made Pope, notified his election to
+_Charles_ the great by his Legates, sending to him for a present, the
+golden keys of the Confession of _Peter_, and the Banner of the city of
+_Rome_: the first as an acknowledgment of the Pope's holding the cities of
+the Exarchate and _Lombardy_ by the grant of _Charles_; the other as a
+signification that _Charles_ should come and subdue the Senate and people
+of _Rome_, as he had done the Exarchate and the kingdom of the _Lombards_.
+For the Pope at the same time desired _Charles_ to send some of his Princes
+to _Rome_, who might subject the _Roman_ people to him, and bind them by
+oath _in fide & subjectione_, in fealty and subjection, as his words are
+recited by _Sigonius_. An anonymous Poet, publish'd by _Boeclerus_ at
+_Strasburg_, expresseth it thus:
+
+  _Admonuitque piis precibus, qui mittere vellet_
+  _Ex propriis aliquos primoribus, ac sibi plebem_
+  _Subdere Romanam, servandaque foedera cogens_
+  _Hanc fidei sacramentis promittere magnis_.
+
+Hence arose a misunderstanding between the Pope and the city: and the
+_Romans_ about two or three years after, by assistance of some of the
+Clergy, raised such tumults against him, as gave occasion to a new state of
+things in all the _West_. For two of the Clergy accused him of crimes, and
+the _Romans_ with an armed force, seized him, stript him of his sacerdotal
+habit, and imprisoned him in a monastery. But by assistance of his friends
+he made his escape, and fled into _Germany_ to _Charles_ the great, to whom
+he complained of the _Romans_ for acting against him out of a design to
+throw off all authority of the Church, and to recover their antient
+freedom. In his absence his accusers with their forces ravaged the
+possessions of the Church, and sent the accusations to _Charles_; who
+before the end of the year sent the Pope back to _Rome_ with a large
+retinue. The Nobles and Bishops of _France_ who accompanied him, examined
+the chief of his accusers at _Rome_, and sent them into _France_ in
+custody. This was in the year 799. The next year _Charles_ himself went to
+_Rome_, and upon a day appointed presided in a Council of _Italian_ and
+_French_ Bishops to hear both parties. But when the Pope's adversaries
+expected to be heard, the Council declared [11] that he who was the supreme
+judge of all men, was above being judged by any other than himself:
+whereupon he made a solemn declaration of his innocence before all the
+people, and by doing so was looked upon as acquitted.
+
+Soon after, upon _Christmas_-day, the people of _Rome_, who had hitherto
+elected their Bishop, and reckoned that they and their Senate inherited the
+rights of the antient Senate and people of _Rome_, voted _Charles_ their
+Emperor, and subjected themselves to him in such manner as the old _Roman_
+Empire and their Senate were subjected to the old _Roman_ Emperors. The
+Pope crowned him, and anointed him with holy oil, and worshipped him on his
+knees after the manner of adoring the old _Roman_ Emperors; as the
+aforesaid Poet thus relates:
+
+  _Post laudes igitur dictas & summus eundem_
+  _Pr�sul adoravit, sicut mos debitus olim_
+  _Principibus fuit antiquis_.
+
+The Emperor, on the other hand, took the following oath to the Pope: _In
+nomine Christi spondeo atque polliceor, Ego Carolus Imperator coram Deo &
+beato Petro Apostolo, me protectorem ac defensorem fore hujus sanct� Roman�
+Ecclesi� in omnibus utilitatibus, quaten�s divino fultus fuero adjutorio,
+prout sciero poteroque_. The Emperor was also made Consul of _Rome_, and
+his son _Pipin_ crowned King of _Italy_: and henceforward the Emperor
+stiled himself: _Carolus serenissimus, Augustus, � Deo coronatus, magnus,
+pacificus, Rom� gubernans imperium_, or _Imperator Romanorum_; and was
+prayed for in the Churches of _Rome_. His image was henceforward put upon
+the coins of _Rome_: while the enemies of the Pope, to the number of three
+hundred _Romans_ and two or three of the Clergy, were sentenced to death.
+The three hundred _Romans_ were beheaded in one day in the _Lateran_
+fields: but the Clergymen at the intercession of the Pope were pardoned,
+and banished into _France_. And thus the title of _Roman_ Emperor, which
+had hitherto been in the _Greek_ Emperors, was by this act transferred in
+the _West_ to the Kings of _France_.
+
+After these things [12] _Charles_ gave the City and Duchy of _Rome_ to the
+Pope, subordinately to himself as Emperor of the _Romans_; spent the winter
+in ordering the affairs of _Rome_, and those of the Apostolic see, and of
+all _Italy_, both civil and ecclesiastical, and in making new laws for
+them; and returned the next summer into _France_: leaving the city under
+its Senate, and both under the Pope and himself. But hearing that his new
+laws were not observed by the judges in dictating the law, nor by the
+people in hearing it; and that the great men took servants from free men,
+and from the Churches and Monasteries, to labour in their vineyards,
+fields, pastures and houses, and continued to exact cattle and wine of
+them, and to oppress those that served the Churches: he wrote to his son
+_Pipin_ to remedy these abuses, to take care of the Church, and see his
+laws executed.
+
+Now the Senate and people and principality of _Rome_ I take to be the third
+King the little horn overcame, and even the chief of the three. For this
+people elected the Pope and the Emperor; and now, by electing the Emperor
+and making him Consul, was acknowledged to retain the authority of the old
+_Roman_ Senate and people. This city was the Metropolis of the old _Roman_
+Empire, represented in _Daniel_ by the fourth Beast; and by subduing the
+Senate and people and Duchy, it became the Metropolis of the little horn of
+that Beast, and completed _Peter_'s Patrimony, which was the kingdom of
+that horn. Besides, this victory was attended with greater consequences
+than those over the other two Kings. For it set up the _Western Empire_,
+which continues to this day. It set up the Pope above the judicature of the
+_Roman_ Senate, and above that of a Council of _Italian_ and _French_
+Bishops, and even above all human judicature; and gave him the supremacy
+over the _Western_ Churches and their Councils in a high degree. It gave
+him _a look more stout than his fellows_; so that when this new religion
+began to be established in the minds of men, he grappled not only with
+Kings, but even with the _Western_ Emperor himself. It is observable also,
+that the custom of kissing the Pope's feet, an honour superior to that of
+Kings and Emperors, began about this time. There are some instances of it
+in the ninth century: _Platina_ tells us, that the feet of Pope _Leo_ IV
+were kissed, according to antient custom, by all who came to him: and some
+say that _Leo_ III began this custom, pretending that his hand was infected
+by the kiss of a woman. The Popes began also about this time to canonize
+saints, and to grant indulgences and pardons: and some represent that _Leo_
+III was the first author of all these things. It is further observable,
+that _Charles_ the great, between the years 775 and 796, conquered all
+_Germany_ from the _Rhine_ and _Danube_ northward to the _Baltic_ sea, and
+eastward to the river _Teis_; extending his conquests also into _Spain_ as
+far as the river _Ebro_: and by these conquests he laid the foundation of
+the new Empire; and at the same time propagated the _Roman_ Catholic
+religion into all his conquests, obliging the _Saxons_ and _Hunns_ who were
+heathens, to receive the _Roman_ faith, and distributing his northern
+conquests into Bishopricks, granting tithes to the Clergy and _Peter-pence_
+to the Pope: by all which the Church of _Rome_ was highly enlarged,
+enriched, exalted, and established.
+
+In the forementioned _dissertation upon some coins of _Charles_ the great,
+_Ludovicus Pius_, _Lotharius_, and their successors, stamped at _Rome__,
+there is a draught of a piece of _Mosaic_ work which Pope _Leo_ III. caused
+to be made in his Palace near the Church of _John Lateran_, in memory of
+his sending the standard or banner of the city of _Rome_ curiously wrought,
+to _Charles_ the great; and which still remained there at the publishing of
+the said book. In the _Mosaic_ work there appeared _Peter_ with three keys
+in his lap, reaching the _Pallium_ to the Pope with his right hand, and the
+banner of the city to _Charles_ the great with his left. By the Pope was
+this inscription, SCISSIMUS D.N. LEO PP; by the King this, D.N. CARVLO
+REGI; and under the feet of _Peter_ this, BEATE PETRE, DONA VITAM LEONI PP,
+ET BICTORIAM CARVLO REGI DONA. This Monument gives the title of King to
+_Charles_, and therefore was erected before he was Emperor. It was erected
+when _Peter_ was reaching the _Pallium_ to the Pope, and the Pope was
+sending the banner of the city to _Charles_, that is, A.C. 796. The words
+above, _Sanctissimus Dominus noster Leo Papa Domino nostro Carolo Regi_,
+relate to the message; and the words below, _Beate Petre, dona vitam Leoni
+Pap� & victoriam Carolo regi dona_, are a prayer that in this undertaking
+God would preserve the life of the Pope, and give victory to the King over
+the _Romans_. The three keys in the lap of _Peter_ signify the keys of the
+three parts of his Patrimony, that of _Rome_ with its Duchy, which the Pope
+claimed and was conquering, those of _Ravenna_ with the Exarchate, and of
+the territories taken from the _Lombards_; both which he had newly
+conquered. These were the three dominions, whose keys were in the lap of
+St. _Peter_, and whose Crowns are now worn by the Pope, and by the conquest
+of which he became the little horn of the fourth Beast. By _Peter_'s giving
+the _Pallium_ to the Pope with his right hand, and the banner of the city
+to the King with his left, and by naming the Pope before the King in the
+inscription, may be understood that the Pope was then reckoned superior in
+dignity to the Kings of the earth.
+
+After the death of _Charles_ the great, his son and successor _Ludovicus
+Pius_, at the request of the Pope, [13] confirmed the donations of his
+grandfather and father to the see of _Rome_. And in the confirmation he
+names first _Rome_ with its Duchy extending into _Tuscany_ and _Campania_;
+then the Exarchate of _Ravenna_, with _Pentapolis_; and in the third place,
+the territories taken from the _Lombards_. These are his three conquests,
+and he was to hold them of the Emperor for the use of the Church _sub
+integritate_, entirely, without the Emperor's medling therewith, or with
+the jurisdiction or power of the Pope therein, unless called thereto in
+certain cases. This ratification the Emperor _Ludovicus_ made under an
+oath: and as the King of the _Ostrogoths_, for acknowledging that he held
+his kingdom of _Italy_ of the _Greek_ Emperor, stamped the effigies of the
+Emperor on one side of his coins and his own on the reverse; so the Pope
+made the like acknowledgment to the _Western_ Emperor. For the Pope began
+now to coin money, and the coins of _Rome_ are henceforward found with the
+heads of the Emperors, _Charles_, _Ludovicus Pius_, _Lotharius_, and their
+successors, on the one side, and the Pope's inscription on the reverse, for
+many years.
+
+Notes to Chap. VII.
+
+[1] Chap. vii. 8.
+
+[2] Ver. 20, 21.
+
+[3] Ver. 24.
+
+[4] Ver. 25.
+
+[5] Sigonius de Regno Itali�, ad Ann. 726.
+
+[6] Sigonius ib. ad Ann. 726, 752.
+
+[7] Sigon. ib. Ann. 750.
+
+[8] Sigon. ib. Ann. 753, 754, 755.
+
+[9] Sigon. ib. Ann. 773.
+
+[10] Sigon. de Regno Ital. ad Ann. 796.
+
+[11] Vide Anastasium.
+
+[12] Sigon. de Regno Ital.
+
+[13] Confirmationem recitat Sigonius, lib. 4. de Regno Itali�, ad An. 817.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. VIII.
+
+_Of the power of the eleventh horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast, to change
+times and laws_.
+
+In the reign of the _Greek_ Emperor _Justinian_, and again in the reign of
+_Phocas_, the Bishop of _Rome_ obtained some dominion over the _Greek_
+Churches, but of no long continuance. His standing dominion was only over
+the nations of the _Western Empire_, represented by _Daniel_'s fourth
+Beast. And this jurisdiction was set up by the following Edict of the
+Emperors _Gratian_ and _Valentinian.--[1] Volumus ut quicunque judicio
+Damasi, quod ille cum Concilio quinque vel septem habuerit Episcoporum, vel
+eorum qui Catholici sunt judicio vel Concilio condemnatus fuerit, si juste
+voluerit Ecclesiam retentare, ut qui ad sacerdotale judicium per
+contumeliam non ivisset: ut ab illustribus viris Pr�fectis Pr�torio Galli�
+atque Itali�, authoritate adhibit�, ad Episcopale judicium remittatur, sive
+� Consularibus vel Vicariis, ut ad Urbem Romam sub prosecutione perveniat.
+Aut si in longinquioribus partibus alicujus ferocitas talis emerserit,
+omnis ejus caus� edictio ad Metropolit� in eadem Provincia Episcopi
+deduceretur examen. Vel si ipse Metropolitanus est, Romam necessari�, vel
+ad eos quos Romanus Episcopus judices dederit, sine delatione
+contendat.----Quod si vel Metropolitani Episcopi vel cujuscunque sacerdotis
+iniquitas est suspecta, aut gratia; ad Romanum Episcopum, vel ad Concilium
+quindecim finitimorum Episcoporum accersitum liceat provocare; modo ne post
+examen habitum, quod definitum fuerit, integretur_. This Edict wanting the
+name of both _Valens_ and _Theodosius_ in the Title, was made in the time
+between their reigns, that is, in the end of the year 378, or the beginning
+of 379. It was directed to the _Pr�fecti Pr�torio Itali� & Galli�_, and
+therefore was general. For the _Pr�fectus Pr�torio Itali�_ governed
+_Italy_, _Illyricum occidentale_ and _Africa_; and the _Pr�fectus Pr�torio
+Galli�_ governed _Gallia_, _Spain_, and _Britain_.
+
+The granting of this jurisdiction to the Pope gave several Bishops occasion
+to write to him for his resolutions upon doubtful cases, whereupon he
+answered by decretal Epistles; and henceforward he gave laws to the
+_Western_ Churches by such Epistles. _Himerius_ Bishop of _Tarraco_, the
+head city of a province in _Spain_, writing to Pope _Damasus_ for his
+direction about certain Ecclesiastical matters, and the Letter not arriving
+at _Rome_ till after the death of _Damasus_, A.C. 384; his successor
+_Siricius_ answered the same with a legislative authority, telling him of
+one thing: _Cum hoc fieri--missa ad Provincias � venerand� memori�
+pr�decessore meo Liberio generalia decreta, prohibeant_. Of another:
+_Noverint se ab omni ecclesiastico honore, quo indign� usi sunt, Apostolic�
+Sedis auctoritate, dejectos_. Of another: _Scituri posthac omnium
+Provinciarum summi Antistites, quod si ultr� ad sacros ordines quenquam de
+talibus esse assumendum, & de suo & de aliorum statu, quos contra Canones &
+interdicta nostra provexerint, congruam ab Apostolica Sede promendam esse
+sententiam_. And the Epistle he concludes thus: _Explicuimus, ut arbitror,
+frater charissime, universa qu� digesta sunt in querelam; & ad singulas
+causas, de quibus ad Romanam Ecclesiam, utpote ad caput tui corporis,
+retulisti; sufficientia, quantum opinor, responsa reddidimus. Nunc
+fraternitatis tu� animum ad servandos canones, & tenenda decretalia
+constituta, magis ac magis incitamus: ad h�c qu� ad tua consulta
+rescripsimus in omnium Coepiscoporum perferri facias notionem; & non solum
+corum, qui in tua sunt dioecesi constituti, sed etiam ad universos
+Carthaginenses ac Boeticos, Lusitanos atque [2] Gallicos, vel eos qui
+vicinis tibi collimitant hinc inde Provinciis, h�c qu� a nobis sunt salubri
+ordinatione disposita, sub literarum tuarum prosecutione mittantur. Et
+quanquam statuta sedis Apostolic� vel Canonum venerabilia definita, nulli
+Sacerdotum Domini ignorare sit liberum: utilius tamen, atque pro
+antiquitate sacerdotii tui, dilectioni tu� esse admod�m poterit gloriosum,
+si ea qu� ad te speciali nomine generaliter scripta sunt, per unanimitatis
+tu� sollicitudinem in universorum fratrum nostrorum notitiam perferantur;
+quatenus & qu� � nobis non inconsult� sed provid� sub nimia cautela &
+deliberatione sunt salubriter constituta, intemerata permaneant, & omnibus
+in posterum excusationibus aditus, qui jam nulli apud nos patere poterit,
+obstruatur. Dat. 3 Id. Febr. Arcadio & Bautone viris clarissimis
+Consulibus_, A.C. 385. Pope _Liberius_ in the reign of _Jovian_ or
+_Valentinian_ I. sent general Decrees to the Provinces, ordering that the
+_Arians_ should not be rebaptized: and this he did in favour of the Council
+of _Alexandria_, that nothing more should be required of them than to
+renounce their opinions. Pope _Damasus_ is said to have decreed in a
+_Roman_ Council, that _Tithes_ and _Tenths_ should be paid upon pain of an
+_Anathema_; and that _Glory be to the Father_, &c. should be said or sung
+at the end of the _Psalms_. But the first decretal Epistle now extant is
+this of _Siricius_ to _Himerius_; by which the Pope made _Himerius_ his
+Vicar over all _Spain_ for promulging his Decrees, and seeing them
+observed. The Bishop of _Sevill_ was also the Pope's Vicar sometimes; for
+_Simplicius_ wrote thus to _Zeno_ Bishop of that place: _Talibus idcirco
+gloriantes indiciis, congruum duximus vicari� Sedis nostr� te auctoritate
+fulciri: cujus vigore munitus, Apostolic� institutionis Decreta, vel
+sanctorum terminos Patrum, nullatenus transcendi permittas_. And Pope
+_Hormisda_ [3] made the Bishop of _Sevill_ his Vicar over _Boetica_ and
+_Lusitania_, and the Bishop of _Tarraco_ his Vicar over all the rest of
+_Spain_, as appears by his Epistles to them.
+
+Pope _Innocent_ the first, in his decretal Epistle to _Victricius_ Bishop
+of _Rouen_ in _France_, A.C. 404, in pursuance of the Edict of _Gratian_,
+made this Decree: _Si qu� autem caus� vel contentiones inter Clericos tam
+superioris ordinis quam etiam inferioris fuerint exort�; ut secundum
+Synodum Nicenam congregatis ejusdem Provinci� Episcopis jurgium terminetur:
+nec alicui liceat, [4] Roman� Ecclesi�, cujus in omnibus causis debet
+reverentia custodiri, relictis his sacerdotibus, qui in eadem Provincia Dei
+Ecclesiam nutu Divino gubernant, ad alias convolare Provincias. Quod siquis
+fort� pr�sumpserit; & ab officio Clericat�s summotus, & injuriarum reus
+judicetur. Si autem majores caus� in medium fuerint devolut�, ad Sedem
+Apostolicam sicut Synodus statuit, & beata consuetudo exigit, post judicium
+Episcopale referantur_. By these Letters it seems to me that _Gallia_ was
+now subject to the Pope, and had been so for some time, and that the Bishop
+of _Rouen_ was then his Vicar or one of them: for the Pope directs him to
+refer the greater causes to the See of _Rome_, according to custom. But the
+Bishop of _Arles_ soon after became the Pope's Vicar over all _Gallia_: for
+Pope _Zosimus_, A.C. 417, ordaining that none should have access to him
+without the credentials of his Vicars, conferred upon _Patroclus_ the
+Bishop of _Arles_ this authority over all _Gallia_, by the following
+Decree.
+
+_Zosimus universis Episcopis per Gallias & septem
+Provincias constitutis_.
+
+_Placuit Apostolic� Sedi, ut siquis ex qualibet Galliarum parte sub
+quolibet ecclesiastico gradu ad nos Rom� venire contendit, vel ali�
+terrarum ire disponit, non aliter proficiscatur nisi Metropolitani Episcopi
+Formatas acceperit, quibus sacerdotium suum vel locum ecclesiasticum quem
+habet, scriptorum ejus adstipulatione perdoceat: quod ex gratia statuimus
+quia plures episcopi sive presbyteri sive ecclesiastici simulantes, quia
+nullum documentum Formatarum extat per quod valeant confutari, in nomen
+venerationis irrepunt, & indebitam reverentiam promerentur. Quisquis
+igitur, fratres charissimi, pr�termiss� supradicti Format� sive episcopus,
+sive presbyter, sive diaconus, aut deinceps inferiori gradu sit, ad nos
+venerit: sciat se omnino suscipi non posse. Quam auctoritatem ubique nos
+misisse manifestum est, ut cunctis regionibus innotescat id quod statuimus
+omnimodis esse servandum. Siquis autem h�c salubriter constituta temerare
+tentaverit sponte su�, se a nostra noverit communione discretum. Hoc autem
+privilegium Formatarum sancto Patroclo fratri & coepiscopo nostro,
+meritorum ejus speciali contemplatione, concessimus_. And that the Bishop
+of _Arles_ was sometimes the Pope's Vicar over all _France_, is affirmed
+also by all the Bishops of the Diocess of _Arles_ in their Letter to Pope
+_Leo_ I. _Cui id etiam honoris dignitatisque collatum est_, say they, _ut
+non tantum has Provincias potestate propri� gubernaret; verum etiam omnes
+Gallias sibi Apostolic� Sedis vice mandatas, sub omni ecclesiastica regula
+contineret_. And Pope _Pelagius_ I. A.C. 556, in his Epistle to _Sapaudus_
+Bishop of _Arles_: _Majorum nostrorum, operante Dei misericordi�, cupientes
+inh�rere vestigiis & eorum actus divino examine in omnibus imitari:
+Charitati tu� per universam Galliam, sanct� Sedis Apostolic�, cui divin�
+grati� pr�sidemus, vices injungimus_.
+
+By the influence of the same imperial Edict, not only _Spain_ and _Gallia_,
+but also _Illyricum_ became subject to the Pope. _Damasus_ made
+_Ascholius_, or _Acholius_, Bishop of _Thessalonica_ the Metropolis of
+_Oriental Illyricum_, his Vicar for hearing of causes; and in the year 382,
+_Acholius_ being summoned by Pope _Damasus_, came to a Council at _Rome_.
+Pope _Siricius_ the successor of _Damasus_, decreed that no Bishop should
+be ordained in _Illyricum_ without the consent of _Anysius_ the successor
+of _Acholius_. And the following Popes gave _Rufus_ the successor of
+_Anysius_, a power of calling Provincial Councils: for in the Collections
+of _Holstenius_ there is an account of a Council of _Rome_ convened under
+Pope _Boniface_ II. in which were produced Letters of _Damasus_,
+_Syricius_, _Innocent_ I. _Boniface_ I. and _C�lestine_ Bishops of _Rome_,
+to _Ascholius_, _Anysius_ and _Rufus_, Bishops of _Thessalonica_: in which
+Letters they commend to them the hearing of causes in _Illyricum_, granted
+by the Lord and the holy Canons to the Apostolic See thro'out that
+Province. And Pope _Siricius_ saith in his Epistle to _Anysius_: _Etiam
+dudum, frater charissime, per Candidianum Episcopum, qui nos pr�cessit ad
+Dominum, hujusmodi literas dederamus, ut nulla licentia esset, sine
+consensu tuo in Illyrico Episcopos ordinare pr�sumere, qu� utrum ad te
+pervenerint scire non potui. Multa enim gesta sunt per contentionem ab
+Episcopis in ordinationibus faciendis, quod tua melius caritas novit_. And
+a little after: _Ad omnem enim hujusmodi audaciam comprimendam vigilare
+debet instantia tua, Spiritu in te Sancto fervente: ut vel ipse, si potes,
+vel quos judicaveris Episcopos idoneos, cum literis dirigas, dato consensu
+qui possit, in ejus locum qui defunctus vel depositus fuerit, Catholicum
+Episcopum vit� & moribus probatum, secundum Nic�n� Synodi statuta vel
+Ecclesi� Roman�, Clericum de Clero meritum ordinare_. And Pope _Innocent_
+I. saith in his Epistle to _Anysius_: _Cui_ [Anysio] _etiam anteriores
+tanti ac tales viri pr�decessores mei Episcopi, id est, sanct� memori�
+Damasus, Siricius, atque supra memoratus vir ita detulerunt; ut omnia qu�
+in omnibus illis partibus gererentur, Sanctitati tu�, qu� plena justiti�
+est, traderent cognoscenda_. And in his Epistle to _Rufus_ the successor of
+_Anysius_: _Ita longis intervallis disterminatis � me ecclesiis discat
+consulendum; ut prudenti� gravitatique tu� committendam curam causasque,
+siqu� exoriantur, per Achai�, Thessali�, Epiri veteris, Epiri nov�, &
+Cret�, Daci� mediterrane�, Daci� ripensis, Moesi�, Dardani�, & Pr�vali
+ecclesias, Christo Domino annuente, censeam. Ver� enim ejus sacratissimis
+monitis lectissim� sinceritatis tu� providenti� & virtuti hanc injungimus
+sollicitudinem: non primit�s h�c statuentes, sed Pr�cessores nostros
+Apostolicos imitati, qui beatissimis Acholio & Anysio injungi pro meritis
+ista voluerunt_. And _Boniface_ I. in his decretal Epistle to _Rufus_ and
+the rest of the Bishops in _Illyricum_: _Nullus, ut frequenter dixi,
+alicujus ordinationem citra ejus_ [Episcopi Thessalonicensis] _conscientiam
+celebrare pr�sumat: cui, ut supra dictum est, vice nostr� cuncta
+committimus_. And Pope _C�lestine_, in his decretal Epistle to the Bishops
+thro'out _Illyricum_, saith: _Vicem nostram per vestram Provinciam
+noveritis_ [Rufo] _esse commissam, ita ut ad eum, fratres carissimi,
+quicquid de causis agitur, referatur. Sine ejus consilio nullus ordinetur.
+Nullus usurpet, eodem inconscio, commissam illi Provinciam; colligere nisi
+cum ejus voluntate Episcopus non pr�sumat_. And in the cause of
+_Perigenes_, in the title of his Epistle, he thus enumerates the Provinces
+under this Bishop: _Rufo & c�teris Episcopis per Macedoniam, Achaiam,
+Thessaliam, Epirum veterem, Epirum novam, Pr�valin, & Daciam constitutis_.
+And Pope _Xistus_ in a decretal Epistle to the same Bishops: _Illyrican�
+omnes Ecclesi�, ut � decessoribus nostris recepimus, & nos quoque fecimus,
+ad curam nunc pertinent Thessalonicensis Antistitis, ut su� sollicitudine,
+siqu� inter fratres nascantur, ut assolent, actiones distinguat atque
+definiat; & ad eum, quicquid � singulis sacerdotibus agitur, referatur. Sit
+Concilium, quotiens caus� fuerint, quotiens ille pro necessitatum
+emergentium ratione decreverit_. And Pope _Leo_ I. in his decretal Epistle
+to _Anastasius_ Bishop of _Thessalonica_: _Singulis autem Metropolitanis
+sicut potestas ista committitur, ut in suis Provinciis jus habeant
+ordinandi; ita eos Metropolitanos � te volumus ordinari; maturo tamen &
+decocto judicio_.
+
+_Occidental Illyricum_ comprehended _Pannonia prima_ and _secunda_,
+_Savia_, _Dalmatia_, _Noricum mediterraneum_, and _Noricum ripense_; and
+its Metropolis was _Sirmium_, till _Attila_ destroyed this city. Afterwards
+_Laureacum_ became the Metropolis of _Noricum_ and both _Pannonias_, and
+_Salona_ the Metropolis of _Dalmatia_. Now [5] the Bishops of _Laureacum_
+and _Salona_ received the _Pallium_ from the Pope: and _Zosimus_, in his
+decretal Epistle to _Hesychius_ Bishop of _Salona_, directed him to
+denounce the Apostolic decrees as well to the Bishops of his own, as to
+those of the neighbouring Provinces. The subjection of these Provinces to
+the See of _Rome_ seems to have begun in _Anemius_, who was ordained Bishop
+of _Sirmium_ by _Ambrose_ Bishop of _Millain_, and who in the Council of
+_Aquileia_ under Pope _Damasus_, A.C. 381, declared his sentence in these
+words: _Caput Illyrici non nisi civitas Sirmiensis: Ego igitur illius
+civitatis Episcopus sum. Eum qui non confitetur filium Dei �ternum, &
+coeternum patri, qui est sempiternus, anathema dico_. The next year
+_Anemius_ and _Ambrose_, with _Valerian_ Bishop of _Aquileia_, _Acholias_
+Bishop of _Thessalonica,_ and many others, went to the Council of _Rome_,
+which met for overruling the _Greek_ Church by majority of votes, and
+exalting the authority of the Apostolic See, as was attempted before in the
+Council of _Sardica_.
+
+_Aquileia_ was the second city of the _Western Empire_, and by some called
+the second _Rome_. It was the Metropolis of _Istria_, _Forum Julium_, and
+_Venetia_; and its subjection to the See of _Rome_ is manifest by the
+decretal Epistle of _Leo_ I. directed to _Nicetas_ Bishop of this city; for
+the Pope begins his Epistle thus: _Regressus ad nos filius meus Adeodatus
+Diaconus Sedis nostr�, dilectionem tuam poposcisse memorat, ut de his �
+nobis authoritatem Apostolic� Sedis acciperes, qu� quidem magnam
+difficultatem dijudicationis videntur afferre_. Then he sets down an answer
+to the questions proposed by _Nicetas_, and concludes thus: _Hanc autem
+Epistolam nostram, quam ad consultationem tu� fraternitatis emisimus, ad
+omnes fratres & comprovinciales tuos Episcopos facies pervenire, ut in
+omnium observantia, data profit authoritas. Data 1-2 Kal. Apr. Majorano
+Aug. Cos._ A.C. 458. _Gregory_ the great A.C. 591, [6] cited _Severus_
+Bishop of _Aquileia_ to appear before him in judgment in a Council at
+_Rome_.
+
+The Bishops of _Aquileia_ and _Millain_ created one another, and therefore
+were of equal authority, and alike subject to the See of _Rome_. Pope
+_Pelagius_ about the year 557, testified this in the following words: [7]
+_Mos antiquus fuit_, saith he, _ut quia pro longinquitate vel difficultate
+itineris, ab Apostolico illis onerosum fuerit ordinari, ipsi se invicem
+Mediolanensis & Aquileiensis ordinare Episcopos debuissent_. These words
+imply that the ordination of these two Bishops belonged to the See of
+_Rome_. When _Laurentius_ Bishop of _Millain_ had excommunicated _Magnus_,
+one of his Presbyters, and was dead, [8] _Gregory_ the great absolved
+_Magnus_, and sent the _Pallium_ to the new elected Bishop _Constantius_;
+whom the next year [9] he reprehended of partiality in judging
+_Fortunatus_, and commanded him to send _Fortunatus_ to _Rome_ to be judged
+there: four years after [10] he appointed the Bishops of _Millain_ and
+_Ravenna_ to hear the cause of one _Maximus_; and two years after, viz.
+A.C. 601, when _Constantius_ was dead, and the people of _Millain_ had
+elected _Deusdedit_ his successor, and the _Lombards_ had elected another,
+[11] _Gregory_ wrote to the Notary, Clergy, and People of _Millain_, that
+by the authority of his Letters _Deusdedit_ should be ordained, and that he
+whom the _Lombards_ had ordained was an unworthy successor of _Ambrose_:
+whence I gather, that the Church of _Millain_ had continued in this state
+of subordination to the See of _Rome_ ever since the days of _Ambrose_; for
+_Ambrose_ himself acknowledged the authority of that See. _Ecclesia
+Romana_, [12] saith he, _hanc consuetudinem non habet, cujus typum in
+omnibus sequimur, & formam_. And a little after: _In omnibus cupio sequi
+Ecclesiam Romanam_. And in his Commentary upon 1 _Tim_. iii. _Cum totus
+mundus Dei sit, tamen domus ejus Ecclesia dicitur, cujus hodie rector est
+Damasus_. In his Oration on the death of his brother _Satyrus_, he relates
+how his brother coming to a certain city of _Sardinia_, _advocavit
+Episcopum loci, percontatusque est ex eo utrum cum Episcopis Catholicis hoc
+est cum Romana Ecclesia conveniret?_ And in conjunction with the Synod of
+_Aquileia_ A.C. 381, in a synodical Epistle to the Emperor _Gratian_, he
+saith: _Totius orbis Romani caput Romanam Ecclesiam, atque illam
+sacrosanctam Apostolorum fidem, ne turbari sineret, obsecranda fuit
+clementia vestra; inde enim in omnes venerand� communionis jura dimanant_.
+The Churches therefore of _Aquileia_ and _Millain_ were subject to the See
+of _Rome_ from the days of the Emperor _Gratian_. _Auxentius_ the
+predecessor of _Ambrose_ was not subject to the see of _Rome_, and
+consequently the subjection of the Church of _Millain_ began in _Ambrose_.
+This Diocese of _Millain_ contained _Liguria_ with _Insubria_, the _Alpes
+Cotti�_ and _Rh�tia_; and was divided from the Diocese of _Aquileia_ by the
+river _Addua_. In the year 844, the Bishop of _Millain_ broke off from the
+See of _Rome_, and continued in this separation about 200 years, as is thus
+related by [13] _Sigonius_: _Eodem anno Angilbertus Mediolanensis
+Archiepiscopus ab Ecclesia Romana parum comperta de causa descivit,
+tantumque exemplo in posterum valuit, ut non nisi post ducentos annos
+Ecclesia Mediolanensis ad Roman� obedientiam auctoritatemque redierit_.
+
+The Bishop of _Ravenna_, the Metropolis of _Flaminia_ and _�milia_, was
+also subject to the Pope: for _Zosimus_, A.C. 417, excommunicated some of
+the Presbyters of that Church, and wrote a commonitory Epistle about them
+to the Clergy of that Church as a branch of the _Roman_ Church: _In sua_,
+saith he, _hoc est, in Ecclesia nostra Romana_. When those of _Ravenna_,
+having elected a new Bishop, gave notice thereof to Pope _Sixtus_, the Pope
+set him aside, and [14] ordained _Peter Chrysologus_ in his room.
+_Chrysologus_ in his Epistle to _Eutyches_, extant in the Acts of the
+Council of _Chalcedon_, wrote thus: _Nos pro studio pacis & fidei, extra
+consensum Roman� civitatis Episcopi, causas fidei audire non possumus_.
+Pope _Leo_ I. being consulted by _Leo_ Bishop of _Ravenna_ about some
+questions, answered him by a decretal Epistle A.C. 451. And Pope _Gregory_
+the great, [15] reprehending _John_ Bishop of _Ravenna_ about the use of
+the _Pallium_, tells him of a Precept of one of his Predecessors, Pope
+_John_, commanding that all the Privileges formerly granted to the Bishop
+and Church of _Ravenna_ should be kept: to this _John_ returned a
+submissive answer; and after his death Pope _Gregory_ ordered a visitation
+of the Church of _Ravenna_, confirmed the privileges heretofore granted
+them, and sent his _Pallium_, as of antient custom, to their new Bishop
+_Marinian_. Yet this Church revolted sometimes from the Church of _Rome_,
+but returned again to its obedience.
+
+The rest of _Italy_, with the Islands adjacent, containing the
+_suburbicarian_ regions, or ten Provinces under the temporal Vicar of
+_Rome, viz._ 1_Campania_, 2_Tuscia_ and _Umbria_, 3_Picenum suburbicarium_,
+4_Sicily_, 5_Apulia_ and _Calabria_, 6_Brutii_ and _Lucania_, 7_Samnium_,
+8_Sardinia_, 9_Corsica_, and 10_Valeria_, constituted the proper Province
+of the Bishop of _Rome_. For the Council of _Nice_ in their fifth Canon
+ordained that Councils should be held every spring and autumn in every
+Province; and according to this Canon, the Bishops of this Province met at
+_Rome_ every half year. In this sense Pope _Leo_ I. applied this Canon to
+_Rome_, in a decretal Epistle to the Bishops of _Sicily_, written _Alippio
+& Ardabure Coss_. A.C. 447. _Quia saluberrime_, saith he, _� sanctis
+patribus constitutum est, binos in annis singulis Episcoporum debere esse
+conventus, terni semper ex vobis ad diem tertium Kalendarum Octobrium Romam
+�terno concilio sociandi occurrant. Et indissimulanter � vobis h�c
+consuetudo servetur, quoniam adjuvante Dei grati�, facili�s poterit
+provideri, ut in Ecclesiis Christi nulla scandala, nulli nascantur errores;
+cum coram Apostolo Petro semper in communione tractatum fuerit, ut omnia
+Canonum Decreta apud omnes Domini sacerdotes inviolata permaneant_. The
+Province of _Rome_ therefore comprehended _Sicily_, with so much of _Italy_
+and the neighbouring Islands as sent Bishops to the annual Councils of
+_Rome_; but extended not into the Provinces of _Ravenna_, _Aquileia_,
+_Millain_, _Arles_, &c. those Provinces having Councils of their own. The
+Bishops in every Province of the _Roman_ Empire were convened in Council by
+the Metropolitan or Bishop of the head city of the Province, and this
+Bishop presided in that Council: but the Bishop of _Rome_ did not only
+preside in his own Council of the Bishops of the _suburbicarian_ regions,
+but also gave Orders to the Metropolitans of all the other Provinces in the
+_Western Empire_, as their universal governor; as may be further perceived
+by the following instances.
+
+Pope _Zosimus_ A.C. 417, cited _Proculus_ Bishop of _Marseilles_ to appear
+before a Council at _Rome_ for illegitimate Ordinations; and condemned him,
+as he mentions in several of his Epistles. Pope _Boniface_ I. A.C. 419,
+upon a complaint of the Clergy of _Valentia_ against _Maximus_ a Bishop,
+summoned the Bishops of all _Gallia_ and the seven Provinces to convene in
+a Council against him; and saith in his Epistle, that his Predecessors had
+done the like. Pope _Leo_ I. called a general Council of all the Provinces
+of _Spain_ to meet in _Gall�cia_ against the _Manichees_ and
+_Priscillianists_, as he says in his decretal Epistle to _Turribius_ a
+_Spanish_ Bishop. And in one of his decretal Epistles to _Nicetas_ Bishop
+of _Aquileia_, he commands him to call a Council of the Bishops of that
+Province against the _Pelagians_, which might ratify all the Synodal
+Decrees which had been already ratified by the See of _Rome_ against this
+heresy. And in his decretal Epistle to _Anastasius_ Bishop of
+_Thessalonica_, he ordained that Bishop should hold two Provincial Councils
+every year, and refer the harder causes to the See of _Rome_: and if upon
+any extraordinary occasion it should be necessary to call a Council, he
+should not be troublesom to the Bishops under him, but content himself with
+two Bishops out of every Province, and not detain them above fifteen days.
+In the same Epistle he describes the form of Church-Government then set up,
+to consist in a subordination of all the Churches to the See of _Rome_: _De
+qua forma_, saith he, _Episcoporum quoque est orta distinctio, & magna
+dispositione provisum est ne omnes sibi omnia vindicarent, sed essent in
+singulis Provinciis singuli quorum inter fratres haberetur prima sententia,
+& rursus quidam in majoribus urbibus constituti sollicitudinem sumerent
+ampliorem, per quos ad unam Petri Sedem universalis Ecclesi� cura
+conflueret, & nihil usque � suo capite dissideret. Qui ergo scit se
+quibusdam esse pr�positum, non moleste ferat aliquem sibi esse pr�positum;
+sed obedientiam quam exigit etiam ipse dependat; et sicut non vult gravis
+oneris sarcinam ferre, ita non audeat aliis importabile pondus imponere_.
+These words sufficiently shew the monarchical form of government then set
+up in the Churches of the _Western Empire_ under the Bishop of _Rome_, by
+means of the imperial Decree of _Gratian_, and the appeals and decretal
+Epistles grounded thereupon.
+
+The same Pope _Leo_, having in a Council at _Rome_ passed sentence upon
+_Hilary_ Bishop of _Arles_, for what he had done by a Provincial Council in
+_Gallia_, took occasion from thence to procure the following Edict from the
+_Western_ Emperor _Valentinian_ III. for the more absolute establishing the
+authority of his See over all the Churches of the _Western Empire_.
+
+_Impp. Theodosius & Valentinianus AA. Aetio
+Viro illustri, Comiti & Magistro utriusque
+militi� & Patricio._
+
+_Certum est & nobis & imperio nostro unicum esse pr�sidium in supern�
+Divinitatis favore, ad quem promerendum pr�cipue Christiana fides &
+veneranda nobis religio suffragatur. Cum igitur Sedis Apostolic� Primatum
+sancti Petri meritum, qui princeps est Episcopalis coron� & Roman� dignitas
+civitatis, sacr� etiam Synodi firmavit auctoritas: ne quid pr�ter
+auctoritatem Sedis istius illicitum pr�sumptio attemperare nitatur: tunc
+enim demum Ecclesiarum pax ubique servabitur, si Rectorem suum agnoscat
+Universitas. H�c cum hactenus inviolabiliter suerint custodita, Hilarius
+Arelatensis, sicut venerabilis viri Leonis Romani Pap� fideli relatione
+comperimus, contumaci ausu illicita qu�dam pr�sumenda tentavit, & ideo
+Transalpinas Ecclesias abominabilis tumultus invasit, quod recens maxim�
+testatur exemplum. Hilarius enim qui Episcopus Arelatensis vocatur,
+Ecclesi� Roman� urbis inconsulto Pontifice indebitas sibi ordinationes
+Episcoporum sol� temeritate usurpans invasit. Nam alios incompetenter
+removit; indecenter alios, invitis & repugnantibus civibus, ordinavit. Qui
+quidem, quoniam non facile ab his qui non elegerant, recipiebantur, manum
+sibi contrahebat armatam, & claustra murorum in hostilem morem vel
+obsidione cingebat, vel aggressione reserabat, & ad sedem quietis pacem
+pr�dicaturus per bella ducebat: His talibus contra Imperii majestatem, &
+contra reverentiam Apostolic� Sedis admissis, per ordinem religiosi viri
+Urbis Pap� cognitione discussis, certa in eum, ex his quos mal�
+ordinaverat, lata sententia est. Erat quidem ipsa sententia per Gallias
+etiam sine Imperiali Sanctione valitura: quid enim Pontificis auctoritate
+non liceret? Sed nostram quoque pr�ceptionem h�c ratio provocavit. Nec
+ulterius vel Hilario, quem adhuc Episcopum nuncupare sola mansueta Pr�sulis
+permittit humanitas, nec cuiquam alteri ecclesiasticis rebus arma miscere,
+aut pr�ceptis Romani Antistitis liceat obviare: ausibus enim talibus fides
+& reverentia nostri violatur Imperii. Nec hoc solum, quod est maximi
+criminis, submovemus: verum ne levis saltem inter Ecclesias turba nascatur,
+vel in aliquo minui religionis disciplina videatur, hoc perenni sanctione
+discernimus; nequid tam Episcopis Gallicanis quam aliarum Provinciarum
+contra consuetudinem veterem liceat, sine viri venerabilis Pap� Urbis
+�tern� auctoritate, tentare. Sed illis omnibusque pro lege sit, quicquid
+sanxit vel sanxerit Apostolic� Sedis auctoritas: ita ut quisquis
+Episcoporum ad judicium Romani Antistitis evocatus venire neglexerit, per
+Moderatorem ejusdem Provinci� adesse cogatur, per omnia servatis qu� Divi
+parentes nostri Roman� Ecclesi� detulerunt, Aet� pater carissime Augusti.
+Unde illustris & pr�clara magnificentia tua pr�sentis Edictalis Legis
+auctoritate faciet qu� sunt superius statuta servari, decem librarum auri
+multa protinus exigenda ab unoquoque Judice qui passus fuerit pr�cepta
+nostra violari. Divinitas te servet per multos annos, parens carissime.
+Dat. _viii._ Id. Jun. Rom�, Valentiniano A. _vi._ Consule_, A.C. 445. By
+this Edict the Emperor _Valentinian_ enjoined an absolute obedience to the
+will of the Bishop of _Rome_ thro'out all the Churches of his Empire; and
+declares, that for the Bishops to attempt any thing without the Pope's
+authority is contrary to antient custom, and that the Bishops summoned to
+appear before his judicature must be carried thither by the Governor of the
+Province; and he ascribes these privileges of the See of _Rome_ to the
+concessions of his dead Ancestors, that is, to the Edict of _Gratian_ and
+_Valentinian_ II. as above: by which reckoning this dominion of the Church
+of _Rome_ was now of 66 years standing: and if in all this time it had not
+been sufficiently established, this new Edict was enough to settle it
+beyond all question thro'out the _Western Empire_.
+
+Hence all the Bishops of the Province of _Arles_ in their Letter to Pope
+_Leo_, A.C. 450, petitioning for a restitution of the privileges of their
+Metropolitan, say: _Per beatum Petrum Apostolorum principem, sacrosancta
+Ecclesia Romana tenebat supra omnes totius mundi Ecclesias principatum_.
+And _Ceratius_, _Salonius_ and _Veranus_, three Bishops of _Gallia_, say,
+in their Epistle to the same Pope: _Magna pr�terea & ineffabili quadam nos
+peculiares tui gratulatione succrescimus, quod illa specialis doctrin�
+vestr� pagina ita per omnium Ecclesiarum conventicula celebratur, ut vere
+consona omnium sententia declaretur; merito illic principatum Sedis
+Apostolic� constitutum, unde adhuc Apostolici spiritus oracula reserentur_.
+And _Leo_ himself, in [16] his Epistle to the metropolitan Bishops thro'out
+_Illyricum_: _Quia per omnes Ecclesias cura nostra distenditur, exigente
+hoc � nobis Domino, qui Apostolic� dignitatis beatissimo Apostolo Petro
+primatum, fidei sui remuneratione commisit, universalem Ecclesiam in
+fundamenti ipsius soliditate constituens_.
+
+While this Ecclesiastical Dominion was rising up, the northern barbarous
+nations invaded the _Western Empire_, and founded several kingdoms therein,
+of different religions from the Church of _Rome_. But these kingdoms by
+degrees embraced the _Roman_ faith, and at the same time submitted to the
+Pope's authority. The _Franks_ in _Gaul_ submitted in the end of the fifth
+Century, the _Goths_ in _Spain_ in the end of the sixth; and the _Lombards_
+in _Italy_ were conquered by _Charles_ the great A.C. 774. Between the
+years 775 and 794, the same _Charles_ extended the Pope's authority over
+all _Germany_ and _Hungary_ as far as the river _Theysse_ and the _Baltic_
+sea; he then set him above all human judicature, and at the same time
+assisted him in subduing the City and Duchy of _Rome_. By the conversion of
+the ten kingdoms to the _Roman_ religion, the Pope only enlarged his
+spiritual dominion, but did not yet rise up as a horn of the Beast. It was
+his temporal dominion which made him one of the horns: and this dominion he
+acquired in the latter half of the eighth century, by subduing three of the
+former horns as above. And now being arrived at a temporal dominion, and a
+power above all human judicature, he reigned [17] _with a look more stout
+than his fellows_, and [18] _times and laws were_ henceforward _given into
+his hands, for a time times and half a time_, or three times and an half;
+that is, for 1260 solar years, reckoning a time for a Calendar year of 360
+days, and a day for a solar year. After which [19] _the judgment is to sit,
+and they shall take away his dominion_, not at once, but by degrees, _to
+consume, and to destroy it unto the end. [20] And the kingdom and dominion,
+and greatness of the kingdom under the whole heaven shall_, by degrees, _be
+given unto the people of the saints of the most High, whose kingdom is an
+everlasting kingdom, and all dominions shall serve and obey him_.
+
+Notes to Chap. VIII.
+
+[1] _See the Annals of _Baronius__, Anno 381. Sect. 6.
+
+[2] Populos Gallici�.
+
+[3] Hormisd. Epist. 24. 26.
+
+[4] _The words, _sine auctoritate_, seem wanting._
+
+[5] Vide Caroli a S. Paulo Geographiam sacram, p. 72, 73.
+
+[6] Greg. M. lib. 1. Indic. 9. Epist. 16.
+
+[7] Apud Gratianum de Mediolanensi & Aquileiensi Episcopis.
+
+[8] Greg. M. lib. 3. Epist. 26. & lib. 4. Epist. 1.
+
+[9] Greg. lib. 5. Epist. 4.
+
+[10] Greg. lib. 9. Epist. 10 & 67.
+
+[11] Greg. lib. 11. Epist. 3, 4.
+
+[12] Ambros l. 3. de sacramentis, c. 1.
+
+[13] Sigonius de Regno Itali�, lib. 5.
+
+[14] _See _Baronius__, Anno 433. Sect. 24.
+
+[15] Greg. M. lib. 3. Epist. 56, 57. & lib. 5. Epist. 25, 26, 56.
+
+[16] Epist. 25. apud Holstenium.
+
+[17] Dan. vii. 20.
+
+[18] Ver. 25.
+
+[19] Ver. 26.
+
+[20] Ver. 27.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. IX.
+
+_Of the kingdoms represented in _Daniel_ by the Ram and He-Goat_.
+
+The second and third Empires, represented by the Bear and Leopard, are
+again represented by the Ram and He-Goat; but with this difference, that
+the Ram represents the kingdoms of the _Medes_ and _Persians_ from the
+beginning of the four Empires, and the Goat represents the kingdom of the
+_Greeks_ to the end of them. By this means, under the type of the Ram and
+He-Goat, the times of all the four Empires are again described: _I lifted
+up mine eyes_, saith [1] _Daniel_, _and saw_, _and behold there stood
+before the river_ [Ulai] _a Ram which had two horns, and the two horns were
+high, but one was higher than the other, and the higher came up last.--And
+the Ram having two horns, are the kings of _Media_ and _Persia__: not two
+persons but two kingdoms, the kingdoms of _Media_ and _Persia_; and the
+kingdom of _Persia_ was the higher horn and came up last. The kingdom of
+_Persia_ rose up, when _Cyrus_ having newly conquered _Babylon_, revolted
+from _Darius_ King of the _Medes_, and beat him at _Pasargad�_, and set up
+the _Persians_ above the _Medes_. This was the horn which came up last. And
+the horn which came up first was the kingdom of the _Medes_, from the time
+that _Cyaxares_ and _Nebuchadnezzar_ overthrew _Nineveh_, and shared the
+Empire of the _Assyrians_ between them. The Empires of _Media_ and
+_Babylon_ were contemporary, and rose up together by the fall of the
+_Assyrian_ Empire; and the Prophecy of the four Beasts begins with one of
+them, and that of the Ram and He-Goat with the other. As the Ram represents
+the kingdom of _Media_ and _Persia_ from the beginning of the four Empires;
+so the He-Goat represents the Empire of the _Greeks_ to the end of those
+Monarchies. In the reign of his great horn, and of the four horns which
+succeeded it, he represents this Empire during the reign of the Leopard:
+and in the reign of his little horn, which stood up in the latter time of
+the kingdom of the four, and after their fall became mighty but not by his
+own power, he represents it during the reign of the fourth Beast.
+
+_The rough Goat_, saith _Daniel, is the King of_ Grecia, that is, the
+kingdom; _and the great horn between his eyes is the first King_: not the
+first Monarch, but the first kingdom, that which lasted during the reign of
+_Alexander_ the great, and his brother _Arid�us_ and two young sons,
+_Alexander_ and _Hercules_. [2] _Now that_ [horn] _being broken off,
+whereas four_ [horns] _stood up for it, four kingdoms shall stand up out of
+the nation_ [of the _Greeks_], _but not in his_ [the first horn's] _power_.
+The four horns are therefore four kingdoms; and by consequence, the first
+great horn which they succeeded is the first great kingdom of the _Greeks_,
+that which was founded by _Alexander_ the great, _An. Nabonass._ 414, and
+lasted till the death of his son _Hercules_, _An. Nabonass._ 441. And the
+four are those of _Cassander_, _Lysimachus_, _Antigonus_, and _Ptolemy_, as
+above.
+
+[3] _And in the latter time of their kingdom, when the transgressors are
+come to the full, a King_ [or new kingdom] _of fierce countenance, and
+understanding dark sentences, shall stand up: and his power shall be
+mighty, but not by his own power_. This King was the last horn of the Goat,
+the little horn which came up out of one of the four horns, and waxed
+exceeding great. The latter time of their kingdom was when the _Romans_
+began to conquer them, that is, when they conquered _Perseus_ King of
+_Macedonia_, the fundamental kingdom of the _Greeks_. And at that time the
+transgressors came to the full: for then the High-priesthood was exposed to
+sale, the Vessels of the Temple were sold to pay for the purchase; and the
+High-priest, with some of the _Jews_, procured a licence from _Antiochus
+Epiphanes_ to do after the ordinances of the heathen, and set up a school
+at _Jerusalem_ for teaching those ordinances. Then _Antiochus_ took
+_Jerusalem_ with an armed force, slew 4000 _Jews_, took as many prisoners
+and sold them, spoiled the Temple, interdicted the worship, commanded the
+Law of _Moses_ to be burnt, and set up the worship of the heathen Gods in
+all _Judea_. In the very same year, _An. Nabonass._ 580, the _Romans_
+conquered _Macedonia_, the chief of the four horns. Hitherto the Goat was
+mighty by its own power, but henceforward began to be under the _Romans_.
+_Daniel_ distinguishes the times, by describing very particularly the
+actions of the Kings of the north and south, those two of the four horns
+which bordered upon _Judea_, until the _Romans_ conquered _Macedonia_; and
+thenceforward only touching upon the main revolutions which happened within
+the compass of the nations represented by the Goat. In this latter period
+of time the little horn was to stand up and grow mighty, but not by his own
+power.
+
+The three first of _Daniel_'s Beasts had their dominions taken away, each
+of them at the rise of the next Beast; but their lives were prolonged, and
+they are all of them still alive. The third Beast, or Leopard, reigned in
+his four heads, till the rise of the fourth Beast, or Empire of the
+_Latins_; and his life was prolonged under their power. This Leopard
+reigning in his four heads, signifies the same thing with the He-Goat
+reigning in his four horns: and therefore the He-Goat reigned in his four
+horns till the rise of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast, or Empire of the _Latins_:
+then its dominion was taken away by the _Latins_, but its life was
+prolonged under their power. The _Latins_ are not comprehended among the
+nations represented by the He-Goat in this Prophecy: their power over the
+_Greeks_ is only named in it, to distinguish the times in which the He-Goat
+was mighty by his own power, from the times in which he was mighty but not
+by his own power. He was mighty by his own power till his dominion was
+taken away by the _Latins_; after that, his life was prolonged under their
+dominion, and this prolonging of his life was in the days of his last horn:
+for in the days of this horn the Goat became mighty, but not by his own
+power.
+
+Now because this horn was a horn of the Goat, we are to look for it among
+the nations which composed the body of the Goat. Among those nations he was
+to rise up and grow mighty: he grew mighty [4] _towards the south, and
+towards the east, and towards the pleasant land_; and therefore he was to
+rise up in the north-west parts of those nations, and extend his dominion
+towards _Egypt_, _Syria_ and _Judea_. In the latter time of the kingdom of
+the four horns, it was to rise up out of one of them and subdue the rest,
+but not by its own power. It was to be assisted by a foreign power, a power
+superior to itself, the power which took away the dominion of the third
+Beast, the power of the fourth Beast. And such a little horn was the
+kingdom of _Macedonia_, from the time that it became subject to the
+_Romans_. This kingdom, by the victory of the _Romans_ over _Persius_ King
+of _Macedonia_, _Anno Nabonass._ 580, ceased to be one of the four horns of
+the Goat, and became a dominion of a new sort: not a horn of the fourth
+Beast, for _Macedonia_ belonged to the body of the third; but a horn of the
+third Beast of a new sort, a horn of the Goat which grew mighty but not by
+his own power, a horn which rose up and grew potent under a foreign power,
+the power of the _Romans_.
+
+The _Romans_, by the legacy of _Attalus_ the last King of _Pergamus_, _An.
+Nabonass._ 615, inherited that kingdom, including all _Asia Minor_ on this
+side mount _Taurus_. _An. Nabonass._ 684 and 685 they conquered _Armenia_,
+_Syria_ and _Judea_; _An. Nabonass._ 718, they subdued _Egypt_. And by
+these conquests the little horn [5] _waxed exceeding great towards the
+south, and towards the east, and towards the pleasant land. And it waxed
+great even to the host of heaven; and cast down some of the host and of the
+stars to the ground, and stamped upon them_, that is, upon the people and
+great men of the _Jews_. [6] _Yea, he magnified himself even to the Prince
+of the Host_, the _Messiah_, the Prince of the _Jews_, whom he put to
+death, _An. Nabonass._ 780. _And by him the daily sacrifice was taken away,
+and the place of his sanctuary was cast down_, viz. in the wars which the
+armies of the _Eastern_ nations under the conduct of the _Romans_ made
+against _Judea_, when _Nero_ and _Vespasian_ were Emperors, _An. Nabonass._
+816, 817, 818. [7] _And an host was given him against the daily sacrifice
+by reason of transgression, and it cast down the truth to the ground, and
+it practised and prospered_. This transgression is in the next words called
+_the transgression of desolation_; and in _Dan._ xi. 31. _the abomination
+which maketh desolate_; and in _Matth._ xxiv. 15. _the abomination of
+desolation, spoken of by _Daniel_ the prophet, standing in the holy place_.
+It may relate chiefly to the worship of _Jupiter Olympius_ in his Temple
+built by the Emperor _Hadrian_, in the place of the Temple of the _Jews_,
+and to the revolt of the _Jews_ under _Barchochab_ occasioned thereby, and
+to the desolation of _Judea_ which followed thereupon; all the _Jews_,
+being thenceforward banished _Judea_ upon pain of death. _Then I heard_,
+saith [8] _Daniel, one saint speaking, and another saint said unto that
+certain saint which spake, How long shall be the vision concerning the
+daily sacrifice, and the transgression of desolation, to give both the
+sanctuary and the host to be trodden under foot? And he said unto me, Unto
+two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the sanctuary be cleansed._
+_Daniel_'s days are years; and these years may perhaps be reckoned either
+from the destruction of the Temple by the _Romans_ in the reign of
+_Vespasian_, or from the pollution of the Sanctuary by the worship of
+_Jupiter Olympius_, or from the desolation of _Judea_ made in the end of
+the _Jewish_ war by the banishment of all the _Jews_ out of their own
+country, or from some other period which time will discover. Henceforward
+the last horn of the Goat continued mighty under the _Romans_, till the
+reign of _Constantine_ the great and his sons: and then by the division of
+the _Roman_ Empire between the _Greek_ and _Latin_ Emperors, it separated
+from the _Latins_, and became the _Greek_ Empire alone, but yet under the
+dominion of a _Roman_ family; and at present it is mighty under the
+dominion of the _Turks_.
+
+This last horn is by some taken for _Antiochus Epiphanes_, but not very
+judiciously. A horn of a Beast is never taken for a single person: it
+always signifies a new kingdom, and the kingdom of _Antiochus_ was an old
+one. _Antiochus_ reigned over one of the four horns, and the little horn
+was a fifth under its proper kings. This horn was at first a little one,
+and waxed exceeding great, but so did not _Antiochus_. It is described
+great above all the former horns, and so was not _Antiochus_. His kingdom
+on the contrary was weak, and tributary to the _Romans_, and he did not
+enlarge it. The horn was a _King of fierce countenance, and destroyed
+wonderfully, and prospered and practised_; that is, he prospered in his
+practises against the holy people: but _Antiochus_ was frighted out of
+_Egypt_ by a mere message of the _Romans_, and afterwards routed and
+baffled by the _Jews_. The horn was mighty by another's power, _Antiochus_
+acted by his own. The horn stood up against the Prince of the Host of
+heaven, the Prince of Princes; and this is the character not of _Antiochus_
+but of _Antichrist_. The horn cast down the Sanctuary to the ground, and so
+did not _Antiochus_; he left it standing. The Sanctuary and Host were
+trampled under foot 2300 days; and in _Daniel_'s Prophecies days are put
+for years: but the profanation of the Temple in the reign of _Antiochus_
+did not last so many natural days. These were to last till the time of the
+end, till the last end of the indignation against the _Jews_; and this
+indignation is not yet at an end. They were to last till the Sanctuary
+which had been cast down should be cleansed, and the Sanctuary is not yet
+cleansed.
+
+This Prophecy of the Ram and He-Goat is repeated in the last Prophecy of
+_Daniel_. There the Angel tells _Daniel_, that [9] _he stood up to
+strengthen _Darius_ the _Mede_, and that there should stand up yet three
+kings in _Persia__, [_Cyrus_, _Cambyses_, and _Darius Hystaspis_] _and the
+fourth_ [_Xerxes_] _should be far richer than they all; and by his wealth
+thro' his riches he should stir up all against the realm of _Grecia__. This
+relates to the Ram, whose two horns were the kingdoms of _Media_ and
+_Persia_. Then he goes on to describe the horns of the Goat by the [10]
+_standing up of a mighty king, which should rule with great dominion, and
+do according to his will_; and by the breaking of his kingdom into four
+smaller kingdoms, and not descending to his own posterity. Then he
+describes the actions of two of those kingdoms which bordered on _Judea_,
+_viz_. _Egypt_ and _Syria_, calling them the Kings of the _South_ and
+_North_, that is, in respect of _Judea_; and he carries on the description
+till the latter end of the kingdoms of the four, and till the reign of
+_Antiochus Epiphanes_, when transgressors were come to the full. In the
+eighth year of _Antiochus_, the year in which he profaned the Temple and
+set up the heathen Gods in all _Judea_, and the _Romans_ conquered the
+kingdom of _Macedon_; the prophetic Angel leaves off describing the affairs
+of the kings of the _South_ and _North_, and begins to describe those of
+the _Greeks_ under the dominion of the _Romans_, in these words: [11] _And
+after him Arms_ [the _Romans_] _shall stand up, and they shall pollute the
+sanctuary of strength_. As [Hebrew: MMLK] signifies _after the king_, Dan.
+xi. 8; so here [Hebrew: MMNW] may signify _after him_: and so [Hebrew:
+MN-H'CHT] may signify _after one of them_, Dan. viii. 9. Arms are every
+where in these Prophecies of _Daniel_ put for the military power of a
+kingdom, and they stand up when they conquer and grow powerful. The
+_Romans_ conquered _Illyricum_, _Epirus_ and _Macedonia_, in the year of
+_Nabonassar_ 580; and thirty five years after, by the last will and
+testament of _Attalus_ the last King of _Pergamus_, they inherited that
+rich and flourishing kingdom, that is, all _Asia_ on this side mount
+_Taurus_: and sixty nine years after, they conquered the kingdom of
+_Syria_, and reduced it into a Province: and thirty four years after they
+did the like to _Egypt_. By all these steps the _Roman_ arms stood up over
+the _Greeks_. And after 95 years more, by making war upon the _Jews, they
+polluted the sanctuary of strength, and took away the daily sacrifice,
+and_, in its room soon after, _placed the abomination which made_ the Land
+_desolate_: for this abomination was placed after the days of Christ,
+_Matth._ xxiv. 15. In the 16th year of the Emperor _Hadrian_, A. C. 132,
+they placed this abomination by building a Temple to _Jupiter Capitolinus_,
+where the Temple of God in _Jerusalem_ had stood. Thereupon the _Jews_
+under the conduct of _Barchochab_ rose up in arms against the _Romans_, and
+in that war had 50 cities demolished, 985 of their best towns destroyed,
+and 580000 men slain by the sword: and in the end of the war, A.C. 136,
+they were all banished _Judea_ upon pain or death; and that time the land
+hath remained desolate of its old inhabitants.
+
+Now that the prophetic Angel passes in this manner from the four kingdoms
+of the _Greeks_ to the _Romans_ reigning over the _Greeks_, is confirmed
+from hence, that in the next place he describes the affairs of the
+_Christians_ unto the time of the end, in these words: [12] _And they that
+understand among the people shall instruct many, yet they shall fall by the
+sword and by flame, by captivity and by spoil many days. Now when they
+shall fall they shall be holpen with a little help_, _viz_. in the reign of
+_Constantine_ the great; _but many shall cleave to them with dissimulation.
+And some of them of understanding there shall fall to try them, and to
+purge_ them from the dissemblers; _and to make them white even to the time
+of the end_. And a little after, the time of the end is said to be _a time,
+times, and half a time_: which is the duration of the reign of the last
+horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast, and of the _Woman_ and her _Beast_ in the
+_Apocalyps_.
+
+Notes to Chap. IX.
+
+[1] Chap. viii. 3.
+
+[2] Ver. 22.
+
+[3] Ver. 23.
+
+[4] Chap. viii. 9.
+
+[5] Chap. viii. 9, 10.
+
+[6] Ver. 11.
+
+[7] Ver. 12.
+
+[8] Ver. 13, 14.
+
+[9] Dan. xi. 1, 2.
+
+[10] Ver. 3.
+
+[11] Dan xi. 31.
+
+[12] Chap. xi. 33, &c.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. X.
+
+_Of the Prophecy of the Seventy Weeks._
+
+The Vision of the Image composed of four Metals was given first to
+_Nebuchadnezzar_, and then to _Daniel_ in a dream: and _Daniel_ began then
+to be celebrated for revealing of secrets, _Ezek._ xxviii. 3. The Vision of
+the four Beasts, and of _the Son of man_ coming in the clouds of heaven,
+was also given to _Daniel_ in a dream. That of the Ram and the He-Goat
+appeared to him in the day time, when he was by the bank of the river
+_Ulay_; and was explained to him by the prophetic Angel _Gabriel_. It
+concerns the _Prince of the host_, and the _Prince of Princes_: and now in
+the first year of _Darius_ the _Mede_ over _Babylon_, the same prophetic
+Angel appears to _Daniel_ again, and explains to him what is meant by the
+_Son of man_, by the _Prince of the host_, and the _Prince of Princes_. The
+Prophecy of the _Son of man_ coming in the clouds of heaven relates to the
+second coming of _Christ_; that of the _Prince of the host_ relates to his
+first coming: and this Prophecy of the _Messiah_, in explaining them,
+relates to both comings, and assigns the times thereof.
+
+This Prophecy, like all the rest of _Daniel_'s, consists of two parts, an
+introductory Prophecy and an explanation thereof; the whole I thus
+translate and interpret.
+
+[1] '_Seventy weeks are [2] cut out upon thy people, and upon thy holy
+city, to finish transgression, and [3] to make an end of sins, to expiate
+iniquity, and to bring in everlasting righteousness, to consummate the
+Vision and [4] the Prophet, and to anoint the most Holy_.
+
+'_Know also and understand, that from the going forth of the commandment to
+cause to return and to build _Jerusalem_, unto [5] the Anointed the Prince,
+shall be seven weeks_.
+
+'_Yet threescore and two weeks shall [6] it return, and the street be built
+and the wall; but in troublesome times: and after the threescore and two
+weeks, the Anointed shall be cut off, and [6] it shall not be his; but the
+people of a Prince to come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary: and
+the end thereof shall be with a flood, and unto the end of the war,
+desolations are determined_.
+
+'_Yet shall he confirm the covenant with many for one week: and in half a
+week he shall cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease: and upon a wing of
+abominations he shall make it desolate, even until the consummation, and
+that which is determined be poured upon the desolate_.'
+
+_Seventy weeks are cut out upon thy people, and upon thy holy city, to
+finish transgression_, &c. Here, by putting a week for seven years, are
+reckoned 490 years from the time that the dispersed _Jews_ should be
+re-incorporated into [7] a people and a holy city, until the death and
+resurrection of _Christ_; whereby _transgression should be finished, and
+sins ended, iniquity be expiated, and everlasting righteousness brought in,
+and this Vision be accomplished, and the Prophet consummated_, that Prophet
+whom the _Jews_ expected; and whereby _the most Holy_ should be _anointed_,
+he who is therefore in the next words called the _Anointed_, that is, the
+_Messiah_, or the _Christ_. For by joining the accomplishment of the vision
+with the expiation of sins, the 490 years are ended with the death of
+_Christ_. Now the dispersed _Jews_ became a people and city when they first
+returned into a polity or body politick; and this was in the seventh year
+of _Artaxerxes Longimanus_, when _Ezra_ returned with a body of _Jews_ from
+captivity, and revived the _Jewish_ worship; and by the King's commission
+created Magistrates in all the land, to judge and govern the people
+according to the laws of God and the King, _Ezra_ vii. 25. There were but
+two returns from captivity, _Zerubbabel_'s and _Ezra_'s; in _Zerubbabel_'s
+they had only commission to build the Temple, in _Ezra_'s they first became
+a polity or city by a government of their own. Now the years of this
+_Artaxerxes_ began about two or three months after the summer solstice, and
+his seventh year fell in with the third year of the eightieth _Olympiad_;
+and the latter part thereof, wherein _Ezra_ went up to _Jerusalem_, was in
+the year of the _Julian Period_ 4257. Count the time from thence to the
+death of _Christ_, and you will find it just 490 years. If you count in
+_Judaic_ years commencing in autumn, and date the reckoning from the first
+autumn after _Ezra_'s coming to _Jerusalem_, when he put the King's decree
+in execution; the death of _Christ_ will fall on the year of the _Julian
+Period_ 4747, _Anno Domini_ 34; and the weeks will be _Judaic_ weeks,
+ending with sabbatical years; and this I take to be the truth: but if you
+had rather place the death of _Christ_ in the year before, as is commonly
+done, you may take the year of _Ezra_'s journey into the reckoning.
+
+_Know also and understand, that from the going forth of the commandment to
+cause to return and to build _Jerusalem_, unto the Anointed the Prince,
+shall be seven weeks_. The former part of the Prophecy related to the first
+coming of _Christ_, being dated to his coming as a Prophet; this being
+dated to his coming to be Prince or King, seems to relate to his second
+coming. There, the Prophet was consummate, and the most holy anointed:
+here, he that was anointed comes to be Prince and to reign. For _Daniel_'s
+Prophecies reach to the end of the world; and there is scarce a Prophecy in
+the Old Testament concerning _Christ_, which doth not in something or other
+relate to his second coming. If divers of the antients, as [8] _Iren�us_,
+[9] _Julius Africanus_, _Hippolytus_ the martyr, and _Apollinaris_ Bishop
+of _Laodicea_, applied the half week to the times of _Antichrist_; why may
+not we, by the same liberty of interpretation, apply the seven weeks to the
+time when _Antichrist_ shall be destroyed by the brightness of _Christ_'s
+coming?
+
+The _Israelites_ in the days of the antient Prophets, when the ten Tribes
+were led into captivity, expected a double return; and that at the first
+the _Jews_ should build a new Temple inferior to _Solomon_'s, until the
+time of that age should be fulfilled; and afterwards they should return
+from all places of their captivity, and build _Jerusalem_ and the Temple
+gloriously, _Tobit_ xiv. 4, 5, 6: and to express the glory and excellence
+of this city, it is figuratively said to be built of precious stones,
+_Tobit_ xiii. 16, 17, 18. _Isa._ liv. 11, 12. _Rev._ xi. and called the
+_New Jerusalem_, the _Heavenly Jerusalem_, the _Holy City_, the _Lamb's
+Wife_, the _City of the Great King_, the _City into which the Kings of the
+earth do bring their glory and honour_. _Now_ while such a return from
+captivity was the expectation of _Israel_, even before the times of
+_Daniel_, I know not why _Daniel_ should omit it in his Prophecy. This part
+of the Prophecy being therefore not yet fulfilled, I shall not attempt a
+particular interpretation of it, but content myself with observing, that as
+the _seventy_ and the _sixty two weeks_ were _Jewish_ weeks, ending with
+sabbatical years; so the _seven weeks_ are the compass of a _Jubilee_, and
+begin and end with actions proper for a _Jubilee_, and of the highest
+nature for which a _Jubilee_ can be kept: and that since _the commandment
+to return and to build _Jerusalem__, precedes the _Messiah the Prince_ 49
+years; it may perhaps come forth not from the _Jews_ themselves, but from
+some other kingdom friendly to them, and precede their return from
+captivity, and give occasion to it; and lastly, that this rebuilding of
+_Jerusalem_ and the waste places of _Judah_ is predicted in _Micah_ vii.
+11. _Amos_ ix. 11, 14. _Ezek._ xxxvi. 33, 35, 36, 38. _Isa._ liv. 3, 11,
+12. lv. 12. lxi. 4. lxv. 18, 21,22. and _Tobit_ xiv. 5. and that the return
+from captivity and coming of the _Messiah_ and his kingdom are described in
+_Daniel_ vii. _Rev._ xix. _Acts_ i. _Mat._ xxiv. _Joel_ iii. _Ezek._ xxxvi.
+xxxvii. _Isa._ lx. lxii. lxiii. lxv. and lxvi. and many other places of
+scripture. The manner I know not. Let time be the Interpreter.
+
+_Yet threescore and two weeks shall it return, and the street be built and
+the wall, but in troublesome times: and after the threescore and two weeks
+the _Messiah_ shall be cut off, and it shall not be his; but the people of
+a Prince to come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary_, &c. Having
+foretold both comings of _Christ_, and dated the last from their returning
+and building _Jerusalem_; to prevent the applying that to the building
+_Jerusalem_ by _Nehemiah_, he distinguishes this from that, by saying that
+from this period to the _Anointed_ shall be, not seven weeks, but
+threescore and two weeks, and this not in prosperous but in troublesome
+times; and at the end of these Weeks the _Messiah_ shall not be the Prince
+of the _Jews_, but be cut off; and _Jerusalem_ not be his, but the city and
+sanctuary be destroyed. Now _Nehemiah_ came to _Jerusalem_ in the 20th year
+of this same _Artaxerxes_, while _Ezra_ still continued there, _Nehem._
+xii. 36, and found the city lying waste, and the houses and wall unbuilt,
+_Nehem._ ii. 17. vii. 4, and finished the wall the 25th day of the month
+_Elul_, _Nehem._ vi. 15, in the 28th year of the King, that is, in
+_September_ in the year of the _Julian Period_ 4278. Count now from this
+year threescore and two weeks of years, that is 434 years, and the
+reckoning will end in _September_ in the year of the _Julian Period_ 4712
+which is the year in which _Christ_ was born, according to _Clemens
+Alexandrinus_, _Iren�us_, _Eusebius_, _Epiphanius_, _Jerome_, _Orosius_,
+_Cassiodorus_, and other antients; and this was the general opinion, till
+_Dionysius Exiguus_ invented the vulgar account, in which _Christ_'s birth
+is placed two years later. If with some you reckon that _Christ_ was born
+three or four years before the vulgar account, yet his birth will fall in
+the latter part of the last week, which is enough. How after these weeks
+_Christ_ was cut off and the city and sanctuary destroyed by the _Romans_,
+is well known.
+
+_Yet shall he confirm the covenant with many for one week._ He kept it,
+notwithstanding his death, till the rejection of the _Jews_, and calling of
+_Cornelius_ and the _Gentiles_ in the seventh year after his passion.
+
+_And in half a week he shall cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease_;
+that is, by the war of the _Romans_ upon the _Jews_: which war, after some
+commotions, began in the 13th year of _Nero_, A.D. 67, in the spring, when
+_Vespasian_ with an army invaded them; and ended in the second year of
+_Vespasian_, A.D. 70, in autumn, _Sept._ 7, when _Titus_ took the city,
+having burnt the Temple 27 days before: so that it lasted three years and
+an half.
+
+_And upon a wing of abominations he shall cause desolation, even until the
+consummation, and that which is determined be poured upon the desolate._
+The Prophets, in representing kingdoms by Beasts and Birds, put their wings
+stretcht out over any country for their armies sent out to invade and rule
+over that country. Hence a wing of abominations is an army of false Gods:
+for an abomination is often put in scripture for a false God; as where
+_Chemosh_ is called [10] the abomination of _Moab_, and _Molech_ the
+abomination of _Ammon_. The meaning therefore is, that the people of a
+Prince to come shall destroy the sanctuary, and abolish the daily worship
+of the true God, and overspread the land with an army of false gods; and by
+setting up their dominion and worship, cause desolation to the _Jews_,
+until the times of the _Gentiles_ be fulfilled. For _Christ_ tells us, that
+the abomination of desolation spoken of by _Daniel_ was to be set up in the
+times of the _Roman Empire_, _Matth._ xxiv. 15.
+
+Thus have we in this short Prophecy, a prediction of all the main periods
+relating to the coming of the _Messiah_; the time of his birth, that of his
+death, that of the rejection of the _Jews_, the duration of the _Jewish_
+war whereby he caused the city and sanctuary to be destroyed, and the time
+of his second coming: and so the interpretation here given is more full and
+complete and adequate to the design, than if we should restrain it to his
+first coming only, as Interpreters usually do. We avoid also the doing
+violence to the language of _Daniel_, by taking the _seven weeks_ and
+_sixty two weeks_ for one number. Had that been _Daniel_'s meaning, he
+would have said _sixty and nine weeks_, and not _seven weeks_ and _sixty
+two weeks_, a way of numbring used by no nation. In our way the years are
+_Jewish Luni-solar years_, [11] as they ought to be; and the _seventy weeks
+of years_ are _Jewish weeks_ ending with _sabbatical years_, which is very
+remarkable. For they end either with the year of the birth of _Christ_, two
+years before the vulgar account, or with the year of his death, or with the
+seventh year after it: all which are _sabbatical years_. Others either
+count by Lunar years, or by weeks not _Judaic_: and, which is worst, they
+ground their interpretations on erroneous Chronology, excepting the opinion
+of _Funccius_ about the _seventy weeks_, which is the same with ours. For
+they place _Ezra_ and _Nehemiah_ in the reign of _Artaxerxes Mnemon_, and
+the building of the Temple in the reign of _Darius Nothus_, and date the
+weeks of _Daniel_ from those two reigns.
+
+The grounds of the Chronology here followed, I will now set down as briefly
+as I can.
+
+The _Peloponnesian_ war began in spring _An._ 1 _Olymp._ 87, as _Diodorus_,
+_Eusebius_, and all other authors agree. It began two months before
+_Pythodorus_ ceased to be _Archon_, _Thucyd._ l. 2. that is, in _April_,
+two months before the end of the _Olympic_ year. Now the years of this war
+are most certainly determined by the 50 years distance of its first year
+from the transit of _Xerxes_ inclusively, _Thucyd._ l. 2. or 48 years
+exclusively, _Eratosth. apud Clem. Alex._ by the 69 years distance of its
+end, or 27th year, from the beginning of _Alexander_'s reign in _Greece_;
+by the acting of the _Olympic_ games in its 4th and 12th years, _Thucyd._
+l. 5; and by three eclipses of the sun, and one of the moon, mentioned by
+_Thucydides_ and _Xenophon_. Now _Thucydides_, an unquestionable witness,
+tells us, that the news of the death of _Artaxerxes Longimanus_ was brought
+to _Ephesus_, and from thence by some _Athenians_ to _Athens_, in the 7th
+year of this _Peloponnesian_ war, when the winter half year was running;
+and therefore he died _An._ 4 _Olymp._ 88, in the end of _An. J.P._ 4289,
+suppose a month or two before midwinter; for so long the news would be in
+coming. Now _Artaxerxes Longimanus_ reigned 40 years, by the consent of
+_Diodorus_, _Eusebius_, _Jerome_, _Sulpitius_; or 41, according to _Ptol.
+in can. Clem. Alexand._ l. 1. _Strom. Chron. Alexandr_. _Abulpharagius_,
+_Nicephorus_, including therein the reign of his successors _Xerxes_ and
+_Sogdian_, as _Abulpharagius_ informs us. After _Artaxerxes_ reigned his
+son _Xerxes_ two months, and _Sogdian_ seven months; but their reign is not
+reckoned apart in summing up the years of the Kings, but is included in the
+40 or 41 years reign of _Artaxerxes_: omit these nine months, and the
+precise reign of _Artaxerxes_ will be thirty nine years and three months.
+And therefore since his reign ended in the beginning of winter _An. J.P._
+4289, it began between midsummer and autumn, _An. J.P._ 4250.
+
+The same thing I gather also thus. _Cambyses_ began his reign in spring
+_An. J.P._ 4185, and reigned eight years, including the five months of
+_Smerdes_; and then _Darius Hystaspis_ began in spring _An. J.P._ 4193, and
+reigned thirty six years, by the unanimous consent of all Chronologers. The
+reigns of these two Kings are determined by three eclipses of the moon
+observed at _Babylon_, and recorded by _Ptolemy_; so that it cannot be
+disputed. One was in the seventh year of _Cambyses_, _An. J.P._ 4191,
+_Jul._ 16, at 11 at night; another in the 20th year of _Darius_, _An. J.P._
+4212, _Nov._ 19, at 11h. 45' at night; a third in the 31st year of
+_Darius_, _An. J.P._ 4223, _Apr._ 25, at 11h. 30 at night. By these
+eclipses, and the Prophecies of _Haggai_ and _Zechary_ compared together,
+it is manifest that his years began after the 24th day of the 11th _Jewish_
+month, and before the 25th day of _April_, and by consequence about
+_March_. _Xerxes_ therefore began in spring _An. J.P._ 4229: for _Darius_
+died in the fifth year after the battle at _Marathon_, as _Herodotus_,
+_lib._ 7, and _Plutarch_ mention; and that battle was in _October_ _An.
+J.P._ 4224, ten years before the battle at _Salamis_. _Xerxes_ therefore
+began within less than a year after _October_ _An. J.P._ 4228, suppose in
+the spring following: for he spent his first five years, and something
+more, in preparations for his expedition against the _Greeks_; and this
+expedition was in the time of the _Olympic_ games, _An._ 1 _Olymp._ 75,
+_Calliade Athenis Archonte_, 28 years after the _Regifuge_, and Consulship
+of the first Consul _Junius Brutus_, _Anno Urbis condit�_ 273, _Fabio &
+Furio Coss._ The passage of _Xerxes_'s army over the _Hellespont_ began in
+the end of the fourth year of the 74th _Olympiad_, that is, in _June_ _An.
+J.P._ 4234, and took up one month: and in autumn, three months after, on
+the full moon, the 16th day of the month _Munychion_, was the battle at
+_Salamis_, and a little after that an eclipse of the sun, which by the
+calculation fell on _Octob._ 2. His sixth year therefore began a little
+before _June_, suppose in spring _An. J.P._ 4234, and his first year
+consequently in spring _An. J.P._ 4229, as above. Now he reigned almost
+twenty one years, by the consent of all writers. Add the 7 months of
+_Artabanus_, and the sum will be 21 years and about four or five months,
+which end between midsummer and autumn _An. J.P._ 4250. At this time
+therefore began the reign of his successor _Artaxerxes_, as was to be
+proved.
+
+The same thing is also confirmed by _Julius Africanus_, who informs us out
+of former writers, that the 20th year of this _Artaxerxes_ was the 115th
+year from the beginning of the reign of _Cyrus_ in _Persia,_ and fell in
+with _An._ 4 _Olymp._ 83. It began therefore with the _Olympic_ year, soon
+after the summer Solstice, _An. J.P._ 4269. Subduct nineteen years, and his
+first year will begin at the same time of the year _An. J.P._ 4250, as
+above.
+
+His 7th year therefore began after midsummer _An. J.P._ 4256; and the
+Journey of _Ezra_ to _Jerusalem_ in the spring following fell on the
+beginning of _An. J.P._ 4257, as above.
+
+Notes to Chap. X.
+
+[1] Chap. ix. 24, 25, 26, 27.
+
+[2] _Cut upon_. A phrase in _Hebrew_, taken from the practise of numbring
+by cutting notches.
+
+[3] Heb. _to seal_, i.e. to finish or consummate: a metaphor taken from
+sealing what is finished. So the _Jews_ compute, _ad obsignatum Misna, ad
+obsignatum Talmud_, that is, _ad absolutum_.
+
+[4] Heb. _the Prophet_, not the Prophecy.
+
+[5] Heb. _the Messiah_, that is, in _Greek_, _the Christ_; in _English_,
+_the Anointed_. I use the _English_ word, that the relation of this clause
+to the former may appear.
+
+[6] _Jerusalem_.
+
+[7] See _Isa._ xxiii. 13.
+
+[8] Iren. l. 5. H�r. c. 25.
+
+[9] Apud Hieron. in h. l.
+
+[10] 1 Kings xi. 7.
+
+[11] The antient solar years of the eastern nations consisted of 12 months,
+and every month of 30 days: and hence came the division of a circle into
+360 degrees. This year seems to be used by _Moses_ in his history of the
+Flood, and by _John_ in the _Apocalypse_, where a time, times and half a
+time, 42 months and 1260 days, are put equipollent. But in reckoning by
+many of these years together, an account is to be kept of the odd days
+which were added to the end of these years. For the _Egyptians_ added five
+days to the end of this year; and so did the _Chaldeans_ long before the
+times of _Daniel_, as appears by the _�ra_, of _Nabonassar_: and the
+_Persian_ Magi used the same year of 365 days, till the Empire of the
+_Arabians_. The antient _Greeks_ also used the same solar year of 12 equal
+months, or 360 days; but every other year added an intercalary month,
+consisting of 10 and 11 days alternately.
+
+The year of the _Jews_, even from their coming out of _Egypt_, was
+Luni-solar. It was solar, for the harvest always followed the Passover, and
+the fruits of the land were always gathered before the feast of
+Tabernacles, _Levit._ xxiii. But the months were lunar, for the people were
+commanded by _Moses_ in the beginning of every month to blow with trumpets,
+and offer burnt offerings with their drink offerings, _Num._ x. 10. xxviii.
+11, 14. and this solemnity was kept on the new moons, _Psal._ lxxxi. 3,4,5.
+1 _Chron._ xxiii. 31. These months were called by _Moses_ the first,
+second, third, fourth month, _&c._ and the first month was also called
+_Abib_, the second _Zif_, the seventh _Ethanim_, the eighth _Bull_, _Exod._
+xiii. 4. 1 _Kings_ vi. 37, 38. viii. 2. But in the _Babylonian_ captivity
+the _Jews_ used the names of the _Chaldean_ months, and by those names
+understood the months of their own year; so that the _Jewish_ months then
+lost their old names, and are now called by those of the _Chaldeans_.
+
+The _Jews_ began their civil year from the autumnal Equinox, and their
+sacred year from the vernal: and the first day of the first month was on
+the visible new moon, which was nearest the Equinox.
+
+Whether _Daniel_ used the _Chaldaick_ or _Jewish_ year, is not very
+material; the difference being but six hours in a year, and 4 months in 480
+years. But I take his months to be _Jewish_: first, because _Daniel_ was a
+_Jew_, and the _Jews_ even by the names of the _Chaldean_ months understood
+the months of their own year: secondly, because this Prophecy is grounded
+on _Jeremiah_'s concerning the 70 years captivity, and therefore must be
+understood of the same sort of years with the seventy; and those are
+_Jewish_, since that Prophecy was given in _Judea_ before the captivity:
+and lastly, because _Daniel_ reckons by weeks of years, which is a way of
+reckoning peculiar to the _Jewish_ years. For as their days ran by sevens,
+and the last day of every seven was a sabbath; so their years ran by
+sevens, and the last year of every seven was a sabbatical year, and seven
+such weeks of years made a _Jubilee_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. XI.
+
+_Of the Times of the Birth and Passion of _Christ__.
+
+The times of the Birth and Passion of _Christ_, with such like niceties,
+being not material to religion, were little regarded by the _Christians_ of
+the first age. They who began first to celebrate them, placed them in the
+cardinal periods of the year; as the annunciation of the Virgin _Mary_, on
+the 25th of _March_, which when _Julius C�sar_ corrected the Calendar was
+the vernal Equinox; the feast of _John_ Baptist on the 24th of _June_,
+which was the summer Solstice; the feast of St. _Michael_ on _Sept._ 29,
+which was the autumnal Equinox; and the birth of _Christ_ on the winter
+Solstice, _Decemb._ 25, with the feasts of St. _Stephen_, St. _John_ and
+the _Innocents_, as near it as they could place them. And because the
+Solstice in time removed from the 25th of _December_ to the 24th, the 23d,
+the 22d, and so on backwards, hence some in the following centuries placed
+the birth of _Christ_ on _Decemb._ 23, and at length on _Decemb._ 20: and
+for the same reason they seem to have set the feast of St. _Thomas_ on
+_Decemb._ 21, and that of St. _Matthew_ on _Sept._ 21. So also at the
+entrance of the Sun into all the signs in the _Julian_ Calendar, they
+placed the days of other Saints; as the conversion of _Paul_ on _Jan._ 25,
+when the Sun entred [Aquarius]; St. _Matthias_ on _Feb._ 25, when he entred
+[Pisces]; St. _Mark_ on _Apr._ 25, when he entred [Taurus]; _Corpus
+Christi_ on _May_ 26, when he entred [Gemini]; St. _James_ on _July_ 25,
+when he entred [Cancer]; St. _Bartholomew_ on _Aug._ 24, when he entred
+[Virgo]; _Simon_ and _Jude_ on _Octob._ 28, when he entred [Scorpio]: and
+if there were any other remarkable days in the _Julian_ Calendar, they
+placed the Saints upon them, as St. _Barnabas_ on _June_ 11, where _Ovid_
+seems to place the feast of _Vesta_ and _Fortuna_, and the goddess
+_Matuta_; and St. _Philip_ and _James_ on the first of _May_, a day
+dedicated both to the _Bona Dea_, or _Magna Mater_, and to the goddess
+_Flora_, and still celebrated with her rites. All which shews that these
+days were fixed in the first _Christian_ Calendars by Mathematicians at
+pleasure, without any ground in tradition; and that the _Christians_
+afterwards took up with what they found in the Calendars.
+
+Neither was there any certain tradition about the years of _Christ_. For
+the _Christians_ who first began to enquire into these things, as _Clemens
+Alexandrinus_, _Origen_, _Tertullian_, _Julius Africanus_, _Lactantius_,
+_Jerome_, St. _Austin_, _Sulpicius Severus_, _Prosper_, and as many as
+place the death of _Christ_ in the 15th or 16th year of _Tiberius_, make
+_Christ_ to have preached but one year, or at most but two. At length
+_Eusebius_ discovered four successive Passovers in the Gospel of _John_,
+and thereupon set on foot an opinion that he preacht three years and an
+half; and so died in the 19th year of _Tiberius_. Others afterwards,
+finding the opinion that he died in the Equinox _Mar._ 25, more consonant
+to the times of the _Jewish_ Passover, in the 17th and 20th years, have
+placed his death in one of those two years. Neither is there any greater
+certainty in the opinions about the time of his birth. The first
+_Christians_ placed his baptism near the beginning of the 15th year of
+_Tiberius_; and thence reckoning thirty years backwards, placed his birth
+in the 43d _Julian_ year, the 42d of _Augustus_ and 28th of the _Actiac_
+victory. This was the opinion which obtained in the first ages, till
+_Dionysius Exiguus_, placing the baptism of _Christ_ in the 16th year of
+_Tiberius_, and misinterpreting the text of _Luke_, iii. 23. as if _Jesus_
+was only beginning to be 30 years old when he was baptized, invented the
+vulgar account, in which his birth is placed two years later than before.
+As therefore relating to these things there is no tradition worth
+considering; let us lay aside all and examine what prejudices can be
+gathered from records of good account.
+
+The fifteenth year of _Tiberius_ began _Aug._ 28, _An. J.P._ 4727. So soon
+as the winter was over, and the weather became warm enough, we may reckon
+that _John_ began to baptize; and that before next winter his fame went
+abroad, and all the people came to his baptism, and _Jesus_ among the rest.
+Whence the first Passover after his baptism mentioned _John_ ii. 13. was in
+the 16th year of _Tiberius_. After this feast _Jesus_ came into the land of
+_Judea_, and staid there baptizing, whilst _John_ was baptizing in _�non_,
+_John_ iii. 22, 23. But when he heard that _John_ was cast into prison, he
+departed into _Galilee_, _Mat._ iii. 12. being afraid, because the
+Pharisees had heard that he baptized more disciples than _John_, _John_ iv.
+1. and in his journey he passed thro' _Samaria_ four months before the
+harvest, _John_ iv. 35. that is, about the time of the winter Solstice. For
+their harvest was between _Easter_ and _Whitsunday_, and began about a
+month after the vernal Equinox. _Say not ye_, saith he, _there are yet four
+months, and then cometh harvest? Behold I say unto you, lift up your eyes,
+and look on the fields, for they are white already to harvest_; meaning,
+that the people in the fields were ready for the Gospel, as his next words
+shew[1]. _John_ therefore was imprisoned about _November_, in the 17th year
+of _Tiberius_; and _Christ_ thereupon went from _Judea_ to _Cana_ of
+_Galilee_ in _December_, and was received there of the _Galileans_, who had
+seen all he did at _Jerusalem_ at the Passover: and when a Nobleman of
+_Capernaum_ heard he was returned into _Galilee_, and went to him and
+desired him to come and cure his son, he went not thither yet, but only
+said, _Go thy way, thy son liveth; and the Nobleman returned and found it
+so, and believed, he and his house_, John iv. This is the beginning of his
+miracles in _Galilee_; and thus far _John_ is full and distinct in relating
+the actions of his first year, omitted by the other Evangelists. The rest
+of his history is from this time related more fully by the other
+Evangelists than by _John_; for what they relate he omits.
+
+From this time therefore _Jesus_ taught in the Synagogues of _Galilee_ on
+the sabbath-days, being glorified of all: and coming to his own city
+_Nazareth_, and preaching in their Synagogue, they were offended, and
+thrust him out of the city, and led him to the brow of the hill on which
+the city was built to cast him headlong; but he passing thro' the midst of
+them, went his way, and came and dwelt at _Capernaum_, _Luke_ iv. And by
+this time we may reckon the second Passover was either past or at hand.
+
+All this time _Matthew_ passeth over in few words, and here begins to
+relate the preaching and miracles of _Christ_. _When _Jesus__, saith he,
+_had heard that _John_ was cast into prison, he departed into _Galilee_;
+and leaving _Nazareth_, he came and dwelt at _Capernaum_, and from that
+time began to preach and say, Repent, for the kingdom of heaven is at
+hand_, Matth. iv. 12. Afterwards he called his disciples _Peter_, _Andrew_,
+_James_ and _John_; and then _went about all_ Galilee, _teaching in the
+Synagogues,--and healing all manner of sickness:--and his fame went
+thro'out all _Syria_; and they brought unto him all sick people,--and there
+followed him great multitudes of people from _Galilee_, and from
+_Decapolis_, and from _Jerusalem_, and from _Judea_, and from beyond
+_Jordan__, Matth, iv. 18, 25. All this was done before the sermon in the
+mount: and therefore we may certainly reckon that the second Passover was
+past before the preaching of that sermon. The multitudes that followed him
+from _Jerusalem_ and _Judea_, shew that he had lately been there at the
+feast. The sermon in the mount was made when great multitudes came to him
+from all places, and followed him in the open fields; which is an argument
+of the summer-season: and in this sermon he pointed at the lilies of the
+field then in the flower before the eyes of his auditors. _Consider_, saith
+he, _the lilies of the field, how they grow; they toil not, neither do they
+spin; and yet _Solomon_ in all his glory was not arayed like one of these.
+Wherefore if God so clothe the grass of the field, which to day is and to
+morrow is cast into the oven_, &c. _Matth._ vi. 28. So therefore the grass
+of the field was now in the flower, and by consequence the month of _March_
+with the Passover was past.
+
+Let us see therefore how the rest of the feasts follow in order in
+_Matthew_'s Gospel: for he was an eye-witness of what he relates, and so
+tells all things in due order of time, which _Mark_ and _Luke_ do not.
+
+Some time after the sermon in the mount, when the time came that he should
+be received, that is, when the time of a feast came that he should be
+received by the _Jews_, he set his face to go to _Jerusalem_: and as he
+went with his disciples in the way, when the _Samaritans_ in his passage
+thro' _Samaria_ had denied him lodgings, and a certain Scribe said unto
+him, _Master, I will follow thee whithersoever thou goest_, Jesus _said
+unto him, The foxes have holes, and the birds of the air have nests, but
+the Son of man hath not where to lay his head_, Matth. viii. 19. Luke ix.
+51, 57. The Scribe told _Christ_ he would bear him company in his journey,
+and _Christ_ replied that he wanted a lodging. Now this feast I take to be
+the feast of Tabernacles, because soon after I find _Christ_ and his
+Apostles on the sea of _Tiberias_ in a storm so great, that the ship was
+covered with water and in danger of sinking, till _Christ rebuked the winds
+and the sea_, Matth. viii. 23. For this storm shews that winter was now
+come on.
+
+After this _Christ_ did many miracles, and _went about all the cities and
+villages of _Galilee_, teaching in their Synagogues, and preaching the
+gospel of the kingdom, and healing every sickness, and every disease among
+the people_, Matth. ix. he then sent forth the twelve to do the like,
+_Matth._ x. and at length when he had received a message from _John_, and
+answered it, he said to the multitudes, _From the days of _John_ the
+Baptist until now the kingdom of heaven suffereth violence_; and upbraided
+the cities, _Chorazin_, _Bethsaida_, and _Capernaum_, wherein most of his
+mighty works were done, because they repented not, _Matth._ xi. Which
+several passages shew, that from the imprisonment of _John_ till now there
+had been a considerable length of time: the winter was now past, and the
+next Passover was at hand; for immediately after this, _Matthew_, in chap.
+xii. subjoins, that _Jesus went on the sabbath-day thro' the corn, and his
+disciples were an hungred, and began to pluck the ears of corn and to
+eat,--rubbing them_, saith _Luke_, _in their hands_: the corn therefore was
+not only in the ear, but ripe; and consequently the Passover, in which the
+first-fruits were always offered before the harvest, was now come or past.
+_Luke_ calls this sabbath [Greek: deuteropr�ton], the second prime sabbath,
+that is, the second of the two great feasts of the Passover. As we call
+_Easter_ day high _Easter_, and its _octave_ low _Easter_ or _Lowsunday_:
+so _Luke_ calls the feast on the seventh day of the unlevened bread, the
+second of the two prime sabbaths.
+
+In one of the sabbaths following he went into a Synagogue, and healed a man
+with a withered hand, _Matth._ xii. 9. _Luke_ vi. 6. And when the Pharisees
+took counsel to destroy him, _he withdrew himself from thence, and great
+multitudes followed him; and he healed them all, and charged them that they
+should not make him known_, Matth. xii. 14. Afterwards being in a ship, and
+the multitude standing on the shore, he spake to them three parables
+together, taken from the seeds-men sowing the fields, _Matth._ xiii. by
+which we may know that it was now seed-time, and by consequence that the
+feast of Tabernacles was past. After this he went _into his own country,
+and taught them in their Synagogue_, but _did not many mighty works there
+because of their unbelief_. Then the twelve having been abroad a year,
+returned, and told _Jesus_ all that they had done: and at the same time
+_Herod_ beheaded _John_ in prison, and his disciples came and told _Jesus_;
+and when _Jesus_ heard it, he took the twelve and departed thence privately
+by ship into a desert place belonging to _Bethsaida_: and the people when
+they knew it, followed him on foot out of the cities, the winter being now
+past; and he healed their sick, and in the desert fed them to the number of
+five thousand men, besides women and children, with only five loaves and
+two fishes, _Matth._ xiv. _Luke_ ix. at the doing of which miracle the
+Passover of the _Jews_ was nigh, _John_ vi. 4. But _Jesus_ went not up to
+this feast; but _after these things walked in _Galilee_, because the
+_Jews__ at the Passover before had taken counsel to destroy him, and still
+_sought to kill him_, John vii. i. Henceforward therefore he is found first
+in the coast of _Tyre_ and _Sidon_, then by the sea of _Galilee_,
+afterwards in the coast of _C�sarea Philippi_; and lastly at _Capernaum_,
+_Matth._ xv. 21, 29. xvi. 13. xvii. 34.
+
+Afterwards when the feast of Tabernacles was at hand, his brethren
+upbraided him for walking secretly, and urged him to go up to the feast.
+But he went not till they were gone, and then went up privately, _John_
+vii. 2. and when the _Jews_ sought to stone him, he escaped, _John_ viii.
+59. After this he was at the feast of the Dedication in winter, _John_ x.
+22. and when they sought again to take him, he fled beyond _Jordan_, _John_
+x. 39, 40. _Matth_. xix. 1. where he stayed till the death of _Lazarus_,
+and then came to _Bethany_ near _Jerusalem_, and raised him, _John_ xi. 7,
+18. whereupon the _Jews_ took counsel from that time to kill him: and
+_therefore_ he _walked no more openly among the _Jews_, but went thence
+into a country near to the wilderness, into a city called _Ephraim_; and
+there continued with his disciples_ till the last Passover, in which the
+_Jews_ put him to death, _John_ xi. 53, 54.
+
+Thus have we, in the Gospels of _Matthew_ and _John_ compared together, the
+history of _Christ_'s actions in continual order during five Passovers.
+_John_ is more distinct in the beginning and end; _Matthew_ in the middle:
+what either omits, the other supplies. The first Passover was between the
+baptism of _Christ_ and the imprisonment of _John, John_ ii. 13. the second
+within four months after the imprisonment of _John_, and _Christ_'s
+beginning to preach in _Galilee_, _John_ iv. 35. and therefore it was
+either that feast to which _Jesus_ went up, when the Scribe desired to
+follow him, _Matth._ viii. 19. _Luke_ ix. 51, 57. or the feast before it.
+The third was the next feast after it, when the corn was eared and ripe,
+_Matth_, xii. 1. _Luke_ vi. 1. The fourth was that which was nigh at hand
+when _Christ_ wrought the miracle of the five loaves, _Matth_. xiv. 15.
+_John_ vi. 4, 5. and the fifth was that in which _Christ_ suffered,
+_Matth._ xx. 17. _John_ xii. 1.
+
+Between the first and second Passover _John_ and _Christ_ baptized
+together, till the imprisonment of _John_, which was four months before the
+second. Then _Christ_ began to preach, and call his disciples; and after he
+had instructed them a year, lent them to preach in the cities of the
+_Jews_: at the same time _John_ hearing of the fame of _Christ_, sent to
+him to know who he was. At the third, the chief Priests began to consult
+about the death of _Christ_. A little before the fourth, the twelve after
+they had preached a year in all the cities, returned to _Christ_; and at
+the same time _Herod_ beheaded _John_ in prison, after he had been in
+prison two years and a quarter: and thereupon _Christ_ fled into the desart
+for fear of _Herod_. The fourth _Christ_ went not up to _Jerusalem_ for
+fear of the _Jews_, who at the Passover before had consulted his death, and
+because his time was not yet come. Thenceforward therefore till the feast
+of Tabernacles he walked in _Galilee_, and that secretly for fear of
+_Herod_: and after the feast of Tabernacles he returned no more into
+_Galilee_, but sometimes was at _Jerusalem_, and sometimes retired beyond
+_Jordan_, or to the city _Ephraim_ by the wilderness, till the Passover in
+which he was betrayed, apprehended, and crucified.
+
+_John_ therefore baptized two summers, and _Christ_ preached three. The
+first summer _John_ preached to make himself known, in order to give
+testimony to _Christ_. Then, after _Christ_ came to his baptism and was
+made known to him, he baptized another summer, to make _Christ_ known by
+his testimony; and _Christ_ also baptized the same summer, to make himself
+the more known: and by reason of _John_'s testimony there came more to
+_Christ_'s baptism than to _John_'s. The winter following _John_ was
+imprisoned; and now his course being at an end, _Christ_ entered upon his
+proper office of preaching in the cities. In the beginning of his preaching
+he completed the number of the twelve Apostles, and instructed them all the
+first year in order to send them abroad. Before the end of this year, his
+fame by his preaching and miracles was so far spread abroad, that the
+_Jews_ at the Passover following consulted how to kill him. In the second
+year of his preaching, it being no longer safe for him to converse openly
+in _Judea_, he sent the twelve to preach in all their cities: and in the
+end of the year they returned to him, and told him all they had done. All
+the last year the twelve continued with him to be instructed more
+perfectly, in order to their preaching to all nations after his death. And
+upon the news of _John_'s death, being afraid of _Herod_ as well as of the
+_Jews_, he walked this year more secretly than before; frequenting desarts,
+and spending the last half of the year in _Judea_, without the dominions of
+_Herod_.
+
+Thus have we in the Gospels of _Matthew_ and _John_ all things told in due
+order, from the beginning of _John_'s preaching to the death of _Christ_,
+and the years distinguished from one another by such essential characters
+that they cannot be mistaken. The second Passover is distinguished from the
+first, by the interposition of _John_'s imprisonment. The third is
+distinguished from the second, by a double character: first, by the
+interposition of the feast to which _Christ_ went up, _Mat._ viii. 19.
+_Luke_ ix. 57. and secondly, by the distance of time from the beginning of
+_Christ_'s preaching: for the second was in the beginning of his preaching,
+and the third so long after, that before it came _Christ_ said, _from the
+days of _John_ the Baptist until now_, &c. and upbraided the cities of
+_Galilee_ for their not repenting at his preaching, and mighty works done
+in all that time. The fourth is distinguished from the third, by the
+mission of the twelve from _Christ_ to preach in the cities of _Judea_ in
+all the interval. The fifth is distinguished from all the former by the
+twelve's being returned from preaching, and continuing with _Christ_ during
+all the interval, between the fourth and fifth, and by the passion and
+other infallible characters.
+
+Now since the first summer of _John_'s baptizing fell in the fifteenth year
+of the Emperor _Tiberius_, and by consequence the first of these five
+Passovers in his sixteenth year; the last of them, in which _Jesus_
+suffered, will fall on the twentieth year of the same Emperor; and by
+consequence in the Consulship of _Fabius_ and _Vitellius_, in the 79th
+_Julian_ year, and year of _Christ_ 34, which was the sabbatical year of
+the _Jews_. And that it did so, I further confirm by these arguments.
+
+I take it for granted that the passion was on friday the 14th day of the
+month _Nisan_, the great feast of the Passover on saturday the 15th day of
+_Nisan_, and the resurrection on the day following. Now the 14th day of
+_Nisan_ always fell on the full moon next after the vernal Equinox; and the
+month began at the new moon before, not at the true conjunction, but at the
+first appearance of the new moon: for the _Jews_ referred all the time of
+the silent moon, as they phrased it, that is, of the moon's disappearing,
+to the old moon; and because the first appearance might usually be about 18
+hours after the true conjunction, they therefore began their month from the
+sixth hour at evening, that is, at sun set, next after the eighteenth hour
+from the conjunction. And this rule they called [Hebrew: YH] _Jah_,
+designing by the letters [Hebrew: Y] and [Hebrew: H] the number 18.
+
+I know that _Epiphanius_ tells us, if some interpret his words rightly,
+that the _Jews_ used a vicious cycle, and thereby anticipated the legal new
+moons by two days. But this surely he spake not as a witness, for he
+neither understood _Astronomy_ nor _Rabbinical_ learning, but as arguing
+from his erroneous hypothesis about the time of the passion. For the _Jews_
+did not anticipate, but postpone their months: they thought it lawful to
+begin their months a day later than the first appearance of the new moon,
+because the new moon continued for more days than one; but not a day
+sooner, lest they should celebrate the new moon before there was any. And
+the _Jews_ still keep a tradition in their books, that the _Sanhedrim_ used
+diligently to define the new moons by sight: sending witnesses into
+mountainous places, and examining them about the moon's appearing, and
+translating the new moon from the day they had agreed on to the day before,
+as often as witnesses came from distant regions, who had seen it a day
+sooner than it was seen at _Jerusalem_. Accordingly _Josephus_, one of the
+_Jewish_ Priests who ministred in the temple, tells us [2] that the
+Passover was kept _on the 14th day of_ Nisan, [Greek: kata sel�n�n]
+_according to the moon, when the sun was in _Aries__. This is confirmed
+also by two instances, recorded by him, which totally overthrow the
+hypothesis of the _Jews_ using a vicious cycle. For that year in which
+_Jerusalem_ was taken and destroyed, he saith, the Passover was on the 14th
+day of the month _Xanticus_, which according to _Josephus_ is our _April_;
+and that five years before, it fell on the 8th day of the same month. Which
+two instances agree with the course of the moon.
+
+Computing therefore the new moons of the first month according to the
+course of the moon and the rule _Jah_, and thence counting 14 days, I find
+that the 14th day of this month in the year of _Christ_ 31, fell on tuesday
+_March_ 27; in the year 32, on sunday _Apr._ 13; in the year 33, on friday
+_Apr._ 3; in the year 34, on wednesday _March_ 24, or rather, for avoiding
+the Equinox which fell on the same day, and for having a fitter time for
+harvest, on thursday _Apr._ 22. also in the year 35, on tuesday _Apr._ 12.
+and in the year 36, on saturday _March_ 31.
+
+But because the 15th and 21st days of _Nisan_, and a day or two of
+_Pentecost_, and the 10th, 15th, and 22d of _Tisri_, were always sabbatical
+days or days of rest, and it was inconvenient on two sabbaths together to
+be prohibited burying their dead and making ready fresh meat, for in that
+hot region their meat would be apt in two days to corrupt: to avoid these
+and such like inconveniences, the _Jews_ postponed their months a day, as
+often as the first day of the month _Tisri_, or, which is all one, the
+third of the month _Nisan_, was sunday, wednesday or friday: and this rule
+they called [Hebrew: 'DW] _Adu_, by the letters [Hebrew: W , D , ']
+signifying the numbers 1, 4, 6; that is, the 1st, 4th, and 6th days of the
+week; which days we call sunday, wednesday and friday. Postponing therefore
+by this rule the months found above; the 14th day of the month _Nisan_ will
+fall in the year of _Christ_ 31, on wednesday _March_ 28; in the year 32,
+on monday _Apr._ 14; in the year 33, on friday _Apr._ 3; in the year 34, on
+friday _Apr._ 23; in the year 35, on wednesday _Apr._ 13, and in the year
+36, on saturday _March_ 31.
+
+By this computation therefore the year 32 is absolutely excluded, because
+the Passion cannot fall on friday without making it five days after the
+full moon, or two days before it; whereas it ought to be upon the day of
+the full moon, or the next day. For the same reason the years 31 and 35 are
+excluded, because in them the Passion cannot fall on friday, without making
+it three days after the full moon, or four days before it: errors so
+enormous, that they would be very conspicuous in the heavens to every
+vulgar eye. The year 36 is contended for by few or none, and both this and
+the year 35 may be thus excluded.
+
+_Tiberius_ in the beginning of his reign made _Valerius Gratus_ President
+of _Judea_; and after 11 years, substituted _Pontius Pilate_, who governed
+10 years. Then _Vitellius_, newly made President of _Syria_, deprived him
+of his honour, substituting _Marcellus_, and at length sent him to _Rome_:
+but, by reason of delays, _Tiberius_ died before _Pilate_ got thither. In
+the mean time _Vitellius_, after he had deposed _Pilate_, came to
+_Jerusalem_ in the time of the Passover, to visit that Province as well as
+others in the beginning of his office; and in the place of _Caiaphas_, then
+High Priest, created _Jonathas_ the son of _Ananus_, or _Annas_ as he is
+called in scripture. Afterwards, when _Vitellius_ was returned to
+_Antioch_, he received letters from _Tiberius_, to make peace with
+_Artabanus_ king of the _Parthians_. At the same time the _Alans_, by the
+sollicitation of _Tiberius_, invaded the kingdom of _Artabanus_; and his
+subjects also, by the procurement of _Vitellius_, soon after rebelled: for
+_Tiberius_ thought that _Artabanus_, thus pressed with difficulties, would
+more readily accept the conditions of peace. _Artabanus_ therefore
+straightway gathering a greater army, opprest the rebels; and then meeting
+_Vitellius_ at _Euphrates_, made a league with the _Romans_. After this
+_Tiberius_ commanded _Vitellius_ to make war upon _Aretas_ King of
+_Arabia_. He therefore leading his army against _Aretas_, went together
+with _Herod_ to _Jerusalem_, to sacrifice at the publick feast which was
+then to be celebrated. Where being received honourably, he stayed three
+days, and in the mean while translated the high Priesthood from _Jonathas_
+to his brother _Theophilus_: and the fourth day, receiving letters of the
+death of _Tiberius_, made the people swear allegiance to _Caius_ the new
+Emperor; and recalling his army, sent them into quarters. All this is
+related by _Josephus_ _Antiq._ _lib._ 18. _c._ 6, 7. Now _Tiberius_ reigned
+22 years and 7 months, and died _March_ 16, in the beginning of the year of
+_Christ_ 37; and the feast of the Passover fell on _April_ 20 following,
+that is, 35 days after the death of _Tiberius_: so that there were about 36
+or 38 days, for the news of his death to come from _Rome_ to _Vitellius_ at
+_Jerusalem_; which being a convenient time for that message, confirms that
+the feast which _Vitellius_ and _Herod_ now went up to was the Passover.
+For had it been the Pentecost, as is usually supposed, _Vitellius_ would
+have continued three months ignorant of the Emperor's death: which is not
+to be supposed. However, the things done between this feast and the
+Passover which _Vitellius_ was at before, namely, the stirring up a
+sedition in _Parthia_, the quieting that sedition, the making a league
+after that with the _Parthians_, the sending news of that league to _Rome_,
+the receiving new orders from thence to go against the _Arabians_, and the
+putting those orders in execution; required much more time than the fifty
+days between the Passover and Pentecost of the same year: and therefore the
+Passover which _Vitellius_ first went up to, was in the year before.
+Therefore _Pilate_ was deposed before the Passover A.C. 36, and by
+consequence the passion of _Christ_ was before that Passover: for he
+suffered not under _Vitellius_, nor under _Vitellius_ and _Pilate_
+together, but under _Pilate_ alone.
+
+Now it is observable that the high Priesthood was at this time become an
+annual office, and the Passover was the time of making a new high Priest.
+For _Gratus_ the predecessor of _Pilate_, saith _Josephus_, made _Ismael_
+high Priest after _Ananus_; and a while after, suppose a year, deposed him,
+and substituted _Eleazar_, and a year after _Simon_, and after another year
+_Caiaphas_; and then gave way to _Pilate_. So _Vitellius_ at one Passover
+made _Jonathas_ successor to _Caiaphas_, and at the next _Theophilus_ to
+_Jonathas_. Hence _Luke_ tells us, that in the 15th year of _Tiberius_,
+_Annas_ and _Caiaphas_ were high Priests, that is, _Annas_ till the
+Passover, and _Caiaphas_ afterwards. Accordingly _John_ speaks of the high
+Priesthood as an annual office: for he tells us again and again, in the
+last year of _Christ_'s preaching, that _Caiaphas_ was high Priest for that
+year, _John_ xi. 49, 51. xviii. 13. And the next year _Luke_ tells you,
+that _Annas_ was high Priest, _Acts_ iv. 6. _Theophilus_ was therefore made
+high Priest in the first year of _Caius_, _Jonathas_ in the 22d year of
+_Tiberius_, and _Caiaphas_ in the 21st year of the same Emperor: and
+therefore, allotting a year to each, the Passion, when _Annas_ succeeded
+_Caiaphas_, could not be later than the 20th year of _Tiberius_, A.C. 34.
+
+Thus there remain only the years 33 and 34 to be considered; and the year
+33 I exclude by this argument. In the Passover two years before the
+Passion, when _Christ_ went thro' the corn, and his disciples pluckt the
+ears, and rubbed them with their hands to eat; this ripeness of the corn
+shews that the Passover then fell late: and so did the Passover A.C. 32,
+_April 14_, but the Passover A.C. 31, _March 28th_, fell very early. It was
+not therefore two years after the year 31, but two years after 32 that
+_Christ_ suffered.
+
+Thus all the characters of the Passion agree to the year 34; and that is
+the only year to which they all agree.
+
+Notes to Chap. XI.
+
+[1] I observe, that _Christ_ and his forerunner _John_ in their parabolical
+discourses were wont to allude to things present. The old Prophets, when
+they would describe things emphatically, did not only draw parables from
+things which offered themselves, as from the rent of a garment, 1 _Sam._
+xv. from the sabbatic year, _Isa._ xxxvii. from the vessels of a Potter,
+_Jer._ xviii, &c. but also when such fit objects were wanting, they
+supplied them by their own actions, as by rending a garment, 1 _Kings_ xi.
+by shooting, 2 _Kings_ xiii. by making bare their body, _Isa._ xx. by
+imposing significant names to their sons, _Isa._ viii. _Hos._ i. by hiding
+a girdle in the bank of _Euphrates_, _Jer._ xiii. by breaking a potter's
+vessel, _Jer._ xix. by putting on fetters and yokes, _Jer._ xxvii. by
+binding a book to a stone, and casting them both into _Euphrates_, _Jer._
+li. by besieging a painted city, _Ezek._ iv. by dividing hair into three
+parts, _Ezek._ v. by making a chain, _Ezek._ vii. by carrying out houshold
+stuff like a captive and trembling, _Ezek._ xii, &c. By such kind of types
+the Prophets loved to speak. And _Christ_ being endued with a nobler
+prophetic spirit than the rest, excelled also in this kind of speaking, yet
+so as not to speak by his own actions, that was less grave and decent, but
+to turn into parables such things as offered themselves. On occasion of the
+harvest approaching, he admonishes his disciples once and again of the
+spiritual harvest, _John_ iv. 35. _Matth._ ix. 37. Seeing the lilies of the
+field, he admonishes his disciples about gay clothing, _Matth._ vi. 28. In
+allusion to the present season of fruits, he admonishes his disciples about
+knowing men by their fruits, _Matth._ vii. 16. In the time of the Passover,
+when trees put forth leaves, he bids his disciples _learn a parable from
+the fig tree: when its branch is yet tender and putteth forth leaves, ye
+know that summer is nigh_, &c. _Matth._ xxiv. 32. _Luke_ xxi. 29. The same
+day, alluding both to the season of the year and to his passion, which was
+to be two days after, he formed a parable of the time of fruits
+approaching, and the murdering of the heir, _Matth._ xxi. 33. Alluding at
+the same time, both to the money-changers whom he had newly driven out of
+the Temple, and to his passion at hand; he made a parable of a Noble-man
+going into a far country to receive a kingdom and return, and delivering
+his goods to his servants, and at his return condemning the slothful
+servant because he put not his money to the exchangers, _Matth._ xxv. 14.
+_Luke_ xix. 12. Being near the Temple where sheep were kept in folds to be
+sold for the sacrifices, he spake many things parabolically of sheep, of
+the shepherd, and of the door of the sheepfold; and discovers that he
+alluded to the sheepfolds which were to be hired in the market-place, by
+speaking of such folds as a thief could not enter by the door, nor the
+shepherd himself open, but a porter opened to the shepherd, _John_ x. 1, 3.
+Being in the mount of _Olives_, _Matth._ xxxvi. 30. _John_ xiv. 31. a place
+so fertile that it could not want vines, he spake many things mystically of
+the Husbandman, and of the vine and its branches, _John_ xv. Meeting a
+blind man, he admonished of spiritual blindness, _John_ ix. 39. At the
+sight of little children, he described once and again the innocence of the
+elect, _Matth._ xviii. 2. xix. 13. Knowing that _Lazarus_ was dead and
+should be raised again, he discoursed of the resurrection and life eternal,
+_John_ xi. 25, 26. Hearing of the slaughter of some whom _Pilate_ had
+slain, he admonished of eternal death, _Luke_ xiii. 1. To his fishermen he
+spake of fishers of men, _Matth._ iv. 10. and composed another parable
+about fishes. _Matth._ xiii. 47. Being by the Temple, he spake of the
+Temple of his body, _John_ ii. 19. At supper he spake a parable about the
+mystical supper to come in the kingdom of heaven, _Luke_ xiv. On occasion
+of temporal food, he admonished his disciples of spiritual food, and of
+eating his flesh and drinking his blood mystically, _John_ vi. 27, 53. When
+his disciples wanted bread, he bad them beware of the leven of the
+Pharisees, _Matth._ xvi. 6. Being desired to eat, he answered that he had
+other meat, _John_ iv. 31. In the great day of the feast of Tabernacles,
+when the _Jews_, as their custom was, brought a great quantity of waters
+from the river _Shiloah_ into the Temple, _Christ_ stood and cried, saying,
+_If any man thirst let him come unto me and drink. He that believeth in me,
+out of his belly shall flow rivers of living water_, John vii. 37. The next
+day, in allusion to the servants who by reason of the sabbatical year were
+newly set free, he said, _If ye continue in my word, the truth shall make
+you free_. Which the _Jews_ understanding literally with respect to the
+present manumission of servants, answered, _We be _Abraham_'s seed, and
+were never in bondage to any man: how sayeth thou, ye shall be made free?_
+John viii. They assert their freedom by a double argument: first, because
+they were the seed of _Abraham_, and therefore newly made free, had they
+been ever in bondage; and then, because they never were in bondage. In the
+last Passover, when _Herod_ led his army thro' _Judea_ against _Aretas_
+King of _Arabia_, because _Aretas_ was aggressor and the stronger in
+military forces, as appeared by the event; _Christ_ alluding to that state
+of things, composed the parable of a weaker King leading his army against a
+stronger who made war upon him, _Luke_ xiv. 31. And I doubt not but divers
+other parables were formed upon other occasions, the history of which we
+have not.
+
+[2] Joseph. Antiq. lib. 3. c. 10.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. XII.
+
+_Of the Prophecy of the Scripture of Truth._
+
+The kingdoms represented by the second and third Beasts, or the Bear and
+Leopard, are again described by _Daniel_ in his last Prophecy written in
+the third year of _Cyrus_ over _Babylon_, the year in which he conquered
+_Persia_. For this Prophecy is a commentary upon the Vision of the Ram and
+He-Goat.
+
+_Behold_, saith [1] he, _there shall stand up yet three kings in _Persia__,
+[_Cyrus_, _Cambyses_, and _Darius Hystaspes_] _and the fourth_ [_Xerxes_]
+_shall be far richer than they all: and by his strength thro' his riches he
+shall stir up all against the realm of _Grecia_. And a mighty king_
+[_Alexander_ the great] _shall stand up, that shall rule with great
+dominion, and do according to his will. And when he shall stand up, his
+kingdom shall be broken, and shall be divided towards the four winds of
+heaven; and not to his posterity_ [but after their death,] _nor according
+to his dominion which he ruled: for his kingdom shall be pluckt up, even
+for others besides those_. _Alexander_ the great having conquered all the
+_Persian_ Empire, and some part of _India_, died at _Babylon_ a month
+before the summer Solstice, in the year of _Nabonassar_ 425: and his
+captains gave the monarchy to his bastard brother _Philip Arid�us_, a man
+disturbed in his understanding; and made _Perdiccas_ administrator of the
+kingdom. _Perdiccas_ with their consent made _Meleager_ commander of the
+army, _Seleucus_ master of the horse, _Craterus_ treasurer of the kingdom,
+_Antipater_ governor of _Macedon_ and _Greece_, _Ptolemy_ governor of
+_Egypt_; _Antigonus_ governor of _Pamphylia_, _Lycia_, _Lycaonia_, and
+_Phrygia major_; _Lysimachus_ governor of _Thrace_, and other captains
+governors of other Provinces; as many as had been so before in the days of
+_Alexander_ the great. The _Babylonians_ began now to count by a new _�ra_,
+which they called the _�ra_ of _Philip_, using the years of _Nabonassar_,
+and reckoning the 425th year of _Nabonassar_ to be the first year of
+_Philip_. _Roxana_ the wife of _Alexander_ being left big with child, and
+about three or four months after brought to bed of a son, they called him
+_Alexander_, saluted him King, and joined him with _Philip_, whom they had
+before placed in the throne. _Philip_ reigned three years under the
+administratorship of _Perdiccas_, two years more under the
+administratorship of _Antipater_, and above a year more under that of
+_Polyperchon_; in all six years and four months; and then was slain with
+his Queen _Eurydice_ in _September_ by the command of _Olympias_ the mother
+of _Alexander_ the great. The _Greeks_ being disgusted at the cruelties of
+_Olympias_, revolted to _Cassander_ the son and successor of _Antipater_.
+_Cassander_ affecting the dominion of _Greece_, slew _Olympias_; and soon
+after shut up the young king _Alexander_, with his mother _Roxana_, in the
+castle of _Amphipolis_, under the charge of _Glaucias_, _An. Nabonass._
+432. The next year _Ptolemy_, _Cassander_ and _Lysimachus_, by means of
+_Seleucus_, form'd a league against _Antigonus_; and after certain wars
+made peace with him, _An. Nabonass._ 438, upon these conditions: that
+_Cassander_ should command the forces of _Europe_ till _Alexander_ the son
+of _Roxana_ came to age; and that _Lysimachus_ should govern _Thrace_,
+_Ptolemy_ _Egypt_ and _Lybia_, and _Antigonus_ all _Asia_. _Seleucus_ had
+possest himself of _Mesopotamia_, _Babylonia_, _Sustana_ and _Media_, the
+year before. About three years after _Alexander_'s death he was made
+governor of _Babylon_ by _Antipater_; then was expelled by _Antigonus_; but
+now he recovered and enlarged his government over a great part of the
+_East_: which gave occasion to a new _�ra_, called _�ra Seleucidarum_. Not
+long after the peace made with _Antigonus_, _Diodorus_ saith the same
+_Olympic_ year; _Cassander_, seeing that _Alexander_ the son of _Roxana_
+grew up, and that it was discoursed thro'out _Macedonia_ that it was fit he
+should be set at liberty, and take upon him the government of his father's
+kingdom, commanded _Glaucias_ the governor of the castle to kill _Roxana_
+and the young king _Alexander_ her son, and conceal their deaths. Then
+_Polyperchon_ set up _Hercules_, the son of _Alexander_ the great by
+_Barsin�_, to be king; and soon after, at the sollicitation of _Cassander_,
+caused him to be slain. Soon after that, upon a great victory at sea got by
+_Demetrius_ the son of _Antigonus_ over _Ptolemy_, _Antigonus_ took upon
+himself the title of king, and gave the same title to his son. This was
+_An. Nabonass._ 441. After his example, _Seleucus_, _Cassander_,
+_Lysimachus_ and _Ptolemy_, took upon themselves the title and dignity of
+kings, having abstained from this honour while there remained any of
+_Alexander_'s race to inherit the crown. Thus the monarchy of the _Greeks_
+for want of an heir was broken into several kingdoms; four of which, seated
+_to the four winds of heaven_, were very eminent. For _Ptolemy_ reigned
+over _Egypt_, _Lybia_ and _Ethiopia_; _Antigonus_ over _Syria_ and the
+lesser _Asia_; _Lysimachus_ over _Thrace_; and _Cassander_ over _Macedon_,
+_Greece_ and _Epirus_, as above.
+
+_Seleucus_ at this time reigned over the nations which were beyond
+_Euphrates_, and belonged to the bodies of the two first Beasts; but after
+six years he conquered _Antigonus_, and thereby became possest of one of
+the four kingdoms. For _Cassander_ being afraid of the power of
+_Antigonus_, combined with _Lysimachus_, _Ptolemy_ and _Seleucus_, against
+him: and while _Lysimachus_ invaded the parts of _Asia_ next the
+_Hellespont_, _Ptolemy_ subdued _Phoenicia_ and _Coelosyria_, with the
+sea-coasts of _Asia_.
+
+_Seleucus_ came down with a powerful army into _Cappadocia_, and joining
+the confederate forces, fought _Antigonus_ in _Phrygia_ and flew him, and
+seized his kingdom, _An. Nabonass._ 447. After which _Seleucus_ built
+_Antioch_, _Seleucia_, _Laodicea_, _Apamea_, _Berrh�a_, _Edessa_, and other
+cities in _Syria_ and _Asia_; and in them granted the _Jews_ equal
+privileges with the _Greeks_.
+
+_Demetrius_ the son of _Antigonus_ retained but a small part of his
+father's dominions, and at length lost _Cyprus_ to _Ptolemy_; but
+afterwards killing _Alexander_, the son and successor of _Cassander_ king
+of _Macedon_, he seized his kingdom, _An. Nabonass._ 454. Sometime after,
+preparing a very great army to recover his father's dominions in _Asia_;
+_Seleucus_, _Ptolemy_, _Lysimachus_ and _Pyrrhus_ king of _Epirus_,
+combined against him; and _Pyrrhus_ invading _Macedon_, corrupted the army
+of _Demetrius_, put him to flight, seized his kingdom, and shared it with
+_Lysimachus_. After seven months, _Lysimachus_ beating _Pyrrhus_, took
+_Macedon_ from him, and held it five years and a half, uniting the kingdoms
+of _Macedon_ and _Thrace_. _Lysimachus_ in his wars with _Antigonus_ and
+_Demetrius_, had taken from them _Caria_, _Lydia_, and _Phrygia_; and had a
+treasury in _Pergamus_, a castle on the top of a conical hill in _Phrygia_,
+by the river _Caicus_, the custody of which he had committed to one
+_Philet�rus_, who was at first faithful to him, but in the last year of his
+reign revolted. For _Lysimachus_, having at the instigation of his wife
+_Arsinoe_, slain first his own son _Agathocles_, and then several that
+lamented him; the wife of _Agathocles_ fled with her children and brothers,
+and some others of their friends, and sollicited _Seleucus_ to make war
+upon _Lysimachus_; whereupon _Philet�rus_ also, who grieved at the death of
+_Agathocles_, and was accused thereof by _Arsinoe_, took up arms, and sided
+with _Seleucus_. On this occasion _Seleucus_ and _Lysimachus_ met and
+fought in _Phrygia_; and _Lysimachus_ being slain in the battel, lost his
+kingdom to _Seleucus_, _An. Nabonass._ 465. Thus the Empire of the
+_Greeks_, which at first brake into four kingdoms, became now reduced into
+two notable ones, henceforward called by _Daniel_ the kings of the _South_
+and _North_. For _Ptolemy_ now reigned over _Egypt_, _Lybia_, _Ethiopia_,
+_Arabia_, _Phoenicia_, _Coelosyria_, and _Cyprus_; and _Seleucus_, having
+united three of the four kingdoms, had a dominion scarce inferior to that
+of the _Persian_ Empire, conquered by _Alexander_ the great. All which is
+thus represented by _Daniel_:[2] _And the king of the_ South [_Ptolemy_]
+_shall be strong, and one of his Princes_ [_Seleucus_, one of _Alexander_'s
+Princes] _shall be strong above him, and have dominion; his dominion shall
+be a great dominion_.
+
+After _Seleucus_ had reigned seven months over _Macedon_, _Greece_,
+_Thrace_, _Asia_, _Syria_, _Babylonia_, _Media_, and all the _East_ as far
+as _India_; _Ptolemy Ceraunus_, the younger brother of _Ptolemy
+Philadelphus_ king of _Egypt_, slew him treacherously, and seized his
+dominions in _Europe_: while _Antiochus Soter_, the son of _Seleucus_,
+succeeded his father in _Asia_, _Syria_, and most of the _East_; and after
+nineteen or twenty years was succeeded by his son _Antiochus Theos_; who
+having a lasting war with _Ptolemy Philadelphus_, at length composed the
+same by marrying _Berenice_ the daughter of _Philadelphus_: but after a
+reign of fifteen years, his first wife _Laodice_ poisoned him, and set her
+son _Seleucus Callinicus_ upon the throne. _Callinicus_ in the beginning of
+his reign, by the impulse of his mother _Laodice_, besieged _Berenice_ in
+_Daphne_ near _Antioch_, and slew her with her young son and many of her
+women. Whereupon _Ptolemy Euergetes_, the son and successor of
+_Philadelphus_, made war upon _Callinicus_; took from him _Phoenicia_,
+_Syria_, _Cilicia_, _Mesopotamia_, _Babylonia_, _Sustana_, and some other
+regions; and carried back into _Egypt_ 40000 talents of silver, and 2500
+images of the Gods, amongst which were the Gods of _Egypt_ carried away by
+_Cambyses_. _Antiochus Hierax_ at first assisted his brother _Callinicus_,
+but afterwards contended with him for _Asia_. In the mean time _Eumenes_
+governor of _Pergamus_ beat _Antiochus_, and took from them both all _Asia_
+westward of mount _Taurus_. This was in the fifth year of _Callinicus_, who
+after an inglorious reign of 20 years was succeeded by his son _Seleucus
+Ceraunus_; and _Euergetes_ after four years more, _An. Nabonass._ 527, was
+succeeded by his son _Ptolemy Philopator_. All which is thus signified by
+_Daniel_:[3] _And in the end of years they_ [the kings of the _South_ and
+_North_] _shall join themselves together: for the king's daughter of the_
+South [_Berenice_] _shall come to the king of the _North_ to make an
+agreement, but she shall not retain the power of the arm; neither shall she
+stand, nor her seed, but she shall be delivered up, and he_ [_Callinicus_]
+_that brought her, and he whom she brought forth, and they that strengthned
+her in_ [those] _times_, [or defended her in the siege of _Daphne_.] _But
+out of a branch of her roots shall one stand up in his seat_ [her brother
+_Euergetes_] _who shall come with an army, and shall enter into the
+fortress_ [or fenced cities] _of the king of the _North_, and shall act
+against them and prevail: and shall carry captives into _Egypt_, their Gods
+with their Princes and precious vessels of silver and gold; and he shall
+continue some years after the king of the_ North.
+
+_Seleucus Ceraunus_, inheriting the remains of his father's kingdom, and
+thinking to recover the rest, raised a great army against the governor of
+_Pergamus_, now King thereof, but died in the third year of his reign. His
+brother and successor, _Antiochus Magnus_, carrying on the war, took from
+the King of _Pergamus_ almost all the lesser _Asia_, recovering also the
+Provinces of _Media_, _Persia_ and _Babylonia_, from the governors who had
+revolted: and in the fifth year of his reign invading _Coelosyria_, he with
+little opposition possest himself of a good part thereof; and the next year
+returning to invade the rest of _Coelosyria_ and _Phoenicia_, beat the army
+of _Ptolemy Philopator_ near _Berytus_; he then invaded _Palestine_ and the
+neighbouring parts of _Arabia_, and the third year returned with an army of
+78000: but _Ptolemy_ coming out of _Egypt_ with an army of 75000, fought
+and routed him at _Raphia_ near _Gaza_, between _Palestine_ and _Egypt_;
+and recovered all _Phoenicia_ and _Coelosyria_, _Ann. Nabonass._ 532. Being
+puffed up with this victory, and living in all manner of luxury, the
+_Egyptians_ revolted, and had wars with him, but were overcome; and in the
+broils sixty thousand _Egyptian Jews_ were slain. All which is thus
+described by _Daniel_: [4] _But his sons_ [_Seleucus Ceraunus_, and
+_Antiochus Magnus_, the sons of _Callinicus_] _shall be stirred up, and
+shall gather a great army; and he_ [_Antiochus Magnus_] _shall come
+effectually and overflow, and pass thro' and return, and_ [again the next
+year] _be stirred up_ [marching even] _to his fortress_, [the frontier
+towns of _Egypt_;] _and the King of the _South_ shall be moved with choler,
+and come forth_ [the third year] _and fight with him, even with the King of
+the _North_; and he_ [the King of the _North_] _shall lead forth a great
+multitude, but the multitude shall be given into his hand. And the
+multitude being taken away, his heart shall be lifted up, and he shall cast
+down many ten thousands; but he shall not be strengthned by it: for the
+king of the _North_ shall return_, &c.
+
+About twelve years after the battle between _Philopator_ and _Antiochus_,
+_Philopator_ died; and left his kingdom to his young son _Ptolemy
+Epiphanes_, a child of five years old. Thereupon _Antiochus Magnus_
+confederated with _Philip_ king of _Macedon_, that they should each invade
+the dominions of _Epiphanes_ which lay next to them. Hence arose a various
+war between _Antiochus_ and _Epiphanes_, each of them seizing _Phoenicia_
+and _Coelosyria_ by turns; whereby those countries were much afflicted by
+both parties. First _Antiochus_ seized them; then one _Scopas_ being sent
+with the army of _Egypt_, recovered them from _Antiochus_: the next year,
+_An. Nabonass._ 550, _Antiochus_ fought and routed _Scopas_ near the
+fountains of _Jordan_, besieged him in _Sidon_, took the city, and
+recovered _Syria_ and _Phoenicia_ from _Egypt_, the _Jews_ coming over to
+him voluntarily. But about three years after, preparing for a war against
+the _Romans_, he came to _Raphia_ on the borders of _Egypt_; made peace
+with _Epiphanes_, and gave him his daughter _Cleopatra_: next autumn he
+passed the _Hellespont_ to invade the cities of _Greece_ under the _Roman_
+protection, and took some of them; but was beaten by the _Romans_ the
+summer following, and forced to return back with his army into _Asia_.
+Before the end of the year the fleet of _Antiochus_ was beaten by the fleet
+of the _Romans_ near _Phoc�a_: and at the same time _Epiphanes_ and
+_Cleopatra_ sent an embassy to _Rome_ to congratulate the _Romans_ on their
+success against their father _Antiochus_, and to exhort them to prosecute
+the war against him into _Asia_. The _Romans_ beat _Antiochus_ again at sea
+near _Ephesus_, past their army over the _Hellespont_, and obtain'd a great
+victory over him by land, took from him all _Asia_ westward of mount
+_Taurus_, gave it to the King of _Pergamus_ who assisted them in the war;
+and imposed a large tribute upon _Antiochus_. Thus the King of _Pergamus_,
+by the power of the _Romans_, recovered what _Antiochus_ had taken from
+him; and _Antiochus_ retiring into the remainder of his kingdom, was slain
+two years after by the _Persians_, as he was robbing the Temple of _Jupiter
+Belus_ in _Elymais_, to raise money for the _Romans_. All which is thus
+described by _Daniel_. [5] _For the King of the_ North [_Antiochus_] _shall
+return, and shall set forth a multitude greater than the former; and shall
+certainly come, after certain years, with a great army and with much
+riches. And in those times there shall many stand up against the King of
+the_ South, [particularly the _Macedonians_;] _also the robbers of thy
+people_ [the _Samaritans_, &c.] _shall exalt themselves to establish the
+vision, but they shall fall. So the King of the _North_ shall come, and
+cast up a mount, and take the most fenced cities; and the arms of the
+_South_ shall not withstand, neither his chosen people, neither shall there
+he any strength to withstand. But he that cometh against him shall do
+according to his own will, and none shall stand before him: and he shall
+stand in the glorious land, which shall fail in his hand. He shall also set
+his face to go with the strength_ [or army] _of all his kingdom, and make
+an agreement with him_ [at _Raphia_;] _and he shall give him the daughter
+of women corrupting her; but she shall not stand his side, neither be for
+him. After this he shall turn his face unto the Isles, and shall take many:
+but a Prince for his own behalf_ [the _Romans_] _shall cause the reproach
+offered by him to cease; without his own reproach he shall cause it to turn
+upon him. Then he shall turn his face towards the fort of his own land: but
+he shall stumble and fall, and not be found._
+
+_Seleucus Philopator_ succeeded his father _Antiochus_, _Anno Nabonass._
+561, and reigned twelve years, but did nothing memorable, being sluggish,
+and intent upon raising money for the _Romans_ to whom he was tributary. He
+was slain by _Heliodorus_, whom he had sent to rob the Temple of
+_Jerusalem_. _Daniel_ thus describes his reign. [6] _Then shall stand up in
+his estate a raiser of taxes in the glory of the kingdom, but within few
+days be shall be destroyed, neither in anger nor in battle._
+
+A little before the death of _Philopator_, his son _Demetrius_ was sent
+hostage to _Rome_, in the place of _Antiochus Epiphanes_, the brother of
+_Philopator_; and _Antiochus_ was at _Athens_ in his way home from _Rome_,
+when _Philopator_ died: whereupon _Heliodorus_ the treasurer of the
+kingdom, stept into the throne. But _Antiochus_ so managed his affairs,
+that the _Romans_ kept _Demetrius_ at _Rome_; and their ally the King of
+_Pergamus_ expelled _Heliodorus_, and placed _Antiochus_ in the throne,
+while _Demetrius_ the right heir remained an hostage at _Rome_. _Antiochus_
+being thus made King by the friendship of the King of _Pergamus_ reigned
+powerfully over _Syria_ and the neighbouring nations: but carried himself
+much below his dignity, stealing privately out of his palace, rambling up
+and down the city in disguise with one or two of his companions; conversing
+and drinking with people of the lowest rank, foreigners and strangers;
+frequenting the meetings of dissolute persons to feast and revel; clothing
+himself like the _Roman_ candidates and officers, acting their parts like a
+mimick, and in publick festivals jesting and dancing with servants and
+light people, exposing himself by all manner of ridiculous gestures. This
+conduct made some take him for a madman, and call him _Antiochus_ [Greek:
+Epimen�s]. In the first year of his reign he deposed _Onias_ the
+high-Priest, and sold the high-Priesthood to _Jason_ the younger brother of
+_Onias_: for _Jason_ had promised to give him 440 talents of silver for
+that office, and 15 more for a licence to erect a place of exercise for the
+training up of youth in the fashions of the heathen; which licence was
+granted by the King, and put in execution by _Jason_. Then the King sending
+one _Apollonius_ into _Egypt_ to the coronation of _Ptolemy Philometor_,
+the young son of _Philometor_ and _Cleopatra_, and knowing _Philometor_ not
+to be well affected to his affairs in _Phoenicia_, provided for his own
+safety in those parts; and for that end came to _Joppa_ and _Jerusalem_,
+where he was honourably received; from thence he went in like manner with
+his little army to the cities of _Phoenicia_, to establish himself against
+_Egypt_, by courting the people, and distributing extraordinary favours
+amongst them. All which is thus represented by _Daniel_. [7] _And in his_
+[_Philometor_'s] _estate shall stand up a vile person, to whom they_ [the
+_Syrians_ who set up _Heliodorus_] _shall not give the honour of the
+kingdom. Yet he shall come in peaceably, and obtain the kingdom by
+flatteries_ [made principally to the King of _Pergamus_;] _and the arms_
+[which in favour of _Heliodorus_ oppose him] _shall be overflowed with a
+food from before him, and be broken; yea also_ [_Onias_ the high-Priest]
+_the Prince of the covenant. And after the league made with him,_ [the King
+of _Egypt_, by sending _Apollonius_ to his coronation] _he shall work
+deceitfully_ [against the King of _Egypt_,] _for he shall come up and shall
+become strong_ [in _Phoenicia _] _with a small people. And he shall enter
+into the quiet and plentiful cities of the Province_ [of _Phoenicia_;]
+_and_ [to ingratiate himself with the _Jews_ of _Phoenicia_ and _Egypt_,
+and with their friends] _he shall do that which his fathers have not done,
+nor his fathers fathers: he shall scatter among them the prey and the
+spoil, and the riches_ [exacted from other places;] _and shall forecast his
+devices against the strong holds_ [of _Egypt_] _even for a time._
+
+These things were done in the first year of his reign, _An. Nabonass._ 573.
+And thenceforward he forecast his devices against the strong holds of
+_Egypt_, until the sixth year. For three years after, that is in the fourth
+year of his reign, _Menelaus_ bought the high-Priesthood from _Jason_, but
+not paying the price was sent for by the King; and the King, before he
+could hear the cause, went into _Cilicia_ to appease a sedition there, and
+left _Andronicus_ his deputy at _Antioch_; in the mean time the brother of
+_Menelaus_, to make up the money, conveyed several vessels out of the
+Temple, selling some of them at _Tyre_, and sending others to _Andronicus_.
+When _Menelaus_ was reproved for this by _Onias_, he caused _Onias_ to be
+slain by _Andronicus_: for which fact the King at his return from _Cilicia_
+caused _Andronicus_ to be put to death. Then _Antiochus_ prepared his
+second expedition against _Egypt_, which he performed in the sixth year of
+his reign, _An. Nabonass._ 578: for upon the death of _Cleopatra_, the
+governors of her son the young King of _Egypt_ claimed _Phoenicia_ and
+_Coelosyria_ from him as her dowry; and to recover those countries raised a
+great army. _Antiochus_ considering that his father had not quitted the
+possession of those countries[8], denied they were her dowry; and with
+another great army met and fought the _Egyptians_ on the borders of
+_Egypt_, between _Pelusium_ and the mountain _Casius_. He there beat them,
+and might have destroyed their whole army, but that he rode up and down,
+commanding his soldiers not to kill them, but to take them alive: by which
+humanity he gained _Pelusium_, and soon after all _Egypt_; entring it with
+a vast multitude of foot and chariots, elephants and horsemen, and a great
+navy. Then seizing the cities of _Egypt_ as a friend, he marched to
+_Memphis_, laid the whole blame of the war upon _Eul�us_ the King's
+governor, entred into outward friendship with the young King, and took upon
+him to order the affairs of the kingdom. While _Aniochus_ was thus
+employ'd, a report being spread in _Phoenicia_ that he was dead, _Jason_ to
+recover the high-Priesthood assaulted _Jerusalem_ with above a thousand
+men, and took the city: hereupon the King thinking _Judea_ had revolted,
+came out of _Egypt_ in a furious manner, re-took the city, slew forty
+thousand of the people, made as many prisoners, and sold them to raise
+money; went into the Temple, spoiled it of its treasures, ornaments,
+utensils, and vessels of gold and silver, amounting to 1800 talents; and
+carried all away to _Antioch_. This was done in the year of _Nabonassar_
+578, and is thus described by _Daniel_. [9] _And he shall stir up his
+power, and his courage against the King of the _South_ with a great army;
+and the King of the _South_ shall be stirrd up to battle with a very great
+and mighty army; but he shall not stand: for they_, even _Antiochus_ and
+his friends, _shall forecast devices against him_, as is represented above;
+_yea, they that feed of the portion of his meat, shall_ betray and _destroy
+him, and his army shall be overthrown, and many shall fall down slain. And
+both these Kings hearts shall be to do mischief; and they_, being now made
+friends, _shall speak lyes at one table_, against the _Jews_ and against
+the holy covenant; _but it shall not prosper: for yet the end_, in which
+the setting up of the abomination of desolation is to prosper, _shall be at
+the time appointed. Then shall he return into his land with great riches,
+and his heart shall be against the holy covenant; and he shall act_,
+against it by spoiling the Temple, _and return into his own land_.
+
+The _Egyptians_ of _Alexandria_ seeing _Philometor_ first educated in
+luxury by the Eunuch _Eul�us_, and now in the hands of _Antiochus_, gave
+the kingdom to _Euergetes_, the younger brother of _Philometor_. Whereupon
+_Antiochus_ pretending to restore _Philometor_, made war upon _Euergetes_;
+beat him at sea, and besieged him and his sister _Cleopatra_ in
+_Alexandria_: while the besieged Princes sent to _Rome_ to implore the
+assistance of the Senate. _Antiochus_ finding himself unable to take the
+city that year, returned into _Syria_, leaving _Philometor_ at _Memphis_ to
+govern _Egypt_ in his absence. But _Philometor_ made friendship with his
+brother that winter; and _Antiochus_, returning the next spring _An.
+Nabonass._ 580, to besiege both the brothers in _Alexandria_, was met in
+the way by the _Roman_ Ambassadors, _Popilius L�na_, _C. Decimius_, and _C.
+Hostilius_: he offered them his hand to kiss, but _Popilius_ delivering to
+him the tables wherein the message of the Senate was written, bad him read
+those first. When he had read them, he replied he would consider with his
+friends what was fit to be done; but _Popilius_ drawing a circle about him,
+bad him answer before he went out of it: _Antiochus_, astonished at this
+blunt and unusual imperiousness, made answer he would do what the _Romans_
+demanded; and then _Popilius_ gave the King his hand to kiss, and he
+returned out of _Egypt_. The same year, _An. Nabonass._ 580, his captains
+by his order spoiled and slaughtered the _Jews_, profaned the Temple, set
+up the worship of the heathen Gods in all _Judea_, and began to persecute
+and make war upon those who would not worship them: which actions are thus
+described by _Daniel_. [10] _At the time appointed he shall come_ again
+_towards the _South_, but the latter shall not be as the former. For the
+ships of _Chittim_ shall come_, with an embassy from _Rome_, _against him.
+Therefore he shall be grieved, and return, and have indignation against the
+holy covenant. So shall he do; he shall even return, and have intelligence
+with them that forsake the holy covenant._
+
+In the same year that _Antiochus_ by the command of the _Romans_ retired
+out of _Egypt_, and set up the worship of the _Greeks_ in _Judea_; the
+_Romans_ conquered the kingdom of _Macedon_, the fundamental kingdom of the
+Empire of the _Greeks_, and reduced it into a _Roman_ Province; and thereby
+began to put an end to the reign of _Daniel_'s third Beast. This is thus
+exprest by _Daniel_. _And after him Arms_, that is the _Romans_, _shall
+stand up_. As [Hebrew: MMLK] signifies _after the King_, Dan. xi. 8; so
+[Hebrew: MMNW] may signify _after him_. _Arms_ are every where in this
+Prophecy of _Daniel_ put for the military power of a kingdom: and they
+stand up when they conquer and grow powerful. Hitherto _Daniel_ described
+the actions of the Kings of the _North_ and _South_; but upon the conquest
+of _Macedon_ by the _Romans_, he left off describing the actions of the
+_Greeks_, and began to describe those of the _Romans_ in _Greece_. They
+conquered _Macedon_, _Illyricum_ and _Epirus_, in the year of _Nabonassar_
+580. 35 years after, by the last will and testament of _Attalus_ the last
+King of _Pergamus_, they inherited that rich and flourishing kingdom, that
+is, all _Asia_ westward of mount _Taurus_; 69 years after they conquered
+the kingdom of _Syria_, and reduced it into a Province, and 34 years after
+they did the like to _Egypt_. By all these steps the _Roman_ Arms stood up
+over the _Greeks_: and after 95 years more, by making war upon the _Jews_,
+_they polluted the sanctuary of strength, and took away the daily
+sacrifice, and then placed the abomination of desolation_. For this
+abomination was placed after the days of _Christ_, _Math._ xxiv. 15. In the
+16th year of the Emperor _Adrian_, A.C. 132, they placed this abomination
+by building a Temple to _Jupiter Capitolinus_, where the Temple of God in
+_Jerusalem_ had stood. Thereupon the _Jews_ under the conduct of
+_Barchochab_ rose up in arms against the _Romans_, and in the war had 50
+cities demolished, 985 of their best towns destroyed, and 580000 men slain
+by the sword; and in the end of the war, A.C. 136, were banished _Judea_
+upon pain of death, and thenceforward the land remained desolate of its old
+inhabitants.
+
+In the beginning of the _Jewish_ war in _Nero_'s reign, the Apostles fled
+out of _Judea_ with their flocks; some beyond _Jordan_ to _Pella_ and other
+places, some into _Egypt_, _Syria_, _Mesopotamia_, _Asia minor_, and
+elsewhere. _Peter_ and _John_ came into _Asia_, and _Peter_ went thence by
+_Corinth_ to _Rome_; but _John_ staying in _Asia_, was banished by the
+_Romans_ into _Patmos_, as the head of a party of the _Jews_, whose nation
+was in war with the _Romans_. By this dispersion of the _Christian Jews_,
+the _Christian_ religion, which was already propagated westward as far as
+_Rome_, spred fast into all the _Roman_ Empire, and suffered many
+persecutions under it till the days of _Constantine_ the great and his
+sons: all which is thus described by _Daniel_. [11] _And such as do
+wickedly against the covenant, shall he_, who places the abomination,
+_cause to dissemble_, and worship the heathen Gods; _but the people_ among
+them _who do know their God, shall be strong and act. And they that
+understand among the people, shall instruct many: yet they shall fall by
+the sword, and by flame, and by captivity, and by spoil many days. Now when
+they shall fall, they shall be holpen with a little help, viz._ in the
+reign of _Constantine_ the great; _and_ at that time by reason of their
+prosperity, _many shall_ come over to them from among the heathen, and
+_cleave to them with dissimulation. But of those of understanding there
+shall_ still _fall to try_ God's people _by them and to purge_ them from
+the dissemblers, _and to make them white even to the time of the end:
+because it is yet for a time appointed._
+
+Hitherto the _Roman_ Empire continued entire; and under this dominion, the
+little horn of the He-Goat continued _mighty, but not by his own power_.
+But now, by the building of _Constantinople_, and endowing it with a Senate
+and other like privileges with _Rome_; and by the division of the _Roman_
+Empire into the two Empires of the _Greeks_ and _Latins_, headed by those
+two cities; a new scene of things commences, in which which [12] _a King_,
+the Empire of the _Greeks_, _doth according to his will, and_, by setting
+his own laws above the laws of God, _exalts and magnifies himself above
+every God, and speaks marvellous things against the God of Gods, and shall
+prosper till the indignation be accomplished.--Neither shall he regard the
+God of his fathers, nor the_ lawful _desire of women_ in matrimony, _nor
+any God, but shall magnify himself above all. And in his seat he shall
+honour _Mahuzzims__, that is, strong guardians, the souls of the dead;
+_even with a God whom his fathers knew not shall he honour them_, in their
+Temples, _with gold and silver, and with precious stones and valuable
+things_. All which relates to the overspreading of the _Greek_ Empire with
+Monks and Nuns, who placed holiness in abstinence from marriage; and to the
+invocation of saints and veneration of their reliques, and such like
+superstitions, which these men introduced in the fourth and fifth
+centuries. [13] _And at the time of the end the King of the_ South, or the
+Empire of the _Saracens_, _shall push at him_; _and the King of the_ North,
+or Empire of the _Turks_, _shall come against him like a whirlwind, with
+chariots and with horsemen, and with many ships_; _and be shall enter into
+the countries_ of the _Greeks_, _and shall overflow and pass over. He shall
+enter also into the glorious land, and many countries shall be overthrown;
+but these shall escape out of his hand, even _Edom_ and _Moab_, and the
+chief of the children_ Ammon: that is, those to whom his Caravans pay
+tribute. _He shall stretch forth his hand also upon the countries, and the
+land of _Egypt_ shall not escape_; _but he shall have power over the
+treasures of gold and silver, and over all the precious things of _Egypt_;
+and the _Lybians_ and _Ethiopians_ shall be at his steps_. All these
+nations compose the Empire of the _Turks_, and therefore this Empire is
+here to be understood by the King of the _North_. They compose also the
+body of the He-Goat; and therefore the Goat still reigns in his last horn,
+but not by his own power.
+
+Notes to Chap. XII.
+
+[1] Chap. xi. 2, 3, 4.
+
+[2] Chap. xi. 5.
+
+[3] Chap. xi. 6, 7, 8.
+
+[4] Chap. xi. 10, &c.
+
+[5] Chap. xi. 13-19.
+
+[6] Chap. xi. 20.
+
+[7] Chap. xi. 21, &c.
+
+[8] 2 Maccab. iii. 5, 8. & iv. 4.
+
+[9] Chap. xi. 25, &c.
+
+[10] Chap. xi. 29, 30.
+
+[11] Chap. xi. 32, &c.
+
+[12] Chap. xi. 36, &c.
+
+[13] Chap. xi. 40, &c.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. XIII.
+
+_Of the King who did according to his will, and magnified himself above
+every God, and honoured _Mahuzzims_, and regarded not the desire of women_.
+
+In the first ages of the Christian religion the Christians of every city
+were governed by a Council of Presbyters, and the President of the Council
+was the Bishop of the city. The Bishop and Presbyters of one city meddled
+not with the affairs of another city, except by admonitory letters or
+messages. Nor did the Bishops of several cities meet together in Council
+before the time of the Emperor _Commodus_: for they could not meet together
+without the leave of the _Roman_ governors of the Provinces. But in the
+days of that Emperor they began to meet in Provincial Councils, by the
+leave of the governors; first in _Asia_, in opposition to the
+_Cataphrygian_ Heresy, and soon after in other places and upon other
+occasions. The Bishop of the chief city, or Metropolis of the _Roman_
+Province, was usually made President of the Council; and hence came the
+authority of Metropolitan Bishops above that of other Bishops within the
+same Province. Hence also it was that the Bishop of _Rome_ in _Cyprian_'s
+days called himself the Bishop of Bishops. As soon as the Empire became
+Christian, the _Roman_ Emperors began to call general Councils out of all
+the Provinces of the Empire; and by prescribing to them what points they
+should consider, and influencing them by their interest and power, they set
+up what party they pleased. Hereby the _Greek_ Empire, upon the division of
+the _Roman_ Empire into the _Greek_ and _Latin_ Empires, became _the King
+who_, in matters of religion, _did according to his will_; _and_, in
+legislature, _exalted and magnified himself above every God_: and at
+length, by the seventh general Council, established the worship of the
+images and souls of dead men, here called _Mahuzzims_.
+
+The same King placed holiness in abstinence from marriage. _Eusebius_ in
+his Ecclesiastical history [1] tells us, that _Musanus_ wrote a tract
+against those who fell away to the heresy of the _Encratites_, which was
+then newly risen, and had introduced pernicious errors; and that _Tatian_,
+the disciple of _Justin_, was the author thereof; and that _Iren�us_ in his
+first book against heresies teaches this, writing of _Tatian_ and his
+heresy in these words: _A Saturnino & Marcione profecti qui vocantur
+Continentes, docuerunt non contrahendum esse matrimonium; reprobantes
+scilicet primitivum illud opificium Dei, & tacit� accusantes Deum qui
+masculum & f�minam condidit ad procreationem generis humani. Induxerunt
+etiam abstinentiam ab esu eorum qu� animalia appellant, ingratos se
+exhibentes ergo eum qui universa creavit Deum. Negant etiam primi hominis
+salutem. Atque hoc nuper apud illos excogitatum est, Tatiano quodam omnium
+primo hujus impietatis auctore: qui Justini auditor, quamdiu cum illo
+versatus est, nihil ejusmodi protulit. Post martyrium autem illius, ab
+Ecclesia se abrumpens, doctoris arrogantia elatus ac tumidus, tanquam
+pr�stantior c�teris, novam quandam formam doctrin� conflavit: �onas
+invisibiles commentus perinde ac Valentinus: asserens quoque cum Saturnino
+& Marcione, matrimonium nihil aliud esse quam corruptionem ac stuprum: nova
+pr�terea argumenta ad subvertendam Adami salutem excogitans. H�c Iren�us de
+H�resi qu� tunc viguit Encratitarum._ Thus far _Eusebius_. But altho the
+followers of _Tatian_ were at first condemned as hereticks by the name of
+_Encratites_, or _Continentes_; their principles could not be yet quite
+exploded: for _Montanus_ refined upon them, and made only second marriages
+unlawful; he also introduced frequent fastings, and annual, fasting days,
+the keeping of _Lent_, and feeding upon dried meats. The _Apostolici_,
+about the middle of the third century, condemned marriage, and were a
+branch of the disciples of _Tatian_. The _Hierocit�_ in _Egypt_, in the
+latter end of the third century, also condemned marriage. _Paul_ the
+_Eremite_ fled into the wilderness from the persecution of _Decius_, and
+lived there a solitary life till the reign of _Constantine_ the great, but
+made no disciples. _Antony_ did the like in the persecution of
+_Dioclesian_, or a little before, and made disciples; and many others soon
+followed his example.
+
+Hitherto the principles of the _Encratites_ had been rejected by the
+Churches; but now being refined by the Monks, and imposed not upon all men,
+but only upon those who would voluntarily undertake a monastic life, they
+began to be admired, and to overflow first the _Greek_ Church, and then the
+_Latin_ also, like a torrent. _Eusebius_ tells us, [2] that _Constantine_
+the great had those men in the highest veneration, who dedicated themselves
+wholly to the divine philosophy; and that he almost venerated the most holy
+company of Virgins perpetually devoted to God; being certain that the God
+to whom he had consecrated himself did dwell in their minds. In his time
+and that of his sons, this profession of a single life was propagated in
+_Egypt_ by _Antony_, and in _Syria_ by _Hilarion_; and spred so fast, that
+soon after the time of _Julian_ the Apostate a third part of the
+_Egyptians_ were got into the desarts of _Egypt_. They lived first singly
+in cells, then associated into _coenobia_ or convents; and at length came
+into towns, and filled the Churches with Bishops, Presbyters and Deacons.
+_Athanasius_ in his younger days poured water upon the hands of his master
+_Antony_; and finding the Monks faithful to him, made many of them Bishops
+and Presbyters in _Egypt_: and these Bishops erected new Monasteries, out
+of which they chose Presbyters of their own cities, and sent Bishops to
+others. The like was done in _Syria_, the superstition being quickly
+propagated thither out of _Egypt_ by _Hilarion_ a disciple of _Antony_.
+_Spiridion_ and _Epiphanius_ of _Cyprus_, _James_ of _Nisibis_, _Cyril_ of
+_Jerusalem_, _Eustathius_ of _Sebastia_ in _Armenia_, _Eusebius_ of
+_Emisa_, _Titus_ of _Bostra_, _Basilius_ of _Ancyra_, _Acacius_ of
+_C�sarea_ in _Palestine_, _Elpidius_ of _Laodicea_, _Melitius_ and
+_Flavian_ of _Antioch_, _Theodorus_ of _Tyre_, _Protogenes_ of _Carrh�_,
+_Acacius_ of _Berrh�a_, _Theodotus_ of _Hierapolis_, _Eusebius_ of
+_Chalcedon_, _Amphilochius_ of _Iconium_, _Gregory Nazianzen_, _Gregory
+Nyssen_, and _John Chrysostom_ of _Constantinople_, were both Bishops and
+Monks in the fourth century. _Eustathius_, _Gregory Nazianzen_, _Gregory
+Nyssen_, _Basil_, &c. had Monasteries of Clergymen in their cities, out of
+which Bishops were sent to other cities; who in like manner erected
+Monasteries there, till the Churches were supplied with Bishops out of
+these Monasteries. Hence _Jerome_, in a Letter written about the year 385,
+[3] saith of the Clergy: _Quasi & ipsi aliud sint quam Monachi, & non
+quicquid in Monachos dicitur redundet in Clericos qui patres sunt
+Monachorum. Detrimentum pecoris pastoris ignominia est_. And in his book
+against _Vigilantius_: _Quid facient Orientis Ecclesi�? Qu� aut Virgines
+Clericos accipiunt, aut Continentes, aut si uxores habuerint mariti esse
+desistunt_. Not long after even the Emperors commanded the Churches to
+chuse Clergymen out of the Monasteries by this Law.
+
+_Impp. Arcad & Honor. AA. C�sario PF. P._
+
+[4] _Si quos forte Episcopi deesse sibi Clericos arbitrantur, ex monachorum
+numero rectius ordinabunt: non obnoxios publicis privatisque rationibus cum
+invidia teneant, sed habeant jam probatos. Dat. _vii._ Kal. Aug. Honorio A.
+_iv._ & Eutychianio Coss._ A.C. 598. The _Greek_ Empire being now in the
+hands of these _Encratites_, and having them in great admiration, _Daniel_
+makes it a characteristick of the King who doth according to his will, that
+_he should not regard the desire of Women._
+
+Thus the Sect of the _Encratites_, set on foot by the _Gnosticks_, and
+propagated by _Tatian_ and _Montanus_ near the end of the second century;
+which was condemned by the Churches of that and the third century, and
+refined upon by their followers; overspread the _Eastern_ Churches in the
+fourth century, and before the end of it began to overspread the _Western_.
+Henceforward the Christian Churches having a form of godliness, but denying
+the power thereof, came into the hands of the _Encratites_: and the
+Heathens, who in the fourth century came over in great numbers to the
+Christians, embraced more readily this sort of Christianity, as having a
+greater affinity with their old superstitions, than that of the sincere
+Christians; who by the lamps of the seven Churches of _Asia_, and not by
+the lamps of the Monasteries, had illuminated the Church Catholic during
+the three first centuries.
+
+The _Cataphrygians_ brought in also several other superstitions: such as
+were the doctrine of Ghosts, and of their punishment in Purgatory, with
+prayers and oblations for mitigating that punishment, as _Tertullian_
+teaches in his books _De Anima_ and _De Monogamia_. They used also the sign
+of the cross as a charm. So _Tertullian_ in his book _de Corona militis_:
+_Ad omnem progressum atque promotum, ad omnem aditum & exitum, ad vestitum,
+ad calceatum, ad lavacra, ad mensas, ad lamina, ad cubilia, ad sedilia,
+quacunque nos conversatio exercet, frontem crucis signaculo terimus_. All
+these superstitions the Apostle refers to, where he saith: _Now the Spirit
+speaketh expresly, that in the latter times some shall depart from the
+faith, giving heed to seducing spirits, and doctrines of devils_, the
+_D�mons_ and Ghosts worshipped by the heathens, _speaking lyes in
+hypocrisy_, about their apparitions, the miracles done by them, their
+reliques, and the sign of the cross, _having consciences seared with a hot
+iron_; _forbidding to marry, and commanding to abstain from meats_, &c. 1
+Tim. iv. 1,2,3. From the _Cataphrygians_ these principles and practices
+were propagated down to posterity. _For the mystery of iniquity_ did
+_already work_ in the _Apostles_ days in the _Gnosticks_, continued to work
+very strongly in their offspring the _Tatianists_ and _Cataphrygians_, and
+was to work _till that man of sin_ should _be revealed_; _whose coming is
+after the working of Satan, with all power and signs, and lying wonders,
+and all deceivableness of unrighteousness_; coloured over with a form of
+_Christian_ godliness, but without the power thereof, 2 _Thess_. ii. 7-10.
+
+For tho some stop was put to the _Cataphrygian_ Christianity, by Provincial
+Councils, till the fourth century; yet the _Roman_ Emperors then turning
+_Christians_, and great multitudes of heathens coming over in outward
+profession, these found the _Cataphrygian_ Christianity more suitable to
+their old principles, of placing religion in outward forms and ceremonies,
+holy-days, and doctrines of Ghosts, than the religion of the sincere
+_Christians_: wherefore they readily sided with the _Cataphrygian
+Christians_, and established that Christianity before the end of the fourth
+century. By this means those of understanding, after they had been
+persecuted by the heathen Emperors in the three first centuries, and _were
+holpen with a little help_, by the conversion of _Constantine_ the great
+and his sons to the _Christian_ religion, fell under new persecutions, _to
+purge them_ from the dissemblers, _and to make them white, even to the time
+of the end_.
+
+Notes to Chap. XIII.
+
+[1] Lib. 4. c. 28, 29.
+
+[2] In vita Constantini, l. 4. c. 28.
+
+[3] Epist. 10.
+
+[4] L. 32. de Episcopis.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. XIV.
+
+_Of the _Mahuzzims_, honoured by the King who doth according to his will_.
+
+In scripture we are told of some _trusting in God_ and others _trusting in
+idols_, and that _God is our refuge, our strength, our defense_. In this
+sense God is _the rock of his people_, and false Gods are called _the rock
+of those that trust in them_, Deut. xxxii. 4, 15, 18, 30, 31, 37. In the
+same sense the Gods of _the King_ who _shall do according to his will_ are
+called _Mahuzzims_, munitions, fortresses, protectors, guardians, or
+defenders. _In his estate_, saith [1] _Daniel_, _shall he honour
+_Mahuzzims_; even with a God whom his fathers knew not, shall he honour
+them with gold and silver, and with precious stones, and things of value.
+Thus shall he do in the most strong holds_ or temples;--_and he shall cause
+them to rule over many, and divide the land_ among them _for a possession_.
+Now this came to pass by degrees in the following manner.
+
+_Gregory Nyssen_ [2] tells us, that after the persecution of the Emperor
+_Decius_, _Gregory_ Bishop of _Neoc�sarea_ in _Pontus_, _instituted among
+all people, as an addition or corollary of devotion towards God, that
+festival days and assemblies should be celebrated to them who had contended
+for the faith_, that is, to the _Martyrs_. And he adds this reason for the
+institution: _When he observed_, saith _Nyssen_, _that the simple and
+unskilful multitude, by reason of corporeal delights, remained in the error
+of idols; that the principal thing might be corrected among them, namely,
+that instead of their vain worship they might turn their eyes upon God; he
+permitted that at the memories of the holy Martyrs they might make merry
+and delight themselves, and be dissolved into joy_. The heathens were
+delighted with the festivals of their Gods, and unwilling to part with
+those delights; and therefore _Gregory_, to facilitate their conversion,
+instituted annual festivals to the _Saints_ and _Martyrs_. Hence it came to
+pass, that for exploding the festivals of the heathens, the principal
+festivals of the _Christians_ succeeded in their room: as the keeping of
+_Christmas_ with ivy and feasting, and playing and sports, in the room of
+the _Bacchanalia_ and _Saturnalia_; the celebrating of _May-day_ with
+flowers, in the room of the _Floralia_; and the keeping of festivals to the
+Virgin _Mary_, _John_ the Baptist, and divers of the Apostles, in the room
+of the solemnities at the entrance of the Sun into the signs of the
+_Zodiac_ in the old _Julian_ Calendar. In the same persecution of _Decius_,
+_Cyprian_ ordered the passions of the Martyrs in _Africa_ to be registred,
+in order to celebrate their memories annually with oblations and
+sacrifices: and _Felix_ Bishop of _Rome_, a little after, as _Platina_
+relates, _Martyrum gloria consulens, constituit at quotannis sacrificia
+eorum nomine celebrarentur_; "consulting the glory of the Martyrs, ordained
+that sacrifices should be celebrated annually in their name." By the
+pleasures of these festivals the _Christians_ increased much in number, and
+decreased as much in virtue, until they were _purged and made white_ by the
+persecution of _Dioclesian_. This was the first step made in the
+_Christian_ religion towards the veneration of the Martyrs: and tho it did
+not yet amount to an unlawful worship; yet it disposed the _Christians_
+towards such a further veneration of the dead, as in a short time ended in
+the invocation of Saints.
+
+The next step was the affecting to pray at the sepulchres of the Martyrs:
+which practice began in _Dioclesian_'s persecution. The Council of
+_Eliberis_ in _Spain_, celebrated in the third or fourth year of
+_Dioclesian_'s persecution, A.C. 305, hath these Canons. Can. 34. _Cereos
+per diem placuit in Coemeterio non incendi: inquietandi enim spiritus
+sanctorum non sunt. Qui h�c non observ�rint, arceantur ab Ecclesi�
+communione._ Can. 35. _Placuit prohiberi ne f�min� in Coemeterio
+pervigilent, e� quod s�pe sub obtentu orationis latent�r scelera
+committant._ Presently after that persecution, suppose about the year 314,
+the Council of _Laodicea_ in _Phrygia_, which then met for restoring the
+lapsed discipline of the Church, has the following Canons. Can. 9. _Those
+of the Church are not allowed to go into the _Coemeteries_ or _Martyries_,
+as they are called, of hereticks, for the sake of prayer or recovery of
+health: but such as go, if they be of the faithful, shall be excommunicated
+for a time_. Can. 34. _A _Christian_ must not leave the Martyrs of
+_Christ_, and go to false Martyrs_, that is, to the Martyrs of the
+hereticks; _for these are alien from God: and therefore let those be
+anathema who go to them_. Can. 51. _The birth-days of the Martyrs shall not
+be celebrated in _Lent_, but their commemoration shall be made on the
+Sabbath-days and Lords days_. The Council of _Paphlagonia_, celebrated in
+the year 324, made this Canon: _If any man being arrogant, abominates the
+congregations of the Martyrs, or the Liturgies performed therein, or the
+memories of the Martyrs, let him be anathema_. By all which it is manifest
+that the _Christians_ in the time of _Dioclesian_'s persecution used to
+pray in the _Coemeteries_ or burying-places of the dead; for avoiding the
+danger of the persecution, and for want of Churches, which were all thrown
+down: and after the persecution was over, continued that practice in honour
+of the Martyrs, till new Churches could be built: and by use affected it as
+advantageous to devotion, and for recovering the health of those that were
+sick. It also appears that in these burying-places they commemorated the
+Martyrs yearly upon days dedicated to them, and accounted all these
+practices pious and religious, and anathematized those men as arrogant who
+opposed them, or prayed in the _Martyries_ of the hereticks. They also
+lighted torches to the Martyrs in the day-time, as the heathens did to
+their Gods; which custom, before the end of the fourth century, prevailed
+much in the _West_. They sprinkled the worshipers of the Martyrs with
+holy-water, as the heathens did the worshipers of their Gods; and went in
+pilgrimage to see _Jerusalem_ and other holy places, as if those places
+conferred sanctity on the visiters. From the custom of praying in the
+_Coemeteries_ and _Martyries_, came the custom of translating the bodies of
+the Saints and Martyrs into such Churches as were new built: the Emperor
+_Constantius_ began this practice about the year 359, causing the bodies of
+_Andrew_ the Apostle, _Luke_ and _Timothy_, to be translated into a new
+Church at _Constantinople_: and before this act of _Constantius_, the
+_Egyptians_ kept the bodies of their Martyrs and Saints unburied upon beds
+in their private houses, and told stories of their souls appearing after
+death and ascending up to heaven, as _Athanasius_ relates in the life of
+_Antony_. All which gave occasion to the Emperor _Julian_, as _Cyril_
+relates, to accuse the _Christians_ in this manner: _Your adding to that
+antient dead man, Jesus, many new dead men, who can sufficiently abominate?
+You have filled all places with sepulchres and monuments, altho you are no
+where bidden to prostrate yourselves to sepulchres, and to respect them
+officiously._ And a little after: _Since _Jesus_ said that sepulchres are
+full of filthiness, how do you invoke God upon them_? and in another place
+he saith, that if _Christians_ had adhered to the precepts of the
+_Hebrews_, _they would have worshiped one God instead of many, and not a
+man, or rather not many unhappy men_: And that they _adored the wood of the
+cross, making its images on their foreheads, and before their houses_.
+
+After the sepulchres of Saints and Martyrs were thus converted into places
+of worship like the heathen temples, and the Churches into sepulchres, and
+a certain sort of sanctity attributed to the dead bodies of the Saints and
+Martyrs buried in them, and annual festivals were kept to them, with
+sacrifices offered to God in their name; the next step towards the
+invocation of Saints, was the attributing to their dead bodies, bones and
+other reliques, a power of working miracles, by means of the separate
+souls, who were supposed to know what we do or say, and to be able to do us
+good or hurt, and to work those miracles. This was the very notion the
+heathens had of the separate souls of their antient Kings and Heroes, whom
+they worshiped under the names of _Saturn_, _Rhea_, _Jupiter_, _Juno_,
+_Mars_, _Venus_, _Bacchus_, _Ceres_, _Osiris_, _Isis_, _Apollo_, _Diana_,
+and the rest of their Gods. For these Gods being male and female, husband
+and wife, son and daughter, brother and sister, are thereby discovered to
+be antient men and women. Now as the first step towards the invocation of
+Saints was set on foot by the persecution of _Decius_, and the second by
+the persecution of _Dioclesian_; so this third seems to have been owing to
+the proceedings of _Constantius_ and _Julian_ the Apostate. When _Julian_
+began to restore the worship of the heathen Gods, and to vilify the Saints
+and Martyrs; the _Christians_ of _Syria_ and _Egypt_ seem to have made a
+great noise about the miracles done by the reliques of the _Christian_
+Saints and Martyrs, in opposition to the powers attributed by _Julian_ and
+the heathens to their Idols. For _Sozomen_ and _Ruffinus_ tell us, that
+when he opened the heathen Temples, and consulted the Oracle of _Apollo
+Daphn�us_ in the suburbs of _Antioch_, and pressed by many sacrifices for
+an answer; the Oracle at length told him that the bones of the Martyr
+_Babylas_ which were buried there hinder'd him from speaking. By which
+answer we may understand, that some _Christian_ was got into the place
+where the heathen Priests used to speak thro' a pipe in delivering their
+Oracles: and before this, _Hilary_ in his book against _Constantius_,
+written in the last year of that Emperor, makes the following mention of
+what was then doing in the _East_ where he was. _Sine martyrio persequeris.
+Plus crudelitati vestr� _Nero_, _Deci_, _Maximiane_, debemus. Diabolum enim
+per vos vicimus. Sanctus ubique beatorum martyrum sanguis exceptus est, dum
+in his D�mones mugiunt, dum �gritudines depelluntur, dum miraculorum opera
+cernuntur, elevari sine laqueis corpora, & dispensis pede f�minis vestes
+non defluere in faciem, uri sine ignibus spiritus, confiteri sine
+interrogantis incremento fidei_. And _Gregory Nazianzen_, in his first
+Oration against the Emperor _Julian_ then reigning, writes thus: _Martyres
+non extimuisti quibus pr�clari honores & festa constituta, � quibus D�mones
+propelluntur & morbi curantur; quorum sunt apparitiones & pr�dictiones;
+quorum vel sola corpora idem possunt quod anim� sanct�, sive manibus
+contrectentur, sive honorentur: quorum vel sol� sanguinis gutt� atque
+exigua passionis signa idem possunt quod corpora. H�c non colis sed
+contemnis & aspernaris_. These things made the heathens in the reign of the
+same Emperor demolish the sepulchre of _John_ the Baptist in _Phoenicia_,
+and burn his bones; when several _Christians_ mixing themselves with the
+heathens, gathered up some of his remains, which were sent to _Athanasius_,
+who hid them in the wall of a Church; foreseeing by a prophetic spirit, as
+_Ruffinus_ tells us, that they might be profitable to future generations.
+
+The cry of these miracles being once set on foot, continued for many years,
+and encreased and grew more general. _Chrysostom_, in his second Oration on
+St. _Babylas_, twenty years after the silencing of the Oracle of _Apollo
+Daphn�us_ as above, viz. A.C. 382, saith of the miracles done by the Saints
+and their reliques [3]: _Nulla est nostri hujus Orbis seu regio, seu gens,
+seu urbs, ubi nova & inopinata miracula h�c non decantentur; qu� quidem si
+figmenta fuissent, prorsus in tantam hominum admirationem non venissent_.
+And a little after: _Abunde orationi nostr� fidem faciunt qu� quotidiana �
+martyribus miracula eduntur, magna affatim ad illa hominum multitudine
+affluente_. And in his 66th Homily, describing how the Devils were
+tormented and cast out by the bones of the Martyrs, he adds: _Ob eam causam
+multi plerumque Reges peregr� profecti sunt, ut hoc spectaculo fruerentur.
+Siquidem sanctorum martyrum templa futuri judicii vestigia & signa
+exhibent, dum nimirum D�mones flagris c�duntur, hominesque torquentur &
+liberantur. Vide qu� sanctorum vit� functorum vis sit?_ And _Jerom_ in his
+Epitaph on _Paula_, thus [4] mentions the same things. _Paula vidit
+Samariam: ibi siti sunt Elis�us & Abdias prophet�, & Joannes Baptista, ubi
+multis intremuit consternata miraculis. Nam cernebat variis d�mones rugire
+cruciatibus, & ante sepulchra sanctorum ululare, homines more luporum
+vocibus latrare canum, fremere leonum, sibilare serpentum, mugire taurorum,
+alios rotare caput & post tergum terram vertice tangere, suspensisque pede
+f�minis vestes non defluere in faciem_. This was about the year 384: and
+_Chrysostom_ in his Oration on the _Egyptian_ Martyrs, seems to make
+_Egypt_ the ringleader in these matters, saying [5]: _Benedictus Deus
+quandoquidem ex �gypto prodeunt martyres, ex �gypto illa cum Deo pugnante
+ac insanissima, & unde impia ora, unde lingu� blasphem�; ex �gypto martyres
+habentur; non in �gypto tantum, nec in finitima vicinaque regione, sed
+_UBIQUE TERRARUM_. Et quemadmodum in annon� summa ubertate, cum viderunt
+urbium incol� majorem quam usus habitatorum postulat esse proventum, ad
+peregrinas etiam urbes transmittunt: cum & suam comitatem & liberalitatem
+ostendant, tum ut pr�ter horum abundantiam cum facilitate res quibus
+indigent rursus ab illis sibi comparent: sic & �gyptii, quod attinet ad
+religionis athletas, fecerunt. Cum apud se multam eorum Dei benignitate
+copiam cernerent, nequaquam ingens Dei munus sua civitate concluserunt, sed
+in _OMNES TERR� PARTES_ bonorum thesauros effuderunt: cum ut suum in
+fratres amorem ostenderent, tum ut communem omnium dominum honore
+afficerent, ac civitati su� gloriam apud omnes compararent, totiusque
+terrarum _ORBIS_ esse _METROPOLIN_ declararent.--Sanctorum enim illorum
+corpora quovis adamantino & inexpugnabili muro tuti�s nobis urbem
+communiunt, & tanquam excelsi quidam scopuli undique prominentes, non horum
+qui sub sensus cadunt & oculis cernuntur hostium impetus propulsant tant�m,
+sed etiam invisibilium d�monum insidias, omnesque diaboli fraudes
+subvertunt ac dissipant.--Neque vero tant�m adversus hominum insidias aut
+adversus fallacias d�monum utilis nobis est h�c possessio, sed si nobis
+communis dominus ob peccatorum multitudinem irascatur, his objectis
+corporibus continuo poterimus eum propitium reddere civitati_. This Oration
+was written at _Antioch_, while _Alexandria_ was yet the Metropolis of the
+_East_, that is, before the year 381, in which _Constantinople_ became the
+Metropolis: and it was a work of some years for the _Egyptians_ to have
+distributed the miracle-working reliques of their Martyrs over all the
+world, as they had done before that year. _Egypt_ abounded most with the
+reliques of Saints and Martyrs, the _Egyptians_ keeping them embalmed upon
+beds even in their private houses; and _Alexandria_ was eminent above all
+other cities for dispersing them, so as on that account to acquire glory
+with all men, and manifest herself to be the _Metropolis_ of the world.
+_Antioch_ followed the example of _Egypt_, in dispersing the reliques of
+the forty Martyrs: and the examples of _Egypt_ and _Syria_ were soon
+followed by the rest of the world.
+
+The reliques of the forty Martyrs at _Antioch_ were distributed among the
+Churches before the year 373; for _Athanasius_ who died in that year, wrote
+an Oration upon them. This Oration is not yet published, but _Gerard
+Vossius_ saw it in MS. in the Library of Cardinal _Ascanius_ in _Italy_, as
+he says in his commentary upon the Oration of _Ephr�m Syrus_ on the same
+forty Martyrs. Now since the Monks of _Alexandria_ sent the reliques of the
+Martyrs of _Egypt_ into all parts of the earth, and thereby acquired glory
+to their city, and declared her in these matters the Metropolis of the
+whole world, as we have observed out of _Chrysostom_; it may be concluded,
+that before _Alexandria_ received the forty Martyrs from _Antioch_, she
+began to send out the reliques of her own Martyrs into all parts, setting
+the first example to other cities. This practice therefore began in _Egypt_
+some years before the death of _Athanasius_. It began when the
+miracle-working bones of _John_ the Baptist were carried into _Egypt_, and
+hid in the wall of a Church, _that they might be profitable to future
+generations_. It was restrained in the reign of _Julian_ the Apostate: and
+then it spred from _Egypt_ into all the Empire, _Alexandria_ being the
+Metropolis of the whole world, according to _Chrysostom_, for propagating
+this sort of devotion, and _Antioch_ and other cities soon following her
+example.
+
+In propagating these superstitions, the ring-leaders were the Monks, and
+_Antony_ was at the head of them: for in the end of the life of _Antony_,
+_Athanasius_ relates that these were his dying words to his disciples who
+then attended him. _Do you take care_, said _Antony_, _to adhere to
+_Christ_ in the first place, and then to the Saints, that after death they
+may receive you as friends and acquaintance into the everlasting
+tabernacles, Think upon these things, perceive these things; and if you
+have any regard to me, remember me as a father_. This being delivered in
+charge to the Monks by _Antony_ at his death, A.C. 356, could not but
+inflame their whole body with devotion towards the Saints, as the ready way
+to be received, by them into the eternal Tabernacles after death. Hence
+came that noise about the miracles, done by the reliques of the Saints in
+the time of _Constantius_: hence came the dispersion of the miracle-working
+reliques into all the Empire; _Alexandria_ setting the example, and being
+renowned, for it above all other cities. Hence it came to pass in the days
+of _Julian_, A.C. 362, that _Athanasius_ by a prophetic spirit, as
+_Ruffinus_ tells us, hid the bones of _John_ the Baptist from the Heathens,
+not in the ground to be forgotten, but in the hollow wall of a Church
+before proper witnesses, that they might _be profitable to future
+generations_. Hence also came the invocation of the Saints for doing such
+miracles, and for assisting men in their devotions, and mediating with God.
+For _Athanasius_, even from his youth, looked upon the dead Saints and
+Martyrs as mediators of our prayers: in his Epistle to _Marcellinus_,
+written in the days of _Constantine_ the great, he saith that the words of
+the _Psalms_ are not to be transposed or any wise changed, but to be
+recited and sung without any artifice, as they are written, _that the holy
+men who delivered them, knowing them to be their own words, may pray with
+us; or rather, that the Holy Ghost who spake in the holy men, seeing his
+own words with which he inspired them, may join_ with them _in assisting
+us_.
+
+Whilst _Egypt_ abounded with Monks above any other country, the veneration
+of the Saints began sooner, and spred faster there than in other places.
+_Palladius_ going into _Egypt_ in the year 388 to visit the Monasteries,
+and the sepulchres of _Apollonius_ and other Martyrs of _Thebais_ who had
+suffered under _Maximinus_, saith of them: _Iis omnibus Christiani fecerunt
+�dem unam, ubi nunc mult� virtutes peraguntur. Tanta autem fuit viri
+gratia, ut de iis qu� esset precatus statim exaudiretur, eum sic honorante
+servatore: quem etiam nos in martyrio precati vidimus, cum iis qui cum ipso
+fuerunt martyrio affecti; & Deum adorantes, eorum corpora salutavimus._
+_Eunapius_ also, a heathen, yet a competent witness of what was done in his
+own times, relating how the soldiers delivered the temples of _Egypt_ into
+the hands of the Monks, which was done in the year 389, rails thus in an
+impious manner at the Martyrs, as succeeding in the room of the old Gods of
+_Egypt_. _Illi ipsi, _milites_, Monachos Canobi quoque colloc�runt, ut pro
+Diis qui animo cernuntur, servos & quidem flagitiosos divinis honoribus
+percolerent, hominum mentibus ad cultum ceremoniasque obligatis. Ii namque
+condita & salita eorum capita, qui ob scelerum multitudinem � judicibus
+extremo judicio fuerant affecti, pro Divis ostentabant; iis genua
+submittebant, eos in Deorum numerum receptabant, ad illorum sepulchra
+pulvere sordibusque conspurcati. Martyres igitur vocabantur, & ministri
+quidem & legati arbitrique precum apud Deos; cum fuerint servilia infida &
+flagris pessim� subacta, qu� cicatrices scelerum ac nequiti� vestigia
+corporibus circumferunt; ejusmodi tamen Deos fert tellus_. By these
+instances we may understand the invocation of Saints was now of some
+standing in _Egypt_, and that it was already generally received and
+practised there by the common people.
+
+Thus _Basil_ a Monk, who was made Bishop of _C�sarea_ in the year 369, and
+died in the year 378, in his Oration on the Martyr _Mamas_, saith: _Be ye
+mindful of the Martyr; as many of you as have enjoyed him in your dreams,
+as many as in this place have been assisted by him in prayer, as many of
+you as upon invoking him by name have had him present in your works, as
+many as he has reduced into the way from wandering, as many as he has
+restored to health, as, many as have had their dead children restored by
+him to life, as many as have had their lives prolonged by him_: and a
+little after, he thus expresses the universality of this superstition in
+the regions of _Cappadocia_ and _Bithynia_: _At the memory of the Martyr_,
+saith he, _the whole region is moved; at his festival the whole city is
+transported with joy. Nor do the kindred of the rich turn aside to the
+sepulchres of their ancestors, but all go to the place of devotion._ Again,
+in the end of the Homily he prays, that _God would preserve the Church,
+thus fortified with the great towers of the Martyrs_: and in his Oration on
+the forty Martyrs; _These are they_, saith he, _who obtaining our country,
+like certain towers afford us safety against our enemies. Neither are they
+shut up in one place only, but being distributed are sent into many
+regions, and adorn many countries.--You have often endeavoured, you have
+often laboured to find one who might pray for you: here are forty, emitting
+one voice of prayer.--He that is in affliction flies to these, he that
+rejoices has recourse to these: the first, that he may be freed from evil,
+the last that he may continue in happiness. Here a woman praying for her
+children is heard; she obtains a safe return for her husband from abroad,
+and health for him in his sickness.--O ye common keepers of mankind, the
+best companions of our cares, suffragans and coadjutors of our prayers,
+most powerful embassadors to God_, &c. By all which it is manifest, that
+before the year 378, the Orations and Sermons upon the Saints went much
+beyond the bounds of mere oratorical flourishes, and that the common people
+in the _East_ were already generally corrupted by the Monks with
+Saint-worship.
+
+_Gregory Nazianzen_ a Monk, in his sixth Oration written A.C. 373, when he
+was newly made Bishop of _Sasima_, saith: _Let us purify ourselves to the
+Martyrs, or rather to the God of the Martyrs_: and a little after he calls
+the Martyrs _mediators of obtaining an ascension or divinity_. The same
+year, in the end of his Oration upon _Athanasius_ then newly dead, he thus
+invokes him: _Do thou look down upon us propitiously, and govern this
+people, as perfect adorers of the perfect Trinity, which in the Father,
+Son, and Holy Ghost, is contemplated and worshiped: if there shall be
+peace, preserve me, and feed my flock with me; but if war, bring me home,
+place me by thyself, and by those that are like thee; however great my
+request._ And in the end of the funeral Oration upon _Basil_, written A.C.
+378, he thus addresses him: _But thou, O divine and sacred Head, look down
+upon us from heaven; and by thy prayers either take away that thorn of the
+flesh which is given us by God for exercise, or obtain that we may bear it
+with courage, and direct all our life to that which is most fitting for us.
+When we depart this life, receive us there in your Tabernacles, that living
+together and beholding the holy and blessed Trinity more purely and
+perfectly, whereof we have now but an imperfect view, we may there come to
+the end of our desires, and receive this reward of the wars which we have
+waged or suffered_: and in his Oration upon _Cyprian_, not the Bishop of
+_Carthage_, but a _Greek_, he invokes him after the same manner; and tells
+us also how a pious Virgin named _Justina_, was protected by invoking the
+Virgin _Mary_, and how miracles were done by the ashes of _Cyprian_.
+
+_Gregory Nyssen_, another eminent Monk and Bishop, in the life of _Ephr�m
+Syrus_, tells how a certain man returning from a far country, was in great
+danger, by reason all the ways were intercepted by the armies of barbarous
+nations; but upon invoking _Ephr�m_ by name, and saying, _Holy _Ephr�m_
+assist me_, he escaped the danger, neglected the fear of death, and beyond
+his hope got safe home. In the end of this Oration _Gregory_ calls upon
+_Ephr�m_ after the following manner: _But thou, O Ephr�m, assisting now at
+the divine altar, and sacrificing to the Prince of life, and to the most
+holy Trinity, together with the Angels; remember us all, and obtain for us
+pardon of our sins, that we may enjoy the eternal happiness of the kingdom
+of heaven._ The same _Gregory_, in his Oration on the Martyr _Theodorus_
+written A.C. 381, thus describes the power of that Martyr, and the practice
+of the people. _This Martyr_, saith he, _the last year quieted the
+barbarous tempest, and put a stop to the horrid war of the fierce and cruel
+_Scythians_.--If any one is permitted to carry away the dust with which the
+tomb is covered, wherein the body of the Martyr rests; the dust is accepted
+as a gift, and gathered to be laid up as a thing of great price. For to
+touch the reliques themselves, if any such prosperous fortune shall at any
+time happen; how great a favour that is, and not to be obtained without the
+most earnest prayers, they know well who have obtained it. For as a living
+and florid body, they who behold it embrace it, applying to it the eyes,
+mouth, ears, and all the organs of sense; and then with affection pouring
+tears upon the Martyr, as if he was whole and appeared to them: they offer
+prayers with supplication, that he would intercede for them as an advocate,
+praying to him as an Officer attending upon God, and invoking him as
+receiving gifts whenever he will._ At length _Gregory_ concludes the
+Oration with this prayer: _O Theodorus, we want many blessings; intercede
+and beseech for thy country before the common King and Lord: for the
+country of the Martyr is the place of his passion, and they are his
+citizens, brethren and kindred, who have him, defend, adorn and honour him.
+We fear afflictions, we expect dangers: the wicked _Scythians_ are not far
+off, ready to make war against us. As a soldier fight for us, as a Martyr
+use liberty of speech for thy fellow-servants. Pray for peace, that these
+publick meetings may not cease, that the furious and wicked barbarian may
+not rage against the temples and altars, that the profane and impious may
+not trample upon the holy things. We acknowledge it a benefit received from
+thee, that we are preserved safe and entire, we pray for freedom from
+danger in time to come: and if there shall be need of greater intercession
+and deprecation, call together the choir of thy brethren the Martyrs, and
+in conjunction with them all intercede for us. Let the prayers of many just
+ones attone for the sins of the multitudes and the people; exhort _Peter_,
+excite _Paul_, and also _John_ the divine and beloved disciple, that they
+may be sollicitous for the Churches which they have erected, for which they
+have been in chains, for which they have undergone dangers and deaths; that
+the worship of idols may not lift up its head against us, that heresies may
+not spring up like thorns in the vineyard, that tares grown up may not
+choak the wheat, that no rock void of the fatness of true dew may be
+against us, and render the fruitful power of the word void of a root; but
+by the power of the prayers of thyself and thy companions, O admirable man
+and eminent among the Martyrs, the commonwealth of _Christians_ may become
+a field of corn_. The same _Gregory Nyssen_, in his sermon upon the death
+of _Meletius_ Bishop of _Antioch_, preached at _Constantinople_ the same
+year, A.C. 381, before the Bishops of all the _East_ assembled in the
+second general Council, spake thus of _Meletius_. _The Bridegroom_, saith
+he, _is not taken from us: he stands in the midst of us, tho we do not see
+him: he is a Priest in the most inward places, and face to face intercedes
+before God for us and the sins of the people_. This was no oratorical
+flourish, but _Gregory_'s real opinion, as may be understood by what we
+have cited out of him concerning _Ephr�m_ and _Theodorus_: and as _Gregory_
+preached this before the Council of _Constantinople_, you may thence know,
+saith [6] _Baronius_, that he professed what the whole Council, and
+therewith the whole Church of those parts believed, namely, that the Saints
+in heaven offer prayers for us before God.
+
+_Ephr�m Syrus_, another eminent Monk, who was contemporary with _Basil_,
+and died the same year; in the end of his Encomium or Oration upon _Basil_
+then newly dead, invokes him after this manner: _Intercede for me, a very
+miserable man; and recal me by thy intercessions, O father; thou who art
+strong, pray for me who am weak; thou who art diligent, for me who am
+negligent; thou who art chearful, for me who am heavy; thou who art wise,
+for me who am foolish. Thou who hast treasured up a treasure of all
+virtues, be a guide to me who am empty of every good work_. In the
+beginning of his Encomium upon the forty Martyrs, written at the same time,
+he thus invokes them: _Help me therefore, O ye Saints, with your
+intercession; and O ye beloved, with your holy prayers, that _Christ_ by
+his grace may direct my tongue to speak_, &c. and afterwards mentioning the
+mother of one of these forty Martyrs, he concludes the Oration with this
+prayer: _I entreat thee, O holy, faithful, and blessed woman, pray for me
+to the Saints, saying; Intercede ye that triumph in _Christ_, for the most
+little and miserable _Ephr�m_, that he may find mercy, and by the grace of
+_Christ_ may be saved_. Again, in his second Sermon or Oration on the
+praises of the holy Martyrs of _Christ_, he thus addresses them: _We
+entreat you most holy Martyrs, to intercede with the Lord for us miserable
+sinners, beset with the filthiness of negligence, that he would infuse his
+divine grace into us_: and afterwards, near the end of the same discourse;
+_Now ye most holy men and glorious Martyrs of God, help me a miserable
+sinner with your prayers, that in that dreadful hour I may obtain mercy,
+when the secrets of all hearts shall be made manifest. I am to day become
+to you, most holy Martyrs of _Christ_, as it were an unprofitable and
+unskilful cup-bearer: for I have delivered to the sons and brothers of your
+faith, a cup of the excellent wine of your warfare, with the excellent
+table of your victory, replenished with all sorts of dainties. I have
+endeavoured, with the whole affection and desire of my mind, to recreate
+your fathers and brothers, kindred and relations, who daily frequent the
+table. For behold they sing, and with exultation and jubilee glorify God,
+who has crown'd your virtues, by setting on your most sacred heads
+incorruptible and celestial crowns; they with excessive joy stand about the
+sacred reliques of your martyrdoms, wishing for a blessing, and desiring to
+bear away holy medicines both for the body and the mind. As good disciples
+and faithful ministers of our benign Lord and Saviour, bestow therefore a
+blessing on them all: and on me also, tho weak and feeble, who having
+received strength by your merits and intercessions, have with the whole
+devotion of my mind, sung a hymn to your praise and glory before your holy
+reliques. Wherefore I beseech you stand before the throne of the divine
+Majesty for me _Ephr�m_, a vile and miserable sinner, that by your prayers
+I may deserve to obtain salvation, and with you enjoy eternal felicity by
+the grace and benignity and mercy of our Lord and Saviour _Jesus Christ_,
+to whom with the Father and Holy Ghost be praise, honour and glory for ever
+and ever_. Amen.
+
+By what has been cited out of _Basil_, the two _Gregories_ and _Ephr�m_, we
+may understand that Saint-worship was established among the Monks and their
+admirers in _Egypt_, _Phoenicia_, _Syria_ and _Cappadocia_, before the year
+378, this being the year in which _Basil_ and _Ephr�m_ died. _Chrysostom_
+was not much later; he preached at _Antioch_ almost all the time of
+_Theodosius_ the great, and in his Sermons are many exhortations to this
+sort of superstition, as may be seen in the end of his Orations on S.
+_Julia_, on St. _Pelagia_, on the Martyr _Ignatius_, on the _Egyptian_
+Martyrs, on Fate and Providence, on the Martyrs in general, on St.
+_Berenice_ and St. _Prosdoce_, on _Juventinus_ and _Maximus_, on the name
+of _Coemetery_, &c. Thus in his Sermon on _Berenice_ and _Prosdoce_:
+_Perhaps_, saith he, _you are inflamed with no small love towards these
+Martyrs; therefore with this ardour let us fall down before their reliques,
+let us embrace their coffins. For the coffins of the Martyrs have great
+virtue, even as the bones of the Martyrs have great power. Nor let us only
+on the day of this festival, but also on other days apply to them, invoke
+them, and beseech them to be our patrons: for they have great power and
+efficacy, not only whilst alive, but also after death; and much more after
+death than before. For now they bear the marks or brands of _Christ_; and
+when they shew these marks, they can obtain all things of the King. Seeing
+therefore they abound with such efficacy, and have so much friendship with
+him; we also, when by continual attendance and perpetual visitation of them
+we have insinuated ourselves into their familiarity, may by their
+assistance obtain the mercy of God_.
+
+_Constantinople_ was free from these superstitions till _Gregory Nazianzen_
+came thither A.D. 379; but in a few years it was also inflamed with it.
+_Ruffinus_ [7] tells us, that when the Emperor _Theodosius_ was setting out
+against the tyrant _Eugenius_, which was in the year 394, he went about
+with the Priests and people to all the places of prayer; lay prostrate in
+haircloth before the shrines of the Martyrs and Apostles, and pray'd for
+assistance by the intercession of the Saints. _Sozomen_ [8] adds, that when
+the Emperor was marched seven miles from _Constantinople_ against
+_Eugenius_, he went into a Church which he had built to _John_ the Baptist,
+_and invoked the Baptist for his assistance. Chrysostom_ [9] says: _He that
+is clothed in purple, approaches to embrace these sepulchres; and laying
+aside his dignity, stands supplicating the Saints to intercede for him with
+God: and he who goes crowned with a diadem, offers his prayers to the
+tent-maker and the fisher-man as his Protestors._ And in [10] another
+place: _The cities run together to the sepulchres of the Martyrs, and the
+people are inflamed with the love of them_.
+
+This practice of sending reliques from place to place for working miracles,
+and thereby inflaming the devotion of the nations towards the dead Saints
+and their reliques, and setting up the religion of invoking their souls,
+lasted only till the middle of the reign of the Emperor _Theodosius_ the
+great; for he then prohibited it by the following Edict. _Humatum corpus,
+nemo ad alterum locum transferat; nemo Martyrem distrahat, nemo mercetur:
+Habeant ver� in potestate, si quolibet in loco sanctorum est aliquis
+conditus, pro ejus veneratione, quod _Martyrium_ vocandum sit, addant quod
+voluerint fabricarum. Dat. _iv._ Kal. Mart. Constantinopoli, Honorio nob.
+puero & Euodio Coss._ A.C. 386. After this they filled the fields and
+high-ways with altars erected to Martyrs, which they pretended to discover
+by dreams and revelations: and this occasioned the making the fourteenth
+Canon of the fifth Council of _Carthage_, A.C. 398. _Item placuit, ut
+altaria, qu� passim per agros aut vias, tanquam memori� Martyrum
+constituuntur, in quibus nullum corpus aut reliqui� Martyrum condit�
+probantur, ab Episcopis, qui illis locis pr�sunt, si fieri potest,
+evertantur. Si autem hoc propter tumultus populares non sinitur, plebes
+tamen admoneantur, ne illa loca frequentent, ut qui rect� sapiunt, null�
+ibi superstitione devincti teneantur. Et omnino nulla memoria Martyrum
+probabiliter acceptetur, nisi aut ibi corpus aut aliqu� cert� reliqui�
+sint, aut ubi origo alicujus habitationis, vel possessionis, vel passionis
+fidelissima origine traditur. Nam qu� per somnia, & per inanes quasi
+revelationes quorumlibet hominum ubique constituuntur altaria, omnimod�
+reprobentur._ These altars were for invoking the Saints or Martyrs buried
+or pretended to be buried under them. First they filled the Churches in all
+places with the reliques or pretended reliques of the Martyrs, for invoking
+them in the Churches; and then they filled the fields and high-ways with
+altars, for invoking them every where: and this new religion was set up by
+the Monks in all the _Greek_ Empire before the expedition of the Emperor
+_Theodosius_ against _Eugenius_, and I think before his above-mentioned
+Edict, A.C. 386.
+
+The same religion of worshiping _Mahuzzims_ quickly spred into the _Western
+Empire_ also: but _Daniel_ in this Prophecy describes chiefly the things
+done among the nations comprehended in the body of his third Beast.
+
+Notes to Chap. XIV.
+
+[1] Chap. xi. 38, 39
+
+[2] Orat. de vita Greg. Thaumaturg. T. 3. p. 574.
+
+[3] Vide Hom. 47. in. S. Julian.
+
+[4] Epist. 27. ad Eustochium.
+
+[5] Edit. Frontonis Duc�i, Tom. 1.
+
+[6] Ad. an. 381, Sect. 41.
+
+[7] Hist. Eccl. l. 2. c. 23.
+
+[8] L. 4. c. 24.
+
+[9] Hom. 66. ad. populum, circa finem. & Hom. 8, 27. in Matth. Hom. 42, 43.
+in Gen. Hom. 1. in 1 Thess.
+
+[10] Exposit. in Psal. 114. sub finem.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_The end of the first Part._
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART II.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+OBSERVATIONS
+UPON THE
+APOCALYPSE
+OF
+St. _JOHN_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. I.
+
+_Introduction, concerning the time when the _Apocalypse_ was written_.
+
+_Iren�us_ introduced an opinion that the _Apocalypse_ was written in the
+time of _Domitian_; but then he also postponed the writing of some others
+of the sacred books, and was to place the _Apocalypse_ after them: he might
+perhaps have heard from his master _Polycarp_ that he had received this
+book from _John_ about the time of _Domitian_'s death; or indeed _John_
+might himself at that time have made a new publication of it, from whence
+_Iren�us_ might imagine it was then but newly written. _Eusebius_ in his
+_Chronicle_ and _Ecclesiastical History_ follows _Irenoeus_; but afterwards
+[1] in his _Evangelical Demonstrations_, he conjoins the banishment of
+_John_ into _Patmos_, with the deaths of _Peter_ and _Paul_: and so do [2]
+_Tertullian_ and _Pseudo-Prochorus_, as well as the first author, whoever
+he was, of that very antient fable, that _John_ was put by _Nero_ into a
+vessel of hot oil, and coming out unhurt, was banished by him into
+_Patmos._ Tho this story be no more than a fiction yet was it founded on a
+tradition of the first churches, that _John_ was banished into _Patmos_ in
+the days of _Nero_. _Epiphanius_ represents the _Gospel of John_ as written
+in the time of _Domitian_, and the _Apocalypse_ even before that of _Nero_.
+[3] _Arethas_ in the beginning of his Commentary quotes the opinion of
+_Iren�us_ from _Eusebius_, but follows it not: for he afterwards affirms
+the _Apocalypse_ was written before the destruction of _Jerusalem_, and
+that former commentators had expounded the sixth seal of that destruction.
+
+With the opinion of the first Commentators agrees the tradition of the
+Churches of _Syria_, preserved to this day in the title of the _Syriac_
+Version of the _Apocalypse_, which title is this: _The Revelation which was
+made to _John_ the Evangelist by God in the Island _Patmos_, into which he
+was banished by _Nero_ the _C�sar__. The fame is confirmed by a story told
+by [4] _Eusebius_ out of _Clemens Alexandrinus_, and other antient authors,
+concerning a youth, whom _John_ some time after his return from _Patmos_
+committed to the care of the Bishop of a certain city. The Bishop educated,
+instructed, and at length baptized him; but then remitting of his care, the
+young man thereupon got into ill company, and began by degrees first to
+revel and grow vitious, then to abuse and spoil those he met in the night;
+and at last grew so desperate, that his companions turning a band of
+high-way men, made him their Captain: and, saith [5] _Chrysostom_, he
+continued their Captain a long time. At length _John_ returning to that
+city, and hearing what was done, rode to the thief; and, when he out of
+reverence to his old master fled, _John_ rode after him, recalled him, and
+restored him to the Church. This is a story of many years, and requires
+that _John_ should have returned from _Patmos_ rather at the death of
+_Nero_ than at that of _Domitian_; because between the death of _Domitian_
+and that of _John_ there were but two years and an half; and _John_ in his
+old age was [6] so infirm as to be carried to Church, dying above 90 years
+old, and therefore could not be then suppos'd able to ride after the thief.
+
+This opinion is further supported by the allusions in the _Apocalypse_ to
+the Temple and Altar, and holy City, as then standing; and to the
+_Gentiles_, who were soon after to tread under foot the holy City and
+outward Court. 'Tis confirmed also by the style of the _Apocalypse_ itself,
+which is fuller of _Hebraisms_ than his Gospel. For thence it may be
+gathered, that it was written when _John_ was newly come out of _Judea_,
+where he had been used to the _Syriac_ tongue; and that he did not write
+his Gospel, till by long converse with the _Asiatick_ Greeks he had left
+off most of the _Hebraisms_. It is confirmed also by the many false
+_Apocalypses_, as those of _Peter_, _Paul_, _Thomas_, _Stephen_, _Elias_
+and _Cerinthus_, written in imitation of the true one. For as the many
+false Gospels, false Acts, and false Epistles were occasioned by true ones;
+and the writing many false _Apocalypses_, and ascribing them to Apostles
+and Prophets, argues that there was a true Apostolic one in great request
+with the first _Christians_: so this true one may well be suppos'd to have
+been written early, that there may be room in the Apostolic age for the
+writing of so many false ones afterwards, and fathering them upon _Peter_,
+_Paul_, _Thomas_ and others, who were dead before _John_. _Caius_, who was
+contemporary with _Tertullian_, [7] tells us that _Cerinthus_ wrote his
+Revelations as a great Apostle, and pretended the visions were shewn him by
+Angels, asserting a _millennium_ of carnal pleasures at _Jerusalem_ after
+the resurrection; so that his _Apocalypse_ was plainly written in imitation
+of _John_'s: and yet he lived so early, that [8] he resisted the Apostles
+at _Jerusalem_ in or before the first year of _Claudius_, that is, 26 years
+before the death of _Nero_, and [9] died before _John_.
+
+These reasons may suffice for determining the time; and yet there is one
+more, which to considering men may seem a good reason, to others not. I'll
+propound it, and leave it to every man's judgment. The _Apocalypse_ seems
+to be alluded to in the Epistles of _Peter_ and that to the _Hebrews_ and
+therefore to have been written before them. Such allusions in the Epistle
+to the _Hebrews_, I take to be the discourses concerning the High-Priest in
+the heavenly Tabernacle, who is both Priest and King, as was _Melchisedec_;
+and those concerning the _word of God_, with the _sharp two-edged sword_,
+the [Greek: sabbatismos], or _millennial_ rest, the _earth whose end is to
+be burned_, suppose by the lake of fire, _the judgment and fiery
+indignation which shall devour the adversaries_, the _heavenly City which
+hath foundations whose builder and maker is God_, the _cloud of witnesses,
+mount _Sion_, heavenly _Jerusalem_, general assembly, spirits of just men
+made perfect_, viz. by the resurrection, and _the shaking of heaven and
+earth, and removing them, that the new heaven, new earth and new kingdom
+which cannot be shaken, may remain_. In the first of _Peter_ occur these:
+[10] _The Revelation of Jesus Christ_, twice or thrice repeated; [11] the
+_blood of _Christ_ as of a Lamb foreordained before the foundation of the
+world_; [12] the _spiritual building_ in heaven, 1 Pet. ii. 5. _an
+inheritance incorruptible and undefiled and that fadeth not away, reserved
+in heaven for us, who are kept unto the salvation, ready to be revealed in
+the last time_, 1 Pet. i. 4, 5. [13] the _royal Priesthood_, [14] the _holy
+Priesthood_, [15] the _judgment beginning at the house of God_, and [16]
+_the Church at _Babylon__. These are indeed obscurer allusions; but the
+second Epistle, from the 19th verse of the first Chapter to the end, seems
+to be a continued Commentary upon the _Apocalypse_. There, in writing to
+the _Churches in _Asia__, to whom _John_ was commanded to send this
+Prophecy, he tells them, they _have a more sure word of Prophecy_, to be
+heeded by them, _as a light that shineth in a dark place, until the day
+dawn, and the day-star arise in their hearts_, that is, until they begin to
+understand it: for _no Prophecy_, saith he, _of the scripture is of any
+private interpretation; the Prophecy came not in old time by the will of
+man, but holy men of God spake, as they were moved by the Holy Ghost.
+Daniel_ [17] himself professes that he understood not his own _Prophecies_;
+and therefore the Churches were not to expect the interpretation from their
+Prophet _John_, but to study the Prophecies themselves. This is the
+substance of what _Peter_ says in the first chapter; and then in the second
+he proceeds to describe, out of this _sure word of Prophecy_, how there
+should arise in the Church _false Prophets_, or _false teachers_, expressed
+collectively in the _Apocalypse_ by the name of the false Prophet; who
+should _bring in damnable heresies, even denying the Lord that bought
+them_, which is the character of _Antichrist_: _And many_, saith he, _shall
+follow their lusts_ [18]; they that dwell on the earth [19] shall be
+deceived by the false Prophet, and be made drunk with the wine of the
+Whore's fornication, _by reason of whom the way of truth shall be
+blasphemed_; for [20] the Beast is full of blasphemy: _and thro'
+covetousness shall they with feigned words make merchandize of you_; for
+these are the Merchants of the Earth, who trade with the great Whore, and
+their merchandize [21] is all things of price, with the bodies and souls of
+men: _whose judgment--lingreth not, and their damnation [22] slumbreth
+not_, but shall surely come upon them at the last day suddenly, as the
+flood upon _the old world_, and fire and brimstone upon _Sodom_ and
+_Gomorrha_, when the just shall be delivered [23] like _Lot_; for _the Lord
+knoweth how to deliver the godly out of temptations, and to reserve the
+unjust unto the day of judgment to be punished_, in the lake of fire; _but
+chiefly them that walk after the flesh in the lust of uncleanness_, [24]
+being made drunk with the wine of the Whore's fornication; who _despise
+dominion, and are not afraid to blaspheme glories_; for the beast opened
+his mouth against God [25] to blaspheme his name and his tabernacle, and
+them that dwell in heaven. _These, as natural brute beasts_, the ten-horned
+beast and two-horned beast, or false Prophet, _made to be taken and
+destroyed_, in the lake of fire, _blaspheme the things they understand
+not_:--they count it pleasure to riot in the day-time--sporting themselves
+with their own deceivings, while they feast [26] with you, _having eyes
+full of an [27] Adulteress_: for the kingdoms of the beast live deliciously
+with the great Whore, and the nations are made drunk with the wine of her
+fornication. They _are gone astray, following the way of _Balaam_, the son
+of _Beor_, who loved the wages of unrighteousness_, the false Prophet [28]
+who taught _Balak_ to cast a stumbling-block before the children of
+_Israel_. _These are_, not fountains of living water, but _wells without
+water_; not such clouds of Saints as the two witnesses ascend in, but
+_clouds that are carried with a tempest_, &c. Thus does the author of this
+Epistle spend all the second Chapter in describing the qualities of the
+_Apocalyptic_ Beasts and false Prophet: and then in the third he goes on to
+describe their destruction more fully, and the future kingdom. He saith,
+that because the coming of _Christ_ should be long deferred, they should
+scoff, saying, _where is the promise of his coming_? Then he describes the
+sudden coming of the day of the Lord upon them, _as a thief in the night_,
+which is the _Apocalyptic_ phrase; and the _millennium_, or _thousand
+years_, which _are with God but as a day_; the _passing away of the old
+heavens_ and earth, by a conflagration in the lake of fire, and our
+_looking for new heavens and a new earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness_.
+
+Seeing therefore _Peter_ and _John_ were Apostles of the circumcision, it
+seems to me that they staid with their Churches in _Judea_ and _Syria_ till
+the _Romans_ made war upon their nation, that is, till the twelfth year of
+_Nero_; that they then followed the main body of their flying Churches into
+_Asia_, and that _Peter_ went thence by _Corinth_ to _Rome_; that the
+_Roman_ Empire looked upon those Churches as enemies, because _Jews_ by
+birth; and therefore to prevent insurrections, secured their leaders, and
+banished _John_ into _Patmos_. It seems also probable to me that the
+_Apocalypse_ was there composed, and that soon after the Epistle to the
+_Hebrews_ and those of _Peter_ were written to these Churches, with
+reference to this Prophecy as what they were particularly concerned in. For
+it appears by these Epistles, that they were written in times of general
+affliction and tribulation under the heathens, and by consequence when the
+Empire made war upon the _Jews_; for till then the heathens were at peace
+with the _Christian Jews_, as well as with the rest. The Epistle to the
+_Hebrews_, since it mentions _Timothy_ as related to those _Hebrews_, must
+be written to them after their flight into _Asia_, where _Timothy_ was
+Bishop; and by consequence after the war began, the _Hebrews_ in _Judea_
+being strangers to _Timothy_. _Peter_ seems also to call _Rome_ _Babylon_,
+as well with respect to the war made upon _Judea_, and the approaching
+captivity, like that under old _Babylon_, as with respect to that name in
+the _Apocalypse_: and in writing _to the strangers scattered thro'out
+_Pontus_, _Galatia_, _Cappadocia_, _Asia_ and _Bithynia__, he seems to
+intimate that they were the strangers newly scattered by the _Roman_ wars;
+for those were the only strangers there belonging to his care.
+
+This account of things agrees best with history when duly rectified. For
+[29] _Justin_ and [30] _Iren�us_ say, that _Simon Magus_ came to _Rome_ in
+the reign of _Claudius_, and exercised juggling tricks there.
+_Pseudo-Clemens_ adds, that he endeavoured there to fly, but broke his neck
+thro' the prayers of _Peter_. Whence [31] _Eusebius_, or rather his
+interpolator _Jerom_, has recorded, that _Peter_ came to _Rome_ in the
+second year of _Claudius_: but [32] _Cyril_ Bishop of _Jerusalem_,
+_Philastrius_, _Sulpitius_, _Prosper_, _Maximus Taurinensis_, and
+_Hegesippus junior_, place this victory of _Peter_ in the time of _Nero_.
+Indeed the antienter tradition was, that _Peter_ came to _Rome_ in the days
+of this Emperor, as may be seen in [33] _Lactantius_. _Chrysostom_ [34]
+tells us, that the Apostles continued long in _Judea_, and that then being
+driven out by the _Jews_ they went to the _Gentiles_. This dispersion was
+in the first year of the _Jewish_ war, when the _Jews_, as _Josephus_ tells
+us, began to be tumultuous and violent in all places. For all agree that
+the Apostles were dispersed into several regions at once; and _Origen_ has
+set down the time, [35] telling us that in the beginning of the _Judaic_
+war, the Apostles and disciples of our Lord were scattered into all
+nations; _Thomas_ into _Parthia_, _Andrew_ into _Scythia_, _John_ into
+_Asia_, and _Peter_ first into _Asia_, where he preacht to the dispersion,
+and thence into _Italy_. [36] _Dionysius Corinthius_ saith, that _Peter_
+went from _Asia_ by _Corinth_ to _Rome_, and all antiquity agrees that
+_Peter_ and _Paul_ were martyred there in the end of _Nero_'s reign. _Mark_
+went with _Timothy_ to _Rome_, 2 _Tim._ iv. 11. _Colos._ iv. 10. _Sylvanus_
+was _Paul_'s assistant; and by the companions of _Peter_, mentioned in his
+first Epistle, we may know that he wrote from _Rome_; and the Antients
+generally agree, that in this Epistle he understood _Rome_ by _Babylon_.
+His second Epistle was writ to the same dispersed strangers with the first,
+2 _Pet._ iii. 1. and therein he saith, that _Paul_ had writ of the same
+things to them, and also in his other Epistles, _ver._ 15, 16. Now as there
+is no Epistle of _Paul_ to these strangers besides that to the _Hebrews_,
+so in this Epistle, chap. x. 11, 12. we find at large all those things
+which _Peter_ had been speaking of, and here refers to; particularly the
+_passing away of the old heavens and earth_, and _establishing an
+inheritance immoveable_, with an exhortation to grace, because _God_, to
+the wicked, _is a consuming fire_, Heb. xii. 25, 26, 28, 29.
+
+Having determined the time of writing the _Apocalyse_, I need not say much
+about the truth of it, since it was in such request with the first ages,
+that many endeavoured to imitate it, by feigning _Apocalypses_ under the
+Apostles names; and the Apostles themselves, as I have just now shewed,
+studied it, and used its phrases; by which means the style of the Epistle
+to the _Hebrews_ became more mystical than that of _Paul_'s other Epistles,
+and the style of _John_'s Gospel more figurative and majestical than that
+of the other Gospels. I do not apprehend that _Christ_ was called the word
+of God in any book of the New Testament written before the _Apocalypse_;
+and therefore am of opinion, the language was taken from this Prophecy, as
+were also many other phrases in this Gospel, such as those of _Christ_'s
+being _the light which enlightens the world, the lamb of God which taketh
+away the sins of the world, the bridegroom, he that testifieth, he that
+came down from heaven, the Son of God_, &c. _Justin Martyr_, who within
+thirty years after _John_'s death became a _Christian_, writes expresly
+that _a certain man among the _Christians_ whose name was _John_, one of
+the twelve Apostles of _Christ_, in the Revelation which was shewed him,
+prophesied that those who believed in _Christ_ should live a thousand years
+at _Jerusalem__. And a few lines before he saith: _But I, and as many as
+are _Christians_, in all things right in their opinions, believe both that
+there shall be a resurrection of the flesh, and a thousand years life at
+_Jerusalem_ built, adorned and enlarged_. Which is as much as to say, that
+all true _Christians_ in that early age received this Prophecy: for in all
+ages, as many as believed the thousand years, received the _Apocalypse_ as
+the foundation of their opinion: and I do not know one instance to the
+contrary. _Papias_ Bishop of _Hierapolis_, a man of the Apostolic age, and
+one of _John_'s own disciples, did not only teach the doctrine of the
+thousand years, but also [37] asserted the _Apocalypse_ as written by
+divine inspiration. _Melito_, who flourished next after _Justin_, [38]
+wrote a commentary upon this Prophecy; and he, being Bishop of _Sardis_ one
+of the seven Churches, could neither be ignorant of their tradition about
+it, nor impose upon them. _Iren�us_, who was contemporary with _Melito_,
+wrote much upon it, and said, that _the number 666 was in all the antient
+and approved copies; and that he had it also confirmed to him by those who
+had seen _John_ face to face_, meaning no doubt his master _Polycarp_ for
+one. At the same time [39] _Theophilus_ Bishop of _Antioch_ asserted it,
+and so did _Tertullian_, _Clemens Alexandrinus_, and _Origen_ soon after;
+and their contemporary _Hippolytus_ the Martyr, Metropolitan of the
+_Arabians_, [40] wrote a commentary upon it. All these were antient men,
+flourishing within a hundred and twenty years after _John_'s death, and of
+greatest note in the Churches of those times. Soon after did _Victorinus
+Pictaviensis_ write another commentary upon it; and he lived in the time of
+_Dioclesian_. This may surely suffice to shew how the _Apocalypse_ was
+received and studied in the first ages: and I do not indeed find any other
+book of the New Testament so strongly attested, or commented upon so early
+as this. The Prophecy said: _Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear
+the words of this Prophecy, and keep the things which are written therein._
+This animated the first _Christians_ to study it so much, till the
+difficulty made them remit, and comment more upon the other books of the
+New Testament. This was the state of the _Apocalypse_, till the thousand
+years being misunderstood, brought a prejudice against it: and _Dionysius_
+of _Alexandria_, noting how it abounded with barbarisms, that is with
+_Hebraisms_, promoted that prejudice so far, as to cause many _Greeks_ in
+the fourth century to doubt of the book. But whilst the _Latins_, and a
+great part of the _Greeks_, always retained the _Apocalypse_, and the rest
+doubted only out of prejudice, it makes nothing against its authority.
+
+This Prophecy is called _the Revelation_, with respect to _the scripture of
+truth_, which _Daniel_ [41] was commanded to _shut up and seal, till the
+time of the end_. _Daniel_ sealed it _until the time of the end_; and until
+that time comes, the Lamb is opening the seals: and afterwards the two
+Witnesses prophesy out of it a long time in sack-cloth, before they ascend
+up to heaven in a cloud. All which is as much as to say, that these
+Prophecies of _Daniel_ and _John_ should not be understood till the time of
+the end: but then some should prophesy out of them in an afflicted and
+mournful state for a long time, and that but darkly, so as to convert but
+few. But in the very end, the Prophecy should be so far interpreted as to
+convince many. _Then_, saith _Daniel, many shall run to and fro, and
+knowledge shall be encreased_. For the Gospel must be preached in all
+nations before the great tribulation, and end of the world. The
+palm-bearing multitude, which come out of this great tribulation, cannot be
+innumerable out of all nations, unless they be made so by the preaching of
+the Gospel before it comes. There must be a stone cut out of a mountain
+without hands, before it can fall upon the toes of the Image, and become a
+great mountain and fill the earth. An Angel must fly thro' the midst of
+heaven with the everlasting Gospel to preach to all nations, before
+_Babylon_ falls, and the Son of man reaps his harvest. The two Prophets
+must ascend up to heaven in a cloud, before the kingdoms of this world
+become the kingdoms of _Christ_. 'Tis therefore a part of this Prophecy,
+that it should not be understood before the last age of the world; and
+therefore it makes for the credit of the Prophecy, that it is not yet
+understood. But if the last age, the age of opening these things, be now
+approaching, as by the great successes of late Interpreters it seems to be,
+we have more encouragement than ever to look into these things. If the
+general preaching of the Gospel be approaching, it is to us and our
+posterity that those words mainly belong: [42] _In the time of the end the
+wise shall understand, but none of the wicked shall understand. [43]
+Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear the words of this Prophecy,
+and keep those things which are written therein._
+
+The folly of Interpreters has been, to foretel times and things by this
+Prophecy, as if God designed to make them Prophets. By this rashness they
+have not only exposed themselves, but brought the Prophecy also into
+contempt. The design of God was much otherwise. He gave this and the
+Prophecies of the Old Testament, not to gratify men's curiosities by
+enabling them to foreknow things, but that after they were fulfilled they
+might be interpreted by the event, and his own Providence, not the
+Interpreters, be then manifested thereby to the world. For the event of
+things predicted many ages before, will then be a convincing argument that
+the world is governed by providence. For as the few and obscure Prophecies
+concerning _Christ_'s first coming were for setting up the _Christian_
+religion, which all nations have since corrupted; so the many and clear
+Prophecies concerning the things to be done at _Christ_'s second coming,
+are not only for predicting but also for effecting a recovery and
+re-establishment of the long-lost truth, and setting up a kingdom wherein
+dwells righteousness. The event will prove the _Apocalypse_; and this
+Prophecy, thus proved and understood, will open the old Prophets, and all
+together will make known the true religion, and establish it. For he that
+will understand the old Prophets, must begin with this; but the time is not
+yet come for understanding them perfectly, because the main revolution
+predicted in them is not yet come to pass. _In the days of the voice of the
+seventh Angel, when he shall begin to sound, the mystery of God shall be
+finished, as he hath declared to his servants the Prophets_: and then _the
+kingdoms of this world shall become the kingdoms of our Lord and his
+_Christ_, and he shall reign for ever_, Apoc. x. 7. xi. 15. There is
+already so much of the Prophecy fulfilled, that as many as will take pains
+in this study, may see sufficient instances of God's providence: but then
+the signal revolutions predicted by all the holy Prophets, will at once
+both turn mens eyes upon considering the predictions, and plainly interpret
+them. Till then we must content ourselves with interpreting what hath been
+already fulfilled.
+
+Amongst the Interpreters of the last age there is scarce one of note who
+hath not made some discovery worth knowing; and thence I seem to gather
+that God is about opening these mysteries. The success of others put me
+upon considering it; and if I have done any thing which may be useful to
+following writers, I have my design.
+
+Notes to Chap. I.
+
+[1] Dem. Evang. l. 3.
+
+[2] Vid. _Pamelium_ in notis ad _Tertull._ de Pr�scriptionbus, n. 215 &
+_Hieron_ l. 1. contra _Jovinianum_, c. 14. Edit._Erasmi._
+
+[3] Areth. c. 18, 19.
+
+[4] Hist. Eccl. l. 3. c. 23.
+
+[5] Chrysost. ad Theodorum lapsum.
+
+[6] Hieron. in Epist. ad Gal. l. 3. c. 6.
+
+[7] Apud Euseb. Eccl. Hist. l. 3. c. 28. Edit. _Valesii_.
+
+[8] Epiphan. H�res. 28.
+
+[9] Hieron. adv. Lucif.
+
+[10] 1 Pet. i. 7, 13. iv. 13. & v. 1.
+
+[11] Apoc. xiii. 8.
+
+[12] Apoc. xxi.
+
+[13] Apoc. i. 6. & v. 10.
+
+[14] Apoc. xx. 6.
+
+[15] Apoc. xx. 4, 12.
+
+[16] Apoc. xvii.
+
+[17] Dan. viii. 15, 16, 27. & xii. 8, 9.
+
+[18] [Greek: aselgeias], _in many of the best MSS._
+
+[19] Apoc. xiii. 7, 12.
+
+[20] Apoc. xiii. 1, 5, 6.
+
+[21] Apoc. xviii. 12, 13.
+
+[22] Apoc. xix. 20.
+
+[23] Apoc. xxi. 3, 4.
+
+[24] Apoc. ix. 21. _and_ xvii. 2.
+
+[25] Apoc. xiii. 6.
+
+[26] Apoc. xviii. 3, 7, 9.
+
+[27] [Greek: moichalidos].
+
+[28] Apoc. ii. 14.
+
+[29] Apol. ad Antonin. Pium.
+
+[30] H�res. l. 1. c. 20. Vide etiam Tertullianum, Apol. c. 13.
+
+[31] Euseb. Chron.
+
+[32] Cyril Catech. 6. Philastr. de h�res. cap. 30. Sulp. Hist. l. 2.
+Prosper de promiss. dimid. temp. cap. 13. Maximus serm. 5. in Natal. Apost.
+Hegesip. l. 2. c. 2.
+
+[33] Lactant de mortib. Persec. c. 2.
+
+[34] Hom. 70. in Matt. c. 22.
+
+[35] Apud Euseb. Eccl. Hist. l. 2. c. 25.
+
+[36] Euseb. Hist. l. 2. c. 25.
+
+[37] Arethas in Pro�m. comment. in Apoc.
+
+[38] Euseb. Hist. l. 4. cap. 26. Hieron.
+
+[39] Euseb. Hist. l. 4. c. 24.
+
+[40] Hieron.
+
+[41] Dan. x. 21. xii. 4, 9.
+
+[42] Dan. xii. 4, 10.
+
+[43] Apoc. i. 3.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. II.
+
+_Of the relation which the _Apocalypse_ of _John_ hath to the Book of the
+Law of _Moses_, and to the worship of God in the Temple_.
+
+The _Apocalypse_ of _John_ is written in the same style and language with
+the Prophecies of _Daniel_, and hath the same relation to them which they
+have to one another, so that all of them together make but one complete
+Prophecy; and in like manner it consists of two parts, an introductory
+Prophecy, and an Interpretation thereof.
+
+The Prophecy is distinguish'd into seven successive parts, by the opening
+of the seven seals of the book which _Daniel_ was commanded to seal up: and
+hence it is called the _Apocalypse_ or _Revelation_ of _Jesus Christ_. The
+time of the seventh seal is sub-divided into eight successive parts by the
+silence in heaven for half an hour, and the sounding of seven trumpets
+successively: and the seventh trumpet sounds to the battle of the great day
+of God Almighty, whereby _the kingdoms of this world become the kingdoms of
+the Lord and of his Christ_, and those are destroyed that destroyed the
+earth.
+
+The Interpretation begins with the words, _And the temple of God was opened
+in heaven, and there was seen in his temple the Ark of his Testament_: and
+it continues to the end of the Prophecy. The Temple is the scene of the
+visions, and the visions in the Temple relate to the feast of the seventh
+month: for the feasts of the _Jews_ were typical of things to come. The
+Passover related to the first coming of _Christ_, and the feasts of the
+seventh month to his second coming: his first coming being therefore over
+before this Prophecy was given, the feasts of the seventh month are here
+only alluded unto.
+
+On the first day of that month, in the morning, the High-Priest dressed the
+lamps: and in allusion hereunto, this Prophecy begins with a vision of one
+like _the Son of man_ in the High-Priest's habit, appearing as it were in
+the midst of the seven golden candlesticks, or over against the midst of
+them, dressing the lamps, which appeared like a rod of seven stars in his
+right hand: and this dressing was perform'd by the sending seven Epistles
+to the Angels or Bishops of the seven Churches of _Asia_, which in the
+primitive times illuminated the Temple or Church Catholick. These Epistles
+contain admonitions against the approaching Apostacy, and therefore relate
+to the times when the Apostacy began to work strongly, and before it
+prevailed. It began to work in the Apostles days, and was to continue
+working _till the man of sin should be revealed_. It began to work in the
+disciples of _Simon_, _Menander_, _Carpocrates_, _Cerinthas_, and such
+sorts of men as had imbibed the metaphysical philosophy of the _Gentiles_
+and _Cabalistical Jews_, and were thence called _Gnosticks_. _John_ calls
+them _Antichrists_, saying that in his days there were many _Antichrists_.
+But these being condemned by the Apostles, and their immediate disciples,
+put the Churches in no danger during the opening of the first four seals.
+The visions at the opening of these seals relate only to the civil affairs
+of the heathen _Roman_ Empire. So long the Apostolic traditions prevailed,
+and preserved the Church in its purity: and therefore the affairs of the
+Church do not begin to be considered in this Prophecy before the opening of
+the fifth seal. She began then to decline, and to want admonitions; and
+therefore is admonished by these Epistles, till the Apostacy prevailed and
+took place, which was at the opening of the seventh seal. The admonitions
+therefore in these seven Epistles relate to the state of the Church in the
+times of the fifth and sixth seals. At the opening of the fifth seal, the
+Church is purged from hypocrites by a great persecution. At the opening of
+the sixth, that which letted is taken out of the way, namely the heathen
+_Roman_ Empire. At the opening of the seventh, the man of sin is revealed.
+And to these times the seven Epistles relate.
+
+The seven Angels, to whom these Epistles were written, answer to the seven
+_Amarc-holim_, who were Priests and chief Officers of the Temple, and had
+jointly the keys of the gates of the Temple, with those of the Treasuries,
+and the direction, appointment and oversight of all things in the Temple.
+
+After the lamps were dresed, _John_ saw _the door_ of the Temple _opened_;
+and by _the voice as it were of a trumpet_, was called up to the eastern
+gate of the great court, to see the visions: and _behold a throne was set_,
+viz. the mercy-seat upon the Ark of the Testament, which the _Jews_
+respected as _the throne of God between the _Cherubims__, _Exod._ xxv. 2.
+_Psal._ xcix. 1. _And he that sat on it was to look upon like _Jasper_ and
+_Sardine_ stone_, that is, of an olive colour, the people of _Judea_ being
+of that colour. _And_, the Sun being then in the _East, a rainbow was about
+the throne_, the emblem of glory. _And round about the throne were four and
+twenty seats_; answering to the chambers of the four and twenty Princes of
+the Priests, twelve on the south side, and twelve on the north side of the
+Priests Court. _And upon the seats were four and twenty Elders sitting,
+clothed in white rayment, with crowns on their heads_; representing the
+Princes of the four and twenty courses of the Priests clothed in linen.
+_And out of the throne proceeded lightnings and thunderings, and voices_,
+viz. the flashes of the fire upon the Altar at the morning-sacrifice, and
+the thundering voices of those that sounded the trumpets, and sung at the
+Eastern gate of the Priests Court; for these being between _John_ and the
+throne appeared to him as proceeding from the throne. _And there were seven
+lamps of fire burning_, in the Temple, _before the throne, which are the
+seven spirits of God_, or Angels of the seven Churches, represented in the
+beginning of this Prophecy by seven stars. _And before the throne was a sea
+of glass clear as chrystal_; the brazen sea between the porch of the Temple
+and the Altar, filled with clear water. _And in the midst of the throne,
+and round about the throne, were four Beasts full of eyes before and
+behind_: that is, one Beast before the throne and one behind it, appearing
+to _John_ as in the midst of the throne, and one on either side in the
+circle about it, to represent by the multitude of their eyes the people
+standing in the four sides of the peoples court. _And the first Beast was
+like a lion, and the second was like a calf, and the third had the face of
+a man, and the fourth was like a flying eagle_. The people of _Israel_ in
+the wilderness encamped round about the tabernacle, and on the east side
+were three tribes under the standard of _Judah_, on the west were three
+tribes under the standard of _Ephraim_, on the south were three tribes
+under the standard of _Reuben_, and on the north were three tribes under
+the standard of _Dan_, _Numb._ ii. And the standard of _Judah_ was a Lion,
+that of _Ephraim_ an Ox, that of _Reuben_ a Man, and that of _Dan_ an
+Eagle, as the _Jews_ affirm. Whence were framed the hieroglyphicks of
+_Cherubims_ and _Seraphims_, to represent the people of _Israel_. A
+_Cherubim_ had one body with four faces, the faces of a Lion, an Ox, a Man
+and an Eagle, looking to the four winds of heaven, without turning about,
+as in _Ezekiel_'s vision, chap. i. And four _Seraphims_ had the same four
+faces with four bodies, one face to every body. The four Beasts are
+therefore four _Seraphims_ standing in the four sides of the peoples court;
+the first in the eastern side with the head of a Lion, the second in the
+western side with the head of an Ox, the third in the southern side with
+the head of a Man, the fourth in the northern side with the head of an
+Eagle: and all four signify together the twelve tribes of _Israel_, out of
+whom the hundred forty and four thousand were sealed, _Apoc._ vii. 4. _And
+the four Beasts had each of them six wings_, two to a tribe, in all twenty
+and four wings, answering to the twenty and four stations of the people.
+_And they were full of eyes within_, or under their wings. _And they rest
+not day and night_, or at the morning and evening-sacrifices, _saying,
+holy, holy, holy Lord God Almighty, which was, and is, and is to come_.
+These animals are therefore the Seraphims, which appeared to _Isaiah_ [1]
+in a vision like this of the _Apocalypse_. For there also the Lord sat upon
+a throne in the temple; and the Seraphims each with six wings cried, _Holy,
+holy, holy Lord God of hosts. And when those animals give glory and honour
+and thanks to him that sitteth upon the throne, who liveth for ever and
+ever, the four and twenty Elders_ go into the Temple, and there _fall down
+before him that sitteth on the throne, and worship him that liveth for ever
+and ever, and cast their crowns before the throne, saying, Thou art worthy,
+O Lord, to receive glory and honour and power: for thou hast created all
+things, and for thy pleasure they are and were created_. At the morning and
+evening-sacrifices, so soon as the sacrifice was laid upon the Altar, and
+the drink-offering began to be poured out, the trumpets sounded, and the
+_Levites_ sang by course three times; and every time when the trumpets
+sounded, the people fell down and worshiped. Three times therefore did the
+people worship; to express which number, the Beasts cry _Holy, holy, holy_:
+and the song being ended, the people prayed standing, till the solemnity
+was finished. In the mean time the Priests went into the Temple, and there
+fell down before him that sat upon the throne, and worshiped.
+
+_And _John_ saw, in the right hand of him that sat upon the throne, a book
+written within and on the backside, sealed with seven seals_, viz. the book
+which _Daniel_ was commanded to seal up, and which is here represented by
+the prophetic book of the Law laid up on the right side of the Ark, as it
+were in the right hand of him that sat on the throne: for the festivals and
+ceremonies of the Law prescribed to the people in this book, adumbrated
+those things which were predicted in the book of _Daniel_; and the writing
+within and on the backside of this book, relates to the synchronal
+Prophecies. [2] _And none was found worthy to open the book_ but the Lamb
+of God. _And lo, in the midst of the throne and of the four Beasts, and in
+the midst of the Elders_, that is, at the foot of the Altar, _stood a lamb
+as it had been slain_, the morning-sacrifice; _having seven horns_, which
+are the seven Churches, _and seven eyes, which are the seven spirits of God
+sent forth into all the earth. And he came, and took the book out of the
+right hand of him that sat upon the throne: And when he had taken the book,
+the four Beasts and four and twenty Elders fell down before the Lamb,
+having every one of them harps, and golden vials full of odours, which are
+the prayers of saints. And they sung a new song, saying, Thou art worthy to
+take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and hast
+redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and
+people, and nation; and hast made us, unto our God, Kings and Priests, and
+we shall reign on the earth._ The Beasts and Elders therefore represent the
+primitive _Christians_ of all nations; and the worship of these
+_Christians_ in their Churches is here represented under the form of
+worshiping God and the Lamb in the Temple: God for his benefaction in
+creating all things, and the Lamb for his benefaction in redeeming us with
+his blood: God as sitting upon the throne and living for ever, and the Lamb
+as exalted above all by the merits of his death. _And I heard_, saith
+_John_, _the voice of many Angels round about the throne, and the Beasts
+and the Elders: and the number of them was ten thousand times ten thousand,
+and thousands of thousands; saying with a loud voice, Worthy is the Lamb
+that was slain to receive power, and riches, and wisdom, and strength, and
+honour, and glory, and blessing. And every creature which is in heaven, and
+on the earth, and under the earth, and such as are in the sea, and all that
+are in them, heard I, saying, Blessing, honour, glory, and power, be unto
+him that sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb for ever and ever. And
+the four Beasts said, _Amen_. And the four and twenty Elders fell down and
+worshiped him that liveth for ever and ever._ This was the worship of the
+primitive _Christians_.
+
+It was the custom for the High-Priest, seven days before the fast of the
+seventh month, to continue constantly in the Temple, and study the book of
+the Law, that he might be perfect in it against the day of expiation;
+wherein the service, which was various and intricate, was wholly to be
+performed by himself; part of which service was reading the Law to the
+people: and to promote his studying it, there were certain Priests
+appointed by the _Sanhedrim_ to be with him those seven days in one of his
+chambers in the Temple, and there to discourse with him about the Law, and
+read it to him, and put him in mind of reading and studying it himself.
+This his opening and reading the Law those seven days, is alluded unto in
+the Lamb's opening the seals. We are to conceive that those seven days
+begin in the evening before each day; for the _Jews_ began their day in the
+evening, and that the solemnity of the fast begins in the morning of the
+seventh day.
+
+The seventh seal was therefore opened on the day of expiation, and then
+_there was silence in heaven for half an hour. And an Angel_, the
+High-Priest, _stood at the Altar, having a golden Censer; and there was
+given him much incense, that he should offer it with the prayers of all
+Saints, upon the golden Altar which was before the throne_. The custom was
+on other days, for one of the Priests to take fire from the great Altar in
+a silver Censer; but on this day, for the High-Priest to take fire from the
+great Altar in a golden Censer: and when he was come down from the great
+Altar, he took incense from one of the Priests who brought it to him, and
+went with it to the golden Altar: and while he offered the incense, the
+people prayed without in silence, which is the silence in heaven for half
+an hour. When the High-Priest had laid the incense on the Altar, he carried
+a Censer of it burning in his hand, into the most holy place before the
+Ark. _And the smoke of the incense, with the prayers of the Saints,
+ascended up before God out of the Angel's hand._ On other days there was a
+certain measure of incense for the golden Altar: on this day there was a
+greater quantity for both the Altar and the most holy Place, and therefore
+it is called _much incense_. After this _the Angel took the Censer, and
+filled it with fire from the_ great _Altar, and cast it into the earth_;
+that is, by the hands of the Priests who belong to his mystical body, he
+cast it to the earth without the Temple, for burning the Goat which was the
+Lord's lot. _And_ at this and other concomitant sacrifices, until the
+evening-sacrifice was ended, _there were voices, and thundrings, and
+lightnings, and an earthquake_; that is, the voice of the High-Priest
+reading the Law to the people, and other voices and thundrings from the
+trumpets and temple-musick at the sacrifices, and lightnings from the fire
+of the Altar.
+
+The solemnity of the day of expiation being finished, the seven Angels
+found their trumpets at the great sacrifices of the seven days of the feast
+of tabernacles; and at the same sacrifices, the seven thunders utter their
+voices, which are the musick of the Temple, and singing of the _Levites_,
+intermixed with the soundings of the trumpets: and the seven Angels pour
+out their vials of wrath, which are the drink-offerings of those
+sacrifices.
+
+When six of the seals were opened, _John_ said: [3] _And after these
+things_, that is, after the visions of the sixth seal, _I saw four Angels
+standing on the four corners of the earth, holding the four winds of the
+earth, that the wind should not blow on the earth, nor on the sea, nor on
+any tree. And I saw another Angel ascending from the _East_, having the
+seal of the living God: and he cried with a loud voice to the four Angels,
+to whom it was given to hurt the earth and the sea, saying, Hurt not the
+earth, nor the sea, nor the trees, till we have sealed the servants of our
+God in their foreheads._ This sealing alludes to a tradition of the _Jews_,
+that upon the day of expiation all the people of _Israel_ are sealed up in
+the books of life and death. For the _Jews_ in their _Talmud_ [4] tell us,
+that in the beginning of every new year, or first day of the month _Tisri_,
+the seventh month of the sacred year, three books are opened in judgment;
+the book of life, in which the names of those are written who are perfectly
+just; the book of death, in which the names of those are written who are
+Atheists or very wicked; and a third book, of those whose judgment is
+suspended till the day of expiation, and whose names are not written in the
+book of life or death before that day. The first ten days of this month
+they call the penitential days; and all these days they fast and pray very
+much, and are very devout, that on the tenth day their sins may be
+remitted, and their names may be written in the book of life; which day is
+therefore called the day of expiation. And upon this tenth day, in
+returning home from the Synagogues, they say to one another, _God the
+creator seal you to a good year_. For they conceive that the books are now
+sealed up, and that the sentence of God remains unchanged henceforward to
+the end of the year. The same thing is signified by the two Goats, upon
+whose foreheads the High-Priest yearly, on the day of expiation, lays the
+two lots inscribed, _For God_ and _For _Azazel__; God's lot signifying the
+people who are sealed with the name of God in their foreheads; and the lot
+_Azazel_, which was sent into the wilderness, representing those who
+receive the mark and name of the Beast, and go into the wilderness with the
+great Whore.
+
+The servants of God being therefore sealed in the day of expiation, we may
+conceive that this sealing is synchronal to the visions which appear upon
+opening the seventh seal; and that when the Lamb had opened six of the
+seals and seen the visions relating to the inside of the sixth, he looked
+on the backside of the seventh leaf, and then saw _the four Angels holding
+the four winds of heaven, and another Angel ascending from the _East_ with
+the seal of God_. Conceive also, that the Angels which held the four winds
+were the first four of the seven Angels, who upon opening the seventh seal
+were seen standing before God; and that upon their holding the winds,
+_there was silence in heaven for half an hour_; and that while the servants
+of God were sealing, the Angel with the golden Censer offered their prayers
+with incense upon the golden Altar, and read the Law: and that so soon as
+they were sealed, the winds hurt the earth at the sounding of the first
+trumpet, and the sea at the sounding of the second; these winds signifying
+the wars, to which the first four trumpets sounded. For as the first four
+seals are distinguished from the three last by the appearance of four
+horsemen towards the four winds of heaven; so the wars of the first four
+trumpets are distinguished from those of the three last, by representing
+these by _four winds_, and the others by _three great woes_.
+
+In one of _Ezekiel_'s visions, when the _Babylonian_ captivity was at hand,
+_six men_ appeared _with slaughter-weapons_; _and a seventh_, who [5]
+appeared _among them clothed in white linen and a writer's ink-horn by his
+side_, is commanded to _go thro' the midst of _Jerusalem_, and set a mark
+upon the foreheads of the men that sigh and cry for all the abominations
+done in the midst thereof_: and then the six men, like the Angels of the
+first six trumpets, are commanded to slay those men who are not marked.
+Conceive therefore that the hundred forty and four thousand are sealed, to
+preserve them from the plagues of the first six trumpets; and that at
+length by the preaching of the everlasting gospel, they grow into _a great
+multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and
+people and tongues_: and at the sounding of the seventh trumpet come out of
+the great tribulation _with Palms in their hands: the kingdoms of this
+world_, by the war to which that trumpet sounds, _becoming the kingdoms of
+God and his _Christ__. For the solemnity of the great _Hosannah_ was kept
+by the _Jews_ upon the seventh or last day of the feast of tabernacles; the
+_Jews_ upon that day carrying Palms in their hands, and crying _Hosannah_.
+
+After six of the Angels, answering to the six men with slaughter-weapons,
+had sounded their trumpets, the Lamb in the form of _a mighty Angel cane
+down from heaven clothed with a cloud, and a rainbow was upon his head, and
+his face was as it were the Sun, and his feet as pillars of fire_, the
+shape in which _Christ_ appeared in the beginning of this Prophecy; _and he
+had in his hand a little book open_, the book which he had newly opened;
+for he received but one book from him that sitteth upon the throne, and he
+alone was worthy to open and look on this book. _And he set his right foot
+upon the sea and his left foot on the earth, and cried with a loud voice,
+as when a lion roareth_. It was the custom for the High-Priest on the day
+of expiation, to stand in an elevated place in the peoples court, at the
+Eastern gate of the Priests court, and read the Law to the people, while
+the Heifer and the Goat which was the Lord's lot, were burning without the
+Temple. We may therefore suppose him standing in such a manner, that his
+right foot might appear to _John_ as it were standing on the sea of glass,
+and his left foot on the ground of the house; and that he cried with a loud
+voice, in reading the Law on the day of expiation. _And when he had cried,
+seven thunders uttered their voices_. Thunders are the voice of a cloud,
+and a cloud signifies a multitude; and this multitude may be the _Levites_,
+who sang with thundering voices, and played with musical instruments at the
+great sacrifices, on the seven days of the feast of Tabernacles: at which
+times the trumpets also sounded. For the trumpets sounded, and the
+_Levites_ sang alternately, three times at every sacrifice. The Prophecy
+therefore of the seven thunders is nothing else than a repetition of the
+Prophecy of the seven trumpets in another form. _And the Angel which I saw
+stand upon the sea and upon the earth, lifted up his hand to heaven, and
+sware by him that liveth for ever and ever, that_ after the seven thunders
+_there should be time no longer; but in the days of the voice of the
+seventh Angel, when he shall begin to sound, the mystery of God should be
+finished, as he hath declared to his servants the Prophets_. The voices of
+the thunders therefore last to the end of this world, and so do those of
+the trumpets.
+
+_And the voice which I heard from heaven_, saith _John_, _spake unto me
+again and said, Go and take the little book, &c. And I took the little book
+out of the Angel's hand, and ate it up; and it was in my mouth sweet as
+honey, and as soon as I had eaten it, my belly was bitter. And he said unto
+me, Thou must prophesy again before many peoples, and nations, and tongues,
+and kings_. This is an introduction to a new Prophecy, to a repetition of
+the Prophecy of the whole book; and alludes to _Ezekiel_'s eating a roll or
+book spread open before him, and written within and without, full of
+lamentations and mourning and woe, but sweet in his mouth. Eating and
+drinking signify acquiring and possessing; and eating the book is becoming
+inspired with the Prophecy contained in it. It implies being inspired in a
+vigorous and extraordinary manner with the Prophecy of the whole book, and
+therefore signifies a lively repetition of the whole Prophecy by way of
+interpretation, and begins not till the first Prophecy, that of the seals
+and trumpets, is ended. It was sweet in _John_'s mouth, and therefore
+begins not with the bitter Prophecy of the _Babylonian_ captivity, and the
+_Gentiles_ being in the outward court of the Temple, and treading the holy
+city under foot; and the prophesying of the _two Witnesses_ in sackcloth,
+and their smiting the earth with all plagues, and being killed by the
+Beast; but so soon as the Prophecy of the trumpets is ended, it begins with
+the sweet Prophecy of the glorious _Woman in heaven_, and the victory of
+_Michael_ over the Dragon; and after that, it is bitter in _John_'s belly,
+by a large description of the times of the great Apostacy.
+
+_And the Angel stood_, upon the earth and sea, _saying, Rise and measure
+the Temple of God and the Altar, and them that worship therein_, that is,
+their courts with the buildings thereon, viz. the square court of the
+Temple called the separate place, and the square court of the Altar called
+the Priests court, and the court of them that worship in the Temple called
+the new court: _but the_ great _court which is without the Temple, leave
+out, and measure it not, for it is given to the _Gentiles_, and the holy
+city shall they tread under foot forty and two months_. This measuring hath
+reference to _Ezekiel_'s measuring the Temple _of Solomon_: there the whole
+Temple, including the outward court, was measured, to signify that it
+should be rebuilt in the latter days. Here the courts of the Temple and
+Altar, and they who worship therein, are only measured, to signify the
+building of a second Temple, for those that are sealed out of all the
+twelve tribes of _Israel_, and worship in the inward court of sincerity and
+truth: but _John_ is commanded to leave out the outward court, or outward
+form of religion and Church-government, because it is given to the
+_Babylonian Gentiles_. For the glorious woman in heaven, the remnant of
+whole seed kept the commandments of God, and had the testimony of _Jesus_,
+continued the same woman in outward form after her flight into the
+wilderness, whereby she quitted her former sincerity and piety, and became
+the great Whore. She lost her chastity, but kept her outward form and
+shape. And while the _Gentiles_ tread the holy city underfoot, and worship
+in the outward court, the two witnesses, represented perhaps by the two
+feet of the Angel standing on the sea and earth, prophesied against them,
+and _had power_, like _Elijah_ and _Moses_, _to consume their enemies with
+fire proceeding out of their mouth, and to shut heaven that it rain not in
+the days of their Prophecy, and to turn the waters into blood, and to smite
+the earth with all plagues as often as they will_, that is, with the
+plagues of the trumpets and vials of wrath; and at length they are slain,
+rise again from the dead, and ascend up to heaven in a cloud; and then the
+seventh trumpet sounds to the day of judgment.
+
+The Prophecy being finished, _John_ is inspired anew by the eaten book, and
+begins the Interpretation thereof with these words, _And the Temple of God
+was opened in heaven, and there was seen in his Temple the Ark of the
+Testament_. By the Ark, we may know that this was the first Temple; for the
+second Temple had no Ark. _And there were lightnings, and voices, and
+thundrings, and an earthquake, and great hail_. These answer to the wars in
+the _Roman_ Empire, during the reign of the four horsemen, who appeared
+upon opening the first four seals. _And there appeared a great wonder in
+heaven, a woman clothed with the Sun_. In the Prophecy, the affairs of the
+Church begin to be considered at the opening of the fifth seal; and in the
+Interpretation, they begin at the same time with the vision of the Church
+in the form of a woman in heaven: there she is persecuted, and here she is
+pained in travail. The Interpretation proceeds down first to the sealing of
+the servants of God, and marking the rest with the mark of the Beast; and
+then to the day of judgment, represented by a harvest and vintage. Then it
+returns back to the times of opening the seventh seal, and interprets the
+Prophecy of the seven trumpets by the pouring out of seven vials of wrath.
+The Angels who pour them out, come out of the _Temple of the Tabernacle_;
+that is, out of the second Temple, for the Tabernacle had no outward court.
+Then it returns back again to the times of measuring the Temple and Altar,
+and of the _Gentiles_ worshiping in the outward court, and of the Beast
+killing the witnesses in the streets of the great city; and interprets
+these things by the vision of _a woman sitting on the Beast, drunken with
+the blood of the Saints_; and proceeds in the interpretation downwards to
+the fall of the great city and the day of judgment.
+
+The whole Prophecy of the book, represented by the book of the Law, is
+therefore repeated, and interpreted in the visions which follow those of
+sounding the seventh trumpet, and begin with that of the Temple of God
+opened in heaven. Only the things, which the seven thunders uttered, were
+not written down, and therefore not interpreted.
+
+Notes to Chap. II.
+
+[1] Isa. vi.
+
+[2] Apoc. v.
+
+[3] Apoc. vii
+
+[4] Buxtorf in Synogoga Judaica, c. 18, 21.
+
+[5] Ezek. ix.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. III.
+
+_Of the relation which the Prophecy of _John_ hath to those of _Daniel_;
+and of the Subject of the Prophecy_.
+
+The whole scene of sacred Prophecy is composed of three principal parts:
+the regions beyond _Euphrates_, represented by the two first Beasts of
+_Daniel_; the Empire of the _Greeks_ on this side of _Euphrates_,
+represented by the Leopard and by the He-Goat; and the Empire of the
+_Latins_ on this side of _Greece_, represented by the Beast with ten horns.
+And to these three parts, the phrases of the _third part of the earth, sea,
+rivers, trees, ships, stars, sun, and moon_, relate. I place the body of
+the fourth Beast on this side of _Greece_, because the three first of the
+four Beasts had their lives prolonged after their dominion was taken away,
+and therefore belong not to the body of the fourth. He only stamped them
+with his feet.
+
+By the _earth_, the _Jews_ understood the great continent of all _Asia_ and
+_Africa_, to which they had access by land: and by the Isles of the _sea_,
+they understood the places to which they sailed by sea, particularly all
+_Europe_: and hence in this Prophecy, the _earth_ and _sea_ are put for the
+nations of the _Greek_ and _Latin_ Empires.
+
+The third and fourth Beasts of _Daniel_ are the same with the Dragon and
+ten-horned Beast of _John_, but with this difference: _John_ puts the
+Dragon for the whole _Roman_ Empire while it continued entire, because it
+was entire when that Prophecy was given; and the Beast he considers not
+till the Empire became divided: and then he puts the Dragon for the Empire
+of the _Greeks_, and the Beast for the Empire of the _Latins_. Hence it is
+that the Dragon and Beast have common heads and common horns: but the
+Dragon hath crowns only upon his heads, and the Beast only upon his horns;
+because the Beast and his horns reigned not before they were divided from
+the Dragon: and when the Dragon gave the Beast his throne, the ten horns
+received power as Kings, the same hour with the Beast. The heads are seven
+successive Kings. Four of them were the four horsemen which appeared at the
+opening of the first four seals. In the latter end of the sixth head, or
+seal, considered as present in the visions, it is said, _five_ of the seven
+Kings _are fallen, and one is, and another is not yet come; and the Beast
+that was and is not_, being wounded to death with a sword, _he is the
+eighth, and of the seven_: he was therefore a collateral part of the
+seventh. The horns are the same with those of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast,
+described above.
+
+The four horsemen which appear at the opening of the first four seals, have
+been well explained by Mr. _Mede_; excepting that I had rather continue the
+third to the end of the reign of the three _Gordians_ and _Philip_ the
+_Arabian_, those being Kings from the _South_, and begin the fourth with
+the reign of _Decius_, and continue it till the reign of _Dioclesian_. For
+the fourth horseman _sat upon a pale_ horse, _and his name was Death; and
+hell followed with him; and power was given them to kill unto the fourth
+part of the earth, with the sword, and with famine, and with the plague,
+and with the Beasts of the earth_, or armies of invaders and rebels: and as
+such were the times during all this interval. Hitherto the _Roman_ Empire
+continued in an undivided monarchical form, except rebellions; and such it
+is represented by the four horsemen. But _Dioclesian_ divided it between
+himself and _Maximianus_, A.C. 285; and it continued in that divided state,
+till the victory of _Constantine_ the great over _Licinius_, A.C. 323,
+which put an end to the heathen persecutions set on foot by _Dioclesian_
+and _Maximianus_, and described at the opening of the fifth seal. But this
+division of the Empire was imperfect, the whole being still under one and
+the same Senate. The same victory of _Constantine_ over _Licinius_ a
+heathen persecutor, began the fall of the heathen Empire, described at the
+opening of the sixth seal: and the visions of this seal continue till after
+the reign of _Julian_ the Apostate, he being a heathen Emperor, and
+reigning over the whole _Roman_ Empire.
+
+The affairs of the Church begin to be considered at the opening of the
+fifth seal, as was said above. Then she is represented by _a woman_ in the
+Temple of heaven, _clothed with the sun_ of righteousness, _and the moon_
+of _Jewish_ ceremonies _under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve
+stars_ relating to the twelve Apostles and to the twelve tribes of
+_Israel_. When she fled from the Temple into the wilderness, she left in
+the Temple a _remnant of her seed, who kept the commandments of God, and
+had the testimony of Jesus Christ_; and therefore before her flight she
+represented the true primitive Church of God, tho afterwards she
+degenerated like _Aholah_ and _Aholibah_. In _Diocesian_'s persecution _she
+cried, travelling in birth, and pained to be delivered_. And in the end of
+that persecution, by the victory of _Constantine_ over _Maxentius_ A.C.
+312, _she brought forth a man-child_, such a child as _was to rule all
+nations with a rod of iron_, a _Christian_ Empire. _And her child_, by the
+victory of _Constantine_ over _Licinius_, A.C. 323, _was caught up unto God
+and to his throne. And the woman_, by the division of the _Roman_ Empire
+into the _Greek_ and _Latin_ Empires, _fled_ from the first Temple _into
+the wilderness_, or spiritually barren Empire of the _Latins_, where she is
+found afterwards sitting upon the Beast and upon the seven mountains; and
+is called _the great city which reigneth over the Kings of the earth_, that
+is, over the ten Kings who give their kingdom to her Beast.
+
+But before her flight there was war in heaven between _Michael_ and the
+Dragon, the _Christian_ and the heathen religions; and the Dragon, _that
+old serpent, called the Devil and Satan, who deceiveth the whole world, was
+cast out to the earth, and his Angels were cast out with him_. And _John
+heard a voice in heaven, saying, Now is come salvation and strength, and
+the kingdom of our God, and the power of his _Christ_: for the accuser of
+our brethren is cast down. And they overcame him by the blood of the Lamb,
+and by the word of their testimony. And they loved not their lives unto the
+death. Therefore rejoice, ye heavens, and ye that dwell in them. Woe be to
+the inhabiters of the earth and sea_, or people of the _Greek_ and _Latin_
+Empires, _for the devil is come down amongst you, having great wrath,
+because he knoweth that he hath but a short time_.
+
+_And when the Dragon saw that he was cast down_ from the _Roman_ throne,
+and the man-child caught up thither, he _persecuted the woman which brought
+forth the man-child; and to her_, by the division of the _Roman_ Empire
+between the cities of _Rome_ and _Constantinople_ A.C. 330, _were given two
+wings of a great eagle_, the symbol of the _Roman_ Empire, _that she might
+flee_ from the first Temple _into the wilderness_ of _Arabia, to her place_
+at _Babylon_ mystically so called. _And the serpent_, by the division of
+the same Empire between the sons of _Constantine_ the great, A.C. 337,
+_cast out of his mouth water as a flood_, the _Western_ Empire, _after the
+woman; that he might cause her to be carried away by the flood. And the
+earth_, or _Greek_ Empire, _helped the woman, and the earth opened her
+mouth, and swallowed up the flood_, by the victory of _Constantius_ over
+_Magnentius_, A.C. 353, and thus the Beast was wounded to death with a
+sword. _And the Dragon was wroth with the woman_, in the reign of _Julian_
+the Apostate A.C. 361, _and_, by a new division of the Empire between
+_Valentinian_ and _Valens_, A.C. 364, _went_ from her into the _Eastern_
+Empire _to make war with the remnant of her seed_, which she left behind
+her when she fled: and thus the Beast revived. By the next division of the
+Empire, which was between _Gratian_ and _Theodosius_ A.C. 379, the _Beast_
+with ten horns _rose out of the sea_, and the _Beast_ with two horns _out
+of the earth_: and by the last division thereof, which was between the sons
+of _Theodosius_, A.C. 395, _the Dragon gave the Beast his power and throne,
+and great authority_. And the ten horns _received power as Kings, the same
+hour with the Beast_.
+
+At length the woman arrived at her place of temporal as well as spiritual
+dominion upon the back of the Beast, where she is nourished _a time, and
+times, and half a time, from the face of the serpent_; not in his kingdom,
+but at a distance from him. She is nourished by _the merchants of the
+earth_, three times or years and an half, or 42 months, or 1260 days: and
+in these Prophecies days are put for years. During all this time the Beast
+acted, and _she sat upon him_, that is, reigned over him, and over the ten
+Kings _who gave their power and strength_, that is, their kingdom _to the
+Beast_; and she was _drunken with the blood of the Saints_. By all these
+circumstances she is the eleventh horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast, who
+reigned with _a look more stout than his fellows_, and was of a different
+kind from the rest, and had eyes _and a mouth_ like the woman; _and made
+war with the saints, and prevailed against them_, and _wore them out_, and
+_thought to change times and laws_, and had them _given into his hand,
+until a time, and times, and half a time_. These characters of the woman,
+and little horn of the Beast, agree perfectly: in respect of her temporal
+dominion, she was a horn of the Beast; in respect of her spiritual
+dominion, she rode upon him in the form of a woman, and was his Church, and
+committed fornication with the ten Kings.
+
+The second Beast, which _rose up out of the earth_, was the Church of the
+_Greek_ Empire: for it _had two horns like those of the Lamb_, and
+therefore was a Church; and it _spake as the Dragon_, and therefore was of
+his religion; and it _came up out of the earth_, and by consequence in his
+kingdom. It is called also _the false Prophet_ who wrought miracles before
+the first Beast, by which he deceived them that received his mark, and
+worshiped his image. When the Dragon went from the woman to make war with
+the remnant of her seed, this Beast arising out of the earth assisted in
+that war, and _caused the earth and them which dwell therein to worship_
+the authority of _the first Beast, whose mortal wound was healed_, and to
+_make an Image to him_, that is, to assemble a body of men like him in
+point of religion. He had also _power to give life_ and authority _to the
+Image_, so that it could _both speak, and_ by dictating _cause that all_
+religious bodies of men, _who would not worship_ the authority of _the
+Image, should be_ mystically _killed. And he causeth all men to receive a
+mark in their right hand or in their forehead, and that no man might buy or
+sell save he that had the mark, or the name of the Beast, or the number of
+his name_; all the rest being excommunicated by the Beast with two horns.
+His mark is [Cross] [Cross] [Cross], and his name [Greek: LATEINOS], and
+the number of his name 666.
+
+Thus the Beast, after he was wounded to death with a sword and revived, was
+deified, as the heathens used to deify their Kings after death, and had an
+Image erected to him; and his worshipers were initiated in this new
+religion, by receiving the mark or name of this new God, or the number of
+his name. By killing all that will not worship him and his Image, the first
+Temple, illuminated by the lamps of the seven Churches, is demolished, and
+a new Temple built for them who will not worship him; and the outward court
+of this new Temple, or outward form of a Church, is given to the
+_Gentiles_, who worship the Beast and his Image: while they who will not
+worship him, are sealed with the name of God in their foreheads, and retire
+into the inward court of this new Temple. These are the 144000 sealed out
+of all the twelve tribes of _Israel_, and called the _two Witnesses_, as
+being derived from the two wings of the woman while she was flying into the
+wilderness, and represented by two of the seven candlesticks. These appear
+to _John_ in the inward court of the second Temple, standing on mount
+_Sion_ with the Lamb, and as it were on the sea of glass. These are _the
+Saints of the most High_, and _the host of heaven_, and _the holy people_
+spoken of by _Daniel_, as worn out and trampled under foot, and destroyed
+in the latter times by the little horns of his fourth Beast and He-Goat.
+
+While the _Gentiles_ tread the holy city under foot, God _gives power to
+his two Witnesses, and they prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore
+days clothed in sackcloth_. They are called _the two Olive-trees_, with
+relation to the two Olive-trees, which in _Zechary_'s vision, chap. iv.
+stand on either side of the golden candlestick to supply the lamps with
+oil: and Olive-trees, according to the Apostle _Paul_, represent Churches,
+_Rom._ xi. They supply the lamps with oil, by maintaining teachers. They
+are also called _the two candlesticks_; which in this Prophecy signify
+Churches, the seven Churches of _Asia_ being represented by seven
+candlesticks. Five of these Churches were found faulty, and threatned if
+they did not repent; the other two were without fault, and so their
+candlesticks were fit to be placed in the second Temple. These were the
+Churches in _Smyrna_ and _Philadelphia_. They were in a state of
+tribulation and persecution, and the only two of the seven in such a state:
+and so their candlesticks were fit to represent the Churches in affliction
+in the times of the second Temple, and the only two of the seven that were
+fit. The _two Witnesses_ are not new Churches: they are the posterity of
+the primitive Church, the posterity of the two wings of the woman, and so
+are fitly represented by two of the primitive candlesticks. We may conceive
+therefore, that when the first Temple was destroyed, and a new one built
+for them who worship in the inward court, two of the seven candlesticks
+were placed in this new Temple.
+
+The affairs of the Church are not considered during the opening of the
+first four seals. They begin to be consider'd at the opening of the fifth
+seal, as was said above; and are further considered at the opening of the
+sixth seal; and the seventh seal contains the times of the great Apostacy.
+And therefore I refer the Epistles to the seven Churches unto the times of
+the fifth and sixth seals: for they relate to the Church when she began to
+decline, and contain admonitions against the great Apostacy then
+approaching.
+
+When _Eusebius_ had brought down his _Ecclesiatical History_ to the reign
+of _Dioclesian_, he thus describes the state of the Church: _Qualem
+quantamque gloriam simul ac libertatem doctrina ver� erga supremum Deum
+pietatis � Christo prim�m hominibus annunciata, apud omnes Gr�cos pariter &
+barbaros ante persecutionem nostr� memori� excitatam, consecuta sit, nos
+cert� pro merito explicare non possumus. Argumento esse possit Imperatorum
+benignitas erga nostros: quibus regendas etiam provincias committebant,
+omni sacrificandi metu eos liberantes ob singularem, qua in religionem
+nostram affecti erant, benevolentiam._ And a little after: _Jam vero quis
+innumerabilem hominum quotidi� ad fidem Christi confugientium turbam, quis
+numerum ecclesiarum in singulis urbibus, quis illustres populorum concursus
+in �dibus sacris, cumulat� possit describere? Quo factum est, ut priscis
+�dificiis jam non contenti, in singulis urbibus spatiosas ab ipsis
+fundamentis exstruerent ecclesias. Atque h�c progressii temporis
+increscentia, & quotidi� in majus & melius proficiscentia, nec livor ullus
+atterere, nec malignitas d�monis fascinare, nec hominum insidi� prohibere
+unquam potuerunt, quamdiu omnipotentis Dei dextra populum suum, utpote tali
+dignum pr�sidio, texit atque custodiit. Sed cum ex nimia libertate in
+negligentiam ac desidiam prolapsi essemus; cum alter alteri invidere atque
+obtrectare c�pisset; cum inter nos quasi bella intestina gereremus, verbis,
+tanquam armis quibusdam hastisque, nos mutu� vulnerantes; cum Antistites
+adversus Antistites, populi in populos collisi, jurgia ac tumultus
+agitarent; denique cum fraus & simulatio ad summum maliti� culmen
+adolevisset: tum divina ultio, levi brachio ut solet, integro adhuc
+ecclesi� statu, & fidelium turbis liber� convenientibus, sensim ac moderat�
+in nos c�pit animadvertere; ors� prim�m persecutione ab iis qui militabant.
+Cum ver� sensu omni destituti de placando Dei numine ne cogitaremus quidem;
+quin potius instar impiorum quorundam res humanas null� providenti�
+gubernari rati, alia quotidi� crimina aliis adjiceremus: cum Pastores
+nostri spret� religionis regul�, mutuis inter se contentionibus
+decertarent, nihil aliud quam jurgia, minas, �mulationem, odia, ac mutuas
+inimicitias amplificare studentes; principatum quasi tyrannidem quandam
+contentissim� sibi vindicantes: tunc dem�m juxta dictum Hieremi�,
+_obscuravit Dominus in ira sua filiam Sion, & dejecit de c�lo gloriam
+Israel_,--per Ecclesiarum scilicet subversionem_, &c. This was the state of
+the Church just before the subversion of the Churches in the beginning of
+_Dioclesian_'s persecution: and to this state of the Church agrees the
+first of the seven Epistles to the Angel of the seven Churches, [1] that to
+the Church in _Ephesus_. _I have something against thee_, saith _Christ_ to
+the Angel of that Church, _because thou hast left thy first love. Remember
+therefore from whence thou art fallen, and repent, and do the first works;
+or else I will come unto thee quickly, and will remove thy candlestick out
+of its place, except thou repent. But this thou hast, that thou hatest the
+deeds of the _Nicolaitans_, which I also hate_. The _Nicolaitans_ are the
+_Continentes_ above described, who placed religion in abstinence from
+marriage, abandoning their wives if they had any. They are here called
+_Nicolaitans_, from _Nicolas_ one of the seven deacons of the primitive
+Church of _Jerusalem_; who having a beautiful wife, and being taxed with
+uxoriousness, abandoned her, and permitted her to marry whom she pleased,
+saying that we must disuse the flesh; and thenceforward lived a single life
+in continency, as his children also. The _Continentes_ afterwards embraced
+the doctrine of _�ons_ and Ghosts male and female, and were avoided by the
+Churches till the fourth century; and the Church of _Ephesus_ is here
+commended for hating their deeds.
+
+The persecution of _Dioclesian_ began in the year of _Christ_ 302, and
+lasted ten years in the _Eastern_ Empire and two years in the _Western_. To
+this state of the Church the second Epistle, to the Church of _Smyrna_,
+agrees. _I know_, saith [2] _Christ_, _thy works, and tribulation, and
+poverty, but thou art rich; and I know the blasphemy of them, which say
+they are _Jews_ and are not, but are the synagogue of Satan. Fear none of
+those things which thou shalt suffer: Behold, the Devil shall call some of
+you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten
+days. Be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee a crown of life._
+The tribulation of ten days can agree to no other persecution than that of
+_Dioclesian_, it being the only persecution which lasted ten years. By _the
+blasphemy of them which say they are _Jews_ and are not, but are the
+synagogue of Satan_, I understand the Idolatry of the _Nicolaitans_, who
+falsly said they were _Christians_.
+
+The _Nicolaitans_ are complained of also in [3] the third Epistle, as men
+that _held the doctrine of _Balaam_, who taught _Balac_ to cast a
+stumbling-block before the children of _Israel_, to eat things sacrificed
+to Idols, and [4] to commit_ spiritual _fornication_. For _Balaam_ taught
+the _Moabites_ and _Midianites_ to tempt and invite _Israel_ by their women
+to commit fornication, and to feast with them at the sacrifices of their
+Gods. The Dragon therefore began now to come down among the inhabitants of
+the earth and sea.
+
+The _Nicolaitans_ are also complained of in the fourth Epistle, under the
+name of the _woman _Jezabel_, who calleth herself a Prophetess, to teach
+and to seduce the servants of _Christ_ to commit fornication, and to eat
+things sacrificed to Idols_. The woman therefore began now to fly into the
+wilderness.
+
+The reign of _Constantine_ the great from the time of his conquering
+_Licinius_, was monarchical over the whole _Roman_ Empire. Then the Empire
+became divided between the sons of _Constantine_: and afterwards it was
+again united under _Constantius_, by his victory over _Magnentius_. To the
+affairs of the Church in these three successive periods of time, the third,
+fourth, and fifth Epistles, that is, those to the Angels of the Churches in
+_Pergamus_, _Thyatira_, and _Sardis_, seem to relate. The next Emperor was
+_Julian_ the Apostate.
+
+In the sixth Epistle, [5] to the Angel of the Church in _Philadelphia_,
+_Christ_ saith: _Because_ in the reign of the heathen Emperor _Julian_,
+_thou hast kept the word of my patience, I also will keep thee from the
+hour of temptation, which_ by the woman's flying into the wilderness, and
+the Dragon's making war with the remnant of her seed, and the killing of
+all who will not worship the Image of the Beast, _shall come upon all the
+world, to try them that dwell upon the earth_, and to distinguish them by
+sealing the one with the name of God in their foreheads, and marking the
+other with the mark of the Beast. _Him that overcometh, I will make a
+pillar in the Temple of my God; and he shall go no more out_ of it. _And I
+will write upon him the name of my God_ in his forehead. So the
+_Christians_ of the Church of _Philadelphia_, as many of them as overcome,
+are sealed with the seal of God, and placed in the second Temple, and go no
+more out. The same is to be understood of the Church in _Smyrna_, which
+also kept the word of God's patience, and was without fault. These two
+Churches, with their posterity, are therefore the _two Pillars_, and the
+_two Candlesticks_, and the _two Witnesses_ in the second Temple.
+
+After the reign of the Emperor _Julian,_ and his successor _Jovian_ who
+reigned but five months, the Empire became again divided between
+_Valentinian_ and _Valens_. Then the Church Catholick, in the Epistle to
+the Angel of the Church of _Laodicea_, is reprehended as _lukewarm_, and
+[6] threatned to be _spewed out of _Christ's_ mouth_. She said, that she
+was _rich and increased with goods, and had need of nothing_, being in
+outward prosperity; _and knew not that she was_ inwardly _wretched, and
+miserable, and poor, and blind, and naked_. She is therefore _spewed out of
+_Christ's_ mouth_ at the opening of the seventh seal: and this puts an end
+to the times of the first Temple.
+
+About one half of the _Roman_ Empire turned _Christians_ in the time of
+_Constantine_ the great and his sons. After _Julian_ had opened the
+Temples, and restored the worship of the heathens, the Emperors
+_Valentinian_ and _Valens_ tolerated it all their reign; and therefore the
+Prophecy of the sixth seal was not fully accomplished before the reign of
+their successor _Gratian_. It was the custom of the heathen Priests, in the
+beginning of the reign of every sovereign Emperor, to offer him the dignity
+and habit of the _Pontifex Maximus_. This dignity all Emperors had hitherto
+accepted: but _Gratian_ rejected it, threw down the idols, interdicted the
+sacrifices, and took away their revenues with the salaries and authority of
+the Priests. _Theodosius_ the great followed his example; and heathenism
+afterwards recovered itself no more, but decreased so fast, that
+_Prudentius_, about ten years after the death of _Theodosius_, called the
+heathens, _vix pauca ingenia & pars hominum rarissima_. Whence the affairs
+of the sixth seal ended with the reign of _Valens_, or rather with the
+beginning of the reign of _Theodosius_, when he, like his predecessor
+_Gratian_, rejected the dignity of _Pontifex Maximus_. For the _Romans_
+were very much infested by the invasions of foreign nations in the reign of
+_Valentinian_ and _Valens_: _Hoc tempore_, saith _Ammianus_, _velut per
+universum orbem Romanum bellicum canentibus buccinis, excit� gentes
+s�vissim� limites sibi proximos persultabant: Gallias Rh�tiasque simul
+Alemanni populabantur: Sarmat� Pannonias & Quadi: Picti, Saxones, & Scoti &
+Attacotti Britannos �rumnis vexavere continuis: Austoriani, Mauric�que ali�
+gentes Africam solito acri�s incursabant: Thracias diripiebant pr�datorii
+globi Gotthorum: Persarum Rex manus Armeniis injectabat_. And whilst the
+Emperors were busy in repelling these enemies, the _Hunns_ and _Alans_ and
+_Goths_ came over the _Danube_ in two bodies, overcame and slew _Valens_,
+and made so great a slaughter of the _Roman_ army, that _Ammianus_ saith:
+_Nec ulla Annalibus pr�ter Cannensem ita ad internecionem res legitur
+gesta_. These wars were not fully stopt on all sides till the beginning of
+the reign of _Theodosius_, A.C. 379 & 380: but thenceforward the Empire
+remained quiet from foreign armies, till his death, A.C. 395. So long the
+four winds were held: and so long there was silence in heaven. And the
+seventh seal was opened when this silence began.
+
+Mr. _Mede_ hath explained the Prophecy of the first six trumpets not much
+amiss: but if he had observed, that the Prophecy of pouring out the vials
+of wrath is synchronal to that of sounding the trumpets, his explanation
+would have been yet more complete.
+
+The name of _Woes_ is given to the wars to which the three last trumpets
+sound, to distinguish them from the wars of the four first. The sacrifices
+on the first four days of the feast of Tabernacles, at which the first four
+trumpets sound, and the first four vials of wrath are poured out, are
+slaughters in four great wars; and these wars are represented by four winds
+from the four corners of the earth. The first was an east wind, the second
+a west wind, the third a south wind, and the fourth a north wind, with
+respect to the city of _Rome_, the metropolis of the old _Roman_ Empire.
+These four plagues fell upon _the third part of the Earth, Sea, Rivers,
+Sun, Moon and Stars_; that is, upon the Earth, Sea, Rivers, Sun, Moon and
+Stars of the third part of the whole scene of these Prophecies of _Daniel_
+and _John_.
+
+The plague of the eastern wind [7] at the sounding of the first trumpet,
+was to fall upon the _Earth_, that is, upon the nations of the _Greek_
+Empire. Accordingly, after the death of _Theodosius_ the great, the
+_Goths_, _Sarmatians_, _Hunns_, _Isaurians_, and _Austorian_ Moors invaded
+and miserably wasted _Greece_, _Thrace_, _Asia minor_, _Armenia_, _Syria_,
+_Egypt_, _Lybia_, and _Illyricum_, for ten or twelve years together.
+
+The plague of the western wind at the sounding of the second trumpet, was
+to fall upon the _Sea_, or _Western_ Empire, by means of _a great mountain
+burning with fire_ cast into it, and _turning it to blood_. Accordingly in
+the year 407, that Empire began to be invaded by the _Visigoths_,
+_Vandals_, _Alans_, _Sueves_, _Burgundians_, _Ostrogoths_, _Heruli_,
+_Quadi_, _Gepides_; and by these wars it was broken into ten kingdoms, and
+miserably wasted: and _Rome_ itself, the burning mountain, was besieged and
+taken by the _Ostrogoths_, in the beginning of these miseries.
+
+The plague of the southern wind at the sounding of the third trumpet, was
+to cause _a great star, burning as it were a lamp, to fall from heaven upon
+the rivers and fountains of waters_, the _Western_ Empire now divided into
+many kingdoms, and to turn them to _wormwood_ and _blood_, and make them
+_bitter_. Accordingly _Genseric_, the King of the _Vandals_ and _Alans_ in
+_Spain_, A.C. 427, enter'd _Africa_ with an army of eighty thousand men;
+where he invaded the _Moors_, and made war upon the _Romans_, both there
+and on the sea-coasts of _Europe_, for fifty years together, almost without
+intermission, taking _Hippo_ A.C. 431, and _Carthage_ the capital of
+_Africa_ A.C. 439. In A.C. 455, with a numerous fleet and an army of three
+hundred thousand _Vandals_ and _Moors_, he invaded _Italy_, took and
+plundered _Rome_, _Naples_, _Capua_, and many other cities; carrying thence
+their wealth with the flower of the people into _Africa_: and the next
+year, A.C. 456, he rent all _Africa_ from the Empire, totally expelling the
+_Romans_. Then the _Vandals_ invaded and took the Islands of the
+_Mediterranean_, _Sicily_, _Sardinia_, _Corsica_, _Ebusus_, _Majorca_,
+_Minorca_, &c. and _Ricimer_ besieged the Emperer _Anthemius_ in _Rome_,
+took the city, and gave his soldiers the plunder, A.C. 472. The _Visigoths_
+about the same time drove the _Romans_ out of _Spain_: and now the
+_Western_ Emperor, the _great star which fell from heaven, burning as it
+were a lamp_, having by all these wars gradually lost almost all his
+dominions, was invaded, and conquered in one year by _Odoacer_ King of the
+_Heruli_, A.C. 476. After this the _Moors_ revolted A.C. 477, and weakned
+the _Vandals_ by several wars, and took _Mauritania_ from them. These wars
+continued till the _Vandals_ were conquered by _Belisarius_, A.C. 534. and
+by all these wars _Africa_ was almost depopulated, according to
+_Procopius_, who reckons that above five millions of men perished in them.
+When the _Vandals_ first invaded _Africa_, that country was very populous,
+consisting of about 700 bishopricks, more than were in all _France_,
+_Spain_ and _Italy_ together: but by the wars between the _Vandals_,
+_Romans_ and _Moors_, it was depopulated to that degree, that _Procopius_
+tells us, it was next to a miracle for a traveller to see a man.
+
+In pouring out the third vial it is [8] said: _Thou art righteous, O
+Lord,--because thou hast judged thus: for they have shed the blood of thy
+Saints and Prophets, and thou hast given them blood to drink, for they are
+worthy_. How they shed the blood of Saints, may be understood by the
+following Edict of the Emperor _Honorius_, procured by four Bishops sent to
+him by a Council of _African_ Bishops, who met at _Carthage_ 14 _June_,
+A.C. 410.
+
+_Impp. Honor. &. Theod. AA. Heracliano Com. Afric._
+
+_Oraculo penitus remoto, quo ad ritus suos h�retic� superstitionis
+abrepserant, sciant omnes sanct� legis inimici, plectendos se poena &
+proscriptionis & sanguinis, si ultra convenire per publicum, execrand�
+sceleris sui temeritate temptaverint. Dat. _viii._ Kal. Sept. Varano V.C.
+Cons._ A.C. 410.
+
+Which Edict was five years after fortified by the following.
+
+_Impp. Honor. & Theod. AA. Heracliano Com. Afric._
+
+_Sciant cuncti qui ad ritus suos h�resis superstitionibus obrepserant
+sacrosanct� legis inimici, plectendos se poen� & proscriptionis &
+sanguinis, si ultra convenire per publicum exercendi sceleris sui
+temeritate temptaverint: ne qu� vera divinaque reverentia contagione
+temeretur. Dat. _viii._ Kal. Sept. Honorio _x._ & Theod. _vi._ AA. Coss._
+A.C. 415.
+
+These Edicts being directed to the governor of _Africa_, extended only to
+the _Africans_. Before these there were many severe ones against the
+_Donatists_, but they did not extend to blood. These two were the first
+which made their meetings, and the meetings of all dissenters, capital: for
+by _hereticks_ in these Edicts are meant all dissenters, as is manifest by
+the following against _Euresius_ a _Luciferan_ Bishop.
+
+_Impp. Arcad. & Honor. AA. Aureliano Proc. Afric�._
+
+_H�reticorum vocabulo continentur, & latis adversus eos sanctionibus debent
+succumbere, qui vel levi argumento � judicio Catholic� religionis & tramite
+detecti fuerint deviare: ideoque experientia tua Euresium h�reticum esse
+cognoscat. Dat. _iii._ Non. Sept. Constantinop. Olybrio & Probino Coss._
+A.C. 395.
+
+The _Greek_ Emperor _Zeno_ adopted _Theoderic_ King of the _Ostrogoths_ to
+be his son, made him master of the horse and _Patricius_, and Consul of
+_Constantinople_; and recommending to him the _Roman_ people and Senate,
+gave him the _Western_ Empire, and sent him into _Italy_ against _Odoacer_
+King of the _Heruli_. _Theoderic_ thereupon led his nation into _Italy_,
+conquered _Odoacer_, and reigned over _Italy_, _Sicily_, _Rh�tia_,
+_Noricum_, _Dalmatia_, _Liburnia_, _Istria_, and part of _Suevia_,
+_Pannonia_ and _Gallia_. Whence _Ennodius_ said, in a Panegyric to
+_Theoderic_: _Ad limitem suum Romana regna reme�sse._ _Theoderic_ reigned
+with great prudence, moderation and felicity; treated the _Romans_ with
+singular benevolence, governed them by their own laws, and restored their
+government under their Senate and Consuls, he himself supplying the place
+of Emperor, without assuming the title. _Ita sibi parentibus pr�fuit_,
+saith _Procopius_, _ut vere Imperatori conveniens decus nullum ipsi
+abesset: Justiti� magnus ei cultus, legumque diligens custodia: terras �
+vicinis barbaris servavit intactas_, &c. Whence I do not reckon the reign
+of this King, amongst the plagues of the four winds.
+
+The plague of the northern wind, at the sounding of the fourth trumpet, was
+to cause _the Sun, Moon and Stars_, that is, the King, kingdom and Princes
+of the _Western_ Empire, _to be darkned_, and to continue some time in
+darkness. Accordingly _Belisarius_, having conquered the _Vandals_, invaded
+_Italy_ A.C. 535, and made war upon the _Ostrogoths_ in _Dalmatia_,
+_Liburnia_, _Venetia_, _Lombardy_, _Tuscany_, and other regions northward
+from _Rome_, twenty years together. In this war many cities were taken and
+retaken. In retaking _Millain_ from the _Romans_, the _Ostrogoths_ slew all
+the males young and old, amounting, as _Procopius_ reckons, to three
+hundred thousand, and sent the women captives to their allies the
+_Burgundians_. _Rome_ itself was taken and retaken several times, and
+thereby the people were thinned; the old government by a Senate ceased, the
+nobles were ruined, and all the glory of the city was extinguish'd: and
+A.C. 552, after a war of seventeen years, the kingdom of the _Ostrogoths_
+fell; yet the remainder of the _Ostrogoths_, and an army of _Germans_
+called in to their assistance, continued the war three or four years
+longer. Then ensued the war of the _Heruli_, who, as _Anastasius_ tells us,
+_perimebant cunctam Italiam_, slew all _Italy_. This was followed by the
+war of the _Lombards_, the fiercest of all the _Barbarians_, which began
+A.C. 568, and lasted for thirty eight years together; _fact� tali clade_,
+saith _Anastasius_, _qualem � s�culo nullus meminit_; ending at last in the
+Papacy of _Sabinian_, A.C. 605, by a peace then made with the _Lombards_.
+Three years before this war ended, _Gregory_ the great, then Bishop of
+_Rome_, thus speaks of it: _Qualiter enim & quotidianis gladiis & quantis
+Longobardorum incursionibus, ecce jam per triginta quinque annorum
+longitudinem premimur, nullis explere vocibus suggestionis valemus_: and in
+one of his Sermons to the people, he thus expresses the great consumption
+of the _Romans_ by these wars: _Ex illa plebe innumerabili quanti
+remanseritis aspicitis, & tamen adhuc quotidi� flagella urgent, repentini
+casus opprimunt, nov� res & improvis� clades affligunt_. In another Sermon
+he thus describes the desolations: _Destruct� urbes, eversa sunt castra,
+depopulati agri, in solitudinem terra redacta est. Nullus in agris incola,
+pen� nullus in urbibus habitator remansit. Et tamen ips� parv� generis
+humani reliqui� adhuc quotidi� & sine cessatione feriuntur, & finem non
+habent flagella coelestis justiti�. Ipsa autem qu� aliquando mundi Domina
+esse videbatur, qualis remansit Roma conspicimus innumeris doloribus
+multipliciter attrita, defolatione civium, impressione hostium, frequenti�
+ruinarum.--Ecce jam de illa omnes hujus f�culi potentes ablati sunt.--Ecce
+populi defecerunt.--Ubi enim Senatus? Ubi jam populus? Contabuerunt ossa,
+consumpt� sunt carnes. Omnis enim s�cularium dignitatum ordo extinctus est,
+& tamen ipsos vos paucos qui remansimus, adhuc quotidi� gladii, adhuc
+quotidi� innumer� tribulationes premunt.--Vacua jam ardet Roma. Quid autem
+ista de hominibus dicimus? Cum ruinis crebrescentibus ipsa quoque destrui
+�dificia videmus. Postquam defecerunt homines etiam parietes cadunt. Jam
+ecce desolata, ecce contrita, ecce gemitibus oppressa est,_ &c. All this
+was spoken by _Gregory_ to the people of _Rome_, who were witnesses of the
+truth of it. Thus by _the plagues of the four winds_, the Empire of the
+_Greeks_ was shaken, and the Empire of the _Latins_ fell; and _Rome_
+remained nothing more than the capital of a poor dukedom, subordinate to
+_Ravenna_, the seat of the Exarchs.
+
+The fifth trumpet sounded to the wars, which the _King of the_ South, as he
+is called by _Daniel_, made _in the time of the end_, in _pushing at the
+King who did according to his will_. This plague began with the _opening of
+the bottomless pit_, which denotes the letting out of a false religion: the
+_smoke which came out of the pit_, signifying the multitude which embraced
+that religion; and the _locusts which came out of the smoke_, the armies
+which came out of that multitude. This pit was opened, to let out smoke and
+locusts into the regions of the four monarchies, or some of them. _The King
+of these locusts_ was the _Angel of the bottomless pit_, being chief
+governor as well in religious as civil affairs, such as was the Caliph of
+the _Saracens_. Swarms of locusts often arise in _Arabia f�lix_, and from
+thence infest the neighbouring nations: and so are a very fit type of the
+numerous armies of _Arabians_ invading the _Romans_. They began to invade
+them A.C. 634, and to reign at _Damascus_ A.C. 637. They built _Bagdad_
+A.C. 766, and reigned over _Persia_, _Syria_, _Arabia_, _Egypt_, _Africa_
+and _Spain_. They afterwards lost _Africa_ to _Mahades_, A.C. 910; _Media_,
+_Hircania_, _Chorasan_, and all _Persia_, to the _Dailamites_, between the
+years 927 and 935; _Mesopotamia_ and _Miafarekin_ to _Nasiruddaulas_, A.C.
+930; _Syria_ and _Egypt_ to _Achsjid_, A.C. 935, and now being in great
+distress, the Caliph of _Bagdad_, A.C. 936, surrendred all the rest of his
+temporal power to _Mahomet_ the son of _Rajici_, King of _Wasit_ in
+_Chaldea_, and made him Emperor of Emperors. But _Mahomet_ within two years
+lost _Bagdad_ to the _Turks_; and thenceforward _Bagdad_ was sometimes in
+the hands of the _Turks_, and sometimes in the hands of the _Saracens_,
+till _Togrul-beig_, called also _Togra_, _Dogrissa_, _Tangrolipix_, and
+_Sadoc_, conquered _Chorasan_ and _Persia_; and A.C. 1055, added _Bagdad_
+to his Empire, making it the seat thereof. His successors _Olub-Arflan_ and
+_Melechschah_, conquered the regions upon _Euphrates_; and these conquests,
+after the death of _Melechschah_, brake into the kingdoms of _Armenia_,
+_Mesopotamia_, _Syria_, and _Cappadocia_. The whole time that the Caliphs
+of the _Saracens_ reigned with a temporal dominion at _Damascus_ and
+_Bagdad_ together, was 300 years, viz. from the year 637 to the year 936
+inclusive. Now locusts live but five months; and therefore, for the decorum
+of the type, these locusts are said to _hurt men five months and five
+months_, as if they had lived about five months at _Damascus_, and again
+about five months at _Bagdad_; in all ten months, or 300 prophetic days,
+which are years.
+
+The sixth trumpet sounded to the wars, which _Daniel_'s King of the _North_
+made against the King above-mentioned, _who did according to his will_. In
+these wars the King of the _North_, according to _Daniel_, conquered the
+Empire of the _Greeks_, and also _Judea_, _Egypt_, _Lybia_, and _Ethiopia_:
+and by these conquests the Empire of the _Turks_ was set up, as may be
+known by the extent thereof. These wars commenced A.C. 1258, when the four
+kingdoms of the _Turks_ seated upon _Euphrates_, that of _Armenia major_
+seated at _Miyapharekin_, _Megarkin_ or _Martyropolis_, that of
+_Mesopotamia_ seated at _Mosul_, that of all _Syria_ seated at _Aleppo_,
+and that of _Cappadocia_ seated at _Iconium_, were invaded by the _Tartars_
+under _Hulacu_, and driven into the western parts of _Asia minor_, where
+they made war upon the _Greeks_, and began to erect the present Empire of
+the _Turks_. Upon the sounding of the sixth trumpet, [9] _John heard a
+voice from the four horns of the golden Altar which is before God, saying
+to the sixth Angel which had the trumpet, Loose the four Angels which are
+bound at the great river _Euphrates_. And the four Angels were loosed,
+which were prepared for an hour and a day, and a month and a year, for to
+slay the third part of men_. By the four horns of the golden Altar, is
+signified the situation of the head cities of the said four kingdoms,
+_Miyapharekin_, _Mosul_, _Aleppo_, and _Iconium_, which were in a
+quadrangle. They slew the third part of men, when they conquered the
+_Greek_ Empire, and took _Constantinople_, A.C. 1453. and they began to be
+prepared for this purpose, when _Olub-Arslan_ began to conquer the nations
+upon _Euphrates_, A.C. 1063. The interval is called an hour and a day, and
+a month and a year, or 391 prophetic days, which are years. In the first
+thirty years, _Olub-Arslan_ and _Melechschah_ conquered the nations upon
+_Euphrates_, and reigned over the whole. _Melechschah_ died A.C. 1092, and
+was succeeded by a little child; and then this kingdom broke into the four
+kingdoms above-mentioned.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Notes to Chap. III.
+
+[1] Apoc. ii. 4, &c.
+
+[2] Apoc. ii. 9, 10.
+
+[3] Ver. 14.
+
+[4] Numb. xxv. 1, 2, 18, & xxi. 16.
+
+[5] Apoc. iii. 10, 12.
+
+[6] Apoc. iii. 16, 17.
+
+[7] Apoc. viii. 7, &c.
+
+[8] Apoc. xvi. 5, 6.
+
+[9] Apoc. ix. 13, &c.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_THE END._
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Advertisement._
+
+_The last pages of these Observations having been differently drawn up by
+the Author in another copy of his Work; they are here inserted as they
+follow in that copy, after the 22d line of the 261st page foregoing._
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_And none was found worthy to open the book_ till the Lamb of God appeared;
+the great High-Priest represented by a lamb slain at the foot of the Altar
+in the morning-sacrifice. _And he came, and took the book out of the hand
+of him that sat upon the throne._ For the High-Priest, in the feast of the
+seventh month, went into the most holy place, and took the book of the law
+out of the right side of the Ark, to read it to the people: and in order to
+read it well, he studied it seven days, that is, upon the fourth, fifth,
+sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth days, being attended by some of the
+priests to hear him perform. These seven days are alluded to, by the Lamb's
+opening the seven seals successively.
+
+Upon the tenth day of the month, a young bullock was offered for a
+sin-offering for the High-Priest, and a goat for a sin-offering for the
+people: and lots were cast upon two goats to determine which of them should
+be God's lot for the sin-offering; and the other goat was called _Azazel_,
+the scape-goat. The High-Priest in his linen garments, took a censer full
+of burning coals of fire from the Altar, his hand being full of sweet
+incense beaten small; and went into the most holy place within the veil,
+and put the incense upon the fire, and sprinkled the blood of the bullock
+with his finger upon the mercy-seat and before the mercy-seat seven times;
+and then he killed the goat which fell to God's lot, for a sin-offering for
+the people, and brought his blood within the veil, and sprinkled it also
+seven times upon the mercy-seat and before the mercy-seat. Then he went out
+to the Altar, and sprinkled it also seven times with the blood of the
+bullock, and as often with the blood of the goat. After this _he laid both
+his hands upon the head of the live goat; and confessed over him all the
+iniquities of the children of _Israel_, and all their transgressions in all
+their sins, putting them upon the head of the goat; and sent him away into
+the wilderness by the hands of a fit man: and the goat bore upon him all
+their iniquities into a land not inhabited_, Levit. chap. iv. & chap. xvi.
+While the High-Priest was doing these things in the most holy place and at
+the Altar, the people continued at their devotion quietly and in silence.
+Then the High-Priest went into the holy place, put off his linen garments,
+and put on other garments; then came out, and sent the bullock and the goat
+of the sin-offering to be burnt without the camp, with fire taken in a
+censer from the Altar: and as the people returned home from the Temple,
+they said to one another, _God seal you to a good new year_.
+
+In allusion to all this, _when he had opened the seventh seal, there was
+silence in heaven about the space of half an hour. And an Angel stood at
+the Altar having a golden Censer, and there was given unto him much
+incense, that he should offer it with the prayers of all Saints, upon the
+golden Altar which was before the throne. And the smoke of the incense with
+the prayers of the Saints ascended up before God out of the Angel's hand.
+And the Angel took the Censer, and filled it with fire of the Altar, and
+cast it to the earth_, suppose without the camp, for sacrificing the goat
+which fell to God's lot. For the High-Priest being _Christ_ himself, the
+bullock is omitted. At this sacrifice _there were voices and thundrings_,
+of the musick of the Temple, _and lightnings_ of the sacred fire, _and an
+earthquake_: and synchronal to these things was the sealing of _the 144000
+out of all the twelve tribes of the children of _Israel_ with the seal of
+God in their foreheads_, while the rest of the twelve tribes received the
+mark of the Beast, and the Woman fled from the Temple into the wilderness
+to her place upon this Beast. For this sealing and marking was represented
+by casting lots upon the two goats, sacrificing God's lot on mount _Sion_,
+and sending the scape-goat into the wilderness loaden with the sins of the
+people.
+
+Upon the fifteenth day of the month, and the six following days, there were
+very great sacrifices. And in allusion to the sounding of trumpets, and
+singing with thundring voices, and pouring out drink-offerings at those
+sacrifices, _seven trumpets are sounded_, and _seven thunders utter their
+voices_, and _seven vials of wrath are poured out_. Wherefore the sounding
+of the _seven trumpets_, the voices of the _seven thunders_, and the
+pouring out of the _seven vials of wrath_, are synchronal, and relate to
+one and the same division of the time of the seventh seal following the
+silence, into seven successive parts. The seven days of this feast were
+called the feast of Tabernacles; and during these seven days the children
+of _Israel_ dwelt in booths, and rejoiced with palm-branches in their
+hands. To this alludes _the multitude with palms in their hands_, which
+appeared after the sealing of the 144000, and _came out of the great
+tribulation_ with triumph at the battle of the great day, to which the
+seventh trumpet sounds. The visions therefore of the 144000, and of the
+palm-bearing multitude, extend to the sounding of the seventh trumpet, and
+therefore are synchronal to the times of the seventh seal.
+
+When the 144000 _are sealed out of all the twelve tribes of _Israel__, and
+the rest receive _the mark of the Beast_, and thereby the first temple is
+destroyed; _John_ is bidden to _measure the temple and altar_, that is,
+their courts, _and them that worship therein_, that is, the 144000 standing
+on mount _Sion_ and on the sea of glass: _but the court that is without the
+temple_, that is, the peoples court, to _leave out and measure it not,
+because it is given to the_ Gentiles, those who receive the mark of the
+Beast; _and the holy city they shall tread under foot forty and two
+months_, that is, all the time that the Beast acts under the woman
+_Babylon_: and _the two witnesses prophesy 1260 days_, that is, all the
+same time, _clothed in sackcloth. These have power_, like _Elijah, to shut
+heaven that it rain not_, at the sounding of the first trumpet; and, like
+_Moses, to turn the waters into blood_ at the sounding of the second; _and
+to smite the earth with all plagues_, those of the trumpets, _as often as
+they will_. These prophesy at the building of the second temple, like
+_Haggai_ and _Zechary_. These are _the two Olive-trees_, or Churches, which
+_supplied the lamps with oil_, _Zech._ iv. These are _the two
+candlesticks_, or Churches, _standing before the God of the earth_. Five of
+the seven Churches of _Asia_, those in prosperity, are found fault with,
+and exhorted to repent, and threatned to be _removed out of their places_,
+or _spewed out of _Christ's_ mouth_, or _punished with the sword of
+_Christ's_ mouth, except they repent_: the other two, the Churches of
+_Smyrna_ and _Philadelphia_, which were under persecution, remain in a
+state of persecution, to illuminate the second temple. When the primitive
+Church catholick, represented by _the woman in heaven_, apostatized, and
+became divided into two corrupt Churches, represented by the _whore of
+_Babylon__ and the _two-horned Beast_, the 144000 _who were sealed out of
+all the twelve tribes_, became the _two Witnesses_, in opposition to those
+two false Churches: and the name of _two Witnesses_ once imposed, remains
+to the true Church of God in all times and places to the end of the
+Prophecy.
+
+In the interpretation of this Prophecy, _the woman in heaven clothed with
+the sun_, before she flies into the wilderness, represents the primitive
+Church catholick, illuminated with the _seven lamps_ in the _seven golden
+candlesticks_, which are the _seven Churches_ of _Asia_. The Dragon
+signifies the same Empire with _Daniel_'s He-goat in the reign of his last
+horn, that is, the whole _Roman_ Empire, until it became divided into the
+_Greek_ and _Latin_ Empires; and all the time of that division it signifies
+the _Greek_ Empire alone: and the Beast is _Daniel_'s fourth Beast, that
+is, the Empire of the _Latins_. Before the division of the _Roman_ Empire
+into the _Greek_ and _Latin_ Empires, the Beast is included in the body of
+the Dragon; and from the time of that division, the Beast is the _Latin_
+Empire only. Hence the Dragon and Beast have the same heads and horns; but
+the heads are crowned upon the Dragon, and the horns upon the Beast. The
+horns are ten kingdoms, into which the Beast becomes divided presently
+after his separation from the Dragon, as hath been described above. The
+heads are seven successive dynasties, or parts, into which the _Roman_
+Empire becomes divided by the opening of the seven seals. Before the woman
+fled into the wilderness, _she being with child_ of a Christian Empire,
+_cried travelling_, viz. in the ten years persecution of _Dioclesian_, _and
+pained to be delivered: and the Dragon_, the heathen _Roman_ Empire, _stood
+before her, to devour her child as soon as it was born. And she brought
+forth a man child, who_ at length _was to rule all nations with a rod of
+iron. And her child was caught up unto God, and to his throne_ in the
+Temple, by the victory of _Constantine_ the great over _Maxentius_: _and
+the woman fled_ from the Temple _into the wilderness_ of _Arabia_ to
+_Babylon_, _where she hath a place_ of riches and honour and dominion, upon
+the back of the Beast, _prepared of God, that they should feed her there
+1260 days. And there was war in heaven_, between the heathens under
+_Maximinus_ and the new Christian Empire; _and the great Dragon was cast
+out, that old serpent, which deceiveth the whole world_, the spirit of
+heathen idolatry; _he was cast out_ of the throne _into the earth. And they
+overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and by the word of their testimony;
+and they loved not their lives unto the death_.
+
+_And when the Dragon saw that he was cast unto the earth, he persecuted the
+woman which brought forth the man child_, stirring up a new persecution
+against her in the reign of _Licinius_. _And to the woman_, by the building
+of _Constantinople_ and equalling it to _Rome_, _were given two wings of a
+great eagle, that she might flee into the wilderness into her place_ upon
+the back of her Beast, _where she is nourished for a time, and times, and
+half a time, from the face of the serpent. And the serpent_, upon the death
+of _Constantine_ the great, _cast out of his mouth water as a flood_, viz.
+the _Western_ Empire under _Constantine junior_ and _Constans_, _after the
+woman: that he might cause her to be carried away of the flood. And the
+earth_, the nations of _Asia_ now under _Constantinople_, _helped the
+woman_; and by conquering the _Western_ Empire, now under _Magnentius_,
+_swallowed up the flood which the Dragon cast out of his mouth. And the
+Dragon was wroth with the woman, and went to make war with the remnant of
+her seed, which keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of
+_Jesus Christ_, which_ in that war _were sealed out of all the twelve
+tribes of _Israel__, and remained upon mount _Sion_ with the Lamb, being in
+number 144000, and having their father's name written in their foreheads.
+
+When the earth had swallowed up the flood, and the Dragon was gone to make
+war with the remnant of the woman's seed, _John stood upon the sand of the
+sea, and saw a Beast rise out of the sea, having seven heads and ten horns.
+And the Beast was like unto a Leopard, and his feet were as the feet of a
+Bear, and his mouth as the mouth of a Lion._ _John_ here names _Daniel_'s
+four Beasts in order, putting his Beast in the room of _Daniel_'s fourth
+Beast, to shew that they are the same. _And the Dragon gave_ this Beast
+_his power and his seat and great authority_, by relinquishing the
+_Western_ Empire to him. _And one of his heads_, the sixth, was _as it were
+wounded to death_, viz. by the sword of the earth, which swallowed up the
+waters cast out of the mouth of the Dragon; _and his deadly wound was
+healed_, by a new division of the Empire between _Valentinian_ and
+_Valens_, _An._ 364. _John_ saw the Beast rise out of the sea, at the
+division thereof between _Gratian_ and _Theodosius_, _An._ 379. The Dragon
+gave the Beast his power, and his seat and great authority, at the death of
+_Theodosius_, when _Theodosius_ gave the _Western_ Empire to his son
+_Honorius_. After which the two Empires were no more united: but the
+_Western_ Empire became presently divided into ten kingdoms, as above; and
+these kingdoms at length united in religion under the woman, and reign with
+her _forty and two months_.
+
+_And I beheld_, saith _John_, _another Beast coming up out of the earth._
+When the woman fled from the Dragon into the kingdom of the Beast, and
+became his Church, this other Beast rose up out of the earth, to represent
+the Church of the Dragon. For _he had two horns like the Lamb_, such as
+were the bishopricks of _Alexandria_ and _Antioch_: _and he spake as the
+Dragon_ in matters of religion: _and he causeth the earth_, or nations of
+the Dragon's kingdom, _to worship the first Beast, whose deadly wound was
+healed_, that is, to be of his religion. _And he doth great wonders, so
+that he maketh fire come down from heaven on the earth in the sight of
+men_; that is, he excommunicateth those who differ from him in point of
+religion: for in pronouncing their excommunications, they used to swing
+down a lighted torch from above. _And he said to them that dwell on the
+earth, that they should make an image to the Beast, which had the wound by
+a sword, and did live_; that is, that they should call a Council of men of
+the religion of this Beast. _And he had power to give life unto the image
+of the Beast, that the image of the Beast should both speak, and cause that
+as many as would not worship the image of the Beast should be killed_, viz.
+mystically, by dissolving their Churches. _And he causeth all both small
+and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right
+band or in their foreheads, and that no man might buy or sell, save he that
+had the mark, or the name of the Beast, or the number of his name_; that
+is, the mark [Cross], or the name [Greek: LATEINOS], or the number thereof
+[Greek: chxs], 666. All others were excommunicated.
+
+When the seven Angels had poured out the seven vials of wrath, and _John_
+had described them all in the present time, he is called up from the time
+of the seventh vial to the time of the sixth seal, to take a view of the
+woman and her Beast, who were to reign in the times of the seventh seal. In
+respect of the latter part of time of the sixth seal, then considered as
+present, the Angel tells _John_: _The Beast that thou sawest, was and is
+not, and shall ascend out of the abyss, and go into perdition_; that is, he
+was in the reign of _Constans_ and _Magnentius_, until _Constantius_
+conquered _Magnentius_, and re-united the _Western_ Empire to the
+_Eastern_. He is not during the reunion, and he shall ascend out of the
+abyss or sea at a following division of the Empire. The Angel tells him
+further: _Here is the mind which hath wisdom: the seven heads are seven
+mountains, on which the woman sitteth_; _Rome_ being built upon seven
+hills, and thence called the seven-hilled city. _Also there are seven
+Kings: five are fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet come; and when
+he cometh, he must continue a short space: and the Beast that was and is
+not, even he is the eighth, and is of the seven, and goeth into perdition_.
+Five are fallen, the times of the five first seals being past; and one is,
+the time of the sixth seal being considered as present; and another is not
+yet come, and when he cometh, which will be at the opening of the seventh
+seal, he must continue a short space: and the Beast that was and is not,
+even he is the eighth, by means of the division of the _Roman_ Empire into
+two collateral Empires; and is of the seven, being one half of the seventh,
+and shall go into perdition. The words, _five are fallen, and one is, and
+the other is not yet come_, are usually referred by interpreters to the
+time of _John_ the Apostle, when the Prophecy was given: but it is to be
+considered, that in this Prophecy many things are spoken of as present,
+which were not present when the Prophecy was given, but which would be
+present with respect to some future time, considered as present in the
+visions. Thus where it is said upon pouring out the seventh vial of wrath,
+that _great _Babylon_ came in remembrance before God, to give unto her the
+cup of the wine of the fierceness of his wrath_; this relates not to the
+time of _John_ the Apostle, but to the time of pouring out the seventh vial
+of wrath. So where it is said, _Babylon is fallen, is fallen_; and _thrust
+in thy sickle and reap, for the time is come for thee to reap_; and _the
+time of the dead is come, that they should be judged_; and again, _I saw
+the dead small and great stand before God_: these sayings relate not to the
+days of _John_ the Apostle, but to the latter times considered as present
+in the visions. In like manner the words, _five are fallen, and one is, and
+the other is not yet come_, and _the Beast that was and is not, he is the
+eighth_, are not to be referred to the age of _John_ the Apostle, but
+relate to the time when the Beast was to be wounded to death with a sword,
+and shew that this wound was to be given him in his sixth head: and without
+this reference we are not told in what head the Beast was wounded. _And the
+ten horns which thou sawest, are ten Kings, which have received no kingdom
+as yet, but receive power as Kings one hour with the Beast. These have one
+mind_, being all of the whore's religion, _and shall give their power and
+strength unto the Beast. These shall make war with the Lamb_, at the
+sounding of the seventh trumpet; _and the Lamb shall overcome them: for he
+is Lord of Lords and King of Kings; and they that are with him are called
+and chosen and faithful. And he saith unto me, the waters which thou sawest
+where the whore sitteth, are peoples and multitudes and nations and
+tongues_, composing her Beast. _And the ten horns which thou sawest upon
+the Beast, these shall hate the whore, and shall make her desolate and
+naked, and shall eat her flesh, and burn her with fire_, at the end of the
+1260 days. _For God hath put in their hearts to fulfil his will, and to
+agree and give their kingdom unto the Beast, until the words of God shall
+be fulfilled. And the woman which thou sawest, is that great city which
+reigneth over the Kings of the earth_, or the great city of the _Latins_,
+which reigneth over the ten Kings till the end of those days.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_FINIS_.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Observations upon the Prophecies of
+Daniel, and the Apocalypse of St. John, by Isaac Newton
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OBSERVATIONS UPON THE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 16878-8.txt or 16878-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/8/7/16878/
+
+Produced by Greg Alethoup, Robert Shimmin, Keith Edkins
+and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+
diff --git a/16878-8.zip b/16878-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2e17b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-8.zip
diff --git a/16878-h.zip b/16878-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d8dc57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-h.zip
diff --git a/16878-h/16878-h.htm b/16878-h/16878-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e65412e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-h/16878-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,8345 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content=
+    "text/html; charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg Ebook of Observations upon the Prophecies of Daniel, and the Apocalypse of St. John
+    </title>
+
+    <style type="text/css">
+
+<!--
+    p {  margin-top: .75em;
+         text-align: justify;
+         margin-bottom: .75em;
+         }
+    H1,H2,H3,H4,H5,H6 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         }
+    hr                   {text-align: center; width: 50%;}
+    hr.full              {width: 100%;}
+    hr.short             {text-align: center; width: 20%;}
+    body { margin-left: 10%;
+           margin-right: 10%;
+        }
+
+    td.tbar { border-left : thin solid black; vertical-align: top; }
+    td.tc   { padding-left: 1em; padding-right: 1em; text-align: center; vertical-align: top; }
+    td.mbar { border-left : thin solid black; vertical-align: middle; }
+    table.allb { border : thin solid black; border-collapse: collapse  }
+    td.allb { border : thin solid black; padding-left: 1em; padding-right: 1em; }
+    .single p    {margin: 0;}
+
+    .contents
+    {margin-left:30%; margin-right:10%; margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: left;}
+    .contents .stanza        {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;}
+    .contents p              {margin: 0; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;}
+
+    .poem
+    {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%; margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: left;}
+    .poem .stanza        {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;}
+    .poem p              {margin: 0; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;}
+          p.i2           {margin-left: 1em;}
+          p.i4           {margin-left: 2em;}
+          p.i6           {margin-left: 3em;}
+          p.i8           {margin-left: 4em;}
+          p.z8           {margin-left: 4em; font-style: italic;}
+          p.i10          {margin-left: 5em;}
+          p.z10          {margin-left: 5em; font-style: italic;}
+          p.i12          {margin-left: 6em;}
+          p.i16          {margin-left: 8em;}
+          p.i20          {margin-left: 10em;}
+
+    a:link {color:blue; text-decoration:none}
+    a:visited {color:blue; text-decoration:none}
+    a:hover {color:red}
+    link {color:blue; text-decoration:none}
+
+    .noflo
+    {margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: left;}
+    .noflo .stanza        {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;}
+    .noflo p              {margin: 0; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;}
+    .noflo p.i2           {margin-left: 1em;}
+    .noflo p.i16          {margin-left: 8em;}
+
+    .author   {text-align: right; margin-top: -1em; margin-right: 5%;}
+    .center   {text-align: center; }
+    .right    {text-align: right; }
+    .t        {vertical-align: top; }
+    .tr       {vertical-align: top;}
+    .tc       {vertical-align: top;}
+    .tr p     {text-align: right;}
+    .tc p     {text-align: center;}
+    .m        {vertical-align: middle; }
+    .mr       {vertical-align: middle;}
+    .mc       {vertical-align: middle;}
+    .mr p     {text-align: right;}
+    .mc p     {text-align: center;}
+    .b        {vertical-align: bottom; }
+    .vol      {/*font-weight: bold;*/ font-size: small;}
+    /* .grk      {font-weight: bold; font-style: italic; } */
+    .grk      {font-style: normal; }
+    sup       {font-style: normal; }
+    pre       {font-family: "Courier New", Courier, monospace; margin-left: 1em; }
+    .sc       {font-variant: small-caps; }
+    .linenum  {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 60%;} /* poetry number */
+    blockquote {margin-left: 2em; margin-right: 2em; }
+    blockquote.small {font-size: small; }
+    .pagenum  {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */
+    .sidenote {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: left;} /* sidenotes */
+    .note     {margin-left: 2em; margin-right: 2em;
+               font-size: small; } /* footnote */
+
+    .nobo	  {border: thin;}
+    .red 	  {color: red;}
+    .figure, .figcenter, .figright, .figleft
+              {padding: 1em; margin: 0; text-align: center; font-size: 0.8em;}
+    .figure img, .figcenter img, .figright img, .figleft img
+              {border: none;}
+    .figure p, .figcenter p, .figright p, .figleft p
+              {margin: 0; text-indent: 1em;}
+    .figure p.in, .figcenter p.in, .figright p.in, .figleft p.in
+              {margin: 0; text-indent: 8em;}
+    .figcenter {margin: auto;}
+    .figright {float: right;}
+    .figleft  {float: left;}
+    // -->
+    </style>
+   </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Observations upon the Prophecies of Daniel,
+and the Apocalypse of St. John, by Isaac Newton
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Observations upon the Prophecies of Daniel, and the Apocalypse of St. John
+
+Author: Isaac Newton
+
+Release Date: October 15, 2005 [EBook #16878]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OBSERVATIONS UPON THE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Greg Alethoup, Robert Shimmin, Keith Edkins
+and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+<h2>OBSERVATIONS<br />
+<font class="sc">upon the</font><br />
+PROPHECIES<br />
+<font class="sc">of</font><br />
+<i>DANIEL</i>,<br />
+<font class="sc">and the</font><br />
+APOCALYPSE<br />
+<font class="sc">of</font><br />
+St. <i>JOHN</i>.</h2>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3>In Two PARTS.</h3>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3>By Sir <i>ISAAC NEWTON</i>.</h3>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><i>LONDON,</i></h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;">Printed by J. DARBY and T. BROWNE in <i>Bartholomew-Close.</i></p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;">And Sold by J. ROBERTS in <i>Warwick-lane</i>, J. TONSON in the<br />
+<i>Strand</i>, W. INNYS and R. MANBY at the West End of St.<br />
+<i>Paul's Church-Yard</i>, J. OSBORN and T. LONGMAN in <i>Pater-Noster-Row</i>,<br />
+J. NOON near <i>Mercers Chapel</i> in <i>Cheapside</i>, <br />
+T. HATCHETT at the <i>Royal Exchange</i>, S. HARDING in St.<br />
+<i>Martin's lane</i>, J. STAGG in <i>Westminster-Hall</i>, J. PARKER in<br />
+<i>Pall-mall</i>, and J. BRINDLEY in <i>New Bond-Street</i>.</p>
+
+<h3>M.DCC.XXXIII.</h3>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;">To the Right Honourable</p>
+
+<h1><i>P E T E R</i></h1>
+
+<h2>Lord <i>K I N G</i>,</h2>
+
+<h3>Baron of <i>Ockham</i>, Lord High
+Chancellor of <i>Great-Britain.</i></h3>
+
+  <p>My Lord,</p>
+
+  <p><i>I shall make no Apology for addressing the following Sheets to Your
+  Lordship, who lived in a long Intercourse of Friendship with the Author;
+  and, like him, amidst occupations of a different nature, made Religion
+  your voluntary Study; and in all your Enquiries and Actions, have shewn
+  the same inflexible Adherence to Truth and Virtue.</i></p>
+
+  <p><i>I shall always reckon it one of the Advantages of my Relation to
+  Sir </i>Isaac Newton<i>, that it affords me an opportunity of making this
+  publick acknowledgment of the unfeigned Respect of</i>,</p>
+
+  <div class="contents">
+    <div class="stanza">
+      <p>My Lord,</p>
+      <p class="i4">Your Lordship's</p>
+      <p class="i8">most obedient, and</p>
+      <p class="i12">most humble Servant,</p>
+      <p class="i16">Benj. Smith.</p>
+    </div>
+  </div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h2>CONTENTS.</h2>
+
+<h3>PART I.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;">Observations upon the Prophecies of <i>Daniel</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanI">CHAP. I</a>. Introduction concerning, the Compilers of
+  the Books of the Old Testament.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanII">CHAP. II</a>. Of the Prophetic Language.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanIII">CHAP. III</a>. Of the vision of the Image composed
+  of four Metals.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanIV">CHAP. IV</a>. Of the vision of the four Beasts.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanV">CHAP. V</a>. Of the Kingdoms represented by the feet
+  of the Image composed of iron and clay.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanVI">CHAP. VI</a>. Of the ten Kingdoms represented by the
+  ten horns of the fourth Beast.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanVII">CHAP. VII</a>. Of the eleventh horn of
+  <i>Daniel</i>'s fourth Beast.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanVIII">CHAP. VIII</a>. Of the power of the eleventh horn
+  of <i>Daniel</i>'s fourth Beast, to change times and laws.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanIX">CHAP. IX</a>. Of the Kingdoms represented in
+  <i>Daniel</i> by the Ram and He-Goat.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanX">CHAP. X</a>. Of the Prophecy of the Seventy Weeks.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanXI">CHAP. XI</a>. Of the Times of the Birth and Passion
+  of Christ.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanXII">CHAP. XII</a>. Of the Prophecy of the Scripture of
+  Truth.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanXIII">CHAP. XIII</a>. Of the King who did according to
+  his will, and magnified himself above every God, and honoured
+  <i>Mahuzzims</i>, and regarded not the desire of women.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#DanXIV">CHAP. XIV</a>. Of the <i>Mahuzzims</i>, honoured by
+  the King who doth according to his will.</p>
+
+<h3>PART II.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;">Observations upon the <i>Apocalypse</i> of St. <i>John</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#JohI">CHAP. I</a>. Introduction, concerning the time when
+  the <i>Apocalypse</i> was written.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#JohII">CHAP. II</a>. Of the relation which the
+  <i>Apocalypse</i> of <i>John</i> hath to the Book of the Law of
+  <i>Moses</i>, and to the worship of God in the Temple.</p>
+
+  <p><a href="#JohIII">CHAP. III</a>. Of the relation which the Prophecy of
+  <i>John</i> hath to those of <i>Daniel</i>; and of the Subject of the
+  Prophecy.</p>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h2><b>PART I.</b></h2>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h2>OBSERVATIONS<br />
+<font class="sc">upon the</font><br />
+PROPHECIES<br />
+<font class="sc">of</font><br />
+<i>DANIEL.</i></h2>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h2>OBSERVATIONS</h2>
+
+<h3>UPON THE</h3>
+
+<h2>Prophecies of <i>DANIEL</i></h2>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanI">CHAP. I</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Introduction concerning the Compilers of
+the books of the Old Testament.</i></p>
+
+  <p>When <i>Manasses</i> <a name="NtpDanI_1"
+  href="#NtDanI_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> set up a carved image in the house of
+  the Lord, and built altars in the two courts of the house, to all the
+  host of Heaven, and us'd inchantments and witchcraft, and familiar
+  spirits, and for his great wickedness was invaded by the army of
+  <i>Asserhadon</i> King of <i>Assyria</i>, and carried captive to
+  <i>Babylon</i>; the book of the Law was lost till the eighteenth year of
+  his grandson <i>Josiah</i>. Then <a name="NtpDanI_2"
+  href="#NtDanI_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> <i>Hilkiah</i> the High Priest, upon
+  repairing the Temple, found it there: and the King lamented that their
+  fathers had not done after the words of the book, and commanded that it
+  should be read to the people, and caused the people to renew the holy
+  covenant with God. This is the book of the Law now extant.</p>
+
+  <p>When <a name="NtpDanI_3" href="#NtDanI_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a>
+  <i>Shishak</i> came out of <i>Egypt</i> and spoil'd the temple, and
+  brought <i>Judah</i> into subjection to the monarchy of <i>Egypt</i>,
+  (which was in the fifth year of <i>Rehoboam</i>) the <i>Jews</i>
+  continued under great troubles for about twenty years; being <i>without
+  the true God, and without a teaching Priest, and without Law: and in
+  those times there was no peace to him that went out, nor to him that came
+  in, but great vexations were upon all the inhabitants of the countries,
+  and nation was destroyed of nation, and city of city, for God did vex
+  them with all adversity</i>. But <a name="NtpDanI_4"
+  href="#NtDanI_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> when <i>Shishak</i> was dead, and
+  <i>Egypt</i> fell into troubles, <i>Judah</i> had quiet ten years; and in
+  that time <i>Asa</i> built fenced cities in <i>Judah</i>, and got up an
+  army of 580000 men, with which, in the 15th year of his reign, he met and
+  overcame <i>Zerah</i> the <i>Ethiopian</i>, who had conquered
+  <i>Egypt</i> and <i>Lybia</i>, and <i>Troglodytica</i>, and came out with
+  an army of 1000000 <i>Lybians</i> and <i>Ethiopians</i>, to recover the
+  countries conquered by <i>Sesac</i>. And after this victory <a
+  name="NtpDanI_5" href="#NtDanI_5"><sup>[5]</sup></a> <i>Asa</i> dethroned
+  his mother for idolatry, and he renewed the Altar, and brought new
+  vessels of gold and silver into the Temple; and he and the people entered
+  into a new covenant to seek the Lord God of their fathers, upon pain of
+  death to those who worshiped other Gods; and his son <i>Jehosaphat</i>
+  took away the high places, and in the third year of his reign sent some
+  of his Princes, and of the Priests and Levites, to teach in the cities of
+  <i>Judah</i>: and they had the book of the Law with them, and went about
+  throughout all the cities of <i>Judah</i>, and taught the people. This is
+  that book of the Law which was afterwards lost in the reign of
+  <i>Manasses</i>, and found again in the reign of <i>Josiah</i>, and
+  therefore it was written before the third year of <i>Jehosaphat</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The same book of the Law was preserved and handed down to posterity by
+  the <i>Samaritans</i>, and therefore was received by the ten Tribes
+  before their captivity. For <a name="NtpDanI_6"
+  href="#NtDanI_6"><sup>[6]</sup></a> when the ten Tribes were captivated,
+  a Priest or the captivity was sent back to <i>Bethel</i>, by order of the
+  King of <i>Assyria</i>, to instruct the new inhabitants of
+  <i>Samaria</i>, in <i>the manner of the God of the land</i>; and the
+  <i>Samaritans</i> had the <i>Pentateuch</i> from this Priest, as
+  containing the law or <i>manner of the God of the land</i>, which he was
+  to teach them. For <a name="NtpDanI_7"
+  href="#NtDanI_7"><sup>[7]</sup></a> they persevered in the religion which
+  he taught them, joining with it the worship of their own Gods; and by
+  persevering in what they had been taught, they preserved this book of
+  their Law in the original character of the <i>Hebrews</i>, while the two
+  Tribes, after their return from <i>Babylon</i>, changed the character to
+  that of the <i>Chaldees</i>, which they had learned at
+  <i>Babylon</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>And since the <i>Pentateuch</i> was received as the book of the Law,
+  both by the two Tribes and by the ten Tribes, it follows that they
+  received it before they became divided into two Kingdoms. For after the
+  division, they received not laws from one another, but continued at
+  variance. <i>Judah</i> could not reclaim <i>Israel</i> from the sin of
+  <i>Jeroboam</i>, and <i>Israel</i> could not bring <i>Judah</i> to it.
+  The <i>Pentateuch</i> therefore was the book of the Law in the days of
+  <i>David</i> and <i>Solomon</i>. The affairs of the Tabernacle and Temple
+  were ordered by <i>David</i> and <i>Solomon</i>, according to the Law of
+  this book; and <i>David</i> in the 78th Psalm, admonishing the people to
+  give ear to the Law of God, means the Law of this book. For in describing
+  how their forefathers kept it not, he quotes many historical things out
+  of the books of <i>Exodus</i> and <i>Numbers</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The race of the Kings of <i>Edom</i>, before there reigned any King
+  over <i>Israel</i>, is set down in the book of <a name="NtpDanI_8"
+  href="#NtDanI_8"><sup>[8]</sup></a> <i>Genesis</i>; and therefore that
+  book was not written entirely in the form now extant, before the reign of
+  <i>Saul</i>. The writer set down the race of those Kings till his own
+  time, and therefore wrote before <i>David</i> conquered <i>Edom</i>. The
+  <i>Pentateuch</i> is composed of the Law and the history of God's people
+  together; and the history hath been collected from several books, such as
+  were the history of the Creation composed by <i>Moses</i>, <i>Gen</i>.
+  ii. 4. the book of the generations of <i>Adam</i>, <i>Gen.</i> v. i. and
+  the book of the wars of the Lord, <i>Num.</i> xxi. 14. This book of wars
+  contained what was done at the Red-sea, and in the journeying of
+  <i>Israel</i> thro' the Wilderness, and therefore was begun by
+  <i>Moses</i>. And <i>Joshua</i> might carry it on to the conquest of
+  <i>Canaan</i>. For <i>Joshua</i> wrote some things in the book of the Law
+  of God, <i>Josh.</i> xxiv. 26 and therefore might write his own wars in
+  the book of wars, those being the principal wars of God. These were
+  publick books, and therefore not written without the authority of
+  <i>Moses</i> and <i>Joshua</i>. And <i>Samuel</i> had leisure in the
+  reign of <i>Saul</i>, to put them into the form of the books of
+  <i>Moses</i> and <i>Joshua</i> now extant, inserting into the book of
+  <i>Genesis</i>, the race of the Kings of <i>Edom</i>, until there reigned
+  a King in <i>Israel</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The book of the <i>Judges</i> is a continued history of the
+  <i>Judges</i> down to the death of <i>Sampson</i>, and therefore was
+  compiled after his death, out of the Acts of the <i>Judges</i>. Several
+  things in this book are said to be done <i>when there was no King in
+  </i>Israel, <i>Judg.</i> xvii. 6. xviii. 1. xix. 1. xxi. 25. and
+  therefore this book was written after the beginning of the reign of
+  <i>Saul</i>. When it was written, the <i>Jebusites</i> dwelt in
+  <i>Jerusalem</i>, <i>Jud.</i> i. 21 and therefore it was written before
+  the eighth year of <i>David</i>, 2 <i>Sam.</i> v. 8. and 1 <i>Chron.</i>
+  xi. 6. The books of <i>Moses</i>, <i>Joshua</i>, and <i>Judges</i>,
+  contain one continued history, down from the Creation to the death of
+  <i>Sampson</i>. Where the <i>Pentateuch</i> ends, the book of
+  <i>Joshua</i> begins; and where the book of <i>Joshua</i> ends, the book
+  of <i>Judges</i> begins. Therefore all these books have been composed out
+  of the writings of <i>Moses</i>, <i>Joshua</i>, and other records, by one
+  and the same hand, after the beginning of the reign of <i>Saul</i>, and
+  before the eighth year of <i>David</i>. And <i>Samuel</i> was a sacred
+  writer, 1 <i>Sam.</i> x. 25. acquainted with the history of <i>Moses</i>
+  and the <i>Judges</i>, 1 <i>Sam.</i> xii. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12. and had
+  leisure in the reign of <i>Saul</i>, and sufficient authority to compose
+  these books. He was a Prophet, and judged <i>Israel</i> all the days of
+  his life, and was in the greatest esteem with the people; and the Law by
+  which he was to judge the people was not to be published by less
+  authority than his own, the Law-maker being not inferior to the judge.
+  And the book of <i>Jasher</i>, which is quoted in the book of
+  <i>Joshua</i>, <i>Josh.</i> x. 13. was in being at the death of
+  <i>Saul</i>, 2 <i>Sam.</i> i. 18.</p>
+
+  <p>At the dedication of the Temple of <i>Solomon</i>, when the Ark was
+  brought into the most holy place, there was nothing in it but the two
+  tables, 1 <i>Kings</i> viii. 9. and therefore when the <i>Philistines</i>
+  took the Ark, they took out of it the book of the Law, and the golden pot
+  of Manna, and <i>Aaron</i>'s Rod. And this and other losses in the
+  desolation of <i>Israel</i>, by the conquering <i>Philistines</i>, might
+  give occasion to <i>Samuel</i>, after some respite from those enemies, to
+  recollect the scattered writings of <i>Moses</i> and <i>Joshua</i>, and
+  the records of the Patriarchs and Judges, and compose them in the form
+  now extant.</p>
+
+  <p>The book of <i>Ruth</i> is a history of things done in the days of the
+  <i>Judges</i>, and may be looked upon as an addition to the book of the
+  <i>Judges</i>, written by the same author, and at the same time. For it
+  was written after the birth of <i>David</i>, <i>Ruth</i> iv. 17, 22. and
+  not long after, because the history of <i>Boaz</i> and <i>Ruth</i>, the
+  great grandfather and great grandmother of <i>David</i>, and that of
+  their contemporaries, could not well be remembered above two or three
+  generations. And since this book derives the genealogy of <i>David</i>
+  from <i>Boaz</i> and <i>Ruth</i>, and omits <i>David</i>'s elder brothers
+  and his sons; it was written in honour of <i>David</i>, after he was
+  anointed King by <i>Samuel</i>, and before he had children in
+  <i>Hebron</i>, and by consequence in the reign of <i>Saul</i>. It
+  proceeds not to the history of <i>David</i>, and therefore seems to have
+  been written presently after he was anointed. They judge well therefore
+  who ascribe to <i>Samuel</i> the books of <i>Joshua</i>, <i>Judges</i>,
+  and <i>Ruth</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Samuel</i> is also reputed the author of the first book of
+  <i>Samuel</i>, till the time of his death. The two books of <i>Samuel</i>
+  cite no authors, and therefore seem to be originals. They begin with his
+  genealogy, birth and education, and might be written partly in his
+  lifetime by himself or his disciples the Prophets at <i>Naioth</i> in
+  <i>Ramah</i>, 1 <i>Sam.</i> xix. 18, 19, 20. and partly after his death
+  by the same disciples.</p>
+
+  <p>The books of the <i>Kings</i> cite other authors, as the book of the
+  Acts of <i>Solomon</i>, the book of the <i>Chronicles</i> of the Kings of
+  <i>Israel</i>, and the book of the <i>Chronicles</i> of the Kings of
+  <i>Judah</i>. The books of the <i>Chronicles</i> cite the book of
+  <i>Samuel</i> the Seer, the book of <i>Nathan</i> the Prophet, and the
+  book of <i>Gad</i> the Seer, for the Acts of <i>David</i>; the book of
+  <i>Nathan</i> the Prophet, the Prophecy of <i>Ahijah</i> the
+  <i>Shilonite</i>, and the visions of <i>Iddo</i> the Seer, for the Acts
+  of <i>Solomon</i>; the book of <i>Shemajah</i> the Prophet, and the book
+  of <i>Iddo</i> the Seer concerning genealogies, for the Acts of
+  <i>Rehoboam</i> and <i>Abijah</i>; the book of the Kings of <i>Judah</i>
+  and <i>Israel</i> for the Acts of <i>Asa</i>, <i>Joash</i>,
+  <i>Amaziah</i>, <i>Jotham</i>, <i>Ahaz</i>, <i>Hezekiah</i>,
+  <i>Manasseh</i>, and <i>Josiah</i>; the book of <i>Hanani</i> the Seer,
+  for the Acts of <i>Jehosaphat</i>; and the visions of <i>Isaiah</i> for
+  the Acts of <i>Uzziah</i> and <i>Hezekiah</i>. These books were therefore
+  collected out of the historical writings of the antient Seers and
+  Prophets. And because the books of the <i>Kings</i> and <i>Chronicles</i>
+  quote one another, they were written at one and the same time. And this
+  time was after the return from the <i>Babylonian</i> captivity, because
+  they bring down the history of <i>Judah</i>, and the genealogies of the
+  Kings of <i>Judah</i>, and of the High Priests, to that captivity. The
+  book of <i>Ezra</i> was originally a part of the book of the
+  <i>Chronicles</i>, and has been divided from it. For it begins with the
+  two last verses of the books of <i>Chronicles</i>, and the first book of
+  <i>Esdras</i> begins with the two last chapters thereof. <i>Ezra</i> was
+  therefore the compiler of the books of <i>Kings</i> and
+  <i>Chronicles</i>, and brought down the history to his own time. He was a
+  ready Scribe in the Law of God; and for assisting him in this work
+  <i>Nehemias</i> founded a library, and <i>gathered together the Acts of
+  the Kings and the Prophets, and of </i>David<i>, and the Epistles of the
+  Kings, concerning the holy gifts</i>, 2 <i>Maccab.</i> ii. 13. By the
+  Acts of <i>David</i> I understand here the two books of <i>Samuel</i>, or
+  at least the second book. Out of the Acts of the <i>Kings</i>, written
+  from time to time by the Prophets, he compos'd the books of the Kings of
+  <i>Judah</i> and <i>Israel</i>, the <i>Chronicles</i> of the Kings of
+  <i>Judah</i>, and the <i>Chronicles</i> of the Kings of <i>Israel</i>.
+  And in doing this he joined those Acts together, in due order of time,
+  copying the very words of the authors, as is manifest from hence, that
+  the books of the <i>Kings</i> and <i>Chronicles</i> frequently agree with
+  one another in words for many sentences together. Where they agree in
+  sense, there they agree in words also.</p>
+
+  <p>So the Prophecies of <i>Isaiah</i>, written at several times, he has
+  collected into one body. And the like he did for those of
+  <i>Jeremiah</i>, and the rest of the Prophets, down to the days of the
+  second Temple. The book of <i>Jonah</i> is the history of <i>Jonah</i>
+  written by another hand. The book of <i>Daniel</i> is a collection of
+  papers written at several times. The six last chapters contain Prophecies
+  written at several times by <i>Daniel</i> himself: the six first are a
+  collection of historical papers written by others. The fourth chapter is
+  a decree of <i>Nebuchadnezzar</i>. The first chapter was written after
+  <i>Daniel</i>'s death: for the author saith, that <i>Daniel</i> continued
+  to the first year of <i>Cyrus</i>; that is, to his first year over the
+  <i>Persians</i> and <i>Medes</i>, and third year over <i>Babylon</i>.
+  And, for the same reason, the fifth and sixth chapters were also written
+  after his death. For they end with these words: <i>So this </i>Daniel<i>
+  prospered in the reign of </i>Darius<i> and in the reign of </i>Cyrus<i>
+  the</i> Persian. Yet these words might be added by the collector of the
+  papers, whom I take to be <i>Ezra</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The Psalms composed by <i>Moses</i>, <i>David</i>, and others, seem to
+  have been also collected by <i>Ezra</i> into one volume. I reckon him the
+  collector, because in this collection I meet with Psalms as late as the
+  <i>Babylonian</i> captivity, but with none later.</p>
+
+  <p>After these things <i>Antiochus Epiphanes</i> spoiled the Temple,
+  commanded the <i>Jews</i> to forsake the Law upon pain of death, and
+  caused the sacred books to be burnt wherever they could be found: and in
+  these troubles the book of the <i>Chronicles</i> of the Kings of
+  <i>Israel</i> was entirely lost. But upon recovering from this
+  oppression, <i>Judas Maccab�us</i> gathered together all those writings
+  that were to be met with, 2 <i>Maccab.</i> ii. 14. and in reducing them
+  into order, part of the Prophecies of <i>Isaiah</i>, or some other
+  Prophet, have been added to the end of the Prophecies of
+  <i>Zechariah</i>; and the book of <i>Ezra</i> has been separated from the
+  book of <i>Chronicles</i>, and set together in two different orders; in
+  one order in the book of <i>Ezra</i>, received into the Canon, and in
+  another order in the first book of <i>Esdras</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>After the <i>Roman</i> captivity, the <i>Jews</i> for preserving their
+  traditions, put them in writing in their <i>Talmud</i>, and for
+  preserving their scriptures, agreed upon an Edition, and pointed it, and
+  counted the letters of every sort in every book: and by preserving only
+  this Edition, the antienter various lections, except what can be
+  discovered by means of the <i>Septuagint</i> Version, are now lost; and
+  such marginal notes, or other corruptions, as by the errors of the
+  transcribers, before this Edition was made, had crept into the text, are
+  now scarce to be corrected.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Jews</i> before the <i>Roman</i> captivity, distinguished the
+  sacred books into the Law, the Prophets, and the <i>Hagiographa</i>, or
+  holy writings; and read only the Law and the Prophets in their
+  Synagogues. And Christ and his Apostles laid the stress of religion upon
+  the Law and the Prophets, <i>Matt.</i> vii. 12. xxii. 4. <i>Luke</i> xvi.
+  16, 29, 31. xxiv. 44. <i>Acts</i> xxiv. 14. xxvi. 22. <i>Rom.</i> iii.
+  21. By the <i>Hagiographa</i> they meant the historical books called
+  <i>Joshua</i>, <i>Judges</i>, <i>Ruth</i>, <i>Samuel</i>, <i>Kings</i>,
+  <i>Chronicles</i>, <i>Ezra</i>, <i>Nehemiah</i>, and <i>Esther</i>, the
+  book of <i>Job</i>, the <i>Psalms</i>, the books of <i>Solomon</i>, and
+  the <i>Lamentations</i>. The Samaritans read only the <i>Pentateuch</i>:
+  and when <i>Jehosaphat</i> sent men to teach in the cities, they had with
+  them only the book of the Law; for the Prophecies now extant were not
+  then written. And upon the return from the <i>Babylonian</i> captivity,
+  <i>Ezra</i> read only the book of the Law to the people, from morning to
+  noon on the first day of the seventh month; and from day to day in the
+  feast of Tabernacles: for he had not yet collected the writings of the
+  Prophets into the volume now extant; but instituted the reading of them
+  after the collection was made. By reading the Law and the Prophets in the
+  Synagogues, those books have been kept freer from corruption than the
+  <i>Hagiographa</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>In the infancy of the nation of <i>Israel</i>, when God had given them
+  a Law, and made a covenant with them to be their God if they would keep
+  his commandments, he sent Prophets to reclaim them, as often as they
+  revolted to the worship of other Gods: and upon their returning to him,
+  they sometimes renewed the covenant which they had broken. These Prophets
+  he continued to send, till the days of <i>Ezra</i>: but after their
+  Prophecies were read in the Synagogues, those Prophecies were thought
+  sufficient. For if the people would not hear <i>Moses</i> and the old
+  Prophets, they would hear no new ones, no not <i>tho they should rise
+  from the dead</i>. At length when a new truth was to be preached to the
+  <i>Gentiles</i>, namely, <i>that Jesus was the Christ</i>, God sent new
+  Prophets and Teachers: but after their writings were also received and
+  read in the Synagogues of the Christians, Prophecy ceased a second time.
+  We have <i>Moses</i>, the Prophets, and Apostles, and the words of Christ
+  himself; and if we will not hear them, we shall be more inexcusable than
+  the <i>Jews.</i> For the Prophets and Apostles have foretold, that as
+  <i>Israel</i> often revolted and brake the covenant, and upon repentance
+  renewed it; so there should be a falling away among the Christians, soon
+  after the days of the Apostles; and that in the latter days God would
+  destroy the impenitent revolters, and make a new covenant with his
+  people. And the giving ear to the Prophets is a fundamental character of
+  the true Church. For God has so ordered the Prophecies, that in the
+  latter days <i>the wise may understand, but the wicked shall do wickedly,
+  and none of the wicked shall understand</i>, Dan. xii. 9, 10. The
+  authority of Emperors, Kings, and Princes, is human. The authority of
+  Councils, Synods, Bishops, and Presbyters, is human. The authority of the
+  Prophets is divine, and comprehends the sum of religion, reckoning
+  <i>Moses</i> and the Apostles among the Prophets; and <i>if an Angel from
+  Heaven preach any other gospel</i>, than what they have delivered, <i>let
+  him be accursed</i>. Their writings contain the covenant between God and
+  his people, with instructions for keeping this covenant; instances of
+  God's judgments upon them that break it: and predictions of things to
+  come. While the people of God keep the covenant, they continue to be his
+  people: when they break it they cease to be his people or church, and
+  become <i>the Synagogue of Satan, who say they are </i>Jews<i> and are
+  not.</i> And no power on earth is authorized to alter this covenant.</p>
+
+  <p>The predictions of things to come relate to the state of the Church in
+  all ages: and amongst the old Prophets, <i>Daniel</i> is most distinct in
+  order of time, and easiest to be understood: and therefore in those
+  things which relate to the last times, he must be made the key to the
+  rest.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. I.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanI_1" href="#NtpDanI_1">[1]</a> 2 Chron. xxxiii. 5, 6,
+  7.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanI_2" href="#NtpDanI_2">[2]</a> 2 Chron. xxxiv.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanI_3" href="#NtpDanI_3">[3]</a> 2 Chron. xii. 2, 3, 4, 8,
+  9. &amp; xv. 3, 5, 6.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanI_4" href="#NtpDanI_4">[4]</a> 2 Chron. xiv. 1, 6, 7, 8,
+  9, 12.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanI_5" href="#NtpDanI_5">[5]</a> 2 Chron. xv. 3, 12, 13,
+  16, 18.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanI_6" href="#NtpDanI_6">[6]</a> 2 Kings xvii. 27, 28, 32,
+  33.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanI_7" href="#NtpDanI_7">[7]</a> 2 Kings xvii. 34, 41.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanI_8" href="#NtpDanI_8">[8]</a> Gen. xxxvi. 31.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanII">CHAP. II</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the Prophetic Language.</i></p>
+
+  <p>For understanding the Prophecies, we are, in the first place, to
+  acquaint our-selves with the figurative language of the Prophets. This
+  language is taken from the analogy between the world natural, and an
+  empire or kingdom considered as a world politic.</p>
+
+  <p>Accordingly, the whole world natural consisting of heaven and earth,
+  signifies the whole world politic, consisting of thrones and people, or
+  so much of it as is considered in the Prophecy: and the things in that
+  world signify the analogous things in this. For the heavens, and the
+  things therein, signify thrones and dignities, and those who enjoy them;
+  and the earth, with the things thereon, the inferior people; and the
+  lowest parts of the earth, called <i>Hades</i> or Hell, the lowest or
+  most miserable part of them. Whence ascending towards heaven, and
+  descending to the earth, are put for rising and falling in power and
+  honour: rising out of the earth, or waters, and falling into them, for
+  the rising up to any dignity or dominion, out of the inferior state of
+  the people, or falling down from the same into that inferior state;
+  descending into the lower parts of the earth, for descending to a very
+  low and unhappy estate; speaking with a faint voice out of the dust, for
+  being in a weak and low condition; moving from one place to another, for
+  translation from one office, dignity, or dominion, to another; great
+  earthquakes, and the shaking of heaven and earth, for the shaking of
+  kingdoms, so as to distract or overthrow them; the creating a new heaven
+  and earth, and the passing away of an old one, or the beginning and end
+  of the world, for the rise and ruin of the body politic signified
+  thereby.</p>
+
+  <p>In the heavens, the Sun and Moon are, by interpreters of dreams, put
+  for the persons of Kings and Queens; but in sacred Prophecy, which
+  regards not single persons, the Sun is put for the whole species and race
+  of Kings, in the kingdom or kingdoms of the world politic, shining with
+  regal power and glory; the Moon for the body of the common people,
+  considered as the King's wife; the Stars for subordinate Princes and
+  great men, or for Bishops and Rulers of the people of God, when the Sun
+  is Christ; light for the glory, truth, and knowledge, wherewith great and
+  good men shine and illuminate others; darkness for obscurity of
+  condition, and for error, blindness and ignorance; darkning, smiting, or
+  setting of the Sun, Moon, and Stars, for the ceasing of a kingdom, or for
+  the desolation thereof, proportional to the darkness; darkning the Sun,
+  turning the Moon into blood, and falling of the Stars, for the same; new
+  Moons, for the return of a dispersed people into a body politic or
+  ecclesiastic.</p>
+
+  <p>Fire and meteors refer to both heaven and earth, and signify as
+  follows; burning any thing with fire, is put for the consuming thereof by
+  war; a conflagration of the earth, or turning a country into a lake of
+  fire, for the consumption of a kingdom by war; the being in a furnace,
+  for the being in slavery under another nation; the ascending up of the
+  smoke of any burning thing for ever and ever, for the continuation of a
+  conquered people under the misery of perpetual subjection and slavery;
+  the scorching heat of the sun, for vexatious wars, persecutions and
+  troubles inflicted by the King; riding on the clouds, for reigning over
+  much people; covering the sun with a cloud, or with smoke, for oppression
+  of the King by the armies of an enemy; tempestuous winds, or the motion
+  of clouds, for wars; thunder, or the voice of a cloud, for the voice of a
+  multitude; a storm of thunder, lightning, hail, and overflowing rain, for
+  a tempest of war descending from the heavens and clouds politic, on the
+  heads of their enemies; rain, if not immoderate, and dew, and living
+  water, for the graces and doctrines of the Spirit; and the defect of
+  rain, for spiritual barrenness.</p>
+
+  <p>In the earth, the dry land and congregated waters, as a sea, a river,
+  a flood, are put for the people of several regions, nations, and
+  dominions; embittering of waters, for great affliction of the people by
+  war and persecution; turning things into blood, for the mystical death of
+  bodies politic, that is, for their dissolution; the overflowing of a sea
+  or river, for the invasion of the earth politic, by the people of the
+  waters; drying up of waters, for the conquest of their regions by the
+  earth; fountains of waters for cities, the permanent heads of rivers
+  politic; mountains and islands, for the cities of the earth and sea
+  politic, with the territories and dominions belonging to those cities;
+  dens and rocks of mountains, for the temples of cities; the hiding of men
+  in those dens and rocks, for the shutting up of Idols in their temples;
+  houses and ships, for families, assemblies, and towns, in the earth and
+  sea politic; and a navy of ships of war, for an army of that kingdom that
+  is signified by the sea.</p>
+
+  <p>Animals also and vegetables are put for the people of several regions
+  and conditions; and particularly, trees, herbs, and land animals, for the
+  people of the earth politic: flags, reeds, and fishes, for those of the
+  waters politic; birds and insects, for those of the politic heaven and
+  earth; a forest for a kingdom; and a wilderness for a desolate and thin
+  people.</p>
+
+  <p>If the world politic, considered in prophecy, consists of many
+  kingdoms, they are represented by as many parts of the world natural; as
+  the noblest by the celestial frame, and then the Moon and Clouds are put
+  for the common people; the less noble, by the earth, sea, and rivers, and
+  by the animals or vegetables, or buildings therein; and then the greater
+  and more powerful animals and taller trees, are put for Kings, Princes,
+  and Nobles. And because the whole kingdom is the body politic of the
+  King, therefore the Sun, or a Tree, or a Beast, or Bird, or a Man,
+  whereby the King is represented, is put in a large signification for the
+  whole kingdom; and several animals, as a Lion, a Bear, a Leopard, a Goat,
+  according to their qualities, are put for several kingdoms and bodies
+  politic; and sacrificing of beasts, for slaughtering and conquering of
+  kingdoms; and friendship between beasts, for peace between kingdoms. Yet
+  sometimes vegetables and animals are, by certain epithets or
+  circumstances, extended to other significations; as a Tree, when called
+  the <i>tree of life</i> or <i>of knowledge</i>; and a Beast, when called
+  <i>the old serpent</i>, or worshipped.</p>
+
+  <p>When a Beast or Man is put for a kingdom, his parts and qualities are
+  put for the analogous parts and qualities of the kingdom; as the head of
+  a Beast, for the great men who precede and govern; the tail for the
+  inferior people, who follow and are governed; the heads, if more than
+  one, for the number of capital parts, or dynasties, or dominions in the
+  kingdom, whether collateral or successive, with respect to the civil
+  government; the horns on any head, for the number of kingdoms in that
+  head, with respect to military power; seeing for understanding, and the
+  eyes for men of understanding and policy, and in matters of religion for
+  <span lang="el" title="Episkopoi"
+  >&#x395;&#x3C0;&#x3B9;&#x3C3;&#x3BA;&#x3BF;&#x3C0;&#x3BF;&#x3B9;</span>,
+  Bishops; speaking, for making laws; the mouth, for a law-giver, whether
+  civil or sacred; the loudness of the voice, for might and power; the
+  faintness thereof, for weakness; eating and drinking, for acquiring what
+  is signified by the things eaten and drank; the hairs of a beast, or man,
+  and the feathers of a bird, for people; the wings, for the number of
+  kingdoms represented by the beast; the arm of a man, for his power, or
+  for any people wherein his strength and power consists; his feet, for the
+  lowest of the people, or for the latter end of the kingdom; the feet,
+  nails, and teeth of beasts of prey, for armies and squadrons of armies;
+  the bones, for strength, and for fortified places; the flesh, for riches
+  and possessions; and the days of their acting, for years; and when a tree
+  is put for a kingdom, its branches, leaves and fruit, signify as do the
+  wings, feathers, and food of a bird or beast.</p>
+
+  <p>When a man is taken in a mystical sense, his qualities are often
+  signified by his actions, and by the circumstances of things about him.
+  So a Ruler is signified by his riding on a beast; a Warrior and
+  Conqueror, by his having a sword and bow; a potent man, by his gigantic
+  stature; a Judge, by weights and measures; a sentence of absolution, or
+  condemnation, by a white or a black stone; a new dignity, by a new name;
+  moral or civil qualifications, by garments; honour and glory, by splendid
+  apparel; royal dignity, by purple or scarlet, or by a crown;
+  righteousness, by white and clean robes; wickedness, by spotted and
+  filthy garments; affliction, mourning, and humiliation, by clothing in
+  sackcloth; dishonour, shame, and want of good works, by nakedness; error
+  and misery, by drinking a cup of his or her wine that causeth it;
+  propagating any religion for gain, by exercising traffick and merchandize
+  with that people whose religion it is; worshipping or serving the false
+  Gods of any nation, by committing adultery with their princes, or by
+  worshipping them; a Council of a kingdom, by its image; idolatry, by
+  blasphemy; overthrow in war, by a wound of man or beast; a durable plague
+  of war, by a sore and pain; the affliction or persecution which a people
+  suffers in labouring to bring forth a new kingdom, by the pain of a woman
+  in labour to bring forth a man-child; the dissolution of a body politic
+  or ecclesiastic, by the death of a man or beast; and the revival of a
+  dissolved dominion, by the resurrection of the dead.</p>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanIII">CHAP. III</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the vision of the Image composed of four Metals.</i></p>
+
+  <p>The Prophecies of <i>Daniel</i> are all of them related to one
+  another, as if they were but several parts of one general Prophecy, given
+  at several times. The first is the easiest to be understood, and every
+  following Prophecy adds something new to the former. The first was given
+  in a dream to <i>Nebuchadnezzar</i>, King of <i>Babylon</i>, in the
+  second year of his reign; but the King forgetting his dream, it was given
+  again to <i>Daniel</i> in a dream, and by him revealed to the King. And
+  thereby, <i>Daniel</i> presently became famous for wisdom, and revealing
+  of secrets: insomuch that <i>Ezekiel</i> his contemporary, in the
+  nineteenth year of <i>Nebuchadnezzar</i>, spake thus of him to the King
+  of <i>Tyre</i>: <i>Behold</i>, saith he, <i>thou art wiser than
+  </i>Daniel<i>, there is no secret that they can hide from thee</i>, Ezek.
+  xxviii. 3. And the same <i>Ezekiel</i>, in another place, joins
+  <i>Daniel</i> with <i>Noah</i> and <i>Job</i>, as most high in the favour
+  of God, <i>Ezek.</i> xiv. 14, 16, 18, 20. And in the last year of
+  <i>Belshazzar</i>, the Queen-mother said of him to the King: <i>Behold
+  there is a man in thy kingdom, in whom is the spirit of the holy gods;
+  and in the days of thy father, light and understanding and wisdom, like
+  the wisdom of the gods, was found in him; whom the king
+  </i>Nebuchadnezzar<i> thy father, the king, I say, thy father made master
+  of the magicians, astrologers, </i>Chaldeans<i> and soothsayers:
+  forasmuch as an excellent spirit, and knowledge, and understanding,
+  interpreting of dreams, and shewing of hard sentences, and dissolving of
+  doubts, were found in the same </i>Daniel<i>, whom the king named
+  </i>Belteshazzar, Dan. v. 11, 12. <i>Daniel</i> was in the greatest
+  credit amongst the <i>Jews</i>, till the reign of the <i>Roman</i>
+  Emperor <i>Hadrian</i>: and to reject his Prophecies, is to reject the
+  Christian religion. For this religion is founded upon his Prophecy
+  concerning the <i>Messiah</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>Now in this vision of the Image composed of four Metals, the
+  foundation of all <i>Daniel</i>'s Prophecies is laid. It represents a
+  body of four great nations, which should reign over the earth
+  successively, <i>viz.</i> the people of <i>Babylonia</i>, the
+  <i>Persians</i>, the <i>Greeks</i>, and the <i>Romans</i>. And by a stone
+  cut out without hands, which fell upon the feet of the Image, and brake
+  all the four Metals to pieces, and <i>became a great mountain, and filled
+  the whole earth</i>; it further represents that a new kingdom should
+  arise, after the four, and conquer all those nations, and grow very
+  great, and last to the end of all ages.</p>
+
+  <p>The head of the Image was of gold, and signifies the nations of
+  <i>Babylonia</i>, who reigned first, as <i>Daniel</i> himself interprets.
+  <i>Thou art this head of gold</i>, saith he to <i>Nebuchadnezzar</i>.
+  These nations reigned till <i>Cyrus</i> conquered <i>Babylon</i>, and
+  within a few months after that conquest revolted to the <i>Persians</i>,
+  and set them up above the <i>Medes</i>. The breast and arms of the Image
+  were of silver, and represent the <i>Persians</i> who reigned next. The
+  belly and thighs of the Image were of brass, and represent the
+  <i>Greeks</i>, who, under the dominion of <i>Alexander</i> the great,
+  conquered the <i>Persians</i>, and reigned next after them. The legs were
+  of iron, and represent the <i>Romans</i> who reigned next after the
+  <i>Greeks</i>, and began to conquer them in the eighth year of
+  <i>Antiochus Epiphanes</i>. For in that year they conquered
+  <i>Perseus</i> King of <i>Macedon</i>, the fundamental kingdom of the
+  <i>Greeks</i>; and from thence forward grew into a mighty empire, and
+  reigned with great power till the days of <i>Theodosius</i> the great.
+  Then by the incursion of many northern nations, they brake into many
+  smaller kingdoms, which are represented by the feet and toes of the
+  Image, composed part of iron, and part of clay. For then, saith
+  <i>Daniel</i>, <a name="NtpDanIII_1"
+  href="#NtDanIII_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> <i>the kingdom shall be divided,
+  and there shall be in it of the strength of iron, but they shall not
+  cleave one to another.</i></p>
+
+  <p><i>And in the days of these Kings</i>, saith <i>Daniel</i>, <i>shall
+  the God of heaven set up a kingdom which shall never be destroyed: and
+  the kingdom shall not be left to other people; but it shall break in
+  pieces, and consume all these kingdoms, and it shall stand for ever.
+  Forasmuch as thou sawest that the stone was cut out of the mountains
+  without hands, and that it brake in pieces the iron, the brass, the clay,
+  the silver and the gold.</i></p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. III.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanIII_1" href="#NtpDanIII_1">[1]</a> Chap. ii. 41,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanIV">CHAP. IV</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the vision of the four Beasts.</i></p>
+
+  <p>In the next vision, which is of the four Beasts, the Prophecy of the
+  four Empires is repeated, with several new additions; such as are the two
+  wings of the Lion, the three ribs in the mouth of the Bear, the four
+  wings and four heads of the Leopard, the eleven horns of the fourth
+  Beast, and the son of man coming in the clouds of Heaven, to the Antient
+  of Days sitting in judgment.</p>
+
+  <p>The first Beast was like a lion, and had eagle's wings, to denote the
+  kingdoms of <i>Babylonia</i> and <i>Media</i>, which overthrew the
+  <i>Assyrian</i> Empire, and divided it between them, and thereby became
+  considerable, and grew into great Empires. In the former Prophecy, the
+  Empire of <i>Babylonia</i> was represented by the head of gold; in this
+  both Empires are represented together by the two wings of the lion.
+  <i>And I beheld,</i> saith <a name="NtpDanIV_1"
+  href="#NtDanIV_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> <i>Daniel</i>, <i>till the wings
+  thereof were pluckt, and it was lifted up from the earth, and made to
+  stand upon the feet as a man, and a man's heart was given to it</i>; that
+  is, till it was humbled and subdued, and made to know its human
+  state.</p>
+
+  <p>The second Beast was like a bear, and represents the Empire which
+  reigned next after the <i>Babylonians</i>, that is, the Empire of the
+  <i>Persians</i>. <i>Thy kingdom is divided</i>, or broken, saith
+  <i>Daniel</i> to the last King of <i>Babylon</i>, <i>and given to the
+  </i>Medes<i> and </i>Persians, <i>Dan.</i> v. 28. This Beast <i>raised
+  itself up on one side</i>; the <i>Persians</i> being under the
+  <i>Medes</i> at the fall of <i>Babylon</i>, but presently rising up above
+  them. <a name="NtpDanIV_2" href="#NtDanIV_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> <i>And it
+  had three ribs in the mouth of it, between the teeth of it</i>, to
+  signify the kingdoms of <i>Sardes</i>, <i>Babylon</i>, and <i>Egypt</i>,
+  which were conquered by it, but did not belong to its proper body. And it
+  devoured much flesh, the riches of those three kingdoms.</p>
+
+  <p>The third Beast was the kingdom which succeeded the <i>Persian</i>;
+  and this was the empire of the <i>Greeks</i>, <i>Dan.</i> viii. 6, 7, 20,
+  21. It was <i>like a Leopard</i>, to signify its fierceness; and had four
+  heads and four wings, to signify that it should become divided into four
+  kingdoms, <i>Dan.</i> viii 22. for it continued in a monarchical form
+  during the reign of <i>Alexander</i> the great, and his brother
+  <i>Arid�us</i>, and young sons <i>Alexander</i> and <i>Hercules</i>; and
+  then brake into four kingdoms, by the governors of provinces putting
+  crowns on their own heads, and by mutual consent reigning over their
+  provinces. <i>Cassander</i> reigned over <i>Macedon</i>, <i>Greece</i>,
+  and <i>Epirus</i>; <i>Lysimachus</i> over <i>Thrace</i> and
+  <i>Bithynia</i>; <i>Ptolemy</i> over <i>Egypt</i>, <i>Lybia</i>,
+  <i>Arabia</i>, <i>C&#339;losyria</i>, and <i>Palestine</i>; and
+  <i>Seleucus</i> over <i>Syria</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The fourth Beast was the empire which succeeded that of the
+  <i>Greeks</i>, and this was the <i>Roman</i>. This beast was exceeding
+  dreadful and terrible, and had great iron teeth, and devoured and brake
+  in pieces, and stamped the residue with its feet; and such was the
+  <i>Roman</i> empire. It was larger, stronger, and more formidable and
+  lasting than any of the former. It conquered the kingdom of
+  <i>Macedon</i>, with <i>Illyricum</i> and <i>Epirus</i>, in the eighth
+  year of <i>Antiochus Epiphanes</i>, <i>Anno Nabonass.</i>. 580; and
+  inherited that of <i>Pergamus</i>, <i>Anno Nabonass.</i> 615; and
+  conquered that of <i>Syria</i>, <i>Anno Nabonass.</i> 679, and that of
+  <i>Egypt</i>, <i>Anno Nabonass.</i> 718. And by these and other conquests
+  it became greater and more terrible than any of the three former Beasts.
+  This Empire continued in its greatness till the reign of
+  <i>Theodosius</i> the great; and then brake into ten kingdoms,
+  represented by the ten horns of this Beast; and continued in a broken
+  form, till the Antient of days sat in a throne like fiery flame, and
+  <i>the judgment was set, and the books were opened, and the Beast was
+  slain and his body destroyed, and given to the burning flames; and one
+  like the son of man came with the clouds of heaven, and came to the
+  Antient of days</i> <a name="NtpDanIV_3"
+  href="#NtDanIV_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a>, and received dominion over all
+  nations, and judgment was given to the saints of the most high, and the
+  time came that they possessed the kingdom.</p>
+
+  <p><i>I beheld,</i> saith <a name="NtpDanIV_4"
+  href="#NtDanIV_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> <i>Daniel</i>, <i>till the Beast was
+  slain, and his body destroyed, and given to the burning flames. As
+  concerning the rest of the Beasts, they had their dominion taken away:
+  yet their lives were prolonged for a season and a time</i>. And therefore
+  all the four Beasts are still alive, tho the dominion of the three first
+  be taken away. The nations of <i>Chaldea</i> and <i>Assyria</i> are still
+  the first Beast. Those of <i>Media</i> and <i>Persia</i> are still the
+  second Beast. Those of <i>Macedon</i>, <i>Greece</i> and <i>Thrace</i>,
+  <i>Asia</i> minor, <i>Syria</i> and <i>Egypt</i>, are still the third.
+  And those of <i>Europe</i>, on this side <i>Greece</i>, are still the
+  fourth. Seeing therefore the body of the third Beast is confined to the
+  nations on this side the river <i>Euphrates</i>, and the body of the
+  fourth Beast is confined to the nations on this side <i>Greece</i>; we
+  are to look for all the four heads of the third Beast, among the nations
+  on this side of the river <i>Euphrates</i>; and for all the eleven horns
+  of the fourth Beast, among the nations on this side of <i>Greece</i>. And
+  therefore, at the breaking of the <i>Greek</i> empire into four kingdoms
+  of the <i>Greeks</i>, we include no part of the <i>Chaldeans</i>,
+  <i>Medes</i> and <i>Persians</i> in those kingdoms, because they belonged
+  to the bodies of the two first Beasts. Nor do we reckon the <i>Greek</i>
+  empire seated at <i>Constantinople</i>, among the horns of the fourth
+  Beast, because it belonged to the body of the third.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. IV.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanIV_1" href="#NtpDanIV_1">[1]</a> Chap. vii. 4.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIV_2" href="#NtpDanIV_2">[2]</a> Chap. vii. 5.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIV_3" href="#NtpDanIV_3">[3]</a> Chap. vii. 13.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIV_4" href="#NtpDanIV_4">[4]</a> Chap. vii. 11, 12.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanV">CHAP. V</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the Kingdoms represented by the
+feet of the Image composed of iron and clay.</i></p>
+
+  <p><i>Dacia</i> was a large country bounded on the south by the
+  <i>Danube</i>, on the east by the <i>Euxine</i> sea, on the north by the
+  river <i>Neister</i> and the mountain <i>Crapac</i>, and on the west by
+  the river <i>Tibesis</i>, or <i>Teys</i>, which runs southward into the
+  <i>Danube</i> a little above <i>Belgrade</i>. It comprehended the
+  countries now called <i>Transylvania</i>, <i>Moldavia</i>, and
+  <i>Wallachia</i>, and the eastern part of the upper <i>Hungary</i>. Its
+  antient inhabitants were called <i>Get�</i> by the <i>Greeks</i>,
+  <i>Daci</i> by the <i>Latins</i>, and <i>Goths</i> by themselves.
+  <i>Alexander</i> the great attacked them, and <i>Trajan</i> conquered
+  them, and reduced their country into a Province of the <i>Roman</i>
+  Empire: and thereby the propagation of the Gospel among them was much
+  promoted. They were composed of several <i>Gothic</i> nations, called
+  <i>Ostrogoths</i>, <i>Visigoths</i>, <i>Vandals</i>, <i>Gepides</i>,
+  <i>Lombards</i>, <i>Burgundians</i>, <i>Alans</i>, &amp;c. who all agreed
+  in their manners, and spake the same language, as <i>Procopius</i>
+  represents. While they lived under the <i>Romans</i>, the <i>Goths</i> or
+  <i>Ostrogoths</i> were seated in the eastern parts of <i>Dacia</i>, the
+  <i>Vandals</i> in the western part upon the river <i>Teys</i>, where the
+  rivers <i>Maresh</i> and <i>Keresh</i> run into it. The <i>Visigoths</i>
+  were between them. The <i>Gepides</i>, according to <i>Jornandes</i>,
+  were upon the <i>Vistula</i>. The <i>Burgundians</i>, a <i>Vandalic</i>
+  nation, were between the <i>Vistula</i> and the southern fountain of the
+  <i>Boristhenes</i>, at some distance from the mountain <i>Crapac</i>
+  northwards, where <i>Ptolemy</i> places them, by the names of
+  <i>Phrugundiones</i> and <i>Burgiones</i>.<a name="NtpDanV_1"
+  href="#NtDanV_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> The <i>Alans</i>, another
+  <i>Gothic</i> nation, were between the northern fountain of the
+  <i>Boristhenes</i> and the mouth of the river <i>Tanais</i>, where
+  <i>Ptolemy</i> placeth the mountain <i>Alanus</i>, and western side of
+  the <i>Palus M�otis</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>These nations continued under the dominion of the <i>Romans</i> till
+  the second year of the Emperor <i>Philip</i>, and then for want of their
+  military pay began to revolt; the <i>Ostrogoths</i> setting up a kingdom,
+  which, under their Kings <i>Ostrogotha</i>, <i>Cniva</i>, <i>Araric</i>,
+  <i>Geperic</i>, and <i>Hermanaric</i>, increased till the year of Christ
+  376; and then by an incursion of the <i>Huns</i> from beyond the
+  <i>Tanais</i>, and the death of <i>Hermanaric</i>, brake into several
+  smaller kingdoms. <i>Hunnimund</i>, the son of <i>Hermanaric</i>, became
+  King over the <i>Ostrogoths</i>; <i>Fridigern</i> over the
+  <i>Visigoths</i>; <i>Winithar</i>, or <i>Vinithar</i>, over a part of the
+  <i>Goths</i> called <i>Gruthungi</i> by <i>Ammian</i>, <i>Gothunni</i> by
+  <i>Claudian</i>, and <i>Sarmat�</i> and <i>Scythians</i> by others:
+  <i>Athanaric</i> reign'd over another part of the <i>Goths</i> in
+  <i>Dacia</i>, called <i>Thervingi</i>; <i>Box</i> over the <i>Antes</i>
+  in <i>Sarmatia</i>; and the <i>Gepides</i> had also their King. The
+  <i>Vandals</i> fled over the <i>Danube</i> from <i>Geberic</i> in the
+  latter end of the reign of <i>Constantine</i> the great, and had seats
+  granted them in <i>Pannonia</i> by that Emperor, where they lived quietly
+  forty years, <i>viz.</i> till the year 377, when several <i>Gothic</i>
+  nations flying from the <i>Hunns</i> came over the <i>Danube</i>, and had
+  seats granted them in <i>M�sia</i> and <i>Thrace</i> by the <i>Greek</i>
+  Emperor <i>Valens</i>. But the next year they revolted, called in some
+  <i>Goths</i>, <i>Alans</i> and <i>Hunns</i>, from beyond the
+  <i>Danube</i>, and routed the <i>Roman</i> army, slew the Emperor
+  <i>Valens</i>, and spread themselves into <i>Greece</i> and
+  <i>Pannonia</i> as far as the <i>Alps</i>. In the years 379 and 380 they
+  were checkt by the arms of the Emperors <i>Gratian</i> and
+  <i>Theodosius</i>, and made a submissive peace; the <i>Visigoths</i> and
+  <i>Thervingi</i> returned to their seats in <i>M�sia</i> and
+  <i>Thrace</i>, the <i>Hunns</i> retired over the <i>Danube</i>, and the
+  <i>Alans</i> and <i>Gruthingi</i> obtained seats in <i>Pannonia</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>About the year 373, or 374, the <i>Burgundians</i> rose from their
+  seats upon the <i>Vistula</i>, with an army of eighty thousand men to
+  invade <i>Gallia</i>; and being opposed, seated themselves upon the
+  northern side of the <i>Rhine</i> over against <i>Mentz</i>. In the year
+  358, a body of the <i>Salian Franks</i>, with their King, coming from the
+  river <i>Sala</i>, were received into the Empire by the Emperor
+  <i>Julian</i>, and seated in <i>Gallia</i> between <i>Brabant</i> and the
+  <i>Rhine</i>: and their King <i>Mellobaudes</i> was made <i>Comes
+  domesticorum</i>, by the Emperor <i>Gratian</i>. <i>Richomer</i>, another
+  noble <i>Salian Frank</i>, was made <i>Comes domesticorum</i>, and
+  <i>Magister utriusque Militi�</i>, by <i>Theodosius</i>; and A.C. 384,
+  was Consul with <i>Clearchus</i>. He was a great favourite of
+  <i>Theodosius</i>, and accompanied him in his wars against
+  <i>Eugenius</i>, but died in the expedition, and left a son called
+  <i>Theudomir</i>, who afterwards became King of the <i>Salian Franks</i>
+  in <i>Brabant</i>. In the time of this war some <i>Franks</i> from beyond
+  the <i>Rhine</i> invaded <i>Gallia</i> under the conduct of
+  <i>Genobald</i>, <i>Marcomir</i> and <i>Suno</i>, but were repulsed by
+  <i>Stilico</i>; and <i>Marcomir</i> being slain, was succeeded in
+  <i>Germany</i> by his son <i>Pharamond</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>While these nations remained quiet within the Empire, subject to the
+  <i>Romans</i>, many others continued so beyond the <i>Danube</i> till the
+  death of the Emperor <i>Theodosius</i>, and then rose up in arms. For
+  <i>Paulus Diaconus</i> in his <i>Historia Miscell.</i> <i>lib.</i> xiv.
+  speaking of the times next after the death of this Emperor, tells us:
+  <i>Eodem tempore erant Gothi &amp; ali� gentes maxim� trans Danubium
+  habitantes: ex quibus rationabiliores quatuor sunt, Gothi scilicet,
+  Huisogothi, Gepides &amp; Vandali; &amp; nomen tantum &amp; nihil aliud
+  mutantes. Isti sub Arcadia &amp; Honorio Danubium transeuntes, locati
+  sunt in terra Romanorum: &amp; Gepides quidem, ex quibus postea divisi
+  sunt Longobardi &amp; Avares, villas, qu� sunt circa Singidonum &amp;
+  Sirmium, habitavere:</i> and <i>Procopius</i> in the beginning of his
+  <i>Historia Vandalica</i> writes to the same purpose. Hitherto the
+  <i>Western Empire</i> continued entire, but now brake into many
+  kingdoms.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Theodosius</i> died A.C. 395; and then the <i>Visigoths</i>, under
+  the conduct of <i>Alaric</i> the successor of <i>Fridigern</i>, rose from
+  their seats in <i>Thrace</i> and wasted <i>Macedon</i>, <i>Thessaly</i>,
+  <i>Achaia</i>, <i>Peloponnesus</i>, and <i>Epirus</i>, with fire and
+  sword for five years together; when turning westward, they invaded
+  <i>Dalmatia</i>, <i>Illyricum</i> and <i>Pannonia</i>; and from thence
+  went into <i>Italy</i> A.C. 402; and the next year were so beaten at
+  <i>Pollentia</i> and <i>Verona</i>, by <i>Stilico</i> the commander of
+  the forces of the <i>Western Empire</i>, that <i>Claudian</i> calls the
+  remainder of the forces of <i>Alaric</i>, <i>tanta ex gente reliquias
+  breves</i>, and <i>Prudentius</i>, <i>Gentem deletam</i>. Thereupon
+  <i>Alaric</i> made peace with the Emperor, being so far humbled, that
+  <i>Orosius</i> saith, he did, <i>pro pace optima &amp; quibuscunque
+  sedibus suppliciter &amp; simpliciter orare</i>. This peace was ratified
+  by mutual hostages; <i>�tius</i> was sent hostage to <i>Alaric</i>; and
+  <i>Alaric</i> continued a free Prince in the seats now granted to
+  him.</p>
+
+  <p>When <i>Alaric</i> took up arms, the nations beyond the <i>Danube</i>
+  began to be in motion; and the next winter, between A.C. 395 and 396, a
+  great body of <i>Hunns</i>, <i>Alans</i>, <i>Ostrogoths</i>,
+  <i>Gepides</i>, and other northern nations, came over the frozen
+  <i>Danube</i>, being invited by <i>Rufinus</i>: when their brethren, who
+  had obtained seats within the Empire, took up arms also. <i>Jerome</i>
+  calls this great multitude, <i>Hunns</i>, <i>Alans</i>, <i>Vandals</i>,
+  <i>Goths</i>, <i>Sarmatians</i>, <i>Quades</i>, and <i>Marcomans</i>; and
+  saith, that they invaded all places between <i>Constantinople</i> and the
+  <i>Julian Alps</i>, wasting <i>Scythia</i>, <i>Thrace</i>,
+  <i>Macedon</i>, <i>Dardania</i>, <i>Dacia</i>, <i>Thessaly</i>,
+  <i>Achaia</i>, <i>Epirus</i>, <i>Dalmatia</i>, and all <i>Pannonia</i>.
+  The <i>Suevians</i> also invaded <i>Rh�tia</i>: for when <i>Alaric</i>
+  ravaged <i>Pannonia</i>, the <i>Romans</i> were defending <i>Rh�tia</i>;
+  which gave <i>Alaric</i> an opportunity of invading <i>Italy</i>, as
+  <i>Claudian</i> thus mentions.</p>
+
+  <div class="poem">
+    <div class="stanza">
+      <p><i>Non nisi perfidi� nacti penetrabile tempus,</i></p>
+      <p><i>Irrupere Get�, nostras dum Rh�tia vires</i></p>
+      <p><i>Occupat, atque alio desudant Marte cohortes</i>.</p>
+    </div>
+  </div>
+  <p>And when <i>Alaric</i> went from those parts into <i>Italy</i>, some
+  other barbarous nations invaded <i>Noricum</i> and <i>Vindelicia</i>, as
+  the same Poet <i>Claudian</i> thus writes:</p>
+
+  <div class="poem">
+    <div class="stanza">
+      <p class="i4">&mdash;&mdash;<i>Jam f&#339;dera gentes</i></p>
+      <p><i>Exuerant, Latiique audit� clade feroces</i></p>
+      <p><i>Vendelicos saltus &amp; Norica rura tenebant.</i></p>
+    </div>
+  </div>
+  <p>This was in the years 402 and 403. And among these nations I reckon
+  the <i>Suevians</i>, <i>Quades</i>, and <i>Marcomans</i>; for they were
+  all in arms at this time. The <i>Quades</i> and <i>Marcomans</i> were
+  <i>Suevian</i> nations; and they and the <i>Suevians</i> came originally
+  from <i>Bohemia</i>, and the river <i>Suevus</i> or <i>Sprake</i> in
+  <i>Lusatia</i>; and were now united under one common King called
+  <i>Ermeric</i>, who soon after led them into <i>Gallia</i>. The
+  <i>Vandals</i> and <i>Alans</i> might also about this time extend
+  themselves into <i>Noricum</i>. <i>Uldin</i> also with a great body of
+  <i>Hunns</i> passed the <i>Danube</i> about the time of
+  <i>Chrysostom</i>'s banishment, that is, A.C. 404, and wasted
+  <i>Thrace</i> and <i>M�sia</i>. <i>Radagaisus</i>, King of the
+  <i>Gruthunni</i> and succesor of <i>Winithar</i>, inviting over more
+  barbarians from beyond the <i>Danube</i>, invaded <i>Italy</i> with an
+  army of above two hundred thousand <i>Goths</i>; and within a year or
+  two, A.C. 405 or 406., was overcome by <i>Stilico</i>, and perished with
+  his army. In this war <i>Stilico</i> was assisted with a great body of
+  <i>Hunns</i> and <i>Ostrogoths</i>, under the conduct of <i>Uldin</i> and
+  <i>Sarus</i>, who were hired by the Emperor <i>Honorius</i>. In all this
+  confusion it was necessary for the <i>Lombards</i> in <i>Pannonia</i> to
+  arm themselves in their own defence, and assert their liberty, the
+  <i>Romans</i> being no longer able to protect them.</p>
+
+  <p>And now <i>Stilico</i> purposing to make himself Emperor, procured a
+  military prefecture for <i>Alaric</i>, and sent him into the <i>East</i>
+  in the service of <i>Honorius</i> the <i>Western</i> Emperor, committing
+  some <i>Roman</i> troops to his conduct to strengthen his army of
+  <i>Goths</i>, and promising to follow soon after with his own army. His
+  pretence was to recover some regions of <i>Illyricum</i>, which the
+  <i>Eastern</i> Emperor was accused to detain injuriously from the
+  <i>Western</i>; but his secret design was to make himself Emperor, by the
+  assistance of the <i>Vandals</i> and their allies: for he himself was a
+  <i>Vandal</i>. For facilitating this design, he invited a great body of
+  the barbarous nations to invade the <i>Western Empire</i>, while he and
+  <i>Alaric</i> invaded the <i>Eastern</i>. And these nations under their
+  several Kings, the <i>Vandals</i> under <i>Godegisilus</i>, the
+  <i>Alans</i> in two bodies, the one under <i>Goar</i>, the other under
+  <i>Resplendial</i>, and the <i>Suevians</i>, <i>Quades</i>, and
+  <i>Marcomans</i>, under <i>Ermeric</i>, marched thro' <i>Rh�tia</i> to
+  the side of the <i>Rhine</i>, leaving their seats in <i>Pannonia</i> to
+  the <i>Hunns</i> and <i>Ostrogoths</i>, and joined the <i>Burgundians</i>
+  under <i>Gundicar</i>, and ruffled the <i>Franks</i> in their further
+  march. On the last of <i>December</i> A.C. 406, they passed the
+  <i>Rhine</i> at <i>Ments</i>, and spread themselves into <i>Germania
+  prima</i> and the adjacent regions; and amongst other actions the
+  <i>Vandals</i> took <i>Triers</i>. Then they advanced into
+  <i>Belgium</i>, and began to waste that country. Whereupon the <i>Salian
+  Franks</i> in <i>Brabant</i> took up arms, and under the conduct of
+  <i>Theudomir</i>, the son of <i>Ricimer</i>, or <i>Richomer</i>,
+  abovementioned, made so stout a resistance, that they slew almost twenty
+  thousand of the <i>Vandals</i>, with their King <i>Godegesilus</i>, in
+  battel; the rest escaping only by a party of <i>Resplendial</i>'s
+  <i>Alans</i> which came timely to their assistance.</p>
+
+  <p>Then the <i>British</i> soldiers, alarm'd by the rumour of these
+  things, revolted, and set up Tyrants there; first <i>Marcus</i>, whom
+  they slew presently; then <i>Gratian</i>, whom they slew within four
+  months; and lastly <i>Constantine</i>, under whom they invaded
+  <i>Gallia</i> A.C. 408, being favoured by <i>Goar</i> and
+  <i>Gundicar</i>. And <i>Constantine</i> having possessed a good part of
+  <i>Gallia</i>, created his son <i>Constans C�sar</i>, and sent him into
+  <i>Spain</i> to order his affairs there, A.C. 409.</p>
+
+  <p>In the mean time <i>Resplendial</i>, seeing the aforesaid disaster of
+  the <i>Vandals</i>, and that <i>Goar</i> was gone over to the
+  <i>Romans</i>, led his army from the <i>Rhine</i>; and, together with the
+  <i>Suevians</i> and residue of the <i>Vandals</i>, went towards
+  <i>Spain</i>; the <i>Franks</i> in the mean time prosecuting their
+  victory so far as to retake <i>Triers</i>, which after they had plundered
+  they left to the <i>Romans</i>. The <i>Barbarians</i> were at first stopt
+  by the <i>Pyrenean</i> mountains, which made them spread themselves into
+  <i>Aquitain</i>: but the next year they had the passage betrayed by some
+  soldiers of <i>Constans</i>; and entring <i>Spain</i> 4 Kal.
+  <i>Octob.</i> A.C. 409, they conquered every one what he could; and at
+  length, A.C. 411, divided their conquests by lot; the <i>Vandals</i>
+  obtained <i>B&#339;tica</i>, and part of <i>Gall�cia</i>; the
+  <i>Suevians</i> the rest of <i>Gall�cia</i>; and the <i>Alans</i>
+  <i>Lusitania</i> and the <i>Carthaginian</i> Province: the Emperor for
+  the sake of peace confirming them in those seats by grant A.C. 413.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Roman Franks</i> abovementioned, having made <i>Theudomir</i>
+  their King, began strait after their conquest of the <i>Vandals</i> to
+  invade their neighbours also. The first they set upon were the
+  <i>Gauls</i> of <i>Brabant</i><a name="NtpDanV_2"
+  href="#NtDanV_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a>: but meeting with notable resistance,
+  they desired their alliance: and so those <i>Gauls</i> fell off from the
+  <i>Romans</i>, and made an intimate league with the <i>Franks</i> to be
+  as one people, marrying with one another, and conforming to one another's
+  manners, till they became one without distinction. Thus by the access of
+  these <i>Gauls</i>, and of the foreign <i>Franks</i> also, who afterwards
+  came over the <i>Rhine</i>, the <i>Salian</i> kingdom soon grew very
+  great and powerful.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Stilico</i>'s expedition against the <i>Greek</i> Emperor was stopt
+  by the order of <i>Honorius</i>; and then <i>Alaric</i> came out of
+  <i>Epirus</i> into <i>Noricum</i>, and requested a sum of money for his
+  service. The Senate were inclined to deny him, but by <i>Stilico</i>'s
+  mediation granted it. But after some time <i>Stilico</i> being accused of
+  a traiterous conspiracy with <i>Alaric</i>, and slain 10 Kal.
+  <i>Sept.</i> A.C. 408; <i>Alaric</i> was thereby disappointed of his
+  money, and reputed an enemy to the Empire; he then broke strait into
+  <i>Italy</i> with the army he brought out of <i>Epirus</i>, and sent to
+  his brother <i>Adolphus</i> to follow him with what forces he had in
+  <i>Pannonia</i>, which were not great, but yet not to be despised.
+  Thereupon <i>Honorius</i> fearing to be shut up in <i>Rome</i>, retired
+  to <i>Ravenna</i> in <i>October</i> A.C. 408. And from that time
+  <i>Ravenna</i> continued to be the seat of the <i>Western</i> Emperors.
+  In those days the <i>Hunns</i> also invaded <i>Pannonia</i>; and seizing
+  the deserted seats of the <i>Vandals</i>, <i>Alans</i>, and <i>Goths</i>,
+  founded a new kingdom there. <i>Alaric</i> advancing to <i>Rome</i>
+  besieged it, and 9 Kal. <i>Sept.</i> A.C. 410 took it: and afterwards
+  attempting to pass into <i>Africa</i>, was shipwrackt. After which
+  <i>Honorius</i> made peace with him, and got up an army to send against
+  the Tyrant <i>Constantine</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>At the same time <i>Gerontius</i>, one of <i>Constantine</i>'s
+  captains, revolted from him, and set up <i>Maximus</i> Emperor in
+  <i>Spain</i>. Whereupon <i>Constantine</i> sent <i>Edobec</i>, another of
+  his captains, to draw to his assistance, the <i>Barbarians</i> under
+  <i>Goar</i> and <i>Gundicar</i> in <i>Gallia</i>, and supplies of
+  <i>Franks</i> and <i>Alemans</i> from beyond the <i>Rhine</i>; and
+  committed the custody of <i>Vienne</i> in <i>Gallia Narbonensis</i> to
+  his son <i>Constans</i>. <i>Gerontius</i> advancing, first slew
+  <i>Constans</i> at <i>Vienne</i>, and then began to besiege
+  <i>Constantine</i> at <i>Arles</i>. But <i>Honorius</i> at the same time
+  sending <i>Constantius</i> with an army on the same errand,
+  <i>Gerontius</i> fled, and <i>Constantius</i> continued the siege,
+  strengthned by the access of the greatest part of the soldiers of
+  <i>Gerontius</i>. After four months siege, <i>Edobec</i> having procured
+  succours, the <i>Barbarian</i> Kings at <i>Ments</i>, <i>Goar</i> and
+  <i>Gundicar</i>, constitute <i>Jovinus</i> Emperor, and together with him
+  set forward to relieve <i>Arles</i>. At their approach <i>Constantius</i>
+  retired. They pursued, and he beat them by surprize; but not prosecuting
+  his victory, the <i>Barbarians</i> soon recovered themselves; yet not so
+  as to hinder the fall of the tyrants <i>Constantine</i>, <i>Jovinus</i>
+  and <i>Maximus</i>. <i>Britain</i> could not be recovered to the Empire,
+  but remained ever after a distinct kingdom.</p>
+
+  <p>The next year, A.C. 412, the <i>Visigoths</i> being beaten in
+  <i>Italy</i>, had <i>Aquitain</i> granted them to retire into: and they
+  invaded it with much violence, causing the <i>Alans</i> and
+  <i>Burgundians</i> to retreat, who were then depopulating of it. At the
+  same time the <i>Burgundians</i> were brought to peace; and the Emperor
+  granted them for inheritance a region upon the <i>Rhine</i> which they
+  had invaded: and the same, I presume, he did with the <i>Alans</i>. But
+  the <i>Franks</i> not long after retaking and burning <i>Triers</i>,
+  <i>Castinus</i>, A.C. 415, was sent against them with an army, who routed
+  them and slew <i>Theudomir</i> their King This was the second taking of
+  <i>Triers</i> by the <i>Franks</i>. It was therefore taken four times,
+  once by the <i>Vandals</i> and thrice by the <i>Franks</i>.
+  <i>Theudomir</i> was succeeded by <i>Pharamond</i>, the Prince or King of
+  the <i>Salian Franks</i> in <i>Germany</i>. From thence he brought new
+  forces, reigned over the whole, and had seats granted to his people
+  within the Empire near the <i>Rhine</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>And now the <i>Barbarians</i> were all quieted, and settled in several
+  kingdoms within the Empire, not only by conquest, but also by the grants
+  of the Emperor <i>Honorius</i>. For <i>Rutilius</i> in his
+  <i>Itinerary</i>, written in Autumn, <i>Anno Urbis</i> 1169, that is,
+  according to <i>Varro</i>'s computation then in use, A.C. 416, thus
+  laments the wasted fields:</p>
+
+  <div class="poem">
+    <div class="stanza">
+      <p><i>Illa quidem longis nimium deformia bellis</i>;</p>
+    </div>
+  </div>
+  <p>And then adds,</p>
+
+  <div class="poem">
+    <div class="stanza">
+      <p><i>Jam tempus laceris post longa incendia fundis</i></p>
+      <p class="i2"><i>Vel pastorales �dificare casas.</i></p>
+    </div>
+  </div>
+  <p>And a little after,</p>
+
+  <div class="poem">
+    <div class="stanza">
+      <p><i>�ternum tibi Rhenus aret.</i></p>
+    </div>
+  </div>
+  <p>And <i>Orosius</i> in the end of his history, which was finished A.C.
+  417, represents now a general pacification of the barbarous nations by
+  the words <i>comprimere</i>, <i>coangustare</i>, <i>addicere gentes
+  immanissimas</i>; terming them <i>imperio addictas</i>, because they had
+  obtained seats in the Empire by league and compact; and
+  <i>coangustatas</i>, because they did no longer invade all regions at
+  pleasure, but by the same compact remained quiet in the seats then
+  granted them. And these are the kingdoms, of which the feet of the Image
+  were henceforward composed, and which are represented by iron and clay
+  intermixed, which did not stick one to another, and were of different
+  strength.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. V.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanV_1" href="#NtpDanV_1">[1]</a> Procop. l. 1. de Bello
+  Vandalico.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanV_2" href="#NtpDanV_2">[2]</a> Galli Arborici: <i>whence
+  the region was named </i>Arboricbant<i>, and by contraction
+  </i>Brabant.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanVI">CHAP. VI</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the ten Kingdoms represented by the
+ten horns of the fourth Beast.</i></p>
+
+  <p>Now by the wars above described the <i>Western</i> Empire of the
+  <i>Romans</i>, about the time that <i>Rome</i> was besieged and taken by
+  the <i>Goths</i>, became broken into the following ten kingdoms.</p>
+
+  <div class="poem">
+    <div class="stanza">
+      <p><a href="#DanVI_1">1</a>. The kingdom of the <i>Vandals</i> and <i>Alans</i> in <i>Spain</i> and <i>Africa</i>.</p>
+      <p><a href="#DanVI_2">2</a>. The kingdom of the <i>Suevians</i> in <i>Spain</i>.</p>
+      <p><a href="#DanVI_3">3</a>. The kingdom of the <i>Visigoths</i>.</p>
+      <p><a href="#DanVI_4">4</a>. The kingdom of the <i>Alans</i> in <i>Gallia</i>.</p>
+      <p><a href="#DanVI_5">5</a>. The kingdom of the <i>Burgundians</i>.</p>
+      <p><a href="#DanVI_6">6</a>. The kingdom of the <i>Franks</i>.</p>
+      <p><a href="#DanVI_7">7</a>. The kingdom of the <i>Britains</i>.</p>
+      <p><a href="#DanVI_8">8</a>. The kingdom of the <i>Hunns</i>.</p>
+      <p><a href="#DanVI_9">9</a>. The kingdom of the <i>Lombards</i>.</p>
+      <p><a href="#DanVI_10">10</a>. The kingdom of <i>Ravenna</i>.</p>
+    </div>
+  </div>
+  <p>Seven of these kingdoms are thus mentioned by <i>Sigonius</i>.
+  <sup>1</sup><i>Honorio regnante</i>, <i>in Pannoniam</i>
+  <sup>2</sup><i>Hunni</i>, <i>in Hispaniam</i> <sup>3</sup><i>Vandali</i>,
+  <sup>4</sup><i>Alani</i>, <sup>5</sup><i>Suevi</i> &amp;
+  <sup>6</sup><i>Gothi</i>, <i>in Galliam</i> <sup>4</sup><i>Alani</i>
+  <sup>7</sup><i>Burgundiones</i> &amp; <sup>6</sup><i>Gothi</i>, <i>certis
+  sedibus permissis, accepti</i>. Add the <i>Franks</i>, <i>Britains</i>,
+  and <i>Lombards</i>, and you have the ten: for these arose about the same
+  time with the seven. But let us view them severally.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="DanVI_1">1</a>. The Kings of the <i>Vandals</i> were, A.C.
+  407 <i>Godegesilus</i>, 407 <i>Gunderic</i>, 426 <i>Geiseric</i>, 477
+  <i>Hunneric</i>, 484 <i>Gundemund</i>, 496 <i>Thrasamund</i>, 513
+  <i>Geiseric</i>, 530 <i>Gelimer</i>. <i>Godegesilus</i> led them into
+  <i>Gallia</i> A.C. 406, <i>Gunderic</i> into <i>Spain</i> A.C. 409,
+  <i>Geiseric</i> into <i>Africa</i> A.C. 427; and <i>Gelimer</i> was
+  conquered by <i>Belisarius</i> A.C. 533. Their kingdom lasted in
+  <i>Gallia</i>, <i>Spain</i> and <i>Africa</i> together 126 years; and in
+  <i>Africa</i> they were very potent. The <i>Alans</i> had only two Kings
+  of their own in <i>Spain</i>, <i>Resplendial</i>, and <i>Ataces</i>,
+  <i>Utacus</i> or <i>Othacar</i>. Under <i>Resplendial</i> they went into
+  <i>France</i> A.C. 407, and into <i>Spain</i> A.C. 409. <i>Ataces</i> was
+  slain with almost all his army by <i>Vallia</i> King of the
+  <i>Visigoths</i> A.C. 419. And then the remainder of these <i>Alans</i>
+  subjected themselves to <i>Gunderic</i> King of the <i>Vandals</i> in
+  <i>B&#339;tica</i>, and went afterwards with them into <i>Africa</i>, as
+  I learn out of <i>Procopius</i>. Whence the Kings of the <i>Vandals</i>
+  styled themselves Kings of the <i>Vandals</i> and <i>Alans</i>; as may be
+  seen in the Edict of <i>Hunneric</i> recited by <i>Victor</i> in his
+  <i>Vandalic</i> persecution. In conjunction with the <i>Chatti</i>, these
+  <i>Alans</i> gave the name of <i>Cathalaunia</i>, or <i>Catth-Alania</i>,
+  to the Province which is still so called. These <i>Alans</i> had also
+  <i>Gepides</i> among them; and therefore the <i>Gepides</i> came into
+  <i>Pannonia</i> before the <i>Alans</i> left it. There they became
+  subject to the <i>Hunns</i> till the death of <i>Attila</i> A.C. 454, and
+  at length were conquered by the <i>Ostrogoths</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="DanVI_2">2</a>. The Kings of the <i>Suevians</i> were, A.C.
+  407 <i>Ermeric</i>, 458 <i>Rechila</i>, 448 <i>Rechiarius</i>, 458
+  <i>Maldra</i>, 460 <i>Frumarius</i>, 463 <i>Regismund</i>. And after some
+  other Kings who are unknown, reigned A.C. 558 <i>Theudomir</i>, 568
+  <i>Miro</i>, 582 <i>Euboricus</i>, and 583 <i>Andeca</i>. This kingdom,
+  after it had been once seated in <i>Spain</i>, remained always in
+  <i>Gall�cia</i> and <i>Lusitania</i>. <i>Ermeric</i> after the fall of
+  the <i>Alan</i> kingdom, enlarged it into all <i>Gall�cia</i>, forcing
+  the <i>Vandals</i> to retire into <i>B&#339;tica</i> and the
+  <i>Carthaginian</i> Province. This kingdom lasted 177 years according to
+  <i>Isidorus</i>, and then was subdued by <i>Leovigildus</i> King of the
+  <i>Visigoths</i>, and made a Province of his kingdom A.C. 585.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="DanVI_3">3</a>. The Kings of the <i>Visigoths</i> were, A.C.
+  400 <i>Alaric</i>, 410 <i>Athaulphus</i>, 415 <i>Sergeric</i> and
+  <i>Vallia</i>, 419 <i>Theoderic</i>, 451 <i>Thorismund</i>, 452
+  <i>Theoderic</i>, 465 <i>Euric</i>, 482 <i>Alaric</i>, 505
+  <i>Gensalaric</i>, 526 <i>Amalaric</i>, 531 <i>Theudius</i>, 548
+  <i>Theudisclus</i>, &amp;c. I date this kingdom from the time that
+  <i>Alaric</i> left <i>Thrace</i> and <i>Greece</i> to invade the
+  <i>Western Empire</i>. In the end of the reign of <i>Athaulphus</i> the
+  <i>Goths</i> were humbled by the <i>Romans</i>, and attempted to pass out
+  of <i>France</i> into <i>Spain</i>. <i>Sergeric</i> reigned but a few
+  days. In the beginning of <i>Vallia</i>'s reign they assaulted the
+  <i>Romans</i> afresh, but were again repulsed, and then made peace on
+  this condition, that they should on the behalf of the Empire invade the
+  <i>Barbarian</i> kingdoms in <i>Spain</i>: and this they did, together
+  with the <i>Romans</i>, in the years 417 and 418, overthrowing the
+  <i>Alans</i> and part of the <i>Vandals</i>. Then they received
+  <i>Aquitain</i> of the Emperor by a full donation, leaving their
+  conquests in <i>Spain</i> to the Emperor: and thereby the seats of the
+  conquered <i>Alans</i> came into the hands of the <i>Romans</i>. In the
+  year 455, <i>Theoderic</i>, assisted by the <i>Burgundians</i>, invaded
+  <i>Spain</i>, which was then almost all subject to the <i>Suevians</i>,
+  and took a part of it from them. A.C. 506, the <i>Goths</i> were driven
+  out of <i>Gallia</i> by the <i>Franks</i>. A.C. 585, they conquered the
+  <i>Suevian</i> kingdom, and became Lords of all <i>Spain</i>. A.C. 713,
+  the <i>Saracens</i> invaded them, but in time they recovered their
+  dominions, and have reigned in <i>Spain</i> ever since.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="DanVI_4">4</a>. The Kings of the <i>Alans</i> in
+  <i>Gallia</i> were <i>Goar</i>, <i>Sambida</i>, <i>Eocharic</i>,
+  <i>Sangibanus</i>, <i>Beurgus</i>, &amp;c. Under <i>Goar</i> they invaded
+  <i>Gallia</i> A.C. 407, and had seats given them near the <i>Rhine</i>,
+  A.C. 412. Under <i>Sambida</i>, whom <i>Bucher</i> makes the successor,
+  if not the son of <i>Goar</i>, they had the territories of <i>Valence</i>
+  given them by <i>�tius</i> the Emperor's General, A.C. 440. Under
+  <i>Eocharic</i> they conquered a region of the rebelling <i>Galli
+  Arborici</i>, given them also by <i>�tius</i>. This region was from them
+  named <i>Alenconium, quasi Alanorum conventus</i>. Under
+  <i>Sangibanus</i> they were invaded, and their regal city <i>Orleans</i>
+  was besieged by <i>Attila</i> King of the <i>Hunns</i>, with a vast army
+  of 500000 men. <i>�tius</i> and the <i>Barbarian</i> Kings of
+  <i>Gallia</i> came to raise the siege, and beat the <i>Hunns</i> in a
+  very memorable battle, A.C. 451, <i>in campis Catalaunicis</i>, so called
+  from these <i>Alans</i> mixt with the <i>Chatti</i>. The region is now
+  called <i>Campania</i> or <i>Champagne</i>. In that battle were slain on
+  both sides 162000 men. A year or two after, <i>Attila</i> returned with
+  an immense army to conquer this kingdom, but was again beaten by them and
+  the <i>Visigoths</i> together in a battle of three days continuance, with
+  a slaughter almost as great as the former. Under <i>Beurgus</i>, or
+  <i>Biorgor</i>, they infested <i>Gallia</i> round about, till the reign
+  of <i>Maximus</i> the Emperor; and then they passed the <i>Alps</i> in
+  winter, and came into <i>Liguria</i>, but were there beaten, and
+  <i>Beurgus</i> slain, by <i>Ricimer</i> commander of the Emperor's
+  forces, A.C. 464. Afterwards they were again beaten, by the joint force
+  of <i>Odoacer</i> King of <i>Italy</i> and <i>Childeric</i> King of the
+  <i>Franks</i>, about the year 480, and again by <i>Theudobert</i> King of
+  the <i>Austrian Franks</i> about the year 511.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="DanVI_5">5</a>. The Kings of the <i>Burgundians</i> were,
+  A.C. 407 <i>Gundicar</i>, 436 <i>Gundioc</i>, 467 <i>Bilimer</i>, 473
+  <i>Gundobaldus</i> with his brothers, 510 <i>Sigismund</i>, 517
+  <i>Godomarus</i>. Under <i>Gundicar</i> they invaded <i>Gallia</i> A.C.
+  407, and had seats given them by the Emperor near the <i>Rhine</i> in
+  <i>Gallia Belgica</i>, A.C. 412. They had <i>Saxons</i> among them, and
+  were now so potent, that <i>Orosius</i> A.C. 417 wrote of them:
+  '<i>Burgundionum esse pr�validam manum, Galli� hodieque testes sunt, in
+  quibus pr�sumpta possessione consistunt</i>. About the year 435 they
+  received great overthrows by <i>�tius</i>, and soon after by the
+  <i>Hunns</i>: but five years after had <i>Savoy</i> granted them to be
+  shared with the inhabitants; and from that time became again a potent
+  kingdom, being bounded by the river <i>Rhodanus</i>, but afterwards
+  extending much further into the heart of <i>Gallia</i>. <i>Gundobald</i>
+  conquered the regions about the rivers <i>Araris</i> and <i>Rhodanus</i>,
+  with the territories of <i>Marseilles</i>; and invading <i>Italy</i> in
+  the time of the Emperor <i>Glycerius</i>, conquered all his brethren.
+  <i>Godomarus</i> made <i>Orleans</i> his royal seat: whence the kingdom
+  was called <i>Regnum Aurelianorum</i>. He was conquered by
+  <i>Clotharius</i> and <i>Childebert</i>, Kings of the <i>Franks</i>, A.C.
+  526. From thenceforward this kingdom was sometimes united to the kingdom
+  of the <i>Franks</i>, and sometimes divided from it, till the reign of
+  <i>Charles</i> the great, who made his son <i>Carolottus</i> King of
+  <i>Burgundy</i>. From that time, for about 300 years together, it enjoyed
+  its proper Kings; and was then broken into the Dukedom of
+  <i>Burgundy</i>, County of <i>Burgundy</i>, and County of <i>Savoy</i>;
+  and afterwards those were broken into other lesser Counties.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="DanVI_6">6</a>. The Kings of the <i>Franks</i> were, A.C. 407
+  <i>Theudomir</i>, 417 <i>Pharamond</i>, 428 <i>Clodio</i>, 448
+  <i>Merov�us</i>, 456 <i>Childeric</i>, 482 <i>Clodov�us</i>, &amp;c.
+  <i>Windeline</i> and <i>Bucher</i>, two of the most diligent searchers
+  into the originals of this kingdom, make it begin the same year with the
+  <i>Barbarian</i> invasions of <i>Gallia</i>, that is, A.C. 407. Of the
+  first Kings there is in <i>Labbe's Bibliotheca M.S.</i> this record.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Historica qu�dam excerpta ex veteri stemmate genealogico Regum
+  Franci�</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Genobaldus, Marcomerus, Suno, Theodemeris. Isti duces vel reguli
+  extiterunt � principio gentis Francorum diversis temporibus. Sed incertum
+  relinquunt historici quali sibi procreations line� successerunt</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Pharamundus: sub hoc rege suo primo Franci legibus se subdunt, quas
+  primores eorum tulerunt Wisogastus, Atrogastus, Salegastus</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Chlochilo. Iste, transito Rheno, Romanos in Carbonaria sylva
+  devicit, Camaracum cepit &amp; obtinuit, annis 20 regnavit. Sub hoc rege
+  Franci usque Summam progressi sunt</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Merovechus. Sub hoc rege Franci Trevirim destruunt, Metim
+  succendunt, usque Aurelianum perveniunt</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>Now for <i>Genobaldus</i>, <i>Marcomer</i> and <i>Suno</i>, they were
+  captains of the <i>Transrhenane Franks</i> in the reign of
+  <i>Theodosius</i>, and concern us not. We are to begin with
+  <i>Theudomir</i> the first King of the rebelling <i>Salii</i>, called
+  <i>Didio</i> by <i>Ivo Carnotensis</i>, and <i>Thiedo</i> and
+  <i>Theudemerus</i> by <i>Rhenanus</i>. His face is extant in a coin of
+  gold found with this inscription, THEUDEMIR REX, published by
+  <i>Petavius</i>, and still or lately extant, as <i>Windeline</i>
+  testifies: which shews that he was a King, and that in <i>Gallia</i>;
+  seeing that rude <i>Germany</i> understood not then the coining of money,
+  nor used either <i>Latin</i> words or letters. He was the son of
+  <i>Ricimer</i>, or <i>Richomer</i>, the favourite of the Emperor
+  <i>Theodosius</i>; and so being a <i>Roman Frank</i>, and of the
+  <i>Salian</i> royal blood, they therefore upon the rebellion made him
+  King. The whole time of his reign you have stated in <i>Excerptis
+  Gregorii Turonensis � Fredigario</i>, <i>cap.</i> 5, 6, 7, 8. where the
+  making him King, the tyranny of <i>Jovinus</i>, the slaughter of the
+  associates of <i>Jovinus</i>, the second taking of <i>Triers</i> by the
+  <i>Franks</i>, and their war with <i>Castinus</i>, in which this King was
+  slain, are as a series of successive things thus set down in order.
+  <i>Extinctis Ducibus in Francis, denuo Reges creantur ex eadem stirpe qua
+  prius fuerant. Eodem tempore Jovinus ornatus regios assumpsit.
+  Constantinus fugam versus Italiam dirigit; missis a Jovino Principe
+  percussoribus super Mentio flumine, capite truncatur. Multi nobilium
+  jussu Jovini apud Avernis capti, &amp; a ducibus Honorii crudeliter
+  interempti sunt. Trevirorum civitas, factione unius ex senatoribus nomine
+  Lucii, � Francis capt� &amp; incensa est.&mdash;Castinus Domesticorum
+  Comes expeditionem accipit contra Francos</i>, &amp;c. Then returning to
+  speak of <i>Theudomir</i>, he adds: <i>Franci electum � se regem, sicut
+  prius fuerat, crinitum inquirentes diligenter ex genere Priami, Frigi
+  &amp; Francionis, super se crearunt nomine Theudemerum filium Richemeris,
+  qui in hoc pr�lio quod supra memini, � Romanis interfectus est</i>; that
+  is, in the battle with <i>Castinus</i>'s army. Of his death <i>Gregory
+  Turonensis</i> makes this further mention: <i>In consularibus legimus
+  Theodemerem regem Francorum filium Ricimeris quondam, &amp; Ascilam
+  matrem ejus, gladio interfectos</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>Upon this victory of the <i>Romans</i>, the <i>Franks</i> and
+  rebelling <i>Gauls</i>, who in the time of <i>Theudomir</i> were at war
+  with one another, united to strengthen themselves, as <i>Ordericus
+  Vitalis</i><a name="NtpDanVI_1" href="#NtDanVI_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> thus
+  mentions. <i>Cum Galli prius contra Romanos rebell�ssent, Franci iis
+  sociati sunt, &amp; pariter juncti, Ferramundum Sunonis ducis filium,
+  sibi regem pr�fecerunt</i>. <i>Prosper</i> sets down the time; <i>Anno 25
+  Honorii, Pharamundus regnat in Francia</i>. This, <i>Bucher</i> well
+  observes, refers to the end of the year 416, or the beginning of the next
+  year, dating the years of <i>Honorius</i> from the death of
+  <i>Valentinian</i>; and argues well, that at this time <i>Pharamond</i>
+  was not only King by the constitution of the <i>Franks</i>, but crowned
+  also by the consent of <i>Honorius</i>, and had a part of <i>Gallia</i>
+  assigned him by covenant. And this might be the cause that <i>Roman</i>
+  writers reckoned him the first King: which some not understanding, have
+  reputed him the founder of this kingdom by an army of the <i>Transrhenane
+  Franks</i>. He might come with such an army, but he succeeded
+  <i>Theudomir</i> by right of blood and consent of the people. For the
+  above cited passage of <i>Fredigarius</i>, <i>Extinctis Ducibus, in
+  Francis denuo Reges creantur ex eadem stirpe qu� prius fuerant</i>,
+  implies that the kingdom continued to this new elected family during the
+  reign of more Kings than one. If you date the years of <i>Honorius</i>
+  from the death of his father, the reign of <i>Pharamond</i> might begin
+  two years later than is assigned by <i>Bucher</i>. The <i>Salique</i>
+  laws made in his reign, which are yet extant, shew by their name that it
+  was the kingdom of the <i>Salii</i> over which he reigned; and, by the
+  pecuniary mulcts in them, that the place where he reigned abounded much
+  with money, and consequently was within the Empire; rude <i>Germany</i>
+  knowing not the use of money, till they mixed with the <i>Romans</i>. In
+  the Preface also to the <i>Salique</i> laws, written and prefixed to them
+  soon after the conversion of the <i>Franks</i> to the Christian religion,
+  that is, in the end of the reign of <i>Merov�us</i>, or soon after, the
+  original of this kingdom is thus described: <i>H�c enim gens, qu� fortis
+  dum esset &amp; robore valida, Romanorum jugum durissimum de suis
+  cervicibus excussit pugnando</i>, &amp;c. This kingdom therefore was
+  erected, not by invasion but by rebellion, as was described above.
+  <i>Prosper</i> in registering their Kings in order, tells us:
+  <i>Pharamundus regnat in Francia; Clodio regnat in Francia; Merov�us
+  regnat in Francia</i>: and who can imagine but that in all these places
+  he meant one and the same <i>Francia</i>? And yet 'tis certain that the
+  <i>Francia</i> of <i>Merov�us</i> was in <i>Gallia</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>Yet the father of <i>Pharamond</i>, being king of a body of
+  <i>Franks</i> in <i>Germany</i> in the reign of the Emperor
+  <i>Theodosius</i>, as above, <i>Pharamond</i> might reign over the same
+  <i>Franks</i> in <i>Germany</i> before he succeeded <i>Theudomir</i> in
+  the kingdom of the <i>Salians</i> within the Empire, and even before
+  <i>Theudomir</i> began his reign; suppose in the first year of
+  <i>Honorius</i>, or when those <i>Franks</i> being repulsed by
+  <i>Stilico</i>, lost their Kings <i>Marcomir</i> and <i>Suno</i>, one of
+  which was the father of <i>Pharamond</i>: and the <i>Roman Franks</i>,
+  after the death of <i>Theudomir</i>, might invite <i>Pharamond</i> with
+  his people from beyond the <i>Rhine</i>. But we are not to regard the
+  reign of <i>Pharamond</i> in <i>Germany</i>: we are to date this kingdom
+  from its rise within the Empire, and to look upon it as strengthened by
+  the access of other <i>Franks</i> coming from beyond the <i>Rhine</i>,
+  whether in the reign of this King or in that of his successor
+  <i>Clodio</i>. For in the last year of <i>Pharamond</i>'s reign,
+  <i>�tius</i> took from him a part of his possession in <i>Gallia</i>: but
+  his successor <i>Clodio</i>, whom <i>Fredigarius</i> represents as the
+  son of <i>Theudomir</i>, and some call <i>Clogio</i>, <i>Cloio</i>, and
+  <i>Claudius</i>, inviting from beyond the <i>Rhine</i> a great body of
+  <i>Franks</i>, recovered all, and carried on their conquests as far as
+  the river <i>Soame</i>. Then those <i>Franks</i> dividing conquests with
+  him, erected certain new kingdoms at <i>Cologn</i> and <i>Cambray</i>,
+  and some other cities: all which were afterwards conquered by
+  <i>Clodov�us</i>, who also drove the <i>Goths</i> out of <i>Gallia</i>,
+  and fix'd his seat at <i>Paris</i>, where it has continued ever since.
+  And this was the original of the present kingdom of <i>France</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="DanVI_7">7</a>. The Kings of <i>Britain</i> were, A.C. 407 or
+  408, <i>Marcus</i>, <i>Gratian</i>, and <i>Constantine</i> successively;
+  A.C. 425 <i>Vortigern</i>, 466 <i>Aurelius Ambrosius</i>, 498 <i>Uther
+  Pendraco</i>, 508 <i>Arthur</i>, 542 <i>Constantinus</i>, 545 <i>Aurelius
+  Cunanus</i>, 578 <i>Vortiporeus</i>, 581 <i>Malgo</i>, 586
+  <i>Careticus</i>, 613 <i>Cadwan</i>, 635 <i>Cadwalin</i>, 676
+  <i>Cadwallader</i>. The three first were <i>Roman</i> Tyrants, who
+  revolted from the Empire. <i>Orosius</i>, <i>Prosper</i> and
+  <i>Zosimus</i> connect their revolt with the irruptions of the
+  <i>Barbarians</i> into <i>Gallia</i>, as consequent thereunto.
+  <i>Prosper</i>, with whom <i>Zosimus</i> agrees, puts it in the year
+  which began the day after that irruption. The just time I thus collect:
+  <i>Marcus</i> reigned not many days, <i>Gratian</i> four months, and
+  <i>Constantine</i> three years. He was slain the year after the taking of
+  <i>Rome</i>, that is A.C. 411, 14 Kal. <i>Octob.</i> Whence the revolt
+  was in Spring A.C. 408. <i>Sozomen</i> joins <i>Constantine</i>'s
+  expedition into <i>Gallia</i> with <i>Arcadius</i>'s death, or the times
+  a little after; and <i>Arcadius</i> died A.C. 408 <i>May</i> the 1st. Now
+  tho the reign of these Tyrants was but short, yet they gave a beginning
+  to the kingdom of <i>Britain</i>, and so may be reckoned the three first
+  Kings, especially since the posterity of <i>Constantine</i>, <i>viz.</i>
+  his sons <i>Aurelius Ambrosius</i>, and <i>Uther Pendraco</i>, and his
+  grandson <i>Arthur</i>, reigned afterwards. For from the time of the
+  revolt of these Tyrants <i>Britain</i> continued a distict kingdom
+  absolved from subjection to the Empire, the Emperor not being able to
+  spare soldiers to be sent thither to receive and keep the Island, and
+  therefore neglecting it; as we learn by unquestionable records. For
+  <i>Prosper</i> tells us; <i>A.C.</i> 410, <i>Variane Cos. Hac tempestate
+  pr� valetudine Romanorum, vires fundit�s attenuat� Britanni�</i>. And
+  <i>Sigebert</i>, conjoining this with the siege of <i>Rome</i>, saith:
+  <i>Britannorum vires attenuat�, &amp; substrahunt se � Romanorum
+  dominatione</i>. And <i>Zosimus</i> <i>lib.</i> 6. <i>The
+  </i>Transrhenane Barbarians<i> invading all places, reduced the
+  inhabitants of the island of </i>Britain<i>, and also certain
+  </i>Celtic<i> nations to that pass, that they fell off from the
+  </i>Roman<i> Empire; and being no longer obedient to the </i>Roman<i>
+  laws</i>, <span lang="el" title="kat' heauton biateuein"
+  >&#x3BA;&#x3B1;&#x3C4;'
+  &#x201B;&#x3B5;&#x3B1;&#x3C5;&#x3C4;&#x3BF;&#x3BD;
+  &#x3B2;&#x3B9;&#x3B1;&#x3C4;&#x3B5;&#x3C5;&#x3B5;&#x3B9;&#x3BD;</span>,
+  <i>they lived in separate bodies after their own pleasure. The
+  </i>Britons<i> therefore taking up arms, and hazarding themselves for
+  their own safety, freed their cities from the imminent </i>Barbarians<i>.
+  In like manner all </i>Brabant<i> and some other Provinces of the
+  </i>Gauls<i> imitating the </i>Britons<i>, freed themselves also,
+  ejecting the </i>Roman<i> Presidents, and forming themselves into a sort
+  of commonwealth according to their own pleasure. This rebellion of
+  </i>Britain<i> and the </i>Celtic<i> nations happened when
+  </i>Constantine<i> usurped the kingdom</i>. So also <i>Procopius</i>,
+  <i>lib.</i> 1. <i>Vandal.</i> speaking of the same <i>Constantine</i>,
+  saith: Constantine <i>being overcome in battle, was slain with his
+  children:</i> <span lang="el" title="Bretannian men toi R�maioi anas�sasthai ouketi echon; all' ousa hypo tyrannous ap' autou emene."
+  >&#x392;&#x3C1;&#x3B5;&#x3C4;&#x3B1;&#x3BD;&#x3BD;&#x3B9;&#x3B1;&#x3BD;
+  &#x3BC;&#x3B5;&#x3BD; &#x3C4;&#x3BF;&#x3B9;
+  &#x3A1;&#x3C9;&#x3BC;&#x3B1;&#x3B9;&#x3BF;&#x3B9;
+  &#x3B1;&#x3BD;&#x3B1;&#x3C3;&#x3C9;&#x3C3;&#x3B1;&#x3C3;&#x3B8;&#x3B1;&#x3B9;
+  &#x3BF;&#x3C5;&#x3BA;&#x3B5;&#x3C4;&#x3B9;
+  &#x3B5;&#x3C7;&#x3BF;&#x3BD;&#x387; &#x3B1;&#x3BB;&#x3BB;'
+  &#x3BF;&#x3C5;&#x3C3;&#x3B1; &#x201B;&#x3C5;&#x3C0;&#x3BF;
+  &#x3C4;&#x3C5;&#x3C1;&#x3B1;&#x3BD;&#x3BD;&#x3BF;&#x3C5;&#x3C2;
+  &#x3B1;&#x3C0;' &#x3B1;&#x3C5;&#x3C4;&#x3BF;&#x3C5;
+  &#x3B5;&#x3BC;&#x3B5;&#x3BD;&#x3B5;.</span> <i>Yet the </i>Romans<i>
+  could not recover </i>Britain<i> any more, but from that time it remained
+  under Tyrants</i>. And <i>Beda</i>, <i>l.</i> 1. <i>c.</i> 11. <i>Fracta
+  est Roma � Gothis anno 1164 su� conditionis; ex quo tempore Romani in
+  Britannia regnare cessaverunt</i>. And <i>Ethelwaldus</i>: <i>A tempore
+  Rom� � Gothis expugnat�, cessavit imperium Romanorum � Britannia insula,
+  &amp; ab aliis; quas sub jugo servitutis tenebant, multis terris</i>. And
+  <i>Theodoret</i>, <i>serm.</i> 9. <i>de curand. Gr�c. affect</i>. about
+  the year 424, reckons the <i>Britons</i> among the nations which were not
+  then in subjection to the <i>Roman</i> Empire. Thus <i>Sigonius</i>:
+  <i>ad annum 411, Imperium Romanorum post excessum Constantini in
+  Britannia nullum fuit</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>Between the death of <i>Constantine</i> and the reign of
+  <i>Vortigern</i> was an interregnum of about 14 years, in which the
+  <i>Britons</i> had wars with the <i>Picts</i> and <i>Scots</i>, and twice
+  obtained the assistance of a <i>Roman</i> Legion, who drove out the
+  enemy, but told them positively at their departure that they would come
+  no more. Of <i>Vortigern</i>'s beginning to reign there is this record in
+  an old Chronicle in <i>Nennius</i>, quoted by <i>Camden</i> and others:
+  <i>Guortigernus tenuit imperium in Britannia, Theodosio &amp;
+  Valentiniano Coss.</i> [<i>viz.</i> A.C. 425.] <i>&amp; in quarto anno
+  regni sui Saxones ad Britanniam venerunt, Felice &amp; Tauro Coss.</i>
+  [<i>viz.</i> A.C. 428.] This coming of the <i>Saxons</i>, <i>Sigebert</i>
+  refers to the 4th year of <i>Valentinian</i>, which falls in with the
+  year 428 assigned by this Chronicle: and two years after, the
+  <i>Saxons</i> together with the <i>Picts</i> were beaten by the
+  <i>Britons</i>. Afterwards in the reign of <i>Martian</i> the Emperor,
+  that is, between the years 450 and 456, the <i>Saxons</i> under
+  <i>Hengist</i> were called in by the <i>Britons</i>, but six years after
+  revolted from them, made war upon them with various success, and by
+  degrees succeeded them. Yet the <i>Britons</i> continued a flourishing
+  kingdom till the reign of <i>Careticus</i>; and the war between the two
+  nations continued till the pontificate of <i>Sergius</i> A.C. 688.<a
+  name="NtpDanVI_2" href="#NtDanVI_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a></p>
+
+  <p><a name="DanVI_8">8</a>. The Kings of the <i>Hunns</i> were, A.C. 406
+  <i>Octar</i> and <i>Rugila</i>, 433 <i>Bleda</i> and <i>Attila</i>.
+  <i>Octar</i> and <i>Rugila</i> were the brothers of <i>Munzuc</i> King of
+  the <i>Hunns</i> in <i>Gothia</i> beyond the <i>Danube</i>; and
+  <i>Bleda</i> and <i>Attila</i> were his sons, and <i>Munzuc</i> was the
+  son of <i>Balamir</i>. The two first, as <i>Jornandes</i> tells us, were
+  Kings of the <i>Hunns</i>, but not of them all; and had the two last for
+  their successors. I date the reign of the <i>Hunns</i> in <i>Pannonia</i>
+  from the time that the <i>Vandals</i> and <i>Alans</i> relinquished
+  <i>Pannonia</i> to them, A.C. 407. <i>Sigonius</i> from the time that the
+  <i>Visigoths</i> relinquished <i>Pannonia</i> A. C. 408. <i>Constat</i>,
+  saith he, <i>quod Gothis ex Illyrico profectis, Hunni successerunt, atque
+  imprimis Pannoniam tenuerunt. Neque enim Honorius viribus ad resistendum
+  in tantis difficultatibus destitutus, prorsus eos prohibere potuit, sed
+  meliore consilio, animo ad pacem converso, f&#339;dus cum eis, datis
+  acceptisque obsidibus fecit; ex quibus qui dati sunt, �tius, qui etiam
+  Alarico tributus fuerat, pr�cipue memoratur</i>. How <i>�tius</i> was
+  hostage to the <i>Goths</i> and <i>Hunns</i> is related by
+  <i>Frigeridus</i>, who when he had mentioned that <i>Theodosius</i>
+  Emperor of the <i>East</i> had sent grievous commands to <i>John</i>, who
+  after the death of <i>Honorius</i> had usurped the crown of the
+  <i>Western Empire</i>, he subjoins: <i>Iis permotus Johannes, �tium id
+  tempus curam palatii gerentem cum ingenti auri pondere ad Chunnos
+  transmisit, notos sibi obsidiat�s sui tempore &amp; familiari amiciti�
+  devinctos</i>&mdash;And a little after: <i>�tius tribus annis Alarici
+  obses, dehinc Chunnorum, postea Carpilionis gener ex Comite domesticorum
+  &amp; Joannis curopalat�.</i> Now <i>Bucher</i> shews that <i>�tius</i>
+  was hostage to <i>Alaric</i> till the year 410, when <i>Alaric</i> died,
+  and to the <i>Hunns</i> between the years 411 and 415, and son-in-law to
+  <i>Carpilio</i> about the year 417 or 418, and <i>Curopalates</i> to
+  <i>John</i> about the end of the year 423. Whence 'tis probable that he
+  became hostage to the <i>Hunns</i> about the year 412 or 413, when
+  <i>Honorius</i> made leagues with almost all the barbarous nations, and
+  granted them seats: but I had rather say with <i>Sigonius</i>, that
+  <i>�tius</i> became hostage to <i>Alaric</i> A.C. 403. It is further
+  manifest out of <i>Prosper</i>, that the <i>Hunns</i> were in quiet
+  possession of <i>Pannonia</i> in the year 432. For in the first book of
+  <i>Eusebius</i>'s Chronicle <i>Prosper</i> writes: <i>Anno decimo post
+  obitum Honorii, cum ad Chunnorum gentem cui tunc Rugila pr�erat, post
+  pr�lium cum Bonifacio se �tius contulisset, impetrato auxilio ad
+  Romanorum solum regreditur.</i> And in the second book: <i>�tio &amp;
+  Valerio Coss. �tius deposit� potestate profugus ad Hunnos in Pannonia
+  pervenit, quorum amiciti� auxilioque usus, pacem principum interpellat�
+  potestatis obtinuit.</i> Hereby it appears that at this time
+  <i>Rugila</i>, or as <i>Maximus</i> calls him, <i>Rechilla</i>, reigned
+  over the <i>Hunns</i> in <i>Pannonia</i>; and that <i>Pannonia</i> was
+  not now so much as accounted within the soil of the Empire, being
+  formerly granted away to the <i>Hunns</i>; and that these were the very
+  same body of <i>Hunns</i> with which <i>�tius</i> had, in the time of his
+  being an hostage, contracted friendship: by virtue of which, as he
+  sollicited them before to the aid of <i>John</i> the Tyrant A.C. 424, so
+  now he procured their intercession for himself with the Emperor.
+  <i>Octar</i> died A.C. 430; for <i>Socrates</i> tells us, that about that
+  time the <i>Burgundians</i> having been newly vext by the <i>Hunns</i>,
+  upon intelligence of <i>Octar</i>'s death, seeing them without a leader,
+  set upon them suddenly with so much vigour, that 3000 <i>Burgundians</i>
+  slew 10000 <i>Hunns</i>. Of <i>Rugila</i>'s being now King in
+  <i>Pannonia</i> you have heard already. He died A.C. 433, and was
+  succeeded by <i>Bleda</i>, as <i>Prosper</i> and <i>Maximus</i> inform
+  us. This <i>Bleda</i> with his brother <i>Attila</i> were before this
+  time Kings of the <i>Hunns</i> beyond the <i>Danube</i>, their father
+  <i>Munzuc</i>'s kingdom being divided between them; and now they united
+  the kingdom <i>Pannonia</i> to their own. Whence <i>Paulus Diaconus</i>
+  saith, they did <i>regnum intra Pannoniam Daciamque gerere</i>. In the
+  year 441, they began to invade the Empire afresh, adding to the
+  <i>Pannonian</i> forces new and great armies from <i>Scythia</i>. But
+  this war was presently composed, and then <i>Attila</i>, seeing
+  <i>Bleda</i> inclined to peace, slew him, A.C. 444, inherited his
+  dominions, and invaded the Empire again. At length, after various great
+  wars with the <i>Romans</i>, <i>Attila</i> perished A.C. 454; and his
+  sons quarrelling about his dominions, gave occasion to the
+  <i>Gepides</i>, <i>Ostrogoths</i> and other nations who were their
+  subjects, to rebel and make war upon them. The same year the
+  <i>Ostrogoths</i> had seats granted them in <i>Pannonia</i> by the
+  Emperors <i>Marcian</i> and <i>Valentinian</i>; and with the
+  <i>Romans</i> ejected the <i>Hunns</i> out of <i>Pannonia</i>, soon after
+  the death of <i>Attila</i>, as all historians agree. This ejection was in
+  the reign of <i>Avitus</i>, as is mentioned in the <i>Chronicum
+  Boiorum</i>, and in <i>Sidonius, Carm. 7 in Avitum</i>, which speaks thus
+  of that Emperor.</p>
+
+  <div class="poem">
+    <div class="stanza">
+      <p>&mdash;&mdash;<i>Cujus solum amissas post s�cula multa</i></p>
+      <p><i>Pannonias revocavit iter, jam credere promptum est.</i></p>
+      <p><i>Quid faciet bellis.</i></p>
+    </div>
+  </div>
+  <p>The Poet means, that by the coming of <i>Avitus</i> the <i>Hunns</i>
+  yielded more easily to the <i>Goths</i>. This was written by
+  <i>Sidonius</i> in the beginning of the reign of <i>Avitus</i>: and his
+  reign began in the end of the year 455, and lasted not one full year.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Jornandes</i> tells us: <i>Duodecimo anno regni Vali�, quando &amp;
+  Hunni post pene quinquaginta annos invasa Pannonia, � Romanis &amp;
+  Gothis expulsi sunt.</i> And <i>Marcellinus</i>: <i>Hierio &amp;
+  Ardaburio Coss. Pannoni�, qu� per quinquaginta annos ab Hunnis
+  retinebantur, � Romanis recept� sunt</i>: whence it should seem that the
+  <i>Hunns</i> invaded and held <i>Pannonia</i> from the year 378 or 379 to
+  the year 427, and then were driven out of it. But this is a plain
+  mistake: for it is certain that the Emperor <i>Theodosius</i> left the
+  Empire entire; and we have shewed out of <i>Prosper</i>, that the
+  <i>Hunns</i> were in quiet possession of <i>Pannonia</i> in the year 432.
+  The <i>Visigoths</i> in those days had nothing to do with
+  <i>Pannonia</i>, and the <i>Ostrogoths</i> continued subject to the
+  <i>Hunns</i> till the death of <i>Attila</i>, A.C. 454; and <i>Valia</i>
+  King of the <i>Visigoths</i> did not reign twelve years. He began his
+  reign in the end of the year 415, reigned three years, and was slain A.C.
+  419, as <i>Idacius</i>, <i>Isidorus</i>, and the <i>Spanish</i>
+  manuscript Chronicles seen by <i>Grotius</i> testify. And
+  <i>Olympiodorus</i>, who carries his history only to the year 425, sets
+  down therein the death of <i>Valia</i> King of the <i>Visigoths</i>, and
+  conjoins it with that of <i>Constantius</i> which happened A.C. 420.
+  Wherefore the <i>Valia</i> of <i>Jornandes</i>, who reigned at the least
+  twelve years, is some other King. And I suspect that this name hath been
+  put by mistake for <i>Valamir</i> King of the <i>Ostrogoths</i>: for the
+  action recorded was of the <i>Romans</i> and <i>Ostrogoths</i> driving
+  the <i>Hunns</i> out of <i>Pannonia</i> after the death of <i>Attila</i>;
+  and it is not likely that the historian would refer the history of the
+  <i>Ostrogoths</i> to the years of the <i>Visigothic</i> Kings. This
+  action happened in the end of the year 455, which I take to be the
+  twelfth year of <i>Valamir</i> in <i>Pannonia</i>, and which was almost
+  fifty years after the year 406, in which the <i>Hunns</i> succeeded the
+  <i>Vandals</i> and <i>Alans</i> in <i>Pannonia</i>. Upon the ceasing of
+  the line of <i>Hunnimund</i> the son of <i>Hermaneric</i>, the
+  <i>Ostrogoths</i> lived without Kings of their own nation about forty
+  years together, being subject to the <i>Hunns</i>. And when <i>Alaric</i>
+  began to make war upon the <i>Romans</i>, which was in the year 444, he
+  made <i>Valamir</i>, with his brothers <i>Theodomir</i> and
+  <i>Videmir</i> the grandsons of <i>Vinethar</i>, captains or kings of
+  these <i>Ostrogoths</i> under him. In the twelfth year of
+  <i>Valamir</i>'s reign dated from thence, the <i>Hunns</i> were driven
+  out of <i>Pannonia</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>Yet the <i>Hunns</i> were not so ejected, but that they had further
+  contests with the <i>Romans</i>, till the head of <i>Denfix</i> the son
+  of <i>Attila</i>, was carried to <i>Constantinople</i>, A.C. 469, in the
+  Consulship of <i>Zeno</i> and <i>Marcian</i>, as <i>Marcellinus</i>
+  relates. Nor were they yet totally ejected the Empire: for besides their
+  reliques in <i>Pannonia</i>, <i>Sigonius</i> tells us, that when the
+  Emperors <i>Marcian</i> and <i>Valentinian</i> granted <i>Pannonia</i> to
+  the <i>Goths</i>, which was in the year 454, they granted part of
+  <i>Illyricum</i> to some of the <i>Hunns</i> and <i>Sarmatians</i>. And
+  in the year 526, when the <i>Lombards</i> removing into <i>Pannonia</i>
+  made war there with the <i>Gepides</i>, the <i>Avares</i>, a part of the
+  <i>Hunns</i>, who had taken the name of <i>Avares</i> from one of their
+  Kings, assisted the <i>Lombards</i> in that war; and the <i>Lombards</i>
+  afterwards, when they went into <i>Italy</i>, left their seats in
+  <i>Pannonia</i> to the <i>Avares</i> in recompence of their friendship.
+  From that time the <i>Hunns</i> grew again very powerful; their Kings,
+  whom they called <i>Chagan</i>, troubling the Empire much in the reigns
+  of the Emperors <i>Mauritius</i>, <i>Phocas</i>, and <i>Heraclius</i>:
+  and this is the original of the present kingdom of <i>Hungary</i>, which
+  from these <i>Avares</i> and other <i>Hunns</i> mixed together, took the
+  name of <i>Hun-Avaria</i>, and by contraction <i>Hungary</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="DanVI_9">9</a>. The <i>Lombards</i>, before they came over
+  the <i>Danube</i>, were commanded by two captains, <i>Ibor</i> and
+  <i>Ayon</i>: after whose death they had Kings, <i>Agilmund</i>,
+  <i>Lamisso</i>, <i>Lechu</i>, <i>Hildehoc</i>, <i>Gudehoc</i>,
+  <i>Classo</i>, <i>Tato</i>, <i>Wacho</i>, <i>Walter</i>, <i>Audoin</i>,
+  <i>Alboin</i>, <i>Cleophis</i>, &amp;c. <i>Agilmund</i> was the son of
+  <i>Ayon</i>, who became their King, according to <i>Prosper</i>, in the
+  Consulship of <i>Honorius</i> and <i>Theodosius</i> A.C. 389, reigned
+  thirty three years, according to <i>Paulus Warnefridus</i>, and was slain
+  in battle by the <i>Bulgarians</i>. <i>Prosper</i> places his death in
+  the Consulship of <i>Marinianus</i> and <i>Asclepiodorus</i>, A.C. 413.
+  <i>Lamisso</i> routed the <i>Bulgarians</i>, and reigned three years, and
+  <i>Lechu</i> almost forty. <i>Gudehoc</i> was contemporary to
+  <i>Odoacer</i> King of the <i>Heruli</i> in <i>Italy</i>, and led his
+  people from <i>Pannonia</i> into <i>Rugia</i>, a country on the north
+  side of <i>Noricum</i> next beyond the <i>Danube</i>; from whence
+  <i>Odoacer</i> then carried his people into <i>Italy</i>. <i>Tato</i>
+  overthrew the kingdom of the <i>Heruli</i> beyond the <i>Danube</i>.
+  <i>Wacho</i> conquered the <i>Suevians</i>, a kingdom then bounded on the
+  east by <i>Bavaria</i>, on the west by <i>France</i>, and on the south by
+  the <i>Burgundians</i>. <i>Audoin</i> returned into <i>Pannonia</i> A.C.
+  526, and there overcame the <i>Gepides</i>. <i>Alboin</i> A.C. 551
+  overthrew the kingdom of the <i>Gepides</i>, and slew their King
+  <i>Chunnimund</i>: A.C. 563 he assisted the <i>Greek</i> Emperor against
+  <i>Totila</i> King of the <i>Ostrogoths</i> in <i>Italy</i>; and A.C. 568
+  led his people out of <i>Pannonia</i> into <i>Lombardy</i>, where they
+  reigned till the year 774.</p>
+
+  <p>According to <i>Paulus Diaconus</i>, the <i>Lombards</i> with many
+  other <i>Gothic</i> nations came into the Empire from beyond the
+  <i>Danube</i> in the reign of <i>Arcadius</i> and <i>Honorius</i>, that
+  is, between the years 395 and 408. But they might come in a little
+  earlier: for we are told that the <i>Lombards</i>, under their captains
+  <i>Ibor</i> and <i>Ayon</i>, beat the <i>Vandals</i> in battle; and
+  <i>Prosper</i> placeth this victory in the Consulship of <i>Ausonius</i>
+  and <i>Olybrius</i>, that is, A.C. 379. Before this war the
+  <i>Vandals</i> had remained quiet forty years in the seats granted them
+  in <i>Pannonia</i> by <i>Constantine</i> the great. And therefore if
+  these were the same <i>Vandals</i>, this war must have been in
+  <i>Pannonia</i>; and might be occasioned by the coming of the
+  <i>Lombards</i> over the <i>Danube</i> into <i>Pannonia</i>, a year or
+  two before the battle; and so have put an end to that quiet which had
+  lasted forty years. After <i>Gratian</i> and <i>Theodosius</i> had
+  quieted the <i>Barbarians</i>, they might either retire over the
+  <i>Danube</i>, or continue quiet under the <i>Romans</i> till the death
+  of <i>Theodosius</i>; and then either invade the Empire anew, or throw
+  off all subjection to it. By their wars, first with the <i>Vandals</i>,
+  and then with the <i>Bulgarians</i>, a <i>Scythian</i> nation so called
+  from the river <i>Volga</i> whence they came; it appears that even in
+  those days they were a kingdom not contemptible.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="DanVI_10">10</a>. These nine kingdoms being rent away, we are
+  next to consider the residue of the <i>Western Empire</i>. While this
+  Empire continued entire, it was the Beast itself: but the residue thereof
+  is only a part of it. Now if this part be considered as a horn, the reign
+  of this horn may be dated from the translation of the imperial seat from
+  <i>Rome</i> to <i>Ravenna</i>, which was in <i>October</i> A.C. 408. For
+  then the Emperor <i>Honorius</i>, fearing that <i>Alaric</i> would
+  besiege him in <i>Rome</i>, if he staid there, retired to <i>Millain</i>,
+  and thence to <i>Ravenna</i>: and the ensuing siege and sacking of
+  <i>Rome</i> confirmed his residence there, so that he and his successors
+  ever after made it their home. Accordingly <i>Macchiavel</i> in his
+  <i>Florentine</i> history writes, that <i>Valentinian</i> having left
+  <i>Rome</i>, translated the seat of the Empire to <i>Ravenna</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Rh�tia</i> belonged to the <i>Western</i> Emperors, so long as that
+  Empire stood; and then it descended, with <i>Italy</i> and the
+  <i>Roman</i> Senate, to <i>Odoacer</i> King of the <i>Heruli</i> in
+  <i>Italy</i>, and after him to <i>Theoderic</i> King of the
+  <i>Ostrogoths</i> and his successors, by the grant of the <i>Greek</i>
+  Emperors. Upon the death of <i>Valentinian</i> the second, the
+  <i>Alemans</i> and <i>Suevians</i> invaded <i>Rh�tia</i> A.C. 455. But I
+  do not find they erected any settled kingdom there: for in the year 457,
+  while they were yet depopulating <i>Rh�tia</i>, they were attacked and
+  beaten by <i>Burto</i> Master of the horse to the Emperor
+  <i>Majoranus</i>; and I hear nothing more of their invading
+  <i>Rh�tia</i>. <i>Clodov�us</i> King of <i>France</i>, in or about the
+  year 496, conquered a kingdom of the <i>Alemans</i>, and slew their last
+  King <i>Ermeric</i>. But this kingdom was seated in <i>Germany</i>, and
+  only bordered upon <i>Rh�tia</i>: for its people fled from
+  <i>Clodov�us</i> into the neighbouring kingdom of the <i>Ostrogoths</i>
+  under <i>Theoderic</i>, who received them as friends, and wrote a
+  friendly letter to <i>Clodov�us</i> in their behalf: and by this means
+  they became inhabitants of <i>Rh�tia</i>, as subjects under the dominion
+  of the <i>Ostrogoths</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>When the <i>Greek</i> Emperor conquered the <i>Ostrogoths</i>, he
+  succeeded them in the kingdom of <i>Ravenna</i>, not only by right of
+  conquest but also by right of inheritance, the <i>Roman</i> Senate still
+  going along with this kingdom. Therefore we may reckon that this kingdom
+  continued in the Exarchate of <i>Ravenna</i> and Senate of <i>Rome</i>:
+  for the remainder of the <i>Western Empire</i> went along with the Senate
+  of <i>Rome</i>, by reason of the right which this Senate still retained,
+  and at length exerted, of chusing a new <i>Western</i> Emperor.</p>
+
+  <p>I have now enumerated the ten kingdoms, into which the <i>Western
+  Empire</i> became divided at its first breaking, that is, at the time of
+  <i>Rome</i>'s being besieged and taken by the <i>Goths</i>. Some of these
+  kingdoms at length fell, and new ones arose: but whatever was their
+  number afterwards, they are still called the <i>Ten Kings</i> from their
+  first number.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. VI.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanVI_1" href="#NtpDanVI_1">[1]</a> Apud Bucherum, l. 14.
+  c. 9. n. 8.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVI_2" href="#NtpDanVI_2">[2]</a> Rolevinc's Antiqua
+  Saxon. l. 1. c. 6.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanVII">CHAP. VII</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the eleventh horn of </i>Daniel<i>'s fourth Beast.</i></p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtpDanVII_1" href="#NtDanVII_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a><i>Now
+  Daniel, considered the horns, and behold there came up among them another
+  horn, before whom there were three of the first horns pluckt up by the
+  roots; and behold in this horn were eyes like the eyes of a man, and a
+  mouth speaking great things,</i>&mdash;and <a name="NtpDanVII_2"
+  href="#NtDanVII_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> his <i>look was more stout than his
+  fellows,&mdash;and the same horn made war with the saints, and prevailed
+  against them</i>: and one who stood by, and made <i>Daniel</i> know the
+  interpretation of these things, told him, that <a name="NtpDanVII_3"
+  href="#NtDanVII_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a> <i>the ten horns were ten kings
+  that should arise, and another should arise after them, and be diverse
+  from the first, and he should subdue three kings,</i> <a
+  name="NtpDanVII_4" href="#NtDanVII_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> <i>and speak
+  great words against the most High, and wear out the saints, and think to
+  change times and laws: and that they should be given into his hands until
+  a time and times and half a time</i>. Kings are put for kingdoms, as
+  above; and therefore the little horn is a little kingdom. It was a horn
+  of the fourth Beast, and rooted up three of his first horns; and
+  therefore we are to look for it among the nations of the <i>Latin</i>
+  Empire, after the rise of the ten horns. But it was a kingdom of a
+  different kind from the other ten kingdoms, having a life or soul
+  peculiar to itself, with eyes and a mouth. By its eyes it was a Seer; and
+  by its mouth speaking great things and changing times and laws, it was a
+  Prophet as well as a King. And such a Seer, a Prophet and a King, is the
+  Church of <i>Rome</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>A Seer, <span lang="el" title="Episkopos"
+  >&#x395;&#x3C0;&#x3B9;&#x3C3;&#x3BA;&#x3BF;&#x3C0;&#x3BF;&#x3C2;</span>,
+  is a Bishop in the literal sense of the word; and this Church claims the
+  universal Bishoprick.</p>
+
+  <p>With his mouth he gives laws to kings and nations as an Oracle; and
+  pretends to Infallibility, and that his dictates are binding to the whole
+  world; which is to be a Prophet in the highest degree.</p>
+
+  <p>In the eighth century, by rooting up and subduing the Exarchate of
+  <i>Ravenna</i>, the kingdom of the <i>Lombards</i>, and the Senate and
+  Dukedom of <i>Rome</i>, he acquired <i>Peter</i>'s Patrimony out of their
+  dominions; and thereby rose up as a temporal Prince or King, or horn of
+  the fourth Beast.</p>
+
+  <p>In a small book printed at <i>Paris</i> A.C. 1689, entitled, <i>An
+  historical dissertation upon some coins of </i>Charles<i> the great,
+  </i>Ludovicus Pius<i>, </i>Lotharius<i>, and their successors stamped at
+  </i>Rome, it is recorded, that in the days of Pope <i>Leo</i> X, there
+  was remaining in the <i>Vatican</i>, and till those days exposed to
+  public view, an inscription in honour of <i>Pipin</i> the father of
+  <i>Charles</i> the great, in these words: <i>Pipinum pium, primum fuisse
+  qui amplificand� Ecclesi� Roman� viam aperuerit, Exarchatu Ravennate,
+  &amp; plurimis aliis oblatis</i>; "That <i>Pipin</i> the pious was the
+  first who opened a way to the grandeur of the Church of <i>Rome</i>,
+  conferring upon her the Exarchate of <i>Ravenna</i> and many other
+  oblations." In and before the reign of the Emperors <i>Gratian</i> and
+  <i>Theodosius</i>, the Bishop of <i>Rome</i> lived splendidly; but this
+  was by the oblations of the <i>Roman</i> Ladies, as <i>Ammianus</i>
+  describes. After those reigns <i>Italy</i> was invaded by foreign
+  nations, and did not get rid of her troubles before the fall of the
+  kingdom of <i>Lombardy</i>. It was certainly by the victory of the see of
+  <i>Rome</i> over the <i>Greek</i> Emperor, the King of <i>Lombardy</i>,
+  and the Senate of <i>Rome</i>, that she acquired <i>Peter</i>'s
+  Patrimony, and rose up to her greatness. The donation of
+  <i>Constantine</i> the Great is a fiction, and so is the donation of the
+  <i>Alpes Cotti�</i> to the Pope by <i>Aripert</i> King of the
+  <i>Lombards</i>: for the <i>Alpes Cotti�</i> were a part of the
+  Exarchate, and in the days of <i>Aripert</i> belonged to the <i>Greek</i>
+  Emperor.</p>
+
+  <p>The invocation of the dead, and veneration of their images, being
+  gradually introduced in the 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th centuries, the
+  <i>Greek</i> Emperor <i>Philippicus</i> declared against the latter, A.C.
+  711 or 712. And <a name="NtpDanVII_5"
+  href="#NtDanVII_5"><sup>[5]</sup></a> the Emperor <i>Leo Isaurus</i>, to
+  put a stop to it, called a meeting of Counsellors and Bishops in his
+  Palace, A.C. 726; and by their advice put out an Edict against that
+  worship, and wrote to Pope <i>Gregory</i> II. that a general Council
+  might be called. But the Pope thereupon called a Council at <i>Rome</i>,
+  confirmed the worship of Images, excommunicated the <i>Greek</i> Emperor,
+  absolved the people from their allegiance, and forbad them to pay
+  tribute, or otherwise be obedient to him. Then the people of <i>Rome</i>,
+  <i>Campania</i>, <i>Ravenna</i> and <i>Pentapolis</i>, with the cities
+  under them, revolted and laid violent hands upon their magistrates,
+  killing the Exarch <i>Paul</i> at <i>Ravenna</i>, and laying aside
+  <i>Peter</i> Duke of <i>Rome</i> who was become blind: and when
+  <i>Exhileratus</i> Duke of <i>Campania</i> incited the people against the
+  Pope, the <i>Romans</i> invaded <i>Campania</i>, and slew him with his
+  son <i>Hadrian</i>. Then a new Exarch, <i>Eutychius</i>, coming to
+  <i>Naples</i>, sent some secretly to take away the lives of the Pope and
+  the Nobles of <i>Rome</i>: but the plot being discovered, the
+  <i>Romans</i> revolted absolutely from the <i>Greek</i> Emperor, and took
+  an oath to preserve the life of the Pope, to defend his state, and be
+  obedient to his authority in all things. Thus <i>Rome</i> with its Duchy,
+  including part of <i>Tuscany</i> and part of <i>Campania</i>, revolted in
+  the year 726, and became a free state under the government of the Senate
+  of this city. The authority of the Senate in civil affairs was
+  henceforward absolute, the authority of the Pope extending hitherto no
+  farther than to the affairs of the Church only.</p>
+
+  <p>At that time <a name="NtpDanVII_6"
+  href="#NtDanVII_6"><sup>[6]</sup></a> the <i>Lombards</i> also being
+  zealous for the worship of images, and pretending to favour the cause of
+  the Pope, invaded the cities of the Exarchate: and at length, <i>viz.</i>
+  A.C. 752, took <i>Ravenna</i>, and put an end to the Exarchate. And this
+  was the first of the three kingdoms which fell before the little
+  horn.</p>
+
+  <p>In the year 751 <a name="NtpDanVII_7"
+  href="#NtDanVII_7"><sup>[7]</sup></a> Pope <i>Zechary</i> deposed
+  <i>Childeric</i>, a slothful and useless King of <i>France</i>, and the
+  last of the race of <i>Merov�us</i>; and absolving his subjects from
+  their oath of allegiance, gave the kingdom to <i>Pipin</i> the major of
+  the Palace; and thereby made a new and potent friend. His successor <a
+  name="NtpDanVII_8" href="#NtDanVII_8"><sup>[8]</sup></a> Pope
+  <i>Stephen</i> III, knowing better how to deal with the <i>Greek</i>
+  Emperor than with the <i>Lombards</i>, went the next year to the King of
+  the <i>Lombards</i>, to persuade him to return the Exarchate to the
+  Emperor. But this not succeeding, he went into <i>France</i>, and
+  persuaded <i>Pipin</i> to take the Exarchate and <i>Pentapolis</i> from
+  the <i>Lombards</i>, and give it to St. <i>Peter</i>. Accordingly
+  <i>Pipin</i> A.C. 754 came with an army into <i>Italy</i>, and made
+  <i>Aistulphus</i> King of the <i>Lombards</i> promise the surrender: but
+  the next year <i>Aistulphus</i>, on the contrary, to revenge himself on
+  the Pope, besieged the city of <i>Rome</i>. Whereupon the Pope sent
+  letters to <i>Pipin</i>, wherein he told him that if he came not speedily
+  against the <i>Lombards</i>, <i>pro data sibi potentia, alienandum fore �
+  regno Dei &amp; vita �terna</i>, he should be excommunicated.
+  <i>Pipin</i> therefore, fearing a revolt of his subjects, and being
+  indebted to the Church of <i>Rome</i>, came speedily with an army into
+  <i>Italy</i>, raised the siege, besieged the <i>Lombards</i> in
+  <i>Pavia</i>, and forced them to surrender the Exarchate and region of
+  <i>Pentapolis</i> to the Pope for a perpetual possession. Thus the Pope
+  became Lord of <i>Ravenna</i>, and the Exarchate, some few cities
+  excepted; and the keys were sent to <i>Rome</i>, and laid upon the
+  confession of St. <i>Peter</i>, that is, upon his tomb at the high Altar,
+  <i>in signum veri perpetuique dominii, sed pietate Regis gratuita</i>, as
+  the inscription of a coin of <i>Pipin</i> hath it. This was in the year
+  of Christ 755. And henceforward the Popes being temporal Princes, left
+  off in their Epistles and Bulls to note the years of the <i>Greek</i>
+  Emperors, as they had hitherto done.</p>
+
+  <p>After this <a name="NtpDanVII_9" href="#NtDanVII_9"><sup>[9]</sup></a>
+  the <i>Lombards</i> invading the Pope's countries, Pope <i>Adrian</i>
+  sent to <i>Charles</i> the great, the son and successor of <i>Pipin</i>,
+  to come to his assistance. Accordingly <i>Charles</i> entered
+  <i>Italy</i> with an army, invaded the <i>Lombards</i>, overthrew their
+  kingdom, became master of their countries, and restored to the Pope, not
+  only what they had taken from him, but also the rest of the Exarchate
+  which they had promised <i>Pipin</i> to surrender to him, but had
+  hitherto detained; and also gave him some cities of the <i>Lombards</i>,
+  and was in return himself made <i>Patricius</i> by the <i>Romans</i>, and
+  had the authority of confirming the elections of the Popes conferred upon
+  him. These things were done in the years 773 and 774. This kingdom of the
+  <i>Lombards</i> was the second kingdom which fell before the little horn.
+  But <i>Rome</i>, which was to be the seat of his kingdom, was not yet his
+  own.</p>
+
+  <p>In the year 796, <a name="NtpDanVII_10"
+  href="#NtDanVII_10"><sup>[10]</sup></a> <i>Leo</i> III being made Pope,
+  notified his election to <i>Charles</i> the great by his Legates, sending
+  to him for a present, the golden keys of the Confession of <i>Peter</i>,
+  and the Banner of the city of <i>Rome</i>: the first as an acknowledgment
+  of the Pope's holding the cities of the Exarchate and <i>Lombardy</i> by
+  the grant of <i>Charles</i>; the other as a signification that
+  <i>Charles</i> should come and subdue the Senate and people of
+  <i>Rome</i>, as he had done the Exarchate and the kingdom of the
+  <i>Lombards</i>. For the Pope at the same time desired <i>Charles</i> to
+  send some of his Princes to <i>Rome</i>, who might subject the
+  <i>Roman</i> people to him, and bind them by oath <i>in fide &amp;
+  subjectione</i>, in fealty and subjection, as his words are recited by
+  <i>Sigonius</i>. An anonymous Poet, publish'd by <i>Boeclerus</i> at
+  <i>Strasburg</i>, expresseth it thus:</p>
+
+  <div class="poem">
+    <div class="stanza">
+      <p><i>Admonuitque piis precibus, qui mittere vellet</i></p>
+      <p><i>Ex propriis aliquos primoribus, ac sibi plebem</i></p>
+      <p><i>Subdere Romanam, servandaque f&#339;dera cogens</i></p>
+      <p><i>Hanc fidei sacramentis promittere magnis</i>.</p>
+    </div>
+  </div>
+  <p>Hence arose a misunderstanding between the Pope and the city: and the
+  <i>Romans</i> about two or three years after, by assistance of some of
+  the Clergy, raised such tumults against him, as gave occasion to a new
+  state of things in all the <i>West</i>. For two of the Clergy accused him
+  of crimes, and the <i>Romans</i> with an armed force, seized him, stript
+  him of his sacerdotal habit, and imprisoned him in a monastery. But by
+  assistance of his friends he made his escape, and fled into
+  <i>Germany</i> to <i>Charles</i> the great, to whom he complained of the
+  <i>Romans</i> for acting against him out of a design to throw off all
+  authority of the Church, and to recover their antient freedom. In his
+  absence his accusers with their forces ravaged the possessions of the
+  Church, and sent the accusations to <i>Charles</i>; who before the end of
+  the year sent the Pope back to <i>Rome</i> with a large retinue. The
+  Nobles and Bishops of <i>France</i> who accompanied him, examined the
+  chief of his accusers at <i>Rome</i>, and sent them into <i>France</i> in
+  custody. This was in the year 799. The next year <i>Charles</i> himself
+  went to <i>Rome</i>, and upon a day appointed presided in a Council of
+  <i>Italian</i> and <i>French</i> Bishops to hear both parties. But when
+  the Pope's adversaries expected to be heard, the Council declared <a
+  name="NtpDanVII_11" href="#NtDanVII_11"><sup>[11]</sup></a> that he who
+  was the supreme judge of all men, was above being judged by any other
+  than himself: whereupon he made a solemn declaration of his innocence
+  before all the people, and by doing so was looked upon as acquitted.</p>
+
+  <p>Soon after, upon <i>Christmas</i>-day, the people of <i>Rome</i>, who
+  had hitherto elected their Bishop, and reckoned that they and their
+  Senate inherited the rights of the antient Senate and people of
+  <i>Rome</i>, voted <i>Charles</i> their Emperor, and subjected themselves
+  to him in such manner as the old <i>Roman</i> Empire and their Senate
+  were subjected to the old <i>Roman</i> Emperors. The Pope crowned him,
+  and anointed him with holy oil, and worshipped him on his knees after the
+  manner of adoring the old <i>Roman</i> Emperors; as the aforesaid Poet
+  thus relates:</p>
+
+  <div class="poem">
+    <div class="stanza">
+      <p><i>Post laudes igitur dictas &amp; summus eundem</i></p>
+      <p><i>Pr�sul adoravit, sicut mos debitus olim</i></p>
+      <p><i>Principibus fuit antiquis</i>.</p>
+    </div>
+  </div>
+  <p>The Emperor, on the other hand, took the following oath to the Pope:
+  <i>In nomine Christi spondeo atque polliceor, Ego Carolus Imperator coram
+  Deo &amp; beato Petro Apostolo, me protectorem ac defensorem fore hujus
+  sanct� Roman� Ecclesi� in omnibus utilitatibus, quaten�s divino fultus
+  fuero adjutorio, prout sciero poteroque</i>. The Emperor was also made
+  Consul of <i>Rome</i>, and his son <i>Pipin</i> crowned King of
+  <i>Italy</i>: and henceforward the Emperor stiled himself: <i>Carolus
+  serenissimus, Augustus, � Deo coronatus, magnus, pacificus, Rom�
+  gubernans imperium</i>, or <i>Imperator Romanorum</i>; and was prayed for
+  in the Churches of <i>Rome</i>. His image was henceforward put upon the
+  coins of <i>Rome</i>: while the enemies of the Pope, to the number of
+  three hundred <i>Romans</i> and two or three of the Clergy, were
+  sentenced to death. The three hundred <i>Romans</i> were beheaded in one
+  day in the <i>Lateran</i> fields: but the Clergymen at the intercession
+  of the Pope were pardoned, and banished into <i>France</i>. And thus the
+  title of <i>Roman</i> Emperor, which had hitherto been in the
+  <i>Greek</i> Emperors, was by this act transferred in the <i>West</i> to
+  the Kings of <i>France</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>After these things <a name="NtpDanVII_12"
+  href="#NtDanVII_12"><sup>[12]</sup></a> <i>Charles</i> gave the City and
+  Duchy of <i>Rome</i> to the Pope, subordinately to himself as Emperor of
+  the <i>Romans</i>; spent the winter in ordering the affairs of
+  <i>Rome</i>, and those of the Apostolic see, and of all <i>Italy</i>,
+  both civil and ecclesiastical, and in making new laws for them; and
+  returned the next summer into <i>France</i>: leaving the city under its
+  Senate, and both under the Pope and himself. But hearing that his new
+  laws were not observed by the judges in dictating the law, nor by the
+  people in hearing it; and that the great men took servants from free men,
+  and from the Churches and Monasteries, to labour in their vineyards,
+  fields, pastures and houses, and continued to exact cattle and wine of
+  them, and to oppress those that served the Churches: he wrote to his son
+  <i>Pipin</i> to remedy these abuses, to take care of the Church, and see
+  his laws executed.</p>
+
+  <p>Now the Senate and people and principality of <i>Rome</i> I take to be
+  the third King the little horn overcame, and even the chief of the three.
+  For this people elected the Pope and the Emperor; and now, by electing
+  the Emperor and making him Consul, was acknowledged to retain the
+  authority of the old <i>Roman</i> Senate and people. This city was the
+  Metropolis of the old <i>Roman</i> Empire, represented in <i>Daniel</i>
+  by the fourth Beast; and by subduing the Senate and people and Duchy, it
+  became the Metropolis of the little horn of that Beast, and completed
+  <i>Peter</i>'s Patrimony, which was the kingdom of that horn. Besides,
+  this victory was attended with greater consequences than those over the
+  other two Kings. For it set up the <i>Western Empire</i>, which continues
+  to this day. It set up the Pope above the judicature of the <i>Roman</i>
+  Senate, and above that of a Council of <i>Italian</i> and <i>French</i>
+  Bishops, and even above all human judicature; and gave him the supremacy
+  over the <i>Western</i> Churches and their Councils in a high degree. It
+  gave him <i>a look more stout than his fellows</i>; so that when this new
+  religion began to be established in the minds of men, he grappled not
+  only with Kings, but even with the <i>Western</i> Emperor himself. It is
+  observable also, that the custom of kissing the Pope's feet, an honour
+  superior to that of Kings and Emperors, began about this time. There are
+  some instances of it in the ninth century: <i>Platina</i> tells us, that
+  the feet of Pope <i>Leo</i> IV were kissed, according to antient custom,
+  by all who came to him: and some say that <i>Leo</i> III began this
+  custom, pretending that his hand was infected by the kiss of a woman. The
+  Popes began also about this time to canonize saints, and to grant
+  indulgences and pardons: and some represent that <i>Leo</i> III was the
+  first author of all these things. It is further observable, that
+  <i>Charles</i> the great, between the years 775 and 796, conquered all
+  <i>Germany</i> from the <i>Rhine</i> and <i>Danube</i> northward to the
+  <i>Baltic</i> sea, and eastward to the river <i>Teis</i>; extending his
+  conquests also into <i>Spain</i> as far as the river <i>Ebro</i>: and by
+  these conquests he laid the foundation of the new Empire; and at the same
+  time propagated the <i>Roman</i> Catholic religion into all his
+  conquests, obliging the <i>Saxons</i> and <i>Hunns</i> who were heathens,
+  to receive the <i>Roman</i> faith, and distributing his northern
+  conquests into Bishopricks, granting tithes to the Clergy and
+  <i>Peter-pence</i> to the Pope: by all which the Church of <i>Rome</i>
+  was highly enlarged, enriched, exalted, and established.</p>
+
+  <p>In the forementioned <i>dissertation upon some coins of </i>Charles<i>
+  the great, </i>Ludovicus Pius<i>, </i>Lotharius<i>, and their successors,
+  stamped at </i>Rome, there is a draught of a piece of <i>Mosaic</i> work
+  which Pope <i>Leo</i> III. caused to be made in his Palace near the
+  Church of <i>John Lateran</i>, in memory of his sending the standard or
+  banner of the city of <i>Rome</i> curiously wrought, to <i>Charles</i>
+  the great; and which still remained there at the publishing of the said
+  book. In the <i>Mosaic</i> work there appeared <i>Peter</i> with three
+  keys in his lap, reaching the <i>Pallium</i> to the Pope with his right
+  hand, and the banner of the city to <i>Charles</i> the great with his
+  left. By the Pope was this inscription, SCISSIMUS D.N. LEO PP; by the
+  King this, D.N. CARVLO REGI; and under the feet of <i>Peter</i> this,
+  BEATE PETRE, DONA VITAM LEONI PP, ET BICTORIAM CARVLO REGI DONA. This
+  Monument gives the title of King to <i>Charles</i>, and therefore was
+  erected before he was Emperor. It was erected when <i>Peter</i> was
+  reaching the <i>Pallium</i> to the Pope, and the Pope was sending the
+  banner of the city to <i>Charles</i>, that is, A.C. 796. The words above,
+  <i>Sanctissimus Dominus noster Leo Papa Domino nostro Carolo Regi</i>,
+  relate to the message; and the words below, <i>Beate Petre, dona vitam
+  Leoni Pap� &amp; victoriam Carolo regi dona</i>, are a prayer that in
+  this undertaking God would preserve the life of the Pope, and give
+  victory to the King over the <i>Romans</i>. The three keys in the lap of
+  <i>Peter</i> signify the keys of the three parts of his Patrimony, that
+  of <i>Rome</i> with its Duchy, which the Pope claimed and was conquering,
+  those of <i>Ravenna</i> with the Exarchate, and of the territories taken
+  from the <i>Lombards</i>; both which he had newly conquered. These were
+  the three dominions, whose keys were in the lap of St. <i>Peter</i>, and
+  whose Crowns are now worn by the Pope, and by the conquest of which he
+  became the little horn of the fourth Beast. By <i>Peter</i>'s giving the
+  <i>Pallium</i> to the Pope with his right hand, and the banner of the
+  city to the King with his left, and by naming the Pope before the King in
+  the inscription, may be understood that the Pope was then reckoned
+  superior in dignity to the Kings of the earth.</p>
+
+  <p>After the death of <i>Charles</i> the great, his son and successor
+  <i>Ludovicus Pius</i>, at the request of the Pope, <a name="NtpDanVII_13"
+  href="#NtDanVII_13"><sup>[13]</sup></a> confirmed the donations of his
+  grandfather and father to the see of <i>Rome</i>. And in the confirmation
+  he names first <i>Rome</i> with its Duchy extending into <i>Tuscany</i>
+  and <i>Campania</i>; then the Exarchate of <i>Ravenna</i>, with
+  <i>Pentapolis</i>; and in the third place, the territories taken from the
+  <i>Lombards</i>. These are his three conquests, and he was to hold them
+  of the Emperor for the use of the Church <i>sub integritate</i>,
+  entirely, without the Emperor's medling therewith, or with the
+  jurisdiction or power of the Pope therein, unless called thereto in
+  certain cases. This ratification the Emperor <i>Ludovicus</i> made under
+  an oath: and as the King of the <i>Ostrogoths</i>, for acknowledging that
+  he held his kingdom of <i>Italy</i> of the <i>Greek</i> Emperor, stamped
+  the effigies of the Emperor on one side of his coins and his own on the
+  reverse; so the Pope made the like acknowledgment to the <i>Western</i>
+  Emperor. For the Pope began now to coin money, and the coins of
+  <i>Rome</i> are henceforward found with the heads of the Emperors,
+  <i>Charles</i>, <i>Ludovicus Pius</i>, <i>Lotharius</i>, and their
+  successors, on the one side, and the Pope's inscription on the reverse,
+  for many years.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. VII.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_1" href="#NtpDanVII_1">[1]</a> Chap. vii. 8.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_2" href="#NtpDanVII_2">[2]</a> Ver. 20, 21.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_3" href="#NtpDanVII_3">[3]</a> Ver. 24.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_4" href="#NtpDanVII_4">[4]</a> Ver. 25.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_5" href="#NtpDanVII_5">[5]</a> Sigonius de Regno
+  Itali�, ad Ann. 726.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_6" href="#NtpDanVII_6">[6]</a> Sigonius ib. ad Ann.
+  726, 752.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_7" href="#NtpDanVII_7">[7]</a> Sigon. ib. Ann.
+  750.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_8" href="#NtpDanVII_8">[8]</a> Sigon. ib. Ann. 753,
+  754, 755.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_9" href="#NtpDanVII_9">[9]</a> Sigon. ib. Ann.
+  773.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_10" href="#NtpDanVII_10">[10]</a> Sigon. de Regno
+  Ital. ad Ann. 796.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_11" href="#NtpDanVII_11">[11]</a> Vide
+  Anastasium.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_12" href="#NtpDanVII_12">[12]</a> Sigon. de Regno
+  Ital.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVII_13" href="#NtpDanVII_13">[13]</a> Confirmationem
+  recitat Sigonius, lib. 4. de Regno Itali�, ad An. 817.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanVIII">CHAP. VIII</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the power of the eleventh horn of
+</i>Daniel<i>'s fourth Beast, to change times
+and laws</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>In the reign of the <i>Greek</i> Emperor <i>Justinian</i>, and again
+  in the reign of <i>Phocas</i>, the Bishop of <i>Rome</i> obtained some
+  dominion over the <i>Greek</i> Churches, but of no long continuance. His
+  standing dominion was only over the nations of the <i>Western Empire</i>,
+  represented by <i>Daniel</i>'s fourth Beast. And this jurisdiction was
+  set up by the following Edict of the Emperors <i>Gratian</i> and
+  <i>Valentinian.&mdash;<a name="NtpDanVIII_1"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> Volumus ut quicunque judicio
+  Damasi, quod ille cum Concilio quinque vel septem habuerit Episcoporum,
+  vel eorum qui Catholici sunt judicio vel Concilio condemnatus fuerit, si
+  juste voluerit Ecclesiam retentare, ut qui ad sacerdotale judicium per
+  contumeliam non ivisset: ut ab illustribus viris Pr�fectis Pr�torio
+  Galli� atque Itali�, authoritate adhibit�, ad Episcopale judicium
+  remittatur, sive � Consularibus vel Vicariis, ut ad Urbem Romam sub
+  prosecutione perveniat. Aut si in longinquioribus partibus alicujus
+  ferocitas talis emerserit, omnis ejus caus� edictio ad Metropolit� in
+  eadem Provincia Episcopi deduceretur examen. Vel si ipse Metropolitanus
+  est, Romam necessari�, vel ad eos quos Romanus Episcopus judices dederit,
+  sine delatione contendat.&mdash;&mdash;Quod si vel Metropolitani Episcopi
+  vel cujuscunque sacerdotis iniquitas est suspecta, aut gratia; ad Romanum
+  Episcopum, vel ad Concilium quindecim finitimorum Episcoporum accersitum
+  liceat provocare; modo ne post examen habitum, quod definitum fuerit,
+  integretur</i>. This Edict wanting the name of both <i>Valens</i> and
+  <i>Theodosius</i> in the Title, was made in the time between their
+  reigns, that is, in the end of the year 378, or the beginning of 379. It
+  was directed to the <i>Pr�fecti Pr�torio Itali� &amp; Galli�</i>, and
+  therefore was general. For the <i>Pr�fectus Pr�torio Itali�</i> governed
+  <i>Italy</i>, <i>Illyricum occidentale</i> and <i>Africa</i>; and the
+  <i>Pr�fectus Pr�torio Galli�</i> governed <i>Gallia</i>, <i>Spain</i>,
+  and <i>Britain</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The granting of this jurisdiction to the Pope gave several Bishops
+  occasion to write to him for his resolutions upon doubtful cases,
+  whereupon he answered by decretal Epistles; and henceforward he gave laws
+  to the <i>Western</i> Churches by such Epistles. <i>Himerius</i> Bishop
+  of <i>Tarraco</i>, the head city of a province in <i>Spain</i>, writing
+  to Pope <i>Damasus</i> for his direction about certain Ecclesiastical
+  matters, and the Letter not arriving at <i>Rome</i> till after the death
+  of <i>Damasus</i>, A.C. 384; his successor <i>Siricius</i> answered the
+  same with a legislative authority, telling him of one thing: <i>Cum hoc
+  fieri&mdash;missa ad Provincias � venerand� memori� pr�decessore meo
+  Liberio generalia decreta, prohibeant</i>. Of another: <i>Noverint se ab
+  omni ecclesiastico honore, quo indign� usi sunt, Apostolic� Sedis
+  auctoritate, dejectos</i>. Of another: <i>Scituri posthac omnium
+  Provinciarum summi Antistites, quod si ultr� ad sacros ordines quenquam
+  de talibus esse assumendum, &amp; de suo &amp; de aliorum statu, quos
+  contra Canones &amp; interdicta nostra provexerint, congruam ab
+  Apostolica Sede promendam esse sententiam</i>. And the Epistle he
+  concludes thus: <i>Explicuimus, ut arbitror, frater charissime, universa
+  qu� digesta sunt in querelam; &amp; ad singulas causas, de quibus ad
+  Romanam Ecclesiam, utpote ad caput tui corporis, retulisti; sufficientia,
+  quantum opinor, responsa reddidimus. Nunc fraternitatis tu� animum ad
+  servandos canones, &amp; tenenda decretalia constituta, magis ac magis
+  incitamus: ad h�c qu� ad tua consulta rescripsimus in omnium
+  Coepiscoporum perferri facias notionem; &amp; non solum corum, qui in tua
+  sunt di&#339;cesi constituti, sed etiam ad universos Carthaginenses ac
+  B&#339;ticos, Lusitanos atque <a name="NtpDanVIII_2"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> Gallicos, vel eos qui vicinis tibi
+  collimitant hinc inde Provinciis, h�c qu� a nobis sunt salubri
+  ordinatione disposita, sub literarum tuarum prosecutione mittantur. Et
+  quanquam statuta sedis Apostolic� vel Canonum venerabilia definita, nulli
+  Sacerdotum Domini ignorare sit liberum: utilius tamen, atque pro
+  antiquitate sacerdotii tui, dilectioni tu� esse admod�m poterit
+  gloriosum, si ea qu� ad te speciali nomine generaliter scripta sunt, per
+  unanimitatis tu� sollicitudinem in universorum fratrum nostrorum notitiam
+  perferantur; quatenus &amp; qu� � nobis non inconsult� sed provid� sub
+  nimia cautela &amp; deliberatione sunt salubriter constituta, intemerata
+  permaneant, &amp; omnibus in posterum excusationibus aditus, qui jam
+  nulli apud nos patere poterit, obstruatur. Dat. 3 Id. Febr. Arcadio &amp;
+  Bautone viris clarissimis Consulibus</i>, A.C. 385. Pope <i>Liberius</i>
+  in the reign of <i>Jovian</i> or <i>Valentinian</i> I. sent general
+  Decrees to the Provinces, ordering that the <i>Arians</i> should not be
+  rebaptized: and this he did in favour of the Council of
+  <i>Alexandria</i>, that nothing more should be required of them than to
+  renounce their opinions. Pope <i>Damasus</i> is said to have decreed in a
+  <i>Roman</i> Council, that <i>Tithes</i> and <i>Tenths</i> should be paid
+  upon pain of an <i>Anathema</i>; and that <i>Glory be to the Father</i>,
+  &amp;c. should be said or sung at the end of the <i>Psalms</i>. But the
+  first decretal Epistle now extant is this of <i>Siricius</i> to
+  <i>Himerius</i>; by which the Pope made <i>Himerius</i> his Vicar over
+  all <i>Spain</i> for promulging his Decrees, and seeing them observed.
+  The Bishop of <i>Sevill</i> was also the Pope's Vicar sometimes; for
+  <i>Simplicius</i> wrote thus to <i>Zeno</i> Bishop of that place:
+  <i>Talibus idcirco gloriantes indiciis, congruum duximus vicari� Sedis
+  nostr� te auctoritate fulciri: cujus vigore munitus, Apostolic�
+  institutionis Decreta, vel sanctorum terminos Patrum, nullatenus
+  transcendi permittas</i>. And Pope <i>Hormisda</i> <a name="NtpDanVIII_3"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a> made the Bishop of <i>Sevill</i>
+  his Vicar over <i>B&#339;tica</i> and <i>Lusitania</i>, and the Bishop of
+  <i>Tarraco</i> his Vicar over all the rest of <i>Spain</i>, as appears by
+  his Epistles to them.</p>
+
+  <p>Pope <i>Innocent</i> the first, in his decretal Epistle to
+  <i>Victricius</i> Bishop of <i>Rouen</i> in <i>France</i>, A.C. 404, in
+  pursuance of the Edict of <i>Gratian</i>, made this Decree: <i>Si qu�
+  autem caus� vel contentiones inter Clericos tam superioris ordinis quam
+  etiam inferioris fuerint exort�; ut secundum Synodum Nicenam congregatis
+  ejusdem Provinci� Episcopis jurgium terminetur: nec alicui liceat, <a
+  name="NtpDanVIII_4" href="#NtDanVIII_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> Roman�
+  Ecclesi�, cujus in omnibus causis debet reverentia custodiri, relictis
+  his sacerdotibus, qui in eadem Provincia Dei Ecclesiam nutu Divino
+  gubernant, ad alias convolare Provincias. Quod siquis fort� pr�sumpserit;
+  &amp; ab officio Clericat�s summotus, &amp; injuriarum reus judicetur. Si
+  autem majores caus� in medium fuerint devolut�, ad Sedem Apostolicam
+  sicut Synodus statuit, &amp; beata consuetudo exigit, post judicium
+  Episcopale referantur</i>. By these Letters it seems to me that
+  <i>Gallia</i> was now subject to the Pope, and had been so for some time,
+  and that the Bishop of <i>Rouen</i> was then his Vicar or one of them:
+  for the Pope directs him to refer the greater causes to the See of
+  <i>Rome</i>, according to custom. But the Bishop of <i>Arles</i> soon
+  after became the Pope's Vicar over all <i>Gallia</i>: for Pope
+  <i>Zosimus</i>, A.C. 417, ordaining that none should have access to him
+  without the credentials of his Vicars, conferred upon <i>Patroclus</i>
+  the Bishop of <i>Arles</i> this authority over all <i>Gallia</i>, by the
+  following Decree.</p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Zosimus universis Episcopis per Gallias &amp; septem
+Provincias constitutis</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Placuit Apostolic� Sedi, ut siquis ex qualibet Galliarum parte sub
+  quolibet ecclesiastico gradu ad nos Rom� venire contendit, vel ali�
+  terrarum ire disponit, non aliter proficiscatur nisi Metropolitani
+  Episcopi Formatas acceperit, quibus sacerdotium suum vel locum
+  ecclesiasticum quem habet, scriptorum ejus adstipulatione perdoceat: quod
+  ex gratia statuimus quia plures episcopi sive presbyteri sive
+  ecclesiastici simulantes, quia nullum documentum Formatarum extat per
+  quod valeant confutari, in nomen venerationis irrepunt, &amp; indebitam
+  reverentiam promerentur. Quisquis igitur, fratres charissimi, pr�termiss�
+  supradicti Format� sive episcopus, sive presbyter, sive diaconus, aut
+  deinceps inferiori gradu sit, ad nos venerit: sciat se omnino suscipi non
+  posse. Quam auctoritatem ubique nos misisse manifestum est, ut cunctis
+  regionibus innotescat id quod statuimus omnimodis esse servandum. Siquis
+  autem h�c salubriter constituta temerare tentaverit sponte su�, se a
+  nostra noverit communione discretum. Hoc autem privilegium Formatarum
+  sancto Patroclo fratri &amp; coepiscopo nostro, meritorum ejus speciali
+  contemplatione, concessimus</i>. And that the Bishop of <i>Arles</i> was
+  sometimes the Pope's Vicar over all <i>France</i>, is affirmed also by
+  all the Bishops of the Diocess of <i>Arles</i> in their Letter to Pope
+  <i>Leo</i> I. <i>Cui id etiam honoris dignitatisque collatum est</i>, say
+  they, <i>ut non tantum has Provincias potestate propri� gubernaret; verum
+  etiam omnes Gallias sibi Apostolic� Sedis vice mandatas, sub omni
+  ecclesiastica regula contineret</i>. And Pope <i>Pelagius</i> I. A.C.
+  556, in his Epistle to <i>Sapaudus</i> Bishop of <i>Arles</i>: <i>Majorum
+  nostrorum, operante Dei misericordi�, cupientes inh�rere vestigiis &amp;
+  eorum actus divino examine in omnibus imitari: Charitati tu� per
+  universam Galliam, sanct� Sedis Apostolic�, cui divin� grati� pr�sidemus,
+  vices injungimus</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>By the influence of the same imperial Edict, not only <i>Spain</i> and
+  <i>Gallia</i>, but also <i>Illyricum</i> became subject to the Pope.
+  <i>Damasus</i> made <i>Ascholius</i>, or <i>Acholius</i>, Bishop of
+  <i>Thessalonica</i> the Metropolis of <i>Oriental Illyricum</i>, his
+  Vicar for hearing of causes; and in the year 382, <i>Acholius</i> being
+  summoned by Pope <i>Damasus</i>, came to a Council at <i>Rome</i>. Pope
+  <i>Siricius</i> the successor of <i>Damasus</i>, decreed that no Bishop
+  should be ordained in <i>Illyricum</i> without the consent of
+  <i>Anysius</i> the successor of <i>Acholius</i>. And the following Popes
+  gave <i>Rufus</i> the successor of <i>Anysius</i>, a power of calling
+  Provincial Councils: for in the Collections of <i>Holstenius</i> there is
+  an account of a Council of <i>Rome</i> convened under Pope
+  <i>Boniface</i> II. in which were produced Letters of <i>Damasus</i>,
+  <i>Syricius</i>, <i>Innocent</i> I. <i>Boniface</i> I. and
+  <i>C�lestine</i> Bishops of <i>Rome</i>, to <i>Ascholius</i>,
+  <i>Anysius</i> and <i>Rufus</i>, Bishops of <i>Thessalonica</i>: in which
+  Letters they commend to them the hearing of causes in <i>Illyricum</i>,
+  granted by the Lord and the holy Canons to the Apostolic See thro'out
+  that Province. And Pope <i>Siricius</i> saith in his Epistle to
+  <i>Anysius</i>: <i>Etiam dudum, frater charissime, per Candidianum
+  Episcopum, qui nos pr�cessit ad Dominum, hujusmodi literas dederamus, ut
+  nulla licentia esset, sine consensu tuo in Illyrico Episcopos ordinare
+  pr�sumere, qu� utrum ad te pervenerint scire non potui. Multa enim gesta
+  sunt per contentionem ab Episcopis in ordinationibus faciendis, quod tua
+  melius caritas novit</i>. And a little after: <i>Ad omnem enim hujusmodi
+  audaciam comprimendam vigilare debet instantia tua, Spiritu in te Sancto
+  fervente: ut vel ipse, si potes, vel quos judicaveris Episcopos idoneos,
+  cum literis dirigas, dato consensu qui possit, in ejus locum qui
+  defunctus vel depositus fuerit, Catholicum Episcopum vit� &amp; moribus
+  probatum, secundum Nic�n� Synodi statuta vel Ecclesi� Roman�, Clericum de
+  Clero meritum ordinare</i>. And Pope <i>Innocent</i> I. saith in his
+  Epistle to <i>Anysius</i>: <i>Cui</i> [Anysio] <i>etiam anteriores tanti
+  ac tales viri pr�decessores mei Episcopi, id est, sanct� memori� Damasus,
+  Siricius, atque supra memoratus vir ita detulerunt; ut omnia qu� in
+  omnibus illis partibus gererentur, Sanctitati tu�, qu� plena justiti�
+  est, traderent cognoscenda</i>. And in his Epistle to <i>Rufus</i> the
+  successor of <i>Anysius</i>: <i>Ita longis intervallis disterminatis � me
+  ecclesiis discat consulendum; ut prudenti� gravitatique tu� committendam
+  curam causasque, siqu� exoriantur, per Achai�, Thessali�, Epiri veteris,
+  Epiri nov�, &amp; Cret�, Daci� mediterrane�, Daci� ripensis, M&#339;si�,
+  Dardani�, &amp; Pr�vali ecclesias, Christo Domino annuente, censeam. Ver�
+  enim ejus sacratissimis monitis lectissim� sinceritatis tu� providenti�
+  &amp; virtuti hanc injungimus sollicitudinem: non primit�s h�c
+  statuentes, sed Pr�cessores nostros Apostolicos imitati, qui beatissimis
+  Acholio &amp; Anysio injungi pro meritis ista voluerunt</i>. And
+  <i>Boniface</i> I. in his decretal Epistle to <i>Rufus</i> and the rest
+  of the Bishops in <i>Illyricum</i>: <i>Nullus, ut frequenter dixi,
+  alicujus ordinationem citra ejus</i> [Episcopi Thessalonicensis]
+  <i>conscientiam celebrare pr�sumat: cui, ut supra dictum est, vice nostr�
+  cuncta committimus</i>. And Pope <i>C�lestine</i>, in his decretal
+  Epistle to the Bishops thro'out <i>Illyricum</i>, saith: <i>Vicem nostram
+  per vestram Provinciam noveritis</i> [Rufo] <i>esse commissam, ita ut ad
+  eum, fratres carissimi, quicquid de causis agitur, referatur. Sine ejus
+  consilio nullus ordinetur. Nullus usurpet, eodem inconscio, commissam
+  illi Provinciam; colligere nisi cum ejus voluntate Episcopus non
+  pr�sumat</i>. And in the cause of <i>Perigenes</i>, in the title of his
+  Epistle, he thus enumerates the Provinces under this Bishop: <i>Rufo
+  &amp; c�teris Episcopis per Macedoniam, Achaiam, Thessaliam, Epirum
+  veterem, Epirum novam, Pr�valin, &amp; Daciam constitutis</i>. And Pope
+  <i>Xistus</i> in a decretal Epistle to the same Bishops: <i>Illyrican�
+  omnes Ecclesi�, ut � decessoribus nostris recepimus, &amp; nos quoque
+  fecimus, ad curam nunc pertinent Thessalonicensis Antistitis, ut su�
+  sollicitudine, siqu� inter fratres nascantur, ut assolent, actiones
+  distinguat atque definiat; &amp; ad eum, quicquid � singulis sacerdotibus
+  agitur, referatur. Sit Concilium, quotiens caus� fuerint, quotiens ille
+  pro necessitatum emergentium ratione decreverit</i>. And Pope <i>Leo</i>
+  I. in his decretal Epistle to <i>Anastasius</i> Bishop of
+  <i>Thessalonica</i>: <i>Singulis autem Metropolitanis sicut potestas ista
+  committitur, ut in suis Provinciis jus habeant ordinandi; ita eos
+  Metropolitanos � te volumus ordinari; maturo tamen &amp; decocto
+  judicio</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Occidental Illyricum</i> comprehended <i>Pannonia prima</i> and
+  <i>secunda</i>, <i>Savia</i>, <i>Dalmatia</i>, <i>Noricum
+  mediterraneum</i>, and <i>Noricum ripense</i>; and its Metropolis was
+  <i>Sirmium</i>, till <i>Attila</i> destroyed this city. Afterwards
+  <i>Laureacum</i> became the Metropolis of <i>Noricum</i> and both
+  <i>Pannonias</i>, and <i>Salona</i> the Metropolis of <i>Dalmatia</i>.
+  Now <a name="NtpDanVIII_5" href="#NtDanVIII_5"><sup>[5]</sup></a> the
+  Bishops of <i>Laureacum</i> and <i>Salona</i> received the <i>Pallium</i>
+  from the Pope: and <i>Zosimus</i>, in his decretal Epistle to
+  <i>Hesychius</i> Bishop of <i>Salona</i>, directed him to denounce the
+  Apostolic decrees as well to the Bishops of his own, as to those of the
+  neighbouring Provinces. The subjection of these Provinces to the See of
+  <i>Rome</i> seems to have begun in <i>Anemius</i>, who was ordained
+  Bishop of <i>Sirmium</i> by <i>Ambrose</i> Bishop of <i>Millain</i>, and
+  who in the Council of <i>Aquileia</i> under Pope <i>Damasus</i>, A.C.
+  381, declared his sentence in these words: <i>Caput Illyrici non nisi
+  civitas Sirmiensis: Ego igitur illius civitatis Episcopus sum. Eum qui
+  non confitetur filium Dei �ternum, &amp; coeternum patri, qui est
+  sempiternus, anathema dico</i>. The next year <i>Anemius</i> and
+  <i>Ambrose</i>, with <i>Valerian</i> Bishop of <i>Aquileia</i>,
+  <i>Acholias</i> Bishop of <i>Thessalonica,</i> and many others, went to
+  the Council of <i>Rome</i>, which met for overruling the <i>Greek</i>
+  Church by majority of votes, and exalting the authority of the Apostolic
+  See, as was attempted before in the Council of <i>Sardica</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Aquileia</i> was the second city of the <i>Western Empire</i>, and
+  by some called the second <i>Rome</i>. It was the Metropolis of
+  <i>Istria</i>, <i>Forum Julium</i>, and <i>Venetia</i>; and its
+  subjection to the See of <i>Rome</i> is manifest by the decretal Epistle
+  of <i>Leo</i> I. directed to <i>Nicetas</i> Bishop of this city; for the
+  Pope begins his Epistle thus: <i>Regressus ad nos filius meus Adeodatus
+  Diaconus Sedis nostr�, dilectionem tuam poposcisse memorat, ut de his �
+  nobis authoritatem Apostolic� Sedis acciperes, qu� quidem magnam
+  difficultatem dijudicationis videntur afferre</i>. Then he sets down an
+  answer to the questions proposed by <i>Nicetas</i>, and concludes thus:
+  <i>Hanc autem Epistolam nostram, quam ad consultationem tu� fraternitatis
+  emisimus, ad omnes fratres &amp; comprovinciales tuos Episcopos facies
+  pervenire, ut in omnium observantia, data profit authoritas. Data 1-2
+  Kal. Apr. Majorano Aug. Cos.</i> A.C. 458. <i>Gregory</i> the great A.C.
+  591, <a name="NtpDanVIII_6" href="#NtDanVIII_6"><sup>[6]</sup></a> cited
+  <i>Severus</i> Bishop of <i>Aquileia</i> to appear before him in judgment
+  in a Council at <i>Rome</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The Bishops of <i>Aquileia</i> and <i>Millain</i> created one another,
+  and therefore were of equal authority, and alike subject to the See of
+  <i>Rome</i>. Pope <i>Pelagius</i> about the year 557, testified this in
+  the following words: <a name="NtpDanVIII_7"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_7"><sup>[7]</sup></a> <i>Mos antiquus fuit</i>, saith
+  he, <i>ut quia pro longinquitate vel difficultate itineris, ab Apostolico
+  illis onerosum fuerit ordinari, ipsi se invicem Mediolanensis &amp;
+  Aquileiensis ordinare Episcopos debuissent</i>. These words imply that
+  the ordination of these two Bishops belonged to the See of <i>Rome</i>.
+  When <i>Laurentius</i> Bishop of <i>Millain</i> had excommunicated
+  <i>Magnus</i>, one of his Presbyters, and was dead, <a
+  name="NtpDanVIII_8" href="#NtDanVIII_8"><sup>[8]</sup></a> <i>Gregory</i>
+  the great absolved <i>Magnus</i>, and sent the <i>Pallium</i> to the new
+  elected Bishop <i>Constantius</i>; whom the next year <a
+  name="NtpDanVIII_9" href="#NtDanVIII_9"><sup>[9]</sup></a> he reprehended
+  of partiality in judging <i>Fortunatus</i>, and commanded him to send
+  <i>Fortunatus</i> to <i>Rome</i> to be judged there: four years after <a
+  name="NtpDanVIII_10" href="#NtDanVIII_10"><sup>[10]</sup></a> he
+  appointed the Bishops of <i>Millain</i> and <i>Ravenna</i> to hear the
+  cause of one <i>Maximus</i>; and two years after, <i>viz.</i> A.C. 601,
+  when <i>Constantius</i> was dead, and the people of <i>Millain</i> had
+  elected <i>Deusdedit</i> his successor, and the <i>Lombards</i> had
+  elected another, <a name="NtpDanVIII_11"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_11"><sup>[11]</sup></a> <i>Gregory</i> wrote to the
+  Notary, Clergy, and People of <i>Millain</i>, that by the authority of
+  his Letters <i>Deusdedit</i> should be ordained, and that he whom the
+  <i>Lombards</i> had ordained was an unworthy successor of <i>Ambrose</i>:
+  whence I gather, that the Church of <i>Millain</i> had continued in this
+  state of subordination to the See of <i>Rome</i> ever since the days of
+  <i>Ambrose</i>; for <i>Ambrose</i> himself acknowledged the authority of
+  that See. <i>Ecclesia Romana</i>, <a name="NtpDanVIII_12"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_12"><sup>[12]</sup></a> saith he, <i>hanc consuetudinem
+  non habet, cujus typum in omnibus sequimur, &amp; formam</i>. And a
+  little after: <i>In omnibus cupio sequi Ecclesiam Romanam</i>. And in his
+  Commentary upon 1 <i>Tim</i>. iii. <i>Cum totus mundus Dei sit, tamen
+  domus ejus Ecclesia dicitur, cujus hodie rector est Damasus</i>. In his
+  Oration on the death of his brother <i>Satyrus</i>, he relates how his
+  brother coming to a certain city of <i>Sardinia</i>, <i>advocavit
+  Episcopum loci, percontatusque est ex eo utrum cum Episcopis Catholicis
+  hoc est cum Romana Ecclesia conveniret?</i> And in conjunction with the
+  Synod of <i>Aquileia</i> A.C. 381, in a synodical Epistle to the Emperor
+  <i>Gratian</i>, he saith: <i>Totius orbis Romani caput Romanam Ecclesiam,
+  atque illam sacrosanctam Apostolorum fidem, ne turbari sineret,
+  obsecranda fuit clementia vestra; inde enim in omnes venerand�
+  communionis jura dimanant</i>. The Churches therefore of <i>Aquileia</i>
+  and <i>Millain</i> were subject to the See of <i>Rome</i> from the days
+  of the Emperor <i>Gratian</i>. <i>Auxentius</i> the predecessor of
+  <i>Ambrose</i> was not subject to the see of <i>Rome</i>, and
+  consequently the subjection of the Church of <i>Millain</i> began in
+  <i>Ambrose</i>. This Diocese of <i>Millain</i> contained <i>Liguria</i>
+  with <i>Insubria</i>, the <i>Alpes Cotti�</i> and <i>Rh�tia</i>; and was
+  divided from the Diocese of <i>Aquileia</i> by the river <i>Addua</i>. In
+  the year 844, the Bishop of <i>Millain</i> broke off from the See of
+  <i>Rome</i>, and continued in this separation about 200 years, as is thus
+  related by <a name="NtpDanVIII_13"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_13"><sup>[13]</sup></a> <i>Sigonius</i>: <i>Eodem anno
+  Angilbertus Mediolanensis Archiepiscopus ab Ecclesia Romana parum
+  comperta de causa descivit, tantumque exemplo in posterum valuit, ut non
+  nisi post ducentos annos Ecclesia Mediolanensis ad Roman� obedientiam
+  auctoritatemque redierit</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The Bishop of <i>Ravenna</i>, the Metropolis of <i>Flaminia</i> and
+  <i>�milia</i>, was also subject to the Pope: for <i>Zosimus</i>, A.C.
+  417, excommunicated some of the Presbyters of that Church, and wrote a
+  commonitory Epistle about them to the Clergy of that Church as a branch
+  of the <i>Roman</i> Church: <i>In sua</i>, saith he, <i>hoc est, in
+  Ecclesia nostra Romana</i>. When those of <i>Ravenna</i>, having elected
+  a new Bishop, gave notice thereof to Pope <i>Sixtus</i>, the Pope set him
+  aside, and <a name="NtpDanVIII_14"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_14"><sup>[14]</sup></a> ordained <i>Peter
+  Chrysologus</i> in his room. <i>Chrysologus</i> in his Epistle to
+  <i>Eutyches</i>, extant in the Acts of the Council of <i>Chalcedon</i>,
+  wrote thus: <i>Nos pro studio pacis &amp; fidei, extra consensum Roman�
+  civitatis Episcopi, causas fidei audire non possumus</i>. Pope <i>Leo</i>
+  I. being consulted by <i>Leo</i> Bishop of <i>Ravenna</i> about some
+  questions, answered him by a decretal Epistle A.C. 451. And Pope
+  <i>Gregory</i> the great, <a name="NtpDanVIII_15"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_15"><sup>[15]</sup></a> reprehending <i>John</i> Bishop
+  of <i>Ravenna</i> about the use of the <i>Pallium</i>, tells him of a
+  Precept of one of his Predecessors, Pope <i>John</i>, commanding that all
+  the Privileges formerly granted to the Bishop and Church of
+  <i>Ravenna</i> should be kept: to this <i>John</i> returned a submissive
+  answer; and after his death Pope <i>Gregory</i> ordered a visitation of
+  the Church of <i>Ravenna</i>, confirmed the privileges heretofore granted
+  them, and sent his <i>Pallium</i>, as of antient custom, to their new
+  Bishop <i>Marinian</i>. Yet this Church revolted sometimes from the
+  Church of <i>Rome</i>, but returned again to its obedience.</p>
+
+  <p>The rest of <i>Italy</i>, with the Islands adjacent, containing the
+  <i>suburbicarian</i> regions, or ten Provinces under the temporal Vicar
+  of <i>Rome, viz.</i> <sup>1</sup><i>Campania</i>,
+  <sup>2</sup><i>Tuscia</i> and <i>Umbria</i>, <sup>3</sup><i>Picenum
+  suburbicarium</i>, <sup>4</sup><i>Sicily</i>, <sup>5</sup><i>Apulia</i>
+  and <i>Calabria</i>, <sup>6</sup><i>Brutii</i> and <i>Lucania</i>,
+  <sup>7</sup><i>Samnium</i>, <sup>8</sup><i>Sardinia</i>,
+  <sup>9</sup><i>Corsica</i>, and <sup>10</sup><i>Valeria</i>, constituted
+  the proper Province of the Bishop of <i>Rome</i>. For the Council of
+  <i>Nice</i> in their fifth Canon ordained that Councils should be held
+  every spring and autumn in every Province; and according to this Canon,
+  the Bishops of this Province met at <i>Rome</i> every half year. In this
+  sense Pope <i>Leo</i> I. applied this Canon to <i>Rome</i>, in a decretal
+  Epistle to the Bishops of <i>Sicily</i>, written <i>Alippio &amp;
+  Ardabure Coss</i>. A.C. 447. <i>Quia saluberrime</i>, saith he, <i>�
+  sanctis patribus constitutum est, binos in annis singulis Episcoporum
+  debere esse conventus, terni semper ex vobis ad diem tertium Kalendarum
+  Octobrium Romam �terno concilio sociandi occurrant. Et indissimulanter �
+  vobis h�c consuetudo servetur, quoniam adjuvante Dei grati�, facili�s
+  poterit provideri, ut in Ecclesiis Christi nulla scandala, nulli
+  nascantur errores; cum coram Apostolo Petro semper in communione
+  tractatum fuerit, ut omnia Canonum Decreta apud omnes Domini sacerdotes
+  inviolata permaneant</i>. The Province of <i>Rome</i> therefore
+  comprehended <i>Sicily</i>, with so much of <i>Italy</i> and the
+  neighbouring Islands as sent Bishops to the annual Councils of
+  <i>Rome</i>; but extended not into the Provinces of <i>Ravenna</i>,
+  <i>Aquileia</i>, <i>Millain</i>, <i>Arles</i>, &amp;c. those Provinces
+  having Councils of their own. The Bishops in every Province of the
+  <i>Roman</i> Empire were convened in Council by the Metropolitan or
+  Bishop of the head city of the Province, and this Bishop presided in that
+  Council: but the Bishop of <i>Rome</i> did not only preside in his own
+  Council of the Bishops of the <i>suburbicarian</i> regions, but also gave
+  Orders to the Metropolitans of all the other Provinces in the <i>Western
+  Empire</i>, as their universal governor; as may be further perceived by
+  the following instances.</p>
+
+  <p>Pope <i>Zosimus</i> A.C. 417, cited <i>Proculus</i> Bishop of
+  <i>Marseilles</i> to appear before a Council at <i>Rome</i> for
+  illegitimate Ordinations; and condemned him, as he mentions in several of
+  his Epistles. Pope <i>Boniface</i> I. A.C. 419, upon a complaint of the
+  Clergy of <i>Valentia</i> against <i>Maximus</i> a Bishop, summoned the
+  Bishops of all <i>Gallia</i> and the seven Provinces to convene in a
+  Council against him; and saith in his Epistle, that his Predecessors had
+  done the like. Pope <i>Leo</i> I. called a general Council of all the
+  Provinces of <i>Spain</i> to meet in <i>Gall�cia</i> against the
+  <i>Manichees</i> and <i>Priscillianists</i>, as he says in his decretal
+  Epistle to <i>Turribius</i> a <i>Spanish</i> Bishop. And in one of his
+  decretal Epistles to <i>Nicetas</i> Bishop of <i>Aquileia</i>, he
+  commands him to call a Council of the Bishops of that Province against
+  the <i>Pelagians</i>, which might ratify all the Synodal Decrees which
+  had been already ratified by the See of <i>Rome</i> against this heresy.
+  And in his decretal Epistle to <i>Anastasius</i> Bishop of
+  <i>Thessalonica</i>, he ordained that Bishop should hold two Provincial
+  Councils every year, and refer the harder causes to the See of
+  <i>Rome</i>: and if upon any extraordinary occasion it should be
+  necessary to call a Council, he should not be troublesom to the Bishops
+  under him, but content himself with two Bishops out of every Province,
+  and not detain them above fifteen days. In the same Epistle he describes
+  the form of Church-Government then set up, to consist in a subordination
+  of all the Churches to the See of <i>Rome</i>: <i>De qua forma</i>, saith
+  he, <i>Episcoporum quoque est orta distinctio, &amp; magna dispositione
+  provisum est ne omnes sibi omnia vindicarent, sed essent in singulis
+  Provinciis singuli quorum inter fratres haberetur prima sententia, &amp;
+  rursus quidam in majoribus urbibus constituti sollicitudinem sumerent
+  ampliorem, per quos ad unam Petri Sedem universalis Ecclesi� cura
+  conflueret, &amp; nihil usque � suo capite dissideret. Qui ergo scit se
+  quibusdam esse pr�positum, non moleste ferat aliquem sibi esse
+  pr�positum; sed obedientiam quam exigit etiam ipse dependat; et sicut non
+  vult gravis oneris sarcinam ferre, ita non audeat aliis importabile
+  pondus imponere</i>. These words sufficiently shew the monarchical form
+  of government then set up in the Churches of the <i>Western Empire</i>
+  under the Bishop of <i>Rome</i>, by means of the imperial Decree of
+  <i>Gratian</i>, and the appeals and decretal Epistles grounded
+  thereupon.</p>
+
+  <p>The same Pope <i>Leo</i>, having in a Council at <i>Rome</i> passed
+  sentence upon <i>Hilary</i> Bishop of <i>Arles</i>, for what he had done
+  by a Provincial Council in <i>Gallia</i>, took occasion from thence to
+  procure the following Edict from the <i>Western</i> Emperor
+  <i>Valentinian</i> III. for the more absolute establishing the authority
+  of his See over all the Churches of the <i>Western Empire</i>.</p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Impp. Theodosius &amp; Valentinianus AA. Aetio
+Viro illustri, Comiti &amp; Magistro utriusque
+militi� &amp; Patricio.</i></p>
+
+  <p><i>Certum est &amp; nobis &amp; imperio nostro unicum esse pr�sidium
+  in supern� Divinitatis favore, ad quem promerendum pr�cipue Christiana
+  fides &amp; veneranda nobis religio suffragatur. Cum igitur Sedis
+  Apostolic� Primatum sancti Petri meritum, qui princeps est Episcopalis
+  coron� &amp; Roman� dignitas civitatis, sacr� etiam Synodi firmavit
+  auctoritas: ne quid pr�ter auctoritatem Sedis istius illicitum pr�sumptio
+  attemperare nitatur: tunc enim demum Ecclesiarum pax ubique servabitur,
+  si Rectorem suum agnoscat Universitas. H�c cum hactenus inviolabiliter
+  suerint custodita, Hilarius Arelatensis, sicut venerabilis viri Leonis
+  Romani Pap� fideli relatione comperimus, contumaci ausu illicita qu�dam
+  pr�sumenda tentavit, &amp; ideo Transalpinas Ecclesias abominabilis
+  tumultus invasit, quod recens maxim� testatur exemplum. Hilarius enim qui
+  Episcopus Arelatensis vocatur, Ecclesi� Roman� urbis inconsulto Pontifice
+  indebitas sibi ordinationes Episcoporum sol� temeritate usurpans invasit.
+  Nam alios incompetenter removit; indecenter alios, invitis &amp;
+  repugnantibus civibus, ordinavit. Qui quidem, quoniam non facile ab his
+  qui non elegerant, recipiebantur, manum sibi contrahebat armatam, &amp;
+  claustra murorum in hostilem morem vel obsidione cingebat, vel
+  aggressione reserabat, &amp; ad sedem quietis pacem pr�dicaturus per
+  bella ducebat: His talibus contra Imperii majestatem, &amp; contra
+  reverentiam Apostolic� Sedis admissis, per ordinem religiosi viri Urbis
+  Pap� cognitione discussis, certa in eum, ex his quos mal� ordinaverat,
+  lata sententia est. Erat quidem ipsa sententia per Gallias etiam sine
+  Imperiali Sanctione valitura: quid enim Pontificis auctoritate non
+  liceret? Sed nostram quoque pr�ceptionem h�c ratio provocavit. Nec
+  ulterius vel Hilario, quem adhuc Episcopum nuncupare sola mansueta
+  Pr�sulis permittit humanitas, nec cuiquam alteri ecclesiasticis rebus
+  arma miscere, aut pr�ceptis Romani Antistitis liceat obviare: ausibus
+  enim talibus fides &amp; reverentia nostri violatur Imperii. Nec hoc
+  solum, quod est maximi criminis, submovemus: verum ne levis saltem inter
+  Ecclesias turba nascatur, vel in aliquo minui religionis disciplina
+  videatur, hoc perenni sanctione discernimus; nequid tam Episcopis
+  Gallicanis quam aliarum Provinciarum contra consuetudinem veterem liceat,
+  sine viri venerabilis Pap� Urbis �tern� auctoritate, tentare. Sed illis
+  omnibusque pro lege sit, quicquid sanxit vel sanxerit Apostolic� Sedis
+  auctoritas: ita ut quisquis Episcoporum ad judicium Romani Antistitis
+  evocatus venire neglexerit, per Moderatorem ejusdem Provinci� adesse
+  cogatur, per omnia servatis qu� Divi parentes nostri Roman� Ecclesi�
+  detulerunt, Aet� pater carissime Augusti. Unde illustris &amp; pr�clara
+  magnificentia tua pr�sentis Edictalis Legis auctoritate faciet qu� sunt
+  superius statuta servari, decem librarum auri multa protinus exigenda ab
+  unoquoque Judice qui passus fuerit pr�cepta nostra violari. Divinitas te
+  servet per multos annos, parens carissime. Dat. </i>viii.<i> Id. Jun.
+  Rom�, Valentiniano A. </i>vi.<i> Consule</i>, A.C. 445. By this Edict the
+  Emperor <i>Valentinian</i> enjoined an absolute obedience to the will of
+  the Bishop of <i>Rome</i> thro'out all the Churches of his Empire; and
+  declares, that for the Bishops to attempt any thing without the Pope's
+  authority is contrary to antient custom, and that the Bishops summoned to
+  appear before his judicature must be carried thither by the Governor of
+  the Province; and he ascribes these privileges of the See of <i>Rome</i>
+  to the concessions of his dead Ancestors, that is, to the Edict of
+  <i>Gratian</i> and <i>Valentinian</i> II. as above: by which reckoning
+  this dominion of the Church of <i>Rome</i> was now of 66 years standing:
+  and if in all this time it had not been sufficiently established, this
+  new Edict was enough to settle it beyond all question thro'out the
+  <i>Western Empire</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>Hence all the Bishops of the Province of <i>Arles</i> in their Letter
+  to Pope <i>Leo</i>, A.C. 450, petitioning for a restitution of the
+  privileges of their Metropolitan, say: <i>Per beatum Petrum Apostolorum
+  principem, sacrosancta Ecclesia Romana tenebat supra omnes totius mundi
+  Ecclesias principatum</i>. And <i>Ceratius</i>, <i>Salonius</i> and
+  <i>Veranus</i>, three Bishops of <i>Gallia</i>, say, in their Epistle to
+  the same Pope: <i>Magna pr�terea &amp; ineffabili quadam nos peculiares
+  tui gratulatione succrescimus, quod illa specialis doctrin� vestr� pagina
+  ita per omnium Ecclesiarum conventicula celebratur, ut vere consona
+  omnium sententia declaretur; merito illic principatum Sedis Apostolic�
+  constitutum, unde adhuc Apostolici spiritus oracula reserentur</i>. And
+  <i>Leo</i> himself, in <a name="NtpDanVIII_16"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_16"><sup>[16]</sup></a> his Epistle to the metropolitan
+  Bishops thro'out <i>Illyricum</i>: <i>Quia per omnes Ecclesias cura
+  nostra distenditur, exigente hoc � nobis Domino, qui Apostolic�
+  dignitatis beatissimo Apostolo Petro primatum, fidei sui remuneratione
+  commisit, universalem Ecclesiam in fundamenti ipsius soliditate
+  constituens</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>While this Ecclesiastical Dominion was rising up, the northern
+  barbarous nations invaded the <i>Western Empire</i>, and founded several
+  kingdoms therein, of different religions from the Church of <i>Rome</i>.
+  But these kingdoms by degrees embraced the <i>Roman</i> faith, and at the
+  same time submitted to the Pope's authority. The <i>Franks</i> in
+  <i>Gaul</i> submitted in the end of the fifth Century, the <i>Goths</i>
+  in <i>Spain</i> in the end of the sixth; and the <i>Lombards</i> in
+  <i>Italy</i> were conquered by <i>Charles</i> the great A.C. 774. Between
+  the years 775 and 794, the same <i>Charles</i> extended the Pope's
+  authority over all <i>Germany</i> and <i>Hungary</i> as far as the river
+  <i>Theysse</i> and the <i>Baltic</i> sea; he then set him above all human
+  judicature, and at the same time assisted him in subduing the City and
+  Duchy of <i>Rome</i>. By the conversion of the ten kingdoms to the
+  <i>Roman</i> religion, the Pope only enlarged his spiritual dominion, but
+  did not yet rise up as a horn of the Beast. It was his temporal dominion
+  which made him one of the horns: and this dominion he acquired in the
+  latter half of the eighth century, by subduing three of the former horns
+  as above. And now being arrived at a temporal dominion, and a power above
+  all human judicature, he reigned <a name="NtpDanVIII_17"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_17"><sup>[17]</sup></a> <i>with a look more stout than
+  his fellows</i>, and <a name="NtpDanVIII_18"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_18"><sup>[18]</sup></a> <i>times and laws were</i>
+  henceforward <i>given into his hands, for a time times and half a
+  time</i>, or three times and an half; that is, for 1260 solar years,
+  reckoning a time for a Calendar year of 360 days, and a day for a solar
+  year. After which <a name="NtpDanVIII_19"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_19"><sup>[19]</sup></a> <i>the judgment is to sit, and
+  they shall take away his dominion</i>, not at once, but by degrees, <i>to
+  consume, and to destroy it unto the end. <a name="NtpDanVIII_20"
+  href="#NtDanVIII_20"><sup>[20]</sup></a> And the kingdom and dominion,
+  and greatness of the kingdom under the whole heaven shall</i>, by
+  degrees, <i>be given unto the people of the saints of the most High,
+  whose kingdom is an everlasting kingdom, and all dominions shall serve
+  and obey him</i>.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. VIII.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_1" href="#NtpDanVIII_1">[1]</a> <i>See the Annals
+  of </i>Baronius, Anno 381. Sect. 6.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_2" href="#NtpDanVIII_2">[2]</a> Populos
+  Gallici�.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_3" href="#NtpDanVIII_3">[3]</a> Hormisd. Epist. 24.
+  26.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_4" href="#NtpDanVIII_4">[4]</a> <i>The words,
+  </i>sine auctoritate<i>, seem wanting.</i></p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_5" href="#NtpDanVIII_5">[5]</a> Vide Caroli a S.
+  Paulo Geographiam sacram, p. 72, 73.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_6" href="#NtpDanVIII_6">[6]</a> Greg. M. lib. 1.
+  Indic. 9. Epist. 16.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_7" href="#NtpDanVIII_7">[7]</a> Apud Gratianum de
+  Mediolanensi &amp; Aquileiensi Episcopis.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_8" href="#NtpDanVIII_8">[8]</a> Greg. M. lib. 3.
+  Epist. 26. &amp; lib. 4. Epist. 1.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_9" href="#NtpDanVIII_9">[9]</a> Greg. lib. 5.
+  Epist. 4.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_10" href="#NtpDanVIII_10">[10]</a> Greg. lib. 9.
+  Epist. 10 &amp; 67.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_11" href="#NtpDanVIII_11">[11]</a> Greg. lib. 11.
+  Epist. 3, 4.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_12" href="#NtpDanVIII_12">[12]</a> Ambros l. 3. de
+  sacramentis, c. 1.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_13" href="#NtpDanVIII_13">[13]</a> Sigonius de
+  Regno Itali�, lib. 5.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_14" href="#NtpDanVIII_14">[14]</a> <i>See
+  </i>Baronius, Anno 433. Sect. 24.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_15" href="#NtpDanVIII_15">[15]</a> Greg. M. lib. 3.
+  Epist. 56, 57. &amp; lib. 5. Epist. 25, 26, 56.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_16" href="#NtpDanVIII_16">[16]</a> Epist. 25. apud
+  Holstenium.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_17" href="#NtpDanVIII_17">[17]</a> Dan. vii.
+  20.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_18" href="#NtpDanVIII_18">[18]</a> Ver. 25.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_19" href="#NtpDanVIII_19">[19]</a> Ver. 26.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanVIII_20" href="#NtpDanVIII_20">[20]</a> Ver. 27.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanIX">CHAP. IX</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the kingdoms represented in </i>Daniel<i>
+by the Ram and He-Goat</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The second and third Empires, represented by the Bear and Leopard, are
+  again represented by the Ram and He-Goat; but with this difference, that
+  the Ram represents the kingdoms of the <i>Medes</i> and <i>Persians</i>
+  from the beginning of the four Empires, and the Goat represents the
+  kingdom of the <i>Greeks</i> to the end of them. By this means, under the
+  type of the Ram and He-Goat, the times of all the four Empires are again
+  described: <i>I lifted up mine eyes</i>, saith <a name="NtpDanIX_1"
+  href="#NtDanIX_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> <i>Daniel</i>, <i>and saw</i>,
+  <i>and behold there stood before the river</i> [Ulai] <i>a Ram which had
+  two horns, and the two horns were high, but one was higher than the
+  other, and the higher came up last.&mdash;And the Ram having two horns,
+  are the kings of </i>Media<i> and </i>Persia: not two persons but two
+  kingdoms, the kingdoms of <i>Media</i> and <i>Persia</i>; and the kingdom
+  of <i>Persia</i> was the higher horn and came up last. The kingdom of
+  <i>Persia</i> rose up, when <i>Cyrus</i> having newly conquered
+  <i>Babylon</i>, revolted from <i>Darius</i> King of the <i>Medes</i>, and
+  beat him at <i>Pasargad�</i>, and set up the <i>Persians</i> above the
+  <i>Medes</i>. This was the horn which came up last. And the horn which
+  came up first was the kingdom of the <i>Medes</i>, from the time that
+  <i>Cyaxares</i> and <i>Nebuchadnezzar</i> overthrew <i>Nineveh</i>, and
+  shared the Empire of the <i>Assyrians</i> between them. The Empires of
+  <i>Media</i> and <i>Babylon</i> were contemporary, and rose up together
+  by the fall of the <i>Assyrian</i> Empire; and the Prophecy of the four
+  Beasts begins with one of them, and that of the Ram and He-Goat with the
+  other. As the Ram represents the kingdom of <i>Media</i> and
+  <i>Persia</i> from the beginning of the four Empires; so the He-Goat
+  represents the Empire of the <i>Greeks</i> to the end of those
+  Monarchies. In the reign of his great horn, and of the four horns which
+  succeeded it, he represents this Empire during the reign of the Leopard:
+  and in the reign of his little horn, which stood up in the latter time of
+  the kingdom of the four, and after their fall became mighty but not by
+  his own power, he represents it during the reign of the fourth Beast.</p>
+
+  <p><i>The rough Goat</i>, saith <i>Daniel, is the King of</i> Grecia,
+  that is, the kingdom; <i>and the great horn between his eyes is the first
+  King</i>: not the first Monarch, but the first kingdom, that which lasted
+  during the reign of <i>Alexander</i> the great, and his brother
+  <i>Arid�us</i> and two young sons, <i>Alexander</i> and <i>Hercules</i>.
+  <a name="NtpDanIX_2" href="#NtDanIX_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> <i>Now that</i>
+  [horn] <i>being broken off, whereas four</i> [horns] <i>stood up for it,
+  four kingdoms shall stand up out of the nation</i> [of the
+  <i>Greeks</i>], <i>but not in his</i> [the first horn's] <i>power</i>.
+  The four horns are therefore four kingdoms; and by consequence, the first
+  great horn which they succeeded is the first great kingdom of the
+  <i>Greeks</i>, that which was founded by <i>Alexander</i> the great,
+  <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 414, and lasted till the death of his son
+  <i>Hercules</i>, <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 441. And the four are those of
+  <i>Cassander</i>, <i>Lysimachus</i>, <i>Antigonus</i>, and
+  <i>Ptolemy</i>, as above.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtpDanIX_3" href="#NtDanIX_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a> <i>And in
+  the latter time of their kingdom, when the transgressors are come to the
+  full, a King</i> [or new kingdom] <i>of fierce countenance, and
+  understanding dark sentences, shall stand up: and his power shall be
+  mighty, but not by his own power</i>. This King was the last horn of the
+  Goat, the little horn which came up out of one of the four horns, and
+  waxed exceeding great. The latter time of their kingdom was when the
+  <i>Romans</i> began to conquer them, that is, when they conquered
+  <i>Perseus</i> King of <i>Macedonia</i>, the fundamental kingdom of the
+  <i>Greeks</i>. And at that time the transgressors came to the full: for
+  then the High-priesthood was exposed to sale, the Vessels of the Temple
+  were sold to pay for the purchase; and the High-priest, with some of the
+  <i>Jews</i>, procured a licence from <i>Antiochus Epiphanes</i> to do
+  after the ordinances of the heathen, and set up a school at
+  <i>Jerusalem</i> for teaching those ordinances. Then <i>Antiochus</i>
+  took <i>Jerusalem</i> with an armed force, slew 4000 <i>Jews</i>, took as
+  many prisoners and sold them, spoiled the Temple, interdicted the
+  worship, commanded the Law of <i>Moses</i> to be burnt, and set up the
+  worship of the heathen Gods in all <i>Judea</i>. In the very same year,
+  <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 580, the <i>Romans</i> conquered <i>Macedonia</i>,
+  the chief of the four horns. Hitherto the Goat was mighty by its own
+  power, but henceforward began to be under the <i>Romans</i>.
+  <i>Daniel</i> distinguishes the times, by describing very particularly
+  the actions of the Kings of the north and south, those two of the four
+  horns which bordered upon <i>Judea</i>, until the <i>Romans</i> conquered
+  <i>Macedonia</i>; and thenceforward only touching upon the main
+  revolutions which happened within the compass of the nations represented
+  by the Goat. In this latter period of time the little horn was to stand
+  up and grow mighty, but not by his own power.</p>
+
+  <p>The three first of <i>Daniel</i>'s Beasts had their dominions taken
+  away, each of them at the rise of the next Beast; but their lives were
+  prolonged, and they are all of them still alive. The third Beast, or
+  Leopard, reigned in his four heads, till the rise of the fourth Beast, or
+  Empire of the <i>Latins</i>; and his life was prolonged under their
+  power. This Leopard reigning in his four heads, signifies the same thing
+  with the He-Goat reigning in his four horns: and therefore the He-Goat
+  reigned in his four horns till the rise of <i>Daniel</i>'s fourth Beast,
+  or Empire of the <i>Latins</i>: then its dominion was taken away by the
+  <i>Latins</i>, but its life was prolonged under their power. The
+  <i>Latins</i> are not comprehended among the nations represented by the
+  He-Goat in this Prophecy: their power over the <i>Greeks</i> is only
+  named in it, to distinguish the times in which the He-Goat was mighty by
+  his own power, from the times in which he was mighty but not by his own
+  power. He was mighty by his own power till his dominion was taken away by
+  the <i>Latins</i>; after that, his life was prolonged under their
+  dominion, and this prolonging of his life was in the days of his last
+  horn: for in the days of this horn the Goat became mighty, but not by his
+  own power.</p>
+
+  <p>Now because this horn was a horn of the Goat, we are to look for it
+  among the nations which composed the body of the Goat. Among those
+  nations he was to rise up and grow mighty: he grew mighty <a
+  name="NtpDanIX_4" href="#NtDanIX_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> <i>towards the
+  south, and towards the east, and towards the pleasant land</i>; and
+  therefore he was to rise up in the north-west parts of those nations, and
+  extend his dominion towards <i>Egypt</i>, <i>Syria</i> and <i>Judea</i>.
+  In the latter time of the kingdom of the four horns, it was to rise up
+  out of one of them and subdue the rest, but not by its own power. It was
+  to be assisted by a foreign power, a power superior to itself, the power
+  which took away the dominion of the third Beast, the power of the fourth
+  Beast. And such a little horn was the kingdom of <i>Macedonia</i>, from
+  the time that it became subject to the <i>Romans</i>. This kingdom, by
+  the victory of the <i>Romans</i> over <i>Persius</i> King of
+  <i>Macedonia</i>, <i>Anno Nabonass.</i> 580, ceased to be one of the four
+  horns of the Goat, and became a dominion of a new sort: not a horn of the
+  fourth Beast, for <i>Macedonia</i> belonged to the body of the third; but
+  a horn of the third Beast of a new sort, a horn of the Goat which grew
+  mighty but not by his own power, a horn which rose up and grew potent
+  under a foreign power, the power of the <i>Romans</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Romans</i>, by the legacy of <i>Attalus</i> the last King of
+  <i>Pergamus</i>, <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 615, inherited that kingdom,
+  including all <i>Asia Minor</i> on this side mount <i>Taurus</i>. <i>An.
+  Nabonass.</i> 684 and 685 they conquered <i>Armenia</i>, <i>Syria</i> and
+  <i>Judea</i>; <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 718, they subdued <i>Egypt</i>. And by
+  these conquests the little horn <a name="NtpDanIX_5"
+  href="#NtDanIX_5"><sup>[5]</sup></a> <i>waxed exceeding great towards the
+  south, and towards the east, and towards the pleasant land. And it waxed
+  great even to the host of heaven; and cast down some of the host and of
+  the stars to the ground, and stamped upon them</i>, that is, upon the
+  people and great men of the <i>Jews</i>. <a name="NtpDanIX_6"
+  href="#NtDanIX_6"><sup>[6]</sup></a> <i>Yea, he magnified himself even to
+  the Prince of the Host</i>, the <i>Messiah</i>, the Prince of the
+  <i>Jews</i>, whom he put to death, <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 780. <i>And by
+  him the daily sacrifice was taken away, and the place of his sanctuary
+  was cast down</i>, <i>viz.</i> in the wars which the armies of the
+  <i>Eastern</i> nations under the conduct of the <i>Romans</i> made
+  against <i>Judea</i>, when <i>Nero</i> and <i>Vespasian</i> were
+  Emperors, <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 816, 817, 818. <a name="NtpDanIX_7"
+  href="#NtDanIX_7"><sup>[7]</sup></a> <i>And an host was given him against
+  the daily sacrifice by reason of transgression, and it cast down the
+  truth to the ground, and it practised and prospered</i>. This
+  transgression is in the next words called <i>the transgression of
+  desolation</i>; and in <i>Dan.</i> xi. 31. <i>the abomination which
+  maketh desolate</i>; and in <i>Matth.</i> xxiv. 15. <i>the abomination of
+  desolation, spoken of by </i>Daniel<i> the prophet, standing in the holy
+  place</i>. It may relate chiefly to the worship of <i>Jupiter
+  Olympius</i> in his Temple built by the Emperor <i>Hadrian</i>, in the
+  place of the Temple of the <i>Jews</i>, and to the revolt of the
+  <i>Jews</i> under <i>Barchochab</i> occasioned thereby, and to the
+  desolation of <i>Judea</i> which followed thereupon; all the <i>Jews</i>,
+  being thenceforward banished <i>Judea</i> upon pain of death. <i>Then I
+  heard</i>, saith <a name="NtpDanIX_8"
+  href="#NtDanIX_8"><sup>[8]</sup></a> <i>Daniel, one saint speaking, and
+  another saint said unto that certain saint which spake, How long shall be
+  the vision concerning the daily sacrifice, and the transgression of
+  desolation, to give both the sanctuary and the host to be trodden under
+  foot? And he said unto me, Unto two thousand and three hundred days; then
+  shall the sanctuary be cleansed.</i> <i>Daniel</i>'s days are years; and
+  these years may perhaps be reckoned either from the destruction of the
+  Temple by the <i>Romans</i> in the reign of <i>Vespasian</i>, or from the
+  pollution of the Sanctuary by the worship of <i>Jupiter Olympius</i>, or
+  from the desolation of <i>Judea</i> made in the end of the <i>Jewish</i>
+  war by the banishment of all the <i>Jews</i> out of their own country, or
+  from some other period which time will discover. Henceforward the last
+  horn of the Goat continued mighty under the <i>Romans</i>, till the reign
+  of <i>Constantine</i> the great and his sons: and then by the division of
+  the <i>Roman</i> Empire between the <i>Greek</i> and <i>Latin</i>
+  Emperors, it separated from the <i>Latins</i>, and became the
+  <i>Greek</i> Empire alone, but yet under the dominion of a <i>Roman</i>
+  family; and at present it is mighty under the dominion of the
+  <i>Turks</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>This last horn is by some taken for <i>Antiochus Epiphanes</i>, but
+  not very judiciously. A horn of a Beast is never taken for a single
+  person: it always signifies a new kingdom, and the kingdom of
+  <i>Antiochus</i> was an old one. <i>Antiochus</i> reigned over one of the
+  four horns, and the little horn was a fifth under its proper kings. This
+  horn was at first a little one, and waxed exceeding great, but so did not
+  <i>Antiochus</i>. It is described great above all the former horns, and
+  so was not <i>Antiochus</i>. His kingdom on the contrary was weak, and
+  tributary to the <i>Romans</i>, and he did not enlarge it. The horn was a
+  <i>King of fierce countenance, and destroyed wonderfully, and prospered
+  and practised</i>; that is, he prospered in his practises against the
+  holy people: but <i>Antiochus</i> was frighted out of <i>Egypt</i> by a
+  mere message of the <i>Romans</i>, and afterwards routed and baffled by
+  the <i>Jews</i>. The horn was mighty by another's power, <i>Antiochus</i>
+  acted by his own. The horn stood up against the Prince of the Host of
+  heaven, the Prince of Princes; and this is the character not of
+  <i>Antiochus</i> but of <i>Antichrist</i>. The horn cast down the
+  Sanctuary to the ground, and so did not <i>Antiochus</i>; he left it
+  standing. The Sanctuary and Host were trampled under foot 2300 days; and
+  in <i>Daniel</i>'s Prophecies days are put for years: but the profanation
+  of the Temple in the reign of <i>Antiochus</i> did not last so many
+  natural days. These were to last till the time of the end, till the last
+  end of the indignation against the <i>Jews</i>; and this indignation is
+  not yet at an end. They were to last till the Sanctuary which had been
+  cast down should be cleansed, and the Sanctuary is not yet cleansed.</p>
+
+  <p>This Prophecy of the Ram and He-Goat is repeated in the last Prophecy
+  of <i>Daniel</i>. There the Angel tells <i>Daniel</i>, that <a
+  name="NtpDanIX_9" href="#NtDanIX_9"><sup>[9]</sup></a> <i>he stood up to
+  strengthen </i>Darius<i> the </i>Mede<i>, and that there should stand up
+  yet three kings in </i>Persia, [<i>Cyrus</i>, <i>Cambyses</i>, and
+  <i>Darius Hystaspis</i>] <i>and the fourth</i> [<i>Xerxes</i>] <i>should
+  be far richer than they all; and by his wealth thro' his riches he should
+  stir up all against the realm of </i>Grecia. This relates to the Ram,
+  whose two horns were the kingdoms of <i>Media</i> and <i>Persia</i>. Then
+  he goes on to describe the horns of the Goat by the <a name="NtpDanIX_10"
+  href="#NtDanIX_10"><sup>[10]</sup></a> <i>standing up of a mighty king,
+  which should rule with great dominion, and do according to his will</i>;
+  and by the breaking of his kingdom into four smaller kingdoms, and not
+  descending to his own posterity. Then he describes the actions of two of
+  those kingdoms which bordered on <i>Judea</i>, <i>viz</i>. <i>Egypt</i>
+  and <i>Syria</i>, calling them the Kings of the <i>South</i> and
+  <i>North</i>, that is, in respect of <i>Judea</i>; and he carries on the
+  description till the latter end of the kingdoms of the four, and till the
+  reign of <i>Antiochus Epiphanes</i>, when transgressors were come to the
+  full. In the eighth year of <i>Antiochus</i>, the year in which he
+  profaned the Temple and set up the heathen Gods in all <i>Judea</i>, and
+  the <i>Romans</i> conquered the kingdom of <i>Macedon</i>; the prophetic
+  Angel leaves off describing the affairs of the kings of the <i>South</i>
+  and <i>North</i>, and begins to describe those of the <i>Greeks</i> under
+  the dominion of the <i>Romans</i>, in these words: <a name="NtpDanIX_11"
+  href="#NtDanIX_11"><sup>[11]</sup></a> <i>And after him Arms</i> [the
+  <i>Romans</i>] <i>shall stand up, and they shall pollute the sanctuary of
+  strength</i>. As <span lang="he" title="MMLK" ><bdo
+  dir="rtl">&#x5DE;&#x5DE;&#x5DC;&#x5DA;</bdo></span> signifies <i>after
+  the king</i>, Dan. xi. 8; so here <span lang="he" title="MMNW" ><bdo
+  dir="rtl">&#x5DE;&#x5DE;&#x5E0;&#x5D5;</bdo></span> may signify <i>after
+  him</i>: and so <span lang="he" title="MN-H'CHT" ><bdo
+  dir="rtl">&#x5DE;&#x5DF;&#x5BE;&#x5D4;&#x5D0;&#x5D7;&#x5EA;</bdo></span>
+  may signify <i>after one of them</i>, Dan. viii. 9. Arms are every where
+  in these Prophecies of <i>Daniel</i> put for the military power of a
+  kingdom, and they stand up when they conquer and grow powerful. The
+  <i>Romans</i> conquered <i>Illyricum</i>, <i>Epirus</i> and
+  <i>Macedonia</i>, in the year of <i>Nabonassar</i> 580; and thirty five
+  years after, by the last will and testament of <i>Attalus</i> the last
+  King of <i>Pergamus</i>, they inherited that rich and flourishing
+  kingdom, that is, all <i>Asia</i> on this side mount <i>Taurus</i>: and
+  sixty nine years after, they conquered the kingdom of <i>Syria</i>, and
+  reduced it into a Province: and thirty four years after they did the like
+  to <i>Egypt</i>. By all these steps the <i>Roman</i> arms stood up over
+  the <i>Greeks</i>. And after 95 years more, by making war upon the
+  <i>Jews, they polluted the sanctuary of strength, and took away the daily
+  sacrifice, and</i>, in its room soon after, <i>placed the abomination
+  which made</i> the Land <i>desolate</i>: for this abomination was placed
+  after the days of Christ, <i>Matth.</i> xxiv. 15. In the 16th year of the
+  Emperor <i>Hadrian</i>, A. C. 132, they placed this abomination by
+  building a Temple to <i>Jupiter Capitolinus</i>, where the Temple of God
+  in <i>Jerusalem</i> had stood. Thereupon the <i>Jews</i> under the
+  conduct of <i>Barchochab</i> rose up in arms against the <i>Romans</i>,
+  and in that war had 50 cities demolished, 985 of their best towns
+  destroyed, and 580000 men slain by the sword: and in the end of the war,
+  A.C. 136, they were all banished <i>Judea</i> upon pain or death; and
+  that time the land hath remained desolate of its old inhabitants.</p>
+
+  <p>Now that the prophetic Angel passes in this manner from the four
+  kingdoms of the <i>Greeks</i> to the <i>Romans</i> reigning over the
+  <i>Greeks</i>, is confirmed from hence, that in the next place he
+  describes the affairs of the <i>Christians</i> unto the time of the end,
+  in these words: <a name="NtpDanIX_12"
+  href="#NtDanIX_12"><sup>[12]</sup></a> <i>And they that understand among
+  the people shall instruct many, yet they shall fall by the sword and by
+  flame, by captivity and by spoil many days. Now when they shall fall they
+  shall be holpen with a little help</i>, <i>viz</i>. in the reign of
+  <i>Constantine</i> the great; <i>but many shall cleave to them with
+  dissimulation. And some of them of understanding there shall fall to try
+  them, and to purge</i> them from the dissemblers; <i>and to make them
+  white even to the time of the end</i>. And a little after, the time of
+  the end is said to be <i>a time, times, and half a time</i>: which is the
+  duration of the reign of the last horn of <i>Daniel</i>'s fourth Beast,
+  and of the <i>Woman</i> and her <i>Beast</i> in the <i>Apocalyps</i>.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. IX.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_1" href="#NtpDanIX_1">[1]</a> Chap. viii. 3.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_2" href="#NtpDanIX_2">[2]</a> Ver. 22.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_3" href="#NtpDanIX_3">[3]</a> Ver. 23.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_4" href="#NtpDanIX_4">[4]</a> Chap. viii. 9.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_5" href="#NtpDanIX_5">[5]</a> Chap. viii. 9, 10.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_6" href="#NtpDanIX_6">[6]</a> Ver. 11.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_7" href="#NtpDanIX_7">[7]</a> Ver. 12.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_8" href="#NtpDanIX_8">[8]</a> Ver. 13, 14.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_9" href="#NtpDanIX_9">[9]</a> Dan. xi. 1, 2.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_10" href="#NtpDanIX_10">[10]</a> Ver. 3.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_11" href="#NtpDanIX_11">[11]</a> Dan xi. 31.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanIX_12" href="#NtpDanIX_12">[12]</a> Chap. xi. 33,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanX">CHAP. X</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the Prophecy of the Seventy Weeks.</i></p>
+
+  <p>The Vision of the Image composed of four Metals was given first to
+  <i>Nebuchadnezzar</i>, and then to <i>Daniel</i> in a dream: and
+  <i>Daniel</i> began then to be celebrated for revealing of secrets,
+  <i>Ezek.</i> xxviii. 3. The Vision of the four Beasts, and of <i>the Son
+  of man</i> coming in the clouds of heaven, was also given to
+  <i>Daniel</i> in a dream. That of the Ram and the He-Goat appeared to him
+  in the day time, when he was by the bank of the river <i>Ulay</i>; and
+  was explained to him by the prophetic Angel <i>Gabriel</i>. It concerns
+  the <i>Prince of the host</i>, and the <i>Prince of Princes</i>: and now
+  in the first year of <i>Darius</i> the <i>Mede</i> over <i>Babylon</i>,
+  the same prophetic Angel appears to <i>Daniel</i> again, and explains to
+  him what is meant by the <i>Son of man</i>, by the <i>Prince of the
+  host</i>, and the <i>Prince of Princes</i>. The Prophecy of the <i>Son of
+  man</i> coming in the clouds of heaven relates to the second coming of
+  <i>Christ</i>; that of the <i>Prince of the host</i> relates to his first
+  coming: and this Prophecy of the <i>Messiah</i>, in explaining them,
+  relates to both comings, and assigns the times thereof.</p>
+
+  <p>This Prophecy, like all the rest of <i>Daniel</i>'s, consists of two
+  parts, an introductory Prophecy and an explanation thereof; the whole I
+  thus translate and interpret.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtpDanX_1" href="#NtDanX_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> '<i>Seventy
+  weeks are <a name="NtpDanX_2" href="#NtDanX_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> cut out
+  upon thy people, and upon thy holy city, to finish transgression, and <a
+  name="NtpDanX_3" href="#NtDanX_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a> to make an end of
+  sins, to expiate iniquity, and to bring in everlasting righteousness, to
+  consummate the Vision and <a name="NtpDanX_4"
+  href="#NtDanX_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> the Prophet, and to anoint the most
+  Holy</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>'<i>Know also and understand, that from the going forth of the
+  commandment to cause to return and to build </i>Jerusalem<i>, unto <a
+  name="NtpDanX_5" href="#NtDanX_5"><sup>[5]</sup></a> the Anointed the
+  Prince, shall be seven weeks</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>'<i>Yet threescore and two weeks shall <a name="NtpDanX_6"
+  href="#NtDanX_6"><sup>[6]</sup></a> it return, and the street be built
+  and the wall; but in troublesome times: and after the threescore and two
+  weeks, the Anointed shall be cut off, and <a
+  href="#NtDanX_6"><sup>[6]</sup></a> it shall not be his; but the people
+  of a Prince to come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary: and the end
+  thereof shall be with a flood, and unto the end of the war, desolations
+  are determined</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>'<i>Yet shall he confirm the covenant with many for one week: and in
+  half a week he shall cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease: and upon
+  a wing of abominations he shall make it desolate, even until the
+  consummation, and that which is determined be poured upon the
+  desolate</i>.'</p>
+
+  <p><i>Seventy weeks are cut out upon thy people, and upon thy holy city,
+  to finish transgression</i>, &amp;c. Here, by putting a week for seven
+  years, are reckoned 490 years from the time that the dispersed
+  <i>Jews</i> should be re-incorporated into <a name="NtpDanX_7"
+  href="#NtDanX_7"><sup>[7]</sup></a> a people and a holy city, until the
+  death and resurrection of <i>Christ</i>; whereby <i>transgression should
+  be finished, and sins ended, iniquity be expiated, and everlasting
+  righteousness brought in, and this Vision be accomplished, and the
+  Prophet consummated</i>, that Prophet whom the <i>Jews</i> expected; and
+  whereby <i>the most Holy</i> should be <i>anointed</i>, he who is
+  therefore in the next words called the <i>Anointed</i>, that is, the
+  <i>Messiah</i>, or the <i>Christ</i>. For by joining the accomplishment
+  of the vision with the expiation of sins, the 490 years are ended with
+  the death of <i>Christ</i>. Now the dispersed <i>Jews</i> became a people
+  and city when they first returned into a polity or body politick; and
+  this was in the seventh year of <i>Artaxerxes Longimanus</i>, when
+  <i>Ezra</i> returned with a body of <i>Jews</i> from captivity, and
+  revived the <i>Jewish</i> worship; and by the King's commission created
+  Magistrates in all the land, to judge and govern the people according to
+  the laws of God and the King, <i>Ezra</i> vii. 25. There were but two
+  returns from captivity, <i>Zerubbabel</i>'s and <i>Ezra</i>'s; in
+  <i>Zerubbabel</i>'s they had only commission to build the Temple, in
+  <i>Ezra</i>'s they first became a polity or city by a government of their
+  own. Now the years of this <i>Artaxerxes</i> began about two or three
+  months after the summer solstice, and his seventh year fell in with the
+  third year of the eightieth <i>Olympiad</i>; and the latter part thereof,
+  wherein <i>Ezra</i> went up to <i>Jerusalem</i>, was in the year of the
+  <i>Julian Period</i> 4257. Count the time from thence to the death of
+  <i>Christ</i>, and you will find it just 490 years. If you count in
+  <i>Judaic</i> years commencing in autumn, and date the reckoning from the
+  first autumn after <i>Ezra</i>'s coming to <i>Jerusalem</i>, when he put
+  the King's decree in execution; the death of <i>Christ</i> will fall on
+  the year of the <i>Julian Period</i> 4747, <i>Anno Domini</i> 34; and the
+  weeks will be <i>Judaic</i> weeks, ending with sabbatical years; and this
+  I take to be the truth: but if you had rather place the death of
+  <i>Christ</i> in the year before, as is commonly done, you may take the
+  year of <i>Ezra</i>'s journey into the reckoning.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Know also and understand, that from the going forth of the
+  commandment to cause to return and to build </i>Jerusalem<i>, unto the
+  Anointed the Prince, shall be seven weeks</i>. The former part of the
+  Prophecy related to the first coming of <i>Christ</i>, being dated to his
+  coming as a Prophet; this being dated to his coming to be Prince or King,
+  seems to relate to his second coming. There, the Prophet was consummate,
+  and the most holy anointed: here, he that was anointed comes to be Prince
+  and to reign. For <i>Daniel</i>'s Prophecies reach to the end of the
+  world; and there is scarce a Prophecy in the Old Testament concerning
+  <i>Christ</i>, which doth not in something or other relate to his second
+  coming. If divers of the antients, as <a name="NtpDanX_8"
+  href="#NtDanX_8"><sup>[8]</sup></a> <i>Iren�us</i>, <a name="NtpDanX_9"
+  href="#NtDanX_9"><sup>[9]</sup></a> <i>Julius Africanus</i>,
+  <i>Hippolytus</i> the martyr, and <i>Apollinaris</i> Bishop of
+  <i>Laodicea</i>, applied the half week to the times of <i>Antichrist</i>;
+  why may not we, by the same liberty of interpretation, apply the seven
+  weeks to the time when <i>Antichrist</i> shall be destroyed by the
+  brightness of <i>Christ</i>'s coming?</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Israelites</i> in the days of the antient Prophets, when the
+  ten Tribes were led into captivity, expected a double return; and that at
+  the first the <i>Jews</i> should build a new Temple inferior to
+  <i>Solomon</i>'s, until the time of that age should be fulfilled; and
+  afterwards they should return from all places of their captivity, and
+  build <i>Jerusalem</i> and the Temple gloriously, <i>Tobit</i> xiv. 4, 5,
+  6: and to express the glory and excellence of this city, it is
+  figuratively said to be built of precious stones, <i>Tobit</i> xiii. 16,
+  17, 18. <i>Isa.</i> liv. 11, 12. <i>Rev.</i> xi. and called the <i>New
+  Jerusalem</i>, the <i>Heavenly Jerusalem</i>, the <i>Holy City</i>, the
+  <i>Lamb's Wife</i>, the <i>City of the Great King</i>, the <i>City into
+  which the Kings of the earth do bring their glory and honour</i>.
+  <i>Now</i> while such a return from captivity was the expectation of
+  <i>Israel</i>, even before the times of <i>Daniel</i>, I know not why
+  <i>Daniel</i> should omit it in his Prophecy. This part of the Prophecy
+  being therefore not yet fulfilled, I shall not attempt a particular
+  interpretation of it, but content myself with observing, that as the
+  <i>seventy</i> and the <i>sixty two weeks</i> were <i>Jewish</i> weeks,
+  ending with sabbatical years; so the <i>seven weeks</i> are the compass
+  of a <i>Jubilee</i>, and begin and end with actions proper for a
+  <i>Jubilee</i>, and of the highest nature for which a <i>Jubilee</i> can
+  be kept: and that since <i>the commandment to return and to build
+  </i>Jerusalem, precedes the <i>Messiah the Prince</i> 49 years; it may
+  perhaps come forth not from the <i>Jews</i> themselves, but from some
+  other kingdom friendly to them, and precede their return from captivity,
+  and give occasion to it; and lastly, that this rebuilding of
+  <i>Jerusalem</i> and the waste places of <i>Judah</i> is predicted in
+  <i>Micah</i> vii. 11. <i>Amos</i> ix. 11, 14. <i>Ezek.</i> xxxvi. 33, 35,
+  36, 38. <i>Isa.</i> liv. 3, 11, 12. lv. 12. lxi. 4. lxv. 18, 21,22. and
+  <i>Tobit</i> xiv. 5. and that the return from captivity and coming of the
+  <i>Messiah</i> and his kingdom are described in <i>Daniel</i> vii.
+  <i>Rev.</i> xix. <i>Acts</i> i. <i>Mat.</i> xxiv. <i>Joel</i> iii.
+  <i>Ezek.</i> xxxvi. xxxvii. <i>Isa.</i> lx. lxii. lxiii. lxv. and lxvi.
+  and many other places of scripture. The manner I know not. Let time be
+  the Interpreter.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Yet threescore and two weeks shall it return, and the street be
+  built and the wall, but in troublesome times: and after the threescore
+  and two weeks the </i>Messiah<i> shall be cut off, and it shall not be
+  his; but the people of a Prince to come shall destroy the city and the
+  sanctuary</i>, &amp;c. Having foretold both comings of <i>Christ</i>, and
+  dated the last from their returning and building <i>Jerusalem</i>; to
+  prevent the applying that to the building <i>Jerusalem</i> by
+  <i>Nehemiah</i>, he distinguishes this from that, by saying that from
+  this period to the <i>Anointed</i> shall be, not seven weeks, but
+  threescore and two weeks, and this not in prosperous but in troublesome
+  times; and at the end of these Weeks the <i>Messiah</i> shall not be the
+  Prince of the <i>Jews</i>, but be cut off; and <i>Jerusalem</i> not be
+  his, but the city and sanctuary be destroyed. Now <i>Nehemiah</i> came to
+  <i>Jerusalem</i> in the 20th year of this same <i>Artaxerxes</i>, while
+  <i>Ezra</i> still continued there, <i>Nehem.</i> xii. 36, and found the
+  city lying waste, and the houses and wall unbuilt, <i>Nehem.</i> ii. 17.
+  vii. 4, and finished the wall the 25th day of the month <i>Elul</i>,
+  <i>Nehem.</i> vi. 15, in the 28th year of the King, that is, in
+  <i>September</i> in the year of the <i>Julian Period</i> 4278. Count now
+  from this year threescore and two weeks of years, that is 434 years, and
+  the reckoning will end in <i>September</i> in the year of the <i>Julian
+  Period</i> 4712 which is the year in which <i>Christ</i> was born,
+  according to <i>Clemens Alexandrinus</i>, <i>Iren�us</i>,
+  <i>Eusebius</i>, <i>Epiphanius</i>, <i>Jerome</i>, <i>Orosius</i>,
+  <i>Cassiodorus</i>, and other antients; and this was the general opinion,
+  till <i>Dionysius Exiguus</i> invented the vulgar account, in which
+  <i>Christ</i>'s birth is placed two years later. If with some you reckon
+  that <i>Christ</i> was born three or four years before the vulgar
+  account, yet his birth will fall in the latter part of the last week,
+  which is enough. How after these weeks <i>Christ</i> was cut off and the
+  city and sanctuary destroyed by the <i>Romans</i>, is well known.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Yet shall he confirm the covenant with many for one week.</i> He
+  kept it, notwithstanding his death, till the rejection of the
+  <i>Jews</i>, and calling of <i>Cornelius</i> and the <i>Gentiles</i> in
+  the seventh year after his passion.</p>
+
+  <p><i>And in half a week he shall cause the sacrifice and oblation to
+  cease</i>; that is, by the war of the <i>Romans</i> upon the <i>Jews</i>:
+  which war, after some commotions, began in the 13th year of <i>Nero</i>,
+  A.D. 67, in the spring, when <i>Vespasian</i> with an army invaded them;
+  and ended in the second year of <i>Vespasian</i>, A.D. 70, in autumn,
+  <i>Sept.</i> 7, when <i>Titus</i> took the city, having burnt the Temple
+  27 days before: so that it lasted three years and an half.</p>
+
+  <p><i>And upon a wing of abominations he shall cause desolation, even
+  until the consummation, and that which is determined be poured upon the
+  desolate.</i> The Prophets, in representing kingdoms by Beasts and Birds,
+  put their wings stretcht out over any country for their armies sent out
+  to invade and rule over that country. Hence a wing of abominations is an
+  army of false Gods: for an abomination is often put in scripture for a
+  false God; as where <i>Chemosh</i> is called <a name="NtpDanX_10"
+  href="#NtDanX_10"><sup>[10]</sup></a> the abomination of <i>Moab</i>, and
+  <i>Molech</i> the abomination of <i>Ammon</i>. The meaning therefore is,
+  that the people of a Prince to come shall destroy the sanctuary, and
+  abolish the daily worship of the true God, and overspread the land with
+  an army of false gods; and by setting up their dominion and worship,
+  cause desolation to the <i>Jews</i>, until the times of the
+  <i>Gentiles</i> be fulfilled. For <i>Christ</i> tells us, that the
+  abomination of desolation spoken of by <i>Daniel</i> was to be set up in
+  the times of the <i>Roman Empire</i>, <i>Matth.</i> xxiv. 15.</p>
+
+  <p>Thus have we in this short Prophecy, a prediction of all the main
+  periods relating to the coming of the <i>Messiah</i>; the time of his
+  birth, that of his death, that of the rejection of the <i>Jews</i>, the
+  duration of the <i>Jewish</i> war whereby he caused the city and
+  sanctuary to be destroyed, and the time of his second coming: and so the
+  interpretation here given is more full and complete and adequate to the
+  design, than if we should restrain it to his first coming only, as
+  Interpreters usually do. We avoid also the doing violence to the language
+  of <i>Daniel</i>, by taking the <i>seven weeks</i> and <i>sixty two
+  weeks</i> for one number. Had that been <i>Daniel</i>'s meaning, he would
+  have said <i>sixty and nine weeks</i>, and not <i>seven weeks</i> and
+  <i>sixty two weeks</i>, a way of numbring used by no nation. In our way
+  the years are <i>Jewish Luni-solar years</i>, <a name="NtpDanX_11"
+  href="#NtDanX_11"><sup>[11]</sup></a> as they ought to be; and the
+  <i>seventy weeks of years</i> are <i>Jewish weeks</i> ending with
+  <i>sabbatical years</i>, which is very remarkable. For they end either
+  with the year of the birth of <i>Christ</i>, two years before the vulgar
+  account, or with the year of his death, or with the seventh year after
+  it: all which are <i>sabbatical years</i>. Others either count by Lunar
+  years, or by weeks not <i>Judaic</i>: and, which is worst, they ground
+  their interpretations on erroneous Chronology, excepting the opinion of
+  <i>Funccius</i> about the <i>seventy weeks</i>, which is the same with
+  ours. For they place <i>Ezra</i> and <i>Nehemiah</i> in the reign of
+  <i>Artaxerxes Mnemon</i>, and the building of the Temple in the reign of
+  <i>Darius Nothus</i>, and date the weeks of <i>Daniel</i> from those two
+  reigns.</p>
+
+  <p>The grounds of the Chronology here followed, I will now set down as
+  briefly as I can.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Peloponnesian</i> war began in spring <i>An.</i> 1
+  <i>Olymp.</i> 87, as <i>Diodorus</i>, <i>Eusebius</i>, and all other
+  authors agree. It began two months before <i>Pythodorus</i> ceased to be
+  <i>Archon</i>, <i>Thucyd.</i> <i>l.</i> 2. that is, in <i>April</i>, two
+  months before the end of the <i>Olympic</i> year. Now the years of this
+  war are most certainly determined by the 50 years distance of its first
+  year from the transit of <i>Xerxes</i> inclusively, <i>Thucyd.</i>
+  <i>l.</i> 2. or 48 years exclusively, <i>Eratosth. apud Clem. Alex.</i>
+  by the 69 years distance of its end, or 27th year, from the beginning of
+  <i>Alexander</i>'s reign in <i>Greece</i>; by the acting of the
+  <i>Olympic</i> games in its 4th and 12th years, <i>Thucyd.</i> <i>l.</i>
+  5; and by three eclipses of the sun, and one of the moon, mentioned by
+  <i>Thucydides</i> and <i>Xenophon</i>. Now <i>Thucydides</i>, an
+  unquestionable witness, tells us, that the news of the death of
+  <i>Artaxerxes Longimanus</i> was brought to <i>Ephesus</i>, and from
+  thence by some <i>Athenians</i> to <i>Athens</i>, in the 7th year of this
+  <i>Peloponnesian</i> war, when the winter half year was running; and
+  therefore he died <i>An.</i> 4 <i>Olymp.</i> 88, in the end of <i>An.
+  J.P.</i> 4289, suppose a month or two before midwinter; for so long the
+  news would be in coming. Now <i>Artaxerxes Longimanus</i> reigned 40
+  years, by the consent of <i>Diodorus</i>, <i>Eusebius</i>, <i>Jerome</i>,
+  <i>Sulpitius</i>; or 41, according to <i>Ptol. in can. Clem. Alexand.</i>
+  <i>l.</i> 1. <i>Strom. Chron. Alexandr</i>. <i>Abulpharagius</i>,
+  <i>Nicephorus</i>, including therein the reign of his successors
+  <i>Xerxes</i> and <i>Sogdian</i>, as <i>Abulpharagius</i> informs us.
+  After <i>Artaxerxes</i> reigned his son <i>Xerxes</i> two months, and
+  <i>Sogdian</i> seven months; but their reign is not reckoned apart in
+  summing up the years of the Kings, but is included in the 40 or 41 years
+  reign of <i>Artaxerxes</i>: omit these nine months, and the precise reign
+  of <i>Artaxerxes</i> will be thirty nine years and three months. And
+  therefore since his reign ended in the beginning of winter <i>An.
+  J.P.</i> 4289, it began between midsummer and autumn, <i>An. J.P.</i>
+  4250.</p>
+
+  <p>The same thing I gather also thus. <i>Cambyses</i> began his reign in
+  spring <i>An. J.P.</i> 4185, and reigned eight years, including the five
+  months of <i>Smerdes</i>; and then <i>Darius Hystaspis</i> began in
+  spring <i>An. J.P.</i> 4193, and reigned thirty six years, by the
+  unanimous consent of all Chronologers. The reigns of these two Kings are
+  determined by three eclipses of the moon observed at <i>Babylon</i>, and
+  recorded by <i>Ptolemy</i>; so that it cannot be disputed. One was in the
+  seventh year of <i>Cambyses</i>, <i>An. J.P.</i> 4191, <i>Jul.</i> 16, at
+  11 at night; another in the 20th year of <i>Darius</i>, <i>An. J.P.</i>
+  4212, <i>Nov.</i> 19, at 11<sup>h.</sup> 45' at night; a third in the
+  31st year of <i>Darius</i>, <i>An. J.P.</i> 4223, <i>Apr.</i> 25, at
+  11<sup>h.</sup> 30 at night. By these eclipses, and the Prophecies of
+  <i>Haggai</i> and <i>Zechary</i> compared together, it is manifest that
+  his years began after the 24th day of the 11th <i>Jewish</i> month, and
+  before the 25th day of <i>April</i>, and by consequence about
+  <i>March</i>. <i>Xerxes</i> therefore began in spring <i>An. J.P.</i>
+  4229: for <i>Darius</i> died in the fifth year after the battle at
+  <i>Marathon</i>, as <i>Herodotus</i>, <i>lib.</i> 7, and <i>Plutarch</i>
+  mention; and that battle was in <i>October</i> <i>An. J.P.</i> 4224, ten
+  years before the battle at <i>Salamis</i>. <i>Xerxes</i> therefore began
+  within less than a year after <i>October</i> <i>An. J.P.</i> 4228,
+  suppose in the spring following: for he spent his first five years, and
+  something more, in preparations for his expedition against the
+  <i>Greeks</i>; and this expedition was in the time of the <i>Olympic</i>
+  games, <i>An.</i> 1 <i>Olymp.</i> 75, <i>Calliade Athenis Archonte</i>,
+  28 years after the <i>Regifuge</i>, and Consulship of the first Consul
+  <i>Junius Brutus</i>, <i>Anno Urbis condit�</i> 273, <i>Fabio &amp; Furio
+  Coss.</i> The passage of <i>Xerxes</i>'s army over the <i>Hellespont</i>
+  began in the end of the fourth year of the 74th <i>Olympiad</i>, that is,
+  in <i>June</i> <i>An. J.P.</i> 4234, and took up one month: and in
+  autumn, three months after, on the full moon, the 16th day of the month
+  <i>Munychion</i>, was the battle at <i>Salamis</i>, and a little after
+  that an eclipse of the sun, which by the calculation fell on
+  <i>Octob.</i> 2. His sixth year therefore began a little before
+  <i>June</i>, suppose in spring <i>An. J.P.</i> 4234, and his first year
+  consequently in spring <i>An. J.P.</i> 4229, as above. Now he reigned
+  almost twenty one years, by the consent of all writers. Add the 7 months
+  of <i>Artabanus</i>, and the sum will be 21 years and about four or five
+  months, which end between midsummer and autumn <i>An. J.P.</i> 4250. At
+  this time therefore began the reign of his successor <i>Artaxerxes</i>,
+  as was to be proved.</p>
+
+  <p>The same thing is also confirmed by <i>Julius Africanus</i>, who
+  informs us out of former writers, that the 20th year of this
+  <i>Artaxerxes</i> was the 115th year from the beginning of the reign of
+  <i>Cyrus</i> in <i>Persia,</i> and fell in with <i>An.</i> 4
+  <i>Olymp.</i> 83. It began therefore with the <i>Olympic</i> year, soon
+  after the summer Solstice, <i>An. J.P.</i> 4269. Subduct nineteen years,
+  and his first year will begin at the same time of the year <i>An.
+  J.P.</i> 4250, as above.</p>
+
+  <p>His 7th year therefore began after midsummer <i>An. J.P.</i> 4256; and
+  the Journey of <i>Ezra</i> to <i>Jerusalem</i> in the spring following
+  fell on the beginning of <i>An. J.P.</i> 4257, as above.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. X.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_1" href="#NtpDanX_1">[1]</a> Chap. ix. 24, 25, 26,
+  27.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_2" href="#NtpDanX_2">[2]</a> <i>Cut upon</i>. A phrase
+  in <i>Hebrew</i>, taken from the practise of numbring by cutting
+  notches.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_3" href="#NtpDanX_3">[3]</a> Heb. <i>to seal</i>, i.e.
+  to finish or consummate: a metaphor taken from sealing what is finished.
+  So the <i>Jews</i> compute, <i>ad obsignatum Misna, ad obsignatum
+  Talmud</i>, that is, <i>ad absolutum</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_4" href="#NtpDanX_4">[4]</a> Heb. <i>the Prophet</i>,
+  not the Prophecy.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_5" href="#NtpDanX_5">[5]</a> Heb. <i>the Messiah</i>,
+  that is, in <i>Greek</i>, <i>the Christ</i>; in <i>English</i>, <i>the
+  Anointed</i>. I use the <i>English</i> word, that the relation of this
+  clause to the former may appear.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_6" href="#NtpDanX_6">[6]</a> <i>Jerusalem</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_7" href="#NtpDanX_7">[7]</a> See <i>Isa.</i> xxiii.
+  13.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_8" href="#NtpDanX_8">[8]</a> Iren. l. 5. H�r. c.
+  25.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_9" href="#NtpDanX_9">[9]</a> Apud Hieron. in h. l.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_10" href="#NtpDanX_10">[10]</a> 1 Kings xi. 7.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanX_11" href="#NtpDanX_11">[11]</a> The antient solar
+  years of the eastern nations consisted of 12 months, and every month of
+  30 days: and hence came the division of a circle into 360 degrees. This
+  year seems to be used by <i>Moses</i> in his history of the Flood, and by
+  <i>John</i> in the <i>Apocalypse</i>, where a time, times and half a
+  time, 42 months and 1260 days, are put equipollent. But in reckoning by
+  many of these years together, an account is to be kept of the odd days
+  which were added to the end of these years. For the <i>Egyptians</i>
+  added five days to the end of this year; and so did the <i>Chaldeans</i>
+  long before the times of <i>Daniel</i>, as appears by the <i>�ra</i>, of
+  <i>Nabonassar</i>: and the <i>Persian</i> Magi used the same year of 365
+  days, till the Empire of the <i>Arabians</i>. The antient <i>Greeks</i>
+  also used the same solar year of 12 equal months, or 360 days; but every
+  other year added an intercalary month, consisting of 10 and 11 days
+  alternately.</p>
+
+  <p>The year of the <i>Jews</i>, even from their coming out of
+  <i>Egypt</i>, was Luni-solar. It was solar, for the harvest always
+  followed the Passover, and the fruits of the land were always gathered
+  before the feast of Tabernacles, <i>Levit.</i> xxiii. But the months were
+  lunar, for the people were commanded by <i>Moses</i> in the beginning of
+  every month to blow with trumpets, and offer burnt offerings with their
+  drink offerings, <i>Num.</i> x. 10. xxviii. 11, 14. and this solemnity
+  was kept on the new moons, <i>Psal.</i> lxxxi. 3,4,5. 1 <i>Chron.</i>
+  xxiii. 31. These months were called by <i>Moses</i> the first, second,
+  third, fourth month, <i>&amp;c.</i> and the first month was also called
+  <i>Abib</i>, the second <i>Zif</i>, the seventh <i>Ethanim</i>, the
+  eighth <i>Bull</i>, <i>Exod.</i> xiii. 4. 1 <i>Kings</i> vi. 37, 38.
+  viii. 2. But in the <i>Babylonian</i> captivity the <i>Jews</i> used the
+  names of the <i>Chaldean</i> months, and by those names understood the
+  months of their own year; so that the <i>Jewish</i> months then lost
+  their old names, and are now called by those of the <i>Chaldeans</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Jews</i> began their civil year from the autumnal Equinox, and
+  their sacred year from the vernal: and the first day of the first month
+  was on the visible new moon, which was nearest the Equinox.</p>
+
+  <p>Whether <i>Daniel</i> used the <i>Chaldaick</i> or <i>Jewish</i> year,
+  is not very material; the difference being but six hours in a year, and 4
+  months in 480 years. But I take his months to be <i>Jewish</i>: first,
+  because <i>Daniel</i> was a <i>Jew</i>, and the <i>Jews</i> even by the
+  names of the <i>Chaldean</i> months understood the months of their own
+  year: secondly, because this Prophecy is grounded on <i>Jeremiah</i>'s
+  concerning the 70 years captivity, and therefore must be understood of
+  the same sort of years with the seventy; and those are <i>Jewish</i>,
+  since that Prophecy was given in <i>Judea</i> before the captivity: and
+  lastly, because <i>Daniel</i> reckons by weeks of years, which is a way
+  of reckoning peculiar to the <i>Jewish</i> years. For as their days ran
+  by sevens, and the last day of every seven was a sabbath; so their years
+  ran by sevens, and the last year of every seven was a sabbatical year,
+  and seven such weeks of years made a <i>Jubilee</i>.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanXI">CHAP. XI</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the Times of the Birth and Passion
+of </i>Christ.</p>
+
+  <p>The times of the Birth and Passion of <i>Christ</i>, with such like
+  niceties, being not material to religion, were little regarded by the
+  <i>Christians</i> of the first age. They who began first to celebrate
+  them, placed them in the cardinal periods of the year; as the
+  annunciation of the Virgin <i>Mary</i>, on the 25th of <i>March</i>,
+  which when <i>Julius C�sar</i> corrected the Calendar was the vernal
+  Equinox; the feast of <i>John</i> Baptist on the 24th of <i>June</i>,
+  which was the summer Solstice; the feast of St. <i>Michael</i> on
+  <i>Sept.</i> 29, which was the autumnal Equinox; and the birth of
+  <i>Christ</i> on the winter Solstice, <i>Decemb.</i> 25, with the feasts
+  of St. <i>Stephen</i>, St. <i>John</i> and the <i>Innocents</i>, as near
+  it as they could place them. And because the Solstice in time removed
+  from the 25th of <i>December</i> to the 24th, the 23d, the 22d, and so on
+  backwards, hence some in the following centuries placed the birth of
+  <i>Christ</i> on <i>Decemb.</i> 23, and at length on <i>Decemb.</i> 20:
+  and for the same reason they seem to have set the feast of St.
+  <i>Thomas</i> on <i>Decemb.</i> 21, and that of St. <i>Matthew</i> on
+  <i>Sept.</i> 21. So also at the entrance of the Sun into all the signs in
+  the <i>Julian</i> Calendar, they placed the days of other Saints; as the
+  conversion of <i>Paul</i> on <i>Jan.</i> 25, when the Sun entred <img
+  src="images/aquarius.png" alt="Aquarius" />; St. <i>Matthias</i> on
+  <i>Feb.</i> 25, when he entred <img src="images/pisces.png" alt="Pisces"
+  />; St. <i>Mark</i> on <i>Apr.</i> 25, when he entred <img
+  src="images/taurus.png" alt="Taurus" />; <i>Corpus Christi</i> on
+  <i>May</i> 26, when he entred <img src="images/gemini.png" alt="Gemini"
+  />; St. <i>James</i> on <i>July</i> 25, when he entred <img
+  src="images/cancer.png" alt="Cancer" />; St. <i>Bartholomew</i> on
+  <i>Aug.</i> 24, when he entred <img src="images/virgo.png" alt="Virgo"
+  />; <i>Simon</i> and <i>Jude</i> on <i>Octob.</i> 28, when he entred <img
+  src="images/scorpio.png" alt="Scorpio" />: and if there were any other
+  remarkable days in the <i>Julian</i> Calendar, they placed the Saints
+  upon them, as St. <i>Barnabas</i> on <i>June</i> 11, where <i>Ovid</i>
+  seems to place the feast of <i>Vesta</i> and <i>Fortuna</i>, and the
+  goddess <i>Matuta</i>; and St. <i>Philip</i> and <i>James</i> on the
+  first of <i>May</i>, a day dedicated both to the <i>Bona Dea</i>, or
+  <i>Magna Mater</i>, and to the goddess <i>Flora</i>, and still celebrated
+  with her rites. All which shews that these days were fixed in the first
+  <i>Christian</i> Calendars by Mathematicians at pleasure, without any
+  ground in tradition; and that the <i>Christians</i> afterwards took up
+  with what they found in the Calendars.</p>
+
+  <p>Neither was there any certain tradition about the years of
+  <i>Christ</i>. For the <i>Christians</i> who first began to enquire into
+  these things, as <i>Clemens Alexandrinus</i>, <i>Origen</i>,
+  <i>Tertullian</i>, <i>Julius Africanus</i>, <i>Lactantius</i>,
+  <i>Jerome</i>, St. <i>Austin</i>, <i>Sulpicius Severus</i>,
+  <i>Prosper</i>, and as many as place the death of <i>Christ</i> in the
+  15th or 16th year of <i>Tiberius</i>, make <i>Christ</i> to have preached
+  but one year, or at most but two. At length <i>Eusebius</i> discovered
+  four successive Passovers in the Gospel of <i>John</i>, and thereupon set
+  on foot an opinion that he preacht three years and an half; and so died
+  in the 19th year of <i>Tiberius</i>. Others afterwards, finding the
+  opinion that he died in the Equinox <i>Mar.</i> 25, more consonant to the
+  times of the <i>Jewish</i> Passover, in the 17th and 20th years, have
+  placed his death in one of those two years. Neither is there any greater
+  certainty in the opinions about the time of his birth. The first
+  <i>Christians</i> placed his baptism near the beginning of the 15th year
+  of <i>Tiberius</i>; and thence reckoning thirty years backwards, placed
+  his birth in the 43d <i>Julian</i> year, the 42d of <i>Augustus</i> and
+  28th of the <i>Actiac</i> victory. This was the opinion which obtained in
+  the first ages, till <i>Dionysius Exiguus</i>, placing the baptism of
+  <i>Christ</i> in the 16th year of <i>Tiberius</i>, and misinterpreting
+  the text of <i>Luke</i>, iii. 23. as if <i>Jesus</i> was only beginning
+  to be 30 years old when he was baptized, invented the vulgar account, in
+  which his birth is placed two years later than before. As therefore
+  relating to these things there is no tradition worth considering; let us
+  lay aside all and examine what prejudices can be gathered from records of
+  good account.</p>
+
+  <p>The fifteenth year of <i>Tiberius</i> began <i>Aug.</i> 28, <i>An.
+  J.P.</i> 4727. So soon as the winter was over, and the weather became
+  warm enough, we may reckon that <i>John</i> began to baptize; and that
+  before next winter his fame went abroad, and all the people came to his
+  baptism, and <i>Jesus</i> among the rest. Whence the first Passover after
+  his baptism mentioned <i>John</i> ii. 13. was in the 16th year of
+  <i>Tiberius</i>. After this feast <i>Jesus</i> came into the land of
+  <i>Judea</i>, and staid there baptizing, whilst <i>John</i> was baptizing
+  in <i>�non</i>, <i>John</i> iii. 22, 23. But when he heard that
+  <i>John</i> was cast into prison, he departed into <i>Galilee</i>,
+  <i>Mat.</i> iii. 12. being afraid, because the Pharisees had heard that
+  he baptized more disciples than <i>John</i>, <i>John</i> iv. 1. and in
+  his journey he passed thro' <i>Samaria</i> four months before the
+  harvest, <i>John</i> iv. 35. that is, about the time of the winter
+  Solstice. For their harvest was between <i>Easter</i> and
+  <i>Whitsunday</i>, and began about a month after the vernal Equinox.
+  <i>Say not ye</i>, saith he, <i>there are yet four months, and then
+  cometh harvest? Behold I say unto you, lift up your eyes, and look on the
+  fields, for they are white already to harvest</i>; meaning, that the
+  people in the fields were ready for the Gospel, as his next words shew<a
+  name="NtpDanXI_1" href="#NtDanXI_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a>. <i>John</i>
+  therefore was imprisoned about <i>November</i>, in the 17th year of
+  <i>Tiberius</i>; and <i>Christ</i> thereupon went from <i>Judea</i> to
+  <i>Cana</i> of <i>Galilee</i> in <i>December</i>, and was received there
+  of the <i>Galileans</i>, who had seen all he did at <i>Jerusalem</i> at
+  the Passover: and when a Nobleman of <i>Capernaum</i> heard he was
+  returned into <i>Galilee</i>, and went to him and desired him to come and
+  cure his son, he went not thither yet, but only said, <i>Go thy way, thy
+  son liveth; and the Nobleman returned and found it so, and believed, he
+  and his house</i>, John iv. This is the beginning of his miracles in
+  <i>Galilee</i>; and thus far <i>John</i> is full and distinct in relating
+  the actions of his first year, omitted by the other Evangelists. The rest
+  of his history is from this time related more fully by the other
+  Evangelists than by <i>John</i>; for what they relate he omits.</p>
+
+  <p>From this time therefore <i>Jesus</i> taught in the Synagogues of
+  <i>Galilee</i> on the sabbath-days, being glorified of all: and coming to
+  his own city <i>Nazareth</i>, and preaching in their Synagogue, they were
+  offended, and thrust him out of the city, and led him to the brow of the
+  hill on which the city was built to cast him headlong; but he passing
+  thro' the midst of them, went his way, and came and dwelt at
+  <i>Capernaum</i>, <i>Luke</i> iv. And by this time we may reckon the
+  second Passover was either past or at hand.</p>
+
+  <p>All this time <i>Matthew</i> passeth over in few words, and here
+  begins to relate the preaching and miracles of <i>Christ</i>. <i>When
+  </i>Jesus, saith he, <i>had heard that </i>John<i> was cast into prison,
+  he departed into </i>Galilee<i>; and leaving </i>Nazareth<i>, he came and
+  dwelt at </i>Capernaum<i>, and from that time began to preach and say,
+  Repent, for the kingdom of heaven is at hand</i>, Matth. iv. 12.
+  Afterwards he called his disciples <i>Peter</i>, <i>Andrew</i>,
+  <i>James</i> and <i>John</i>; and then <i>went about all</i> Galilee,
+  <i>teaching in the Synagogues,&mdash;and healing all manner of
+  sickness:&mdash;and his fame went thro'out all </i>Syria<i>; and they
+  brought unto him all sick people,&mdash;and there followed him great
+  multitudes of people from </i>Galilee<i>, and from </i>Decapolis<i>, and
+  from </i>Jerusalem<i>, and from </i>Judea<i>, and from beyond </i>Jordan,
+  Matth, iv. 18, 25. All this was done before the sermon in the mount: and
+  therefore we may certainly reckon that the second Passover was past
+  before the preaching of that sermon. The multitudes that followed him
+  from <i>Jerusalem</i> and <i>Judea</i>, shew that he had lately been
+  there at the feast. The sermon in the mount was made when great
+  multitudes came to him from all places, and followed him in the open
+  fields; which is an argument of the summer-season: and in this sermon he
+  pointed at the lilies of the field then in the flower before the eyes of
+  his auditors. <i>Consider</i>, saith he, <i>the lilies of the field, how
+  they grow; they toil not, neither do they spin; and yet </i>Solomon<i> in
+  all his glory was not arayed like one of these. Wherefore if God so
+  clothe the grass of the field, which to day is and to morrow is cast into
+  the oven</i>, &amp;c. <i>Matth.</i> vi. 28. So therefore the grass of the
+  field was now in the flower, and by consequence the month of <i>March</i>
+  with the Passover was past.</p>
+
+  <p>Let us see therefore how the rest of the feasts follow in order in
+  <i>Matthew</i>'s Gospel: for he was an eye-witness of what he relates,
+  and so tells all things in due order of time, which <i>Mark</i> and
+  <i>Luke</i> do not.</p>
+
+  <p>Some time after the sermon in the mount, when the time came that he
+  should be received, that is, when the time of a feast came that he should
+  be received by the <i>Jews</i>, he set his face to go to
+  <i>Jerusalem</i>: and as he went with his disciples in the way, when the
+  <i>Samaritans</i> in his passage thro' <i>Samaria</i> had denied him
+  lodgings, and a certain Scribe said unto him, <i>Master, I will follow
+  thee whithersoever thou goest</i>, Jesus <i>said unto him, The foxes have
+  holes, and the birds of the air have nests, but the Son of man hath not
+  where to lay his head</i>, Matth. viii. 19. Luke ix. 51, 57. The Scribe
+  told <i>Christ</i> he would bear him company in his journey, and
+  <i>Christ</i> replied that he wanted a lodging. Now this feast I take to
+  be the feast of Tabernacles, because soon after I find <i>Christ</i> and
+  his Apostles on the sea of <i>Tiberias</i> in a storm so great, that the
+  ship was covered with water and in danger of sinking, till <i>Christ
+  rebuked the winds and the sea</i>, Matth. viii. 23. For this storm shews
+  that winter was now come on.</p>
+
+  <p>After this <i>Christ</i> did many miracles, and <i>went about all the
+  cities and villages of </i>Galilee<i>, teaching in their Synagogues, and
+  preaching the gospel of the kingdom, and healing every sickness, and
+  every disease among the people</i>, Matth. ix. he then sent forth the
+  twelve to do the like, <i>Matth.</i> x. and at length when he had
+  received a message from <i>John</i>, and answered it, he said to the
+  multitudes, <i>From the days of </i>John<i> the Baptist until now the
+  kingdom of heaven suffereth violence</i>; and upbraided the cities,
+  <i>Chorazin</i>, <i>Bethsaida</i>, and <i>Capernaum</i>, wherein most of
+  his mighty works were done, because they repented not, <i>Matth.</i> xi.
+  Which several passages shew, that from the imprisonment of <i>John</i>
+  till now there had been a considerable length of time: the winter was now
+  past, and the next Passover was at hand; for immediately after this,
+  <i>Matthew</i>, in chap. xii. subjoins, that <i>Jesus went on the
+  sabbath-day thro' the corn, and his disciples were an hungred, and began
+  to pluck the ears of corn and to eat,&mdash;rubbing them</i>, saith
+  <i>Luke</i>, <i>in their hands</i>: the corn therefore was not only in
+  the ear, but ripe; and consequently the Passover, in which the
+  first-fruits were always offered before the harvest, was now come or
+  past. <i>Luke</i> calls this sabbath <span lang="el"
+  title="deuteropr�ton"
+  >&#x3B4;&#x3B5;&#x3C5;&#x3C4;&#x3B5;&#x3C1;&#x3BF;&#x3C0;&#x3C1;&#x3C9;&#x3C4;&#x3BF;&#x3BD;</span>,
+  the second prime sabbath, that is, the second of the two great feasts of
+  the Passover. As we call <i>Easter</i> day high <i>Easter</i>, and its
+  <i>octave</i> low <i>Easter</i> or <i>Lowsunday</i>: so <i>Luke</i> calls
+  the feast on the seventh day of the unlevened bread, the second of the
+  two prime sabbaths.</p>
+
+  <p>In one of the sabbaths following he went into a Synagogue, and healed
+  a man with a withered hand, <i>Matth.</i> xii. 9. <i>Luke</i> vi. 6. And
+  when the Pharisees took counsel to destroy him, <i>he withdrew himself
+  from thence, and great multitudes followed him; and he healed them all,
+  and charged them that they should not make him known</i>, Matth. xii. 14.
+  Afterwards being in a ship, and the multitude standing on the shore, he
+  spake to them three parables together, taken from the seeds-men sowing
+  the fields, <i>Matth.</i> xiii. by which we may know that it was now
+  seed-time, and by consequence that the feast of Tabernacles was past.
+  After this he went <i>into his own country, and taught them in their
+  Synagogue</i>, but <i>did not many mighty works there because of their
+  unbelief</i>. Then the twelve having been abroad a year, returned, and
+  told <i>Jesus</i> all that they had done: and at the same time
+  <i>Herod</i> beheaded <i>John</i> in prison, and his disciples came and
+  told <i>Jesus</i>; and when <i>Jesus</i> heard it, he took the twelve and
+  departed thence privately by ship into a desert place belonging to
+  <i>Bethsaida</i>: and the people when they knew it, followed him on foot
+  out of the cities, the winter being now past; and he healed their sick,
+  and in the desert fed them to the number of five thousand men, besides
+  women and children, with only five loaves and two fishes, <i>Matth.</i>
+  xiv. <i>Luke</i> ix. at the doing of which miracle the Passover of the
+  <i>Jews</i> was nigh, <i>John</i> vi. 4. But <i>Jesus</i> went not up to
+  this feast; but <i>after these things walked in </i>Galilee<i>, because
+  the </i>Jews at the Passover before had taken counsel to destroy him, and
+  still <i>sought to kill him</i>, John vii. i. Henceforward therefore he
+  is found first in the coast of <i>Tyre</i> and <i>Sidon</i>, then by the
+  sea of <i>Galilee</i>, afterwards in the coast of <i>C�sarea
+  Philippi</i>; and lastly at <i>Capernaum</i>, <i>Matth.</i> xv. 21, 29.
+  xvi. 13. xvii. 34.</p>
+
+  <p>Afterwards when the feast of Tabernacles was at hand, his brethren
+  upbraided him for walking secretly, and urged him to go up to the feast.
+  But he went not till they were gone, and then went up privately,
+  <i>John</i> vii. 2. and when the <i>Jews</i> sought to stone him, he
+  escaped, <i>John</i> viii. 59. After this he was at the feast of the
+  Dedication in winter, <i>John</i> x. 22. and when they sought again to
+  take him, he fled beyond <i>Jordan</i>, <i>John</i> x. 39, 40.
+  <i>Matth</i>. xix. 1. where he stayed till the death of <i>Lazarus</i>,
+  and then came to <i>Bethany</i> near <i>Jerusalem</i>, and raised him,
+  <i>John</i> xi. 7, 18. whereupon the <i>Jews</i> took counsel from that
+  time to kill him: and <i>therefore</i> he <i>walked no more openly among
+  the </i>Jews<i>, but went thence into a country near to the wilderness,
+  into a city called </i>Ephraim<i>; and there continued with his
+  disciples</i> till the last Passover, in which the <i>Jews</i> put him to
+  death, <i>John</i> xi. 53, 54.</p>
+
+  <p>Thus have we, in the Gospels of <i>Matthew</i> and <i>John</i>
+  compared together, the history of <i>Christ</i>'s actions in continual
+  order during five Passovers. <i>John</i> is more distinct in the
+  beginning and end; <i>Matthew</i> in the middle: what either omits, the
+  other supplies. The first Passover was between the baptism of
+  <i>Christ</i> and the imprisonment of <i>John, John</i> ii. 13. the
+  second within four months after the imprisonment of <i>John</i>, and
+  <i>Christ</i>'s beginning to preach in <i>Galilee</i>, <i>John</i> iv.
+  35. and therefore it was either that feast to which <i>Jesus</i> went up,
+  when the Scribe desired to follow him, <i>Matth.</i> viii. 19.
+  <i>Luke</i> ix. 51, 57. or the feast before it. The third was the next
+  feast after it, when the corn was eared and ripe, <i>Matth</i>, xii. 1.
+  <i>Luke</i> vi. 1. The fourth was that which was nigh at hand when
+  <i>Christ</i> wrought the miracle of the five loaves, <i>Matth</i>. xiv.
+  15. <i>John</i> vi. 4, 5. and the fifth was that in which <i>Christ</i>
+  suffered, <i>Matth.</i> xx. 17. <i>John</i> xii. 1.</p>
+
+  <p>Between the first and second Passover <i>John</i> and <i>Christ</i>
+  baptized together, till the imprisonment of <i>John</i>, which was four
+  months before the second. Then <i>Christ</i> began to preach, and call
+  his disciples; and after he had instructed them a year, lent them to
+  preach in the cities of the <i>Jews</i>: at the same time <i>John</i>
+  hearing of the fame of <i>Christ</i>, sent to him to know who he was. At
+  the third, the chief Priests began to consult about the death of
+  <i>Christ</i>. A little before the fourth, the twelve after they had
+  preached a year in all the cities, returned to <i>Christ</i>; and at the
+  same time <i>Herod</i> beheaded <i>John</i> in prison, after he had been
+  in prison two years and a quarter: and thereupon <i>Christ</i> fled into
+  the desart for fear of <i>Herod</i>. The fourth <i>Christ</i> went not up
+  to <i>Jerusalem</i> for fear of the <i>Jews</i>, who at the Passover
+  before had consulted his death, and because his time was not yet come.
+  Thenceforward therefore till the feast of Tabernacles he walked in
+  <i>Galilee</i>, and that secretly for fear of <i>Herod</i>: and after the
+  feast of Tabernacles he returned no more into <i>Galilee</i>, but
+  sometimes was at <i>Jerusalem</i>, and sometimes retired beyond
+  <i>Jordan</i>, or to the city <i>Ephraim</i> by the wilderness, till the
+  Passover in which he was betrayed, apprehended, and crucified.</p>
+
+  <p><i>John</i> therefore baptized two summers, and <i>Christ</i> preached
+  three. The first summer <i>John</i> preached to make himself known, in
+  order to give testimony to <i>Christ</i>. Then, after <i>Christ</i> came
+  to his baptism and was made known to him, he baptized another summer, to
+  make <i>Christ</i> known by his testimony; and <i>Christ</i> also
+  baptized the same summer, to make himself the more known: and by reason
+  of <i>John</i>'s testimony there came more to <i>Christ</i>'s baptism
+  than to <i>John</i>'s. The winter following <i>John</i> was imprisoned;
+  and now his course being at an end, <i>Christ</i> entered upon his proper
+  office of preaching in the cities. In the beginning of his preaching he
+  completed the number of the twelve Apostles, and instructed them all the
+  first year in order to send them abroad. Before the end of this year, his
+  fame by his preaching and miracles was so far spread abroad, that the
+  <i>Jews</i> at the Passover following consulted how to kill him. In the
+  second year of his preaching, it being no longer safe for him to converse
+  openly in <i>Judea</i>, he sent the twelve to preach in all their cities:
+  and in the end of the year they returned to him, and told him all they
+  had done. All the last year the twelve continued with him to be
+  instructed more perfectly, in order to their preaching to all nations
+  after his death. And upon the news of <i>John</i>'s death, being afraid
+  of <i>Herod</i> as well as of the <i>Jews</i>, he walked this year more
+  secretly than before; frequenting desarts, and spending the last half of
+  the year in <i>Judea</i>, without the dominions of <i>Herod</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>Thus have we in the Gospels of <i>Matthew</i> and <i>John</i> all
+  things told in due order, from the beginning of <i>John</i>'s preaching
+  to the death of <i>Christ</i>, and the years distinguished from one
+  another by such essential characters that they cannot be mistaken. The
+  second Passover is distinguished from the first, by the interposition of
+  <i>John</i>'s imprisonment. The third is distinguished from the second,
+  by a double character: first, by the interposition of the feast to which
+  <i>Christ</i> went up, <i>Mat.</i> viii. 19. <i>Luke</i> ix. 57. and
+  secondly, by the distance of time from the beginning of <i>Christ</i>'s
+  preaching: for the second was in the beginning of his preaching, and the
+  third so long after, that before it came <i>Christ</i> said, <i>from the
+  days of </i>John<i> the Baptist until now</i>, &amp;c. and upbraided the
+  cities of <i>Galilee</i> for their not repenting at his preaching, and
+  mighty works done in all that time. The fourth is distinguished from the
+  third, by the mission of the twelve from <i>Christ</i> to preach in the
+  cities of <i>Judea</i> in all the interval. The fifth is distinguished
+  from all the former by the twelve's being returned from preaching, and
+  continuing with <i>Christ</i> during all the interval, between the fourth
+  and fifth, and by the passion and other infallible characters.</p>
+
+  <p>Now since the first summer of <i>John</i>'s baptizing fell in the
+  fifteenth year of the Emperor <i>Tiberius</i>, and by consequence the
+  first of these five Passovers in his sixteenth year; the last of them, in
+  which <i>Jesus</i> suffered, will fall on the twentieth year of the same
+  Emperor; and by consequence in the Consulship of <i>Fabius</i> and
+  <i>Vitellius</i>, in the 79th <i>Julian</i> year, and year of
+  <i>Christ</i> 34, which was the sabbatical year of the <i>Jews</i>. And
+  that it did so, I further confirm by these arguments.</p>
+
+  <p>I take it for granted that the passion was on friday the 14th day of
+  the month <i>Nisan</i>, the great feast of the Passover on saturday the
+  15th day of <i>Nisan</i>, and the resurrection on the day following. Now
+  the 14th day of <i>Nisan</i> always fell on the full moon next after the
+  vernal Equinox; and the month began at the new moon before, not at the
+  true conjunction, but at the first appearance of the new moon: for the
+  <i>Jews</i> referred all the time of the silent moon, as they phrased it,
+  that is, of the moon's disappearing, to the old moon; and because the
+  first appearance might usually be about 18 hours after the true
+  conjunction, they therefore began their month from the sixth hour at
+  evening, that is, at sun set, next after the eighteenth hour from the
+  conjunction. And this rule they called <span lang="he" title="YH" ><bdo
+  dir="rtl">&#x5D9;&#x5D4;</bdo></span> <i>Jah</i>, designing by the
+  letters <span lang="he" title="Y" ><bdo dir="rtl">&#x5D9;</bdo></span>
+  and <span lang="he" title="H" ><bdo dir="rtl">&#x5D4;</bdo></span> the
+  number 18.</p>
+
+  <p>I know that <i>Epiphanius</i> tells us, if some interpret his words
+  rightly, that the <i>Jews</i> used a vicious cycle, and thereby
+  anticipated the legal new moons by two days. But this surely he spake not
+  as a witness, for he neither understood <i>Astronomy</i> nor
+  <i>Rabbinical</i> learning, but as arguing from his erroneous hypothesis
+  about the time of the passion. For the <i>Jews</i> did not anticipate,
+  but postpone their months: they thought it lawful to begin their months a
+  day later than the first appearance of the new moon, because the new moon
+  continued for more days than one; but not a day sooner, lest they should
+  celebrate the new moon before there was any. And the <i>Jews</i> still
+  keep a tradition in their books, that the <i>Sanhedrim</i> used
+  diligently to define the new moons by sight: sending witnesses into
+  mountainous places, and examining them about the moon's appearing, and
+  translating the new moon from the day they had agreed on to the day
+  before, as often as witnesses came from distant regions, who had seen it
+  a day sooner than it was seen at <i>Jerusalem</i>. Accordingly
+  <i>Josephus</i>, one of the <i>Jewish</i> Priests who ministred in the
+  temple, tells us <a name="NtpDanXI_2"
+  href="#NtDanXI_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> that the Passover was kept <i>on the
+  14th day of</i> Nisan, <span lang="el" title="kata sel�n�n"
+  >&#x3BA;&#x3B1;&#x3C4;&#x3B1;
+  &#x3C3;&#x3B5;&#x3BB;&#x3B7;&#x3BD;&#x3B7;&#x3BD;</span> <i>according to
+  the moon, when the sun was in </i>Aries. This is confirmed also by two
+  instances, recorded by him, which totally overthrow the hypothesis of the
+  <i>Jews</i> using a vicious cycle. For that year in which
+  <i>Jerusalem</i> was taken and destroyed, he saith, the Passover was on
+  the 14th day of the month <i>Xanticus</i>, which according to
+  <i>Josephus</i> is our <i>April</i>; and that five years before, it fell
+  on the 8th day of the same month. Which two instances agree with the
+  course of the moon.</p>
+
+  <p>Computing therefore the new moons of the first month according to the
+  course of the moon and the rule <i>Jah</i>, and thence counting 14 days,
+  I find that the 14th day of this month in the year of <i>Christ</i> 31,
+  fell on tuesday <i>March</i> 27; in the year 32, on sunday <i>Apr.</i>
+  13; in the year 33, on friday <i>Apr.</i> 3; in the year 34, on wednesday
+  <i>March</i> 24, or rather, for avoiding the Equinox which fell on the
+  same day, and for having a fitter time for harvest, on thursday
+  <i>Apr.</i> 22. also in the year 35, on tuesday <i>Apr.</i> 12. and in
+  the year 36, on saturday <i>March</i> 31.</p>
+
+  <p>But because the 15th and 21st days of <i>Nisan</i>, and a day or two
+  of <i>Pentecost</i>, and the 10th, 15th, and 22d of <i>Tisri</i>, were
+  always sabbatical days or days of rest, and it was inconvenient on two
+  sabbaths together to be prohibited burying their dead and making ready
+  fresh meat, for in that hot region their meat would be apt in two days to
+  corrupt: to avoid these and such like inconveniences, the <i>Jews</i>
+  postponed their months a day, as often as the first day of the month
+  <i>Tisri</i>, or, which is all one, the third of the month <i>Nisan</i>,
+  was sunday, wednesday or friday: and this rule they called <span
+  lang="he" title="'DW" ><bdo dir="rtl">&#x5D0;&#x5D3;&#x5D5;</bdo></span>
+  <i>Adu</i>, by the letters <span lang="he" title="W , D , '" ><bdo
+  dir="rtl">&#x5D5; , &#x5D3; , &#x5D0;</bdo></span> signifying the numbers
+  1, 4, 6; that is, the 1st, 4th, and 6th days of the week; which days we
+  call sunday, wednesday and friday. Postponing therefore by this rule the
+  months found above; the 14th day of the month <i>Nisan</i> will fall in
+  the year of <i>Christ</i> 31, on wednesday <i>March</i> 28; in the year
+  32, on monday <i>Apr.</i> 14; in the year 33, on friday <i>Apr.</i> 3; in
+  the year 34, on friday <i>Apr.</i> 23; in the year 35, on wednesday
+  <i>Apr.</i> 13, and in the year 36, on saturday <i>March</i> 31.</p>
+
+  <p>By this computation therefore the year 32 is absolutely excluded,
+  because the Passion cannot fall on friday without making it five days
+  after the full moon, or two days before it; whereas it ought to be upon
+  the day of the full moon, or the next day. For the same reason the years
+  31 and 35 are excluded, because in them the Passion cannot fall on
+  friday, without making it three days after the full moon, or four days
+  before it: errors so enormous, that they would be very conspicuous in the
+  heavens to every vulgar eye. The year 36 is contended for by few or none,
+  and both this and the year 35 may be thus excluded.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Tiberius</i> in the beginning of his reign made <i>Valerius
+  Gratus</i> President of <i>Judea</i>; and after 11 years, substituted
+  <i>Pontius Pilate</i>, who governed 10 years. Then <i>Vitellius</i>,
+  newly made President of <i>Syria</i>, deprived him of his honour,
+  substituting <i>Marcellus</i>, and at length sent him to <i>Rome</i>:
+  but, by reason of delays, <i>Tiberius</i> died before <i>Pilate</i> got
+  thither. In the mean time <i>Vitellius</i>, after he had deposed
+  <i>Pilate</i>, came to <i>Jerusalem</i> in the time of the Passover, to
+  visit that Province as well as others in the beginning of his office; and
+  in the place of <i>Caiaphas</i>, then High Priest, created
+  <i>Jonathas</i> the son of <i>Ananus</i>, or <i>Annas</i> as he is called
+  in scripture. Afterwards, when <i>Vitellius</i> was returned to
+  <i>Antioch</i>, he received letters from <i>Tiberius</i>, to make peace
+  with <i>Artabanus</i> king of the <i>Parthians</i>. At the same time the
+  <i>Alans</i>, by the sollicitation of <i>Tiberius</i>, invaded the
+  kingdom of <i>Artabanus</i>; and his subjects also, by the procurement of
+  <i>Vitellius</i>, soon after rebelled: for <i>Tiberius</i> thought that
+  <i>Artabanus</i>, thus pressed with difficulties, would more readily
+  accept the conditions of peace. <i>Artabanus</i> therefore straightway
+  gathering a greater army, opprest the rebels; and then meeting
+  <i>Vitellius</i> at <i>Euphrates</i>, made a league with the
+  <i>Romans</i>. After this <i>Tiberius</i> commanded <i>Vitellius</i> to
+  make war upon <i>Aretas</i> King of <i>Arabia</i>. He therefore leading
+  his army against <i>Aretas</i>, went together with <i>Herod</i> to
+  <i>Jerusalem</i>, to sacrifice at the publick feast which was then to be
+  celebrated. Where being received honourably, he stayed three days, and in
+  the mean while translated the high Priesthood from <i>Jonathas</i> to his
+  brother <i>Theophilus</i>: and the fourth day, receiving letters of the
+  death of <i>Tiberius</i>, made the people swear allegiance to
+  <i>Caius</i> the new Emperor; and recalling his army, sent them into
+  quarters. All this is related by <i>Josephus</i> <i>Antiq.</i>
+  <i>lib.</i> 18. <i>c.</i> 6, 7. Now <i>Tiberius</i> reigned 22 years and
+  7 months, and died <i>March</i> 16, in the beginning of the year of
+  <i>Christ</i> 37; and the feast of the Passover fell on <i>April</i> 20
+  following, that is, 35 days after the death of <i>Tiberius</i>: so that
+  there were about 36 or 38 days, for the news of his death to come from
+  <i>Rome</i> to <i>Vitellius</i> at <i>Jerusalem</i>; which being a
+  convenient time for that message, confirms that the feast which
+  <i>Vitellius</i> and <i>Herod</i> now went up to was the Passover. For
+  had it been the Pentecost, as is usually supposed, <i>Vitellius</i> would
+  have continued three months ignorant of the Emperor's death: which is not
+  to be supposed. However, the things done between this feast and the
+  Passover which <i>Vitellius</i> was at before, namely, the stirring up a
+  sedition in <i>Parthia</i>, the quieting that sedition, the making a
+  league after that with the <i>Parthians</i>, the sending news of that
+  league to <i>Rome</i>, the receiving new orders from thence to go against
+  the <i>Arabians</i>, and the putting those orders in execution; required
+  much more time than the fifty days between the Passover and Pentecost of
+  the same year: and therefore the Passover which <i>Vitellius</i> first
+  went up to, was in the year before. Therefore <i>Pilate</i> was deposed
+  before the Passover A.C. 36, and by consequence the passion of
+  <i>Christ</i> was before that Passover: for he suffered not under
+  <i>Vitellius</i>, nor under <i>Vitellius</i> and <i>Pilate</i> together,
+  but under <i>Pilate</i> alone.</p>
+
+  <p>Now it is observable that the high Priesthood was at this time become
+  an annual office, and the Passover was the time of making a new high
+  Priest. For <i>Gratus</i> the predecessor of <i>Pilate</i>, saith
+  <i>Josephus</i>, made <i>Ismael</i> high Priest after <i>Ananus</i>; and
+  a while after, suppose a year, deposed him, and substituted
+  <i>Eleazar</i>, and a year after <i>Simon</i>, and after another year
+  <i>Caiaphas</i>; and then gave way to <i>Pilate</i>. So <i>Vitellius</i>
+  at one Passover made <i>Jonathas</i> successor to <i>Caiaphas</i>, and at
+  the next <i>Theophilus</i> to <i>Jonathas</i>. Hence <i>Luke</i> tells
+  us, that in the 15th year of <i>Tiberius</i>, <i>Annas</i> and
+  <i>Caiaphas</i> were high Priests, that is, <i>Annas</i> till the
+  Passover, and <i>Caiaphas</i> afterwards. Accordingly <i>John</i> speaks
+  of the high Priesthood as an annual office: for he tells us again and
+  again, in the last year of <i>Christ</i>'s preaching, that
+  <i>Caiaphas</i> was high Priest for that year, <i>John</i> xi. 49, 51.
+  xviii. 13. And the next year <i>Luke</i> tells you, that <i>Annas</i> was
+  high Priest, <i>Acts</i> iv. 6. <i>Theophilus</i> was therefore made high
+  Priest in the first year of <i>Caius</i>, <i>Jonathas</i> in the 22d year
+  of <i>Tiberius</i>, and <i>Caiaphas</i> in the 21st year of the same
+  Emperor: and therefore, allotting a year to each, the Passion, when
+  <i>Annas</i> succeeded <i>Caiaphas</i>, could not be later than the 20th
+  year of <i>Tiberius</i>, A.C. 34.</p>
+
+  <p>Thus there remain only the years 33 and 34 to be considered; and the
+  year 33 I exclude by this argument. In the Passover two years before the
+  Passion, when <i>Christ</i> went thro' the corn, and his disciples pluckt
+  the ears, and rubbed them with their hands to eat; this ripeness of the
+  corn shews that the Passover then fell late: and so did the Passover A.C.
+  32, <i>April 14</i>, but the Passover A.C. 31, <i>March 28th</i>, fell
+  very early. It was not therefore two years after the year 31, but two
+  years after 32 that <i>Christ</i> suffered.</p>
+
+  <p>Thus all the characters of the Passion agree to the year 34; and that
+  is the only year to which they all agree.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. XI.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanXI_1" href="#NtpDanXI_1">[1]</a> I observe, that
+  <i>Christ</i> and his forerunner <i>John</i> in their parabolical
+  discourses were wont to allude to things present. The old Prophets, when
+  they would describe things emphatically, did not only draw parables from
+  things which offered themselves, as from the rent of a garment, 1
+  <i>Sam.</i> xv. from the sabbatic year, <i>Isa.</i> xxxvii. from the
+  vessels of a Potter, <i>Jer.</i> xviii, &amp;c. but also when such fit
+  objects were wanting, they supplied them by their own actions, as by
+  rending a garment, 1 <i>Kings</i> xi. by shooting, 2 <i>Kings</i> xiii.
+  by making bare their body, <i>Isa.</i> xx. by imposing significant names
+  to their sons, <i>Isa.</i> viii. <i>Hos.</i> i. by hiding a girdle in the
+  bank of <i>Euphrates</i>, <i>Jer.</i> xiii. by breaking a potter's
+  vessel, <i>Jer.</i> xix. by putting on fetters and yokes, <i>Jer.</i>
+  xxvii. by binding a book to a stone, and casting them both into
+  <i>Euphrates</i>, <i>Jer.</i> li. by besieging a painted city,
+  <i>Ezek.</i> iv. by dividing hair into three parts, <i>Ezek.</i> v. by
+  making a chain, <i>Ezek.</i> vii. by carrying out houshold stuff like a
+  captive and trembling, <i>Ezek.</i> xii, &amp;c. By such kind of types
+  the Prophets loved to speak. And <i>Christ</i> being endued with a nobler
+  prophetic spirit than the rest, excelled also in this kind of speaking,
+  yet so as not to speak by his own actions, that was less grave and
+  decent, but to turn into parables such things as offered themselves. On
+  occasion of the harvest approaching, he admonishes his disciples once and
+  again of the spiritual harvest, <i>John</i> iv. 35. <i>Matth.</i> ix. 37.
+  Seeing the lilies of the field, he admonishes his disciples about gay
+  clothing, <i>Matth.</i> vi. 28. In allusion to the present season of
+  fruits, he admonishes his disciples about knowing men by their fruits,
+  <i>Matth.</i> vii. 16. In the time of the Passover, when trees put forth
+  leaves, he bids his disciples <i>learn a parable from the fig tree: when
+  its branch is yet tender and putteth forth leaves, ye know that summer is
+  nigh</i>, &amp;c. <i>Matth.</i> xxiv. 32. <i>Luke</i> xxi. 29. The same
+  day, alluding both to the season of the year and to his passion, which
+  was to be two days after, he formed a parable of the time of fruits
+  approaching, and the murdering of the heir, <i>Matth.</i> xxi. 33.
+  Alluding at the same time, both to the money-changers whom he had newly
+  driven out of the Temple, and to his passion at hand; he made a parable
+  of a Noble-man going into a far country to receive a kingdom and return,
+  and delivering his goods to his servants, and at his return condemning
+  the slothful servant because he put not his money to the exchangers,
+  <i>Matth.</i> xxv. 14. <i>Luke</i> xix. 12. Being near the Temple where
+  sheep were kept in folds to be sold for the sacrifices, he spake many
+  things parabolically of sheep, of the shepherd, and of the door of the
+  sheepfold; and discovers that he alluded to the sheepfolds which were to
+  be hired in the market-place, by speaking of such folds as a thief could
+  not enter by the door, nor the shepherd himself open, but a porter opened
+  to the shepherd, <i>John</i> x. 1, 3. Being in the mount of
+  <i>Olives</i>, <i>Matth.</i> xxxvi. 30. <i>John</i> xiv. 31. a place so
+  fertile that it could not want vines, he spake many things mystically of
+  the Husbandman, and of the vine and its branches, <i>John</i> xv. Meeting
+  a blind man, he admonished of spiritual blindness, <i>John</i> ix. 39. At
+  the sight of little children, he described once and again the innocence
+  of the elect, <i>Matth.</i> xviii. 2. xix. 13. Knowing that
+  <i>Lazarus</i> was dead and should be raised again, he discoursed of the
+  resurrection and life eternal, <i>John</i> xi. 25, 26. Hearing of the
+  slaughter of some whom <i>Pilate</i> had slain, he admonished of eternal
+  death, <i>Luke</i> xiii. 1. To his fishermen he spake of fishers of men,
+  <i>Matth.</i> iv. 10. and composed another parable about fishes.
+  <i>Matth.</i> xiii. 47. Being by the Temple, he spake of the Temple of
+  his body, <i>John</i> ii. 19. At supper he spake a parable about the
+  mystical supper to come in the kingdom of heaven, <i>Luke</i> xiv. On
+  occasion of temporal food, he admonished his disciples of spiritual food,
+  and of eating his flesh and drinking his blood mystically, <i>John</i>
+  vi. 27, 53. When his disciples wanted bread, he bad them beware of the
+  leven of the Pharisees, <i>Matth.</i> xvi. 6. Being desired to eat, he
+  answered that he had other meat, <i>John</i> iv. 31. In the great day of
+  the feast of Tabernacles, when the <i>Jews</i>, as their custom was,
+  brought a great quantity of waters from the river <i>Shiloah</i> into the
+  Temple, <i>Christ</i> stood and cried, saying, <i>If any man thirst let
+  him come unto me and drink. He that believeth in me, out of his belly
+  shall flow rivers of living water</i>, John vii. 37. The next day, in
+  allusion to the servants who by reason of the sabbatical year were newly
+  set free, he said, <i>If ye continue in my word, the truth shall make you
+  free</i>. Which the <i>Jews</i> understanding literally with respect to
+  the present manumission of servants, answered, <i>We be </i>Abraham<i>'s
+  seed, and were never in bondage to any man: how sayeth thou, ye shall be
+  made free?</i> John viii. They assert their freedom by a double argument:
+  first, because they were the seed of <i>Abraham</i>, and therefore newly
+  made free, had they been ever in bondage; and then, because they never
+  were in bondage. In the last Passover, when <i>Herod</i> led his army
+  thro' <i>Judea</i> against <i>Aretas</i> King of <i>Arabia</i>, because
+  <i>Aretas</i> was aggressor and the stronger in military forces, as
+  appeared by the event; <i>Christ</i> alluding to that state of things,
+  composed the parable of a weaker King leading his army against a stronger
+  who made war upon him, <i>Luke</i> xiv. 31. And I doubt not but divers
+  other parables were formed upon other occasions, the history of which we
+  have not.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXI_2" href="#NtpDanXI_2">[2]</a> Joseph. Antiq. lib. 3.
+  c. 10.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanXII">CHAP. XII</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the Prophecy of the Scripture of
+Truth.</i></p>
+
+  <p>The kingdoms represented by the second and third Beasts, or the Bear
+  and Leopard, are again described by <i>Daniel</i> in his last Prophecy
+  written in the third year of <i>Cyrus</i> over <i>Babylon</i>, the year
+  in which he conquered <i>Persia</i>. For this Prophecy is a commentary
+  upon the Vision of the Ram and He-Goat.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Behold</i>, saith <a name="NtpDanXII_1"
+  href="#NtDanXII_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> he, <i>there shall stand up yet
+  three kings in </i>Persia, [<i>Cyrus</i>, <i>Cambyses</i>, and <i>Darius
+  Hystaspes</i>] <i>and the fourth</i> [<i>Xerxes</i>] <i>shall be far
+  richer than they all: and by his strength thro' his riches he shall stir
+  up all against the realm of </i>Grecia<i>. And a mighty king</i>
+  [<i>Alexander</i> the great] <i>shall stand up, that shall rule with
+  great dominion, and do according to his will. And when he shall stand up,
+  his kingdom shall be broken, and shall be divided towards the four winds
+  of heaven; and not to his posterity</i> [but after their death,] <i>nor
+  according to his dominion which he ruled: for his kingdom shall be pluckt
+  up, even for others besides those</i>. <i>Alexander</i> the great having
+  conquered all the <i>Persian</i> Empire, and some part of <i>India</i>,
+  died at <i>Babylon</i> a month before the summer Solstice, in the year of
+  <i>Nabonassar</i> 425: and his captains gave the monarchy to his bastard
+  brother <i>Philip Arid�us</i>, a man disturbed in his understanding; and
+  made <i>Perdiccas</i> administrator of the kingdom. <i>Perdiccas</i> with
+  their consent made <i>Meleager</i> commander of the army, <i>Seleucus</i>
+  master of the horse, <i>Craterus</i> treasurer of the kingdom,
+  <i>Antipater</i> governor of <i>Macedon</i> and <i>Greece</i>,
+  <i>Ptolemy</i> governor of <i>Egypt</i>; <i>Antigonus</i> governor of
+  <i>Pamphylia</i>, <i>Lycia</i>, <i>Lycaonia</i>, and <i>Phrygia
+  major</i>; <i>Lysimachus</i> governor of <i>Thrace</i>, and other
+  captains governors of other Provinces; as many as had been so before in
+  the days of <i>Alexander</i> the great. The <i>Babylonians</i> began now
+  to count by a new <i>�ra</i>, which they called the <i>�ra</i> of
+  <i>Philip</i>, using the years of <i>Nabonassar</i>, and reckoning the
+  425th year of <i>Nabonassar</i> to be the first year of <i>Philip</i>.
+  <i>Roxana</i> the wife of <i>Alexander</i> being left big with child, and
+  about three or four months after brought to bed of a son, they called him
+  <i>Alexander</i>, saluted him King, and joined him with <i>Philip</i>,
+  whom they had before placed in the throne. <i>Philip</i> reigned three
+  years under the administratorship of <i>Perdiccas</i>, two years more
+  under the administratorship of <i>Antipater</i>, and above a year more
+  under that of <i>Polyperchon</i>; in all six years and four months; and
+  then was slain with his Queen <i>Eurydice</i> in <i>September</i> by the
+  command of <i>Olympias</i> the mother of <i>Alexander</i> the great. The
+  <i>Greeks</i> being disgusted at the cruelties of <i>Olympias</i>,
+  revolted to <i>Cassander</i> the son and successor of <i>Antipater</i>.
+  <i>Cassander</i> affecting the dominion of <i>Greece</i>, slew
+  <i>Olympias</i>; and soon after shut up the young king <i>Alexander</i>,
+  with his mother <i>Roxana</i>, in the castle of <i>Amphipolis</i>, under
+  the charge of <i>Glaucias</i>, <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 432. The next year
+  <i>Ptolemy</i>, <i>Cassander</i> and <i>Lysimachus</i>, by means of
+  <i>Seleucus</i>, form'd a league against <i>Antigonus</i>; and after
+  certain wars made peace with him, <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 438, upon these
+  conditions: that <i>Cassander</i> should command the forces of
+  <i>Europe</i> till <i>Alexander</i> the son of <i>Roxana</i> came to age;
+  and that <i>Lysimachus</i> should govern <i>Thrace</i>, <i>Ptolemy</i>
+  <i>Egypt</i> and <i>Lybia</i>, and <i>Antigonus</i> all <i>Asia</i>.
+  <i>Seleucus</i> had possest himself of <i>Mesopotamia</i>,
+  <i>Babylonia</i>, <i>Sustana</i> and <i>Media</i>, the year before. About
+  three years after <i>Alexander</i>'s death he was made governor of
+  <i>Babylon</i> by <i>Antipater</i>; then was expelled by
+  <i>Antigonus</i>; but now he recovered and enlarged his government over a
+  great part of the <i>East</i>: which gave occasion to a new <i>�ra</i>,
+  called <i>�ra Seleucidarum</i>. Not long after the peace made with
+  <i>Antigonus</i>, <i>Diodorus</i> saith the same <i>Olympic</i> year;
+  <i>Cassander</i>, seeing that <i>Alexander</i> the son of <i>Roxana</i>
+  grew up, and that it was discoursed thro'out <i>Macedonia</i> that it was
+  fit he should be set at liberty, and take upon him the government of his
+  father's kingdom, commanded <i>Glaucias</i> the governor of the castle to
+  kill <i>Roxana</i> and the young king <i>Alexander</i> her son, and
+  conceal their deaths. Then <i>Polyperchon</i> set up <i>Hercules</i>, the
+  son of <i>Alexander</i> the great by <i>Barsin�</i>, to be king; and soon
+  after, at the sollicitation of <i>Cassander</i>, caused him to be slain.
+  Soon after that, upon a great victory at sea got by <i>Demetrius</i> the
+  son of <i>Antigonus</i> over <i>Ptolemy</i>, <i>Antigonus</i> took upon
+  himself the title of king, and gave the same title to his son. This was
+  <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 441. After his example, <i>Seleucus</i>,
+  <i>Cassander</i>, <i>Lysimachus</i> and <i>Ptolemy</i>, took upon
+  themselves the title and dignity of kings, having abstained from this
+  honour while there remained any of <i>Alexander</i>'s race to inherit the
+  crown. Thus the monarchy of the <i>Greeks</i> for want of an heir was
+  broken into several kingdoms; four of which, seated <i>to the four winds
+  of heaven</i>, were very eminent. For <i>Ptolemy</i> reigned over
+  <i>Egypt</i>, <i>Lybia</i> and <i>Ethiopia</i>; <i>Antigonus</i> over
+  <i>Syria</i> and the lesser <i>Asia</i>; <i>Lysimachus</i> over
+  <i>Thrace</i>; and <i>Cassander</i> over <i>Macedon</i>, <i>Greece</i>
+  and <i>Epirus</i>, as above.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Seleucus</i> at this time reigned over the nations which were
+  beyond <i>Euphrates</i>, and belonged to the bodies of the two first
+  Beasts; but after six years he conquered <i>Antigonus</i>, and thereby
+  became possest of one of the four kingdoms. For <i>Cassander</i> being
+  afraid of the power of <i>Antigonus</i>, combined with <i>Lysimachus</i>,
+  <i>Ptolemy</i> and <i>Seleucus</i>, against him: and while
+  <i>Lysimachus</i> invaded the parts of <i>Asia</i> next the
+  <i>Hellespont</i>, <i>Ptolemy</i> subdued <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i> and
+  <i>C&#339;losyria</i>, with the sea-coasts of <i>Asia</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Seleucus</i> came down with a powerful army into <i>Cappadocia</i>,
+  and joining the confederate forces, fought <i>Antigonus</i> in
+  <i>Phrygia</i> and flew him, and seized his kingdom, <i>An. Nabonass.</i>
+  447. After which <i>Seleucus</i> built <i>Antioch</i>, <i>Seleucia</i>,
+  <i>Laodicea</i>, <i>Apamea</i>, <i>Berrh�a</i>, <i>Edessa</i>, and other
+  cities in <i>Syria</i> and <i>Asia</i>; and in them granted the
+  <i>Jews</i> equal privileges with the <i>Greeks</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Demetrius</i> the son of <i>Antigonus</i> retained but a small part
+  of his father's dominions, and at length lost <i>Cyprus</i> to
+  <i>Ptolemy</i>; but afterwards killing <i>Alexander</i>, the son and
+  successor of <i>Cassander</i> king of <i>Macedon</i>, he seized his
+  kingdom, <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 454. Sometime after, preparing a very great
+  army to recover his father's dominions in <i>Asia</i>; <i>Seleucus</i>,
+  <i>Ptolemy</i>, <i>Lysimachus</i> and <i>Pyrrhus</i> king of
+  <i>Epirus</i>, combined against him; and <i>Pyrrhus</i> invading
+  <i>Macedon</i>, corrupted the army of <i>Demetrius</i>, put him to
+  flight, seized his kingdom, and shared it with <i>Lysimachus</i>. After
+  seven months, <i>Lysimachus</i> beating <i>Pyrrhus</i>, took
+  <i>Macedon</i> from him, and held it five years and a half, uniting the
+  kingdoms of <i>Macedon</i> and <i>Thrace</i>. <i>Lysimachus</i> in his
+  wars with <i>Antigonus</i> and <i>Demetrius</i>, had taken from them
+  <i>Caria</i>, <i>Lydia</i>, and <i>Phrygia</i>; and had a treasury in
+  <i>Pergamus</i>, a castle on the top of a conical hill in <i>Phrygia</i>,
+  by the river <i>Caicus</i>, the custody of which he had committed to one
+  <i>Philet�rus</i>, who was at first faithful to him, but in the last year
+  of his reign revolted. For <i>Lysimachus</i>, having at the instigation
+  of his wife <i>Arsinoe</i>, slain first his own son <i>Agathocles</i>,
+  and then several that lamented him; the wife of <i>Agathocles</i> fled
+  with her children and brothers, and some others of their friends, and
+  sollicited <i>Seleucus</i> to make war upon <i>Lysimachus</i>; whereupon
+  <i>Philet�rus</i> also, who grieved at the death of <i>Agathocles</i>,
+  and was accused thereof by <i>Arsinoe</i>, took up arms, and sided with
+  <i>Seleucus</i>. On this occasion <i>Seleucus</i> and <i>Lysimachus</i>
+  met and fought in <i>Phrygia</i>; and <i>Lysimachus</i> being slain in
+  the battel, lost his kingdom to <i>Seleucus</i>, <i>An. Nabonass.</i>
+  465. Thus the Empire of the <i>Greeks</i>, which at first brake into four
+  kingdoms, became now reduced into two notable ones, henceforward called
+  by <i>Daniel</i> the kings of the <i>South</i> and <i>North</i>. For
+  <i>Ptolemy</i> now reigned over <i>Egypt</i>, <i>Lybia</i>,
+  <i>Ethiopia</i>, <i>Arabia</i>, <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i>,
+  <i>C&#339;losyria</i>, and <i>Cyprus</i>; and <i>Seleucus</i>, having
+  united three of the four kingdoms, had a dominion scarce inferior to that
+  of the <i>Persian</i> Empire, conquered by <i>Alexander</i> the great.
+  All which is thus represented by <i>Daniel</i>:<a name="NtpDanXII_2"
+  href="#NtDanXII_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> <i>And the king of the</i> South
+  [<i>Ptolemy</i>] <i>shall be strong, and one of his Princes</i>
+  [<i>Seleucus</i>, one of <i>Alexander</i>'s Princes] <i>shall be strong
+  above him, and have dominion; his dominion shall be a great
+  dominion</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>After <i>Seleucus</i> had reigned seven months over <i>Macedon</i>,
+  <i>Greece</i>, <i>Thrace</i>, <i>Asia</i>, <i>Syria</i>,
+  <i>Babylonia</i>, <i>Media</i>, and all the <i>East</i> as far as
+  <i>India</i>; <i>Ptolemy Ceraunus</i>, the younger brother of <i>Ptolemy
+  Philadelphus</i> king of <i>Egypt</i>, slew him treacherously, and seized
+  his dominions in <i>Europe</i>: while <i>Antiochus Soter</i>, the son of
+  <i>Seleucus</i>, succeeded his father in <i>Asia</i>, <i>Syria</i>, and
+  most of the <i>East</i>; and after nineteen or twenty years was succeeded
+  by his son <i>Antiochus Theos</i>; who having a lasting war with
+  <i>Ptolemy Philadelphus</i>, at length composed the same by marrying
+  <i>Berenice</i> the daughter of <i>Philadelphus</i>: but after a reign of
+  fifteen years, his first wife <i>Laodice</i> poisoned him, and set her
+  son <i>Seleucus Callinicus</i> upon the throne. <i>Callinicus</i> in the
+  beginning of his reign, by the impulse of his mother <i>Laodice</i>,
+  besieged <i>Berenice</i> in <i>Daphne</i> near <i>Antioch</i>, and slew
+  her with her young son and many of her women. Whereupon <i>Ptolemy
+  Euergetes</i>, the son and successor of <i>Philadelphus</i>, made war
+  upon <i>Callinicus</i>; took from him <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i>, <i>Syria</i>,
+  <i>Cilicia</i>, <i>Mesopotamia</i>, <i>Babylonia</i>, <i>Sustana</i>, and
+  some other regions; and carried back into <i>Egypt</i> 40000 talents of
+  silver, and 2500 images of the Gods, amongst which were the Gods of
+  <i>Egypt</i> carried away by <i>Cambyses</i>. <i>Antiochus Hierax</i> at
+  first assisted his brother <i>Callinicus</i>, but afterwards contended
+  with him for <i>Asia</i>. In the mean time <i>Eumenes</i> governor of
+  <i>Pergamus</i> beat <i>Antiochus</i>, and took from them both all
+  <i>Asia</i> westward of mount <i>Taurus</i>. This was in the fifth year
+  of <i>Callinicus</i>, who after an inglorious reign of 20 years was
+  succeeded by his son <i>Seleucus Ceraunus</i>; and <i>Euergetes</i> after
+  four years more, <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 527, was succeeded by his son
+  <i>Ptolemy Philopator</i>. All which is thus signified by
+  <i>Daniel</i>:<a name="NtpDanXII_3" href="#NtDanXII_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a>
+  <i>And in the end of years they</i> [the kings of the <i>South</i> and
+  <i>North</i>] <i>shall join themselves together: for the king's daughter
+  of the</i> South [<i>Berenice</i>] <i>shall come to the king of the
+  </i>North<i> to make an agreement, but she shall not retain the power of
+  the arm; neither shall she stand, nor her seed, but she shall be
+  delivered up, and he</i> [<i>Callinicus</i>] <i>that brought her, and he
+  whom she brought forth, and they that strengthned her in</i> [those]
+  <i>times</i>, [or defended her in the siege of <i>Daphne</i>.] <i>But out
+  of a branch of her roots shall one stand up in his seat</i> [her brother
+  <i>Euergetes</i>] <i>who shall come with an army, and shall enter into
+  the fortress</i> [or fenced cities] <i>of the king of the </i>North<i>,
+  and shall act against them and prevail: and shall carry captives into
+  </i>Egypt<i>, their Gods with their Princes and precious vessels of
+  silver and gold; and he shall continue some years after the king of
+  the</i> North.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Seleucus Ceraunus</i>, inheriting the remains of his father's
+  kingdom, and thinking to recover the rest, raised a great army against
+  the governor of <i>Pergamus</i>, now King thereof, but died in the third
+  year of his reign. His brother and successor, <i>Antiochus Magnus</i>,
+  carrying on the war, took from the King of <i>Pergamus</i> almost all the
+  lesser <i>Asia</i>, recovering also the Provinces of <i>Media</i>,
+  <i>Persia</i> and <i>Babylonia</i>, from the governors who had revolted:
+  and in the fifth year of his reign invading <i>C&#339;losyria</i>, he
+  with little opposition possest himself of a good part thereof; and the
+  next year returning to invade the rest of <i>C&#339;losyria</i> and
+  <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i>, beat the army of <i>Ptolemy Philopator</i> near
+  <i>Berytus</i>; he then invaded <i>Palestine</i> and the neighbouring
+  parts of <i>Arabia</i>, and the third year returned with an army of
+  78000: but <i>Ptolemy</i> coming out of <i>Egypt</i> with an army of
+  75000, fought and routed him at <i>Raphia</i> near <i>Gaza</i>, between
+  <i>Palestine</i> and <i>Egypt</i>; and recovered all <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i>
+  and <i>C&#339;losyria</i>, <i>Ann. Nabonass.</i> 532. Being puffed up
+  with this victory, and living in all manner of luxury, the
+  <i>Egyptians</i> revolted, and had wars with him, but were overcome; and
+  in the broils sixty thousand <i>Egyptian Jews</i> were slain. All which
+  is thus described by <i>Daniel</i>: <a name="NtpDanXII_4"
+  href="#NtDanXII_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> <i>But his sons</i> [<i>Seleucus
+  Ceraunus</i>, and <i>Antiochus Magnus</i>, the sons of <i>Callinicus</i>]
+  <i>shall be stirred up, and shall gather a great army; and he</i>
+  [<i>Antiochus Magnus</i>] <i>shall come effectually and overflow, and
+  pass thro' and return, and</i> [again the next year] <i>be stirred up</i>
+  [marching even] <i>to his fortress</i>, [the frontier towns of
+  <i>Egypt</i>;] <i>and the King of the </i>South<i> shall be moved with
+  choler, and come forth</i> [the third year] <i>and fight with him, even
+  with the King of the </i>North<i>; and he</i> [the King of the
+  <i>North</i>] <i>shall lead forth a great multitude, but the multitude
+  shall be given into his hand. And the multitude being taken away, his
+  heart shall be lifted up, and he shall cast down many ten thousands; but
+  he shall not be strengthned by it: for the king of the </i>North<i> shall
+  return</i>, &amp;c.</p>
+
+  <p>About twelve years after the battle between <i>Philopator</i> and
+  <i>Antiochus</i>, <i>Philopator</i> died; and left his kingdom to his
+  young son <i>Ptolemy Epiphanes</i>, a child of five years old. Thereupon
+  <i>Antiochus Magnus</i> confederated with <i>Philip</i> king of
+  <i>Macedon</i>, that they should each invade the dominions of
+  <i>Epiphanes</i> which lay next to them. Hence arose a various war
+  between <i>Antiochus</i> and <i>Epiphanes</i>, each of them seizing
+  <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i> and <i>C&#339;losyria</i> by turns; whereby those
+  countries were much afflicted by both parties. First <i>Antiochus</i>
+  seized them; then one <i>Scopas</i> being sent with the army of
+  <i>Egypt</i>, recovered them from <i>Antiochus</i>: the next year, <i>An.
+  Nabonass.</i> 550, <i>Antiochus</i> fought and routed <i>Scopas</i> near
+  the fountains of <i>Jordan</i>, besieged him in <i>Sidon</i>, took the
+  city, and recovered <i>Syria</i> and <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i> from
+  <i>Egypt</i>, the <i>Jews</i> coming over to him voluntarily. But about
+  three years after, preparing for a war against the <i>Romans</i>, he came
+  to <i>Raphia</i> on the borders of <i>Egypt</i>; made peace with
+  <i>Epiphanes</i>, and gave him his daughter <i>Cleopatra</i>: next autumn
+  he passed the <i>Hellespont</i> to invade the cities of <i>Greece</i>
+  under the <i>Roman</i> protection, and took some of them; but was beaten
+  by the <i>Romans</i> the summer following, and forced to return back with
+  his army into <i>Asia</i>. Before the end of the year the fleet of
+  <i>Antiochus</i> was beaten by the fleet of the <i>Romans</i> near
+  <i>Phoc�a</i>: and at the same time <i>Epiphanes</i> and <i>Cleopatra</i>
+  sent an embassy to <i>Rome</i> to congratulate the <i>Romans</i> on their
+  success against their father <i>Antiochus</i>, and to exhort them to
+  prosecute the war against him into <i>Asia</i>. The <i>Romans</i> beat
+  <i>Antiochus</i> again at sea near <i>Ephesus</i>, past their army over
+  the <i>Hellespont</i>, and obtain'd a great victory over him by land,
+  took from him all <i>Asia</i> westward of mount <i>Taurus</i>, gave it to
+  the King of <i>Pergamus</i> who assisted them in the war; and imposed a
+  large tribute upon <i>Antiochus</i>. Thus the King of <i>Pergamus</i>, by
+  the power of the <i>Romans</i>, recovered what <i>Antiochus</i> had taken
+  from him; and <i>Antiochus</i> retiring into the remainder of his
+  kingdom, was slain two years after by the <i>Persians</i>, as he was
+  robbing the Temple of <i>Jupiter Belus</i> in <i>Elymais</i>, to raise
+  money for the <i>Romans</i>. All which is thus described by
+  <i>Daniel</i>. <a name="NtpDanXII_5"
+  href="#NtDanXII_5"><sup>[5]</sup></a> <i>For the King of the</i> North
+  [<i>Antiochus</i>] <i>shall return, and shall set forth a multitude
+  greater than the former; and shall certainly come, after certain years,
+  with a great army and with much riches. And in those times there shall
+  many stand up against the King of the</i> South, [particularly the
+  <i>Macedonians</i>;] <i>also the robbers of thy people</i> [the
+  <i>Samaritans</i>, &amp;c.] <i>shall exalt themselves to establish the
+  vision, but they shall fall. So the King of the </i>North<i> shall come,
+  and cast up a mount, and take the most fenced cities; and the arms of the
+  </i>South<i> shall not withstand, neither his chosen people, neither
+  shall there he any strength to withstand. But he that cometh against him
+  shall do according to his own will, and none shall stand before him: and
+  he shall stand in the glorious land, which shall fail in his hand. He
+  shall also set his face to go with the strength</i> [or army] <i>of all
+  his kingdom, and make an agreement with him</i> [at <i>Raphia</i>;]
+  <i>and he shall give him the daughter of women corrupting her; but she
+  shall not stand his side, neither be for him. After this he shall turn
+  his face unto the Isles, and shall take many: but a Prince for his own
+  behalf</i> [the <i>Romans</i>] <i>shall cause the reproach offered by him
+  to cease; without his own reproach he shall cause it to turn upon him.
+  Then he shall turn his face towards the fort of his own land: but he
+  shall stumble and fall, and not be found.</i></p>
+
+  <p><i>Seleucus Philopator</i> succeeded his father <i>Antiochus</i>,
+  <i>Anno Nabonass.</i> 561, and reigned twelve years, but did nothing
+  memorable, being sluggish, and intent upon raising money for the
+  <i>Romans</i> to whom he was tributary. He was slain by
+  <i>Heliodorus</i>, whom he had sent to rob the Temple of
+  <i>Jerusalem</i>. <i>Daniel</i> thus describes his reign. <a
+  name="NtpDanXII_6" href="#NtDanXII_6"><sup>[6]</sup></a> <i>Then shall
+  stand up in his estate a raiser of taxes in the glory of the kingdom, but
+  within few days be shall be destroyed, neither in anger nor in
+  battle.</i></p>
+
+  <p>A little before the death of <i>Philopator</i>, his son
+  <i>Demetrius</i> was sent hostage to <i>Rome</i>, in the place of
+  <i>Antiochus Epiphanes</i>, the brother of <i>Philopator</i>; and
+  <i>Antiochus</i> was at <i>Athens</i> in his way home from <i>Rome</i>,
+  when <i>Philopator</i> died: whereupon <i>Heliodorus</i> the treasurer of
+  the kingdom, stept into the throne. But <i>Antiochus</i> so managed his
+  affairs, that the <i>Romans</i> kept <i>Demetrius</i> at <i>Rome</i>; and
+  their ally the King of <i>Pergamus</i> expelled <i>Heliodorus</i>, and
+  placed <i>Antiochus</i> in the throne, while <i>Demetrius</i> the right
+  heir remained an hostage at <i>Rome</i>. <i>Antiochus</i> being thus made
+  King by the friendship of the King of <i>Pergamus</i> reigned powerfully
+  over <i>Syria</i> and the neighbouring nations: but carried himself much
+  below his dignity, stealing privately out of his palace, rambling up and
+  down the city in disguise with one or two of his companions; conversing
+  and drinking with people of the lowest rank, foreigners and strangers;
+  frequenting the meetings of dissolute persons to feast and revel;
+  clothing himself like the <i>Roman</i> candidates and officers, acting
+  their parts like a mimick, and in publick festivals jesting and dancing
+  with servants and light people, exposing himself by all manner of
+  ridiculous gestures. This conduct made some take him for a madman, and
+  call him <i>Antiochus</i> <span lang="el" title="Epimen�s"
+  >&#x395;&#x3C0;&#x3B9;&#x3BC;&#x3B5;&#x3BD;&#x3B7;&#x3C2;</span>. In the
+  first year of his reign he deposed <i>Onias</i> the high-Priest, and sold
+  the high-Priesthood to <i>Jason</i> the younger brother of <i>Onias</i>:
+  for <i>Jason</i> had promised to give him 440 talents of silver for that
+  office, and 15 more for a licence to erect a place of exercise for the
+  training up of youth in the fashions of the heathen; which licence was
+  granted by the King, and put in execution by <i>Jason</i>. Then the King
+  sending one <i>Apollonius</i> into <i>Egypt</i> to the coronation of
+  <i>Ptolemy Philometor</i>, the young son of <i>Philometor</i> and
+  <i>Cleopatra</i>, and knowing <i>Philometor</i> not to be well affected
+  to his affairs in <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i>, provided for his own safety in
+  those parts; and for that end came to <i>Joppa</i> and <i>Jerusalem</i>,
+  where he was honourably received; from thence he went in like manner with
+  his little army to the cities of <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i>, to establish
+  himself against <i>Egypt</i>, by courting the people, and distributing
+  extraordinary favours amongst them. All which is thus represented by
+  <i>Daniel</i>. <a name="NtpDanXII_7"
+  href="#NtDanXII_7"><sup>[7]</sup></a> <i>And in his</i>
+  [<i>Philometor</i>'s] <i>estate shall stand up a vile person, to whom
+  they</i> [the <i>Syrians</i> who set up <i>Heliodorus</i>] <i>shall not
+  give the honour of the kingdom. Yet he shall come in peaceably, and
+  obtain the kingdom by flatteries</i> [made principally to the King of
+  <i>Pergamus</i>;] <i>and the arms</i> [which in favour of
+  <i>Heliodorus</i> oppose him] <i>shall be overflowed with a food from
+  before him, and be broken; yea also</i> [<i>Onias</i> the high-Priest]
+  <i>the Prince of the covenant. And after the league made with him,</i>
+  [the King of <i>Egypt</i>, by sending <i>Apollonius</i> to his
+  coronation] <i>he shall work deceitfully</i> [against the King of
+  <i>Egypt</i>,] <i>for he shall come up and shall become strong</i> [in
+  <i>Ph&#339;nicia </i>] <i>with a small people. And he shall enter into
+  the quiet and plentiful cities of the Province</i> [of
+  <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i>;] <i>and</i> [to ingratiate himself with the
+  <i>Jews</i> of <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i> and <i>Egypt</i>, and with their
+  friends] <i>he shall do that which his fathers have not done, nor his
+  fathers fathers: he shall scatter among them the prey and the spoil, and
+  the riches</i> [exacted from other places;] <i>and shall forecast his
+  devices against the strong holds</i> [of <i>Egypt</i>] <i>even for a
+  time.</i></p>
+
+  <p>These things were done in the first year of his reign, <i>An.
+  Nabonass.</i> 573. And thenceforward he forecast his devices against the
+  strong holds of <i>Egypt</i>, until the sixth year. For three years
+  after, that is in the fourth year of his reign, <i>Menelaus</i> bought
+  the high-Priesthood from <i>Jason</i>, but not paying the price was sent
+  for by the King; and the King, before he could hear the cause, went into
+  <i>Cilicia</i> to appease a sedition there, and left <i>Andronicus</i>
+  his deputy at <i>Antioch</i>; in the mean time the brother of
+  <i>Menelaus</i>, to make up the money, conveyed several vessels out of
+  the Temple, selling some of them at <i>Tyre</i>, and sending others to
+  <i>Andronicus</i>. When <i>Menelaus</i> was reproved for this by
+  <i>Onias</i>, he caused <i>Onias</i> to be slain by <i>Andronicus</i>:
+  for which fact the King at his return from <i>Cilicia</i> caused
+  <i>Andronicus</i> to be put to death. Then <i>Antiochus</i> prepared his
+  second expedition against <i>Egypt</i>, which he performed in the sixth
+  year of his reign, <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 578: for upon the death of
+  <i>Cleopatra</i>, the governors of her son the young King of <i>Egypt</i>
+  claimed <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i> and <i>C&#339;losyria</i> from him as her
+  dowry; and to recover those countries raised a great army.
+  <i>Antiochus</i> considering that his father had not quitted the
+  possession of those countries<a name="NtpDanXII_8"
+  href="#NtDanXII_8"><sup>[8]</sup></a>, denied they were her dowry; and
+  with another great army met and fought the <i>Egyptians</i> on the
+  borders of <i>Egypt</i>, between <i>Pelusium</i> and the mountain
+  <i>Casius</i>. He there beat them, and might have destroyed their whole
+  army, but that he rode up and down, commanding his soldiers not to kill
+  them, but to take them alive: by which humanity he gained
+  <i>Pelusium</i>, and soon after all <i>Egypt</i>; entring it with a vast
+  multitude of foot and chariots, elephants and horsemen, and a great navy.
+  Then seizing the cities of <i>Egypt</i> as a friend, he marched to
+  <i>Memphis</i>, laid the whole blame of the war upon <i>Eul�us</i> the
+  King's governor, entred into outward friendship with the young King, and
+  took upon him to order the affairs of the kingdom. While <i>Aniochus</i>
+  was thus employ'd, a report being spread in <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i> that he
+  was dead, <i>Jason</i> to recover the high-Priesthood assaulted
+  <i>Jerusalem</i> with above a thousand men, and took the city: hereupon
+  the King thinking <i>Judea</i> had revolted, came out of <i>Egypt</i> in
+  a furious manner, re-took the city, slew forty thousand of the people,
+  made as many prisoners, and sold them to raise money; went into the
+  Temple, spoiled it of its treasures, ornaments, utensils, and vessels of
+  gold and silver, amounting to 1800 talents; and carried all away to
+  <i>Antioch</i>. This was done in the year of <i>Nabonassar</i> 578, and
+  is thus described by <i>Daniel</i>. <a name="NtpDanXII_9"
+  href="#NtDanXII_9"><sup>[9]</sup></a> <i>And he shall stir up his power,
+  and his courage against the King of the </i>South<i> with a great army;
+  and the King of the </i>South<i> shall be stirrd up to battle with a very
+  great and mighty army; but he shall not stand: for they</i>, even
+  <i>Antiochus</i> and his friends, <i>shall forecast devices against
+  him</i>, as is represented above; <i>yea, they that feed of the portion
+  of his meat, shall</i> betray and <i>destroy him, and his army shall be
+  overthrown, and many shall fall down slain. And both these Kings hearts
+  shall be to do mischief; and they</i>, being now made friends, <i>shall
+  speak lyes at one table</i>, against the <i>Jews</i> and against the holy
+  covenant; <i>but it shall not prosper: for yet the end</i>, in which the
+  setting up of the abomination of desolation is to prosper, <i>shall be at
+  the time appointed. Then shall he return into his land with great riches,
+  and his heart shall be against the holy covenant; and he shall act</i>,
+  against it by spoiling the Temple, <i>and return into his own
+  land</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Egyptians</i> of <i>Alexandria</i> seeing <i>Philometor</i>
+  first educated in luxury by the Eunuch <i>Eul�us</i>, and now in the
+  hands of <i>Antiochus</i>, gave the kingdom to <i>Euergetes</i>, the
+  younger brother of <i>Philometor</i>. Whereupon <i>Antiochus</i>
+  pretending to restore <i>Philometor</i>, made war upon <i>Euergetes</i>;
+  beat him at sea, and besieged him and his sister <i>Cleopatra</i> in
+  <i>Alexandria</i>: while the besieged Princes sent to <i>Rome</i> to
+  implore the assistance of the Senate. <i>Antiochus</i> finding himself
+  unable to take the city that year, returned into <i>Syria</i>, leaving
+  <i>Philometor</i> at <i>Memphis</i> to govern <i>Egypt</i> in his
+  absence. But <i>Philometor</i> made friendship with his brother that
+  winter; and <i>Antiochus</i>, returning the next spring <i>An.
+  Nabonass.</i> 580, to besiege both the brothers in <i>Alexandria</i>, was
+  met in the way by the <i>Roman</i> Ambassadors, <i>Popilius L�na</i>,
+  <i>C. Decimius</i>, and <i>C. Hostilius</i>: he offered them his hand to
+  kiss, but <i>Popilius</i> delivering to him the tables wherein the
+  message of the Senate was written, bad him read those first. When he had
+  read them, he replied he would consider with his friends what was fit to
+  be done; but <i>Popilius</i> drawing a circle about him, bad him answer
+  before he went out of it: <i>Antiochus</i>, astonished at this blunt and
+  unusual imperiousness, made answer he would do what the <i>Romans</i>
+  demanded; and then <i>Popilius</i> gave the King his hand to kiss, and he
+  returned out of <i>Egypt</i>. The same year, <i>An. Nabonass.</i> 580,
+  his captains by his order spoiled and slaughtered the <i>Jews</i>,
+  profaned the Temple, set up the worship of the heathen Gods in all
+  <i>Judea</i>, and began to persecute and make war upon those who would
+  not worship them: which actions are thus described by <i>Daniel</i>. <a
+  name="NtpDanXII_10" href="#NtDanXII_10"><sup>[10]</sup></a> <i>At the
+  time appointed he shall come</i> again <i>towards the </i>South<i>, but
+  the latter shall not be as the former. For the ships of </i>Chittim<i>
+  shall come</i>, with an embassy from <i>Rome</i>, <i>against him.
+  Therefore he shall be grieved, and return, and have indignation against
+  the holy covenant. So shall he do; he shall even return, and have
+  intelligence with them that forsake the holy covenant.</i></p>
+
+  <p>In the same year that <i>Antiochus</i> by the command of the
+  <i>Romans</i> retired out of <i>Egypt</i>, and set up the worship of the
+  <i>Greeks</i> in <i>Judea</i>; the <i>Romans</i> conquered the kingdom of
+  <i>Macedon</i>, the fundamental kingdom of the Empire of the
+  <i>Greeks</i>, and reduced it into a <i>Roman</i> Province; and thereby
+  began to put an end to the reign of <i>Daniel</i>'s third Beast. This is
+  thus exprest by <i>Daniel</i>. <i>And after him Arms</i>, that is the
+  <i>Romans</i>, <i>shall stand up</i>. As <span lang="he" title="MMLK"
+  ><bdo dir="rtl">&#x5DE;&#x5DE;&#x5DC;&#x5DA;</bdo></span> signifies
+  <i>after the King</i>, Dan. xi. 8; so <span lang="he" title="MMNW" ><bdo
+  dir="rtl">&#x5DE;&#x5DE;&#x5E0;&#x5D5;</bdo></span> may signify <i>after
+  him</i>. <i>Arms</i> are every where in this Prophecy of <i>Daniel</i>
+  put for the military power of a kingdom: and they stand up when they
+  conquer and grow powerful. Hitherto <i>Daniel</i> described the actions
+  of the Kings of the <i>North</i> and <i>South</i>; but upon the conquest
+  of <i>Macedon</i> by the <i>Romans</i>, he left off describing the
+  actions of the <i>Greeks</i>, and began to describe those of the
+  <i>Romans</i> in <i>Greece</i>. They conquered <i>Macedon</i>,
+  <i>Illyricum</i> and <i>Epirus</i>, in the year of <i>Nabonassar</i> 580.
+  35 years after, by the last will and testament of <i>Attalus</i> the last
+  King of <i>Pergamus</i>, they inherited that rich and flourishing
+  kingdom, that is, all <i>Asia</i> westward of mount <i>Taurus</i>; 69
+  years after they conquered the kingdom of <i>Syria</i>, and reduced it
+  into a Province, and 34 years after they did the like to <i>Egypt</i>. By
+  all these steps the <i>Roman</i> Arms stood up over the <i>Greeks</i>:
+  and after 95 years more, by making war upon the <i>Jews</i>, <i>they
+  polluted the sanctuary of strength, and took away the daily sacrifice,
+  and then placed the abomination of desolation</i>. For this abomination
+  was placed after the days of <i>Christ</i>, <i>Math.</i> xxiv. 15. In the
+  16th year of the Emperor <i>Adrian</i>, A.C. 132, they placed this
+  abomination by building a Temple to <i>Jupiter Capitolinus</i>, where the
+  Temple of God in <i>Jerusalem</i> had stood. Thereupon the <i>Jews</i>
+  under the conduct of <i>Barchochab</i> rose up in arms against the
+  <i>Romans</i>, and in the war had 50 cities demolished, 985 of their best
+  towns destroyed, and 580000 men slain by the sword; and in the end of the
+  war, A.C. 136, were banished <i>Judea</i> upon pain of death, and
+  thenceforward the land remained desolate of its old inhabitants.</p>
+
+  <p>In the beginning of the <i>Jewish</i> war in <i>Nero</i>'s reign, the
+  Apostles fled out of <i>Judea</i> with their flocks; some beyond
+  <i>Jordan</i> to <i>Pella</i> and other places, some into <i>Egypt</i>,
+  <i>Syria</i>, <i>Mesopotamia</i>, <i>Asia minor</i>, and elsewhere.
+  <i>Peter</i> and <i>John</i> came into <i>Asia</i>, and <i>Peter</i> went
+  thence by <i>Corinth</i> to <i>Rome</i>; but <i>John</i> staying in
+  <i>Asia</i>, was banished by the <i>Romans</i> into <i>Patmos</i>, as the
+  head of a party of the <i>Jews</i>, whose nation was in war with the
+  <i>Romans</i>. By this dispersion of the <i>Christian Jews</i>, the
+  <i>Christian</i> religion, which was already propagated westward as far
+  as <i>Rome</i>, spred fast into all the <i>Roman</i> Empire, and suffered
+  many persecutions under it till the days of <i>Constantine</i> the great
+  and his sons: all which is thus described by <i>Daniel</i>. <a
+  name="NtpDanXII_11" href="#NtDanXII_11"><sup>[11]</sup></a> <i>And such
+  as do wickedly against the covenant, shall he</i>, who places the
+  abomination, <i>cause to dissemble</i>, and worship the heathen Gods;
+  <i>but the people</i> among them <i>who do know their God, shall be
+  strong and act. And they that understand among the people, shall instruct
+  many: yet they shall fall by the sword, and by flame, and by captivity,
+  and by spoil many days. Now when they shall fall, they shall be holpen
+  with a little help, viz.</i> in the reign of <i>Constantine</i> the
+  great; <i>and</i> at that time by reason of their prosperity, <i>many
+  shall</i> come over to them from among the heathen, and <i>cleave to them
+  with dissimulation. But of those of understanding there shall</i> still
+  <i>fall to try</i> God's people <i>by them and to purge</i> them from the
+  dissemblers, <i>and to make them white even to the time of the end:
+  because it is yet for a time appointed.</i></p>
+
+  <p>Hitherto the <i>Roman</i> Empire continued entire; and under this
+  dominion, the little horn of the He-Goat continued <i>mighty, but not by
+  his own power</i>. But now, by the building of <i>Constantinople</i>, and
+  endowing it with a Senate and other like privileges with <i>Rome</i>; and
+  by the division of the <i>Roman</i> Empire into the two Empires of the
+  <i>Greeks</i> and <i>Latins</i>, headed by those two cities; a new scene
+  of things commences, in which which <a name="NtpDanXII_12"
+  href="#NtDanXII_12"><sup>[12]</sup></a> <i>a King</i>, the Empire of the
+  <i>Greeks</i>, <i>doth according to his will, and</i>, by setting his own
+  laws above the laws of God, <i>exalts and magnifies himself above every
+  God, and speaks marvellous things against the God of Gods, and shall
+  prosper till the indignation be accomplished.&mdash;Neither shall he
+  regard the God of his fathers, nor the</i> lawful <i>desire of women</i>
+  in matrimony, <i>nor any God, but shall magnify himself above all. And in
+  his seat he shall honour </i>Mahuzzims, that is, strong guardians, the
+  souls of the dead; <i>even with a God whom his fathers knew not shall he
+  honour them</i>, in their Temples, <i>with gold and silver, and with
+  precious stones and valuable things</i>. All which relates to the
+  overspreading of the <i>Greek</i> Empire with Monks and Nuns, who placed
+  holiness in abstinence from marriage; and to the invocation of saints and
+  veneration of their reliques, and such like superstitions, which these
+  men introduced in the fourth and fifth centuries. <a name="NtpDanXII_13"
+  href="#NtDanXII_13"><sup>[13]</sup></a> <i>And at the time of the end the
+  King of the</i> South, or the Empire of the <i>Saracens</i>, <i>shall
+  push at him</i>; <i>and the King of the</i> North, or Empire of the
+  <i>Turks</i>, <i>shall come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots
+  and with horsemen, and with many ships</i>; <i>and be shall enter into
+  the countries</i> of the <i>Greeks</i>, <i>and shall overflow and pass
+  over. He shall enter also into the glorious land, and many countries
+  shall be overthrown; but these shall escape out of his hand, even
+  </i>Edom<i> and </i>Moab<i>, and the chief of the children</i> Ammon:
+  that is, those to whom his Caravans pay tribute. <i>He shall stretch
+  forth his hand also upon the countries, and the land of </i>Egypt<i>
+  shall not escape</i>; <i>but he shall have power over the treasures of
+  gold and silver, and over all the precious things of </i>Egypt<i>; and
+  the </i>Lybians<i> and </i>Ethiopians<i> shall be at his steps</i>. All
+  these nations compose the Empire of the <i>Turks</i>, and therefore this
+  Empire is here to be understood by the King of the <i>North</i>. They
+  compose also the body of the He-Goat; and therefore the Goat still reigns
+  in his last horn, but not by his own power.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. XII.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_1" href="#NtpDanXII_1">[1]</a> Chap. xi. 2, 3,
+  4.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_2" href="#NtpDanXII_2">[2]</a> Chap. xi. 5.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_3" href="#NtpDanXII_3">[3]</a> Chap. xi. 6, 7,
+  8.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_4" href="#NtpDanXII_4">[4]</a> Chap. xi. 10,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_5" href="#NtpDanXII_5">[5]</a> Chap. xi. 13-19.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_6" href="#NtpDanXII_6">[6]</a> Chap. xi. 20.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_7" href="#NtpDanXII_7">[7]</a> Chap. xi. 21,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_8" href="#NtpDanXII_8">[8]</a> 2 Maccab. iii. 5, 8.
+  &amp; iv. 4.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_9" href="#NtpDanXII_9">[9]</a> Chap. xi. 25,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_10" href="#NtpDanXII_10">[10]</a> Chap. xi. 29,
+  30.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_11" href="#NtpDanXII_11">[11]</a> Chap. xi. 32,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_12" href="#NtpDanXII_12">[12]</a> Chap. xi. 36,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXII_13" href="#NtpDanXII_13">[13]</a> Chap. xi. 40,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanXIII">CHAP. XIII</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the King who did according to his
+will, and magnified himself above
+every God, and honoured </i>Mahuzzims<i>,
+and regarded not the desire of women</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>In the first ages of the Christian religion the Christians of every
+  city were governed by a Council of Presbyters, and the President of the
+  Council was the Bishop of the city. The Bishop and Presbyters of one city
+  meddled not with the affairs of another city, except by admonitory
+  letters or messages. Nor did the Bishops of several cities meet together
+  in Council before the time of the Emperor <i>Commodus</i>: for they could
+  not meet together without the leave of the <i>Roman</i> governors of the
+  Provinces. But in the days of that Emperor they began to meet in
+  Provincial Councils, by the leave of the governors; first in <i>Asia</i>,
+  in opposition to the <i>Cataphrygian</i> Heresy, and soon after in other
+  places and upon other occasions. The Bishop of the chief city, or
+  Metropolis of the <i>Roman</i> Province, was usually made President of
+  the Council; and hence came the authority of Metropolitan Bishops above
+  that of other Bishops within the same Province. Hence also it was that
+  the Bishop of <i>Rome</i> in <i>Cyprian</i>'s days called himself the
+  Bishop of Bishops. As soon as the Empire became Christian, the
+  <i>Roman</i> Emperors began to call general Councils out of all the
+  Provinces of the Empire; and by prescribing to them what points they
+  should consider, and influencing them by their interest and power, they
+  set up what party they pleased. Hereby the <i>Greek</i> Empire, upon the
+  division of the <i>Roman</i> Empire into the <i>Greek</i> and
+  <i>Latin</i> Empires, became <i>the King who</i>, in matters of religion,
+  <i>did according to his will</i>; <i>and</i>, in legislature, <i>exalted
+  and magnified himself above every God</i>: and at length, by the seventh
+  general Council, established the worship of the images and souls of dead
+  men, here called <i>Mahuzzims</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The same King placed holiness in abstinence from marriage.
+  <i>Eusebius</i> in his Ecclesiastical history <a name="NtpDanXIII_1"
+  href="#NtDanXIII_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> tells us, that <i>Musanus</i>
+  wrote a tract against those who fell away to the heresy of the
+  <i>Encratites</i>, which was then newly risen, and had introduced
+  pernicious errors; and that <i>Tatian</i>, the disciple of <i>Justin</i>,
+  was the author thereof; and that <i>Iren�us</i> in his first book against
+  heresies teaches this, writing of <i>Tatian</i> and his heresy in these
+  words: <i>A Saturnino &amp; Marcione profecti qui vocantur Continentes,
+  docuerunt non contrahendum esse matrimonium; reprobantes scilicet
+  primitivum illud opificium Dei, &amp; tacit� accusantes Deum qui masculum
+  &amp; f�minam condidit ad procreationem generis humani. Induxerunt etiam
+  abstinentiam ab esu eorum qu� animalia appellant, ingratos se exhibentes
+  ergo eum qui universa creavit Deum. Negant etiam primi hominis salutem.
+  Atque hoc nuper apud illos excogitatum est, Tatiano quodam omnium primo
+  hujus impietatis auctore: qui Justini auditor, quamdiu cum illo versatus
+  est, nihil ejusmodi protulit. Post martyrium autem illius, ab Ecclesia se
+  abrumpens, doctoris arrogantia elatus ac tumidus, tanquam pr�stantior
+  c�teris, novam quandam formam doctrin� conflavit: �onas invisibiles
+  commentus perinde ac Valentinus: asserens quoque cum Saturnino &amp;
+  Marcione, matrimonium nihil aliud esse quam corruptionem ac stuprum: nova
+  pr�terea argumenta ad subvertendam Adami salutem excogitans. H�c Iren�us
+  de H�resi qu� tunc viguit Encratitarum.</i> Thus far <i>Eusebius</i>. But
+  altho the followers of <i>Tatian</i> were at first condemned as hereticks
+  by the name of <i>Encratites</i>, or <i>Continentes</i>; their principles
+  could not be yet quite exploded: for <i>Montanus</i> refined upon them,
+  and made only second marriages unlawful; he also introduced frequent
+  fastings, and annual, fasting days, the keeping of <i>Lent</i>, and
+  feeding upon dried meats. The <i>Apostolici</i>, about the middle of the
+  third century, condemned marriage, and were a branch of the disciples of
+  <i>Tatian</i>. The <i>Hierocit�</i> in <i>Egypt</i>, in the latter end of
+  the third century, also condemned marriage. <i>Paul</i> the
+  <i>Eremite</i> fled into the wilderness from the persecution of
+  <i>Decius</i>, and lived there a solitary life till the reign of
+  <i>Constantine</i> the great, but made no disciples. <i>Antony</i> did
+  the like in the persecution of <i>Dioclesian</i>, or a little before, and
+  made disciples; and many others soon followed his example.</p>
+
+  <p>Hitherto the principles of the <i>Encratites</i> had been rejected by
+  the Churches; but now being refined by the Monks, and imposed not upon
+  all men, but only upon those who would voluntarily undertake a monastic
+  life, they began to be admired, and to overflow first the <i>Greek</i>
+  Church, and then the <i>Latin</i> also, like a torrent. <i>Eusebius</i>
+  tells us, <a name="NtpDanXIII_2" href="#NtDanXIII_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a>
+  that <i>Constantine</i> the great had those men in the highest
+  veneration, who dedicated themselves wholly to the divine philosophy; and
+  that he almost venerated the most holy company of Virgins perpetually
+  devoted to God; being certain that the God to whom he had consecrated
+  himself did dwell in their minds. In his time and that of his sons, this
+  profession of a single life was propagated in <i>Egypt</i> by
+  <i>Antony</i>, and in <i>Syria</i> by <i>Hilarion</i>; and spred so fast,
+  that soon after the time of <i>Julian</i> the Apostate a third part of
+  the <i>Egyptians</i> were got into the desarts of <i>Egypt</i>. They
+  lived first singly in cells, then associated into <i>c&#339;nobia</i> or
+  convents; and at length came into towns, and filled the Churches with
+  Bishops, Presbyters and Deacons. <i>Athanasius</i> in his younger days
+  poured water upon the hands of his master <i>Antony</i>; and finding the
+  Monks faithful to him, made many of them Bishops and Presbyters in
+  <i>Egypt</i>: and these Bishops erected new Monasteries, out of which
+  they chose Presbyters of their own cities, and sent Bishops to others.
+  The like was done in <i>Syria</i>, the superstition being quickly
+  propagated thither out of <i>Egypt</i> by <i>Hilarion</i> a disciple of
+  <i>Antony</i>. <i>Spiridion</i> and <i>Epiphanius</i> of <i>Cyprus</i>,
+  <i>James</i> of <i>Nisibis</i>, <i>Cyril</i> of <i>Jerusalem</i>,
+  <i>Eustathius</i> of <i>Sebastia</i> in <i>Armenia</i>, <i>Eusebius</i>
+  of <i>Emisa</i>, <i>Titus</i> of <i>Bostra</i>, <i>Basilius</i> of
+  <i>Ancyra</i>, <i>Acacius</i> of <i>C�sarea</i> in <i>Palestine</i>,
+  <i>Elpidius</i> of <i>Laodicea</i>, <i>Melitius</i> and <i>Flavian</i> of
+  <i>Antioch</i>, <i>Theodorus</i> of <i>Tyre</i>, <i>Protogenes</i> of
+  <i>Carrh�</i>, <i>Acacius</i> of <i>Berrh�a</i>, <i>Theodotus</i> of
+  <i>Hierapolis</i>, <i>Eusebius</i> of <i>Chalcedon</i>,
+  <i>Amphilochius</i> of <i>Iconium</i>, <i>Gregory Nazianzen</i>,
+  <i>Gregory Nyssen</i>, and <i>John Chrysostom</i> of
+  <i>Constantinople</i>, were both Bishops and Monks in the fourth century.
+  <i>Eustathius</i>, <i>Gregory Nazianzen</i>, <i>Gregory Nyssen</i>,
+  <i>Basil</i>, &amp;c. had Monasteries of Clergymen in their cities, out
+  of which Bishops were sent to other cities; who in like manner erected
+  Monasteries there, till the Churches were supplied with Bishops out of
+  these Monasteries. Hence <i>Jerome</i>, in a Letter written about the
+  year 385, <a name="NtpDanXIII_3" href="#NtDanXIII_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a>
+  saith of the Clergy: <i>Quasi &amp; ipsi aliud sint quam Monachi, &amp;
+  non quicquid in Monachos dicitur redundet in Clericos qui patres sunt
+  Monachorum. Detrimentum pecoris pastoris ignominia est</i>. And in his
+  book against <i>Vigilantius</i>: <i>Quid facient Orientis Ecclesi�? Qu�
+  aut Virgines Clericos accipiunt, aut Continentes, aut si uxores habuerint
+  mariti esse desistunt</i>. Not long after even the Emperors commanded the
+  Churches to chuse Clergymen out of the Monasteries by this Law.</p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Impp. Arcad &amp; Honor. AA. C�sario PF. P.</i></p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtpDanXIII_4" href="#NtDanXIII_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> <i>Si
+  quos forte Episcopi deesse sibi Clericos arbitrantur, ex monachorum
+  numero rectius ordinabunt: non obnoxios publicis privatisque rationibus
+  cum invidia teneant, sed habeant jam probatos. Dat. </i>vii.<i> Kal. Aug.
+  Honorio A. </i>iv.<i> &amp; Eutychianio Coss.</i> A.C. 598. The
+  <i>Greek</i> Empire being now in the hands of these <i>Encratites</i>,
+  and having them in great admiration, <i>Daniel</i> makes it a
+  characteristick of the King who doth according to his will, that <i>he
+  should not regard the desire of Women.</i></p>
+
+  <p>Thus the Sect of the <i>Encratites</i>, set on foot by the
+  <i>Gnosticks</i>, and propagated by <i>Tatian</i> and <i>Montanus</i>
+  near the end of the second century; which was condemned by the Churches
+  of that and the third century, and refined upon by their followers;
+  overspread the <i>Eastern</i> Churches in the fourth century, and before
+  the end of it began to overspread the <i>Western</i>. Henceforward the
+  Christian Churches having a form of godliness, but denying the power
+  thereof, came into the hands of the <i>Encratites</i>: and the Heathens,
+  who in the fourth century came over in great numbers to the Christians,
+  embraced more readily this sort of Christianity, as having a greater
+  affinity with their old superstitions, than that of the sincere
+  Christians; who by the lamps of the seven Churches of <i>Asia</i>, and
+  not by the lamps of the Monasteries, had illuminated the Church Catholic
+  during the three first centuries.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Cataphrygians</i> brought in also several other superstitions:
+  such as were the doctrine of Ghosts, and of their punishment in
+  Purgatory, with prayers and oblations for mitigating that punishment, as
+  <i>Tertullian</i> teaches in his books <i>De Anima</i> and <i>De
+  Monogamia</i>. They used also the sign of the cross as a charm. So
+  <i>Tertullian</i> in his book <i>de Corona militis</i>: <i>Ad omnem
+  progressum atque promotum, ad omnem aditum &amp; exitum, ad vestitum, ad
+  calceatum, ad lavacra, ad mensas, ad lamina, ad cubilia, ad sedilia,
+  quacunque nos conversatio exercet, frontem crucis signaculo terimus</i>.
+  All these superstitions the Apostle refers to, where he saith: <i>Now the
+  Spirit speaketh expresly, that in the latter times some shall depart from
+  the faith, giving heed to seducing spirits, and doctrines of devils</i>,
+  the <i>D�mons</i> and Ghosts worshipped by the heathens, <i>speaking lyes
+  in hypocrisy</i>, about their apparitions, the miracles done by them,
+  their reliques, and the sign of the cross, <i>having consciences seared
+  with a hot iron</i>; <i>forbidding to marry, and commanding to abstain
+  from meats</i>, &amp;c. 1 Tim. iv. 1,2,3. From the <i>Cataphrygians</i>
+  these principles and practices were propagated down to posterity. <i>For
+  the mystery of iniquity</i> did <i>already work</i> in the
+  <i>Apostles</i> days in the <i>Gnosticks</i>, continued to work very
+  strongly in their offspring the <i>Tatianists</i> and
+  <i>Cataphrygians</i>, and was to work <i>till that man of sin</i> should
+  <i>be revealed</i>; <i>whose coming is after the working of Satan, with
+  all power and signs, and lying wonders, and all deceivableness of
+  unrighteousness</i>; coloured over with a form of <i>Christian</i>
+  godliness, but without the power thereof, 2 <i>Thess</i>. ii. 7-10.</p>
+
+  <p>For tho some stop was put to the <i>Cataphrygian</i> Christianity, by
+  Provincial Councils, till the fourth century; yet the <i>Roman</i>
+  Emperors then turning <i>Christians</i>, and great multitudes of heathens
+  coming over in outward profession, these found the <i>Cataphrygian</i>
+  Christianity more suitable to their old principles, of placing religion
+  in outward forms and ceremonies, holy-days, and doctrines of Ghosts, than
+  the religion of the sincere <i>Christians</i>: wherefore they readily
+  sided with the <i>Cataphrygian Christians</i>, and established that
+  Christianity before the end of the fourth century. By this means those of
+  understanding, after they had been persecuted by the heathen Emperors in
+  the three first centuries, and <i>were holpen with a little help</i>, by
+  the conversion of <i>Constantine</i> the great and his sons to the
+  <i>Christian</i> religion, fell under new persecutions, <i>to purge
+  them</i> from the dissemblers, <i>and to make them white, even to the
+  time of the end</i>.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. XIII.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIII_1" href="#NtpDanXIII_1">[1]</a> Lib. 4. c. 28,
+  29.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIII_2" href="#NtpDanXIII_2">[2]</a> In vita
+  Constantini, l. 4. c. 28.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIII_3" href="#NtpDanXIII_3">[3]</a> Epist. 10.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIII_4" href="#NtpDanXIII_4">[4]</a> L. 32. de
+  Episcopis.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="DanXIV">CHAP. XIV</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the </i>Mahuzzims<i>, honoured by the
+King who doth according to his will</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>In scripture we are told of some <i>trusting in God</i> and others
+  <i>trusting in idols</i>, and that <i>God is our refuge, our strength,
+  our defense</i>. In this sense God is <i>the rock of his people</i>, and
+  false Gods are called <i>the rock of those that trust in them</i>, Deut.
+  xxxii. 4, 15, 18, 30, 31, 37. In the same sense the Gods of <i>the
+  King</i> who <i>shall do according to his will</i> are called
+  <i>Mahuzzims</i>, munitions, fortresses, protectors, guardians, or
+  defenders. <i>In his estate</i>, saith <a name="NtpDanXIV_1"
+  href="#NtDanXIV_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> <i>Daniel</i>, <i>shall he honour
+  </i>Mahuzzims<i>; even with a God whom his fathers knew not, shall he
+  honour them with gold and silver, and with precious stones, and things of
+  value. Thus shall he do in the most strong holds</i> or
+  temples;&mdash;<i>and he shall cause them to rule over many, and divide
+  the land</i> among them <i>for a possession</i>. Now this came to pass by
+  degrees in the following manner.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Gregory Nyssen</i> <a name="NtpDanXIV_2"
+  href="#NtDanXIV_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> tells us, that after the
+  persecution of the Emperor <i>Decius</i>, <i>Gregory</i> Bishop of
+  <i>Neoc�sarea</i> in <i>Pontus</i>, <i>instituted among all people, as an
+  addition or corollary of devotion towards God, that festival days and
+  assemblies should be celebrated to them who had contended for the
+  faith</i>, that is, to the <i>Martyrs</i>. And he adds this reason for
+  the institution: <i>When he observed</i>, saith <i>Nyssen</i>, <i>that
+  the simple and unskilful multitude, by reason of corporeal delights,
+  remained in the error of idols; that the principal thing might be
+  corrected among them, namely, that instead of their vain worship they
+  might turn their eyes upon God; he permitted that at the memories of the
+  holy Martyrs they might make merry and delight themselves, and be
+  dissolved into joy</i>. The heathens were delighted with the festivals of
+  their Gods, and unwilling to part with those delights; and therefore
+  <i>Gregory</i>, to facilitate their conversion, instituted annual
+  festivals to the <i>Saints</i> and <i>Martyrs</i>. Hence it came to pass,
+  that for exploding the festivals of the heathens, the principal festivals
+  of the <i>Christians</i> succeeded in their room: as the keeping of
+  <i>Christmas</i> with ivy and feasting, and playing and sports, in the
+  room of the <i>Bacchanalia</i> and <i>Saturnalia</i>; the celebrating of
+  <i>May-day</i> with flowers, in the room of the <i>Floralia</i>; and the
+  keeping of festivals to the Virgin <i>Mary</i>, <i>John</i> the Baptist,
+  and divers of the Apostles, in the room of the solemnities at the
+  entrance of the Sun into the signs of the <i>Zodiac</i> in the old
+  <i>Julian</i> Calendar. In the same persecution of <i>Decius</i>,
+  <i>Cyprian</i> ordered the passions of the Martyrs in <i>Africa</i> to be
+  registred, in order to celebrate their memories annually with oblations
+  and sacrifices: and <i>Felix</i> Bishop of <i>Rome</i>, a little after,
+  as <i>Platina</i> relates, <i>Martyrum gloria consulens, constituit at
+  quotannis sacrificia eorum nomine celebrarentur</i>; "consulting the
+  glory of the Martyrs, ordained that sacrifices should be celebrated
+  annually in their name." By the pleasures of these festivals the
+  <i>Christians</i> increased much in number, and decreased as much in
+  virtue, until they were <i>purged and made white</i> by the persecution
+  of <i>Dioclesian</i>. This was the first step made in the
+  <i>Christian</i> religion towards the veneration of the Martyrs: and tho
+  it did not yet amount to an unlawful worship; yet it disposed the
+  <i>Christians</i> towards such a further veneration of the dead, as in a
+  short time ended in the invocation of Saints.</p>
+
+  <p>The next step was the affecting to pray at the sepulchres of the
+  Martyrs: which practice began in <i>Dioclesian</i>'s persecution. The
+  Council of <i>Eliberis</i> in <i>Spain</i>, celebrated in the third or
+  fourth year of <i>Dioclesian</i>'s persecution, A.C. 305, hath these
+  Canons. Can. 34. <i>Cereos per diem placuit in C&#339;meterio non
+  incendi: inquietandi enim spiritus sanctorum non sunt. Qui h�c non
+  observ�rint, arceantur ab Ecclesi� communione.</i> Can. 35. <i>Placuit
+  prohiberi ne f�min� in C&#339;meterio pervigilent, e� quod s�pe sub
+  obtentu orationis latent�r scelera committant.</i> Presently after that
+  persecution, suppose about the year 314, the Council of <i>Laodicea</i>
+  in <i>Phrygia</i>, which then met for restoring the lapsed discipline of
+  the Church, has the following Canons. Can. 9. <i>Those of the Church are
+  not allowed to go into the </i>C&#339;meteries<i> or </i>Martyries<i>, as
+  they are called, of hereticks, for the sake of prayer or recovery of
+  health: but such as go, if they be of the faithful, shall be
+  excommunicated for a time</i>. Can. 34. <i>A </i>Christian<i> must not
+  leave the Martyrs of </i>Christ<i>, and go to false Martyrs</i>, that is,
+  to the Martyrs of the hereticks; <i>for these are alien from God: and
+  therefore let those be anathema who go to them</i>. Can. 51. <i>The
+  birth-days of the Martyrs shall not be celebrated in </i>Lent<i>, but
+  their commemoration shall be made on the Sabbath-days and Lords days</i>.
+  The Council of <i>Paphlagonia</i>, celebrated in the year 324, made this
+  Canon: <i>If any man being arrogant, abominates the congregations of the
+  Martyrs, or the Liturgies performed therein, or the memories of the
+  Martyrs, let him be anathema</i>. By all which it is manifest that the
+  <i>Christians</i> in the time of <i>Dioclesian</i>'s persecution used to
+  pray in the <i>C&#339;meteries</i> or burying-places of the dead; for
+  avoiding the danger of the persecution, and for want of Churches, which
+  were all thrown down: and after the persecution was over, continued that
+  practice in honour of the Martyrs, till new Churches could be built: and
+  by use affected it as advantageous to devotion, and for recovering the
+  health of those that were sick. It also appears that in these
+  burying-places they commemorated the Martyrs yearly upon days dedicated
+  to them, and accounted all these practices pious and religious, and
+  anathematized those men as arrogant who opposed them, or prayed in the
+  <i>Martyries</i> of the hereticks. They also lighted torches to the
+  Martyrs in the day-time, as the heathens did to their Gods; which custom,
+  before the end of the fourth century, prevailed much in the <i>West</i>.
+  They sprinkled the worshipers of the Martyrs with holy-water, as the
+  heathens did the worshipers of their Gods; and went in pilgrimage to see
+  <i>Jerusalem</i> and other holy places, as if those places conferred
+  sanctity on the visiters. From the custom of praying in the
+  <i>C&#339;meteries</i> and <i>Martyries</i>, came the custom of
+  translating the bodies of the Saints and Martyrs into such Churches as
+  were new built: the Emperor <i>Constantius</i> began this practice about
+  the year 359, causing the bodies of <i>Andrew</i> the Apostle,
+  <i>Luke</i> and <i>Timothy</i>, to be translated into a new Church at
+  <i>Constantinople</i>: and before this act of <i>Constantius</i>, the
+  <i>Egyptians</i> kept the bodies of their Martyrs and Saints unburied
+  upon beds in their private houses, and told stories of their souls
+  appearing after death and ascending up to heaven, as <i>Athanasius</i>
+  relates in the life of <i>Antony</i>. All which gave occasion to the
+  Emperor <i>Julian</i>, as <i>Cyril</i> relates, to accuse the
+  <i>Christians</i> in this manner: <i>Your adding to that antient dead
+  man, Jesus, many new dead men, who can sufficiently abominate? You have
+  filled all places with sepulchres and monuments, altho you are no where
+  bidden to prostrate yourselves to sepulchres, and to respect them
+  officiously.</i> And a little after: <i>Since </i>Jesus<i> said that
+  sepulchres are full of filthiness, how do you invoke God upon them</i>?
+  and in another place he saith, that if <i>Christians</i> had adhered to
+  the precepts of the <i>Hebrews</i>, <i>they would have worshiped one God
+  instead of many, and not a man, or rather not many unhappy men</i>: And
+  that they <i>adored the wood of the cross, making its images on their
+  foreheads, and before their houses</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>After the sepulchres of Saints and Martyrs were thus converted into
+  places of worship like the heathen temples, and the Churches into
+  sepulchres, and a certain sort of sanctity attributed to the dead bodies
+  of the Saints and Martyrs buried in them, and annual festivals were kept
+  to them, with sacrifices offered to God in their name; the next step
+  towards the invocation of Saints, was the attributing to their dead
+  bodies, bones and other reliques, a power of working miracles, by means
+  of the separate souls, who were supposed to know what we do or say, and
+  to be able to do us good or hurt, and to work those miracles. This was
+  the very notion the heathens had of the separate souls of their antient
+  Kings and Heroes, whom they worshiped under the names of <i>Saturn</i>,
+  <i>Rhea</i>, <i>Jupiter</i>, <i>Juno</i>, <i>Mars</i>, <i>Venus</i>,
+  <i>Bacchus</i>, <i>Ceres</i>, <i>Osiris</i>, <i>Isis</i>, <i>Apollo</i>,
+  <i>Diana</i>, and the rest of their Gods. For these Gods being male and
+  female, husband and wife, son and daughter, brother and sister, are
+  thereby discovered to be antient men and women. Now as the first step
+  towards the invocation of Saints was set on foot by the persecution of
+  <i>Decius</i>, and the second by the persecution of <i>Dioclesian</i>; so
+  this third seems to have been owing to the proceedings of
+  <i>Constantius</i> and <i>Julian</i> the Apostate. When <i>Julian</i>
+  began to restore the worship of the heathen Gods, and to vilify the
+  Saints and Martyrs; the <i>Christians</i> of <i>Syria</i> and
+  <i>Egypt</i> seem to have made a great noise about the miracles done by
+  the reliques of the <i>Christian</i> Saints and Martyrs, in opposition to
+  the powers attributed by <i>Julian</i> and the heathens to their Idols.
+  For <i>Sozomen</i> and <i>Ruffinus</i> tell us, that when he opened the
+  heathen Temples, and consulted the Oracle of <i>Apollo Daphn�us</i> in
+  the suburbs of <i>Antioch</i>, and pressed by many sacrifices for an
+  answer; the Oracle at length told him that the bones of the Martyr
+  <i>Babylas</i> which were buried there hinder'd him from speaking. By
+  which answer we may understand, that some <i>Christian</i> was got into
+  the place where the heathen Priests used to speak thro' a pipe in
+  delivering their Oracles: and before this, <i>Hilary</i> in his book
+  against <i>Constantius</i>, written in the last year of that Emperor,
+  makes the following mention of what was then doing in the <i>East</i>
+  where he was. <i>Sine martyrio persequeris. Plus crudelitati vestr�
+  </i>Nero<i>, </i>Deci<i>, </i>Maximiane<i>, debemus. Diabolum enim per
+  vos vicimus. Sanctus ubique beatorum martyrum sanguis exceptus est, dum
+  in his D�mones mugiunt, dum �gritudines depelluntur, dum miraculorum
+  opera cernuntur, elevari sine laqueis corpora, &amp; dispensis pede
+  f�minis vestes non defluere in faciem, uri sine ignibus spiritus,
+  confiteri sine interrogantis incremento fidei</i>. And <i>Gregory
+  Nazianzen</i>, in his first Oration against the Emperor <i>Julian</i>
+  then reigning, writes thus: <i>Martyres non extimuisti quibus pr�clari
+  honores &amp; festa constituta, � quibus D�mones propelluntur &amp; morbi
+  curantur; quorum sunt apparitiones &amp; pr�dictiones; quorum vel sola
+  corpora idem possunt quod anim� sanct�, sive manibus contrectentur, sive
+  honorentur: quorum vel sol� sanguinis gutt� atque exigua passionis signa
+  idem possunt quod corpora. H�c non colis sed contemnis &amp;
+  aspernaris</i>. These things made the heathens in the reign of the same
+  Emperor demolish the sepulchre of <i>John</i> the Baptist in
+  <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i>, and burn his bones; when several <i>Christians</i>
+  mixing themselves with the heathens, gathered up some of his remains,
+  which were sent to <i>Athanasius</i>, who hid them in the wall of a
+  Church; foreseeing by a prophetic spirit, as <i>Ruffinus</i> tells us,
+  that they might be profitable to future generations.</p>
+
+  <p>The cry of these miracles being once set on foot, continued for many
+  years, and encreased and grew more general. <i>Chrysostom</i>, in his
+  second Oration on St. <i>Babylas</i>, twenty years after the silencing of
+  the Oracle of <i>Apollo Daphn�us</i> as above, <i>viz.</i> A.C. 382,
+  saith of the miracles done by the Saints and their reliques <a
+  name="NtpDanXIV_3" href="#NtDanXIV_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a>: <i>Nulla est
+  nostri hujus Orbis seu regio, seu gens, seu urbs, ubi nova &amp;
+  inopinata miracula h�c non decantentur; qu� quidem si figmenta fuissent,
+  prorsus in tantam hominum admirationem non venissent</i>. And a little
+  after: <i>Abunde orationi nostr� fidem faciunt qu� quotidiana �
+  martyribus miracula eduntur, magna affatim ad illa hominum multitudine
+  affluente</i>. And in his 66th Homily, describing how the Devils were
+  tormented and cast out by the bones of the Martyrs, he adds: <i>Ob eam
+  causam multi plerumque Reges peregr� profecti sunt, ut hoc spectaculo
+  fruerentur. Siquidem sanctorum martyrum templa futuri judicii vestigia
+  &amp; signa exhibent, dum nimirum D�mones flagris c�duntur, hominesque
+  torquentur &amp; liberantur. Vide qu� sanctorum vit� functorum vis
+  sit?</i> And <i>Jerom</i> in his Epitaph on <i>Paula</i>, thus <a
+  name="NtpDanXIV_4" href="#NtDanXIV_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> mentions the
+  same things. <i>Paula vidit Samariam: ibi siti sunt Elis�us &amp; Abdias
+  prophet�, &amp; Joannes Baptista, ubi multis intremuit consternata
+  miraculis. Nam cernebat variis d�mones rugire cruciatibus, &amp; ante
+  sepulchra sanctorum ululare, homines more luporum vocibus latrare canum,
+  fremere leonum, sibilare serpentum, mugire taurorum, alios rotare caput
+  &amp; post tergum terram vertice tangere, suspensisque pede f�minis
+  vestes non defluere in faciem</i>. This was about the year 384: and
+  <i>Chrysostom</i> in his Oration on the <i>Egyptian</i> Martyrs, seems to
+  make <i>Egypt</i> the ringleader in these matters, saying <a
+  name="NtpDanXIV_5" href="#NtDanXIV_5"><sup>[5]</sup></a>: <i>Benedictus
+  Deus quandoquidem ex �gypto prodeunt martyres, ex �gypto illa cum Deo
+  pugnante ac insanissima, &amp; unde impia ora, unde lingu� blasphem�; ex
+  �gypto martyres habentur; non in �gypto tantum, nec in finitima vicinaque
+  regione, sed </i>UBIQUE TERRARUM<i>. Et quemadmodum in annon� summa
+  ubertate, cum viderunt urbium incol� majorem quam usus habitatorum
+  postulat esse proventum, ad peregrinas etiam urbes transmittunt: cum
+  &amp; suam comitatem &amp; liberalitatem ostendant, tum ut pr�ter horum
+  abundantiam cum facilitate res quibus indigent rursus ab illis sibi
+  comparent: sic &amp; �gyptii, quod attinet ad religionis athletas,
+  fecerunt. Cum apud se multam eorum Dei benignitate copiam cernerent,
+  nequaquam ingens Dei munus sua civitate concluserunt, sed in </i>OMNES
+  TERR� PARTES<i> bonorum thesauros effuderunt: cum ut suum in fratres
+  amorem ostenderent, tum ut communem omnium dominum honore afficerent, ac
+  civitati su� gloriam apud omnes compararent, totiusque terrarum
+  </i>ORBIS<i> esse </i>METROPOLIN<i> declararent.&mdash;Sanctorum enim
+  illorum corpora quovis adamantino &amp; inexpugnabili muro tuti�s nobis
+  urbem communiunt, &amp; tanquam excelsi quidam scopuli undique
+  prominentes, non horum qui sub sensus cadunt &amp; oculis cernuntur
+  hostium impetus propulsant tant�m, sed etiam invisibilium d�monum
+  insidias, omnesque diaboli fraudes subvertunt ac dissipant.&mdash;Neque
+  vero tant�m adversus hominum insidias aut adversus fallacias d�monum
+  utilis nobis est h�c possessio, sed si nobis communis dominus ob
+  peccatorum multitudinem irascatur, his objectis corporibus continuo
+  poterimus eum propitium reddere civitati</i>. This Oration was written at
+  <i>Antioch</i>, while <i>Alexandria</i> was yet the Metropolis of the
+  <i>East</i>, that is, before the year 381, in which <i>Constantinople</i>
+  became the Metropolis: and it was a work of some years for the
+  <i>Egyptians</i> to have distributed the miracle-working reliques of
+  their Martyrs over all the world, as they had done before that year.
+  <i>Egypt</i> abounded most with the reliques of Saints and Martyrs, the
+  <i>Egyptians</i> keeping them embalmed upon beds even in their private
+  houses; and <i>Alexandria</i> was eminent above all other cities for
+  dispersing them, so as on that account to acquire glory with all men, and
+  manifest herself to be the <i>Metropolis</i> of the world. <i>Antioch</i>
+  followed the example of <i>Egypt</i>, in dispersing the reliques of the
+  forty Martyrs: and the examples of <i>Egypt</i> and <i>Syria</i> were
+  soon followed by the rest of the world.</p>
+
+  <p>The reliques of the forty Martyrs at <i>Antioch</i> were distributed
+  among the Churches before the year 373; for <i>Athanasius</i> who died in
+  that year, wrote an Oration upon them. This Oration is not yet published,
+  but <i>Gerard Vossius</i> saw it in MS. in the Library of Cardinal
+  <i>Ascanius</i> in <i>Italy</i>, as he says in his commentary upon the
+  Oration of <i>Ephr�m Syrus</i> on the same forty Martyrs. Now since the
+  Monks of <i>Alexandria</i> sent the reliques of the Martyrs of
+  <i>Egypt</i> into all parts of the earth, and thereby acquired glory to
+  their city, and declared her in these matters the Metropolis of the whole
+  world, as we have observed out of <i>Chrysostom</i>; it may be concluded,
+  that before <i>Alexandria</i> received the forty Martyrs from
+  <i>Antioch</i>, she began to send out the reliques of her own Martyrs
+  into all parts, setting the first example to other cities. This practice
+  therefore began in <i>Egypt</i> some years before the death of
+  <i>Athanasius</i>. It began when the miracle-working bones of <i>John</i>
+  the Baptist were carried into <i>Egypt</i>, and hid in the wall of a
+  Church, <i>that they might be profitable to future generations</i>. It
+  was restrained in the reign of <i>Julian</i> the Apostate: and then it
+  spred from <i>Egypt</i> into all the Empire, <i>Alexandria</i> being the
+  Metropolis of the whole world, according to <i>Chrysostom</i>, for
+  propagating this sort of devotion, and <i>Antioch</i> and other cities
+  soon following her example.</p>
+
+  <p>In propagating these superstitions, the ring-leaders were the Monks,
+  and <i>Antony</i> was at the head of them: for in the end of the life of
+  <i>Antony</i>, <i>Athanasius</i> relates that these were his dying words
+  to his disciples who then attended him. <i>Do you take care</i>, said
+  <i>Antony</i>, <i>to adhere to </i>Christ<i> in the first place, and then
+  to the Saints, that after death they may receive you as friends and
+  acquaintance into the everlasting tabernacles, Think upon these things,
+  perceive these things; and if you have any regard to me, remember me as a
+  father</i>. This being delivered in charge to the Monks by <i>Antony</i>
+  at his death, A.C. 356, could not but inflame their whole body with
+  devotion towards the Saints, as the ready way to be received, by them
+  into the eternal Tabernacles after death. Hence came that noise about the
+  miracles, done by the reliques of the Saints in the time of
+  <i>Constantius</i>: hence came the dispersion of the miracle-working
+  reliques into all the Empire; <i>Alexandria</i> setting the example, and
+  being renowned, for it above all other cities. Hence it came to pass in
+  the days of <i>Julian</i>, A.C. 362, that <i>Athanasius</i> by a
+  prophetic spirit, as <i>Ruffinus</i> tells us, hid the bones of
+  <i>John</i> the Baptist from the Heathens, not in the ground to be
+  forgotten, but in the hollow wall of a Church before proper witnesses,
+  that they might <i>be profitable to future generations</i>. Hence also
+  came the invocation of the Saints for doing such miracles, and for
+  assisting men in their devotions, and mediating with God. For
+  <i>Athanasius</i>, even from his youth, looked upon the dead Saints and
+  Martyrs as mediators of our prayers: in his Epistle to
+  <i>Marcellinus</i>, written in the days of <i>Constantine</i> the great,
+  he saith that the words of the <i>Psalms</i> are not to be transposed or
+  any wise changed, but to be recited and sung without any artifice, as
+  they are written, <i>that the holy men who delivered them, knowing them
+  to be their own words, may pray with us; or rather, that the Holy Ghost
+  who spake in the holy men, seeing his own words with which he inspired
+  them, may join</i> with them <i>in assisting us</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>Whilst <i>Egypt</i> abounded with Monks above any other country, the
+  veneration of the Saints began sooner, and spred faster there than in
+  other places. <i>Palladius</i> going into <i>Egypt</i> in the year 388 to
+  visit the Monasteries, and the sepulchres of <i>Apollonius</i> and other
+  Martyrs of <i>Thebais</i> who had suffered under <i>Maximinus</i>, saith
+  of them: <i>Iis omnibus Christiani fecerunt �dem unam, ubi nunc mult�
+  virtutes peraguntur. Tanta autem fuit viri gratia, ut de iis qu� esset
+  precatus statim exaudiretur, eum sic honorante servatore: quem etiam nos
+  in martyrio precati vidimus, cum iis qui cum ipso fuerunt martyrio
+  affecti; &amp; Deum adorantes, eorum corpora salutavimus.</i>
+  <i>Eunapius</i> also, a heathen, yet a competent witness of what was done
+  in his own times, relating how the soldiers delivered the temples of
+  <i>Egypt</i> into the hands of the Monks, which was done in the year 389,
+  rails thus in an impious manner at the Martyrs, as succeeding in the room
+  of the old Gods of <i>Egypt</i>. <i>Illi ipsi, </i>milites<i>, Monachos
+  Canobi quoque colloc�runt, ut pro Diis qui animo cernuntur, servos &amp;
+  quidem flagitiosos divinis honoribus percolerent, hominum mentibus ad
+  cultum ceremoniasque obligatis. Ii namque condita &amp; salita eorum
+  capita, qui ob scelerum multitudinem � judicibus extremo judicio fuerant
+  affecti, pro Divis ostentabant; iis genua submittebant, eos in Deorum
+  numerum receptabant, ad illorum sepulchra pulvere sordibusque
+  conspurcati. Martyres igitur vocabantur, &amp; ministri quidem &amp;
+  legati arbitrique precum apud Deos; cum fuerint servilia infida &amp;
+  flagris pessim� subacta, qu� cicatrices scelerum ac nequiti� vestigia
+  corporibus circumferunt; ejusmodi tamen Deos fert tellus</i>. By these
+  instances we may understand the invocation of Saints was now of some
+  standing in <i>Egypt</i>, and that it was already generally received and
+  practised there by the common people.</p>
+
+  <p>Thus <i>Basil</i> a Monk, who was made Bishop of <i>C�sarea</i> in the
+  year 369, and died in the year 378, in his Oration on the Martyr
+  <i>Mamas</i>, saith: <i>Be ye mindful of the Martyr; as many of you as
+  have enjoyed him in your dreams, as many as in this place have been
+  assisted by him in prayer, as many of you as upon invoking him by name
+  have had him present in your works, as many as he has reduced into the
+  way from wandering, as many as he has restored to health, as, many as
+  have had their dead children restored by him to life, as many as have had
+  their lives prolonged by him</i>: and a little after, he thus expresses
+  the universality of this superstition in the regions of <i>Cappadocia</i>
+  and <i>Bithynia</i>: <i>At the memory of the Martyr</i>, saith he, <i>the
+  whole region is moved; at his festival the whole city is transported with
+  joy. Nor do the kindred of the rich turn aside to the sepulchres of their
+  ancestors, but all go to the place of devotion.</i> Again, in the end of
+  the Homily he prays, that <i>God would preserve the Church, thus
+  fortified with the great towers of the Martyrs</i>: and in his Oration on
+  the forty Martyrs; <i>These are they</i>, saith he, <i>who obtaining our
+  country, like certain towers afford us safety against our enemies.
+  Neither are they shut up in one place only, but being distributed are
+  sent into many regions, and adorn many countries.&mdash;You have often
+  endeavoured, you have often laboured to find one who might pray for you:
+  here are forty, emitting one voice of prayer.&mdash;He that is in
+  affliction flies to these, he that rejoices has recourse to these: the
+  first, that he may be freed from evil, the last that he may continue in
+  happiness. Here a woman praying for her children is heard; she obtains a
+  safe return for her husband from abroad, and health for him in his
+  sickness.&mdash;O ye common keepers of mankind, the best companions of
+  our cares, suffragans and coadjutors of our prayers, most powerful
+  embassadors to God</i>, &amp;c. By all which it is manifest, that before
+  the year 378, the Orations and Sermons upon the Saints went much beyond
+  the bounds of mere oratorical flourishes, and that the common people in
+  the <i>East</i> were already generally corrupted by the Monks with
+  Saint-worship.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Gregory Nazianzen</i> a Monk, in his sixth Oration written A.C.
+  373, when he was newly made Bishop of <i>Sasima</i>, saith: <i>Let us
+  purify ourselves to the Martyrs, or rather to the God of the Martyrs</i>:
+  and a little after he calls the Martyrs <i>mediators of obtaining an
+  ascension or divinity</i>. The same year, in the end of his Oration upon
+  <i>Athanasius</i> then newly dead, he thus invokes him: <i>Do thou look
+  down upon us propitiously, and govern this people, as perfect adorers of
+  the perfect Trinity, which in the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, is
+  contemplated and worshiped: if there shall be peace, preserve me, and
+  feed my flock with me; but if war, bring me home, place me by thyself,
+  and by those that are like thee; however great my request.</i> And in the
+  end of the funeral Oration upon <i>Basil</i>, written A.C. 378, he thus
+  addresses him: <i>But thou, O divine and sacred Head, look down upon us
+  from heaven; and by thy prayers either take away that thorn of the flesh
+  which is given us by God for exercise, or obtain that we may bear it with
+  courage, and direct all our life to that which is most fitting for us.
+  When we depart this life, receive us there in your Tabernacles, that
+  living together and beholding the holy and blessed Trinity more purely
+  and perfectly, whereof we have now but an imperfect view, we may there
+  come to the end of our desires, and receive this reward of the wars which
+  we have waged or suffered</i>: and in his Oration upon <i>Cyprian</i>,
+  not the Bishop of <i>Carthage</i>, but a <i>Greek</i>, he invokes him
+  after the same manner; and tells us also how a pious Virgin named
+  <i>Justina</i>, was protected by invoking the Virgin <i>Mary</i>, and how
+  miracles were done by the ashes of <i>Cyprian</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Gregory Nyssen</i>, another eminent Monk and Bishop, in the life of
+  <i>Ephr�m Syrus</i>, tells how a certain man returning from a far
+  country, was in great danger, by reason all the ways were intercepted by
+  the armies of barbarous nations; but upon invoking <i>Ephr�m</i> by name,
+  and saying, <i>Holy </i>Ephr�m<i> assist me</i>, he escaped the danger,
+  neglected the fear of death, and beyond his hope got safe home. In the
+  end of this Oration <i>Gregory</i> calls upon <i>Ephr�m</i> after the
+  following manner: <i>But thou, O Ephr�m, assisting now at the divine
+  altar, and sacrificing to the Prince of life, and to the most holy
+  Trinity, together with the Angels; remember us all, and obtain for us
+  pardon of our sins, that we may enjoy the eternal happiness of the
+  kingdom of heaven.</i> The same <i>Gregory</i>, in his Oration on the
+  Martyr <i>Theodorus</i> written A.C. 381, thus describes the power of
+  that Martyr, and the practice of the people. <i>This Martyr</i>, saith
+  he, <i>the last year quieted the barbarous tempest, and put a stop to the
+  horrid war of the fierce and cruel </i>Scythians<i>.&mdash;If any one is
+  permitted to carry away the dust with which the tomb is covered, wherein
+  the body of the Martyr rests; the dust is accepted as a gift, and
+  gathered to be laid up as a thing of great price. For to touch the
+  reliques themselves, if any such prosperous fortune shall at any time
+  happen; how great a favour that is, and not to be obtained without the
+  most earnest prayers, they know well who have obtained it. For as a
+  living and florid body, they who behold it embrace it, applying to it the
+  eyes, mouth, ears, and all the organs of sense; and then with affection
+  pouring tears upon the Martyr, as if he was whole and appeared to them:
+  they offer prayers with supplication, that he would intercede for them as
+  an advocate, praying to him as an Officer attending upon God, and
+  invoking him as receiving gifts whenever he will.</i> At length
+  <i>Gregory</i> concludes the Oration with this prayer: <i>O Theodorus, we
+  want many blessings; intercede and beseech for thy country before the
+  common King and Lord: for the country of the Martyr is the place of his
+  passion, and they are his citizens, brethren and kindred, who have him,
+  defend, adorn and honour him. We fear afflictions, we expect dangers: the
+  wicked </i>Scythians<i> are not far off, ready to make war against us. As
+  a soldier fight for us, as a Martyr use liberty of speech for thy
+  fellow-servants. Pray for peace, that these publick meetings may not
+  cease, that the furious and wicked barbarian may not rage against the
+  temples and altars, that the profane and impious may not trample upon the
+  holy things. We acknowledge it a benefit received from thee, that we are
+  preserved safe and entire, we pray for freedom from danger in time to
+  come: and if there shall be need of greater intercession and deprecation,
+  call together the choir of thy brethren the Martyrs, and in conjunction
+  with them all intercede for us. Let the prayers of many just ones attone
+  for the sins of the multitudes and the people; exhort </i>Peter<i>,
+  excite </i>Paul<i>, and also </i>John<i> the divine and beloved disciple,
+  that they may be sollicitous for the Churches which they have erected,
+  for which they have been in chains, for which they have undergone dangers
+  and deaths; that the worship of idols may not lift up its head against
+  us, that heresies may not spring up like thorns in the vineyard, that
+  tares grown up may not choak the wheat, that no rock void of the fatness
+  of true dew may be against us, and render the fruitful power of the word
+  void of a root; but by the power of the prayers of thyself and thy
+  companions, O admirable man and eminent among the Martyrs, the
+  commonwealth of </i>Christians<i> may become a field of corn</i>. The
+  same <i>Gregory Nyssen</i>, in his sermon upon the death of
+  <i>Meletius</i> Bishop of <i>Antioch</i>, preached at
+  <i>Constantinople</i> the same year, A.C. 381, before the Bishops of all
+  the <i>East</i> assembled in the second general Council, spake thus of
+  <i>Meletius</i>. <i>The Bridegroom</i>, saith he, <i>is not taken from
+  us: he stands in the midst of us, tho we do not see him: he is a Priest
+  in the most inward places, and face to face intercedes before God for us
+  and the sins of the people</i>. This was no oratorical flourish, but
+  <i>Gregory</i>'s real opinion, as may be understood by what we have cited
+  out of him concerning <i>Ephr�m</i> and <i>Theodorus</i>: and as
+  <i>Gregory</i> preached this before the Council of <i>Constantinople</i>,
+  you may thence know, saith <a name="NtpDanXIV_6"
+  href="#NtDanXIV_6"><sup>[6]</sup></a> <i>Baronius</i>, that he professed
+  what the whole Council, and therewith the whole Church of those parts
+  believed, namely, that the Saints in heaven offer prayers for us before
+  God.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Ephr�m Syrus</i>, another eminent Monk, who was contemporary with
+  <i>Basil</i>, and died the same year; in the end of his Encomium or
+  Oration upon <i>Basil</i> then newly dead, invokes him after this manner:
+  <i>Intercede for me, a very miserable man; and recal me by thy
+  intercessions, O father; thou who art strong, pray for me who am weak;
+  thou who art diligent, for me who am negligent; thou who art chearful,
+  for me who am heavy; thou who art wise, for me who am foolish. Thou who
+  hast treasured up a treasure of all virtues, be a guide to me who am
+  empty of every good work</i>. In the beginning of his Encomium upon the
+  forty Martyrs, written at the same time, he thus invokes them: <i>Help me
+  therefore, O ye Saints, with your intercession; and O ye beloved, with
+  your holy prayers, that </i>Christ<i> by his grace may direct my tongue
+  to speak</i>, &amp;c. and afterwards mentioning the mother of one of
+  these forty Martyrs, he concludes the Oration with this prayer: <i>I
+  entreat thee, O holy, faithful, and blessed woman, pray for me to the
+  Saints, saying; Intercede ye that triumph in </i>Christ<i>, for the most
+  little and miserable </i>Ephr�m<i>, that he may find mercy, and by the
+  grace of </i>Christ<i> may be saved</i>. Again, in his second Sermon or
+  Oration on the praises of the holy Martyrs of <i>Christ</i>, he thus
+  addresses them: <i>We entreat you most holy Martyrs, to intercede with
+  the Lord for us miserable sinners, beset with the filthiness of
+  negligence, that he would infuse his divine grace into us</i>: and
+  afterwards, near the end of the same discourse; <i>Now ye most holy men
+  and glorious Martyrs of God, help me a miserable sinner with your
+  prayers, that in that dreadful hour I may obtain mercy, when the secrets
+  of all hearts shall be made manifest. I am to day become to you, most
+  holy Martyrs of </i>Christ<i>, as it were an unprofitable and unskilful
+  cup-bearer: for I have delivered to the sons and brothers of your faith,
+  a cup of the excellent wine of your warfare, with the excellent table of
+  your victory, replenished with all sorts of dainties. I have endeavoured,
+  with the whole affection and desire of my mind, to recreate your fathers
+  and brothers, kindred and relations, who daily frequent the table. For
+  behold they sing, and with exultation and jubilee glorify God, who has
+  crown'd your virtues, by setting on your most sacred heads incorruptible
+  and celestial crowns; they with excessive joy stand about the sacred
+  reliques of your martyrdoms, wishing for a blessing, and desiring to bear
+  away holy medicines both for the body and the mind. As good disciples and
+  faithful ministers of our benign Lord and Saviour, bestow therefore a
+  blessing on them all: and on me also, tho weak and feeble, who having
+  received strength by your merits and intercessions, have with the whole
+  devotion of my mind, sung a hymn to your praise and glory before your
+  holy reliques. Wherefore I beseech you stand before the throne of the
+  divine Majesty for me </i>Ephr�m<i>, a vile and miserable sinner, that by
+  your prayers I may deserve to obtain salvation, and with you enjoy
+  eternal felicity by the grace and benignity and mercy of our Lord and
+  Saviour </i>Jesus Christ<i>, to whom with the Father and Holy Ghost be
+  praise, honour and glory for ever and ever</i>. Amen.</p>
+
+  <p>By what has been cited out of <i>Basil</i>, the two <i>Gregories</i>
+  and <i>Ephr�m</i>, we may understand that Saint-worship was established
+  among the Monks and their admirers in <i>Egypt</i>, <i>Ph&#339;nicia</i>,
+  <i>Syria</i> and <i>Cappadocia</i>, before the year 378, this being the
+  year in which <i>Basil</i> and <i>Ephr�m</i> died. <i>Chrysostom</i> was
+  not much later; he preached at <i>Antioch</i> almost all the time of
+  <i>Theodosius</i> the great, and in his Sermons are many exhortations to
+  this sort of superstition, as may be seen in the end of his Orations on
+  S. <i>Julia</i>, on St. <i>Pelagia</i>, on the Martyr <i>Ignatius</i>, on
+  the <i>Egyptian</i> Martyrs, on Fate and Providence, on the Martyrs in
+  general, on St. <i>Berenice</i> and St. <i>Prosdoce</i>, on
+  <i>Juventinus</i> and <i>Maximus</i>, on the name of
+  <i>C&#339;metery</i>, &amp;c. Thus in his Sermon on <i>Berenice</i> and
+  <i>Prosdoce</i>: <i>Perhaps</i>, saith he, <i>you are inflamed with no
+  small love towards these Martyrs; therefore with this ardour let us fall
+  down before their reliques, let us embrace their coffins. For the coffins
+  of the Martyrs have great virtue, even as the bones of the Martyrs have
+  great power. Nor let us only on the day of this festival, but also on
+  other days apply to them, invoke them, and beseech them to be our
+  patrons: for they have great power and efficacy, not only whilst alive,
+  but also after death; and much more after death than before. For now they
+  bear the marks or brands of </i>Christ<i>; and when they shew these
+  marks, they can obtain all things of the King. Seeing therefore they
+  abound with such efficacy, and have so much friendship with him; we also,
+  when by continual attendance and perpetual visitation of them we have
+  insinuated ourselves into their familiarity, may by their assistance
+  obtain the mercy of God</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Constantinople</i> was free from these superstitions till
+  <i>Gregory Nazianzen</i> came thither A.D. 379; but in a few years it was
+  also inflamed with it. <i>Ruffinus</i> <a name="NtpDanXIV_7"
+  href="#NtDanXIV_7"><sup>[7]</sup></a> tells us, that when the Emperor
+  <i>Theodosius</i> was setting out against the tyrant <i>Eugenius</i>,
+  which was in the year 394, he went about with the Priests and people to
+  all the places of prayer; lay prostrate in haircloth before the shrines
+  of the Martyrs and Apostles, and pray'd for assistance by the
+  intercession of the Saints. <i>Sozomen</i> <a name="NtpDanXIV_8"
+  href="#NtDanXIV_8"><sup>[8]</sup></a> adds, that when the Emperor was
+  marched seven miles from <i>Constantinople</i> against <i>Eugenius</i>,
+  he went into a Church which he had built to <i>John</i> the Baptist,
+  <i>and invoked the Baptist for his assistance. Chrysostom</i> <a
+  name="NtpDanXIV_9" href="#NtDanXIV_9"><sup>[9]</sup></a> says: <i>He that
+  is clothed in purple, approaches to embrace these sepulchres; and laying
+  aside his dignity, stands supplicating the Saints to intercede for him
+  with God: and he who goes crowned with a diadem, offers his prayers to
+  the tent-maker and the fisher-man as his Protestors.</i> And in <a
+  name="NtpDanXIV_10" href="#NtDanXIV_10"><sup>[10]</sup></a> another
+  place: <i>The cities run together to the sepulchres of the Martyrs, and
+  the people are inflamed with the love of them</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>This practice of sending reliques from place to place for working
+  miracles, and thereby inflaming the devotion of the nations towards the
+  dead Saints and their reliques, and setting up the religion of invoking
+  their souls, lasted only till the middle of the reign of the Emperor
+  <i>Theodosius</i> the great; for he then prohibited it by the following
+  Edict. <i>Humatum corpus, nemo ad alterum locum transferat; nemo Martyrem
+  distrahat, nemo mercetur: Habeant ver� in potestate, si quolibet in loco
+  sanctorum est aliquis conditus, pro ejus veneratione, quod
+  </i>Martyrium<i> vocandum sit, addant quod voluerint fabricarum. Dat.
+  </i>iv.<i> Kal. Mart. Constantinopoli, Honorio nob. puero &amp; Euodio
+  Coss.</i> A.C. 386. After this they filled the fields and high-ways with
+  altars erected to Martyrs, which they pretended to discover by dreams and
+  revelations: and this occasioned the making the fourteenth Canon of the
+  fifth Council of <i>Carthage</i>, A.C. 398. <i>Item placuit, ut altaria,
+  qu� passim per agros aut vias, tanquam memori� Martyrum constituuntur, in
+  quibus nullum corpus aut reliqui� Martyrum condit� probantur, ab
+  Episcopis, qui illis locis pr�sunt, si fieri potest, evertantur. Si autem
+  hoc propter tumultus populares non sinitur, plebes tamen admoneantur, ne
+  illa loca frequentent, ut qui rect� sapiunt, null� ibi superstitione
+  devincti teneantur. Et omnino nulla memoria Martyrum probabiliter
+  acceptetur, nisi aut ibi corpus aut aliqu� cert� reliqui� sint, aut ubi
+  origo alicujus habitationis, vel possessionis, vel passionis fidelissima
+  origine traditur. Nam qu� per somnia, &amp; per inanes quasi revelationes
+  quorumlibet hominum ubique constituuntur altaria, omnimod�
+  reprobentur.</i> These altars were for invoking the Saints or Martyrs
+  buried or pretended to be buried under them. First they filled the
+  Churches in all places with the reliques or pretended reliques of the
+  Martyrs, for invoking them in the Churches; and then they filled the
+  fields and high-ways with altars, for invoking them every where: and this
+  new religion was set up by the Monks in all the <i>Greek</i> Empire
+  before the expedition of the Emperor <i>Theodosius</i> against
+  <i>Eugenius</i>, and I think before his above-mentioned Edict, A.C.
+  386.</p>
+
+  <p>The same religion of worshiping <i>Mahuzzims</i> quickly spred into
+  the <i>Western Empire</i> also: but <i>Daniel</i> in this Prophecy
+  describes chiefly the things done among the nations comprehended in the
+  body of his third Beast.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. XIV.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIV_1" href="#NtpDanXIV_1">[1]</a> Chap. xi. 38, 39</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIV_2" href="#NtpDanXIV_2">[2]</a> Orat. de vita Greg.
+  Thaumaturg. T. 3. p. 574.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIV_3" href="#NtpDanXIV_3">[3]</a> Vide Hom. 47. in. S.
+  Julian.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIV_4" href="#NtpDanXIV_4">[4]</a> Epist. 27. ad
+  Eustochium.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIV_5" href="#NtpDanXIV_5">[5]</a> Edit. Frontonis
+  Duc�i, Tom. 1.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIV_6" href="#NtpDanXIV_6">[6]</a> Ad. an. 381, Sect.
+  41.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIV_7" href="#NtpDanXIV_7">[7]</a> Hist. Eccl. l. 2. c.
+  23.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIV_8" href="#NtpDanXIV_8">[8]</a> L. 4. c. 24.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIV_9" href="#NtpDanXIV_9">[9]</a> Hom. 66. ad. populum,
+  circa finem. &amp; Hom. 8, 27. in Matth. Hom. 42, 43. in Gen. Hom. 1. in
+  1 Thess.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtDanXIV_10" href="#NtpDanXIV_10">[10]</a> Exposit. in Psal.
+  114. sub finem.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><i>The end of the first Part.</i></h3>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h2>PART II.</h2>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h2>OBSERVATIONS<br />
+<font class="sc">upon the</font><br />
+APOCALYPSE<br />
+<font class="sc">of</font><br />
+St. <i>JOHN</i>.</h2>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="JohI">CHAP. I</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Introduction, concerning the time when
+the </i>Apocalypse<i> was written</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>Iren�us</i> introduced an opinion that the <i>Apocalypse</i> was
+  written in the time of <i>Domitian</i>; but then he also postponed the
+  writing of some others of the sacred books, and was to place the
+  <i>Apocalypse</i> after them: he might perhaps have heard from his master
+  <i>Polycarp</i> that he had received this book from <i>John</i> about the
+  time of <i>Domitian</i>'s death; or indeed <i>John</i> might himself at
+  that time have made a new publication of it, from whence <i>Iren�us</i>
+  might imagine it was then but newly written. <i>Eusebius</i> in his
+  <i>Chronicle</i> and <i>Ecclesiastical History</i> follows
+  <i>Iren&#339;us</i>; but afterwards <a name="NtpJohI_1"
+  href="#NtJohI_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> in his <i>Evangelical
+  Demonstrations</i>, he conjoins the banishment of <i>John</i> into
+  <i>Patmos</i>, with the deaths of <i>Peter</i> and <i>Paul</i>: and so do
+  <a name="NtpJohI_2" href="#NtJohI_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> <i>Tertullian</i>
+  and <i>Pseudo-Prochorus</i>, as well as the first author, whoever he was,
+  of that very antient fable, that <i>John</i> was put by <i>Nero</i> into
+  a vessel of hot oil, and coming out unhurt, was banished by him into
+  <i>Patmos.</i> Tho this story be no more than a fiction yet was it
+  founded on a tradition of the first churches, that <i>John</i> was
+  banished into <i>Patmos</i> in the days of <i>Nero</i>. <i>Epiphanius</i>
+  represents the <i>Gospel of John</i> as written in the time of
+  <i>Domitian</i>, and the <i>Apocalypse</i> even before that of
+  <i>Nero</i>. <a name="NtpJohI_3" href="#NtJohI_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a>
+  <i>Arethas</i> in the beginning of his Commentary quotes the opinion of
+  <i>Iren�us</i> from <i>Eusebius</i>, but follows it not: for he
+  afterwards affirms the <i>Apocalypse</i> was written before the
+  destruction of <i>Jerusalem</i>, and that former commentators had
+  expounded the sixth seal of that destruction.</p>
+
+  <p>With the opinion of the first Commentators agrees the tradition of the
+  Churches of <i>Syria</i>, preserved to this day in the title of the
+  <i>Syriac</i> Version of the <i>Apocalypse</i>, which title is this:
+  <i>The Revelation which was made to </i>John<i> the Evangelist by God in
+  the Island </i>Patmos<i>, into which he was banished by </i>Nero <i>the
+  </i>C�sar. The fame is confirmed by a story told by <a name="NtpJohI_4"
+  href="#NtJohI_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> <i>Eusebius</i> out of <i>Clemens
+  Alexandrinus</i>, and other antient authors, concerning a youth, whom
+  <i>John</i> some time after his return from <i>Patmos</i> committed to
+  the care of the Bishop of a certain city. The Bishop educated,
+  instructed, and at length baptized him; but then remitting of his care,
+  the young man thereupon got into ill company, and began by degrees first
+  to revel and grow vitious, then to abuse and spoil those he met in the
+  night; and at last grew so desperate, that his companions turning a band
+  of high-way men, made him their Captain: and, saith <a name="NtpJohI_5"
+  href="#NtJohI_5"><sup>[5]</sup></a> <i>Chrysostom</i>, he continued their
+  Captain a long time. At length <i>John</i> returning to that city, and
+  hearing what was done, rode to the thief; and, when he out of reverence
+  to his old master fled, <i>John</i> rode after him, recalled him, and
+  restored him to the Church. This is a story of many years, and requires
+  that <i>John</i> should have returned from <i>Patmos</i> rather at the
+  death of <i>Nero</i> than at that of <i>Domitian</i>; because between the
+  death of <i>Domitian</i> and that of <i>John</i> there were but two years
+  and an half; and <i>John</i> in his old age was <a name="NtpJohI_6"
+  href="#NtJohI_6"><sup>[6]</sup></a> so infirm as to be carried to Church,
+  dying above 90 years old, and therefore could not be then suppos'd able
+  to ride after the thief.</p>
+
+  <p>This opinion is further supported by the allusions in the
+  <i>Apocalypse</i> to the Temple and Altar, and holy City, as then
+  standing; and to the <i>Gentiles</i>, who were soon after to tread under
+  foot the holy City and outward Court. 'Tis confirmed also by the style of
+  the <i>Apocalypse</i> itself, which is fuller of <i>Hebraisms</i> than
+  his Gospel. For thence it may be gathered, that it was written when
+  <i>John</i> was newly come out of <i>Judea</i>, where he had been used to
+  the <i>Syriac</i> tongue; and that he did not write his Gospel, till by
+  long converse with the <i>Asiatick</i> Greeks he had left off most of the
+  <i>Hebraisms</i>. It is confirmed also by the many false
+  <i>Apocalypses</i>, as those of <i>Peter</i>, <i>Paul</i>, <i>Thomas</i>,
+  <i>Stephen</i>, <i>Elias</i> and <i>Cerinthus</i>, written in imitation
+  of the true one. For as the many false Gospels, false Acts, and false
+  Epistles were occasioned by true ones; and the writing many false
+  <i>Apocalypses</i>, and ascribing them to Apostles and Prophets, argues
+  that there was a true Apostolic one in great request with the first
+  <i>Christians</i>: so this true one may well be suppos'd to have been
+  written early, that there may be room in the Apostolic age for the
+  writing of so many false ones afterwards, and fathering them upon
+  <i>Peter</i>, <i>Paul</i>, <i>Thomas</i> and others, who were dead before
+  <i>John</i>. <i>Caius</i>, who was contemporary with <i>Tertullian</i>,
+  <a name="NtpJohI_7" href="#NtJohI_7"><sup>[7]</sup></a> tells us that
+  <i>Cerinthus</i> wrote his Revelations as a great Apostle, and pretended
+  the visions were shewn him by Angels, asserting a <i>millennium</i> of
+  carnal pleasures at <i>Jerusalem</i> after the resurrection; so that his
+  <i>Apocalypse</i> was plainly written in imitation of <i>John</i>'s: and
+  yet he lived so early, that <a name="NtpJohI_8"
+  href="#NtJohI_8"><sup>[8]</sup></a> he resisted the Apostles at
+  <i>Jerusalem</i> in or before the first year of <i>Claudius</i>, that is,
+  26 years before the death of <i>Nero</i>, and <a name="NtpJohI_9"
+  href="#NtJohI_9"><sup>[9]</sup></a> died before <i>John</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>These reasons may suffice for determining the time; and yet there is
+  one more, which to considering men may seem a good reason, to others not.
+  I'll propound it, and leave it to every man's judgment. The
+  <i>Apocalypse</i> seems to be alluded to in the Epistles of <i>Peter</i>
+  and that to the <i>Hebrews</i> and therefore to have been written before
+  them. Such allusions in the Epistle to the <i>Hebrews</i>, I take to be
+  the discourses concerning the High-Priest in the heavenly Tabernacle, who
+  is both Priest and King, as was <i>Melchisedec</i>; and those concerning
+  the <i>word of God</i>, with the <i>sharp two-edged sword</i>, the <span
+  lang="el" title="sabbatismos"
+  >&#x3C3;&#x3B1;&#x3B2;&#x3B2;&#x3B1;&#x3C4;&#x3B9;&#x3C3;&#x3BC;&#x3BF;&#x3C2;</span>,
+  or <i>millennial</i> rest, the <i>earth whose end is to be burned</i>,
+  suppose by the lake of fire, <i>the judgment and fiery indignation which
+  shall devour the adversaries</i>, the <i>heavenly City which hath
+  foundations whose builder and maker is God</i>, the <i>cloud of
+  witnesses, mount </i>Sion<i>, heavenly </i>Jerusalem<i>, general
+  assembly, spirits of just men made perfect</i>, <i>viz.</i> by the
+  resurrection, and <i>the shaking of heaven and earth, and removing them,
+  that the new heaven, new earth and new kingdom which cannot be shaken,
+  may remain</i>. In the first of <i>Peter</i> occur these: <a
+  name="NtpJohI_10" href="#NtJohI_10"><sup>[10]</sup></a> <i>The Revelation
+  of Jesus Christ</i>, twice or thrice repeated; <a name="NtpJohI_11"
+  href="#NtJohI_11"><sup>[11]</sup></a> the <i>blood of </i>Christ<i> as of
+  a Lamb foreordained before the foundation of the world</i>; <a
+  name="NtpJohI_12" href="#NtJohI_12"><sup>[12]</sup></a> the <i>spiritual
+  building</i> in heaven, 1 Pet. ii. 5. <i>an inheritance incorruptible and
+  undefiled and that fadeth not away, reserved in heaven for us, who are
+  kept unto the salvation, ready to be revealed in the last time</i>, 1
+  Pet. i. 4, 5. <a name="NtpJohI_13" href="#NtJohI_13"><sup>[13]</sup></a>
+  the <i>royal Priesthood</i>, <a name="NtpJohI_14"
+  href="#NtJohI_14"><sup>[14]</sup></a> the <i>holy Priesthood</i>, <a
+  name="NtpJohI_15" href="#NtJohI_15"><sup>[15]</sup></a> the <i>judgment
+  beginning at the house of God</i>, and <a name="NtpJohI_16"
+  href="#NtJohI_16"><sup>[16]</sup></a> <i>the Church at </i>Babylon. These
+  are indeed obscurer allusions; but the second Epistle, from the 19th
+  verse of the first Chapter to the end, seems to be a continued Commentary
+  upon the <i>Apocalypse</i>. There, in writing to the <i>Churches in
+  </i>Asia, to whom <i>John</i> was commanded to send this Prophecy, he
+  tells them, they <i>have a more sure word of Prophecy</i>, to be heeded
+  by them, <i>as a light that shineth in a dark place, until the day dawn,
+  and the day-star arise in their hearts</i>, that is, until they begin to
+  understand it: for <i>no Prophecy</i>, saith he, <i>of the scripture is
+  of any private interpretation; the Prophecy came not in old time by the
+  will of man, but holy men of God spake, as they were moved by the Holy
+  Ghost. Daniel</i> <a name="NtpJohI_17"
+  href="#NtJohI_17"><sup>[17]</sup></a> himself professes that he
+  understood not his own <i>Prophecies</i>; and therefore the Churches were
+  not to expect the interpretation from their Prophet <i>John</i>, but to
+  study the Prophecies themselves. This is the substance of what
+  <i>Peter</i> says in the first chapter; and then in the second he
+  proceeds to describe, out of this <i>sure word of Prophecy</i>, how there
+  should arise in the Church <i>false Prophets</i>, or <i>false
+  teachers</i>, expressed collectively in the <i>Apocalypse</i> by the name
+  of the false Prophet; who should <i>bring in damnable heresies, even
+  denying the Lord that bought them</i>, which is the character of
+  <i>Antichrist</i>: <i>And many</i>, saith he, <i>shall follow their
+  lusts</i> <a name="NtpJohI_18" href="#NtJohI_18"><sup>[18]</sup></a>;
+  they that dwell on the earth <a name="NtpJohI_19"
+  href="#NtJohI_19"><sup>[19]</sup></a> shall be deceived by the false
+  Prophet, and be made drunk with the wine of the Whore's fornication,
+  <i>by reason of whom the way of truth shall be blasphemed</i>; for <a
+  name="NtpJohI_20" href="#NtJohI_20"><sup>[20]</sup></a> the Beast is full
+  of blasphemy: <i>and thro' covetousness shall they with feigned words
+  make merchandize of you</i>; for these are the Merchants of the Earth,
+  who trade with the great Whore, and their merchandize <a
+  name="NtpJohI_21" href="#NtJohI_21"><sup>[21]</sup></a> is all things of
+  price, with the bodies and souls of men: <i>whose judgment&mdash;lingreth
+  not, and their damnation <a name="NtpJohI_22"
+  href="#NtJohI_22"><sup>[22]</sup></a> slumbreth not</i>, but shall surely
+  come upon them at the last day suddenly, as the flood upon <i>the old
+  world</i>, and fire and brimstone upon <i>Sodom</i> and <i>Gomorrha</i>,
+  when the just shall be delivered <a name="NtpJohI_23"
+  href="#NtJohI_23"><sup>[23]</sup></a> like <i>Lot</i>; for <i>the Lord
+  knoweth how to deliver the godly out of temptations, and to reserve the
+  unjust unto the day of judgment to be punished</i>, in the lake of fire;
+  <i>but chiefly them that walk after the flesh in the lust of
+  uncleanness</i>, <a name="NtpJohI_24"
+  href="#NtJohI_24"><sup>[24]</sup></a> being made drunk with the wine of
+  the Whore's fornication; who <i>despise dominion, and are not afraid to
+  blaspheme glories</i>; for the beast opened his mouth against God <a
+  name="NtpJohI_25" href="#NtJohI_25"><sup>[25]</sup></a> to blaspheme his
+  name and his tabernacle, and them that dwell in heaven. <i>These, as
+  natural brute beasts</i>, the ten-horned beast and two-horned beast, or
+  false Prophet, <i>made to be taken and destroyed</i>, in the lake of
+  fire, <i>blaspheme the things they understand not</i>:&mdash;they count
+  it pleasure to riot in the day-time&mdash;sporting themselves with their
+  own deceivings, while they feast <a name="NtpJohI_26"
+  href="#NtJohI_26"><sup>[26]</sup></a> with you, <i>having eyes full of an
+  <a name="NtpJohI_27" href="#NtJohI_27"><sup>[27]</sup></a>
+  Adulteress</i>: for the kingdoms of the beast live deliciously with the
+  great Whore, and the nations are made drunk with the wine of her
+  fornication. They <i>are gone astray, following the way of </i>Balaam<i>,
+  the son of </i>Beor<i>, who loved the wages of unrighteousness</i>, the
+  false Prophet <a name="NtpJohI_28" href="#NtJohI_28"><sup>[28]</sup></a>
+  who taught <i>Balak</i> to cast a stumbling-block before the children of
+  <i>Israel</i>. <i>These are</i>, not fountains of living water, but
+  <i>wells without water</i>; not such clouds of Saints as the two
+  witnesses ascend in, but <i>clouds that are carried with a tempest</i>,
+  &amp;c. Thus does the author of this Epistle spend all the second Chapter
+  in describing the qualities of the <i>Apocalyptic</i> Beasts and false
+  Prophet: and then in the third he goes on to describe their destruction
+  more fully, and the future kingdom. He saith, that because the coming of
+  <i>Christ</i> should be long deferred, they should scoff, saying,
+  <i>where is the promise of his coming</i>? Then he describes the sudden
+  coming of the day of the Lord upon them, <i>as a thief in the night</i>,
+  which is the <i>Apocalyptic</i> phrase; and the <i>millennium</i>, or
+  <i>thousand years</i>, which <i>are with God but as a day</i>; the
+  <i>passing away of the old heavens</i> and earth, by a conflagration in
+  the lake of fire, and our <i>looking for new heavens and a new earth,
+  wherein dwelleth righteousness</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>Seeing therefore <i>Peter</i> and <i>John</i> were Apostles of the
+  circumcision, it seems to me that they staid with their Churches in
+  <i>Judea</i> and <i>Syria</i> till the <i>Romans</i> made war upon their
+  nation, that is, till the twelfth year of <i>Nero</i>; that they then
+  followed the main body of their flying Churches into <i>Asia</i>, and
+  that <i>Peter</i> went thence by <i>Corinth</i> to <i>Rome</i>; that the
+  <i>Roman</i> Empire looked upon those Churches as enemies, because
+  <i>Jews</i> by birth; and therefore to prevent insurrections, secured
+  their leaders, and banished <i>John</i> into <i>Patmos</i>. It seems also
+  probable to me that the <i>Apocalypse</i> was there composed, and that
+  soon after the Epistle to the <i>Hebrews</i> and those of <i>Peter</i>
+  were written to these Churches, with reference to this Prophecy as what
+  they were particularly concerned in. For it appears by these Epistles,
+  that they were written in times of general affliction and tribulation
+  under the heathens, and by consequence when the Empire made war upon the
+  <i>Jews</i>; for till then the heathens were at peace with the
+  <i>Christian Jews</i>, as well as with the rest. The Epistle to the
+  <i>Hebrews</i>, since it mentions <i>Timothy</i> as related to those
+  <i>Hebrews</i>, must be written to them after their flight into
+  <i>Asia</i>, where <i>Timothy</i> was Bishop; and by consequence after
+  the war began, the <i>Hebrews</i> in <i>Judea</i> being strangers to
+  <i>Timothy</i>. <i>Peter</i> seems also to call <i>Rome</i>
+  <i>Babylon</i>, as well with respect to the war made upon <i>Judea</i>,
+  and the approaching captivity, like that under old <i>Babylon</i>, as
+  with respect to that name in the <i>Apocalypse</i>: and in writing <i>to
+  the strangers scattered thro'out </i>Pontus<i>, </i>Galatia<i>,
+  </i>Cappadocia<i>, </i>Asia<i> and </i>Bithynia, he seems to intimate
+  that they were the strangers newly scattered by the <i>Roman</i> wars;
+  for those were the only strangers there belonging to his care.</p>
+
+  <p>This account of things agrees best with history when duly rectified.
+  For <a name="NtpJohI_29" href="#NtJohI_29"><sup>[29]</sup></a>
+  <i>Justin</i> and <a name="NtpJohI_30"
+  href="#NtJohI_30"><sup>[30]</sup></a> <i>Iren�us</i> say, that <i>Simon
+  Magus</i> came to <i>Rome</i> in the reign of <i>Claudius</i>, and
+  exercised juggling tricks there. <i>Pseudo-Clemens</i> adds, that he
+  endeavoured there to fly, but broke his neck thro' the prayers of
+  <i>Peter</i>. Whence <a name="NtpJohI_31"
+  href="#NtJohI_31"><sup>[31]</sup></a> <i>Eusebius</i>, or rather his
+  interpolator <i>Jerom</i>, has recorded, that <i>Peter</i> came to
+  <i>Rome</i> in the second year of <i>Claudius</i>: but <a
+  name="NtpJohI_32" href="#NtJohI_32"><sup>[32]</sup></a> <i>Cyril</i>
+  Bishop of <i>Jerusalem</i>, <i>Philastrius</i>, <i>Sulpitius</i>,
+  <i>Prosper</i>, <i>Maximus Taurinensis</i>, and <i>Hegesippus junior</i>,
+  place this victory of <i>Peter</i> in the time of <i>Nero</i>. Indeed the
+  antienter tradition was, that <i>Peter</i> came to <i>Rome</i> in the
+  days of this Emperor, as may be seen in <a name="NtpJohI_33"
+  href="#NtJohI_33"><sup>[33]</sup></a> <i>Lactantius</i>.
+  <i>Chrysostom</i> <a name="NtpJohI_34"
+  href="#NtJohI_34"><sup>[34]</sup></a> tells us, that the Apostles
+  continued long in <i>Judea</i>, and that then being driven out by the
+  <i>Jews</i> they went to the <i>Gentiles</i>. This dispersion was in the
+  first year of the <i>Jewish</i> war, when the <i>Jews</i>, as
+  <i>Josephus</i> tells us, began to be tumultuous and violent in all
+  places. For all agree that the Apostles were dispersed into several
+  regions at once; and <i>Origen</i> has set down the time, <a
+  name="NtpJohI_35" href="#NtJohI_35"><sup>[35]</sup></a> telling us that
+  in the beginning of the <i>Judaic</i> war, the Apostles and disciples of
+  our Lord were scattered into all nations; <i>Thomas</i> into
+  <i>Parthia</i>, <i>Andrew</i> into <i>Scythia</i>, <i>John</i> into
+  <i>Asia</i>, and <i>Peter</i> first into <i>Asia</i>, where he preacht to
+  the dispersion, and thence into <i>Italy</i>. <a name="NtpJohI_36"
+  href="#NtJohI_36"><sup>[36]</sup></a> <i>Dionysius Corinthius</i> saith,
+  that <i>Peter</i> went from <i>Asia</i> by <i>Corinth</i> to <i>Rome</i>,
+  and all antiquity agrees that <i>Peter</i> and <i>Paul</i> were martyred
+  there in the end of <i>Nero</i>'s reign. <i>Mark</i> went with
+  <i>Timothy</i> to <i>Rome</i>, 2 <i>Tim.</i> iv. 11. <i>Colos.</i> iv.
+  10. <i>Sylvanus</i> was <i>Paul</i>'s assistant; and by the companions of
+  <i>Peter</i>, mentioned in his first Epistle, we may know that he wrote
+  from <i>Rome</i>; and the Antients generally agree, that in this Epistle
+  he understood <i>Rome</i> by <i>Babylon</i>. His second Epistle was writ
+  to the same dispersed strangers with the first, 2 <i>Pet.</i> iii. 1. and
+  therein he saith, that <i>Paul</i> had writ of the same things to them,
+  and also in his other Epistles, <i>ver.</i> 15, 16. Now as there is no
+  Epistle of <i>Paul</i> to these strangers besides that to the
+  <i>Hebrews</i>, so in this Epistle, chap. x. 11, 12. we find at large all
+  those things which <i>Peter</i> had been speaking of, and here refers to;
+  particularly the <i>passing away of the old heavens and earth</i>, and
+  <i>establishing an inheritance immoveable</i>, with an exhortation to
+  grace, because <i>God</i>, to the wicked, <i>is a consuming fire</i>,
+  Heb. xii. 25, 26, 28, 29.</p>
+
+  <p>Having determined the time of writing the <i>Apocalyse</i>, I need not
+  say much about the truth of it, since it was in such request with the
+  first ages, that many endeavoured to imitate it, by feigning
+  <i>Apocalypses</i> under the Apostles names; and the Apostles themselves,
+  as I have just now shewed, studied it, and used its phrases; by which
+  means the style of the Epistle to the <i>Hebrews</i> became more mystical
+  than that of <i>Paul</i>'s other Epistles, and the style of <i>John</i>'s
+  Gospel more figurative and majestical than that of the other Gospels. I
+  do not apprehend that <i>Christ</i> was called the word of God in any
+  book of the New Testament written before the <i>Apocalypse</i>; and
+  therefore am of opinion, the language was taken from this Prophecy, as
+  were also many other phrases in this Gospel, such as those of
+  <i>Christ</i>'s being <i>the light which enlightens the world, the lamb
+  of God which taketh away the sins of the world, the bridegroom, he that
+  testifieth, he that came down from heaven, the Son of God</i>, &amp;c.
+  <i>Justin Martyr</i>, who within thirty years after <i>John</i>'s death
+  became a <i>Christian</i>, writes expresly that <i>a certain man among
+  the </i>Christians<i> whose name was </i>John<i>, one of the twelve
+  Apostles of </i>Christ<i>, in the Revelation which was shewed him,
+  prophesied that those who believed in </i>Christ<i> should live a
+  thousand years at </i>Jerusalem. And a few lines before he saith: <i>But
+  I, and as many as are </i>Christians<i>, in all things right in their
+  opinions, believe both that there shall be a resurrection of the flesh,
+  and a thousand years life at </i>Jerusalem<i> built, adorned and
+  enlarged</i>. Which is as much as to say, that all true <i>Christians</i>
+  in that early age received this Prophecy: for in all ages, as many as
+  believed the thousand years, received the <i>Apocalypse</i> as the
+  foundation of their opinion: and I do not know one instance to the
+  contrary. <i>Papias</i> Bishop of <i>Hierapolis</i>, a man of the
+  Apostolic age, and one of <i>John</i>'s own disciples, did not only teach
+  the doctrine of the thousand years, but also <a name="NtpJohI_37"
+  href="#NtJohI_37"><sup>[37]</sup></a> asserted the <i>Apocalypse</i> as
+  written by divine inspiration. <i>Melito</i>, who flourished next after
+  <i>Justin</i>, <a name="NtpJohI_38" href="#NtJohI_38"><sup>[38]</sup></a>
+  wrote a commentary upon this Prophecy; and he, being Bishop of
+  <i>Sardis</i> one of the seven Churches, could neither be ignorant of
+  their tradition about it, nor impose upon them. <i>Iren�us</i>, who was
+  contemporary with <i>Melito</i>, wrote much upon it, and said, that
+  <i>the number 666 was in all the antient and approved copies; and that he
+  had it also confirmed to him by those who had seen </i>John<i> face to
+  face</i>, meaning no doubt his master <i>Polycarp</i> for one. At the
+  same time <a name="NtpJohI_39" href="#NtJohI_39"><sup>[39]</sup></a>
+  <i>Theophilus</i> Bishop of <i>Antioch</i> asserted it, and so did
+  <i>Tertullian</i>, <i>Clemens Alexandrinus</i>, and <i>Origen</i> soon
+  after; and their contemporary <i>Hippolytus</i> the Martyr, Metropolitan
+  of the <i>Arabians</i>, <a name="NtpJohI_40"
+  href="#NtJohI_40"><sup>[40]</sup></a> wrote a commentary upon it. All
+  these were antient men, flourishing within a hundred and twenty years
+  after <i>John</i>'s death, and of greatest note in the Churches of those
+  times. Soon after did <i>Victorinus Pictaviensis</i> write another
+  commentary upon it; and he lived in the time of <i>Dioclesian</i>. This
+  may surely suffice to shew how the <i>Apocalypse</i> was received and
+  studied in the first ages: and I do not indeed find any other book of the
+  New Testament so strongly attested, or commented upon so early as this.
+  The Prophecy said: <i>Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear the
+  words of this Prophecy, and keep the things which are written
+  therein.</i> This animated the first <i>Christians</i> to study it so
+  much, till the difficulty made them remit, and comment more upon the
+  other books of the New Testament. This was the state of the
+  <i>Apocalypse</i>, till the thousand years being misunderstood, brought a
+  prejudice against it: and <i>Dionysius</i> of <i>Alexandria</i>, noting
+  how it abounded with barbarisms, that is with <i>Hebraisms</i>, promoted
+  that prejudice so far, as to cause many <i>Greeks</i> in the fourth
+  century to doubt of the book. But whilst the <i>Latins</i>, and a great
+  part of the <i>Greeks</i>, always retained the <i>Apocalypse</i>, and the
+  rest doubted only out of prejudice, it makes nothing against its
+  authority.</p>
+
+  <p>This Prophecy is called <i>the Revelation</i>, with respect to <i>the
+  scripture of truth</i>, which <i>Daniel</i> <a name="NtpJohI_41"
+  href="#NtJohI_41"><sup>[41]</sup></a> was commanded to <i>shut up and
+  seal, till the time of the end</i>. <i>Daniel</i> sealed it <i>until the
+  time of the end</i>; and until that time comes, the Lamb is opening the
+  seals: and afterwards the two Witnesses prophesy out of it a long time in
+  sack-cloth, before they ascend up to heaven in a cloud. All which is as
+  much as to say, that these Prophecies of <i>Daniel</i> and <i>John</i>
+  should not be understood till the time of the end: but then some should
+  prophesy out of them in an afflicted and mournful state for a long time,
+  and that but darkly, so as to convert but few. But in the very end, the
+  Prophecy should be so far interpreted as to convince many. <i>Then</i>,
+  saith <i>Daniel, many shall run to and fro, and knowledge shall be
+  encreased</i>. For the Gospel must be preached in all nations before the
+  great tribulation, and end of the world. The palm-bearing multitude,
+  which come out of this great tribulation, cannot be innumerable out of
+  all nations, unless they be made so by the preaching of the Gospel before
+  it comes. There must be a stone cut out of a mountain without hands,
+  before it can fall upon the toes of the Image, and become a great
+  mountain and fill the earth. An Angel must fly thro' the midst of heaven
+  with the everlasting Gospel to preach to all nations, before
+  <i>Babylon</i> falls, and the Son of man reaps his harvest. The two
+  Prophets must ascend up to heaven in a cloud, before the kingdoms of this
+  world become the kingdoms of <i>Christ</i>. 'Tis therefore a part of this
+  Prophecy, that it should not be understood before the last age of the
+  world; and therefore it makes for the credit of the Prophecy, that it is
+  not yet understood. But if the last age, the age of opening these things,
+  be now approaching, as by the great successes of late Interpreters it
+  seems to be, we have more encouragement than ever to look into these
+  things. If the general preaching of the Gospel be approaching, it is to
+  us and our posterity that those words mainly belong: <a name="NtpJohI_42"
+  href="#NtJohI_42"><sup>[42]</sup></a> <i>In the time of the end the wise
+  shall understand, but none of the wicked shall understand. <a
+  name="NtpJohI_43" href="#NtJohI_43"><sup>[43]</sup></a> Blessed is he
+  that readeth, and they that hear the words of this Prophecy, and keep
+  those things which are written therein.</i></p>
+
+  <p>The folly of Interpreters has been, to foretel times and things by
+  this Prophecy, as if God designed to make them Prophets. By this rashness
+  they have not only exposed themselves, but brought the Prophecy also into
+  contempt. The design of God was much otherwise. He gave this and the
+  Prophecies of the Old Testament, not to gratify men's curiosities by
+  enabling them to foreknow things, but that after they were fulfilled they
+  might be interpreted by the event, and his own Providence, not the
+  Interpreters, be then manifested thereby to the world. For the event of
+  things predicted many ages before, will then be a convincing argument
+  that the world is governed by providence. For as the few and obscure
+  Prophecies concerning <i>Christ</i>'s first coming were for setting up
+  the <i>Christian</i> religion, which all nations have since corrupted; so
+  the many and clear Prophecies concerning the things to be done at
+  <i>Christ</i>'s second coming, are not only for predicting but also for
+  effecting a recovery and re-establishment of the long-lost truth, and
+  setting up a kingdom wherein dwells righteousness. The event will prove
+  the <i>Apocalypse</i>; and this Prophecy, thus proved and understood,
+  will open the old Prophets, and all together will make known the true
+  religion, and establish it. For he that will understand the old Prophets,
+  must begin with this; but the time is not yet come for understanding them
+  perfectly, because the main revolution predicted in them is not yet come
+  to pass. <i>In the days of the voice of the seventh Angel, when he shall
+  begin to sound, the mystery of God shall be finished, as he hath declared
+  to his servants the Prophets</i>: and then <i>the kingdoms of this world
+  shall become the kingdoms of our Lord and his </i>Christ<i>, and he shall
+  reign for ever</i>, Apoc. x. 7. xi. 15. There is already so much of the
+  Prophecy fulfilled, that as many as will take pains in this study, may
+  see sufficient instances of God's providence: but then the signal
+  revolutions predicted by all the holy Prophets, will at once both turn
+  mens eyes upon considering the predictions, and plainly interpret them.
+  Till then we must content ourselves with interpreting what hath been
+  already fulfilled.</p>
+
+  <p>Amongst the Interpreters of the last age there is scarce one of note
+  who hath not made some discovery worth knowing; and thence I seem to
+  gather that God is about opening these mysteries. The success of others
+  put me upon considering it; and if I have done any thing which may be
+  useful to following writers, I have my design.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. I.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_1" href="#NtpJohI_1">[1]</a> Dem. Evang. l. 3.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_2" href="#NtpJohI_2">[2]</a> Vid. <i>Pamelium</i> in
+  notis ad <i>Tertull.</i> de Pr�scriptionbus, n. 215 &amp; <i>Hieron</i>
+  l. 1. contra <i>Jovinianum</i>, c. 14. Edit.<i>Erasmi.</i></p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_3" href="#NtpJohI_3">[3]</a> Areth. c. 18, 19.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_4" href="#NtpJohI_4">[4]</a> Hist. Eccl. l. 3. c.
+  23.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_5" href="#NtpJohI_5">[5]</a> Chrysost. ad Theodorum
+  lapsum.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_6" href="#NtpJohI_6">[6]</a> Hieron. in Epist. ad Gal.
+  l. 3. c. 6.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_7" href="#NtpJohI_7">[7]</a> Apud Euseb. Eccl. Hist.
+  l. 3. c. 28. Edit. <i>Valesii</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_8" href="#NtpJohI_8">[8]</a> Epiphan. H�res. 28.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_9" href="#NtpJohI_9">[9]</a> Hieron. adv. Lucif.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_10" href="#NtpJohI_10">[10]</a> 1 Pet. i. 7, 13. iv.
+  13. &amp; v. 1.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_11" href="#NtpJohI_11">[11]</a> Apoc. xiii. 8.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_12" href="#NtpJohI_12">[12]</a> Apoc. xxi.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_13" href="#NtpJohI_13">[13]</a> Apoc. i. 6. &amp; v.
+  10.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_14" href="#NtpJohI_14">[14]</a> Apoc. xx. 6.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_15" href="#NtpJohI_15">[15]</a> Apoc. xx. 4, 12.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_16" href="#NtpJohI_16">[16]</a> Apoc. xvii.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_17" href="#NtpJohI_17">[17]</a> Dan. viii. 15, 16, 27.
+  &amp; xii. 8, 9.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_18" href="#NtpJohI_18">[18]</a> <span lang="el"
+  title="aselgeias"
+  >&#x3B1;&#x3C3;&#x3B5;&#x3BB;&#x3B3;&#x3B5;&#x3B9;&#x3B1;&#x3C2;</span>,
+  <i>in many of the best MSS.</i></p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_19" href="#NtpJohI_19">[19]</a> Apoc. xiii. 7, 12.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_20" href="#NtpJohI_20">[20]</a> Apoc. xiii. 1, 5,
+  6.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_21" href="#NtpJohI_21">[21]</a> Apoc. xviii. 12,
+  13.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_22" href="#NtpJohI_22">[22]</a> Apoc. xix. 20.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_23" href="#NtpJohI_23">[23]</a> Apoc. xxi. 3, 4.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_24" href="#NtpJohI_24">[24]</a> Apoc. ix. 21.
+  <i>and</i> xvii. 2.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_25" href="#NtpJohI_25">[25]</a> Apoc. xiii. 6.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_26" href="#NtpJohI_26">[26]</a> Apoc. xviii. 3, 7,
+  9.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_27" href="#NtpJohI_27">[27]</a> <span lang="el"
+  title="moichalidos"
+  >&#x3BC;&#x3BF;&#x3B9;&#x3C7;&#x3B1;&#x3BB;&#x3B9;&#x3B4;&#x3BF;&#x3C2;</span>.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_28" href="#NtpJohI_28">[28]</a> Apoc. ii. 14.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_29" href="#NtpJohI_29">[29]</a> Apol. ad Antonin.
+  Pium.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_30" href="#NtpJohI_30">[30]</a> H�res. l. 1. c. 20.
+  Vide etiam Tertullianum, Apol. c. 13.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_31" href="#NtpJohI_31">[31]</a> Euseb. Chron.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_32" href="#NtpJohI_32">[32]</a> Cyril Catech. 6.
+  Philastr. de h�res. cap. 30. Sulp. Hist. l. 2. Prosper de promiss. dimid.
+  temp. cap. 13. Maximus serm. 5. in Natal. Apost. Hegesip. l. 2. c. 2.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_33" href="#NtpJohI_33">[33]</a> Lactant de mortib.
+  Persec. c. 2.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_34" href="#NtpJohI_34">[34]</a> Hom. 70. in Matt. c.
+  22.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_35" href="#NtpJohI_35">[35]</a> Apud Euseb. Eccl.
+  Hist. l. 2. c. 25.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_36" href="#NtpJohI_36">[36]</a> Euseb. Hist. l. 2. c.
+  25.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_37" href="#NtpJohI_37">[37]</a> Arethas in Pro�m.
+  comment. in Apoc.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_38" href="#NtpJohI_38">[38]</a> Euseb. Hist. l. 4.
+  cap. 26. Hieron.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_39" href="#NtpJohI_39">[39]</a> Euseb. Hist. l. 4. c.
+  24.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_40" href="#NtpJohI_40">[40]</a> Hieron.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_41" href="#NtpJohI_41">[41]</a> Dan. x. 21. xii. 4,
+  9.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_42" href="#NtpJohI_42">[42]</a> Dan. xii. 4, 10.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohI_43" href="#NtpJohI_43">[43]</a> Apoc. i. 3.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="JohII">CHAP. II</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the relation which the </i>Apocalypse<i>
+of </i>John<i> hath to the Book of the
+Law of </i>Moses<i>, and to the worship
+of God in the Temple</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Apocalypse</i> of <i>John</i> is written in the same style and
+  language with the Prophecies of <i>Daniel</i>, and hath the same relation
+  to them which they have to one another, so that all of them together make
+  but one complete Prophecy; and in like manner it consists of two parts,
+  an introductory Prophecy, and an Interpretation thereof.</p>
+
+  <p>The Prophecy is distinguish'd into seven successive parts, by the
+  opening of the seven seals of the book which <i>Daniel</i> was commanded
+  to seal up: and hence it is called the <i>Apocalypse</i> or
+  <i>Revelation</i> of <i>Jesus Christ</i>. The time of the seventh seal is
+  sub-divided into eight successive parts by the silence in heaven for half
+  an hour, and the sounding of seven trumpets successively: and the seventh
+  trumpet sounds to the battle of the great day of God Almighty, whereby
+  <i>the kingdoms of this world become the kingdoms of the Lord and of his
+  Christ</i>, and those are destroyed that destroyed the earth.</p>
+
+  <p>The Interpretation begins with the words, <i>And the temple of God was
+  opened in heaven, and there was seen in his temple the Ark of his
+  Testament</i>: and it continues to the end of the Prophecy. The Temple is
+  the scene of the visions, and the visions in the Temple relate to the
+  feast of the seventh month: for the feasts of the <i>Jews</i> were
+  typical of things to come. The Passover related to the first coming of
+  <i>Christ</i>, and the feasts of the seventh month to his second coming:
+  his first coming being therefore over before this Prophecy was given, the
+  feasts of the seventh month are here only alluded unto.</p>
+
+  <p>On the first day of that month, in the morning, the High-Priest
+  dressed the lamps: and in allusion hereunto, this Prophecy begins with a
+  vision of one like <i>the Son of man</i> in the High-Priest's habit,
+  appearing as it were in the midst of the seven golden candlesticks, or
+  over against the midst of them, dressing the lamps, which appeared like a
+  rod of seven stars in his right hand: and this dressing was perform'd by
+  the sending seven Epistles to the Angels or Bishops of the seven Churches
+  of <i>Asia</i>, which in the primitive times illuminated the Temple or
+  Church Catholick. These Epistles contain admonitions against the
+  approaching Apostacy, and therefore relate to the times when the Apostacy
+  began to work strongly, and before it prevailed. It began to work in the
+  Apostles days, and was to continue working <i>till the man of sin should
+  be revealed</i>. It began to work in the disciples of <i>Simon</i>,
+  <i>Menander</i>, <i>Carpocrates</i>, <i>Cerinthas</i>, and such sorts of
+  men as had imbibed the metaphysical philosophy of the <i>Gentiles</i> and
+  <i>Cabalistical Jews</i>, and were thence called <i>Gnosticks</i>.
+  <i>John</i> calls them <i>Antichrists</i>, saying that in his days there
+  were many <i>Antichrists</i>. But these being condemned by the Apostles,
+  and their immediate disciples, put the Churches in no danger during the
+  opening of the first four seals. The visions at the opening of these
+  seals relate only to the civil affairs of the heathen <i>Roman</i>
+  Empire. So long the Apostolic traditions prevailed, and preserved the
+  Church in its purity: and therefore the affairs of the Church do not
+  begin to be considered in this Prophecy before the opening of the fifth
+  seal. She began then to decline, and to want admonitions; and therefore
+  is admonished by these Epistles, till the Apostacy prevailed and took
+  place, which was at the opening of the seventh seal. The admonitions
+  therefore in these seven Epistles relate to the state of the Church in
+  the times of the fifth and sixth seals. At the opening of the fifth seal,
+  the Church is purged from hypocrites by a great persecution. At the
+  opening of the sixth, that which letted is taken out of the way, namely
+  the heathen <i>Roman</i> Empire. At the opening of the seventh, the man
+  of sin is revealed. And to these times the seven Epistles relate.</p>
+
+  <p>The seven Angels, to whom these Epistles were written, answer to the
+  seven <i>Amarc-holim</i>, who were Priests and chief Officers of the
+  Temple, and had jointly the keys of the gates of the Temple, with those
+  of the Treasuries, and the direction, appointment and oversight of all
+  things in the Temple.</p>
+
+  <p>After the lamps were dresed, <i>John</i> saw <i>the door</i> of the
+  Temple <i>opened</i>; and by <i>the voice as it were of a trumpet</i>,
+  was called up to the eastern gate of the great court, to see the visions:
+  and <i>behold a throne was set</i>, <i>viz.</i> the mercy-seat upon the
+  Ark of the Testament, which the <i>Jews</i> respected as <i>the throne of
+  God between the </i>Cherubims, <i>Exod.</i> xxv. 2. <i>Psal.</i> xcix. 1.
+  <i>And he that sat on it was to look upon like </i>Jasper<i> and
+  </i>Sardine<i> stone</i>, that is, of an olive colour, the people of
+  <i>Judea</i> being of that colour. <i>And</i>, the Sun being then in the
+  <i>East, a rainbow was about the throne</i>, the emblem of glory. <i>And
+  round about the throne were four and twenty seats</i>; answering to the
+  chambers of the four and twenty Princes of the Priests, twelve on the
+  south side, and twelve on the north side of the Priests Court. <i>And
+  upon the seats were four and twenty Elders sitting, clothed in white
+  rayment, with crowns on their heads</i>; representing the Princes of the
+  four and twenty courses of the Priests clothed in linen. <i>And out of
+  the throne proceeded lightnings and thunderings, and voices</i>,
+  <i>viz.</i> the flashes of the fire upon the Altar at the
+  morning-sacrifice, and the thundering voices of those that sounded the
+  trumpets, and sung at the Eastern gate of the Priests Court; for these
+  being between <i>John</i> and the throne appeared to him as proceeding
+  from the throne. <i>And there were seven lamps of fire burning</i>, in
+  the Temple, <i>before the throne, which are the seven spirits of God</i>,
+  or Angels of the seven Churches, represented in the beginning of this
+  Prophecy by seven stars. <i>And before the throne was a sea of glass
+  clear as chrystal</i>; the brazen sea between the porch of the Temple and
+  the Altar, filled with clear water. <i>And in the midst of the throne,
+  and round about the throne, were four Beasts full of eyes before and
+  behind</i>: that is, one Beast before the throne and one behind it,
+  appearing to <i>John</i> as in the midst of the throne, and one on either
+  side in the circle about it, to represent by the multitude of their eyes
+  the people standing in the four sides of the peoples court. <i>And the
+  first Beast was like a lion, and the second was like a calf, and the
+  third had the face of a man, and the fourth was like a flying eagle</i>.
+  The people of <i>Israel</i> in the wilderness encamped round about the
+  tabernacle, and on the east side were three tribes under the standard of
+  <i>Judah</i>, on the west were three tribes under the standard of
+  <i>Ephraim</i>, on the south were three tribes under the standard of
+  <i>Reuben</i>, and on the north were three tribes under the standard of
+  <i>Dan</i>, <i>Numb.</i> ii. And the standard of <i>Judah</i> was a Lion,
+  that of <i>Ephraim</i> an Ox, that of <i>Reuben</i> a Man, and that of
+  <i>Dan</i> an Eagle, as the <i>Jews</i> affirm. Whence were framed the
+  hieroglyphicks of <i>Cherubims</i> and <i>Seraphims</i>, to represent the
+  people of <i>Israel</i>. A <i>Cherubim</i> had one body with four faces,
+  the faces of a Lion, an Ox, a Man and an Eagle, looking to the four winds
+  of heaven, without turning about, as in <i>Ezekiel</i>'s vision, chap. i.
+  And four <i>Seraphims</i> had the same four faces with four bodies, one
+  face to every body. The four Beasts are therefore four <i>Seraphims</i>
+  standing in the four sides of the peoples court; the first in the eastern
+  side with the head of a Lion, the second in the western side with the
+  head of an Ox, the third in the southern side with the head of a Man, the
+  fourth in the northern side with the head of an Eagle: and all four
+  signify together the twelve tribes of <i>Israel</i>, out of whom the
+  hundred forty and four thousand were sealed, <i>Apoc.</i> vii. 4. <i>And
+  the four Beasts had each of them six wings</i>, two to a tribe, in all
+  twenty and four wings, answering to the twenty and four stations of the
+  people. <i>And they were full of eyes within</i>, or under their wings.
+  <i>And they rest not day and night</i>, or at the morning and
+  evening-sacrifices, <i>saying, holy, holy, holy Lord God Almighty, which
+  was, and is, and is to come</i>. These animals are therefore the
+  Seraphims, which appeared to <i>Isaiah</i> <a name="NtpJohII_1"
+  href="#NtJohII_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> in a vision like this of the
+  <i>Apocalypse</i>. For there also the Lord sat upon a throne in the
+  temple; and the Seraphims each with six wings cried, <i>Holy, holy, holy
+  Lord God of hosts. And when those animals give glory and honour and
+  thanks to him that sitteth upon the throne, who liveth for ever and ever,
+  the four and twenty Elders</i> go into the Temple, and there <i>fall down
+  before him that sitteth on the throne, and worship him that liveth for
+  ever and ever, and cast their crowns before the throne, saying, Thou art
+  worthy, O Lord, to receive glory and honour and power: for thou hast
+  created all things, and for thy pleasure they are and were created</i>.
+  At the morning and evening-sacrifices, so soon as the sacrifice was laid
+  upon the Altar, and the drink-offering began to be poured out, the
+  trumpets sounded, and the <i>Levites</i> sang by course three times; and
+  every time when the trumpets sounded, the people fell down and worshiped.
+  Three times therefore did the people worship; to express which number,
+  the Beasts cry <i>Holy, holy, holy</i>: and the song being ended, the
+  people prayed standing, till the solemnity was finished. In the mean time
+  the Priests went into the Temple, and there fell down before him that sat
+  upon the throne, and worshiped.</p>
+
+  <p><i>And </i>John<i> saw, in the right hand of him that sat upon the
+  throne, a book written within and on the backside, sealed with seven
+  seals</i>, <i>viz.</i> the book which <i>Daniel</i> was commanded to seal
+  up, and which is here represented by the prophetic book of the Law laid
+  up on the right side of the Ark, as it were in the right hand of him that
+  sat on the throne: for the festivals and ceremonies of the Law prescribed
+  to the people in this book, adumbrated those things which were predicted
+  in the book of <i>Daniel</i>; and the writing within and on the backside
+  of this book, relates to the synchronal Prophecies. <a name="NtpJohII_2"
+  href="#NtJohII_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> <i>And none was found worthy to open
+  the book</i> but the Lamb of God. <i>And lo, in the midst of the throne
+  and of the four Beasts, and in the midst of the Elders</i>, that is, at
+  the foot of the Altar, <i>stood a lamb as it had been slain</i>, the
+  morning-sacrifice; <i>having seven horns</i>, which are the seven
+  Churches, <i>and seven eyes, which are the seven spirits of God sent
+  forth into all the earth. And he came, and took the book out of the right
+  hand of him that sat upon the throne: And when he had taken the book, the
+  four Beasts and four and twenty Elders fell down before the Lamb, having
+  every one of them harps, and golden vials full of odours, which are the
+  prayers of saints. And they sung a new song, saying, Thou art worthy to
+  take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and
+  hast redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and tongue,
+  and people, and nation; and hast made us, unto our God, Kings and
+  Priests, and we shall reign on the earth.</i> The Beasts and Elders
+  therefore represent the primitive <i>Christians</i> of all nations; and
+  the worship of these <i>Christians</i> in their Churches is here
+  represented under the form of worshiping God and the Lamb in the Temple:
+  God for his benefaction in creating all things, and the Lamb for his
+  benefaction in redeeming us with his blood: God as sitting upon the
+  throne and living for ever, and the Lamb as exalted above all by the
+  merits of his death. <i>And I heard</i>, saith <i>John</i>, <i>the voice
+  of many Angels round about the throne, and the Beasts and the Elders: and
+  the number of them was ten thousand times ten thousand, and thousands of
+  thousands; saying with a loud voice, Worthy is the Lamb that was slain to
+  receive power, and riches, and wisdom, and strength, and honour, and
+  glory, and blessing. And every creature which is in heaven, and on the
+  earth, and under the earth, and such as are in the sea, and all that are
+  in them, heard I, saying, Blessing, honour, glory, and power, be unto him
+  that sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb for ever and ever. And
+  the four Beasts said, </i>Amen<i>. And the four and twenty Elders fell
+  down and worshiped him that liveth for ever and ever.</i> This was the
+  worship of the primitive <i>Christians</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>It was the custom for the High-Priest, seven days before the fast of
+  the seventh month, to continue constantly in the Temple, and study the
+  book of the Law, that he might be perfect in it against the day of
+  expiation; wherein the service, which was various and intricate, was
+  wholly to be performed by himself; part of which service was reading the
+  Law to the people: and to promote his studying it, there were certain
+  Priests appointed by the <i>Sanhedrim</i> to be with him those seven days
+  in one of his chambers in the Temple, and there to discourse with him
+  about the Law, and read it to him, and put him in mind of reading and
+  studying it himself. This his opening and reading the Law those seven
+  days, is alluded unto in the Lamb's opening the seals. We are to conceive
+  that those seven days begin in the evening before each day; for the
+  <i>Jews</i> began their day in the evening, and that the solemnity of the
+  fast begins in the morning of the seventh day.</p>
+
+  <p>The seventh seal was therefore opened on the day of expiation, and
+  then <i>there was silence in heaven for half an hour. And an Angel</i>,
+  the High-Priest, <i>stood at the Altar, having a golden Censer; and there
+  was given him much incense, that he should offer it with the prayers of
+  all Saints, upon the golden Altar which was before the throne</i>. The
+  custom was on other days, for one of the Priests to take fire from the
+  great Altar in a silver Censer; but on this day, for the High-Priest to
+  take fire from the great Altar in a golden Censer: and when he was come
+  down from the great Altar, he took incense from one of the Priests who
+  brought it to him, and went with it to the golden Altar: and while he
+  offered the incense, the people prayed without in silence, which is the
+  silence in heaven for half an hour. When the High-Priest had laid the
+  incense on the Altar, he carried a Censer of it burning in his hand, into
+  the most holy place before the Ark. <i>And the smoke of the incense, with
+  the prayers of the Saints, ascended up before God out of the Angel's
+  hand.</i> On other days there was a certain measure of incense for the
+  golden Altar: on this day there was a greater quantity for both the Altar
+  and the most holy Place, and therefore it is called <i>much incense</i>.
+  After this <i>the Angel took the Censer, and filled it with fire from
+  the</i> great <i>Altar, and cast it into the earth</i>; that is, by the
+  hands of the Priests who belong to his mystical body, he cast it to the
+  earth without the Temple, for burning the Goat which was the Lord's lot.
+  <i>And</i> at this and other concomitant sacrifices, until the
+  evening-sacrifice was ended, <i>there were voices, and thundrings, and
+  lightnings, and an earthquake</i>; that is, the voice of the High-Priest
+  reading the Law to the people, and other voices and thundrings from the
+  trumpets and temple-musick at the sacrifices, and lightnings from the
+  fire of the Altar.</p>
+
+  <p>The solemnity of the day of expiation being finished, the seven Angels
+  found their trumpets at the great sacrifices of the seven days of the
+  feast of tabernacles; and at the same sacrifices, the seven thunders
+  utter their voices, which are the musick of the Temple, and singing of
+  the <i>Levites</i>, intermixed with the soundings of the trumpets: and
+  the seven Angels pour out their vials of wrath, which are the
+  drink-offerings of those sacrifices.</p>
+
+  <p>When six of the seals were opened, <i>John</i> said: <a
+  name="NtpJohII_3" href="#NtJohII_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a> <i>And after these
+  things</i>, that is, after the visions of the sixth seal, <i>I saw four
+  Angels standing on the four corners of the earth, holding the four winds
+  of the earth, that the wind should not blow on the earth, nor on the sea,
+  nor on any tree. And I saw another Angel ascending from the </i>East<i>,
+  having the seal of the living God: and he cried with a loud voice to the
+  four Angels, to whom it was given to hurt the earth and the sea, saying,
+  Hurt not the earth, nor the sea, nor the trees, till we have sealed the
+  servants of our God in their foreheads.</i> This sealing alludes to a
+  tradition of the <i>Jews</i>, that upon the day of expiation all the
+  people of <i>Israel</i> are sealed up in the books of life and death. For
+  the <i>Jews</i> in their <i>Talmud</i> <a name="NtpJohII_4"
+  href="#NtJohII_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> tell us, that in the beginning of
+  every new year, or first day of the month <i>Tisri</i>, the seventh month
+  of the sacred year, three books are opened in judgment; the book of life,
+  in which the names of those are written who are perfectly just; the book
+  of death, in which the names of those are written who are Atheists or
+  very wicked; and a third book, of those whose judgment is suspended till
+  the day of expiation, and whose names are not written in the book of life
+  or death before that day. The first ten days of this month they call the
+  penitential days; and all these days they fast and pray very much, and
+  are very devout, that on the tenth day their sins may be remitted, and
+  their names may be written in the book of life; which day is therefore
+  called the day of expiation. And upon this tenth day, in returning home
+  from the Synagogues, they say to one another, <i>God the creator seal you
+  to a good year</i>. For they conceive that the books are now sealed up,
+  and that the sentence of God remains unchanged henceforward to the end of
+  the year. The same thing is signified by the two Goats, upon whose
+  foreheads the High-Priest yearly, on the day of expiation, lays the two
+  lots inscribed, <i>For God</i> and <i>For </i>Azazel; God's lot
+  signifying the people who are sealed with the name of God in their
+  foreheads; and the lot <i>Azazel</i>, which was sent into the wilderness,
+  representing those who receive the mark and name of the Beast, and go
+  into the wilderness with the great Whore.</p>
+
+  <p>The servants of God being therefore sealed in the day of expiation, we
+  may conceive that this sealing is synchronal to the visions which appear
+  upon opening the seventh seal; and that when the Lamb had opened six of
+  the seals and seen the visions relating to the inside of the sixth, he
+  looked on the backside of the seventh leaf, and then saw <i>the four
+  Angels holding the four winds of heaven, and another Angel ascending from
+  the </i>East<i> with the seal of God</i>. Conceive also, that the Angels
+  which held the four winds were the first four of the seven Angels, who
+  upon opening the seventh seal were seen standing before God; and that
+  upon their holding the winds, <i>there was silence in heaven for half an
+  hour</i>; and that while the servants of God were sealing, the Angel with
+  the golden Censer offered their prayers with incense upon the golden
+  Altar, and read the Law: and that so soon as they were sealed, the winds
+  hurt the earth at the sounding of the first trumpet, and the sea at the
+  sounding of the second; these winds signifying the wars, to which the
+  first four trumpets sounded. For as the first four seals are
+  distinguished from the three last by the appearance of four horsemen
+  towards the four winds of heaven; so the wars of the first four trumpets
+  are distinguished from those of the three last, by representing these by
+  <i>four winds</i>, and the others by <i>three great woes</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>In one of <i>Ezekiel</i>'s visions, when the <i>Babylonian</i>
+  captivity was at hand, <i>six men</i> appeared <i>with
+  slaughter-weapons</i>; <i>and a seventh</i>, who <a name="NtpJohII_5"
+  href="#NtJohII_5"><sup>[5]</sup></a> appeared <i>among them clothed in
+  white linen and a writer's ink-horn by his side</i>, is commanded to
+  <i>go thro' the midst of </i>Jerusalem<i>, and set a mark upon the
+  foreheads of the men that sigh and cry for all the abominations done in
+  the midst thereof</i>: and then the six men, like the Angels of the first
+  six trumpets, are commanded to slay those men who are not marked.
+  Conceive therefore that the hundred forty and four thousand are sealed,
+  to preserve them from the plagues of the first six trumpets; and that at
+  length by the preaching of the everlasting gospel, they grow into <i>a
+  great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds,
+  and people and tongues</i>: and at the sounding of the seventh trumpet
+  come out of the great tribulation <i>with Palms in their hands: the
+  kingdoms of this world</i>, by the war to which that trumpet sounds,
+  <i>becoming the kingdoms of God and his </i>Christ. For the solemnity of
+  the great <i>Hosannah</i> was kept by the <i>Jews</i> upon the seventh or
+  last day of the feast of tabernacles; the <i>Jews</i> upon that day
+  carrying Palms in their hands, and crying <i>Hosannah</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>After six of the Angels, answering to the six men with
+  slaughter-weapons, had sounded their trumpets, the Lamb in the form of
+  <i>a mighty Angel cane down from heaven clothed with a cloud, and a
+  rainbow was upon his head, and his face was as it were the Sun, and his
+  feet as pillars of fire</i>, the shape in which <i>Christ</i> appeared in
+  the beginning of this Prophecy; <i>and he had in his hand a little book
+  open</i>, the book which he had newly opened; for he received but one
+  book from him that sitteth upon the throne, and he alone was worthy to
+  open and look on this book. <i>And he set his right foot upon the sea and
+  his left foot on the earth, and cried with a loud voice, as when a lion
+  roareth</i>. It was the custom for the High-Priest on the day of
+  expiation, to stand in an elevated place in the peoples court, at the
+  Eastern gate of the Priests court, and read the Law to the people, while
+  the Heifer and the Goat which was the Lord's lot, were burning without
+  the Temple. We may therefore suppose him standing in such a manner, that
+  his right foot might appear to <i>John</i> as it were standing on the sea
+  of glass, and his left foot on the ground of the house; and that he cried
+  with a loud voice, in reading the Law on the day of expiation. <i>And
+  when he had cried, seven thunders uttered their voices</i>. Thunders are
+  the voice of a cloud, and a cloud signifies a multitude; and this
+  multitude may be the <i>Levites</i>, who sang with thundering voices, and
+  played with musical instruments at the great sacrifices, on the seven
+  days of the feast of Tabernacles: at which times the trumpets also
+  sounded. For the trumpets sounded, and the <i>Levites</i> sang
+  alternately, three times at every sacrifice. The Prophecy therefore of
+  the seven thunders is nothing else than a repetition of the Prophecy of
+  the seven trumpets in another form. <i>And the Angel which I saw stand
+  upon the sea and upon the earth, lifted up his hand to heaven, and sware
+  by him that liveth for ever and ever, that</i> after the seven thunders
+  <i>there should be time no longer; but in the days of the voice of the
+  seventh Angel, when he shall begin to sound, the mystery of God should be
+  finished, as he hath declared to his servants the Prophets</i>. The
+  voices of the thunders therefore last to the end of this world, and so do
+  those of the trumpets.</p>
+
+  <p><i>And the voice which I heard from heaven</i>, saith <i>John</i>,
+  <i>spake unto me again and said, Go and take the little book, &amp;c. And
+  I took the little book out of the Angel's hand, and ate it up; and it was
+  in my mouth sweet as honey, and as soon as I had eaten it, my belly was
+  bitter. And he said unto me, Thou must prophesy again before many
+  peoples, and nations, and tongues, and kings</i>. This is an introduction
+  to a new Prophecy, to a repetition of the Prophecy of the whole book; and
+  alludes to <i>Ezekiel</i>'s eating a roll or book spread open before him,
+  and written within and without, full of lamentations and mourning and
+  woe, but sweet in his mouth. Eating and drinking signify acquiring and
+  possessing; and eating the book is becoming inspired with the Prophecy
+  contained in it. It implies being inspired in a vigorous and
+  extraordinary manner with the Prophecy of the whole book, and therefore
+  signifies a lively repetition of the whole Prophecy by way of
+  interpretation, and begins not till the first Prophecy, that of the seals
+  and trumpets, is ended. It was sweet in <i>John</i>'s mouth, and
+  therefore begins not with the bitter Prophecy of the <i>Babylonian</i>
+  captivity, and the <i>Gentiles</i> being in the outward court of the
+  Temple, and treading the holy city under foot; and the prophesying of the
+  <i>two Witnesses</i> in sackcloth, and their smiting the earth with all
+  plagues, and being killed by the Beast; but so soon as the Prophecy of
+  the trumpets is ended, it begins with the sweet Prophecy of the glorious
+  <i>Woman in heaven</i>, and the victory of <i>Michael</i> over the
+  Dragon; and after that, it is bitter in <i>John</i>'s belly, by a large
+  description of the times of the great Apostacy.</p>
+
+  <p><i>And the Angel stood</i>, upon the earth and sea, <i>saying, Rise
+  and measure the Temple of God and the Altar, and them that worship
+  therein</i>, that is, their courts with the buildings thereon,
+  <i>viz.</i> the square court of the Temple called the separate place, and
+  the square court of the Altar called the Priests court, and the court of
+  them that worship in the Temple called the new court: <i>but the</i>
+  great <i>court which is without the Temple, leave out, and measure it
+  not, for it is given to the </i>Gentiles<i>, and the holy city shall they
+  tread under foot forty and two months</i>. This measuring hath reference
+  to <i>Ezekiel</i>'s measuring the Temple <i>of Solomon</i>: there the
+  whole Temple, including the outward court, was measured, to signify that
+  it should be rebuilt in the latter days. Here the courts of the Temple
+  and Altar, and they who worship therein, are only measured, to signify
+  the building of a second Temple, for those that are sealed out of all the
+  twelve tribes of <i>Israel</i>, and worship in the inward court of
+  sincerity and truth: but <i>John</i> is commanded to leave out the
+  outward court, or outward form of religion and Church-government, because
+  it is given to the <i>Babylonian Gentiles</i>. For the glorious woman in
+  heaven, the remnant of whole seed kept the commandments of God, and had
+  the testimony of <i>Jesus</i>, continued the same woman in outward form
+  after her flight into the wilderness, whereby she quitted her former
+  sincerity and piety, and became the great Whore. She lost her chastity,
+  but kept her outward form and shape. And while the <i>Gentiles</i> tread
+  the holy city underfoot, and worship in the outward court, the two
+  witnesses, represented perhaps by the two feet of the Angel standing on
+  the sea and earth, prophesied against them, and <i>had power</i>, like
+  <i>Elijah</i> and <i>Moses</i>, <i>to consume their enemies with fire
+  proceeding out of their mouth, and to shut heaven that it rain not in the
+  days of their Prophecy, and to turn the waters into blood, and to smite
+  the earth with all plagues as often as they will</i>, that is, with the
+  plagues of the trumpets and vials of wrath; and at length they are slain,
+  rise again from the dead, and ascend up to heaven in a cloud; and then
+  the seventh trumpet sounds to the day of judgment.</p>
+
+  <p>The Prophecy being finished, <i>John</i> is inspired anew by the eaten
+  book, and begins the Interpretation thereof with these words, <i>And the
+  Temple of God was opened in heaven, and there was seen in his Temple the
+  Ark of the Testament</i>. By the Ark, we may know that this was the first
+  Temple; for the second Temple had no Ark. <i>And there were lightnings,
+  and voices, and thundrings, and an earthquake, and great hail</i>. These
+  answer to the wars in the <i>Roman</i> Empire, during the reign of the
+  four horsemen, who appeared upon opening the first four seals. <i>And
+  there appeared a great wonder in heaven, a woman clothed with the
+  Sun</i>. In the Prophecy, the affairs of the Church begin to be
+  considered at the opening of the fifth seal; and in the Interpretation,
+  they begin at the same time with the vision of the Church in the form of
+  a woman in heaven: there she is persecuted, and here she is pained in
+  travail. The Interpretation proceeds down first to the sealing of the
+  servants of God, and marking the rest with the mark of the Beast; and
+  then to the day of judgment, represented by a harvest and vintage. Then
+  it returns back to the times of opening the seventh seal, and interprets
+  the Prophecy of the seven trumpets by the pouring out of seven vials of
+  wrath. The Angels who pour them out, come out of the <i>Temple of the
+  Tabernacle</i>; that is, out of the second Temple, for the Tabernacle had
+  no outward court. Then it returns back again to the times of measuring
+  the Temple and Altar, and of the <i>Gentiles</i> worshiping in the
+  outward court, and of the Beast killing the witnesses in the streets of
+  the great city; and interprets these things by the vision of <i>a woman
+  sitting on the Beast, drunken with the blood of the Saints</i>; and
+  proceeds in the interpretation downwards to the fall of the great city
+  and the day of judgment.</p>
+
+  <p>The whole Prophecy of the book, represented by the book of the Law, is
+  therefore repeated, and interpreted in the visions which follow those of
+  sounding the seventh trumpet, and begin with that of the Temple of God
+  opened in heaven. Only the things, which the seven thunders uttered, were
+  not written down, and therefore not interpreted.</p>
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. II.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtJohII_1" href="#NtpJohII_1">[1]</a> Isa. vi.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohII_2" href="#NtpJohII_2">[2]</a> Apoc. v.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohII_3" href="#NtpJohII_3">[3]</a> Apoc. vii</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohII_4" href="#NtpJohII_4">[4]</a> Buxtorf in Synogoga
+  Judaica, c. 18, 21.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohII_5" href="#NtpJohII_5">[5]</a> Ezek. ix.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><a name="JohIII">CHAP. III</a>.</h3>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Of the relation which the Prophecy of
+</i>John<i> hath to those of </i>Daniel<i>; and
+of the Subject of the Prophecy</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The whole scene of sacred Prophecy is composed of three principal
+  parts: the regions beyond <i>Euphrates</i>, represented by the two first
+  Beasts of <i>Daniel</i>; the Empire of the <i>Greeks</i> on this side of
+  <i>Euphrates</i>, represented by the Leopard and by the He-Goat; and the
+  Empire of the <i>Latins</i> on this side of <i>Greece</i>, represented by
+  the Beast with ten horns. And to these three parts, the phrases of the
+  <i>third part of the earth, sea, rivers, trees, ships, stars, sun, and
+  moon</i>, relate. I place the body of the fourth Beast on this side of
+  <i>Greece</i>, because the three first of the four Beasts had their lives
+  prolonged after their dominion was taken away, and therefore belong not
+  to the body of the fourth. He only stamped them with his feet.</p>
+
+  <p>By the <i>earth</i>, the <i>Jews</i> understood the great continent of
+  all <i>Asia</i> and <i>Africa</i>, to which they had access by land: and
+  by the Isles of the <i>sea</i>, they understood the places to which they
+  sailed by sea, particularly all <i>Europe</i>: and hence in this
+  Prophecy, the <i>earth</i> and <i>sea</i> are put for the nations of the
+  <i>Greek</i> and <i>Latin</i> Empires.</p>
+
+  <p>The third and fourth Beasts of <i>Daniel</i> are the same with the
+  Dragon and ten-horned Beast of <i>John</i>, but with this difference:
+  <i>John</i> puts the Dragon for the whole <i>Roman</i> Empire while it
+  continued entire, because it was entire when that Prophecy was given; and
+  the Beast he considers not till the Empire became divided: and then he
+  puts the Dragon for the Empire of the <i>Greeks</i>, and the Beast for
+  the Empire of the <i>Latins</i>. Hence it is that the Dragon and Beast
+  have common heads and common horns: but the Dragon hath crowns only upon
+  his heads, and the Beast only upon his horns; because the Beast and his
+  horns reigned not before they were divided from the Dragon: and when the
+  Dragon gave the Beast his throne, the ten horns received power as Kings,
+  the same hour with the Beast. The heads are seven successive Kings. Four
+  of them were the four horsemen which appeared at the opening of the first
+  four seals. In the latter end of the sixth head, or seal, considered as
+  present in the visions, it is said, <i>five</i> of the seven Kings <i>are
+  fallen, and one is, and another is not yet come; and the Beast that was
+  and is not</i>, being wounded to death with a sword, <i>he is the eighth,
+  and of the seven</i>: he was therefore a collateral part of the seventh.
+  The horns are the same with those of <i>Daniel</i>'s fourth Beast,
+  described above.</p>
+
+  <p>The four horsemen which appear at the opening of the first four seals,
+  have been well explained by Mr. <i>Mede</i>; excepting that I had rather
+  continue the third to the end of the reign of the three <i>Gordians</i>
+  and <i>Philip</i> the <i>Arabian</i>, those being Kings from the
+  <i>South</i>, and begin the fourth with the reign of <i>Decius</i>, and
+  continue it till the reign of <i>Dioclesian</i>. For the fourth horseman
+  <i>sat upon a pale</i> horse, <i>and his name was Death; and hell
+  followed with him; and power was given them to kill unto the fourth part
+  of the earth, with the sword, and with famine, and with the plague, and
+  with the Beasts of the earth</i>, or armies of invaders and rebels: and
+  as such were the times during all this interval. Hitherto the
+  <i>Roman</i> Empire continued in an undivided monarchical form, except
+  rebellions; and such it is represented by the four horsemen. But
+  <i>Dioclesian</i> divided it between himself and <i>Maximianus</i>, A.C.
+  285; and it continued in that divided state, till the victory of
+  <i>Constantine</i> the great over <i>Licinius</i>, A.C. 323, which put an
+  end to the heathen persecutions set on foot by <i>Dioclesian</i> and
+  <i>Maximianus</i>, and described at the opening of the fifth seal. But
+  this division of the Empire was imperfect, the whole being still under
+  one and the same Senate. The same victory of <i>Constantine</i> over
+  <i>Licinius</i> a heathen persecutor, began the fall of the heathen
+  Empire, described at the opening of the sixth seal: and the visions of
+  this seal continue till after the reign of <i>Julian</i> the Apostate, he
+  being a heathen Emperor, and reigning over the whole <i>Roman</i>
+  Empire.</p>
+
+  <p>The affairs of the Church begin to be considered at the opening of the
+  fifth seal, as was said above. Then she is represented by <i>a woman</i>
+  in the Temple of heaven, <i>clothed with the sun</i> of righteousness,
+  <i>and the moon</i> of <i>Jewish</i> ceremonies <i>under her feet, and
+  upon her head a crown of twelve stars</i> relating to the twelve Apostles
+  and to the twelve tribes of <i>Israel</i>. When she fled from the Temple
+  into the wilderness, she left in the Temple a <i>remnant of her seed, who
+  kept the commandments of God, and had the testimony of Jesus Christ</i>;
+  and therefore before her flight she represented the true primitive Church
+  of God, tho afterwards she degenerated like <i>Aholah</i> and
+  <i>Aholibah</i>. In <i>Diocesian</i>'s persecution <i>she cried,
+  travelling in birth, and pained to be delivered</i>. And in the end of
+  that persecution, by the victory of <i>Constantine</i> over
+  <i>Maxentius</i> A.C. 312, <i>she brought forth a man-child</i>, such a
+  child as <i>was to rule all nations with a rod of iron</i>, a
+  <i>Christian</i> Empire. <i>And her child</i>, by the victory of
+  <i>Constantine</i> over <i>Licinius</i>, A.C. 323, <i>was caught up unto
+  God and to his throne. And the woman</i>, by the division of the
+  <i>Roman</i> Empire into the <i>Greek</i> and <i>Latin</i> Empires,
+  <i>fled</i> from the first Temple <i>into the wilderness</i>, or
+  spiritually barren Empire of the <i>Latins</i>, where she is found
+  afterwards sitting upon the Beast and upon the seven mountains; and is
+  called <i>the great city which reigneth over the Kings of the earth</i>,
+  that is, over the ten Kings who give their kingdom to her Beast.</p>
+
+  <p>But before her flight there was war in heaven between <i>Michael</i>
+  and the Dragon, the <i>Christian</i> and the heathen religions; and the
+  Dragon, <i>that old serpent, called the Devil and Satan, who deceiveth
+  the whole world, was cast out to the earth, and his Angels were cast out
+  with him</i>. And <i>John heard a voice in heaven, saying, Now is come
+  salvation and strength, and the kingdom of our God, and the power of his
+  </i>Christ<i>: for the accuser of our brethren is cast down. And they
+  overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and by the word of their
+  testimony. And they loved not their lives unto the death. Therefore
+  rejoice, ye heavens, and ye that dwell in them. Woe be to the inhabiters
+  of the earth and sea</i>, or people of the <i>Greek</i> and <i>Latin</i>
+  Empires, <i>for the devil is come down amongst you, having great wrath,
+  because he knoweth that he hath but a short time</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>And when the Dragon saw that he was cast down</i> from the
+  <i>Roman</i> throne, and the man-child caught up thither, he
+  <i>persecuted the woman which brought forth the man-child; and to
+  her</i>, by the division of the <i>Roman</i> Empire between the cities of
+  <i>Rome</i> and <i>Constantinople</i> A.C. 330, <i>were given two wings
+  of a great eagle</i>, the symbol of the <i>Roman</i> Empire, <i>that she
+  might flee</i> from the first Temple <i>into the wilderness</i> of
+  <i>Arabia, to her place</i> at <i>Babylon</i> mystically so called.
+  <i>And the serpent</i>, by the division of the same Empire between the
+  sons of <i>Constantine</i> the great, A.C. 337, <i>cast out of his mouth
+  water as a flood</i>, the <i>Western</i> Empire, <i>after the woman; that
+  he might cause her to be carried away by the flood. And the earth</i>, or
+  <i>Greek</i> Empire, <i>helped the woman, and the earth opened her mouth,
+  and swallowed up the flood</i>, by the victory of <i>Constantius</i> over
+  <i>Magnentius</i>, A.C. 353, and thus the Beast was wounded to death with
+  a sword. <i>And the Dragon was wroth with the woman</i>, in the reign of
+  <i>Julian</i> the Apostate A.C. 361, <i>and</i>, by a new division of the
+  Empire between <i>Valentinian</i> and <i>Valens</i>, A.C. 364,
+  <i>went</i> from her into the <i>Eastern</i> Empire <i>to make war with
+  the remnant of her seed</i>, which she left behind her when she fled: and
+  thus the Beast revived. By the next division of the Empire, which was
+  between <i>Gratian</i> and <i>Theodosius</i> A.C. 379, the <i>Beast</i>
+  with ten horns <i>rose out of the sea</i>, and the <i>Beast</i> with two
+  horns <i>out of the earth</i>: and by the last division thereof, which
+  was between the sons of <i>Theodosius</i>, A.C. 395, <i>the Dragon gave
+  the Beast his power and throne, and great authority</i>. And the ten
+  horns <i>received power as Kings, the same hour with the Beast</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>At length the woman arrived at her place of temporal as well as
+  spiritual dominion upon the back of the Beast, where she is nourished
+  <i>a time, and times, and half a time, from the face of the serpent</i>;
+  not in his kingdom, but at a distance from him. She is nourished by
+  <i>the merchants of the earth</i>, three times or years and an half, or
+  42 months, or 1260 days: and in these Prophecies days are put for years.
+  During all this time the Beast acted, and <i>she sat upon him</i>, that
+  is, reigned over him, and over the ten Kings <i>who gave their power and
+  strength</i>, that is, their kingdom <i>to the Beast</i>; and she was
+  <i>drunken with the blood of the Saints</i>. By all these circumstances
+  she is the eleventh horn of <i>Daniel</i>'s fourth Beast, who reigned
+  with <i>a look more stout than his fellows</i>, and was of a different
+  kind from the rest, and had eyes <i>and a mouth</i> like the woman;
+  <i>and made war with the saints, and prevailed against them</i>, and
+  <i>wore them out</i>, and <i>thought to change times and laws</i>, and
+  had them <i>given into his hand, until a time, and times, and half a
+  time</i>. These characters of the woman, and little horn of the Beast,
+  agree perfectly: in respect of her temporal dominion, she was a horn of
+  the Beast; in respect of her spiritual dominion, she rode upon him in the
+  form of a woman, and was his Church, and committed fornication with the
+  ten Kings.</p>
+
+  <p>The second Beast, which <i>rose up out of the earth</i>, was the
+  Church of the <i>Greek</i> Empire: for it <i>had two horns like those of
+  the Lamb</i>, and therefore was a Church; and it <i>spake as the
+  Dragon</i>, and therefore was of his religion; and it <i>came up out of
+  the earth</i>, and by consequence in his kingdom. It is called also
+  <i>the false Prophet</i> who wrought miracles before the first Beast, by
+  which he deceived them that received his mark, and worshiped his image.
+  When the Dragon went from the woman to make war with the remnant of her
+  seed, this Beast arising out of the earth assisted in that war, and
+  <i>caused the earth and them which dwell therein to worship</i> the
+  authority of <i>the first Beast, whose mortal wound was healed</i>, and
+  to <i>make an Image to him</i>, that is, to assemble a body of men like
+  him in point of religion. He had also <i>power to give life</i> and
+  authority <i>to the Image</i>, so that it could <i>both speak, and</i> by
+  dictating <i>cause that all</i> religious bodies of men, <i>who would not
+  worship</i> the authority of <i>the Image, should be</i> mystically
+  <i>killed. And he causeth all men to receive a mark in their right hand
+  or in their forehead, and that no man might buy or sell save he that had
+  the mark, or the name of the Beast, or the number of his name</i>; all
+  the rest being excommunicated by the Beast with two horns. His mark is
+  <img src="images/cross.png" alt="Cross" /> <img src="images/cross.png"
+  alt="Cross" /> <img src="images/cross.png" alt="Cross" />, and his name
+  <span lang="el" title="LATEINOS"
+  >&#x39B;&#x391;&#x3A4;&#x395;&#x399;&#x39D;&#x39F;&#x3A3;</span>, and the
+  number of his name 666.</p>
+
+  <p>Thus the Beast, after he was wounded to death with a sword and
+  revived, was deified, as the heathens used to deify their Kings after
+  death, and had an Image erected to him; and his worshipers were initiated
+  in this new religion, by receiving the mark or name of this new God, or
+  the number of his name. By killing all that will not worship him and his
+  Image, the first Temple, illuminated by the lamps of the seven Churches,
+  is demolished, and a new Temple built for them who will not worship him;
+  and the outward court of this new Temple, or outward form of a Church, is
+  given to the <i>Gentiles</i>, who worship the Beast and his Image: while
+  they who will not worship him, are sealed with the name of God in their
+  foreheads, and retire into the inward court of this new Temple. These are
+  the 144000 sealed out of all the twelve tribes of <i>Israel</i>, and
+  called the <i>two Witnesses</i>, as being derived from the two wings of
+  the woman while she was flying into the wilderness, and represented by
+  two of the seven candlesticks. These appear to <i>John</i> in the inward
+  court of the second Temple, standing on mount <i>Sion</i> with the Lamb,
+  and as it were on the sea of glass. These are <i>the Saints of the most
+  High</i>, and <i>the host of heaven</i>, and <i>the holy people</i>
+  spoken of by <i>Daniel</i>, as worn out and trampled under foot, and
+  destroyed in the latter times by the little horns of his fourth Beast and
+  He-Goat.</p>
+
+  <p>While the <i>Gentiles</i> tread the holy city under foot, God <i>gives
+  power to his two Witnesses, and they prophesy a thousand two hundred and
+  threescore days clothed in sackcloth</i>. They are called <i>the two
+  Olive-trees</i>, with relation to the two Olive-trees, which in
+  <i>Zechary</i>'s vision, chap. iv. stand on either side of the golden
+  candlestick to supply the lamps with oil: and Olive-trees, according to
+  the Apostle <i>Paul</i>, represent Churches, <i>Rom.</i> xi. They supply
+  the lamps with oil, by maintaining teachers. They are also called <i>the
+  two candlesticks</i>; which in this Prophecy signify Churches, the seven
+  Churches of <i>Asia</i> being represented by seven candlesticks. Five of
+  these Churches were found faulty, and threatned if they did not repent;
+  the other two were without fault, and so their candlesticks were fit to
+  be placed in the second Temple. These were the Churches in <i>Smyrna</i>
+  and <i>Philadelphia</i>. They were in a state of tribulation and
+  persecution, and the only two of the seven in such a state: and so their
+  candlesticks were fit to represent the Churches in affliction in the
+  times of the second Temple, and the only two of the seven that were fit.
+  The <i>two Witnesses</i> are not new Churches: they are the posterity of
+  the primitive Church, the posterity of the two wings of the woman, and so
+  are fitly represented by two of the primitive candlesticks. We may
+  conceive therefore, that when the first Temple was destroyed, and a new
+  one built for them who worship in the inward court, two of the seven
+  candlesticks were placed in this new Temple.</p>
+
+  <p>The affairs of the Church are not considered during the opening of the
+  first four seals. They begin to be consider'd at the opening of the fifth
+  seal, as was said above; and are further considered at the opening of the
+  sixth seal; and the seventh seal contains the times of the great
+  Apostacy. And therefore I refer the Epistles to the seven Churches unto
+  the times of the fifth and sixth seals: for they relate to the Church
+  when she began to decline, and contain admonitions against the great
+  Apostacy then approaching.</p>
+
+  <p>When <i>Eusebius</i> had brought down his <i>Ecclesiatical History</i>
+  to the reign of <i>Dioclesian</i>, he thus describes the state of the
+  Church: <i>Qualem quantamque gloriam simul ac libertatem doctrina ver�
+  erga supremum Deum pietatis � Christo prim�m hominibus annunciata, apud
+  omnes Gr�cos pariter &amp; barbaros ante persecutionem nostr� memori�
+  excitatam, consecuta sit, nos cert� pro merito explicare non possumus.
+  Argumento esse possit Imperatorum benignitas erga nostros: quibus
+  regendas etiam provincias committebant, omni sacrificandi metu eos
+  liberantes ob singularem, qua in religionem nostram affecti erant,
+  benevolentiam.</i> And a little after: <i>Jam vero quis innumerabilem
+  hominum quotidi� ad fidem Christi confugientium turbam, quis numerum
+  ecclesiarum in singulis urbibus, quis illustres populorum concursus in
+  �dibus sacris, cumulat� possit describere? Quo factum est, ut priscis
+  �dificiis jam non contenti, in singulis urbibus spatiosas ab ipsis
+  fundamentis exstruerent ecclesias. Atque h�c progressii temporis
+  increscentia, &amp; quotidi� in majus &amp; melius proficiscentia, nec
+  livor ullus atterere, nec malignitas d�monis fascinare, nec hominum
+  insidi� prohibere unquam potuerunt, quamdiu omnipotentis Dei dextra
+  populum suum, utpote tali dignum pr�sidio, texit atque custodiit. Sed cum
+  ex nimia libertate in negligentiam ac desidiam prolapsi essemus; cum
+  alter alteri invidere atque obtrectare c�pisset; cum inter nos quasi
+  bella intestina gereremus, verbis, tanquam armis quibusdam hastisque, nos
+  mutu� vulnerantes; cum Antistites adversus Antistites, populi in populos
+  collisi, jurgia ac tumultus agitarent; denique cum fraus &amp; simulatio
+  ad summum maliti� culmen adolevisset: tum divina ultio, levi brachio ut
+  solet, integro adhuc ecclesi� statu, &amp; fidelium turbis liber�
+  convenientibus, sensim ac moderat� in nos c�pit animadvertere; ors�
+  prim�m persecutione ab iis qui militabant. Cum ver� sensu omni destituti
+  de placando Dei numine ne cogitaremus quidem; quin potius instar impiorum
+  quorundam res humanas null� providenti� gubernari rati, alia quotidi�
+  crimina aliis adjiceremus: cum Pastores nostri spret� religionis regul�,
+  mutuis inter se contentionibus decertarent, nihil aliud quam jurgia,
+  minas, �mulationem, odia, ac mutuas inimicitias amplificare studentes;
+  principatum quasi tyrannidem quandam contentissim� sibi vindicantes: tunc
+  dem�m juxta dictum Hieremi�, </i>obscuravit Dominus in ira sua filiam
+  Sion, &amp; dejecit de c�lo gloriam Israel<i>,&mdash;per Ecclesiarum
+  scilicet subversionem</i>, &amp;c. This was the state of the Church just
+  before the subversion of the Churches in the beginning of
+  <i>Dioclesian</i>'s persecution: and to this state of the Church agrees
+  the first of the seven Epistles to the Angel of the seven Churches, <a
+  name="NtpJohIII_1" href="#NtJohIII_1"><sup>[1]</sup></a> that to the
+  Church in <i>Ephesus</i>. <i>I have something against thee</i>, saith
+  <i>Christ</i> to the Angel of that Church, <i>because thou hast left thy
+  first love. Remember therefore from whence thou art fallen, and repent,
+  and do the first works; or else I will come unto thee quickly, and will
+  remove thy candlestick out of its place, except thou repent. But this
+  thou hast, that thou hatest the deeds of the </i>Nicolaitans<i>, which I
+  also hate</i>. The <i>Nicolaitans</i> are the <i>Continentes</i> above
+  described, who placed religion in abstinence from marriage, abandoning
+  their wives if they had any. They are here called <i>Nicolaitans</i>,
+  from <i>Nicolas</i> one of the seven deacons of the primitive Church of
+  <i>Jerusalem</i>; who having a beautiful wife, and being taxed with
+  uxoriousness, abandoned her, and permitted her to marry whom she pleased,
+  saying that we must disuse the flesh; and thenceforward lived a single
+  life in continency, as his children also. The <i>Continentes</i>
+  afterwards embraced the doctrine of <i>�ons</i> and Ghosts male and
+  female, and were avoided by the Churches till the fourth century; and the
+  Church of <i>Ephesus</i> is here commended for hating their deeds.</p>
+
+  <p>The persecution of <i>Dioclesian</i> began in the year of
+  <i>Christ</i> 302, and lasted ten years in the <i>Eastern</i> Empire and
+  two years in the <i>Western</i>. To this state of the Church the second
+  Epistle, to the Church of <i>Smyrna</i>, agrees. <i>I know</i>, saith <a
+  name="NtpJohIII_2" href="#NtJohIII_2"><sup>[2]</sup></a> <i>Christ</i>,
+  <i>thy works, and tribulation, and poverty, but thou art rich; and I know
+  the blasphemy of them, which say they are </i>Jews<i> and are not, but
+  are the synagogue of Satan. Fear none of those things which thou shalt
+  suffer: Behold, the Devil shall call some of you into prison, that ye may
+  be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days. Be thou faithful unto
+  death, and I will give thee a crown of life.</i> The tribulation of ten
+  days can agree to no other persecution than that of <i>Dioclesian</i>, it
+  being the only persecution which lasted ten years. By <i>the blasphemy of
+  them which say they are </i>Jews<i> and are not, but are the synagogue of
+  Satan</i>, I understand the Idolatry of the <i>Nicolaitans</i>, who
+  falsly said they were <i>Christians</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Nicolaitans</i> are complained of also in <a name="NtpJohIII_3"
+  href="#NtJohIII_3"><sup>[3]</sup></a> the third Epistle, as men that
+  <i>held the doctrine of </i>Balaam<i>, who taught </i>Balac<i> to cast a
+  stumbling-block before the children of </i>Israel<i>, to eat things
+  sacrificed to Idols, and <a name="NtpJohIII_4"
+  href="#NtJohIII_4"><sup>[4]</sup></a> to commit</i> spiritual
+  <i>fornication</i>. For <i>Balaam</i> taught the <i>Moabites</i> and
+  <i>Midianites</i> to tempt and invite <i>Israel</i> by their women to
+  commit fornication, and to feast with them at the sacrifices of their
+  Gods. The Dragon therefore began now to come down among the inhabitants
+  of the earth and sea.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Nicolaitans</i> are also complained of in the fourth Epistle,
+  under the name of the <i>woman </i>Jezabel<i>, who calleth herself a
+  Prophetess, to teach and to seduce the servants of </i>Christ<i> to
+  commit fornication, and to eat things sacrificed to Idols</i>. The woman
+  therefore began now to fly into the wilderness.</p>
+
+  <p>The reign of <i>Constantine</i> the great from the time of his
+  conquering <i>Licinius</i>, was monarchical over the whole <i>Roman</i>
+  Empire. Then the Empire became divided between the sons of
+  <i>Constantine</i>: and afterwards it was again united under
+  <i>Constantius</i>, by his victory over <i>Magnentius</i>. To the affairs
+  of the Church in these three successive periods of time, the third,
+  fourth, and fifth Epistles, that is, those to the Angels of the Churches
+  in <i>Pergamus</i>, <i>Thyatira</i>, and <i>Sardis</i>, seem to relate.
+  The next Emperor was <i>Julian</i> the Apostate.</p>
+
+  <p>In the sixth Epistle, <a name="NtpJohIII_5"
+  href="#NtJohIII_5"><sup>[5]</sup></a> to the Angel of the Church in
+  <i>Philadelphia</i>, <i>Christ</i> saith: <i>Because</i> in the reign of
+  the heathen Emperor <i>Julian</i>, <i>thou hast kept the word of my
+  patience, I also will keep thee from the hour of temptation, which</i> by
+  the woman's flying into the wilderness, and the Dragon's making war with
+  the remnant of her seed, and the killing of all who will not worship the
+  Image of the Beast, <i>shall come upon all the world, to try them that
+  dwell upon the earth</i>, and to distinguish them by sealing the one with
+  the name of God in their foreheads, and marking the other with the mark
+  of the Beast. <i>Him that overcometh, I will make a pillar in the Temple
+  of my God; and he shall go no more out</i> of it. <i>And I will write
+  upon him the name of my God</i> in his forehead. So the <i>Christians</i>
+  of the Church of <i>Philadelphia</i>, as many of them as overcome, are
+  sealed with the seal of God, and placed in the second Temple, and go no
+  more out. The same is to be understood of the Church in <i>Smyrna</i>,
+  which also kept the word of God's patience, and was without fault. These
+  two Churches, with their posterity, are therefore the <i>two Pillars</i>,
+  and the <i>two Candlesticks</i>, and the <i>two Witnesses</i> in the
+  second Temple.</p>
+
+  <p>After the reign of the Emperor <i>Julian,</i> and his successor
+  <i>Jovian</i> who reigned but five months, the Empire became again
+  divided between <i>Valentinian</i> and <i>Valens</i>. Then the Church
+  Catholick, in the Epistle to the Angel of the Church of <i>Laodicea</i>,
+  is reprehended as <i>lukewarm</i>, and <a name="NtpJohIII_6"
+  href="#NtJohIII_6"><sup>[6]</sup></a> threatned to be <i>spewed out of
+  </i>Christ's<i> mouth</i>. She said, that she was <i>rich and increased
+  with goods, and had need of nothing</i>, being in outward prosperity;
+  <i>and knew not that she was</i> inwardly <i>wretched, and miserable, and
+  poor, and blind, and naked</i>. She is therefore <i>spewed out of
+  </i>Christ's<i> mouth</i> at the opening of the seventh seal: and this
+  puts an end to the times of the first Temple.</p>
+
+  <p>About one half of the <i>Roman</i> Empire turned <i>Christians</i> in
+  the time of <i>Constantine</i> the great and his sons. After
+  <i>Julian</i> had opened the Temples, and restored the worship of the
+  heathens, the Emperors <i>Valentinian</i> and <i>Valens</i> tolerated it
+  all their reign; and therefore the Prophecy of the sixth seal was not
+  fully accomplished before the reign of their successor <i>Gratian</i>. It
+  was the custom of the heathen Priests, in the beginning of the reign of
+  every sovereign Emperor, to offer him the dignity and habit of the
+  <i>Pontifex Maximus</i>. This dignity all Emperors had hitherto accepted:
+  but <i>Gratian</i> rejected it, threw down the idols, interdicted the
+  sacrifices, and took away their revenues with the salaries and authority
+  of the Priests. <i>Theodosius</i> the great followed his example; and
+  heathenism afterwards recovered itself no more, but decreased so fast,
+  that <i>Prudentius</i>, about ten years after the death of
+  <i>Theodosius</i>, called the heathens, <i>vix pauca ingenia &amp; pars
+  hominum rarissima</i>. Whence the affairs of the sixth seal ended with
+  the reign of <i>Valens</i>, or rather with the beginning of the reign of
+  <i>Theodosius</i>, when he, like his predecessor <i>Gratian</i>, rejected
+  the dignity of <i>Pontifex Maximus</i>. For the <i>Romans</i> were very
+  much infested by the invasions of foreign nations in the reign of
+  <i>Valentinian</i> and <i>Valens</i>: <i>Hoc tempore</i>, saith
+  <i>Ammianus</i>, <i>velut per universum orbem Romanum bellicum canentibus
+  buccinis, excit� gentes s�vissim� limites sibi proximos persultabant:
+  Gallias Rh�tiasque simul Alemanni populabantur: Sarmat� Pannonias &amp;
+  Quadi: Picti, Saxones, &amp; Scoti &amp; Attacotti Britannos �rumnis
+  vexavere continuis: Austoriani, Mauric�que ali� gentes Africam solito
+  acri�s incursabant: Thracias diripiebant pr�datorii globi Gotthorum:
+  Persarum Rex manus Armeniis injectabat</i>. And whilst the Emperors were
+  busy in repelling these enemies, the <i>Hunns</i> and <i>Alans</i> and
+  <i>Goths</i> came over the <i>Danube</i> in two bodies, overcame and slew
+  <i>Valens</i>, and made so great a slaughter of the <i>Roman</i> army,
+  that <i>Ammianus</i> saith: <i>Nec ulla Annalibus pr�ter Cannensem ita ad
+  internecionem res legitur gesta</i>. These wars were not fully stopt on
+  all sides till the beginning of the reign of <i>Theodosius</i>, A.C. 379
+  &amp; 380: but thenceforward the Empire remained quiet from foreign
+  armies, till his death, A.C. 395. So long the four winds were held: and
+  so long there was silence in heaven. And the seventh seal was opened when
+  this silence began.</p>
+
+  <p>Mr. <i>Mede</i> hath explained the Prophecy of the first six trumpets
+  not much amiss: but if he had observed, that the Prophecy of pouring out
+  the vials of wrath is synchronal to that of sounding the trumpets, his
+  explanation would have been yet more complete.</p>
+
+  <p>The name of <i>Woes</i> is given to the wars to which the three last
+  trumpets sound, to distinguish them from the wars of the four first. The
+  sacrifices on the first four days of the feast of Tabernacles, at which
+  the first four trumpets sound, and the first four vials of wrath are
+  poured out, are slaughters in four great wars; and these wars are
+  represented by four winds from the four corners of the earth. The first
+  was an east wind, the second a west wind, the third a south wind, and the
+  fourth a north wind, with respect to the city of <i>Rome</i>, the
+  metropolis of the old <i>Roman</i> Empire. These four plagues fell upon
+  <i>the third part of the Earth, Sea, Rivers, Sun, Moon and Stars</i>;
+  that is, upon the Earth, Sea, Rivers, Sun, Moon and Stars of the third
+  part of the whole scene of these Prophecies of <i>Daniel</i> and
+  <i>John</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>The plague of the eastern wind <a name="NtpJohIII_7"
+  href="#NtJohIII_7"><sup>[7]</sup></a> at the sounding of the first
+  trumpet, was to fall upon the <i>Earth</i>, that is, upon the nations of
+  the <i>Greek</i> Empire. Accordingly, after the death of
+  <i>Theodosius</i> the great, the <i>Goths</i>, <i>Sarmatians</i>,
+  <i>Hunns</i>, <i>Isaurians</i>, and <i>Austorian</i> Moors invaded and
+  miserably wasted <i>Greece</i>, <i>Thrace</i>, <i>Asia minor</i>,
+  <i>Armenia</i>, <i>Syria</i>, <i>Egypt</i>, <i>Lybia</i>, and
+  <i>Illyricum</i>, for ten or twelve years together.</p>
+
+  <p>The plague of the western wind at the sounding of the second trumpet,
+  was to fall upon the <i>Sea</i>, or <i>Western</i> Empire, by means of
+  <i>a great mountain burning with fire</i> cast into it, and <i>turning it
+  to blood</i>. Accordingly in the year 407, that Empire began to be
+  invaded by the <i>Visigoths</i>, <i>Vandals</i>, <i>Alans</i>,
+  <i>Sueves</i>, <i>Burgundians</i>, <i>Ostrogoths</i>, <i>Heruli</i>,
+  <i>Quadi</i>, <i>Gepides</i>; and by these wars it was broken into ten
+  kingdoms, and miserably wasted: and <i>Rome</i> itself, the burning
+  mountain, was besieged and taken by the <i>Ostrogoths</i>, in the
+  beginning of these miseries.</p>
+
+  <p>The plague of the southern wind at the sounding of the third trumpet,
+  was to cause <i>a great star, burning as it were a lamp, to fall from
+  heaven upon the rivers and fountains of waters</i>, the <i>Western</i>
+  Empire now divided into many kingdoms, and to turn them to
+  <i>wormwood</i> and <i>blood</i>, and make them <i>bitter</i>.
+  Accordingly <i>Genseric</i>, the King of the <i>Vandals</i> and
+  <i>Alans</i> in <i>Spain</i>, A.C. 427, enter'd <i>Africa</i> with an
+  army of eighty thousand men; where he invaded the <i>Moors</i>, and made
+  war upon the <i>Romans</i>, both there and on the sea-coasts of
+  <i>Europe</i>, for fifty years together, almost without intermission,
+  taking <i>Hippo</i> A.C. 431, and <i>Carthage</i> the capital of
+  <i>Africa</i> A.C. 439. In A.C. 455, with a numerous fleet and an army of
+  three hundred thousand <i>Vandals</i> and <i>Moors</i>, he invaded
+  <i>Italy</i>, took and plundered <i>Rome</i>, <i>Naples</i>,
+  <i>Capua</i>, and many other cities; carrying thence their wealth with
+  the flower of the people into <i>Africa</i>: and the next year, A.C. 456,
+  he rent all <i>Africa</i> from the Empire, totally expelling the
+  <i>Romans</i>. Then the <i>Vandals</i> invaded and took the Islands of
+  the <i>Mediterranean</i>, <i>Sicily</i>, <i>Sardinia</i>, <i>Corsica</i>,
+  <i>Ebusus</i>, <i>Majorca</i>, <i>Minorca</i>, &amp;c. and <i>Ricimer</i>
+  besieged the Emperer <i>Anthemius</i> in <i>Rome</i>, took the city, and
+  gave his soldiers the plunder, A.C. 472. The <i>Visigoths</i> about the
+  same time drove the <i>Romans</i> out of <i>Spain</i>: and now the
+  <i>Western</i> Emperor, the <i>great star which fell from heaven, burning
+  as it were a lamp</i>, having by all these wars gradually lost almost all
+  his dominions, was invaded, and conquered in one year by <i>Odoacer</i>
+  King of the <i>Heruli</i>, A.C. 476. After this the <i>Moors</i> revolted
+  A.C. 477, and weakned the <i>Vandals</i> by several wars, and took
+  <i>Mauritania</i> from them. These wars continued till the <i>Vandals</i>
+  were conquered by <i>Belisarius</i>, A.C. 534. and by all these wars
+  <i>Africa</i> was almost depopulated, according to <i>Procopius</i>, who
+  reckons that above five millions of men perished in them. When the
+  <i>Vandals</i> first invaded <i>Africa</i>, that country was very
+  populous, consisting of about 700 bishopricks, more than were in all
+  <i>France</i>, <i>Spain</i> and <i>Italy</i> together: but by the wars
+  between the <i>Vandals</i>, <i>Romans</i> and <i>Moors</i>, it was
+  depopulated to that degree, that <i>Procopius</i> tells us, it was next
+  to a miracle for a traveller to see a man.</p>
+
+  <p>In pouring out the third vial it is <a name="NtpJohIII_8"
+  href="#NtJohIII_8"><sup>[8]</sup></a> said: <i>Thou art righteous, O
+  Lord,&mdash;because thou hast judged thus: for they have shed the blood
+  of thy Saints and Prophets, and thou hast given them blood to drink, for
+  they are worthy</i>. How they shed the blood of Saints, may be understood
+  by the following Edict of the Emperor <i>Honorius</i>, procured by four
+  Bishops sent to him by a Council of <i>African</i> Bishops, who met at
+  <i>Carthage</i> 14 <i>June</i>, A.C. 410.</p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Impp. Honor. &amp;. Theod. AA. Heracliano Com. Afric.</i></p>
+
+  <p><i>Oraculo penitus remoto, quo ad ritus suos h�retic� superstitionis
+  abrepserant, sciant omnes sanct� legis inimici, plectendos se p&#339;na
+  &amp; proscriptionis &amp; sanguinis, si ultra convenire per publicum,
+  execrand� sceleris sui temeritate temptaverint. Dat. </i>viii.<i> Kal.
+  Sept. Varano V.C. Cons.</i> A.C. 410.</p>
+
+  <p>Which Edict was five years after fortified by the following.</p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Impp. Honor. &amp; Theod. AA. Heracliano Com. Afric.</i></p>
+
+  <p><i>Sciant cuncti qui ad ritus suos h�resis superstitionibus
+  obrepserant sacrosanct� legis inimici, plectendos se p&#339;n� &amp;
+  proscriptionis &amp; sanguinis, si ultra convenire per publicum exercendi
+  sceleris sui temeritate temptaverint: ne qu� vera divinaque reverentia
+  contagione temeretur. Dat. </i>viii.<i> Kal. Sept. Honorio </i>x.<i>
+  &amp; Theod. </i>vi.<i> AA. Coss.</i> A.C. 415.</p>
+
+  <p>These Edicts being directed to the governor of <i>Africa</i>, extended
+  only to the <i>Africans</i>. Before these there were many severe ones
+  against the <i>Donatists</i>, but they did not extend to blood. These two
+  were the first which made their meetings, and the meetings of all
+  dissenters, capital: for by <i>hereticks</i> in these Edicts are meant
+  all dissenters, as is manifest by the following against <i>Euresius</i> a
+  <i>Luciferan</i> Bishop.</p>
+
+<p class="center" style="margin-top: 2em;"><i>Impp. Arcad. &amp; Honor. AA. Aureliano Proc. Afric�.</i></p>
+
+  <p><i>H�reticorum vocabulo continentur, &amp; latis adversus eos
+  sanctionibus debent succumbere, qui vel levi argumento � judicio
+  Catholic� religionis &amp; tramite detecti fuerint deviare: ideoque
+  experientia tua Euresium h�reticum esse cognoscat. Dat. </i>iii.<i> Non.
+  Sept. Constantinop. Olybrio &amp; Probino Coss.</i> A.C. 395.</p>
+
+  <p>The <i>Greek</i> Emperor <i>Zeno</i> adopted <i>Theoderic</i> King of
+  the <i>Ostrogoths</i> to be his son, made him master of the horse and
+  <i>Patricius</i>, and Consul of <i>Constantinople</i>; and recommending
+  to him the <i>Roman</i> people and Senate, gave him the <i>Western</i>
+  Empire, and sent him into <i>Italy</i> against <i>Odoacer</i> King of the
+  <i>Heruli</i>. <i>Theoderic</i> thereupon led his nation into
+  <i>Italy</i>, conquered <i>Odoacer</i>, and reigned over <i>Italy</i>,
+  <i>Sicily</i>, <i>Rh�tia</i>, <i>Noricum</i>, <i>Dalmatia</i>,
+  <i>Liburnia</i>, <i>Istria</i>, and part of <i>Suevia</i>,
+  <i>Pannonia</i> and <i>Gallia</i>. Whence <i>Ennodius</i> said, in a
+  Panegyric to <i>Theoderic</i>: <i>Ad limitem suum Romana regna
+  reme�sse.</i> <i>Theoderic</i> reigned with great prudence, moderation
+  and felicity; treated the <i>Romans</i> with singular benevolence,
+  governed them by their own laws, and restored their government under
+  their Senate and Consuls, he himself supplying the place of Emperor,
+  without assuming the title. <i>Ita sibi parentibus pr�fuit</i>, saith
+  <i>Procopius</i>, <i>ut vere Imperatori conveniens decus nullum ipsi
+  abesset: Justiti� magnus ei cultus, legumque diligens custodia: terras �
+  vicinis barbaris servavit intactas</i>, &amp;c. Whence I do not reckon
+  the reign of this King, amongst the plagues of the four winds.</p>
+
+  <p>The plague of the northern wind, at the sounding of the fourth
+  trumpet, was to cause <i>the Sun, Moon and Stars</i>, that is, the King,
+  kingdom and Princes of the <i>Western</i> Empire, <i>to be darkned</i>,
+  and to continue some time in darkness. Accordingly <i>Belisarius</i>,
+  having conquered the <i>Vandals</i>, invaded <i>Italy</i> A.C. 535, and
+  made war upon the <i>Ostrogoths</i> in <i>Dalmatia</i>, <i>Liburnia</i>,
+  <i>Venetia</i>, <i>Lombardy</i>, <i>Tuscany</i>, and other regions
+  northward from <i>Rome</i>, twenty years together. In this war many
+  cities were taken and retaken. In retaking <i>Millain</i> from the
+  <i>Romans</i>, the <i>Ostrogoths</i> slew all the males young and old,
+  amounting, as <i>Procopius</i> reckons, to three hundred thousand, and
+  sent the women captives to their allies the <i>Burgundians</i>.
+  <i>Rome</i> itself was taken and retaken several times, and thereby the
+  people were thinned; the old government by a Senate ceased, the nobles
+  were ruined, and all the glory of the city was extinguish'd: and A.C.
+  552, after a war of seventeen years, the kingdom of the <i>Ostrogoths</i>
+  fell; yet the remainder of the <i>Ostrogoths</i>, and an army of
+  <i>Germans</i> called in to their assistance, continued the war three or
+  four years longer. Then ensued the war of the <i>Heruli</i>, who, as
+  <i>Anastasius</i> tells us, <i>perimebant cunctam Italiam</i>, slew all
+  <i>Italy</i>. This was followed by the war of the <i>Lombards</i>, the
+  fiercest of all the <i>Barbarians</i>, which began A.C. 568, and lasted
+  for thirty eight years together; <i>fact� tali clade</i>, saith
+  <i>Anastasius</i>, <i>qualem � s�culo nullus meminit</i>; ending at last
+  in the Papacy of <i>Sabinian</i>, A.C. 605, by a peace then made with the
+  <i>Lombards</i>. Three years before this war ended, <i>Gregory</i> the
+  great, then Bishop of <i>Rome</i>, thus speaks of it: <i>Qualiter enim
+  &amp; quotidianis gladiis &amp; quantis Longobardorum incursionibus, ecce
+  jam per triginta quinque annorum longitudinem premimur, nullis explere
+  vocibus suggestionis valemus</i>: and in one of his Sermons to the
+  people, he thus expresses the great consumption of the <i>Romans</i> by
+  these wars: <i>Ex illa plebe innumerabili quanti remanseritis aspicitis,
+  &amp; tamen adhuc quotidi� flagella urgent, repentini casus opprimunt,
+  nov� res &amp; improvis� clades affligunt</i>. In another Sermon he thus
+  describes the desolations: <i>Destruct� urbes, eversa sunt castra,
+  depopulati agri, in solitudinem terra redacta est. Nullus in agris
+  incola, pen� nullus in urbibus habitator remansit. Et tamen ips� parv�
+  generis humani reliqui� adhuc quotidi� &amp; sine cessatione feriuntur,
+  &amp; finem non habent flagella c&#339;lestis justiti�. Ipsa autem qu�
+  aliquando mundi Domina esse videbatur, qualis remansit Roma conspicimus
+  innumeris doloribus multipliciter attrita, defolatione civium,
+  impressione hostium, frequenti� ruinarum.&mdash;Ecce jam de illa omnes
+  hujus f�culi potentes ablati sunt.&mdash;Ecce populi
+  defecerunt.&mdash;Ubi enim Senatus? Ubi jam populus? Contabuerunt ossa,
+  consumpt� sunt carnes. Omnis enim s�cularium dignitatum ordo extinctus
+  est, &amp; tamen ipsos vos paucos qui remansimus, adhuc quotidi� gladii,
+  adhuc quotidi� innumer� tribulationes premunt.&mdash;Vacua jam ardet
+  Roma. Quid autem ista de hominibus dicimus? Cum ruinis crebrescentibus
+  ipsa quoque destrui �dificia videmus. Postquam defecerunt homines etiam
+  parietes cadunt. Jam ecce desolata, ecce contrita, ecce gemitibus
+  oppressa est,</i> &amp;c. All this was spoken by <i>Gregory</i> to the
+  people of <i>Rome</i>, who were witnesses of the truth of it. Thus by
+  <i>the plagues of the four winds</i>, the Empire of the <i>Greeks</i> was
+  shaken, and the Empire of the <i>Latins</i> fell; and <i>Rome</i>
+  remained nothing more than the capital of a poor dukedom, subordinate to
+  <i>Ravenna</i>, the seat of the Exarchs.</p>
+
+  <p>The fifth trumpet sounded to the wars, which the <i>King of the</i>
+  South, as he is called by <i>Daniel</i>, made <i>in the time of the
+  end</i>, in <i>pushing at the King who did according to his will</i>.
+  This plague began with the <i>opening of the bottomless pit</i>, which
+  denotes the letting out of a false religion: the <i>smoke which came out
+  of the pit</i>, signifying the multitude which embraced that religion;
+  and the <i>locusts which came out of the smoke</i>, the armies which came
+  out of that multitude. This pit was opened, to let out smoke and locusts
+  into the regions of the four monarchies, or some of them. <i>The King of
+  these locusts</i> was the <i>Angel of the bottomless pit</i>, being chief
+  governor as well in religious as civil affairs, such as was the Caliph of
+  the <i>Saracens</i>. Swarms of locusts often arise in <i>Arabia
+  f�lix</i>, and from thence infest the neighbouring nations: and so are a
+  very fit type of the numerous armies of <i>Arabians</i> invading the
+  <i>Romans</i>. They began to invade them A.C. 634, and to reign at
+  <i>Damascus</i> A.C. 637. They built <i>Bagdad</i> A.C. 766, and reigned
+  over <i>Persia</i>, <i>Syria</i>, <i>Arabia</i>, <i>Egypt</i>,
+  <i>Africa</i> and <i>Spain</i>. They afterwards lost <i>Africa</i> to
+  <i>Mahades</i>, A.C. 910; <i>Media</i>, <i>Hircania</i>, <i>Chorasan</i>,
+  and all <i>Persia</i>, to the <i>Dailamites</i>, between the years 927
+  and 935; <i>Mesopotamia</i> and <i>Miafarekin</i> to
+  <i>Nasiruddaulas</i>, A.C. 930; <i>Syria</i> and <i>Egypt</i> to
+  <i>Achsjid</i>, A.C. 935, and now being in great distress, the Caliph of
+  <i>Bagdad</i>, A.C. 936, surrendred all the rest of his temporal power to
+  <i>Mahomet</i> the son of <i>Rajici</i>, King of <i>Wasit</i> in
+  <i>Chaldea</i>, and made him Emperor of Emperors. But <i>Mahomet</i>
+  within two years lost <i>Bagdad</i> to the <i>Turks</i>; and
+  thenceforward <i>Bagdad</i> was sometimes in the hands of the
+  <i>Turks</i>, and sometimes in the hands of the <i>Saracens</i>, till
+  <i>Togrul-beig</i>, called also <i>Togra</i>, <i>Dogrissa</i>,
+  <i>Tangrolipix</i>, and <i>Sadoc</i>, conquered <i>Chorasan</i> and
+  <i>Persia</i>; and A.C. 1055, added <i>Bagdad</i> to his Empire, making
+  it the seat thereof. His successors <i>Olub-Arflan</i> and
+  <i>Melechschah</i>, conquered the regions upon <i>Euphrates</i>; and
+  these conquests, after the death of <i>Melechschah</i>, brake into the
+  kingdoms of <i>Armenia</i>, <i>Mesopotamia</i>, <i>Syria</i>, and
+  <i>Cappadocia</i>. The whole time that the Caliphs of the <i>Saracens</i>
+  reigned with a temporal dominion at <i>Damascus</i> and <i>Bagdad</i>
+  together, was 300 years, <i>viz.</i> from the year 637 to the year 936
+  inclusive. Now locusts live but five months; and therefore, for the
+  decorum of the type, these locusts are said to <i>hurt men five months
+  and five months</i>, as if they had lived about five months at
+  <i>Damascus</i>, and again about five months at <i>Bagdad</i>; in all ten
+  months, or 300 prophetic days, which are years.</p>
+
+  <p>The sixth trumpet sounded to the wars, which <i>Daniel</i>'s King of
+  the <i>North</i> made against the King above-mentioned, <i>who did
+  according to his will</i>. In these wars the King of the <i>North</i>,
+  according to <i>Daniel</i>, conquered the Empire of the <i>Greeks</i>,
+  and also <i>Judea</i>, <i>Egypt</i>, <i>Lybia</i>, and <i>Ethiopia</i>:
+  and by these conquests the Empire of the <i>Turks</i> was set up, as may
+  be known by the extent thereof. These wars commenced A.C. 1258, when the
+  four kingdoms of the <i>Turks</i> seated upon <i>Euphrates</i>, that of
+  <i>Armenia major</i> seated at <i>Miyapharekin</i>, <i>Megarkin</i> or
+  <i>Martyropolis</i>, that of <i>Mesopotamia</i> seated at <i>Mosul</i>,
+  that of all <i>Syria</i> seated at <i>Aleppo</i>, and that of
+  <i>Cappadocia</i> seated at <i>Iconium</i>, were invaded by the
+  <i>Tartars</i> under <i>Hulacu</i>, and driven into the western parts of
+  <i>Asia minor</i>, where they made war upon the <i>Greeks</i>, and began
+  to erect the present Empire of the <i>Turks</i>. Upon the sounding of the
+  sixth trumpet, <a name="NtpJohIII_9"
+  href="#NtJohIII_9"><sup>[9]</sup></a> <i>John heard a voice from the four
+  horns of the golden Altar which is before God, saying to the sixth Angel
+  which had the trumpet, Loose the four Angels which are bound at the great
+  river </i>Euphrates<i>. And the four Angels were loosed, which were
+  prepared for an hour and a day, and a month and a year, for to slay the
+  third part of men</i>. By the four horns of the golden Altar, is
+  signified the situation of the head cities of the said four kingdoms,
+  <i>Miyapharekin</i>, <i>Mosul</i>, <i>Aleppo</i>, and <i>Iconium</i>,
+  which were in a quadrangle. They slew the third part of men, when they
+  conquered the <i>Greek</i> Empire, and took <i>Constantinople</i>, A.C.
+  1453. and they began to be prepared for this purpose, when
+  <i>Olub-Arslan</i> began to conquer the nations upon <i>Euphrates</i>,
+  A.C. 1063. The interval is called an hour and a day, and a month and a
+  year, or 391 prophetic days, which are years. In the first thirty years,
+  <i>Olub-Arslan</i> and <i>Melechschah</i> conquered the nations upon
+  <i>Euphrates</i>, and reigned over the whole. <i>Melechschah</i> died
+  A.C. 1092, and was succeeded by a little child; and then this kingdom
+  broke into the four kingdoms above-mentioned.</p>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3>Notes to Chap. III.</h3>
+
+<div class="note">
+  <p><a name="NtJohIII_1" href="#NtpJohIII_1">[1]</a> Apoc. ii. 4,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohIII_2" href="#NtpJohIII_2">[2]</a> Apoc. ii. 9, 10.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohIII_3" href="#NtpJohIII_3">[3]</a> Ver. 14.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohIII_4" href="#NtpJohIII_4">[4]</a> Numb. xxv. 1, 2, 18,
+  &amp; xxi. 16.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohIII_5" href="#NtpJohIII_5">[5]</a> Apoc. iii. 10,
+  12.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohIII_6" href="#NtpJohIII_6">[6]</a> Apoc. iii. 16,
+  17.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohIII_7" href="#NtpJohIII_7">[7]</a> Apoc. viii. 7,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohIII_8" href="#NtpJohIII_8">[8]</a> Apoc. xvi. 5, 6.</p>
+
+  <p><a name="NtJohIII_9" href="#NtpJohIII_9">[9]</a> Apoc. ix. 13,
+  &amp;c.</p>
+
+</div>
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><i>THE END.</i></h3>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><i>Advertisement.</i></h3>
+
+  <p><i>The last pages of these Observations having been differently drawn
+  up by the Author in another copy of his Work; they are here inserted as
+  they follow in that copy, after the 22d line of the 261st page
+  foregoing.</i></p>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+  <p><i>And none was found worthy to open the book</i> till the Lamb of God
+  appeared; the great High-Priest represented by a lamb slain at the foot
+  of the Altar in the morning-sacrifice. <i>And he came, and took the book
+  out of the hand of him that sat upon the throne.</i> For the High-Priest,
+  in the feast of the seventh month, went into the most holy place, and
+  took the book of the law out of the right side of the Ark, to read it to
+  the people: and in order to read it well, he studied it seven days, that
+  is, upon the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth days,
+  being attended by some of the priests to hear him perform. These seven
+  days are alluded to, by the Lamb's opening the seven seals
+  successively.</p>
+
+  <p>Upon the tenth day of the month, a young bullock was offered for a
+  sin-offering for the High-Priest, and a goat for a sin-offering for the
+  people: and lots were cast upon two goats to determine which of them
+  should be God's lot for the sin-offering; and the other goat was called
+  <i>Azazel</i>, the scape-goat. The High-Priest in his linen garments,
+  took a censer full of burning coals of fire from the Altar, his hand
+  being full of sweet incense beaten small; and went into the most holy
+  place within the veil, and put the incense upon the fire, and sprinkled
+  the blood of the bullock with his finger upon the mercy-seat and before
+  the mercy-seat seven times; and then he killed the goat which fell to
+  God's lot, for a sin-offering for the people, and brought his blood
+  within the veil, and sprinkled it also seven times upon the mercy-seat
+  and before the mercy-seat. Then he went out to the Altar, and sprinkled
+  it also seven times with the blood of the bullock, and as often with the
+  blood of the goat. After this <i>he laid both his hands upon the head of
+  the live goat; and confessed over him all the iniquities of the children
+  of </i>Israel<i>, and all their transgressions in all their sins, putting
+  them upon the head of the goat; and sent him away into the wilderness by
+  the hands of a fit man: and the goat bore upon him all their iniquities
+  into a land not inhabited</i>, Levit. chap. iv. &amp; chap. xvi. While
+  the High-Priest was doing these things in the most holy place and at the
+  Altar, the people continued at their devotion quietly and in silence.
+  Then the High-Priest went into the holy place, put off his linen
+  garments, and put on other garments; then came out, and sent the bullock
+  and the goat of the sin-offering to be burnt without the camp, with fire
+  taken in a censer from the Altar: and as the people returned home from
+  the Temple, they said to one another, <i>God seal you to a good new
+  year</i>.</p>
+
+  <p>In allusion to all this, <i>when he had opened the seventh seal, there
+  was silence in heaven about the space of half an hour. And an Angel stood
+  at the Altar having a golden Censer, and there was given unto him much
+  incense, that he should offer it with the prayers of all Saints, upon the
+  golden Altar which was before the throne. And the smoke of the incense
+  with the prayers of the Saints ascended up before God out of the Angel's
+  hand. And the Angel took the Censer, and filled it with fire of the
+  Altar, and cast it to the earth</i>, suppose without the camp, for
+  sacrificing the goat which fell to God's lot. For the High-Priest being
+  <i>Christ</i> himself, the bullock is omitted. At this sacrifice <i>there
+  were voices and thundrings</i>, of the musick of the Temple, <i>and
+  lightnings</i> of the sacred fire, <i>and an earthquake</i>: and
+  synchronal to these things was the sealing of <i>the 144000 out of all
+  the twelve tribes of the children of </i>Israel<i> with the seal of God
+  in their foreheads</i>, while the rest of the twelve tribes received the
+  mark of the Beast, and the Woman fled from the Temple into the wilderness
+  to her place upon this Beast. For this sealing and marking was
+  represented by casting lots upon the two goats, sacrificing God's lot on
+  mount <i>Sion</i>, and sending the scape-goat into the wilderness loaden
+  with the sins of the people.</p>
+
+  <p>Upon the fifteenth day of the month, and the six following days, there
+  were very great sacrifices. And in allusion to the sounding of trumpets,
+  and singing with thundring voices, and pouring out drink-offerings at
+  those sacrifices, <i>seven trumpets are sounded</i>, and <i>seven
+  thunders utter their voices</i>, and <i>seven vials of wrath are poured
+  out</i>. Wherefore the sounding of the <i>seven trumpets</i>, the voices
+  of the <i>seven thunders</i>, and the pouring out of the <i>seven vials
+  of wrath</i>, are synchronal, and relate to one and the same division of
+  the time of the seventh seal following the silence, into seven successive
+  parts. The seven days of this feast were called the feast of Tabernacles;
+  and during these seven days the children of <i>Israel</i> dwelt in
+  booths, and rejoiced with palm-branches in their hands. To this alludes
+  <i>the multitude with palms in their hands</i>, which appeared after the
+  sealing of the 144000, and <i>came out of the great tribulation</i> with
+  triumph at the battle of the great day, to which the seventh trumpet
+  sounds. The visions therefore of the 144000, and of the palm-bearing
+  multitude, extend to the sounding of the seventh trumpet, and therefore
+  are synchronal to the times of the seventh seal.</p>
+
+  <p>When the 144000 <i>are sealed out of all the twelve tribes of
+  </i>Israel, and the rest receive <i>the mark of the Beast</i>, and
+  thereby the first temple is destroyed; <i>John</i> is bidden to
+  <i>measure the temple and altar</i>, that is, their courts, <i>and them
+  that worship therein</i>, that is, the 144000 standing on mount
+  <i>Sion</i> and on the sea of glass: <i>but the court that is without the
+  temple</i>, that is, the peoples court, to <i>leave out and measure it
+  not, because it is given to the</i> Gentiles, those who receive the mark
+  of the Beast; <i>and the holy city they shall tread under foot forty and
+  two months</i>, that is, all the time that the Beast acts under the woman
+  <i>Babylon</i>: and <i>the two witnesses prophesy 1260 days</i>, that is,
+  all the same time, <i>clothed in sackcloth. These have power</i>, like
+  <i>Elijah, to shut heaven that it rain not</i>, at the sounding of the
+  first trumpet; and, like <i>Moses, to turn the waters into blood</i> at
+  the sounding of the second; <i>and to smite the earth with all
+  plagues</i>, those of the trumpets, <i>as often as they will</i>. These
+  prophesy at the building of the second temple, like <i>Haggai</i> and
+  <i>Zechary</i>. These are <i>the two Olive-trees</i>, or Churches, which
+  <i>supplied the lamps with oil</i>, <i>Zech.</i> iv. These are <i>the two
+  candlesticks</i>, or Churches, <i>standing before the God of the
+  earth</i>. Five of the seven Churches of <i>Asia</i>, those in
+  prosperity, are found fault with, and exhorted to repent, and threatned
+  to be <i>removed out of their places</i>, or <i>spewed out of
+  </i>Christ's<i> mouth</i>, or <i>punished with the sword of
+  </i>Christ's<i> mouth, except they repent</i>: the other two, the
+  Churches of <i>Smyrna</i> and <i>Philadelphia</i>, which were under
+  persecution, remain in a state of persecution, to illuminate the second
+  temple. When the primitive Church catholick, represented by <i>the woman
+  in heaven</i>, apostatized, and became divided into two corrupt Churches,
+  represented by the <i>whore of </i>Babylon and the <i>two-horned
+  Beast</i>, the 144000 <i>who were sealed out of all the twelve
+  tribes</i>, became the <i>two Witnesses</i>, in opposition to those two
+  false Churches: and the name of <i>two Witnesses</i> once imposed,
+  remains to the true Church of God in all times and places to the end of
+  the Prophecy.</p>
+
+  <p>In the interpretation of this Prophecy, <i>the woman in heaven clothed
+  with the sun</i>, before she flies into the wilderness, represents the
+  primitive Church catholick, illuminated with the <i>seven lamps</i> in
+  the <i>seven golden candlesticks</i>, which are the <i>seven Churches</i>
+  of <i>Asia</i>. The Dragon signifies the same Empire with <i>Daniel</i>'s
+  He-goat in the reign of his last horn, that is, the whole <i>Roman</i>
+  Empire, until it became divided into the <i>Greek</i> and <i>Latin</i>
+  Empires; and all the time of that division it signifies the <i>Greek</i>
+  Empire alone: and the Beast is <i>Daniel</i>'s fourth Beast, that is, the
+  Empire of the <i>Latins</i>. Before the division of the <i>Roman</i>
+  Empire into the <i>Greek</i> and <i>Latin</i> Empires, the Beast is
+  included in the body of the Dragon; and from the time of that division,
+  the Beast is the <i>Latin</i> Empire only. Hence the Dragon and Beast
+  have the same heads and horns; but the heads are crowned upon the Dragon,
+  and the horns upon the Beast. The horns are ten kingdoms, into which the
+  Beast becomes divided presently after his separation from the Dragon, as
+  hath been described above. The heads are seven successive dynasties, or
+  parts, into which the <i>Roman</i> Empire becomes divided by the opening
+  of the seven seals. Before the woman fled into the wilderness, <i>she
+  being with child</i> of a Christian Empire, <i>cried travelling</i>,
+  <i>viz.</i> in the ten years persecution of <i>Dioclesian</i>, <i>and
+  pained to be delivered: and the Dragon</i>, the heathen <i>Roman</i>
+  Empire, <i>stood before her, to devour her child as soon as it was born.
+  And she brought forth a man child, who</i> at length <i>was to rule all
+  nations with a rod of iron. And her child was caught up unto God, and to
+  his throne</i> in the Temple, by the victory of <i>Constantine</i> the
+  great over <i>Maxentius</i>: <i>and the woman fled</i> from the Temple
+  <i>into the wilderness</i> of <i>Arabia</i> to <i>Babylon</i>, <i>where
+  she hath a place</i> of riches and honour and dominion, upon the back of
+  the Beast, <i>prepared of God, that they should feed her there 1260 days.
+  And there was war in heaven</i>, between the heathens under
+  <i>Maximinus</i> and the new Christian Empire; <i>and the great Dragon
+  was cast out, that old serpent, which deceiveth the whole world</i>, the
+  spirit of heathen idolatry; <i>he was cast out</i> of the throne <i>into
+  the earth. And they overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and by the
+  word of their testimony; and they loved not their lives unto the
+  death</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>And when the Dragon saw that he was cast unto the earth, he
+  persecuted the woman which brought forth the man child</i>, stirring up a
+  new persecution against her in the reign of <i>Licinius</i>. <i>And to
+  the woman</i>, by the building of <i>Constantinople</i> and equalling it
+  to <i>Rome</i>, <i>were given two wings of a great eagle, that she might
+  flee into the wilderness into her place</i> upon the back of her Beast,
+  <i>where she is nourished for a time, and times, and half a time, from
+  the face of the serpent. And the serpent</i>, upon the death of
+  <i>Constantine</i> the great, <i>cast out of his mouth water as a
+  flood</i>, <i>viz.</i> the <i>Western</i> Empire under <i>Constantine
+  junior</i> and <i>Constans</i>, <i>after the woman: that he might cause
+  her to be carried away of the flood. And the earth</i>, the nations of
+  <i>Asia</i> now under <i>Constantinople</i>, <i>helped the woman</i>; and
+  by conquering the <i>Western</i> Empire, now under <i>Magnentius</i>,
+  <i>swallowed up the flood which the Dragon cast out of his mouth. And the
+  Dragon was wroth with the woman, and went to make war with the remnant of
+  her seed, which keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of
+  </i>Jesus Christ<i>, which</i> in that war <i>were sealed out of all the
+  twelve tribes of </i>Israel, and remained upon mount <i>Sion</i> with the
+  Lamb, being in number 144000, and having their father's name written in
+  their foreheads.</p>
+
+  <p>When the earth had swallowed up the flood, and the Dragon was gone to
+  make war with the remnant of the woman's seed, <i>John stood upon the
+  sand of the sea, and saw a Beast rise out of the sea, having seven heads
+  and ten horns. And the Beast was like unto a Leopard, and his feet were
+  as the feet of a Bear, and his mouth as the mouth of a Lion.</i>
+  <i>John</i> here names <i>Daniel</i>'s four Beasts in order, putting his
+  Beast in the room of <i>Daniel</i>'s fourth Beast, to shew that they are
+  the same. <i>And the Dragon gave</i> this Beast <i>his power and his seat
+  and great authority</i>, by relinquishing the <i>Western</i> Empire to
+  him. <i>And one of his heads</i>, the sixth, was <i>as it were wounded to
+  death</i>, <i>viz.</i> by the sword of the earth, which swallowed up the
+  waters cast out of the mouth of the Dragon; <i>and his deadly wound was
+  healed</i>, by a new division of the Empire between <i>Valentinian</i>
+  and <i>Valens</i>, <i>An.</i> 364. <i>John</i> saw the Beast rise out of
+  the sea, at the division thereof between <i>Gratian</i> and
+  <i>Theodosius</i>, <i>An.</i> 379. The Dragon gave the Beast his power,
+  and his seat and great authority, at the death of <i>Theodosius</i>, when
+  <i>Theodosius</i> gave the <i>Western</i> Empire to his son
+  <i>Honorius</i>. After which the two Empires were no more united: but the
+  <i>Western</i> Empire became presently divided into ten kingdoms, as
+  above; and these kingdoms at length united in religion under the woman,
+  and reign with her <i>forty and two months</i>.</p>
+
+  <p><i>And I beheld</i>, saith <i>John</i>, <i>another Beast coming up out
+  of the earth.</i> When the woman fled from the Dragon into the kingdom of
+  the Beast, and became his Church, this other Beast rose up out of the
+  earth, to represent the Church of the Dragon. For <i>he had two horns
+  like the Lamb</i>, such as were the bishopricks of <i>Alexandria</i> and
+  <i>Antioch</i>: <i>and he spake as the Dragon</i> in matters of religion:
+  <i>and he causeth the earth</i>, or nations of the Dragon's kingdom,
+  <i>to worship the first Beast, whose deadly wound was healed</i>, that
+  is, to be of his religion. <i>And he doth great wonders, so that he
+  maketh fire come down from heaven on the earth in the sight of men</i>;
+  that is, he excommunicateth those who differ from him in point of
+  religion: for in pronouncing their excommunications, they used to swing
+  down a lighted torch from above. <i>And he said to them that dwell on the
+  earth, that they should make an image to the Beast, which had the wound
+  by a sword, and did live</i>; that is, that they should call a Council of
+  men of the religion of this Beast. <i>And he had power to give life unto
+  the image of the Beast, that the image of the Beast should both speak,
+  and cause that as many as would not worship the image of the Beast should
+  be killed</i>, <i>viz.</i> mystically, by dissolving their Churches.
+  <i>And he causeth all both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond,
+  to receive a mark in their right band or in their foreheads, and that no
+  man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or the name of the
+  Beast, or the number of his name</i>; that is, the mark <img
+  src="images/cross.png" alt="Cross" />, or the name <span lang="el"
+  title="LATEINOS"
+  >&#x39B;&#x391;&#x3A4;&#x395;&#x399;&#x39D;&#x39F;&#x3A3;</span>, or the
+  number thereof <span lang="el" title="chxs"
+  >&#x3C7;&#x3BE;&#x3C2;</span>, 666. All others were excommunicated.</p>
+
+  <p>When the seven Angels had poured out the seven vials of wrath, and
+  <i>John</i> had described them all in the present time, he is called up
+  from the time of the seventh vial to the time of the sixth seal, to take
+  a view of the woman and her Beast, who were to reign in the times of the
+  seventh seal. In respect of the latter part of time of the sixth seal,
+  then considered as present, the Angel tells <i>John</i>: <i>The Beast
+  that thou sawest, was and is not, and shall ascend out of the abyss, and
+  go into perdition</i>; that is, he was in the reign of <i>Constans</i>
+  and <i>Magnentius</i>, until <i>Constantius</i> conquered
+  <i>Magnentius</i>, and re-united the <i>Western</i> Empire to the
+  <i>Eastern</i>. He is not during the reunion, and he shall ascend out of
+  the abyss or sea at a following division of the Empire. The Angel tells
+  him further: <i>Here is the mind which hath wisdom: the seven heads are
+  seven mountains, on which the woman sitteth</i>; <i>Rome</i> being built
+  upon seven hills, and thence called the seven-hilled city. <i>Also there
+  are seven Kings: five are fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet
+  come; and when he cometh, he must continue a short space: and the Beast
+  that was and is not, even he is the eighth, and is of the seven, and
+  goeth into perdition</i>. Five are fallen, the times of the five first
+  seals being past; and one is, the time of the sixth seal being considered
+  as present; and another is not yet come, and when he cometh, which will
+  be at the opening of the seventh seal, he must continue a short space:
+  and the Beast that was and is not, even he is the eighth, by means of the
+  division of the <i>Roman</i> Empire into two collateral Empires; and is
+  of the seven, being one half of the seventh, and shall go into perdition.
+  The words, <i>five are fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet
+  come</i>, are usually referred by interpreters to the time of <i>John</i>
+  the Apostle, when the Prophecy was given: but it is to be considered,
+  that in this Prophecy many things are spoken of as present, which were
+  not present when the Prophecy was given, but which would be present with
+  respect to some future time, considered as present in the visions. Thus
+  where it is said upon pouring out the seventh vial of wrath, that
+  <i>great </i>Babylon<i> came in remembrance before God, to give unto her
+  the cup of the wine of the fierceness of his wrath</i>; this relates not
+  to the time of <i>John</i> the Apostle, but to the time of pouring out
+  the seventh vial of wrath. So where it is said, <i>Babylon is fallen, is
+  fallen</i>; and <i>thrust in thy sickle and reap, for the time is come
+  for thee to reap</i>; and <i>the time of the dead is come, that they
+  should be judged</i>; and again, <i>I saw the dead small and great stand
+  before God</i>: these sayings relate not to the days of <i>John</i> the
+  Apostle, but to the latter times considered as present in the visions. In
+  like manner the words, <i>five are fallen, and one is, and the other is
+  not yet come</i>, and <i>the Beast that was and is not, he is the
+  eighth</i>, are not to be referred to the age of <i>John</i> the Apostle,
+  but relate to the time when the Beast was to be wounded to death with a
+  sword, and shew that this wound was to be given him in his sixth head:
+  and without this reference we are not told in what head the Beast was
+  wounded. <i>And the ten horns which thou sawest, are ten Kings, which
+  have received no kingdom as yet, but receive power as Kings one hour with
+  the Beast. These have one mind</i>, being all of the whore's religion,
+  <i>and shall give their power and strength unto the Beast. These shall
+  make war with the Lamb</i>, at the sounding of the seventh trumpet;
+  <i>and the Lamb shall overcome them: for he is Lord of Lords and King of
+  Kings; and they that are with him are called and chosen and faithful. And
+  he saith unto me, the waters which thou sawest where the whore sitteth,
+  are peoples and multitudes and nations and tongues</i>, composing her
+  Beast. <i>And the ten horns which thou sawest upon the Beast, these shall
+  hate the whore, and shall make her desolate and naked, and shall eat her
+  flesh, and burn her with fire</i>, at the end of the 1260 days. <i>For
+  God hath put in their hearts to fulfil his will, and to agree and give
+  their kingdom unto the Beast, until the words of God shall be fulfilled.
+  And the woman which thou sawest, is that great city which reigneth over
+  the Kings of the earth</i>, or the great city of the <i>Latins</i>, which
+  reigneth over the ten Kings till the end of those days.</p>
+
+  <br clear="all" />
+<hr />
+
+<h3><i>FINIS</i>.</h3>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Observations upon the Prophecies of
+Daniel, and the Apocalypse of St. John, by Isaac Newton
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OBSERVATIONS UPON THE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 16878-h.htm or 16878-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/8/7/16878/
+
+Produced by Greg Alethoup, Robert Shimmin, Keith Edkins
+and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/16878-h/images/aquarius.png b/16878-h/images/aquarius.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..776ec3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-h/images/aquarius.png
diff --git a/16878-h/images/cancer.png b/16878-h/images/cancer.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa87cf8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-h/images/cancer.png
diff --git a/16878-h/images/cross.png b/16878-h/images/cross.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e61bd5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-h/images/cross.png
diff --git a/16878-h/images/gemini.png b/16878-h/images/gemini.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..38cde4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-h/images/gemini.png
diff --git a/16878-h/images/pisces.png b/16878-h/images/pisces.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..403137c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-h/images/pisces.png
diff --git a/16878-h/images/scorpio.png b/16878-h/images/scorpio.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..319090e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-h/images/scorpio.png
diff --git a/16878-h/images/taurus.png b/16878-h/images/taurus.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf0b19a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-h/images/taurus.png
diff --git a/16878-h/images/virgo.png b/16878-h/images/virgo.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40c8e4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878-h/images/virgo.png
diff --git a/16878.txt b/16878.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9498328
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7115 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Observations upon the Prophecies of Daniel,
+and the Apocalypse of St. John, by Isaac Newton
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Observations upon the Prophecies of Daniel, and the Apocalypse of St. John
+
+Author: Isaac Newton
+
+Release Date: October 15, 2005 [EBook #16878]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OBSERVATIONS UPON THE ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Greg Alethoup, Robert Shimmin, Keith Edkins
+and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+OBSERVATIONS
+UPON THE
+PROPHECIES
+OF
+_DANIEL_,
+AND THE
+APOCALYPSE
+OF
+St. _JOHN_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In Two PARTS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+By Sir _ISAAC NEWTON_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_LONDON,_
+
+Printed by J. DARBY and T. BROWNE in _Bartholomew-Close._
+
+And Sold by J. ROBERTS in _Warwick-lane_, J. TONSON in the
+_Strand_, W. INNYS and R. MANBY at the West End of St.
+_Paul's Church-Yard_, J. OSBORN and T. LONGMAN in _Pater-Noster-Row_,
+J. NOON near _Mercers Chapel_ in _Cheapside_,
+T. HATCHETT at the _Royal Exchange_, S. HARDING in St.
+_Martin's lane_, J. STAGG in _Westminster-Hall_, J. PARKER in
+_Pall-mall_, and J. BRINDLEY in _New Bond-Street_.
+
+M.DCC.XXXIII.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+To the Right Honourable
+
+_P E T E R_
+
+Lord _K I N G_,
+
+Baron of _Ockham_, Lord High Chancellor of _Great-Britain._
+
+My Lord,
+
+_I shall make no Apology for addressing the following Sheets to Your
+Lordship, who lived in a long Intercourse of Friendship with the Author;
+and, like him, amidst occupations of a different nature, made Religion your
+voluntary Study; and in all your Enquiries and Actions, have shewn the same
+inflexible Adherence to Truth and Virtue._
+
+_I shall always reckon it one of the Advantages of my Relation to Sir
+_Isaac Newton_, that it affords me an opportunity of making this publick
+acknowledgment of the unfeigned Respect of_,
+
+  My Lord,
+      Your Lordship's
+          most obedient, and
+              most humble Servant,
+                  Benj. Smith.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+PART I.
+
+Observations upon the Prophecies of _Daniel_.
+
+CHAP. I. Introduction concerning, the Compilers of the Books of the Old
+Testament.
+
+CHAP. II. Of the Prophetic Language.
+
+CHAP. III. Of the vision of the Image composed of four Metals.
+
+CHAP. IV. Of the vision of the four Beasts.
+
+CHAP. V. Of the Kingdoms represented by the feet of the Image composed of
+iron and clay.
+
+CHAP. VI. Of the ten Kingdoms represented by the ten horns of the fourth
+Beast.
+
+CHAP. VII. Of the eleventh horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast.
+
+CHAP. VIII. Of the power of the eleventh horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast,
+to change times and laws.
+
+CHAP. IX. Of the Kingdoms represented in _Daniel_ by the Ram and He-Goat.
+
+CHAP. X. Of the Prophecy of the Seventy Weeks.
+
+CHAP. XI. Of the Times of the Birth and Passion of Christ.
+
+CHAP. XII. Of the Prophecy of the Scripture of Truth.
+
+CHAP. XIII. Of the King who did according to his will, and magnified
+himself above every God, and honoured _Mahuzzims_, and regarded not the
+desire of women.
+
+CHAP. XIV. Of the _Mahuzzims_, honoured by the King who doth according to
+his will.
+
+PART II.
+
+Observations upon the _Apocalypse_ of St. _John_.
+
+CHAP. I. Introduction, concerning the time when the _Apocalypse_ was
+written.
+
+CHAP. II. Of the relation which the _Apocalypse_ of _John_ hath to the Book
+of the Law of _Moses_, and to the worship of God in the Temple.
+
+CHAP. III. Of the relation which the Prophecy of _John_ hath to those of
+_Daniel_; and of the Subject of the Prophecy.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART I.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+OBSERVATIONS
+UPON THE
+PROPHECIES
+OF
+_DANIEL._
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+OBSERVATIONS
+
+UPON THE
+
+Prophecies of _DANIEL_
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. I.
+
+_Introduction concerning the Compilers of the books of the Old Testament._
+
+When _Manasses_ [1] set up a carved image in the house of the Lord, and
+built altars in the two courts of the house, to all the host of Heaven, and
+us'd inchantments and witchcraft, and familiar spirits, and for his great
+wickedness was invaded by the army of _Asserhadon_ King of _Assyria_, and
+carried captive to _Babylon_; the book of the Law was lost till the
+eighteenth year of his grandson _Josiah_. Then [2] _Hilkiah_ the High
+Priest, upon repairing the Temple, found it there: and the King lamented
+that their fathers had not done after the words of the book, and commanded
+that it should be read to the people, and caused the people to renew the
+holy covenant with God. This is the book of the Law now extant.
+
+When [3] _Shishak_ came out of _Egypt_ and spoil'd the temple, and brought
+_Judah_ into subjection to the monarchy of _Egypt_, (which was in the fifth
+year of _Rehoboam_) the _Jews_ continued under great troubles for about
+twenty years; being _without the true God, and without a teaching Priest,
+and without Law: and in those times there was no peace to him that went
+out, nor to him that came in, but great vexations were upon all the
+inhabitants of the countries, and nation was destroyed of nation, and city
+of city, for God did vex them with all adversity_. But [4] when _Shishak_
+was dead, and _Egypt_ fell into troubles, _Judah_ had quiet ten years; and
+in that time _Asa_ built fenced cities in _Judah_, and got up an army of
+580000 men, with which, in the 15th year of his reign, he met and overcame
+_Zerah_ the _Ethiopian_, who had conquered _Egypt_ and _Lybia_, and
+_Troglodytica_, and came out with an army of 1000000 _Lybians_ and
+_Ethiopians_, to recover the countries conquered by _Sesac_. And after this
+victory [5] _Asa_ dethroned his mother for idolatry, and he renewed the
+Altar, and brought new vessels of gold and silver into the Temple; and he
+and the people entered into a new covenant to seek the Lord God of their
+fathers, upon pain of death to those who worshiped other Gods; and his son
+_Jehosaphat_ took away the high places, and in the third year of his reign
+sent some of his Princes, and of the Priests and Levites, to teach in the
+cities of _Judah_: and they had the book of the Law with them, and went
+about throughout all the cities of _Judah_, and taught the people. This is
+that book of the Law which was afterwards lost in the reign of _Manasses_,
+and found again in the reign of _Josiah_, and therefore it was written
+before the third year of _Jehosaphat_.
+
+The same book of the Law was preserved and handed down to posterity by the
+_Samaritans_, and therefore was received by the ten Tribes before their
+captivity. For [6] when the ten Tribes were captivated, a Priest or the
+captivity was sent back to _Bethel_, by order of the King of _Assyria_, to
+instruct the new inhabitants of _Samaria_, in _the manner of the God of the
+land_; and the _Samaritans_ had the _Pentateuch_ from this Priest, as
+containing the law or _manner of the God of the land_, which he was to
+teach them. For [7] they persevered in the religion which he taught them,
+joining with it the worship of their own Gods; and by persevering in what
+they had been taught, they preserved this book of their Law in the original
+character of the _Hebrews_, while the two Tribes, after their return from
+_Babylon_, changed the character to that of the _Chaldees_, which they had
+learned at _Babylon_.
+
+And since the _Pentateuch_ was received as the book of the Law, both by the
+two Tribes and by the ten Tribes, it follows that they received it before
+they became divided into two Kingdoms. For after the division, they
+received not laws from one another, but continued at variance. _Judah_
+could not reclaim _Israel_ from the sin of _Jeroboam_, and _Israel_ could
+not bring _Judah_ to it. The _Pentateuch_ therefore was the book of the Law
+in the days of _David_ and _Solomon_. The affairs of the Tabernacle and
+Temple were ordered by _David_ and _Solomon_, according to the Law of this
+book; and _David_ in the 78th Psalm, admonishing the people to give ear to
+the Law of God, means the Law of this book. For in describing how their
+forefathers kept it not, he quotes many historical things out of the books
+of _Exodus_ and _Numbers_.
+
+The race of the Kings of _Edom_, before there reigned any King over
+_Israel_, is set down in the book of [8] _Genesis_; and therefore that book
+was not written entirely in the form now extant, before the reign of
+_Saul_. The writer set down the race of those Kings till his own time, and
+therefore wrote before _David_ conquered _Edom_. The _Pentateuch_ is
+composed of the Law and the history of God's people together; and the
+history hath been collected from several books, such as were the history of
+the Creation composed by _Moses_, _Gen_. ii. 4. the book of the generations
+of _Adam_, _Gen._ v. i. and the book of the wars of the Lord, _Num._ xxi.
+14. This book of wars contained what was done at the Red-sea, and in the
+journeying of _Israel_ thro' the Wilderness, and therefore was begun by
+_Moses_. And _Joshua_ might carry it on to the conquest of _Canaan_. For
+_Joshua_ wrote some things in the book of the Law of God, _Josh._ xxiv. 26
+and therefore might write his own wars in the book of wars, those being the
+principal wars of God. These were publick books, and therefore not written
+without the authority of _Moses_ and _Joshua_. And _Samuel_ had leisure in
+the reign of _Saul_, to put them into the form of the books of _Moses_ and
+_Joshua_ now extant, inserting into the book of _Genesis_, the race of the
+Kings of _Edom_, until there reigned a King in _Israel_.
+
+The book of the _Judges_ is a continued history of the _Judges_ down to the
+death of _Sampson_, and therefore was compiled after his death, out of the
+Acts of the _Judges_. Several things in this book are said to be done _when
+there was no King in _Israel__, _Judg._ xvii. 6. xviii. 1. xix. 1. xxi. 25.
+and therefore this book was written after the beginning of the reign of
+_Saul_. When it was written, the _Jebusites_ dwelt in _Jerusalem_, _Jud._
+i. 21 and therefore it was written before the eighth year of _David_, 2
+_Sam._ v. 8. and 1 _Chron._ xi. 6. The books of _Moses_, _Joshua_, and
+_Judges_, contain one continued history, down from the Creation to the
+death of _Sampson_. Where the _Pentateuch_ ends, the book of _Joshua_
+begins; and where the book of _Joshua_ ends, the book of _Judges_ begins.
+Therefore all these books have been composed out of the writings of
+_Moses_, _Joshua_, and other records, by one and the same hand, after the
+beginning of the reign of _Saul_, and before the eighth year of _David_.
+And _Samuel_ was a sacred writer, 1 _Sam._ x. 25. acquainted with the
+history of _Moses_ and the _Judges_, 1 _Sam._ xii. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12. and
+had leisure in the reign of _Saul_, and sufficient authority to compose
+these books. He was a Prophet, and judged _Israel_ all the days of his
+life, and was in the greatest esteem with the people; and the Law by which
+he was to judge the people was not to be published by less authority than
+his own, the Law-maker being not inferior to the judge. And the book of
+_Jasher_, which is quoted in the book of _Joshua_, _Josh._ x. 13. was in
+being at the death of _Saul_, 2 _Sam._ i. 18.
+
+At the dedication of the Temple of _Solomon_, when the Ark was brought into
+the most holy place, there was nothing in it but the two tables, 1 _Kings_
+viii. 9. and therefore when the _Philistines_ took the Ark, they took out
+of it the book of the Law, and the golden pot of Manna, and _Aaron_'s Rod.
+And this and other losses in the desolation of _Israel_, by the conquering
+_Philistines_, might give occasion to _Samuel_, after some respite from
+those enemies, to recollect the scattered writings of _Moses_ and _Joshua_,
+and the records of the Patriarchs and Judges, and compose them in the form
+now extant.
+
+The book of _Ruth_ is a history of things done in the days of the _Judges_,
+and may be looked upon as an addition to the book of the _Judges_, written
+by the same author, and at the same time. For it was written after the
+birth of _David_, _Ruth_ iv. 17, 22. and not long after, because the
+history of _Boaz_ and _Ruth_, the great grandfather and great grandmother
+of _David_, and that of their contemporaries, could not well be remembered
+above two or three generations. And since this book derives the genealogy
+of _David_ from _Boaz_ and _Ruth_, and omits _David_'s elder brothers and
+his sons; it was written in honour of _David_, after he was anointed King
+by _Samuel_, and before he had children in _Hebron_, and by consequence in
+the reign of _Saul_. It proceeds not to the history of _David_, and
+therefore seems to have been written presently after he was anointed. They
+judge well therefore who ascribe to _Samuel_ the books of _Joshua_,
+_Judges_, and _Ruth_.
+
+_Samuel_ is also reputed the author of the first book of _Samuel_, till the
+time of his death. The two books of _Samuel_ cite no authors, and therefore
+seem to be originals. They begin with his genealogy, birth and education,
+and might be written partly in his lifetime by himself or his disciples the
+Prophets at _Naioth_ in _Ramah_, 1 _Sam._ xix. 18, 19, 20. and partly after
+his death by the same disciples.
+
+The books of the _Kings_ cite other authors, as the book of the Acts of
+_Solomon_, the book of the _Chronicles_ of the Kings of _Israel_, and the
+book of the _Chronicles_ of the Kings of _Judah_. The books of the
+_Chronicles_ cite the book of _Samuel_ the Seer, the book of _Nathan_ the
+Prophet, and the book of _Gad_ the Seer, for the Acts of _David_; the book
+of _Nathan_ the Prophet, the Prophecy of _Ahijah_ the _Shilonite_, and the
+visions of _Iddo_ the Seer, for the Acts of _Solomon_; the book of
+_Shemajah_ the Prophet, and the book of _Iddo_ the Seer concerning
+genealogies, for the Acts of _Rehoboam_ and _Abijah_; the book of the Kings
+of _Judah_ and _Israel_ for the Acts of _Asa_, _Joash_, _Amaziah_,
+_Jotham_, _Ahaz_, _Hezekiah_, _Manasseh_, and _Josiah_; the book of
+_Hanani_ the Seer, for the Acts of _Jehosaphat_; and the visions of
+_Isaiah_ for the Acts of _Uzziah_ and _Hezekiah_. These books were
+therefore collected out of the historical writings of the antient Seers and
+Prophets. And because the books of the _Kings_ and _Chronicles_ quote one
+another, they were written at one and the same time. And this time was
+after the return from the _Babylonian_ captivity, because they bring down
+the history of _Judah_, and the genealogies of the Kings of _Judah_, and of
+the High Priests, to that captivity. The book of _Ezra_ was originally a
+part of the book of the _Chronicles_, and has been divided from it. For it
+begins with the two last verses of the books of _Chronicles_, and the first
+book of _Esdras_ begins with the two last chapters thereof. _Ezra_ was
+therefore the compiler of the books of _Kings_ and _Chronicles_, and
+brought down the history to his own time. He was a ready Scribe in the Law
+of God; and for assisting him in this work _Nehemias_ founded a library,
+and _gathered together the Acts of the Kings and the Prophets, and of
+_David_, and the Epistles of the Kings, concerning the holy gifts_, 2
+_Maccab._ ii. 13. By the Acts of _David_ I understand here the two books of
+_Samuel_, or at least the second book. Out of the Acts of the _Kings_,
+written from time to time by the Prophets, he compos'd the books of the
+Kings of _Judah_ and _Israel_, the _Chronicles_ of the Kings of _Judah_,
+and the _Chronicles_ of the Kings of _Israel_. And in doing this he joined
+those Acts together, in due order of time, copying the very words of the
+authors, as is manifest from hence, that the books of the _Kings_ and
+_Chronicles_ frequently agree with one another in words for many sentences
+together. Where they agree in sense, there they agree in words also.
+
+So the Prophecies of _Isaiah_, written at several times, he has collected
+into one body. And the like he did for those of _Jeremiah_, and the rest of
+the Prophets, down to the days of the second Temple. The book of _Jonah_ is
+the history of _Jonah_ written by another hand. The book of _Daniel_ is a
+collection of papers written at several times. The six last chapters
+contain Prophecies written at several times by _Daniel_ himself: the six
+first are a collection of historical papers written by others. The fourth
+chapter is a decree of _Nebuchadnezzar_. The first chapter was written
+after _Daniel_'s death: for the author saith, that _Daniel_ continued to
+the first year of _Cyrus_; that is, to his first year over the _Persians_
+and _Medes_, and third year over _Babylon_. And, for the same reason, the
+fifth and sixth chapters were also written after his death. For they end
+with these words: _So this _Daniel_ prospered in the reign of _Darius_ and
+in the reign of _Cyrus_ the_ Persian. Yet these words might be added by the
+collector of the papers, whom I take to be _Ezra_.
+
+The Psalms composed by _Moses_, _David_, and others, seem to have been also
+collected by _Ezra_ into one volume. I reckon him the collector, because in
+this collection I meet with Psalms as late as the _Babylonian_ captivity,
+but with none later.
+
+After these things _Antiochus Epiphanes_ spoiled the Temple, commanded the
+_Jews_ to forsake the Law upon pain of death, and caused the sacred books
+to be burnt wherever they could be found: and in these troubles the book of
+the _Chronicles_ of the Kings of _Israel_ was entirely lost. But upon
+recovering from this oppression, _Judas Maccabaeus_ gathered together all
+those writings that were to be met with, 2 _Maccab._ ii. 14. and in
+reducing them into order, part of the Prophecies of _Isaiah_, or some other
+Prophet, have been added to the end of the Prophecies of _Zechariah_; and
+the book of _Ezra_ has been separated from the book of _Chronicles_, and
+set together in two different orders; in one order in the book of _Ezra_,
+received into the Canon, and in another order in the first book of
+_Esdras_.
+
+After the _Roman_ captivity, the _Jews_ for preserving their traditions,
+put them in writing in their _Talmud_, and for preserving their scriptures,
+agreed upon an Edition, and pointed it, and counted the letters of every
+sort in every book: and by preserving only this Edition, the antienter
+various lections, except what can be discovered by means of the
+_Septuagint_ Version, are now lost; and such marginal notes, or other
+corruptions, as by the errors of the transcribers, before this Edition was
+made, had crept into the text, are now scarce to be corrected.
+
+The _Jews_ before the _Roman_ captivity, distinguished the sacred books
+into the Law, the Prophets, and the _Hagiographa_, or holy writings; and
+read only the Law and the Prophets in their Synagogues. And Christ and his
+Apostles laid the stress of religion upon the Law and the Prophets, _Matt._
+vii. 12. xxii. 4. _Luke_ xvi. 16, 29, 31. xxiv. 44. _Acts_ xxiv. 14. xxvi.
+22. _Rom._ iii. 21. By the _Hagiographa_ they meant the historical books
+called _Joshua_, _Judges_, _Ruth_, _Samuel_, _Kings_, _Chronicles_, _Ezra_,
+_Nehemiah_, and _Esther_, the book of _Job_, the _Psalms_, the books of
+_Solomon_, and the _Lamentations_. The Samaritans read only the
+_Pentateuch_: and when _Jehosaphat_ sent men to teach in the cities, they
+had with them only the book of the Law; for the Prophecies now extant were
+not then written. And upon the return from the _Babylonian_ captivity,
+_Ezra_ read only the book of the Law to the people, from morning to noon on
+the first day of the seventh month; and from day to day in the feast of
+Tabernacles: for he had not yet collected the writings of the Prophets into
+the volume now extant; but instituted the reading of them after the
+collection was made. By reading the Law and the Prophets in the Synagogues,
+those books have been kept freer from corruption than the _Hagiographa_.
+
+In the infancy of the nation of _Israel_, when God had given them a Law,
+and made a covenant with them to be their God if they would keep his
+commandments, he sent Prophets to reclaim them, as often as they revolted
+to the worship of other Gods: and upon their returning to him, they
+sometimes renewed the covenant which they had broken. These Prophets he
+continued to send, till the days of _Ezra_: but after their Prophecies were
+read in the Synagogues, those Prophecies were thought sufficient. For if
+the people would not hear _Moses_ and the old Prophets, they would hear no
+new ones, no not _tho they should rise from the dead_. At length when a new
+truth was to be preached to the _Gentiles_, namely, _that Jesus was the
+Christ_, God sent new Prophets and Teachers: but after their writings were
+also received and read in the Synagogues of the Christians, Prophecy ceased
+a second time. We have _Moses_, the Prophets, and Apostles, and the words
+of Christ himself; and if we will not hear them, we shall be more
+inexcusable than the _Jews._ For the Prophets and Apostles have foretold,
+that as _Israel_ often revolted and brake the covenant, and upon repentance
+renewed it; so there should be a falling away among the Christians, soon
+after the days of the Apostles; and that in the latter days God would
+destroy the impenitent revolters, and make a new covenant with his people.
+And the giving ear to the Prophets is a fundamental character of the true
+Church. For God has so ordered the Prophecies, that in the latter days _the
+wise may understand, but the wicked shall do wickedly, and none of the
+wicked shall understand_, Dan. xii. 9, 10. The authority of Emperors,
+Kings, and Princes, is human. The authority of Councils, Synods, Bishops,
+and Presbyters, is human. The authority of the Prophets is divine, and
+comprehends the sum of religion, reckoning _Moses_ and the Apostles among
+the Prophets; and _if an Angel from Heaven preach any other gospel_, than
+what they have delivered, _let him be accursed_. Their writings contain the
+covenant between God and his people, with instructions for keeping this
+covenant; instances of God's judgments upon them that break it: and
+predictions of things to come. While the people of God keep the covenant,
+they continue to be his people: when they break it they cease to be his
+people or church, and become _the Synagogue of Satan, who say they are
+_Jews_ and are not._ And no power on earth is authorized to alter this
+covenant.
+
+The predictions of things to come relate to the state of the Church in all
+ages: and amongst the old Prophets, _Daniel_ is most distinct in order of
+time, and easiest to be understood: and therefore in those things which
+relate to the last times, he must be made the key to the rest.
+
+Notes to Chap. I.
+
+[1] 2 Chron. xxxiii. 5, 6, 7.
+
+[2] 2 Chron. xxxiv.
+
+[3] 2 Chron. xii. 2, 3, 4, 8, 9. & xv. 3, 5, 6.
+
+[4] 2 Chron. xiv. 1, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12.
+
+[5] 2 Chron. xv. 3, 12, 13, 16, 18.
+
+[6] 2 Kings xvii. 27, 28, 32, 33.
+
+[7] 2 Kings xvii. 34, 41.
+
+[8] Gen. xxxvi. 31.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. II.
+
+_Of the Prophetic Language._
+
+For understanding the Prophecies, we are, in the first place, to acquaint
+our-selves with the figurative language of the Prophets. This language is
+taken from the analogy between the world natural, and an empire or kingdom
+considered as a world politic.
+
+Accordingly, the whole world natural consisting of heaven and earth,
+signifies the whole world politic, consisting of thrones and people, or so
+much of it as is considered in the Prophecy: and the things in that world
+signify the analogous things in this. For the heavens, and the things
+therein, signify thrones and dignities, and those who enjoy them; and the
+earth, with the things thereon, the inferior people; and the lowest parts
+of the earth, called _Hades_ or Hell, the lowest or most miserable part of
+them. Whence ascending towards heaven, and descending to the earth, are put
+for rising and falling in power and honour: rising out of the earth, or
+waters, and falling into them, for the rising up to any dignity or
+dominion, out of the inferior state of the people, or falling down from the
+same into that inferior state; descending into the lower parts of the
+earth, for descending to a very low and unhappy estate; speaking with a
+faint voice out of the dust, for being in a weak and low condition; moving
+from one place to another, for translation from one office, dignity, or
+dominion, to another; great earthquakes, and the shaking of heaven and
+earth, for the shaking of kingdoms, so as to distract or overthrow them;
+the creating a new heaven and earth, and the passing away of an old one, or
+the beginning and end of the world, for the rise and ruin of the body
+politic signified thereby.
+
+In the heavens, the Sun and Moon are, by interpreters of dreams, put for
+the persons of Kings and Queens; but in sacred Prophecy, which regards not
+single persons, the Sun is put for the whole species and race of Kings, in
+the kingdom or kingdoms of the world politic, shining with regal power and
+glory; the Moon for the body of the common people, considered as the King's
+wife; the Stars for subordinate Princes and great men, or for Bishops and
+Rulers of the people of God, when the Sun is Christ; light for the glory,
+truth, and knowledge, wherewith great and good men shine and illuminate
+others; darkness for obscurity of condition, and for error, blindness and
+ignorance; darkning, smiting, or setting of the Sun, Moon, and Stars, for
+the ceasing of a kingdom, or for the desolation thereof, proportional to
+the darkness; darkning the Sun, turning the Moon into blood, and falling of
+the Stars, for the same; new Moons, for the return of a dispersed people
+into a body politic or ecclesiastic.
+
+Fire and meteors refer to both heaven and earth, and signify as follows;
+burning any thing with fire, is put for the consuming thereof by war; a
+conflagration of the earth, or turning a country into a lake of fire, for
+the consumption of a kingdom by war; the being in a furnace, for the being
+in slavery under another nation; the ascending up of the smoke of any
+burning thing for ever and ever, for the continuation of a conquered people
+under the misery of perpetual subjection and slavery; the scorching heat of
+the sun, for vexatious wars, persecutions and troubles inflicted by the
+King; riding on the clouds, for reigning over much people; covering the sun
+with a cloud, or with smoke, for oppression of the King by the armies of an
+enemy; tempestuous winds, or the motion of clouds, for wars; thunder, or
+the voice of a cloud, for the voice of a multitude; a storm of thunder,
+lightning, hail, and overflowing rain, for a tempest of war descending from
+the heavens and clouds politic, on the heads of their enemies; rain, if not
+immoderate, and dew, and living water, for the graces and doctrines of the
+Spirit; and the defect of rain, for spiritual barrenness.
+
+In the earth, the dry land and congregated waters, as a sea, a river, a
+flood, are put for the people of several regions, nations, and dominions;
+embittering of waters, for great affliction of the people by war and
+persecution; turning things into blood, for the mystical death of bodies
+politic, that is, for their dissolution; the overflowing of a sea or river,
+for the invasion of the earth politic, by the people of the waters; drying
+up of waters, for the conquest of their regions by the earth; fountains of
+waters for cities, the permanent heads of rivers politic; mountains and
+islands, for the cities of the earth and sea politic, with the territories
+and dominions belonging to those cities; dens and rocks of mountains, for
+the temples of cities; the hiding of men in those dens and rocks, for the
+shutting up of Idols in their temples; houses and ships, for families,
+assemblies, and towns, in the earth and sea politic; and a navy of ships of
+war, for an army of that kingdom that is signified by the sea.
+
+Animals also and vegetables are put for the people of several regions and
+conditions; and particularly, trees, herbs, and land animals, for the
+people of the earth politic: flags, reeds, and fishes, for those of the
+waters politic; birds and insects, for those of the politic heaven and
+earth; a forest for a kingdom; and a wilderness for a desolate and thin
+people.
+
+If the world politic, considered in prophecy, consists of many kingdoms,
+they are represented by as many parts of the world natural; as the noblest
+by the celestial frame, and then the Moon and Clouds are put for the common
+people; the less noble, by the earth, sea, and rivers, and by the animals
+or vegetables, or buildings therein; and then the greater and more powerful
+animals and taller trees, are put for Kings, Princes, and Nobles. And
+because the whole kingdom is the body politic of the King, therefore the
+Sun, or a Tree, or a Beast, or Bird, or a Man, whereby the King is
+represented, is put in a large signification for the whole kingdom; and
+several animals, as a Lion, a Bear, a Leopard, a Goat, according to their
+qualities, are put for several kingdoms and bodies politic; and sacrificing
+of beasts, for slaughtering and conquering of kingdoms; and friendship
+between beasts, for peace between kingdoms. Yet sometimes vegetables and
+animals are, by certain epithets or circumstances, extended to other
+significations; as a Tree, when called the _tree of life_ or _of
+knowledge_; and a Beast, when called _the old serpent_, or worshipped.
+
+When a Beast or Man is put for a kingdom, his parts and qualities are put
+for the analogous parts and qualities of the kingdom; as the head of a
+Beast, for the great men who precede and govern; the tail for the inferior
+people, who follow and are governed; the heads, if more than one, for the
+number of capital parts, or dynasties, or dominions in the kingdom, whether
+collateral or successive, with respect to the civil government; the horns
+on any head, for the number of kingdoms in that head, with respect to
+military power; seeing for understanding, and the eyes for men of
+understanding and policy, and in matters of religion for [Greek:
+Episkopoi], Bishops; speaking, for making laws; the mouth, for a law-giver,
+whether civil or sacred; the loudness of the voice, for might and power;
+the faintness thereof, for weakness; eating and drinking, for acquiring
+what is signified by the things eaten and drank; the hairs of a beast, or
+man, and the feathers of a bird, for people; the wings, for the number of
+kingdoms represented by the beast; the arm of a man, for his power, or for
+any people wherein his strength and power consists; his feet, for the
+lowest of the people, or for the latter end of the kingdom; the feet,
+nails, and teeth of beasts of prey, for armies and squadrons of armies; the
+bones, for strength, and for fortified places; the flesh, for riches and
+possessions; and the days of their acting, for years; and when a tree is
+put for a kingdom, its branches, leaves and fruit, signify as do the wings,
+feathers, and food of a bird or beast.
+
+When a man is taken in a mystical sense, his qualities are often signified
+by his actions, and by the circumstances of things about him. So a Ruler is
+signified by his riding on a beast; a Warrior and Conqueror, by his having
+a sword and bow; a potent man, by his gigantic stature; a Judge, by weights
+and measures; a sentence of absolution, or condemnation, by a white or a
+black stone; a new dignity, by a new name; moral or civil qualifications,
+by garments; honour and glory, by splendid apparel; royal dignity, by
+purple or scarlet, or by a crown; righteousness, by white and clean robes;
+wickedness, by spotted and filthy garments; affliction, mourning, and
+humiliation, by clothing in sackcloth; dishonour, shame, and want of good
+works, by nakedness; error and misery, by drinking a cup of his or her wine
+that causeth it; propagating any religion for gain, by exercising traffick
+and merchandize with that people whose religion it is; worshipping or
+serving the false Gods of any nation, by committing adultery with their
+princes, or by worshipping them; a Council of a kingdom, by its image;
+idolatry, by blasphemy; overthrow in war, by a wound of man or beast; a
+durable plague of war, by a sore and pain; the affliction or persecution
+which a people suffers in labouring to bring forth a new kingdom, by the
+pain of a woman in labour to bring forth a man-child; the dissolution of a
+body politic or ecclesiastic, by the death of a man or beast; and the
+revival of a dissolved dominion, by the resurrection of the dead.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. III.
+
+_Of the vision of the Image composed of four Metals._
+
+The Prophecies of _Daniel_ are all of them related to one another, as if
+they were but several parts of one general Prophecy, given at several
+times. The first is the easiest to be understood, and every following
+Prophecy adds something new to the former. The first was given in a dream
+to _Nebuchadnezzar_, King of _Babylon_, in the second year of his reign;
+but the King forgetting his dream, it was given again to _Daniel_ in a
+dream, and by him revealed to the King. And thereby, _Daniel_ presently
+became famous for wisdom, and revealing of secrets: insomuch that _Ezekiel_
+his contemporary, in the nineteenth year of _Nebuchadnezzar_, spake thus of
+him to the King of _Tyre_: _Behold_, saith he, _thou art wiser than
+_Daniel_, there is no secret that they can hide from thee_, Ezek. xxviii.
+3. And the same _Ezekiel_, in another place, joins _Daniel_ with _Noah_ and
+_Job_, as most high in the favour of God, _Ezek._ xiv. 14, 16, 18, 20. And
+in the last year of _Belshazzar_, the Queen-mother said of him to the King:
+_Behold there is a man in thy kingdom, in whom is the spirit of the holy
+gods; and in the days of thy father, light and understanding and wisdom,
+like the wisdom of the gods, was found in him; whom the king
+_Nebuchadnezzar_ thy father, the king, I say, thy father made master of the
+magicians, astrologers, _Chaldeans_ and soothsayers: forasmuch as an
+excellent spirit, and knowledge, and understanding, interpreting of dreams,
+and shewing of hard sentences, and dissolving of doubts, were found in the
+same _Daniel_, whom the king named _Belteshazzar__, Dan. v. 11, 12.
+_Daniel_ was in the greatest credit amongst the _Jews_, till the reign of
+the _Roman_ Emperor _Hadrian_: and to reject his Prophecies, is to reject
+the Christian religion. For this religion is founded upon his Prophecy
+concerning the _Messiah_.
+
+Now in this vision of the Image composed of four Metals, the foundation of
+all _Daniel_'s Prophecies is laid. It represents a body of four great
+nations, which should reign over the earth successively, viz. the people of
+_Babylonia_, the _Persians_, the _Greeks_, and the _Romans_. And by a stone
+cut out without hands, which fell upon the feet of the Image, and brake all
+the four Metals to pieces, and _became a great mountain, and filled the
+whole earth_; it further represents that a new kingdom should arise, after
+the four, and conquer all those nations, and grow very great, and last to
+the end of all ages.
+
+The head of the Image was of gold, and signifies the nations of
+_Babylonia_, who reigned first, as _Daniel_ himself interprets. _Thou art
+this head of gold_, saith he to _Nebuchadnezzar_. These nations reigned
+till _Cyrus_ conquered _Babylon_, and within a few months after that
+conquest revolted to the _Persians_, and set them up above the _Medes_. The
+breast and arms of the Image were of silver, and represent the _Persians_
+who reigned next. The belly and thighs of the Image were of brass, and
+represent the _Greeks_, who, under the dominion of _Alexander_ the great,
+conquered the _Persians_, and reigned next after them. The legs were of
+iron, and represent the _Romans_ who reigned next after the _Greeks_, and
+began to conquer them in the eighth year of _Antiochus Epiphanes_. For in
+that year they conquered _Perseus_ King of _Macedon_, the fundamental
+kingdom of the _Greeks_; and from thence forward grew into a mighty empire,
+and reigned with great power till the days of _Theodosius_ the great. Then
+by the incursion of many northern nations, they brake into many smaller
+kingdoms, which are represented by the feet and toes of the Image, composed
+part of iron, and part of clay. For then, saith _Daniel_, [1] _the kingdom
+shall be divided, and there shall be in it of the strength of iron, but
+they shall not cleave one to another._
+
+_And in the days of these Kings_, saith _Daniel_, _shall the God of heaven
+set up a kingdom which shall never be destroyed: and the kingdom shall not
+be left to other people; but it shall break in pieces, and consume all
+these kingdoms, and it shall stand for ever. Forasmuch as thou sawest that
+the stone was cut out of the mountains without hands, and that it brake in
+pieces the iron, the brass, the clay, the silver and the gold._
+
+Notes to Chap. III.
+
+[1] Chap. ii. 41, &c.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. IV.
+
+_Of the vision of the four Beasts._
+
+In the next vision, which is of the four Beasts, the Prophecy of the four
+Empires is repeated, with several new additions; such as are the two wings
+of the Lion, the three ribs in the mouth of the Bear, the four wings and
+four heads of the Leopard, the eleven horns of the fourth Beast, and the
+son of man coming in the clouds of Heaven, to the Antient of Days sitting
+in judgment.
+
+The first Beast was like a lion, and had eagle's wings, to denote the
+kingdoms of _Babylonia_ and _Media_, which overthrew the _Assyrian_ Empire,
+and divided it between them, and thereby became considerable, and grew into
+great Empires. In the former Prophecy, the Empire of _Babylonia_ was
+represented by the head of gold; in this both Empires are represented
+together by the two wings of the lion. _And I beheld,_ saith [1] _Daniel_,
+_till the wings thereof were pluckt, and it was lifted up from the earth,
+and made to stand upon the feet as a man, and a man's heart was given to
+it_; that is, till it was humbled and subdued, and made to know its human
+state.
+
+The second Beast was like a bear, and represents the Empire which reigned
+next after the _Babylonians_, that is, the Empire of the _Persians_. _Thy
+kingdom is divided_, or broken, saith _Daniel_ to the last King of
+_Babylon_, _and given to the _Medes_ and _Persians__, _Dan._ v. 28. This
+Beast _raised itself up on one side_; the _Persians_ being under the
+_Medes_ at the fall of _Babylon_, but presently rising up above them. [2]
+_And it had three ribs in the mouth of it, between the teeth of it_, to
+signify the kingdoms of _Sardes_, _Babylon_, and _Egypt_, which were
+conquered by it, but did not belong to its proper body. And it devoured
+much flesh, the riches of those three kingdoms.
+
+The third Beast was the kingdom which succeeded the _Persian_; and this was
+the empire of the _Greeks_, _Dan._ viii. 6, 7, 20, 21. It was _like a
+Leopard_, to signify its fierceness; and had four heads and four wings, to
+signify that it should become divided into four kingdoms, _Dan._ viii 22.
+for it continued in a monarchical form during the reign of _Alexander_ the
+great, and his brother _Aridaeus_, and young sons _Alexander_ and
+_Hercules_; and then brake into four kingdoms, by the governors of
+provinces putting crowns on their own heads, and by mutual consent reigning
+over their provinces. _Cassander_ reigned over _Macedon_, _Greece_, and
+_Epirus_; _Lysimachus_ over _Thrace_ and _Bithynia_; _Ptolemy_ over
+_Egypt_, _Lybia_, _Arabia_, _Coelosyria_, and _Palestine_; and _Seleucus_
+over _Syria_.
+
+The fourth Beast was the empire which succeeded that of the _Greeks_, and
+this was the _Roman_. This beast was exceeding dreadful and terrible, and
+had great iron teeth, and devoured and brake in pieces, and stamped the
+residue with its feet; and such was the _Roman_ empire. It was larger,
+stronger, and more formidable and lasting than any of the former. It
+conquered the kingdom of _Macedon_, with _Illyricum_ and _Epirus_, in the
+eighth year of _Antiochus Epiphanes_, _Anno Nabonass._. 580; and inherited
+that of _Pergamus_, _Anno Nabonass._ 615; and conquered that of _Syria_,
+_Anno Nabonass._ 679, and that of _Egypt_, _Anno Nabonass._ 718. And by
+these and other conquests it became greater and more terrible than any of
+the three former Beasts. This Empire continued in its greatness till the
+reign of _Theodosius_ the great; and then brake into ten kingdoms,
+represented by the ten horns of this Beast; and continued in a broken form,
+till the Antient of days sat in a throne like fiery flame, and _the
+judgment was set, and the books were opened, and the Beast was slain and
+his body destroyed, and given to the burning flames; and one like the son
+of man came with the clouds of heaven, and came to the Antient of days_
+[3], and received dominion over all nations, and judgment was given to the
+saints of the most high, and the time came that they possessed the kingdom.
+
+_I beheld,_ saith [4] _Daniel_, _till the Beast was slain, and his body
+destroyed, and given to the burning flames. As concerning the rest of the
+Beasts, they had their dominion taken away: yet their lives were prolonged
+for a season and a time_. And therefore all the four Beasts are still
+alive, tho the dominion of the three first be taken away. The nations of
+_Chaldea_ and _Assyria_ are still the first Beast. Those of _Media_ and
+_Persia_ are still the second Beast. Those of _Macedon_, _Greece_ and
+_Thrace_, _Asia_ minor, _Syria_ and _Egypt_, are still the third. And those
+of _Europe_, on this side _Greece_, are still the fourth. Seeing therefore
+the body of the third Beast is confined to the nations on this side the
+river _Euphrates_, and the body of the fourth Beast is confined to the
+nations on this side _Greece_; we are to look for all the four heads of the
+third Beast, among the nations on this side of the river _Euphrates_; and
+for all the eleven horns of the fourth Beast, among the nations on this
+side of _Greece_. And therefore, at the breaking of the _Greek_ empire into
+four kingdoms of the _Greeks_, we include no part of the _Chaldeans_,
+_Medes_ and _Persians_ in those kingdoms, because they belonged to the
+bodies of the two first Beasts. Nor do we reckon the _Greek_ empire seated
+at _Constantinople_, among the horns of the fourth Beast, because it
+belonged to the body of the third.
+
+Notes to Chap. IV.
+
+[1] Chap. vii. 4.
+
+[2] Chap. vii. 5.
+
+[3] Chap. vii. 13.
+
+[4] Chap. vii. 11, 12.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. V.
+
+_Of the Kingdoms represented by the feet of the Image composed of iron and
+clay._
+
+_Dacia_ was a large country bounded on the south by the _Danube_, on the
+east by the _Euxine_ sea, on the north by the river _Neister_ and the
+mountain _Crapac_, and on the west by the river _Tibesis_, or _Teys_, which
+runs southward into the _Danube_ a little above _Belgrade_. It comprehended
+the countries now called _Transylvania_, _Moldavia_, and _Wallachia_, and
+the eastern part of the upper _Hungary_. Its antient inhabitants were
+called _Getae_ by the _Greeks_, _Daci_ by the _Latins_, and _Goths_ by
+themselves. _Alexander_ the great attacked them, and _Trajan_ conquered
+them, and reduced their country into a Province of the _Roman_ Empire: and
+thereby the propagation of the Gospel among them was much promoted. They
+were composed of several _Gothic_ nations, called _Ostrogoths_,
+_Visigoths_, _Vandals_, _Gepides_, _Lombards_, _Burgundians_, _Alans_, &c.
+who all agreed in their manners, and spake the same language, as
+_Procopius_ represents. While they lived under the _Romans_, the _Goths_ or
+_Ostrogoths_ were seated in the eastern parts of _Dacia_, the _Vandals_ in
+the western part upon the river _Teys_, where the rivers _Maresh_ and
+_Keresh_ run into it. The _Visigoths_ were between them. The _Gepides_,
+according to _Jornandes_, were upon the _Vistula_. The _Burgundians_, a
+_Vandalic_ nation, were between the _Vistula_ and the southern fountain of
+the _Boristhenes_, at some distance from the mountain _Crapac_ northwards,
+where _Ptolemy_ places them, by the names of _Phrugundiones_ and
+_Burgiones_.[1] The _Alans_, another _Gothic_ nation, were between the
+northern fountain of the _Boristhenes_ and the mouth of the river _Tanais_,
+where _Ptolemy_ placeth the mountain _Alanus_, and western side of the
+_Palus Maeotis_.
+
+These nations continued under the dominion of the _Romans_ till the second
+year of the Emperor _Philip_, and then for want of their military pay began
+to revolt; the _Ostrogoths_ setting up a kingdom, which, under their Kings
+_Ostrogotha_, _Cniva_, _Araric_, _Geperic_, and _Hermanaric_, increased
+till the year of Christ 376; and then by an incursion of the _Huns_ from
+beyond the _Tanais_, and the death of _Hermanaric_, brake into several
+smaller kingdoms. _Hunnimund_, the son of _Hermanaric_, became King over
+the _Ostrogoths_; _Fridigern_ over the _Visigoths_; _Winithar_, or
+_Vinithar_, over a part of the _Goths_ called _Gruthungi_ by _Ammian_,
+_Gothunni_ by _Claudian_, and _Sarmatae_ and _Scythians_ by others:
+_Athanaric_ reign'd over another part of the _Goths_ in _Dacia_, called
+_Thervingi_; _Box_ over the _Antes_ in _Sarmatia_; and the _Gepides_ had
+also their King. The _Vandals_ fled over the _Danube_ from _Geberic_ in the
+latter end of the reign of _Constantine_ the great, and had seats granted
+them in _Pannonia_ by that Emperor, where they lived quietly forty years,
+viz. till the year 377, when several _Gothic_ nations flying from the
+_Hunns_ came over the _Danube_, and had seats granted them in _Maesia_ and
+_Thrace_ by the _Greek_ Emperor _Valens_. But the next year they revolted,
+called in some _Goths_, _Alans_ and _Hunns_, from beyond the _Danube_, and
+routed the _Roman_ army, slew the Emperor _Valens_, and spread themselves
+into _Greece_ and _Pannonia_ as far as the _Alps_. In the years 379 and 380
+they were checkt by the arms of the Emperors _Gratian_ and _Theodosius_,
+and made a submissive peace; the _Visigoths_ and _Thervingi_ returned to
+their seats in _Maesia_ and _Thrace_, the _Hunns_ retired over the _Danube_,
+and the _Alans_ and _Gruthingi_ obtained seats in _Pannonia_.
+
+About the year 373, or 374, the _Burgundians_ rose from their seats upon
+the _Vistula_, with an army of eighty thousand men to invade _Gallia_; and
+being opposed, seated themselves upon the northern side of the _Rhine_ over
+against _Mentz_. In the year 358, a body of the _Salian Franks_, with their
+King, coming from the river _Sala_, were received into the Empire by the
+Emperor _Julian_, and seated in _Gallia_ between _Brabant_ and the _Rhine_:
+and their King _Mellobaudes_ was made _Comes domesticorum_, by the Emperor
+_Gratian_. _Richomer_, another noble _Salian Frank_, was made _Comes
+domesticorum_, and _Magister utriusque Militiae_, by _Theodosius_; and A.C.
+384, was Consul with _Clearchus_. He was a great favourite of _Theodosius_,
+and accompanied him in his wars against _Eugenius_, but died in the
+expedition, and left a son called _Theudomir_, who afterwards became King
+of the _Salian Franks_ in _Brabant_. In the time of this war some _Franks_
+from beyond the _Rhine_ invaded _Gallia_ under the conduct of _Genobald_,
+_Marcomir_ and _Suno_, but were repulsed by _Stilico_; and _Marcomir_ being
+slain, was succeeded in _Germany_ by his son _Pharamond_.
+
+While these nations remained quiet within the Empire, subject to the
+_Romans_, many others continued so beyond the _Danube_ till the death of
+the Emperor _Theodosius_, and then rose up in arms. For _Paulus Diaconus_
+in his _Historia Miscell._ _lib._ xiv. speaking of the times next after the
+death of this Emperor, tells us: _Eodem tempore erant Gothi & aliae gentes
+maximae trans Danubium habitantes: ex quibus rationabiliores quatuor sunt,
+Gothi scilicet, Huisogothi, Gepides & Vandali; & nomen tantum & nihil aliud
+mutantes. Isti sub Arcadia & Honorio Danubium transeuntes, locati sunt in
+terra Romanorum: & Gepides quidem, ex quibus postea divisi sunt Longobardi
+& Avares, villas, quae sunt circa Singidonum & Sirmium, habitavere:_ and
+_Procopius_ in the beginning of his _Historia Vandalica_ writes to the same
+purpose. Hitherto the _Western Empire_ continued entire, but now brake into
+many kingdoms.
+
+_Theodosius_ died A.C. 395; and then the _Visigoths_, under the conduct of
+_Alaric_ the successor of _Fridigern_, rose from their seats in _Thrace_
+and wasted _Macedon_, _Thessaly_, _Achaia_, _Peloponnesus_, and _Epirus_,
+with fire and sword for five years together; when turning westward, they
+invaded _Dalmatia_, _Illyricum_ and _Pannonia_; and from thence went into
+_Italy_ A.C. 402; and the next year were so beaten at _Pollentia_ and
+_Verona_, by _Stilico_ the commander of the forces of the _Western Empire_,
+that _Claudian_ calls the remainder of the forces of _Alaric_, _tanta ex
+gente reliquias breves_, and _Prudentius_, _Gentem deletam_. Thereupon
+_Alaric_ made peace with the Emperor, being so far humbled, that _Orosius_
+saith, he did, _pro pace optima & quibuscunque sedibus suppliciter &
+simpliciter orare_. This peace was ratified by mutual hostages; _AEtius_ was
+sent hostage to _Alaric_; and _Alaric_ continued a free Prince in the seats
+now granted to him.
+
+When _Alaric_ took up arms, the nations beyond the _Danube_ began to be in
+motion; and the next winter, between A.C. 395 and 396, a great body of
+_Hunns_, _Alans_, _Ostrogoths_, _Gepides_, and other northern nations, came
+over the frozen _Danube_, being invited by _Rufinus_: when their brethren,
+who had obtained seats within the Empire, took up arms also. _Jerome_ calls
+this great multitude, _Hunns_, _Alans_, _Vandals_, _Goths_, _Sarmatians_,
+_Quades_, and _Marcomans_; and saith, that they invaded all places between
+_Constantinople_ and the _Julian Alps_, wasting _Scythia_, _Thrace_,
+_Macedon_, _Dardania_, _Dacia_, _Thessaly_, _Achaia_, _Epirus_, _Dalmatia_,
+and all _Pannonia_. The _Suevians_ also invaded _Rhaetia_: for when _Alaric_
+ravaged _Pannonia_, the _Romans_ were defending _Rhaetia_; which gave
+_Alaric_ an opportunity of invading _Italy_, as _Claudian_ thus mentions.
+
+  _Non nisi perfidia nacti penetrabile tempus,_
+  _Irrupere Getae, nostras dum Rhaetia vires_
+  _Occupat, atque alio desudant Marte cohortes_.
+
+And when _Alaric_ went from those parts into _Italy_, some other barbarous
+nations invaded _Noricum_ and _Vindelicia_, as the same Poet _Claudian_
+thus writes:
+
+      ----_Jam foedera gentes_
+  _Exuerant, Latiique audita clade feroces_
+  _Vendelicos saltus & Norica rura tenebant._
+
+This was in the years 402 and 403. And among these nations I reckon the
+_Suevians_, _Quades_, and _Marcomans_; for they were all in arms at this
+time. The _Quades_ and _Marcomans_ were _Suevian_ nations; and they and the
+_Suevians_ came originally from _Bohemia_, and the river _Suevus_ or
+_Sprake_ in _Lusatia_; and were now united under one common King called
+_Ermeric_, who soon after led them into _Gallia_. The _Vandals_ and _Alans_
+might also about this time extend themselves into _Noricum_. _Uldin_ also
+with a great body of _Hunns_ passed the _Danube_ about the time of
+_Chrysostom_'s banishment, that is, A.C. 404, and wasted _Thrace_ and
+_Maesia_. _Radagaisus_, King of the _Gruthunni_ and succesor of _Winithar_,
+inviting over more barbarians from beyond the _Danube_, invaded _Italy_
+with an army of above two hundred thousand _Goths_; and within a year or
+two, A.C. 405 or 406., was overcome by _Stilico_, and perished with his
+army. In this war _Stilico_ was assisted with a great body of _Hunns_ and
+_Ostrogoths_, under the conduct of _Uldin_ and _Sarus_, who were hired by
+the Emperor _Honorius_. In all this confusion it was necessary for the
+_Lombards_ in _Pannonia_ to arm themselves in their own defence, and assert
+their liberty, the _Romans_ being no longer able to protect them.
+
+And now _Stilico_ purposing to make himself Emperor, procured a military
+prefecture for _Alaric_, and sent him into the _East_ in the service of
+_Honorius_ the _Western_ Emperor, committing some _Roman_ troops to his
+conduct to strengthen his army of _Goths_, and promising to follow soon
+after with his own army. His pretence was to recover some regions of
+_Illyricum_, which the _Eastern_ Emperor was accused to detain injuriously
+from the _Western_; but his secret design was to make himself Emperor, by
+the assistance of the _Vandals_ and their allies: for he himself was a
+_Vandal_. For facilitating this design, he invited a great body of the
+barbarous nations to invade the _Western Empire_, while he and _Alaric_
+invaded the _Eastern_. And these nations under their several Kings, the
+_Vandals_ under _Godegisilus_, the _Alans_ in two bodies, the one under
+_Goar_, the other under _Resplendial_, and the _Suevians_, _Quades_, and
+_Marcomans_, under _Ermeric_, marched thro' _Rhaetia_ to the side of the
+_Rhine_, leaving their seats in _Pannonia_ to the _Hunns_ and _Ostrogoths_,
+and joined the _Burgundians_ under _Gundicar_, and ruffled the _Franks_ in
+their further march. On the last of _December_ A.C. 406, they passed the
+_Rhine_ at _Ments_, and spread themselves into _Germania prima_ and the
+adjacent regions; and amongst other actions the _Vandals_ took _Triers_.
+Then they advanced into _Belgium_, and began to waste that country.
+Whereupon the _Salian Franks_ in _Brabant_ took up arms, and under the
+conduct of _Theudomir_, the son of _Ricimer_, or _Richomer_,
+abovementioned, made so stout a resistance, that they slew almost twenty
+thousand of the _Vandals_, with their King _Godegesilus_, in battel; the
+rest escaping only by a party of _Resplendial_'s _Alans_ which came timely
+to their assistance.
+
+Then the _British_ soldiers, alarm'd by the rumour of these things,
+revolted, and set up Tyrants there; first _Marcus_, whom they slew
+presently; then _Gratian_, whom they slew within four months; and lastly
+_Constantine_, under whom they invaded _Gallia_ A.C. 408, being favoured by
+_Goar_ and _Gundicar_. And _Constantine_ having possessed a good part of
+_Gallia_, created his son _Constans Caesar_, and sent him into _Spain_ to
+order his affairs there, A.C. 409.
+
+In the mean time _Resplendial_, seeing the aforesaid disaster of the
+_Vandals_, and that _Goar_ was gone over to the _Romans_, led his army from
+the _Rhine_; and, together with the _Suevians_ and residue of the
+_Vandals_, went towards _Spain_; the _Franks_ in the mean time prosecuting
+their victory so far as to retake _Triers_, which after they had plundered
+they left to the _Romans_. The _Barbarians_ were at first stopt by the
+_Pyrenean_ mountains, which made them spread themselves into _Aquitain_:
+but the next year they had the passage betrayed by some soldiers of
+_Constans_; and entring _Spain_ 4 Kal. _Octob._ A.C. 409, they conquered
+every one what he could; and at length, A.C. 411, divided their conquests
+by lot; the _Vandals_ obtained _Boetica_, and part of _Gallaecia_; the
+_Suevians_ the rest of _Gallaecia_; and the _Alans_ _Lusitania_ and the
+_Carthaginian_ Province: the Emperor for the sake of peace confirming them
+in those seats by grant A.C. 413.
+
+The _Roman Franks_ abovementioned, having made _Theudomir_ their King,
+began strait after their conquest of the _Vandals_ to invade their
+neighbours also. The first they set upon were the _Gauls_ of _Brabant_[2]:
+but meeting with notable resistance, they desired their alliance: and so
+those _Gauls_ fell off from the _Romans_, and made an intimate league with
+the _Franks_ to be as one people, marrying with one another, and conforming
+to one another's manners, till they became one without distinction. Thus by
+the access of these _Gauls_, and of the foreign _Franks_ also, who
+afterwards came over the _Rhine_, the _Salian_ kingdom soon grew very great
+and powerful.
+
+_Stilico_'s expedition against the _Greek_ Emperor was stopt by the order
+of _Honorius_; and then _Alaric_ came out of _Epirus_ into _Noricum_, and
+requested a sum of money for his service. The Senate were inclined to deny
+him, but by _Stilico_'s mediation granted it. But after some time _Stilico_
+being accused of a traiterous conspiracy with _Alaric_, and slain 10 Kal.
+_Sept._ A.C. 408; _Alaric_ was thereby disappointed of his money, and
+reputed an enemy to the Empire; he then broke strait into _Italy_ with the
+army he brought out of _Epirus_, and sent to his brother _Adolphus_ to
+follow him with what forces he had in _Pannonia_, which were not great, but
+yet not to be despised. Thereupon _Honorius_ fearing to be shut up in
+_Rome_, retired to _Ravenna_ in _October_ A.C. 408. And from that time
+_Ravenna_ continued to be the seat of the _Western_ Emperors. In those days
+the _Hunns_ also invaded _Pannonia_; and seizing the deserted seats of the
+_Vandals_, _Alans_, and _Goths_, founded a new kingdom there. _Alaric_
+advancing to _Rome_ besieged it, and 9 Kal. _Sept._ A.C. 410 took it: and
+afterwards attempting to pass into _Africa_, was shipwrackt. After which
+_Honorius_ made peace with him, and got up an army to send against the
+Tyrant _Constantine_.
+
+At the same time _Gerontius_, one of _Constantine_'s captains, revolted
+from him, and set up _Maximus_ Emperor in _Spain_. Whereupon _Constantine_
+sent _Edobec_, another of his captains, to draw to his assistance, the
+_Barbarians_ under _Goar_ and _Gundicar_ in _Gallia_, and supplies of
+_Franks_ and _Alemans_ from beyond the _Rhine_; and committed the custody
+of _Vienne_ in _Gallia Narbonensis_ to his son _Constans_. _Gerontius_
+advancing, first slew _Constans_ at _Vienne_, and then began to besiege
+_Constantine_ at _Arles_. But _Honorius_ at the same time sending
+_Constantius_ with an army on the same errand, _Gerontius_ fled, and
+_Constantius_ continued the siege, strengthned by the access of the
+greatest part of the soldiers of _Gerontius_. After four months siege,
+_Edobec_ having procured succours, the _Barbarian_ Kings at _Ments_, _Goar_
+and _Gundicar_, constitute _Jovinus_ Emperor, and together with him set
+forward to relieve _Arles_. At their approach _Constantius_ retired. They
+pursued, and he beat them by surprize; but not prosecuting his victory, the
+_Barbarians_ soon recovered themselves; yet not so as to hinder the fall of
+the tyrants _Constantine_, _Jovinus_ and _Maximus_. _Britain_ could not be
+recovered to the Empire, but remained ever after a distinct kingdom.
+
+The next year, A.C. 412, the _Visigoths_ being beaten in _Italy_, had
+_Aquitain_ granted them to retire into: and they invaded it with much
+violence, causing the _Alans_ and _Burgundians_ to retreat, who were then
+depopulating of it. At the same time the _Burgundians_ were brought to
+peace; and the Emperor granted them for inheritance a region upon the
+_Rhine_ which they had invaded: and the same, I presume, he did with the
+_Alans_. But the _Franks_ not long after retaking and burning _Triers_,
+_Castinus_, A.C. 415, was sent against them with an army, who routed them
+and slew _Theudomir_ their King This was the second taking of _Triers_ by
+the _Franks_. It was therefore taken four times, once by the _Vandals_ and
+thrice by the _Franks_. _Theudomir_ was succeeded by _Pharamond_, the
+Prince or King of the _Salian Franks_ in _Germany_. From thence he brought
+new forces, reigned over the whole, and had seats granted to his people
+within the Empire near the _Rhine_.
+
+And now the _Barbarians_ were all quieted, and settled in several kingdoms
+within the Empire, not only by conquest, but also by the grants of the
+Emperor _Honorius_. For _Rutilius_ in his _Itinerary_, written in Autumn,
+_Anno Urbis_ 1169, that is, according to _Varro_'s computation then in use,
+A.C. 416, thus laments the wasted fields:
+
+  _Illa quidem longis nimium deformia bellis_;
+
+And then adds,
+
+  _Jam tempus laceris post longa incendia fundis_
+    _Vel pastorales aedificare casas._
+
+And a little after,
+
+  _AEternum tibi Rhenus aret._
+
+And _Orosius_ in the end of his history, which was finished A.C. 417,
+represents now a general pacification of the barbarous nations by the words
+_comprimere_, _coangustare_, _addicere gentes immanissimas_; terming them
+_imperio addictas_, because they had obtained seats in the Empire by league
+and compact; and _coangustatas_, because they did no longer invade all
+regions at pleasure, but by the same compact remained quiet in the seats
+then granted them. And these are the kingdoms, of which the feet of the
+Image were henceforward composed, and which are represented by iron and
+clay intermixed, which did not stick one to another, and were of different
+strength.
+
+Notes to Chap. V.
+
+[1] Procop. l. 1. de Bello Vandalico.
+
+[2] Galli Arborici: _whence the region was named _Arboricbant_, and by
+contraction _Brabant__.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. VI.
+
+_Of the ten Kingdoms represented by the ten horns of the fourth Beast._
+
+Now by the wars above described the _Western_ Empire of the _Romans_, about
+the time that _Rome_ was besieged and taken by the _Goths_, became broken
+into the following ten kingdoms.
+
+  1. The kingdom of the _Vandals_ and _Alans_ in _Spain_ and _Africa_.
+  2. The kingdom of the _Suevians_ in _Spain_.
+  3. The kingdom of the _Visigoths_.
+  4. The kingdom of the _Alans_ in _Gallia_.
+  5. The kingdom of the _Burgundians_.
+  6. The kingdom of the _Franks_.
+  7. The kingdom of the _Britains_.
+  8. The kingdom of the _Hunns_.
+  9. The kingdom of the _Lombards_.
+  10. The kingdom of _Ravenna_.
+
+Seven of these kingdoms are thus mentioned by _Sigonius_. 1_Honorio
+regnante_, _in Pannoniam_ 2_Hunni_, _in Hispaniam_ 3_Vandali_, 4_Alani_,
+5_Suevi_ & 6_Gothi_, _in Galliam_ 4_Alani_ 7_Burgundiones_ & 6_Gothi_,
+_certis sedibus permissis, accepti_. Add the _Franks_, _Britains_, and
+_Lombards_, and you have the ten: for these arose about the same time with
+the seven. But let us view them severally.
+
+1. The Kings of the _Vandals_ were, A.C. 407 _Godegesilus_, 407 _Gunderic_,
+426 _Geiseric_, 477 _Hunneric_, 484 _Gundemund_, 496 _Thrasamund_, 513
+_Geiseric_, 530 _Gelimer_. _Godegesilus_ led them into _Gallia_ A.C. 406,
+_Gunderic_ into _Spain_ A.C. 409, _Geiseric_ into _Africa_ A.C. 427; and
+_Gelimer_ was conquered by _Belisarius_ A.C. 533. Their kingdom lasted in
+_Gallia_, _Spain_ and _Africa_ together 126 years; and in _Africa_ they
+were very potent. The _Alans_ had only two Kings of their own in _Spain_,
+_Resplendial_, and _Ataces_, _Utacus_ or _Othacar_. Under _Resplendial_
+they went into _France_ A.C. 407, and into _Spain_ A.C. 409. _Ataces_ was
+slain with almost all his army by _Vallia_ King of the _Visigoths_ A.C.
+419. And then the remainder of these _Alans_ subjected themselves to
+_Gunderic_ King of the _Vandals_ in _Boetica_, and went afterwards with
+them into _Africa_, as I learn out of _Procopius_. Whence the Kings of the
+_Vandals_ styled themselves Kings of the _Vandals_ and _Alans_; as may be
+seen in the Edict of _Hunneric_ recited by _Victor_ in his _Vandalic_
+persecution. In conjunction with the _Chatti_, these _Alans_ gave the name
+of _Cathalaunia_, or _Catth-Alania_, to the Province which is still so
+called. These _Alans_ had also _Gepides_ among them; and therefore the
+_Gepides_ came into _Pannonia_ before the _Alans_ left it. There they
+became subject to the _Hunns_ till the death of _Attila_ A.C. 454, and at
+length were conquered by the _Ostrogoths_.
+
+2. The Kings of the _Suevians_ were, A.C. 407 _Ermeric_, 458 _Rechila_, 448
+_Rechiarius_, 458 _Maldra_, 460 _Frumarius_, 463 _Regismund_. And after
+some other Kings who are unknown, reigned A.C. 558 _Theudomir_, 568 _Miro_,
+582 _Euboricus_, and 583 _Andeca_. This kingdom, after it had been once
+seated in _Spain_, remained always in _Gallaecia_ and _Lusitania_. _Ermeric_
+after the fall of the _Alan_ kingdom, enlarged it into all _Gallaecia_,
+forcing the _Vandals_ to retire into _Boetica_ and the _Carthaginian_
+Province. This kingdom lasted 177 years according to _Isidorus_, and then
+was subdued by _Leovigildus_ King of the _Visigoths_, and made a Province
+of his kingdom A.C. 585.
+
+3. The Kings of the _Visigoths_ were, A.C. 400 _Alaric_, 410 _Athaulphus_,
+415 _Sergeric_ and _Vallia_, 419 _Theoderic_, 451 _Thorismund_, 452
+_Theoderic_, 465 _Euric_, 482 _Alaric_, 505 _Gensalaric_, 526 _Amalaric_,
+531 _Theudius_, 548 _Theudisclus_, &c. I date this kingdom from the time
+that _Alaric_ left _Thrace_ and _Greece_ to invade the _Western Empire_. In
+the end of the reign of _Athaulphus_ the _Goths_ were humbled by the
+_Romans_, and attempted to pass out of _France_ into _Spain_. _Sergeric_
+reigned but a few days. In the beginning of _Vallia_'s reign they assaulted
+the _Romans_ afresh, but were again repulsed, and then made peace on this
+condition, that they should on the behalf of the Empire invade the
+_Barbarian_ kingdoms in _Spain_: and this they did, together with the
+_Romans_, in the years 417 and 418, overthrowing the _Alans_ and part of
+the _Vandals_. Then they received _Aquitain_ of the Emperor by a full
+donation, leaving their conquests in _Spain_ to the Emperor: and thereby
+the seats of the conquered _Alans_ came into the hands of the _Romans_. In
+the year 455, _Theoderic_, assisted by the _Burgundians_, invaded _Spain_,
+which was then almost all subject to the _Suevians_, and took a part of it
+from them. A.C. 506, the _Goths_ were driven out of _Gallia_ by the
+_Franks_. A.C. 585, they conquered the _Suevian_ kingdom, and became Lords
+of all _Spain_. A.C. 713, the _Saracens_ invaded them, but in time they
+recovered their dominions, and have reigned in _Spain_ ever since.
+
+4. The Kings of the _Alans_ in _Gallia_ were _Goar_, _Sambida_, _Eocharic_,
+_Sangibanus_, _Beurgus_, &c. Under _Goar_ they invaded _Gallia_ A.C. 407,
+and had seats given them near the _Rhine_, A.C. 412. Under _Sambida_, whom
+_Bucher_ makes the successor, if not the son of _Goar_, they had the
+territories of _Valence_ given them by _AEtius_ the Emperor's General, A.C.
+440. Under _Eocharic_ they conquered a region of the rebelling _Galli
+Arborici_, given them also by _AEtius_. This region was from them named
+_Alenconium, quasi Alanorum conventus_. Under _Sangibanus_ they were
+invaded, and their regal city _Orleans_ was besieged by _Attila_ King of
+the _Hunns_, with a vast army of 500000 men. _AEtius_ and the _Barbarian_
+Kings of _Gallia_ came to raise the siege, and beat the _Hunns_ in a very
+memorable battle, A.C. 451, _in campis Catalaunicis_, so called from these
+_Alans_ mixt with the _Chatti_. The region is now called _Campania_ or
+_Champagne_. In that battle were slain on both sides 162000 men. A year or
+two after, _Attila_ returned with an immense army to conquer this kingdom,
+but was again beaten by them and the _Visigoths_ together in a battle of
+three days continuance, with a slaughter almost as great as the former.
+Under _Beurgus_, or _Biorgor_, they infested _Gallia_ round about, till the
+reign of _Maximus_ the Emperor; and then they passed the _Alps_ in winter,
+and came into _Liguria_, but were there beaten, and _Beurgus_ slain, by
+_Ricimer_ commander of the Emperor's forces, A.C. 464. Afterwards they were
+again beaten, by the joint force of _Odoacer_ King of _Italy_ and
+_Childeric_ King of the _Franks_, about the year 480, and again by
+_Theudobert_ King of the _Austrian Franks_ about the year 511.
+
+5. The Kings of the _Burgundians_ were, A.C. 407 _Gundicar_, 436 _Gundioc_,
+467 _Bilimer_, 473 _Gundobaldus_ with his brothers, 510 _Sigismund_, 517
+_Godomarus_. Under _Gundicar_ they invaded _Gallia_ A.C. 407, and had seats
+given them by the Emperor near the _Rhine_ in _Gallia Belgica_, A.C. 412.
+They had _Saxons_ among them, and were now so potent, that _Orosius_ A.C.
+417 wrote of them: '_Burgundionum esse praevalidam manum, Galliae hodieque
+testes sunt, in quibus praesumpta possessione consistunt_. About the year
+435 they received great overthrows by _AEtius_, and soon after by the
+_Hunns_: but five years after had _Savoy_ granted them to be shared with
+the inhabitants; and from that time became again a potent kingdom, being
+bounded by the river _Rhodanus_, but afterwards extending much further into
+the heart of _Gallia_. _Gundobald_ conquered the regions about the rivers
+_Araris_ and _Rhodanus_, with the territories of _Marseilles_; and invading
+_Italy_ in the time of the Emperor _Glycerius_, conquered all his brethren.
+_Godomarus_ made _Orleans_ his royal seat: whence the kingdom was called
+_Regnum Aurelianorum_. He was conquered by _Clotharius_ and _Childebert_,
+Kings of the _Franks_, A.C. 526. From thenceforward this kingdom was
+sometimes united to the kingdom of the _Franks_, and sometimes divided from
+it, till the reign of _Charles_ the great, who made his son _Carolottus_
+King of _Burgundy_. From that time, for about 300 years together, it
+enjoyed its proper Kings; and was then broken into the Dukedom of
+_Burgundy_, County of _Burgundy_, and County of _Savoy_; and afterwards
+those were broken into other lesser Counties.
+
+6. The Kings of the _Franks_ were, A.C. 407 _Theudomir_, 417 _Pharamond_,
+428 _Clodio_, 448 _Merovaeus_, 456 _Childeric_, 482 _Clodovaeus_, &c.
+_Windeline_ and _Bucher_, two of the most diligent searchers into the
+originals of this kingdom, make it begin the same year with the _Barbarian_
+invasions of _Gallia_, that is, A.C. 407. Of the first Kings there is in
+_Labbe's Bibliotheca M.S._ this record.
+
+_Historica quaedam excerpta ex veteri stemmate genealogico Regum Franciae_.
+
+_Genobaldus, Marcomerus, Suno, Theodemeris. Isti duces vel reguli
+extiterunt a principio gentis Francorum diversis temporibus. Sed incertum
+relinquunt historici quali sibi procreations linea successerunt_.
+
+_Pharamundus: sub hoc rege suo primo Franci legibus se subdunt, quas
+primores eorum tulerunt Wisogastus, Atrogastus, Salegastus_.
+
+_Chlochilo. Iste, transito Rheno, Romanos in Carbonaria sylva devicit,
+Camaracum cepit & obtinuit, annis 20 regnavit. Sub hoc rege Franci usque
+Summam progressi sunt_.
+
+_Merovechus. Sub hoc rege Franci Trevirim destruunt, Metim succendunt,
+usque Aurelianum perveniunt_.
+
+Now for _Genobaldus_, _Marcomer_ and _Suno_, they were captains of the
+_Transrhenane Franks_ in the reign of _Theodosius_, and concern us not. We
+are to begin with _Theudomir_ the first King of the rebelling _Salii_,
+called _Didio_ by _Ivo Carnotensis_, and _Thiedo_ and _Theudemerus_ by
+_Rhenanus_. His face is extant in a coin of gold found with this
+inscription, THEUDEMIR REX, published by _Petavius_, and still or lately
+extant, as _Windeline_ testifies: which shews that he was a King, and that
+in _Gallia_; seeing that rude _Germany_ understood not then the coining of
+money, nor used either _Latin_ words or letters. He was the son of
+_Ricimer_, or _Richomer_, the favourite of the Emperor _Theodosius_; and so
+being a _Roman Frank_, and of the _Salian_ royal blood, they therefore upon
+the rebellion made him King. The whole time of his reign you have stated in
+_Excerptis Gregorii Turonensis e Fredigario_, _cap._ 5, 6, 7, 8. where the
+making him King, the tyranny of _Jovinus_, the slaughter of the associates
+of _Jovinus_, the second taking of _Triers_ by the _Franks_, and their war
+with _Castinus_, in which this King was slain, are as a series of
+successive things thus set down in order. _Extinctis Ducibus in Francis,
+denuo Reges creantur ex eadem stirpe qua prius fuerant. Eodem tempore
+Jovinus ornatus regios assumpsit. Constantinus fugam versus Italiam
+dirigit; missis a Jovino Principe percussoribus super Mentio flumine,
+capite truncatur. Multi nobilium jussu Jovini apud Avernis capti, & a
+ducibus Honorii crudeliter interempti sunt. Trevirorum civitas, factione
+unius ex senatoribus nomine Lucii, a Francis capta & incensa est.--Castinus
+Domesticorum Comes expeditionem accipit contra Francos_, &c. Then returning
+to speak of _Theudomir_, he adds: _Franci electum a se regem, sicut prius
+fuerat, crinitum inquirentes diligenter ex genere Priami, Frigi &
+Francionis, super se crearunt nomine Theudemerum filium Richemeris, qui in
+hoc praelio quod supra memini, a Romanis interfectus est_; that is, in the
+battle with _Castinus_'s army. Of his death _Gregory Turonensis_ makes this
+further mention: _In consularibus legimus Theodemerem regem Francorum
+filium Ricimeris quondam, & Ascilam matrem ejus, gladio interfectos_.
+
+Upon this victory of the _Romans_, the _Franks_ and rebelling _Gauls_, who
+in the time of _Theudomir_ were at war with one another, united to
+strengthen themselves, as _Ordericus Vitalis_[1] thus mentions. _Cum Galli
+prius contra Romanos rebellassent, Franci iis sociati sunt, & pariter
+juncti, Ferramundum Sunonis ducis filium, sibi regem praefecerunt_.
+_Prosper_ sets down the time; _Anno 25 Honorii, Pharamundus regnat in
+Francia_. This, _Bucher_ well observes, refers to the end of the year 416,
+or the beginning of the next year, dating the years of _Honorius_ from the
+death of _Valentinian_; and argues well, that at this time _Pharamond_ was
+not only King by the constitution of the _Franks_, but crowned also by the
+consent of _Honorius_, and had a part of _Gallia_ assigned him by covenant.
+And this might be the cause that _Roman_ writers reckoned him the first
+King: which some not understanding, have reputed him the founder of this
+kingdom by an army of the _Transrhenane Franks_. He might come with such an
+army, but he succeeded _Theudomir_ by right of blood and consent of the
+people. For the above cited passage of _Fredigarius_, _Extinctis Ducibus,
+in Francis denuo Reges creantur ex eadem stirpe qua prius fuerant_, implies
+that the kingdom continued to this new elected family during the reign of
+more Kings than one. If you date the years of _Honorius_ from the death of
+his father, the reign of _Pharamond_ might begin two years later than is
+assigned by _Bucher_. The _Salique_ laws made in his reign, which are yet
+extant, shew by their name that it was the kingdom of the _Salii_ over
+which he reigned; and, by the pecuniary mulcts in them, that the place
+where he reigned abounded much with money, and consequently was within the
+Empire; rude _Germany_ knowing not the use of money, till they mixed with
+the _Romans_. In the Preface also to the _Salique_ laws, written and
+prefixed to them soon after the conversion of the _Franks_ to the Christian
+religion, that is, in the end of the reign of _Merovaeus_, or soon after,
+the original of this kingdom is thus described: _Haec enim gens, quae fortis
+dum esset & robore valida, Romanorum jugum durissimum de suis cervicibus
+excussit pugnando_, &c. This kingdom therefore was erected, not by invasion
+but by rebellion, as was described above. _Prosper_ in registering their
+Kings in order, tells us: _Pharamundus regnat in Francia; Clodio regnat in
+Francia; Merovaeus regnat in Francia_: and who can imagine but that in all
+these places he meant one and the same _Francia_? And yet 'tis certain that
+the _Francia_ of _Merovaeus_ was in _Gallia_.
+
+Yet the father of _Pharamond_, being king of a body of _Franks_ in
+_Germany_ in the reign of the Emperor _Theodosius_, as above, _Pharamond_
+might reign over the same _Franks_ in _Germany_ before he succeeded
+_Theudomir_ in the kingdom of the _Salians_ within the Empire, and even
+before _Theudomir_ began his reign; suppose in the first year of
+_Honorius_, or when those _Franks_ being repulsed by _Stilico_, lost their
+Kings _Marcomir_ and _Suno_, one of which was the father of _Pharamond_:
+and the _Roman Franks_, after the death of _Theudomir_, might invite
+_Pharamond_ with his people from beyond the _Rhine_. But we are not to
+regard the reign of _Pharamond_ in _Germany_: we are to date this kingdom
+from its rise within the Empire, and to look upon it as strengthened by the
+access of other _Franks_ coming from beyond the _Rhine_, whether in the
+reign of this King or in that of his successor _Clodio_. For in the last
+year of _Pharamond_'s reign, _AEtius_ took from him a part of his possession
+in _Gallia_: but his successor _Clodio_, whom _Fredigarius_ represents as
+the son of _Theudomir_, and some call _Clogio_, _Cloio_, and _Claudius_,
+inviting from beyond the _Rhine_ a great body of _Franks_, recovered all,
+and carried on their conquests as far as the river _Soame_. Then those
+_Franks_ dividing conquests with him, erected certain new kingdoms at
+_Cologn_ and _Cambray_, and some other cities: all which were afterwards
+conquered by _Clodovaeus_, who also drove the _Goths_ out of _Gallia_, and
+fix'd his seat at _Paris_, where it has continued ever since. And this was
+the original of the present kingdom of _France_.
+
+7. The Kings of _Britain_ were, A.C. 407 or 408, _Marcus_, _Gratian_, and
+_Constantine_ successively; A.C. 425 _Vortigern_, 466 _Aurelius Ambrosius_,
+498 _Uther Pendraco_, 508 _Arthur_, 542 _Constantinus_, 545 _Aurelius
+Cunanus_, 578 _Vortiporeus_, 581 _Malgo_, 586 _Careticus_, 613 _Cadwan_,
+635 _Cadwalin_, 676 _Cadwallader_. The three first were _Roman_ Tyrants,
+who revolted from the Empire. _Orosius_, _Prosper_ and _Zosimus_ connect
+their revolt with the irruptions of the _Barbarians_ into _Gallia_, as
+consequent thereunto. _Prosper_, with whom _Zosimus_ agrees, puts it in the
+year which began the day after that irruption. The just time I thus
+collect: _Marcus_ reigned not many days, _Gratian_ four months, and
+_Constantine_ three years. He was slain the year after the taking of
+_Rome_, that is A.C. 411, 14 Kal. _Octob._ Whence the revolt was in Spring
+A.C. 408. _Sozomen_ joins _Constantine_'s expedition into _Gallia_ with
+_Arcadius_'s death, or the times a little after; and _Arcadius_ died A.C.
+408 _May_ the 1st. Now tho the reign of these Tyrants was but short, yet
+they gave a beginning to the kingdom of _Britain_, and so may be reckoned
+the three first Kings, especially since the posterity of _Constantine_,
+viz. his sons _Aurelius Ambrosius_, and _Uther Pendraco_, and his grandson
+_Arthur_, reigned afterwards. For from the time of the revolt of these
+Tyrants _Britain_ continued a distict kingdom absolved from subjection to
+the Empire, the Emperor not being able to spare soldiers to be sent thither
+to receive and keep the Island, and therefore neglecting it; as we learn by
+unquestionable records. For _Prosper_ tells us; _A.C._ 410, _Variane Cos.
+Hac tempestate prae valetudine Romanorum, vires funditus attenuatae
+Britanniae_. And _Sigebert_, conjoining this with the siege of _Rome_,
+saith: _Britannorum vires attenuatae, & substrahunt se a Romanorum
+dominatione_. And _Zosimus_ _lib._ 6. _The _Transrhenane Barbarians_
+invading all places, reduced the inhabitants of the island of _Britain_,
+and also certain _Celtic_ nations to that pass, that they fell off from the
+_Roman_ Empire; and being no longer obedient to the _Roman_ laws_, [Greek:
+kat' heauton biateuein], _they lived in separate bodies after their own
+pleasure. The _Britons_ therefore taking up arms, and hazarding themselves
+for their own safety, freed their cities from the imminent _Barbarians_. In
+like manner all _Brabant_ and some other Provinces of the _Gauls_ imitating
+the _Britons_, freed themselves also, ejecting the _Roman_ Presidents, and
+forming themselves into a sort of commonwealth according to their own
+pleasure. This rebellion of _Britain_ and the _Celtic_ nations happened
+when _Constantine_ usurped the kingdom_. So also _Procopius_, _lib._ 1.
+_Vandal._ speaking of the same _Constantine_, saith: Constantine _being
+overcome in battle, was slain with his children:_ [Greek: Bretannian men
+toi Romaioi anasosasthai ouketi echon; all' ousa hypo tyrannous ap' autou
+emene.] _Yet the _Romans_ could not recover _Britain_ any more, but from
+that time it remained under Tyrants_. And _Beda_, l. 1. _c._ 11. _Fracta
+est Roma a Gothis anno 1164 suae conditionis; ex quo tempore Romani in
+Britannia regnare cessaverunt_. And _Ethelwaldus_: _A tempore Romae a Gothis
+expugnatae, cessavit imperium Romanorum a Britannia insula, & ab aliis; quas
+sub jugo servitutis tenebant, multis terris_. And _Theodoret_, _serm._ 9.
+_de curand. Graec. affect_. about the year 424, reckons the _Britons_ among
+the nations which were not then in subjection to the _Roman_ Empire. Thus
+_Sigonius_: _ad annum 411, Imperium Romanorum post excessum Constantini in
+Britannia nullum fuit_.
+
+Between the death of _Constantine_ and the reign of _Vortigern_ was an
+interregnum of about 14 years, in which the _Britons_ had wars with the
+_Picts_ and _Scots_, and twice obtained the assistance of a _Roman_ Legion,
+who drove out the enemy, but told them positively at their departure that
+they would come no more. Of _Vortigern_'s beginning to reign there is this
+record in an old Chronicle in _Nennius_, quoted by _Camden_ and others:
+_Guortigernus tenuit imperium in Britannia, Theodosio & Valentiniano Coss._
+[viz. A.C. 425.] _& in quarto anno regni sui Saxones ad Britanniam
+venerunt, Felice & Tauro Coss._ [viz. A.C. 428.] This coming of the
+_Saxons_, _Sigebert_ refers to the 4th year of _Valentinian_, which falls
+in with the year 428 assigned by this Chronicle: and two years after, the
+_Saxons_ together with the _Picts_ were beaten by the _Britons_. Afterwards
+in the reign of _Martian_ the Emperor, that is, between the years 450 and
+456, the _Saxons_ under _Hengist_ were called in by the _Britons_, but six
+years after revolted from them, made war upon them with various success,
+and by degrees succeeded them. Yet the _Britons_ continued a flourishing
+kingdom till the reign of _Careticus_; and the war between the two nations
+continued till the pontificate of _Sergius_ A.C. 688.[2]
+
+8. The Kings of the _Hunns_ were, A.C. 406 _Octar_ and _Rugila_, 433
+_Bleda_ and _Attila_. _Octar_ and _Rugila_ were the brothers of _Munzuc_
+King of the _Hunns_ in _Gothia_ beyond the _Danube_; and _Bleda_ and
+_Attila_ were his sons, and _Munzuc_ was the son of _Balamir_. The two
+first, as _Jornandes_ tells us, were Kings of the _Hunns_, but not of them
+all; and had the two last for their successors. I date the reign of the
+_Hunns_ in _Pannonia_ from the time that the _Vandals_ and _Alans_
+relinquished _Pannonia_ to them, A.C. 407. _Sigonius_ from the time that
+the _Visigoths_ relinquished _Pannonia_ A. C. 408. _Constat_, saith he,
+_quod Gothis ex Illyrico profectis, Hunni successerunt, atque imprimis
+Pannoniam tenuerunt. Neque enim Honorius viribus ad resistendum in tantis
+difficultatibus destitutus, prorsus eos prohibere potuit, sed meliore
+consilio, animo ad pacem converso, foedus cum eis, datis acceptisque
+obsidibus fecit; ex quibus qui dati sunt, AEtius, qui etiam Alarico tributus
+fuerat, praecipue memoratur_. How _AEtius_ was hostage to the _Goths_ and
+_Hunns_ is related by _Frigeridus_, who when he had mentioned that
+_Theodosius_ Emperor of the _East_ had sent grievous commands to _John_,
+who after the death of _Honorius_ had usurped the crown of the _Western
+Empire_, he subjoins: _Iis permotus Johannes, AEtium id tempus curam palatii
+gerentem cum ingenti auri pondere ad Chunnos transmisit, notos sibi
+obsidiatus sui tempore & familiari amicitia devinctos_--And a little
+after: _AEtius tribus annis Alarici obses, dehinc Chunnorum, postea
+Carpilionis gener ex Comite domesticorum & Joannis curopalatae._ Now
+_Bucher_ shews that _AEtius_ was hostage to _Alaric_ till the year 410, when
+_Alaric_ died, and to the _Hunns_ between the years 411 and 415, and
+son-in-law to _Carpilio_ about the year 417 or 418, and _Curopalates_ to
+_John_ about the end of the year 423. Whence 'tis probable that he became
+hostage to the _Hunns_ about the year 412 or 413, when _Honorius_ made
+leagues with almost all the barbarous nations, and granted them seats: but
+I had rather say with _Sigonius_, that _AEtius_ became hostage to _Alaric_
+A.C. 403. It is further manifest out of _Prosper_, that the _Hunns_ were in
+quiet possession of _Pannonia_ in the year 432. For in the first book of
+_Eusebius_'s Chronicle _Prosper_ writes: _Anno decimo post obitum Honorii,
+cum ad Chunnorum gentem cui tunc Rugila praeerat, post praelium cum Bonifacio
+se AEtius contulisset, impetrato auxilio ad Romanorum solum regreditur._ And
+in the second book: _AEtio & Valerio Coss. AEtius deposita potestate profugus
+ad Hunnos in Pannonia pervenit, quorum amicitia auxilioque usus, pacem
+principum interpellatae potestatis obtinuit._ Hereby it appears that at this
+time _Rugila_, or as _Maximus_ calls him, _Rechilla_, reigned over the
+_Hunns_ in _Pannonia_; and that _Pannonia_ was not now so much as accounted
+within the soil of the Empire, being formerly granted away to the _Hunns_;
+and that these were the very same body of _Hunns_ with which _AEtius_ had,
+in the time of his being an hostage, contracted friendship: by virtue of
+which, as he sollicited them before to the aid of _John_ the Tyrant A.C.
+424, so now he procured their intercession for himself with the Emperor.
+_Octar_ died A.C. 430; for _Socrates_ tells us, that about that time the
+_Burgundians_ having been newly vext by the _Hunns_, upon intelligence of
+_Octar_'s death, seeing them without a leader, set upon them suddenly with
+so much vigour, that 3000 _Burgundians_ slew 10000 _Hunns_. Of _Rugila_'s
+being now King in _Pannonia_ you have heard already. He died A.C. 433, and
+was succeeded by _Bleda_, as _Prosper_ and _Maximus_ inform us. This
+_Bleda_ with his brother _Attila_ were before this time Kings of the
+_Hunns_ beyond the _Danube_, their father _Munzuc_'s kingdom being divided
+between them; and now they united the kingdom _Pannonia_ to their own.
+Whence _Paulus Diaconus_ saith, they did _regnum intra Pannoniam Daciamque
+gerere_. In the year 441, they began to invade the Empire afresh, adding to
+the _Pannonian_ forces new and great armies from _Scythia_. But this war
+was presently composed, and then _Attila_, seeing _Bleda_ inclined to
+peace, slew him, A.C. 444, inherited his dominions, and invaded the Empire
+again. At length, after various great wars with the _Romans_, _Attila_
+perished A.C. 454; and his sons quarrelling about his dominions, gave
+occasion to the _Gepides_, _Ostrogoths_ and other nations who were their
+subjects, to rebel and make war upon them. The same year the _Ostrogoths_
+had seats granted them in _Pannonia_ by the Emperors _Marcian_ and
+_Valentinian_; and with the _Romans_ ejected the _Hunns_ out of _Pannonia_,
+soon after the death of _Attila_, as all historians agree. This ejection
+was in the reign of _Avitus_, as is mentioned in the _Chronicum Boiorum_,
+and in _Sidonius, Carm. 7 in Avitum_, which speaks thus of that Emperor.
+
+  ----_Cujus solum amissas post saecula multa_
+  _Pannonias revocavit iter, jam credere promptum est._
+  _Quid faciet bellis._
+
+The Poet means, that by the coming of _Avitus_ the _Hunns_ yielded more
+easily to the _Goths_. This was written by _Sidonius_ in the beginning of
+the reign of _Avitus_: and his reign began in the end of the year 455, and
+lasted not one full year.
+
+_Jornandes_ tells us: _Duodecimo anno regni Valiae, quando & Hunni post pene
+quinquaginta annos invasa Pannonia, a Romanis & Gothis expulsi sunt._ And
+_Marcellinus_: _Hierio & Ardaburio Coss. Pannoniae, quae per quinquaginta
+annos ab Hunnis retinebantur, a Romanis receptae sunt_: whence it should
+seem that the _Hunns_ invaded and held _Pannonia_ from the year 378 or 379
+to the year 427, and then were driven out of it. But this is a plain
+mistake: for it is certain that the Emperor _Theodosius_ left the Empire
+entire; and we have shewed out of _Prosper_, that the _Hunns_ were in quiet
+possession of _Pannonia_ in the year 432. The _Visigoths_ in those days had
+nothing to do with _Pannonia_, and the _Ostrogoths_ continued subject to
+the _Hunns_ till the death of _Attila_, A.C. 454; and _Valia_ King of the
+_Visigoths_ did not reign twelve years. He began his reign in the end of
+the year 415, reigned three years, and was slain A.C. 419, as _Idacius_,
+_Isidorus_, and the _Spanish_ manuscript Chronicles seen by _Grotius_
+testify. And _Olympiodorus_, who carries his history only to the year 425,
+sets down therein the death of _Valia_ King of the _Visigoths_, and
+conjoins it with that of _Constantius_ which happened A.C. 420. Wherefore
+the _Valia_ of _Jornandes_, who reigned at the least twelve years, is some
+other King. And I suspect that this name hath been put by mistake for
+_Valamir_ King of the _Ostrogoths_: for the action recorded was of the
+_Romans_ and _Ostrogoths_ driving the _Hunns_ out of _Pannonia_ after the
+death of _Attila_; and it is not likely that the historian would refer the
+history of the _Ostrogoths_ to the years of the _Visigothic_ Kings. This
+action happened in the end of the year 455, which I take to be the twelfth
+year of _Valamir_ in _Pannonia_, and which was almost fifty years after the
+year 406, in which the _Hunns_ succeeded the _Vandals_ and _Alans_ in
+_Pannonia_. Upon the ceasing of the line of _Hunnimund_ the son of
+_Hermaneric_, the _Ostrogoths_ lived without Kings of their own nation
+about forty years together, being subject to the _Hunns_. And when _Alaric_
+began to make war upon the _Romans_, which was in the year 444, he made
+_Valamir_, with his brothers _Theodomir_ and _Videmir_ the grandsons of
+_Vinethar_, captains or kings of these _Ostrogoths_ under him. In the
+twelfth year of _Valamir_'s reign dated from thence, the _Hunns_ were
+driven out of _Pannonia_.
+
+Yet the _Hunns_ were not so ejected, but that they had further contests
+with the _Romans_, till the head of _Denfix_ the son of _Attila_, was
+carried to _Constantinople_, A.C. 469, in the Consulship of _Zeno_ and
+_Marcian_, as _Marcellinus_ relates. Nor were they yet totally ejected the
+Empire: for besides their reliques in _Pannonia_, _Sigonius_ tells us, that
+when the Emperors _Marcian_ and _Valentinian_ granted _Pannonia_ to the
+_Goths_, which was in the year 454, they granted part of _Illyricum_ to
+some of the _Hunns_ and _Sarmatians_. And in the year 526, when the
+_Lombards_ removing into _Pannonia_ made war there with the _Gepides_, the
+_Avares_, a part of the _Hunns_, who had taken the name of _Avares_ from
+one of their Kings, assisted the _Lombards_ in that war; and the _Lombards_
+afterwards, when they went into _Italy_, left their seats in _Pannonia_ to
+the _Avares_ in recompence of their friendship. From that time the _Hunns_
+grew again very powerful; their Kings, whom they called _Chagan_, troubling
+the Empire much in the reigns of the Emperors _Mauritius_, _Phocas_, and
+_Heraclius_: and this is the original of the present kingdom of _Hungary_,
+which from these _Avares_ and other _Hunns_ mixed together, took the name
+of _Hun-Avaria_, and by contraction _Hungary_.
+
+9. The _Lombards_, before they came over the _Danube_, were commanded by
+two captains, _Ibor_ and _Ayon_: after whose death they had Kings,
+_Agilmund_, _Lamisso_, _Lechu_, _Hildehoc_, _Gudehoc_, _Classo_, _Tato_,
+_Wacho_, _Walter_, _Audoin_, _Alboin_, _Cleophis_, &c. _Agilmund_ was the
+son of _Ayon_, who became their King, according to _Prosper_, in the
+Consulship of _Honorius_ and _Theodosius_ A.C. 389, reigned thirty three
+years, according to _Paulus Warnefridus_, and was slain in battle by the
+_Bulgarians_. _Prosper_ places his death in the Consulship of _Marinianus_
+and _Asclepiodorus_, A.C. 413. _Lamisso_ routed the _Bulgarians_, and
+reigned three years, and _Lechu_ almost forty. _Gudehoc_ was contemporary
+to _Odoacer_ King of the _Heruli_ in _Italy_, and led his people from
+_Pannonia_ into _Rugia_, a country on the north side of _Noricum_ next
+beyond the _Danube_; from whence _Odoacer_ then carried his people into
+_Italy_. _Tato_ overthrew the kingdom of the _Heruli_ beyond the _Danube_.
+_Wacho_ conquered the _Suevians_, a kingdom then bounded on the east by
+_Bavaria_, on the west by _France_, and on the south by the _Burgundians_.
+_Audoin_ returned into _Pannonia_ A.C. 526, and there overcame the
+_Gepides_. _Alboin_ A.C. 551 overthrew the kingdom of the _Gepides_, and
+slew their King _Chunnimund_: A.C. 563 he assisted the _Greek_ Emperor
+against _Totila_ King of the _Ostrogoths_ in _Italy_; and A.C. 568 led his
+people out of _Pannonia_ into _Lombardy_, where they reigned till the year
+774.
+
+According to _Paulus Diaconus_, the _Lombards_ with many other _Gothic_
+nations came into the Empire from beyond the _Danube_ in the reign of
+_Arcadius_ and _Honorius_, that is, between the years 395 and 408. But they
+might come in a little earlier: for we are told that the _Lombards_, under
+their captains _Ibor_ and _Ayon_, beat the _Vandals_ in battle; and
+_Prosper_ placeth this victory in the Consulship of _Ausonius_ and
+_Olybrius_, that is, A.C. 379. Before this war the _Vandals_ had remained
+quiet forty years in the seats granted them in _Pannonia_ by _Constantine_
+the great. And therefore if these were the same _Vandals_, this war must
+have been in _Pannonia_; and might be occasioned by the coming of the
+_Lombards_ over the _Danube_ into _Pannonia_, a year or two before the
+battle; and so have put an end to that quiet which had lasted forty years.
+After _Gratian_ and _Theodosius_ had quieted the _Barbarians_, they might
+either retire over the _Danube_, or continue quiet under the _Romans_ till
+the death of _Theodosius_; and then either invade the Empire anew, or throw
+off all subjection to it. By their wars, first with the _Vandals_, and then
+with the _Bulgarians_, a _Scythian_ nation so called from the river _Volga_
+whence they came; it appears that even in those days they were a kingdom
+not contemptible.
+
+10. These nine kingdoms being rent away, we are next to consider the
+residue of the _Western Empire_. While this Empire continued entire, it was
+the Beast itself: but the residue thereof is only a part of it. Now if this
+part be considered as a horn, the reign of this horn may be dated from the
+translation of the imperial seat from _Rome_ to _Ravenna_, which was in
+_October_ A.C. 408. For then the Emperor _Honorius_, fearing that _Alaric_
+would besiege him in _Rome_, if he staid there, retired to _Millain_, and
+thence to _Ravenna_: and the ensuing siege and sacking of _Rome_ confirmed
+his residence there, so that he and his successors ever after made it their
+home. Accordingly _Macchiavel_ in his _Florentine_ history writes, that
+_Valentinian_ having left _Rome_, translated the seat of the Empire to
+_Ravenna_.
+
+_Rhaetia_ belonged to the _Western_ Emperors, so long as that Empire stood;
+and then it descended, with _Italy_ and the _Roman_ Senate, to _Odoacer_
+King of the _Heruli_ in _Italy_, and after him to _Theoderic_ King of the
+_Ostrogoths_ and his successors, by the grant of the _Greek_ Emperors. Upon
+the death of _Valentinian_ the second, the _Alemans_ and _Suevians_ invaded
+_Rhaetia_ A.C. 455. But I do not find they erected any settled kingdom
+there: for in the year 457, while they were yet depopulating _Rhaetia_, they
+were attacked and beaten by _Burto_ Master of the horse to the Emperor
+_Majoranus_; and I hear nothing more of their invading _Rhaetia_.
+_Clodovaeus_ King of _France_, in or about the year 496, conquered a kingdom
+of the _Alemans_, and slew their last King _Ermeric_. But this kingdom was
+seated in _Germany_, and only bordered upon _Rhaetia_: for its people fled
+from _Clodovaeus_ into the neighbouring kingdom of the _Ostrogoths_ under
+_Theoderic_, who received them as friends, and wrote a friendly letter to
+_Clodovaeus_ in their behalf: and by this means they became inhabitants of
+_Rhaetia_, as subjects under the dominion of the _Ostrogoths_.
+
+When the _Greek_ Emperor conquered the _Ostrogoths_, he succeeded them in
+the kingdom of _Ravenna_, not only by right of conquest but also by right
+of inheritance, the _Roman_ Senate still going along with this kingdom.
+Therefore we may reckon that this kingdom continued in the Exarchate of
+_Ravenna_ and Senate of _Rome_: for the remainder of the _Western Empire_
+went along with the Senate of _Rome_, by reason of the right which this
+Senate still retained, and at length exerted, of chusing a new _Western_
+Emperor.
+
+I have now enumerated the ten kingdoms, into which the _Western Empire_
+became divided at its first breaking, that is, at the time of _Rome_'s
+being besieged and taken by the _Goths_. Some of these kingdoms at length
+fell, and new ones arose: but whatever was their number afterwards, they
+are still called the _Ten Kings_ from their first number.
+
+Notes to Chap. VI.
+
+[1] Apud Bucherum, l. 14. c. 9. n. 8.
+
+[2] Rolevinc's Antiqua Saxon. l. 1. c. 6.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. VII.
+
+_Of the eleventh horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast._
+
+[1]_Now Daniel, considered the horns, and behold there came up among them
+another horn, before whom there were three of the first horns pluckt up by
+the roots; and behold in this horn were eyes like the eyes of a man, and a
+mouth speaking great things,_--and [2] his _look was more stout than his
+fellows,--and the same horn made war with the saints, and prevailed against
+them_: and one who stood by, and made _Daniel_ know the interpretation of
+these things, told him, that [3] _the ten horns were ten kings that should
+arise, and another should arise after them, and be diverse from the first,
+and he should subdue three kings,_ [4] _and speak great words against the
+most High, and wear out the saints, and think to change times and laws: and
+that they should be given into his hands until a time and times and half a
+time_. Kings are put for kingdoms, as above; and therefore the little horn
+is a little kingdom. It was a horn of the fourth Beast, and rooted up three
+of his first horns; and therefore we are to look for it among the nations
+of the _Latin_ Empire, after the rise of the ten horns. But it was a
+kingdom of a different kind from the other ten kingdoms, having a life or
+soul peculiar to itself, with eyes and a mouth. By its eyes it was a Seer;
+and by its mouth speaking great things and changing times and laws, it was
+a Prophet as well as a King. And such a Seer, a Prophet and a King, is the
+Church of _Rome_.
+
+A Seer, [Greek: Episkopos], is a Bishop in the literal sense of the word;
+and this Church claims the universal Bishoprick.
+
+With his mouth he gives laws to kings and nations as an Oracle; and
+pretends to Infallibility, and that his dictates are binding to the whole
+world; which is to be a Prophet in the highest degree.
+
+In the eighth century, by rooting up and subduing the Exarchate of
+_Ravenna_, the kingdom of the _Lombards_, and the Senate and Dukedom of
+_Rome_, he acquired _Peter_'s Patrimony out of their dominions; and thereby
+rose up as a temporal Prince or King, or horn of the fourth Beast.
+
+In a small book printed at _Paris_ A.C. 1689, entitled, _An historical
+dissertation upon some coins of _Charles_ the great, _Ludovicus Pius_,
+_Lotharius_, and their successors stamped at _Rome__, it is recorded, that
+in the days of Pope _Leo_ X, there was remaining in the _Vatican_, and till
+those days exposed to public view, an inscription in honour of _Pipin_ the
+father of _Charles_ the great, in these words: _Pipinum pium, primum fuisse
+qui amplificandae Ecclesiae Romanae viam aperuerit, Exarchatu Ravennate, &
+plurimis aliis oblatis_; "That _Pipin_ the pious was the first who opened a
+way to the grandeur of the Church of _Rome_, conferring upon her the
+Exarchate of _Ravenna_ and many other oblations." In and before the reign
+of the Emperors _Gratian_ and _Theodosius_, the Bishop of _Rome_ lived
+splendidly; but this was by the oblations of the _Roman_ Ladies, as
+_Ammianus_ describes. After those reigns _Italy_ was invaded by foreign
+nations, and did not get rid of her troubles before the fall of the kingdom
+of _Lombardy_. It was certainly by the victory of the see of _Rome_ over
+the _Greek_ Emperor, the King of _Lombardy_, and the Senate of _Rome_, that
+she acquired _Peter_'s Patrimony, and rose up to her greatness. The
+donation of _Constantine_ the Great is a fiction, and so is the donation of
+the _Alpes Cottiae_ to the Pope by _Aripert_ King of the _Lombards_: for the
+_Alpes Cottiae_ were a part of the Exarchate, and in the days of _Aripert_
+belonged to the _Greek_ Emperor.
+
+The invocation of the dead, and veneration of their images, being gradually
+introduced in the 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th centuries, the _Greek_ Emperor
+_Philippicus_ declared against the latter, A.C. 711 or 712. And [5] the
+Emperor _Leo Isaurus_, to put a stop to it, called a meeting of Counsellors
+and Bishops in his Palace, A.C. 726; and by their advice put out an Edict
+against that worship, and wrote to Pope _Gregory_ II. that a general
+Council might be called. But the Pope thereupon called a Council at _Rome_,
+confirmed the worship of Images, excommunicated the _Greek_ Emperor,
+absolved the people from their allegiance, and forbad them to pay tribute,
+or otherwise be obedient to him. Then the people of _Rome_, _Campania_,
+_Ravenna_ and _Pentapolis_, with the cities under them, revolted and laid
+violent hands upon their magistrates, killing the Exarch _Paul_ at
+_Ravenna_, and laying aside _Peter_ Duke of _Rome_ who was become blind:
+and when _Exhileratus_ Duke of _Campania_ incited the people against the
+Pope, the _Romans_ invaded _Campania_, and slew him with his son _Hadrian_.
+Then a new Exarch, _Eutychius_, coming to _Naples_, sent some secretly to
+take away the lives of the Pope and the Nobles of _Rome_: but the plot
+being discovered, the _Romans_ revolted absolutely from the _Greek_
+Emperor, and took an oath to preserve the life of the Pope, to defend his
+state, and be obedient to his authority in all things. Thus _Rome_ with its
+Duchy, including part of _Tuscany_ and part of _Campania_, revolted in the
+year 726, and became a free state under the government of the Senate of
+this city. The authority of the Senate in civil affairs was henceforward
+absolute, the authority of the Pope extending hitherto no farther than to
+the affairs of the Church only.
+
+At that time [6] the _Lombards_ also being zealous for the worship of
+images, and pretending to favour the cause of the Pope, invaded the cities
+of the Exarchate: and at length, viz. A.C. 752, took _Ravenna_, and put an
+end to the Exarchate. And this was the first of the three kingdoms which
+fell before the little horn.
+
+In the year 751 [7] Pope _Zechary_ deposed _Childeric_, a slothful and
+useless King of _France_, and the last of the race of _Merovaeus_; and
+absolving his subjects from their oath of allegiance, gave the kingdom to
+_Pipin_ the major of the Palace; and thereby made a new and potent friend.
+His successor [8] Pope _Stephen_ III, knowing better how to deal with the
+_Greek_ Emperor than with the _Lombards_, went the next year to the King of
+the _Lombards_, to persuade him to return the Exarchate to the Emperor. But
+this not succeeding, he went into _France_, and persuaded _Pipin_ to take
+the Exarchate and _Pentapolis_ from the _Lombards_, and give it to St.
+_Peter_. Accordingly _Pipin_ A.C. 754 came with an army into _Italy_, and
+made _Aistulphus_ King of the _Lombards_ promise the surrender: but the
+next year _Aistulphus_, on the contrary, to revenge himself on the Pope,
+besieged the city of _Rome_. Whereupon the Pope sent letters to _Pipin_,
+wherein he told him that if he came not speedily against the _Lombards_,
+_pro data sibi potentia, alienandum fore a regno Dei & vita aeterna_, he
+should be excommunicated. _Pipin_ therefore, fearing a revolt of his
+subjects, and being indebted to the Church of _Rome_, came speedily with an
+army into _Italy_, raised the siege, besieged the _Lombards_ in _Pavia_,
+and forced them to surrender the Exarchate and region of _Pentapolis_ to
+the Pope for a perpetual possession. Thus the Pope became Lord of
+_Ravenna_, and the Exarchate, some few cities excepted; and the keys were
+sent to _Rome_, and laid upon the confession of St. _Peter_, that is, upon
+his tomb at the high Altar, _in signum veri perpetuique dominii, sed
+pietate Regis gratuita_, as the inscription of a coin of _Pipin_ hath it.
+This was in the year of Christ 755. And henceforward the Popes being
+temporal Princes, left off in their Epistles and Bulls to note the years of
+the _Greek_ Emperors, as they had hitherto done.
+
+After this [9] the _Lombards_ invading the Pope's countries, Pope _Adrian_
+sent to _Charles_ the great, the son and successor of _Pipin_, to come to
+his assistance. Accordingly _Charles_ entered _Italy_ with an army, invaded
+the _Lombards_, overthrew their kingdom, became master of their countries,
+and restored to the Pope, not only what they had taken from him, but also
+the rest of the Exarchate which they had promised _Pipin_ to surrender to
+him, but had hitherto detained; and also gave him some cities of the
+_Lombards_, and was in return himself made _Patricius_ by the _Romans_, and
+had the authority of confirming the elections of the Popes conferred upon
+him. These things were done in the years 773 and 774. This kingdom of the
+_Lombards_ was the second kingdom which fell before the little horn. But
+_Rome_, which was to be the seat of his kingdom, was not yet his own.
+
+In the year 796, [10] _Leo_ III being made Pope, notified his election to
+_Charles_ the great by his Legates, sending to him for a present, the
+golden keys of the Confession of _Peter_, and the Banner of the city of
+_Rome_: the first as an acknowledgment of the Pope's holding the cities of
+the Exarchate and _Lombardy_ by the grant of _Charles_; the other as a
+signification that _Charles_ should come and subdue the Senate and people
+of _Rome_, as he had done the Exarchate and the kingdom of the _Lombards_.
+For the Pope at the same time desired _Charles_ to send some of his Princes
+to _Rome_, who might subject the _Roman_ people to him, and bind them by
+oath _in fide & subjectione_, in fealty and subjection, as his words are
+recited by _Sigonius_. An anonymous Poet, publish'd by _Boeclerus_ at
+_Strasburg_, expresseth it thus:
+
+  _Admonuitque piis precibus, qui mittere vellet_
+  _Ex propriis aliquos primoribus, ac sibi plebem_
+  _Subdere Romanam, servandaque foedera cogens_
+  _Hanc fidei sacramentis promittere magnis_.
+
+Hence arose a misunderstanding between the Pope and the city: and the
+_Romans_ about two or three years after, by assistance of some of the
+Clergy, raised such tumults against him, as gave occasion to a new state of
+things in all the _West_. For two of the Clergy accused him of crimes, and
+the _Romans_ with an armed force, seized him, stript him of his sacerdotal
+habit, and imprisoned him in a monastery. But by assistance of his friends
+he made his escape, and fled into _Germany_ to _Charles_ the great, to whom
+he complained of the _Romans_ for acting against him out of a design to
+throw off all authority of the Church, and to recover their antient
+freedom. In his absence his accusers with their forces ravaged the
+possessions of the Church, and sent the accusations to _Charles_; who
+before the end of the year sent the Pope back to _Rome_ with a large
+retinue. The Nobles and Bishops of _France_ who accompanied him, examined
+the chief of his accusers at _Rome_, and sent them into _France_ in
+custody. This was in the year 799. The next year _Charles_ himself went to
+_Rome_, and upon a day appointed presided in a Council of _Italian_ and
+_French_ Bishops to hear both parties. But when the Pope's adversaries
+expected to be heard, the Council declared [11] that he who was the supreme
+judge of all men, was above being judged by any other than himself:
+whereupon he made a solemn declaration of his innocence before all the
+people, and by doing so was looked upon as acquitted.
+
+Soon after, upon _Christmas_-day, the people of _Rome_, who had hitherto
+elected their Bishop, and reckoned that they and their Senate inherited the
+rights of the antient Senate and people of _Rome_, voted _Charles_ their
+Emperor, and subjected themselves to him in such manner as the old _Roman_
+Empire and their Senate were subjected to the old _Roman_ Emperors. The
+Pope crowned him, and anointed him with holy oil, and worshipped him on his
+knees after the manner of adoring the old _Roman_ Emperors; as the
+aforesaid Poet thus relates:
+
+  _Post laudes igitur dictas & summus eundem_
+  _Praesul adoravit, sicut mos debitus olim_
+  _Principibus fuit antiquis_.
+
+The Emperor, on the other hand, took the following oath to the Pope: _In
+nomine Christi spondeo atque polliceor, Ego Carolus Imperator coram Deo &
+beato Petro Apostolo, me protectorem ac defensorem fore hujus sanctae Romanae
+Ecclesiae in omnibus utilitatibus, quatenus divino fultus fuero adjutorio,
+prout sciero poteroque_. The Emperor was also made Consul of _Rome_, and
+his son _Pipin_ crowned King of _Italy_: and henceforward the Emperor
+stiled himself: _Carolus serenissimus, Augustus, a Deo coronatus, magnus,
+pacificus, Romae gubernans imperium_, or _Imperator Romanorum_; and was
+prayed for in the Churches of _Rome_. His image was henceforward put upon
+the coins of _Rome_: while the enemies of the Pope, to the number of three
+hundred _Romans_ and two or three of the Clergy, were sentenced to death.
+The three hundred _Romans_ were beheaded in one day in the _Lateran_
+fields: but the Clergymen at the intercession of the Pope were pardoned,
+and banished into _France_. And thus the title of _Roman_ Emperor, which
+had hitherto been in the _Greek_ Emperors, was by this act transferred in
+the _West_ to the Kings of _France_.
+
+After these things [12] _Charles_ gave the City and Duchy of _Rome_ to the
+Pope, subordinately to himself as Emperor of the _Romans_; spent the winter
+in ordering the affairs of _Rome_, and those of the Apostolic see, and of
+all _Italy_, both civil and ecclesiastical, and in making new laws for
+them; and returned the next summer into _France_: leaving the city under
+its Senate, and both under the Pope and himself. But hearing that his new
+laws were not observed by the judges in dictating the law, nor by the
+people in hearing it; and that the great men took servants from free men,
+and from the Churches and Monasteries, to labour in their vineyards,
+fields, pastures and houses, and continued to exact cattle and wine of
+them, and to oppress those that served the Churches: he wrote to his son
+_Pipin_ to remedy these abuses, to take care of the Church, and see his
+laws executed.
+
+Now the Senate and people and principality of _Rome_ I take to be the third
+King the little horn overcame, and even the chief of the three. For this
+people elected the Pope and the Emperor; and now, by electing the Emperor
+and making him Consul, was acknowledged to retain the authority of the old
+_Roman_ Senate and people. This city was the Metropolis of the old _Roman_
+Empire, represented in _Daniel_ by the fourth Beast; and by subduing the
+Senate and people and Duchy, it became the Metropolis of the little horn of
+that Beast, and completed _Peter_'s Patrimony, which was the kingdom of
+that horn. Besides, this victory was attended with greater consequences
+than those over the other two Kings. For it set up the _Western Empire_,
+which continues to this day. It set up the Pope above the judicature of the
+_Roman_ Senate, and above that of a Council of _Italian_ and _French_
+Bishops, and even above all human judicature; and gave him the supremacy
+over the _Western_ Churches and their Councils in a high degree. It gave
+him _a look more stout than his fellows_; so that when this new religion
+began to be established in the minds of men, he grappled not only with
+Kings, but even with the _Western_ Emperor himself. It is observable also,
+that the custom of kissing the Pope's feet, an honour superior to that of
+Kings and Emperors, began about this time. There are some instances of it
+in the ninth century: _Platina_ tells us, that the feet of Pope _Leo_ IV
+were kissed, according to antient custom, by all who came to him: and some
+say that _Leo_ III began this custom, pretending that his hand was infected
+by the kiss of a woman. The Popes began also about this time to canonize
+saints, and to grant indulgences and pardons: and some represent that _Leo_
+III was the first author of all these things. It is further observable,
+that _Charles_ the great, between the years 775 and 796, conquered all
+_Germany_ from the _Rhine_ and _Danube_ northward to the _Baltic_ sea, and
+eastward to the river _Teis_; extending his conquests also into _Spain_ as
+far as the river _Ebro_: and by these conquests he laid the foundation of
+the new Empire; and at the same time propagated the _Roman_ Catholic
+religion into all his conquests, obliging the _Saxons_ and _Hunns_ who were
+heathens, to receive the _Roman_ faith, and distributing his northern
+conquests into Bishopricks, granting tithes to the Clergy and _Peter-pence_
+to the Pope: by all which the Church of _Rome_ was highly enlarged,
+enriched, exalted, and established.
+
+In the forementioned _dissertation upon some coins of _Charles_ the great,
+_Ludovicus Pius_, _Lotharius_, and their successors, stamped at _Rome__,
+there is a draught of a piece of _Mosaic_ work which Pope _Leo_ III. caused
+to be made in his Palace near the Church of _John Lateran_, in memory of
+his sending the standard or banner of the city of _Rome_ curiously wrought,
+to _Charles_ the great; and which still remained there at the publishing of
+the said book. In the _Mosaic_ work there appeared _Peter_ with three keys
+in his lap, reaching the _Pallium_ to the Pope with his right hand, and the
+banner of the city to _Charles_ the great with his left. By the Pope was
+this inscription, SCISSIMUS D.N. LEO PP; by the King this, D.N. CARVLO
+REGI; and under the feet of _Peter_ this, BEATE PETRE, DONA VITAM LEONI PP,
+ET BICTORIAM CARVLO REGI DONA. This Monument gives the title of King to
+_Charles_, and therefore was erected before he was Emperor. It was erected
+when _Peter_ was reaching the _Pallium_ to the Pope, and the Pope was
+sending the banner of the city to _Charles_, that is, A.C. 796. The words
+above, _Sanctissimus Dominus noster Leo Papa Domino nostro Carolo Regi_,
+relate to the message; and the words below, _Beate Petre, dona vitam Leoni
+Papae & victoriam Carolo regi dona_, are a prayer that in this undertaking
+God would preserve the life of the Pope, and give victory to the King over
+the _Romans_. The three keys in the lap of _Peter_ signify the keys of the
+three parts of his Patrimony, that of _Rome_ with its Duchy, which the Pope
+claimed and was conquering, those of _Ravenna_ with the Exarchate, and of
+the territories taken from the _Lombards_; both which he had newly
+conquered. These were the three dominions, whose keys were in the lap of
+St. _Peter_, and whose Crowns are now worn by the Pope, and by the conquest
+of which he became the little horn of the fourth Beast. By _Peter_'s giving
+the _Pallium_ to the Pope with his right hand, and the banner of the city
+to the King with his left, and by naming the Pope before the King in the
+inscription, may be understood that the Pope was then reckoned superior in
+dignity to the Kings of the earth.
+
+After the death of _Charles_ the great, his son and successor _Ludovicus
+Pius_, at the request of the Pope, [13] confirmed the donations of his
+grandfather and father to the see of _Rome_. And in the confirmation he
+names first _Rome_ with its Duchy extending into _Tuscany_ and _Campania_;
+then the Exarchate of _Ravenna_, with _Pentapolis_; and in the third place,
+the territories taken from the _Lombards_. These are his three conquests,
+and he was to hold them of the Emperor for the use of the Church _sub
+integritate_, entirely, without the Emperor's medling therewith, or with
+the jurisdiction or power of the Pope therein, unless called thereto in
+certain cases. This ratification the Emperor _Ludovicus_ made under an
+oath: and as the King of the _Ostrogoths_, for acknowledging that he held
+his kingdom of _Italy_ of the _Greek_ Emperor, stamped the effigies of the
+Emperor on one side of his coins and his own on the reverse; so the Pope
+made the like acknowledgment to the _Western_ Emperor. For the Pope began
+now to coin money, and the coins of _Rome_ are henceforward found with the
+heads of the Emperors, _Charles_, _Ludovicus Pius_, _Lotharius_, and their
+successors, on the one side, and the Pope's inscription on the reverse, for
+many years.
+
+Notes to Chap. VII.
+
+[1] Chap. vii. 8.
+
+[2] Ver. 20, 21.
+
+[3] Ver. 24.
+
+[4] Ver. 25.
+
+[5] Sigonius de Regno Italiae, ad Ann. 726.
+
+[6] Sigonius ib. ad Ann. 726, 752.
+
+[7] Sigon. ib. Ann. 750.
+
+[8] Sigon. ib. Ann. 753, 754, 755.
+
+[9] Sigon. ib. Ann. 773.
+
+[10] Sigon. de Regno Ital. ad Ann. 796.
+
+[11] Vide Anastasium.
+
+[12] Sigon. de Regno Ital.
+
+[13] Confirmationem recitat Sigonius, lib. 4. de Regno Italiae, ad An. 817.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. VIII.
+
+_Of the power of the eleventh horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast, to change
+times and laws_.
+
+In the reign of the _Greek_ Emperor _Justinian_, and again in the reign of
+_Phocas_, the Bishop of _Rome_ obtained some dominion over the _Greek_
+Churches, but of no long continuance. His standing dominion was only over
+the nations of the _Western Empire_, represented by _Daniel_'s fourth
+Beast. And this jurisdiction was set up by the following Edict of the
+Emperors _Gratian_ and _Valentinian.--[1] Volumus ut quicunque judicio
+Damasi, quod ille cum Concilio quinque vel septem habuerit Episcoporum, vel
+eorum qui Catholici sunt judicio vel Concilio condemnatus fuerit, si juste
+voluerit Ecclesiam retentare, ut qui ad sacerdotale judicium per
+contumeliam non ivisset: ut ab illustribus viris Praefectis Praetorio Galliae
+atque Italiae, authoritate adhibita, ad Episcopale judicium remittatur, sive
+a Consularibus vel Vicariis, ut ad Urbem Romam sub prosecutione perveniat.
+Aut si in longinquioribus partibus alicujus ferocitas talis emerserit,
+omnis ejus causae edictio ad Metropolitae in eadem Provincia Episcopi
+deduceretur examen. Vel si ipse Metropolitanus est, Romam necessario, vel
+ad eos quos Romanus Episcopus judices dederit, sine delatione
+contendat.----Quod si vel Metropolitani Episcopi vel cujuscunque sacerdotis
+iniquitas est suspecta, aut gratia; ad Romanum Episcopum, vel ad Concilium
+quindecim finitimorum Episcoporum accersitum liceat provocare; modo ne post
+examen habitum, quod definitum fuerit, integretur_. This Edict wanting the
+name of both _Valens_ and _Theodosius_ in the Title, was made in the time
+between their reigns, that is, in the end of the year 378, or the beginning
+of 379. It was directed to the _Praefecti Praetorio Italiae & Galliae_, and
+therefore was general. For the _Praefectus Praetorio Italiae_ governed
+_Italy_, _Illyricum occidentale_ and _Africa_; and the _Praefectus Praetorio
+Galliae_ governed _Gallia_, _Spain_, and _Britain_.
+
+The granting of this jurisdiction to the Pope gave several Bishops occasion
+to write to him for his resolutions upon doubtful cases, whereupon he
+answered by decretal Epistles; and henceforward he gave laws to the
+_Western_ Churches by such Epistles. _Himerius_ Bishop of _Tarraco_, the
+head city of a province in _Spain_, writing to Pope _Damasus_ for his
+direction about certain Ecclesiastical matters, and the Letter not arriving
+at _Rome_ till after the death of _Damasus_, A.C. 384; his successor
+_Siricius_ answered the same with a legislative authority, telling him of
+one thing: _Cum hoc fieri--missa ad Provincias a venerandae memoriae
+praedecessore meo Liberio generalia decreta, prohibeant_. Of another:
+_Noverint se ab omni ecclesiastico honore, quo indigne usi sunt, Apostolicae
+Sedis auctoritate, dejectos_. Of another: _Scituri posthac omnium
+Provinciarum summi Antistites, quod si ultro ad sacros ordines quenquam de
+talibus esse assumendum, & de suo & de aliorum statu, quos contra Canones &
+interdicta nostra provexerint, congruam ab Apostolica Sede promendam esse
+sententiam_. And the Epistle he concludes thus: _Explicuimus, ut arbitror,
+frater charissime, universa quae digesta sunt in querelam; & ad singulas
+causas, de quibus ad Romanam Ecclesiam, utpote ad caput tui corporis,
+retulisti; sufficientia, quantum opinor, responsa reddidimus. Nunc
+fraternitatis tuae animum ad servandos canones, & tenenda decretalia
+constituta, magis ac magis incitamus: ad haec quae ad tua consulta
+rescripsimus in omnium Coepiscoporum perferri facias notionem; & non solum
+corum, qui in tua sunt dioecesi constituti, sed etiam ad universos
+Carthaginenses ac Boeticos, Lusitanos atque [2] Gallicos, vel eos qui
+vicinis tibi collimitant hinc inde Provinciis, haec quae a nobis sunt salubri
+ordinatione disposita, sub literarum tuarum prosecutione mittantur. Et
+quanquam statuta sedis Apostolicae vel Canonum venerabilia definita, nulli
+Sacerdotum Domini ignorare sit liberum: utilius tamen, atque pro
+antiquitate sacerdotii tui, dilectioni tuae esse admodum poterit gloriosum,
+si ea quae ad te speciali nomine generaliter scripta sunt, per unanimitatis
+tuae sollicitudinem in universorum fratrum nostrorum notitiam perferantur;
+quatenus & quae a nobis non inconsulte sed provide sub nimia cautela &
+deliberatione sunt salubriter constituta, intemerata permaneant, & omnibus
+in posterum excusationibus aditus, qui jam nulli apud nos patere poterit,
+obstruatur. Dat. 3 Id. Febr. Arcadio & Bautone viris clarissimis
+Consulibus_, A.C. 385. Pope _Liberius_ in the reign of _Jovian_ or
+_Valentinian_ I. sent general Decrees to the Provinces, ordering that the
+_Arians_ should not be rebaptized: and this he did in favour of the Council
+of _Alexandria_, that nothing more should be required of them than to
+renounce their opinions. Pope _Damasus_ is said to have decreed in a
+_Roman_ Council, that _Tithes_ and _Tenths_ should be paid upon pain of an
+_Anathema_; and that _Glory be to the Father_, &c. should be said or sung
+at the end of the _Psalms_. But the first decretal Epistle now extant is
+this of _Siricius_ to _Himerius_; by which the Pope made _Himerius_ his
+Vicar over all _Spain_ for promulging his Decrees, and seeing them
+observed. The Bishop of _Sevill_ was also the Pope's Vicar sometimes; for
+_Simplicius_ wrote thus to _Zeno_ Bishop of that place: _Talibus idcirco
+gloriantes indiciis, congruum duximus vicaria Sedis nostrae te auctoritate
+fulciri: cujus vigore munitus, Apostolicae institutionis Decreta, vel
+sanctorum terminos Patrum, nullatenus transcendi permittas_. And Pope
+_Hormisda_ [3] made the Bishop of _Sevill_ his Vicar over _Boetica_ and
+_Lusitania_, and the Bishop of _Tarraco_ his Vicar over all the rest of
+_Spain_, as appears by his Epistles to them.
+
+Pope _Innocent_ the first, in his decretal Epistle to _Victricius_ Bishop
+of _Rouen_ in _France_, A.C. 404, in pursuance of the Edict of _Gratian_,
+made this Decree: _Si quae autem causae vel contentiones inter Clericos tam
+superioris ordinis quam etiam inferioris fuerint exortae; ut secundum
+Synodum Nicenam congregatis ejusdem Provinciae Episcopis jurgium terminetur:
+nec alicui liceat, [4] Romanae Ecclesiae, cujus in omnibus causis debet
+reverentia custodiri, relictis his sacerdotibus, qui in eadem Provincia Dei
+Ecclesiam nutu Divino gubernant, ad alias convolare Provincias. Quod siquis
+forte praesumpserit; & ab officio Clericatus summotus, & injuriarum reus
+judicetur. Si autem majores causae in medium fuerint devolutae, ad Sedem
+Apostolicam sicut Synodus statuit, & beata consuetudo exigit, post judicium
+Episcopale referantur_. By these Letters it seems to me that _Gallia_ was
+now subject to the Pope, and had been so for some time, and that the Bishop
+of _Rouen_ was then his Vicar or one of them: for the Pope directs him to
+refer the greater causes to the See of _Rome_, according to custom. But the
+Bishop of _Arles_ soon after became the Pope's Vicar over all _Gallia_: for
+Pope _Zosimus_, A.C. 417, ordaining that none should have access to him
+without the credentials of his Vicars, conferred upon _Patroclus_ the
+Bishop of _Arles_ this authority over all _Gallia_, by the following
+Decree.
+
+_Zosimus universis Episcopis per Gallias & septem
+Provincias constitutis_.
+
+_Placuit Apostolicae Sedi, ut siquis ex qualibet Galliarum parte sub
+quolibet ecclesiastico gradu ad nos Romae venire contendit, vel alio
+terrarum ire disponit, non aliter proficiscatur nisi Metropolitani Episcopi
+Formatas acceperit, quibus sacerdotium suum vel locum ecclesiasticum quem
+habet, scriptorum ejus adstipulatione perdoceat: quod ex gratia statuimus
+quia plures episcopi sive presbyteri sive ecclesiastici simulantes, quia
+nullum documentum Formatarum extat per quod valeant confutari, in nomen
+venerationis irrepunt, & indebitam reverentiam promerentur. Quisquis
+igitur, fratres charissimi, praetermissa supradicti Formata sive episcopus,
+sive presbyter, sive diaconus, aut deinceps inferiori gradu sit, ad nos
+venerit: sciat se omnino suscipi non posse. Quam auctoritatem ubique nos
+misisse manifestum est, ut cunctis regionibus innotescat id quod statuimus
+omnimodis esse servandum. Siquis autem haec salubriter constituta temerare
+tentaverit sponte sua, se a nostra noverit communione discretum. Hoc autem
+privilegium Formatarum sancto Patroclo fratri & coepiscopo nostro,
+meritorum ejus speciali contemplatione, concessimus_. And that the Bishop
+of _Arles_ was sometimes the Pope's Vicar over all _France_, is affirmed
+also by all the Bishops of the Diocess of _Arles_ in their Letter to Pope
+_Leo_ I. _Cui id etiam honoris dignitatisque collatum est_, say they, _ut
+non tantum has Provincias potestate propria gubernaret; verum etiam omnes
+Gallias sibi Apostolicae Sedis vice mandatas, sub omni ecclesiastica regula
+contineret_. And Pope _Pelagius_ I. A.C. 556, in his Epistle to _Sapaudus_
+Bishop of _Arles_: _Majorum nostrorum, operante Dei misericordia, cupientes
+inhaerere vestigiis & eorum actus divino examine in omnibus imitari:
+Charitati tuae per universam Galliam, sanctae Sedis Apostolicae, cui divina
+gratia praesidemus, vices injungimus_.
+
+By the influence of the same imperial Edict, not only _Spain_ and _Gallia_,
+but also _Illyricum_ became subject to the Pope. _Damasus_ made
+_Ascholius_, or _Acholius_, Bishop of _Thessalonica_ the Metropolis of
+_Oriental Illyricum_, his Vicar for hearing of causes; and in the year 382,
+_Acholius_ being summoned by Pope _Damasus_, came to a Council at _Rome_.
+Pope _Siricius_ the successor of _Damasus_, decreed that no Bishop should
+be ordained in _Illyricum_ without the consent of _Anysius_ the successor
+of _Acholius_. And the following Popes gave _Rufus_ the successor of
+_Anysius_, a power of calling Provincial Councils: for in the Collections
+of _Holstenius_ there is an account of a Council of _Rome_ convened under
+Pope _Boniface_ II. in which were produced Letters of _Damasus_,
+_Syricius_, _Innocent_ I. _Boniface_ I. and _Caelestine_ Bishops of _Rome_,
+to _Ascholius_, _Anysius_ and _Rufus_, Bishops of _Thessalonica_: in which
+Letters they commend to them the hearing of causes in _Illyricum_, granted
+by the Lord and the holy Canons to the Apostolic See thro'out that
+Province. And Pope _Siricius_ saith in his Epistle to _Anysius_: _Etiam
+dudum, frater charissime, per Candidianum Episcopum, qui nos praecessit ad
+Dominum, hujusmodi literas dederamus, ut nulla licentia esset, sine
+consensu tuo in Illyrico Episcopos ordinare praesumere, quae utrum ad te
+pervenerint scire non potui. Multa enim gesta sunt per contentionem ab
+Episcopis in ordinationibus faciendis, quod tua melius caritas novit_. And
+a little after: _Ad omnem enim hujusmodi audaciam comprimendam vigilare
+debet instantia tua, Spiritu in te Sancto fervente: ut vel ipse, si potes,
+vel quos judicaveris Episcopos idoneos, cum literis dirigas, dato consensu
+qui possit, in ejus locum qui defunctus vel depositus fuerit, Catholicum
+Episcopum vita & moribus probatum, secundum Nicaenae Synodi statuta vel
+Ecclesiae Romanae, Clericum de Clero meritum ordinare_. And Pope _Innocent_
+I. saith in his Epistle to _Anysius_: _Cui_ [Anysio] _etiam anteriores
+tanti ac tales viri praedecessores mei Episcopi, id est, sanctae memoriae
+Damasus, Siricius, atque supra memoratus vir ita detulerunt; ut omnia quae
+in omnibus illis partibus gererentur, Sanctitati tuae, quae plena justitiae
+est, traderent cognoscenda_. And in his Epistle to _Rufus_ the successor of
+_Anysius_: _Ita longis intervallis disterminatis a me ecclesiis discat
+consulendum; ut prudentiae gravitatique tuae committendam curam causasque,
+siquae exoriantur, per Achaiae, Thessaliae, Epiri veteris, Epiri novae, &
+Cretae, Daciae mediterraneae, Daciae ripensis, Moesiae, Dardaniae, & Praevali
+ecclesias, Christo Domino annuente, censeam. Vere enim ejus sacratissimis
+monitis lectissimae sinceritatis tuae providentiae & virtuti hanc injungimus
+sollicitudinem: non primitus haec statuentes, sed Praecessores nostros
+Apostolicos imitati, qui beatissimis Acholio & Anysio injungi pro meritis
+ista voluerunt_. And _Boniface_ I. in his decretal Epistle to _Rufus_ and
+the rest of the Bishops in _Illyricum_: _Nullus, ut frequenter dixi,
+alicujus ordinationem citra ejus_ [Episcopi Thessalonicensis] _conscientiam
+celebrare praesumat: cui, ut supra dictum est, vice nostra cuncta
+committimus_. And Pope _Caelestine_, in his decretal Epistle to the Bishops
+thro'out _Illyricum_, saith: _Vicem nostram per vestram Provinciam
+noveritis_ [Rufo] _esse commissam, ita ut ad eum, fratres carissimi,
+quicquid de causis agitur, referatur. Sine ejus consilio nullus ordinetur.
+Nullus usurpet, eodem inconscio, commissam illi Provinciam; colligere nisi
+cum ejus voluntate Episcopus non praesumat_. And in the cause of
+_Perigenes_, in the title of his Epistle, he thus enumerates the Provinces
+under this Bishop: _Rufo & caeteris Episcopis per Macedoniam, Achaiam,
+Thessaliam, Epirum veterem, Epirum novam, Praevalin, & Daciam constitutis_.
+And Pope _Xistus_ in a decretal Epistle to the same Bishops: _Illyricanae
+omnes Ecclesiae, ut a decessoribus nostris recepimus, & nos quoque fecimus,
+ad curam nunc pertinent Thessalonicensis Antistitis, ut sua sollicitudine,
+siquae inter fratres nascantur, ut assolent, actiones distinguat atque
+definiat; & ad eum, quicquid a singulis sacerdotibus agitur, referatur. Sit
+Concilium, quotiens causae fuerint, quotiens ille pro necessitatum
+emergentium ratione decreverit_. And Pope _Leo_ I. in his decretal Epistle
+to _Anastasius_ Bishop of _Thessalonica_: _Singulis autem Metropolitanis
+sicut potestas ista committitur, ut in suis Provinciis jus habeant
+ordinandi; ita eos Metropolitanos a te volumus ordinari; maturo tamen &
+decocto judicio_.
+
+_Occidental Illyricum_ comprehended _Pannonia prima_ and _secunda_,
+_Savia_, _Dalmatia_, _Noricum mediterraneum_, and _Noricum ripense_; and
+its Metropolis was _Sirmium_, till _Attila_ destroyed this city. Afterwards
+_Laureacum_ became the Metropolis of _Noricum_ and both _Pannonias_, and
+_Salona_ the Metropolis of _Dalmatia_. Now [5] the Bishops of _Laureacum_
+and _Salona_ received the _Pallium_ from the Pope: and _Zosimus_, in his
+decretal Epistle to _Hesychius_ Bishop of _Salona_, directed him to
+denounce the Apostolic decrees as well to the Bishops of his own, as to
+those of the neighbouring Provinces. The subjection of these Provinces to
+the See of _Rome_ seems to have begun in _Anemius_, who was ordained Bishop
+of _Sirmium_ by _Ambrose_ Bishop of _Millain_, and who in the Council of
+_Aquileia_ under Pope _Damasus_, A.C. 381, declared his sentence in these
+words: _Caput Illyrici non nisi civitas Sirmiensis: Ego igitur illius
+civitatis Episcopus sum. Eum qui non confitetur filium Dei aeternum, &
+coeternum patri, qui est sempiternus, anathema dico_. The next year
+_Anemius_ and _Ambrose_, with _Valerian_ Bishop of _Aquileia_, _Acholias_
+Bishop of _Thessalonica,_ and many others, went to the Council of _Rome_,
+which met for overruling the _Greek_ Church by majority of votes, and
+exalting the authority of the Apostolic See, as was attempted before in the
+Council of _Sardica_.
+
+_Aquileia_ was the second city of the _Western Empire_, and by some called
+the second _Rome_. It was the Metropolis of _Istria_, _Forum Julium_, and
+_Venetia_; and its subjection to the See of _Rome_ is manifest by the
+decretal Epistle of _Leo_ I. directed to _Nicetas_ Bishop of this city; for
+the Pope begins his Epistle thus: _Regressus ad nos filius meus Adeodatus
+Diaconus Sedis nostrae, dilectionem tuam poposcisse memorat, ut de his a
+nobis authoritatem Apostolicae Sedis acciperes, quae quidem magnam
+difficultatem dijudicationis videntur afferre_. Then he sets down an answer
+to the questions proposed by _Nicetas_, and concludes thus: _Hanc autem
+Epistolam nostram, quam ad consultationem tuae fraternitatis emisimus, ad
+omnes fratres & comprovinciales tuos Episcopos facies pervenire, ut in
+omnium observantia, data profit authoritas. Data 1-2 Kal. Apr. Majorano
+Aug. Cos._ A.C. 458. _Gregory_ the great A.C. 591, [6] cited _Severus_
+Bishop of _Aquileia_ to appear before him in judgment in a Council at
+_Rome_.
+
+The Bishops of _Aquileia_ and _Millain_ created one another, and therefore
+were of equal authority, and alike subject to the See of _Rome_. Pope
+_Pelagius_ about the year 557, testified this in the following words: [7]
+_Mos antiquus fuit_, saith he, _ut quia pro longinquitate vel difficultate
+itineris, ab Apostolico illis onerosum fuerit ordinari, ipsi se invicem
+Mediolanensis & Aquileiensis ordinare Episcopos debuissent_. These words
+imply that the ordination of these two Bishops belonged to the See of
+_Rome_. When _Laurentius_ Bishop of _Millain_ had excommunicated _Magnus_,
+one of his Presbyters, and was dead, [8] _Gregory_ the great absolved
+_Magnus_, and sent the _Pallium_ to the new elected Bishop _Constantius_;
+whom the next year [9] he reprehended of partiality in judging
+_Fortunatus_, and commanded him to send _Fortunatus_ to _Rome_ to be judged
+there: four years after [10] he appointed the Bishops of _Millain_ and
+_Ravenna_ to hear the cause of one _Maximus_; and two years after, viz.
+A.C. 601, when _Constantius_ was dead, and the people of _Millain_ had
+elected _Deusdedit_ his successor, and the _Lombards_ had elected another,
+[11] _Gregory_ wrote to the Notary, Clergy, and People of _Millain_, that
+by the authority of his Letters _Deusdedit_ should be ordained, and that he
+whom the _Lombards_ had ordained was an unworthy successor of _Ambrose_:
+whence I gather, that the Church of _Millain_ had continued in this state
+of subordination to the See of _Rome_ ever since the days of _Ambrose_; for
+_Ambrose_ himself acknowledged the authority of that See. _Ecclesia
+Romana_, [12] saith he, _hanc consuetudinem non habet, cujus typum in
+omnibus sequimur, & formam_. And a little after: _In omnibus cupio sequi
+Ecclesiam Romanam_. And in his Commentary upon 1 _Tim_. iii. _Cum totus
+mundus Dei sit, tamen domus ejus Ecclesia dicitur, cujus hodie rector est
+Damasus_. In his Oration on the death of his brother _Satyrus_, he relates
+how his brother coming to a certain city of _Sardinia_, _advocavit
+Episcopum loci, percontatusque est ex eo utrum cum Episcopis Catholicis hoc
+est cum Romana Ecclesia conveniret?_ And in conjunction with the Synod of
+_Aquileia_ A.C. 381, in a synodical Epistle to the Emperor _Gratian_, he
+saith: _Totius orbis Romani caput Romanam Ecclesiam, atque illam
+sacrosanctam Apostolorum fidem, ne turbari sineret, obsecranda fuit
+clementia vestra; inde enim in omnes venerandae communionis jura dimanant_.
+The Churches therefore of _Aquileia_ and _Millain_ were subject to the See
+of _Rome_ from the days of the Emperor _Gratian_. _Auxentius_ the
+predecessor of _Ambrose_ was not subject to the see of _Rome_, and
+consequently the subjection of the Church of _Millain_ began in _Ambrose_.
+This Diocese of _Millain_ contained _Liguria_ with _Insubria_, the _Alpes
+Cottiae_ and _Rhaetia_; and was divided from the Diocese of _Aquileia_ by the
+river _Addua_. In the year 844, the Bishop of _Millain_ broke off from the
+See of _Rome_, and continued in this separation about 200 years, as is thus
+related by [13] _Sigonius_: _Eodem anno Angilbertus Mediolanensis
+Archiepiscopus ab Ecclesia Romana parum comperta de causa descivit,
+tantumque exemplo in posterum valuit, ut non nisi post ducentos annos
+Ecclesia Mediolanensis ad Romanae obedientiam auctoritatemque redierit_.
+
+The Bishop of _Ravenna_, the Metropolis of _Flaminia_ and _AEmilia_, was
+also subject to the Pope: for _Zosimus_, A.C. 417, excommunicated some of
+the Presbyters of that Church, and wrote a commonitory Epistle about them
+to the Clergy of that Church as a branch of the _Roman_ Church: _In sua_,
+saith he, _hoc est, in Ecclesia nostra Romana_. When those of _Ravenna_,
+having elected a new Bishop, gave notice thereof to Pope _Sixtus_, the Pope
+set him aside, and [14] ordained _Peter Chrysologus_ in his room.
+_Chrysologus_ in his Epistle to _Eutyches_, extant in the Acts of the
+Council of _Chalcedon_, wrote thus: _Nos pro studio pacis & fidei, extra
+consensum Romanae civitatis Episcopi, causas fidei audire non possumus_.
+Pope _Leo_ I. being consulted by _Leo_ Bishop of _Ravenna_ about some
+questions, answered him by a decretal Epistle A.C. 451. And Pope _Gregory_
+the great, [15] reprehending _John_ Bishop of _Ravenna_ about the use of
+the _Pallium_, tells him of a Precept of one of his Predecessors, Pope
+_John_, commanding that all the Privileges formerly granted to the Bishop
+and Church of _Ravenna_ should be kept: to this _John_ returned a
+submissive answer; and after his death Pope _Gregory_ ordered a visitation
+of the Church of _Ravenna_, confirmed the privileges heretofore granted
+them, and sent his _Pallium_, as of antient custom, to their new Bishop
+_Marinian_. Yet this Church revolted sometimes from the Church of _Rome_,
+but returned again to its obedience.
+
+The rest of _Italy_, with the Islands adjacent, containing the
+_suburbicarian_ regions, or ten Provinces under the temporal Vicar of
+_Rome, viz._ 1_Campania_, 2_Tuscia_ and _Umbria_, 3_Picenum suburbicarium_,
+4_Sicily_, 5_Apulia_ and _Calabria_, 6_Brutii_ and _Lucania_, 7_Samnium_,
+8_Sardinia_, 9_Corsica_, and 10_Valeria_, constituted the proper Province
+of the Bishop of _Rome_. For the Council of _Nice_ in their fifth Canon
+ordained that Councils should be held every spring and autumn in every
+Province; and according to this Canon, the Bishops of this Province met at
+_Rome_ every half year. In this sense Pope _Leo_ I. applied this Canon to
+_Rome_, in a decretal Epistle to the Bishops of _Sicily_, written _Alippio
+& Ardabure Coss_. A.C. 447. _Quia saluberrime_, saith he, _a sanctis
+patribus constitutum est, binos in annis singulis Episcoporum debere esse
+conventus, terni semper ex vobis ad diem tertium Kalendarum Octobrium Romam
+aeterno concilio sociandi occurrant. Et indissimulanter a vobis haec
+consuetudo servetur, quoniam adjuvante Dei gratia, facilius poterit
+provideri, ut in Ecclesiis Christi nulla scandala, nulli nascantur errores;
+cum coram Apostolo Petro semper in communione tractatum fuerit, ut omnia
+Canonum Decreta apud omnes Domini sacerdotes inviolata permaneant_. The
+Province of _Rome_ therefore comprehended _Sicily_, with so much of _Italy_
+and the neighbouring Islands as sent Bishops to the annual Councils of
+_Rome_; but extended not into the Provinces of _Ravenna_, _Aquileia_,
+_Millain_, _Arles_, &c. those Provinces having Councils of their own. The
+Bishops in every Province of the _Roman_ Empire were convened in Council by
+the Metropolitan or Bishop of the head city of the Province, and this
+Bishop presided in that Council: but the Bishop of _Rome_ did not only
+preside in his own Council of the Bishops of the _suburbicarian_ regions,
+but also gave Orders to the Metropolitans of all the other Provinces in the
+_Western Empire_, as their universal governor; as may be further perceived
+by the following instances.
+
+Pope _Zosimus_ A.C. 417, cited _Proculus_ Bishop of _Marseilles_ to appear
+before a Council at _Rome_ for illegitimate Ordinations; and condemned him,
+as he mentions in several of his Epistles. Pope _Boniface_ I. A.C. 419,
+upon a complaint of the Clergy of _Valentia_ against _Maximus_ a Bishop,
+summoned the Bishops of all _Gallia_ and the seven Provinces to convene in
+a Council against him; and saith in his Epistle, that his Predecessors had
+done the like. Pope _Leo_ I. called a general Council of all the Provinces
+of _Spain_ to meet in _Gallaecia_ against the _Manichees_ and
+_Priscillianists_, as he says in his decretal Epistle to _Turribius_ a
+_Spanish_ Bishop. And in one of his decretal Epistles to _Nicetas_ Bishop
+of _Aquileia_, he commands him to call a Council of the Bishops of that
+Province against the _Pelagians_, which might ratify all the Synodal
+Decrees which had been already ratified by the See of _Rome_ against this
+heresy. And in his decretal Epistle to _Anastasius_ Bishop of
+_Thessalonica_, he ordained that Bishop should hold two Provincial Councils
+every year, and refer the harder causes to the See of _Rome_: and if upon
+any extraordinary occasion it should be necessary to call a Council, he
+should not be troublesom to the Bishops under him, but content himself with
+two Bishops out of every Province, and not detain them above fifteen days.
+In the same Epistle he describes the form of Church-Government then set up,
+to consist in a subordination of all the Churches to the See of _Rome_: _De
+qua forma_, saith he, _Episcoporum quoque est orta distinctio, & magna
+dispositione provisum est ne omnes sibi omnia vindicarent, sed essent in
+singulis Provinciis singuli quorum inter fratres haberetur prima sententia,
+& rursus quidam in majoribus urbibus constituti sollicitudinem sumerent
+ampliorem, per quos ad unam Petri Sedem universalis Ecclesiae cura
+conflueret, & nihil usque a suo capite dissideret. Qui ergo scit se
+quibusdam esse praepositum, non moleste ferat aliquem sibi esse praepositum;
+sed obedientiam quam exigit etiam ipse dependat; et sicut non vult gravis
+oneris sarcinam ferre, ita non audeat aliis importabile pondus imponere_.
+These words sufficiently shew the monarchical form of government then set
+up in the Churches of the _Western Empire_ under the Bishop of _Rome_, by
+means of the imperial Decree of _Gratian_, and the appeals and decretal
+Epistles grounded thereupon.
+
+The same Pope _Leo_, having in a Council at _Rome_ passed sentence upon
+_Hilary_ Bishop of _Arles_, for what he had done by a Provincial Council in
+_Gallia_, took occasion from thence to procure the following Edict from the
+_Western_ Emperor _Valentinian_ III. for the more absolute establishing the
+authority of his See over all the Churches of the _Western Empire_.
+
+_Impp. Theodosius & Valentinianus AA. Aetio
+Viro illustri, Comiti & Magistro utriusque
+militiae & Patricio._
+
+_Certum est & nobis & imperio nostro unicum esse praesidium in supernae
+Divinitatis favore, ad quem promerendum praecipue Christiana fides &
+veneranda nobis religio suffragatur. Cum igitur Sedis Apostolicae Primatum
+sancti Petri meritum, qui princeps est Episcopalis coronae & Romanae dignitas
+civitatis, sacrae etiam Synodi firmavit auctoritas: ne quid praeter
+auctoritatem Sedis istius illicitum praesumptio attemperare nitatur: tunc
+enim demum Ecclesiarum pax ubique servabitur, si Rectorem suum agnoscat
+Universitas. Haec cum hactenus inviolabiliter suerint custodita, Hilarius
+Arelatensis, sicut venerabilis viri Leonis Romani Papae fideli relatione
+comperimus, contumaci ausu illicita quaedam praesumenda tentavit, & ideo
+Transalpinas Ecclesias abominabilis tumultus invasit, quod recens maxime
+testatur exemplum. Hilarius enim qui Episcopus Arelatensis vocatur,
+Ecclesiae Romanae urbis inconsulto Pontifice indebitas sibi ordinationes
+Episcoporum sola temeritate usurpans invasit. Nam alios incompetenter
+removit; indecenter alios, invitis & repugnantibus civibus, ordinavit. Qui
+quidem, quoniam non facile ab his qui non elegerant, recipiebantur, manum
+sibi contrahebat armatam, & claustra murorum in hostilem morem vel
+obsidione cingebat, vel aggressione reserabat, & ad sedem quietis pacem
+praedicaturus per bella ducebat: His talibus contra Imperii majestatem, &
+contra reverentiam Apostolicae Sedis admissis, per ordinem religiosi viri
+Urbis Papae cognitione discussis, certa in eum, ex his quos male
+ordinaverat, lata sententia est. Erat quidem ipsa sententia per Gallias
+etiam sine Imperiali Sanctione valitura: quid enim Pontificis auctoritate
+non liceret? Sed nostram quoque praeceptionem haec ratio provocavit. Nec
+ulterius vel Hilario, quem adhuc Episcopum nuncupare sola mansueta Praesulis
+permittit humanitas, nec cuiquam alteri ecclesiasticis rebus arma miscere,
+aut praeceptis Romani Antistitis liceat obviare: ausibus enim talibus fides
+& reverentia nostri violatur Imperii. Nec hoc solum, quod est maximi
+criminis, submovemus: verum ne levis saltem inter Ecclesias turba nascatur,
+vel in aliquo minui religionis disciplina videatur, hoc perenni sanctione
+discernimus; nequid tam Episcopis Gallicanis quam aliarum Provinciarum
+contra consuetudinem veterem liceat, sine viri venerabilis Papae Urbis
+aeternae auctoritate, tentare. Sed illis omnibusque pro lege sit, quicquid
+sanxit vel sanxerit Apostolicae Sedis auctoritas: ita ut quisquis
+Episcoporum ad judicium Romani Antistitis evocatus venire neglexerit, per
+Moderatorem ejusdem Provinciae adesse cogatur, per omnia servatis quae Divi
+parentes nostri Romanae Ecclesiae detulerunt, Aeti pater carissime Augusti.
+Unde illustris & praeclara magnificentia tua praesentis Edictalis Legis
+auctoritate faciet quae sunt superius statuta servari, decem librarum auri
+multa protinus exigenda ab unoquoque Judice qui passus fuerit praecepta
+nostra violari. Divinitas te servet per multos annos, parens carissime.
+Dat. _viii._ Id. Jun. Romae, Valentiniano A. _vi._ Consule_, A.C. 445. By
+this Edict the Emperor _Valentinian_ enjoined an absolute obedience to the
+will of the Bishop of _Rome_ thro'out all the Churches of his Empire; and
+declares, that for the Bishops to attempt any thing without the Pope's
+authority is contrary to antient custom, and that the Bishops summoned to
+appear before his judicature must be carried thither by the Governor of the
+Province; and he ascribes these privileges of the See of _Rome_ to the
+concessions of his dead Ancestors, that is, to the Edict of _Gratian_ and
+_Valentinian_ II. as above: by which reckoning this dominion of the Church
+of _Rome_ was now of 66 years standing: and if in all this time it had not
+been sufficiently established, this new Edict was enough to settle it
+beyond all question thro'out the _Western Empire_.
+
+Hence all the Bishops of the Province of _Arles_ in their Letter to Pope
+_Leo_, A.C. 450, petitioning for a restitution of the privileges of their
+Metropolitan, say: _Per beatum Petrum Apostolorum principem, sacrosancta
+Ecclesia Romana tenebat supra omnes totius mundi Ecclesias principatum_.
+And _Ceratius_, _Salonius_ and _Veranus_, three Bishops of _Gallia_, say,
+in their Epistle to the same Pope: _Magna praeterea & ineffabili quadam nos
+peculiares tui gratulatione succrescimus, quod illa specialis doctrinae
+vestrae pagina ita per omnium Ecclesiarum conventicula celebratur, ut vere
+consona omnium sententia declaretur; merito illic principatum Sedis
+Apostolicae constitutum, unde adhuc Apostolici spiritus oracula reserentur_.
+And _Leo_ himself, in [16] his Epistle to the metropolitan Bishops thro'out
+_Illyricum_: _Quia per omnes Ecclesias cura nostra distenditur, exigente
+hoc a nobis Domino, qui Apostolicae dignitatis beatissimo Apostolo Petro
+primatum, fidei sui remuneratione commisit, universalem Ecclesiam in
+fundamenti ipsius soliditate constituens_.
+
+While this Ecclesiastical Dominion was rising up, the northern barbarous
+nations invaded the _Western Empire_, and founded several kingdoms therein,
+of different religions from the Church of _Rome_. But these kingdoms by
+degrees embraced the _Roman_ faith, and at the same time submitted to the
+Pope's authority. The _Franks_ in _Gaul_ submitted in the end of the fifth
+Century, the _Goths_ in _Spain_ in the end of the sixth; and the _Lombards_
+in _Italy_ were conquered by _Charles_ the great A.C. 774. Between the
+years 775 and 794, the same _Charles_ extended the Pope's authority over
+all _Germany_ and _Hungary_ as far as the river _Theysse_ and the _Baltic_
+sea; he then set him above all human judicature, and at the same time
+assisted him in subduing the City and Duchy of _Rome_. By the conversion of
+the ten kingdoms to the _Roman_ religion, the Pope only enlarged his
+spiritual dominion, but did not yet rise up as a horn of the Beast. It was
+his temporal dominion which made him one of the horns: and this dominion he
+acquired in the latter half of the eighth century, by subduing three of the
+former horns as above. And now being arrived at a temporal dominion, and a
+power above all human judicature, he reigned [17] _with a look more stout
+than his fellows_, and [18] _times and laws were_ henceforward _given into
+his hands, for a time times and half a time_, or three times and an half;
+that is, for 1260 solar years, reckoning a time for a Calendar year of 360
+days, and a day for a solar year. After which [19] _the judgment is to sit,
+and they shall take away his dominion_, not at once, but by degrees, _to
+consume, and to destroy it unto the end. [20] And the kingdom and dominion,
+and greatness of the kingdom under the whole heaven shall_, by degrees, _be
+given unto the people of the saints of the most High, whose kingdom is an
+everlasting kingdom, and all dominions shall serve and obey him_.
+
+Notes to Chap. VIII.
+
+[1] _See the Annals of _Baronius__, Anno 381. Sect. 6.
+
+[2] Populos Galliciae.
+
+[3] Hormisd. Epist. 24. 26.
+
+[4] _The words, _sine auctoritate_, seem wanting._
+
+[5] Vide Caroli a S. Paulo Geographiam sacram, p. 72, 73.
+
+[6] Greg. M. lib. 1. Indic. 9. Epist. 16.
+
+[7] Apud Gratianum de Mediolanensi & Aquileiensi Episcopis.
+
+[8] Greg. M. lib. 3. Epist. 26. & lib. 4. Epist. 1.
+
+[9] Greg. lib. 5. Epist. 4.
+
+[10] Greg. lib. 9. Epist. 10 & 67.
+
+[11] Greg. lib. 11. Epist. 3, 4.
+
+[12] Ambros l. 3. de sacramentis, c. 1.
+
+[13] Sigonius de Regno Italiae, lib. 5.
+
+[14] _See _Baronius__, Anno 433. Sect. 24.
+
+[15] Greg. M. lib. 3. Epist. 56, 57. & lib. 5. Epist. 25, 26, 56.
+
+[16] Epist. 25. apud Holstenium.
+
+[17] Dan. vii. 20.
+
+[18] Ver. 25.
+
+[19] Ver. 26.
+
+[20] Ver. 27.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. IX.
+
+_Of the kingdoms represented in _Daniel_ by the Ram and He-Goat_.
+
+The second and third Empires, represented by the Bear and Leopard, are
+again represented by the Ram and He-Goat; but with this difference, that
+the Ram represents the kingdoms of the _Medes_ and _Persians_ from the
+beginning of the four Empires, and the Goat represents the kingdom of the
+_Greeks_ to the end of them. By this means, under the type of the Ram and
+He-Goat, the times of all the four Empires are again described: _I lifted
+up mine eyes_, saith [1] _Daniel_, _and saw_, _and behold there stood
+before the river_ [Ulai] _a Ram which had two horns, and the two horns were
+high, but one was higher than the other, and the higher came up last.--And
+the Ram having two horns, are the kings of _Media_ and _Persia__: not two
+persons but two kingdoms, the kingdoms of _Media_ and _Persia_; and the
+kingdom of _Persia_ was the higher horn and came up last. The kingdom of
+_Persia_ rose up, when _Cyrus_ having newly conquered _Babylon_, revolted
+from _Darius_ King of the _Medes_, and beat him at _Pasargadae_, and set up
+the _Persians_ above the _Medes_. This was the horn which came up last. And
+the horn which came up first was the kingdom of the _Medes_, from the time
+that _Cyaxares_ and _Nebuchadnezzar_ overthrew _Nineveh_, and shared the
+Empire of the _Assyrians_ between them. The Empires of _Media_ and
+_Babylon_ were contemporary, and rose up together by the fall of the
+_Assyrian_ Empire; and the Prophecy of the four Beasts begins with one of
+them, and that of the Ram and He-Goat with the other. As the Ram represents
+the kingdom of _Media_ and _Persia_ from the beginning of the four Empires;
+so the He-Goat represents the Empire of the _Greeks_ to the end of those
+Monarchies. In the reign of his great horn, and of the four horns which
+succeeded it, he represents this Empire during the reign of the Leopard:
+and in the reign of his little horn, which stood up in the latter time of
+the kingdom of the four, and after their fall became mighty but not by his
+own power, he represents it during the reign of the fourth Beast.
+
+_The rough Goat_, saith _Daniel, is the King of_ Grecia, that is, the
+kingdom; _and the great horn between his eyes is the first King_: not the
+first Monarch, but the first kingdom, that which lasted during the reign of
+_Alexander_ the great, and his brother _Aridaeus_ and two young sons,
+_Alexander_ and _Hercules_. [2] _Now that_ [horn] _being broken off,
+whereas four_ [horns] _stood up for it, four kingdoms shall stand up out of
+the nation_ [of the _Greeks_], _but not in his_ [the first horn's] _power_.
+The four horns are therefore four kingdoms; and by consequence, the first
+great horn which they succeeded is the first great kingdom of the _Greeks_,
+that which was founded by _Alexander_ the great, _An. Nabonass._ 414, and
+lasted till the death of his son _Hercules_, _An. Nabonass._ 441. And the
+four are those of _Cassander_, _Lysimachus_, _Antigonus_, and _Ptolemy_, as
+above.
+
+[3] _And in the latter time of their kingdom, when the transgressors are
+come to the full, a King_ [or new kingdom] _of fierce countenance, and
+understanding dark sentences, shall stand up: and his power shall be
+mighty, but not by his own power_. This King was the last horn of the Goat,
+the little horn which came up out of one of the four horns, and waxed
+exceeding great. The latter time of their kingdom was when the _Romans_
+began to conquer them, that is, when they conquered _Perseus_ King of
+_Macedonia_, the fundamental kingdom of the _Greeks_. And at that time the
+transgressors came to the full: for then the High-priesthood was exposed to
+sale, the Vessels of the Temple were sold to pay for the purchase; and the
+High-priest, with some of the _Jews_, procured a licence from _Antiochus
+Epiphanes_ to do after the ordinances of the heathen, and set up a school
+at _Jerusalem_ for teaching those ordinances. Then _Antiochus_ took
+_Jerusalem_ with an armed force, slew 4000 _Jews_, took as many prisoners
+and sold them, spoiled the Temple, interdicted the worship, commanded the
+Law of _Moses_ to be burnt, and set up the worship of the heathen Gods in
+all _Judea_. In the very same year, _An. Nabonass._ 580, the _Romans_
+conquered _Macedonia_, the chief of the four horns. Hitherto the Goat was
+mighty by its own power, but henceforward began to be under the _Romans_.
+_Daniel_ distinguishes the times, by describing very particularly the
+actions of the Kings of the north and south, those two of the four horns
+which bordered upon _Judea_, until the _Romans_ conquered _Macedonia_; and
+thenceforward only touching upon the main revolutions which happened within
+the compass of the nations represented by the Goat. In this latter period
+of time the little horn was to stand up and grow mighty, but not by his own
+power.
+
+The three first of _Daniel_'s Beasts had their dominions taken away, each
+of them at the rise of the next Beast; but their lives were prolonged, and
+they are all of them still alive. The third Beast, or Leopard, reigned in
+his four heads, till the rise of the fourth Beast, or Empire of the
+_Latins_; and his life was prolonged under their power. This Leopard
+reigning in his four heads, signifies the same thing with the He-Goat
+reigning in his four horns: and therefore the He-Goat reigned in his four
+horns till the rise of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast, or Empire of the _Latins_:
+then its dominion was taken away by the _Latins_, but its life was
+prolonged under their power. The _Latins_ are not comprehended among the
+nations represented by the He-Goat in this Prophecy: their power over the
+_Greeks_ is only named in it, to distinguish the times in which the He-Goat
+was mighty by his own power, from the times in which he was mighty but not
+by his own power. He was mighty by his own power till his dominion was
+taken away by the _Latins_; after that, his life was prolonged under their
+dominion, and this prolonging of his life was in the days of his last horn:
+for in the days of this horn the Goat became mighty, but not by his own
+power.
+
+Now because this horn was a horn of the Goat, we are to look for it among
+the nations which composed the body of the Goat. Among those nations he was
+to rise up and grow mighty: he grew mighty [4] _towards the south, and
+towards the east, and towards the pleasant land_; and therefore he was to
+rise up in the north-west parts of those nations, and extend his dominion
+towards _Egypt_, _Syria_ and _Judea_. In the latter time of the kingdom of
+the four horns, it was to rise up out of one of them and subdue the rest,
+but not by its own power. It was to be assisted by a foreign power, a power
+superior to itself, the power which took away the dominion of the third
+Beast, the power of the fourth Beast. And such a little horn was the
+kingdom of _Macedonia_, from the time that it became subject to the
+_Romans_. This kingdom, by the victory of the _Romans_ over _Persius_ King
+of _Macedonia_, _Anno Nabonass._ 580, ceased to be one of the four horns of
+the Goat, and became a dominion of a new sort: not a horn of the fourth
+Beast, for _Macedonia_ belonged to the body of the third; but a horn of the
+third Beast of a new sort, a horn of the Goat which grew mighty but not by
+his own power, a horn which rose up and grew potent under a foreign power,
+the power of the _Romans_.
+
+The _Romans_, by the legacy of _Attalus_ the last King of _Pergamus_, _An.
+Nabonass._ 615, inherited that kingdom, including all _Asia Minor_ on this
+side mount _Taurus_. _An. Nabonass._ 684 and 685 they conquered _Armenia_,
+_Syria_ and _Judea_; _An. Nabonass._ 718, they subdued _Egypt_. And by
+these conquests the little horn [5] _waxed exceeding great towards the
+south, and towards the east, and towards the pleasant land. And it waxed
+great even to the host of heaven; and cast down some of the host and of the
+stars to the ground, and stamped upon them_, that is, upon the people and
+great men of the _Jews_. [6] _Yea, he magnified himself even to the Prince
+of the Host_, the _Messiah_, the Prince of the _Jews_, whom he put to
+death, _An. Nabonass._ 780. _And by him the daily sacrifice was taken away,
+and the place of his sanctuary was cast down_, viz. in the wars which the
+armies of the _Eastern_ nations under the conduct of the _Romans_ made
+against _Judea_, when _Nero_ and _Vespasian_ were Emperors, _An. Nabonass._
+816, 817, 818. [7] _And an host was given him against the daily sacrifice
+by reason of transgression, and it cast down the truth to the ground, and
+it practised and prospered_. This transgression is in the next words called
+_the transgression of desolation_; and in _Dan._ xi. 31. _the abomination
+which maketh desolate_; and in _Matth._ xxiv. 15. _the abomination of
+desolation, spoken of by _Daniel_ the prophet, standing in the holy place_.
+It may relate chiefly to the worship of _Jupiter Olympius_ in his Temple
+built by the Emperor _Hadrian_, in the place of the Temple of the _Jews_,
+and to the revolt of the _Jews_ under _Barchochab_ occasioned thereby, and
+to the desolation of _Judea_ which followed thereupon; all the _Jews_,
+being thenceforward banished _Judea_ upon pain of death. _Then I heard_,
+saith [8] _Daniel, one saint speaking, and another saint said unto that
+certain saint which spake, How long shall be the vision concerning the
+daily sacrifice, and the transgression of desolation, to give both the
+sanctuary and the host to be trodden under foot? And he said unto me, Unto
+two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the sanctuary be cleansed._
+_Daniel_'s days are years; and these years may perhaps be reckoned either
+from the destruction of the Temple by the _Romans_ in the reign of
+_Vespasian_, or from the pollution of the Sanctuary by the worship of
+_Jupiter Olympius_, or from the desolation of _Judea_ made in the end of
+the _Jewish_ war by the banishment of all the _Jews_ out of their own
+country, or from some other period which time will discover. Henceforward
+the last horn of the Goat continued mighty under the _Romans_, till the
+reign of _Constantine_ the great and his sons: and then by the division of
+the _Roman_ Empire between the _Greek_ and _Latin_ Emperors, it separated
+from the _Latins_, and became the _Greek_ Empire alone, but yet under the
+dominion of a _Roman_ family; and at present it is mighty under the
+dominion of the _Turks_.
+
+This last horn is by some taken for _Antiochus Epiphanes_, but not very
+judiciously. A horn of a Beast is never taken for a single person: it
+always signifies a new kingdom, and the kingdom of _Antiochus_ was an old
+one. _Antiochus_ reigned over one of the four horns, and the little horn
+was a fifth under its proper kings. This horn was at first a little one,
+and waxed exceeding great, but so did not _Antiochus_. It is described
+great above all the former horns, and so was not _Antiochus_. His kingdom
+on the contrary was weak, and tributary to the _Romans_, and he did not
+enlarge it. The horn was a _King of fierce countenance, and destroyed
+wonderfully, and prospered and practised_; that is, he prospered in his
+practises against the holy people: but _Antiochus_ was frighted out of
+_Egypt_ by a mere message of the _Romans_, and afterwards routed and
+baffled by the _Jews_. The horn was mighty by another's power, _Antiochus_
+acted by his own. The horn stood up against the Prince of the Host of
+heaven, the Prince of Princes; and this is the character not of _Antiochus_
+but of _Antichrist_. The horn cast down the Sanctuary to the ground, and so
+did not _Antiochus_; he left it standing. The Sanctuary and Host were
+trampled under foot 2300 days; and in _Daniel_'s Prophecies days are put
+for years: but the profanation of the Temple in the reign of _Antiochus_
+did not last so many natural days. These were to last till the time of the
+end, till the last end of the indignation against the _Jews_; and this
+indignation is not yet at an end. They were to last till the Sanctuary
+which had been cast down should be cleansed, and the Sanctuary is not yet
+cleansed.
+
+This Prophecy of the Ram and He-Goat is repeated in the last Prophecy of
+_Daniel_. There the Angel tells _Daniel_, that [9] _he stood up to
+strengthen _Darius_ the _Mede_, and that there should stand up yet three
+kings in _Persia__, [_Cyrus_, _Cambyses_, and _Darius Hystaspis_] _and the
+fourth_ [_Xerxes_] _should be far richer than they all; and by his wealth
+thro' his riches he should stir up all against the realm of _Grecia__. This
+relates to the Ram, whose two horns were the kingdoms of _Media_ and
+_Persia_. Then he goes on to describe the horns of the Goat by the [10]
+_standing up of a mighty king, which should rule with great dominion, and
+do according to his will_; and by the breaking of his kingdom into four
+smaller kingdoms, and not descending to his own posterity. Then he
+describes the actions of two of those kingdoms which bordered on _Judea_,
+_viz_. _Egypt_ and _Syria_, calling them the Kings of the _South_ and
+_North_, that is, in respect of _Judea_; and he carries on the description
+till the latter end of the kingdoms of the four, and till the reign of
+_Antiochus Epiphanes_, when transgressors were come to the full. In the
+eighth year of _Antiochus_, the year in which he profaned the Temple and
+set up the heathen Gods in all _Judea_, and the _Romans_ conquered the
+kingdom of _Macedon_; the prophetic Angel leaves off describing the affairs
+of the kings of the _South_ and _North_, and begins to describe those of
+the _Greeks_ under the dominion of the _Romans_, in these words: [11] _And
+after him Arms_ [the _Romans_] _shall stand up, and they shall pollute the
+sanctuary of strength_. As [Hebrew: MMLK] signifies _after the king_, Dan.
+xi. 8; so here [Hebrew: MMNW] may signify _after him_: and so [Hebrew:
+MN-H'CHT] may signify _after one of them_, Dan. viii. 9. Arms are every
+where in these Prophecies of _Daniel_ put for the military power of a
+kingdom, and they stand up when they conquer and grow powerful. The
+_Romans_ conquered _Illyricum_, _Epirus_ and _Macedonia_, in the year of
+_Nabonassar_ 580; and thirty five years after, by the last will and
+testament of _Attalus_ the last King of _Pergamus_, they inherited that
+rich and flourishing kingdom, that is, all _Asia_ on this side mount
+_Taurus_: and sixty nine years after, they conquered the kingdom of
+_Syria_, and reduced it into a Province: and thirty four years after they
+did the like to _Egypt_. By all these steps the _Roman_ arms stood up over
+the _Greeks_. And after 95 years more, by making war upon the _Jews, they
+polluted the sanctuary of strength, and took away the daily sacrifice,
+and_, in its room soon after, _placed the abomination which made_ the Land
+_desolate_: for this abomination was placed after the days of Christ,
+_Matth._ xxiv. 15. In the 16th year of the Emperor _Hadrian_, A. C. 132,
+they placed this abomination by building a Temple to _Jupiter Capitolinus_,
+where the Temple of God in _Jerusalem_ had stood. Thereupon the _Jews_
+under the conduct of _Barchochab_ rose up in arms against the _Romans_, and
+in that war had 50 cities demolished, 985 of their best towns destroyed,
+and 580000 men slain by the sword: and in the end of the war, A.C. 136,
+they were all banished _Judea_ upon pain or death; and that time the land
+hath remained desolate of its old inhabitants.
+
+Now that the prophetic Angel passes in this manner from the four kingdoms
+of the _Greeks_ to the _Romans_ reigning over the _Greeks_, is confirmed
+from hence, that in the next place he describes the affairs of the
+_Christians_ unto the time of the end, in these words: [12] _And they that
+understand among the people shall instruct many, yet they shall fall by the
+sword and by flame, by captivity and by spoil many days. Now when they
+shall fall they shall be holpen with a little help_, _viz_. in the reign of
+_Constantine_ the great; _but many shall cleave to them with dissimulation.
+And some of them of understanding there shall fall to try them, and to
+purge_ them from the dissemblers; _and to make them white even to the time
+of the end_. And a little after, the time of the end is said to be _a time,
+times, and half a time_: which is the duration of the reign of the last
+horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast, and of the _Woman_ and her _Beast_ in the
+_Apocalyps_.
+
+Notes to Chap. IX.
+
+[1] Chap. viii. 3.
+
+[2] Ver. 22.
+
+[3] Ver. 23.
+
+[4] Chap. viii. 9.
+
+[5] Chap. viii. 9, 10.
+
+[6] Ver. 11.
+
+[7] Ver. 12.
+
+[8] Ver. 13, 14.
+
+[9] Dan. xi. 1, 2.
+
+[10] Ver. 3.
+
+[11] Dan xi. 31.
+
+[12] Chap. xi. 33, &c.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. X.
+
+_Of the Prophecy of the Seventy Weeks._
+
+The Vision of the Image composed of four Metals was given first to
+_Nebuchadnezzar_, and then to _Daniel_ in a dream: and _Daniel_ began then
+to be celebrated for revealing of secrets, _Ezek._ xxviii. 3. The Vision of
+the four Beasts, and of _the Son of man_ coming in the clouds of heaven,
+was also given to _Daniel_ in a dream. That of the Ram and the He-Goat
+appeared to him in the day time, when he was by the bank of the river
+_Ulay_; and was explained to him by the prophetic Angel _Gabriel_. It
+concerns the _Prince of the host_, and the _Prince of Princes_: and now in
+the first year of _Darius_ the _Mede_ over _Babylon_, the same prophetic
+Angel appears to _Daniel_ again, and explains to him what is meant by the
+_Son of man_, by the _Prince of the host_, and the _Prince of Princes_. The
+Prophecy of the _Son of man_ coming in the clouds of heaven relates to the
+second coming of _Christ_; that of the _Prince of the host_ relates to his
+first coming: and this Prophecy of the _Messiah_, in explaining them,
+relates to both comings, and assigns the times thereof.
+
+This Prophecy, like all the rest of _Daniel_'s, consists of two parts, an
+introductory Prophecy and an explanation thereof; the whole I thus
+translate and interpret.
+
+[1] '_Seventy weeks are [2] cut out upon thy people, and upon thy holy
+city, to finish transgression, and [3] to make an end of sins, to expiate
+iniquity, and to bring in everlasting righteousness, to consummate the
+Vision and [4] the Prophet, and to anoint the most Holy_.
+
+'_Know also and understand, that from the going forth of the commandment to
+cause to return and to build _Jerusalem_, unto [5] the Anointed the Prince,
+shall be seven weeks_.
+
+'_Yet threescore and two weeks shall [6] it return, and the street be built
+and the wall; but in troublesome times: and after the threescore and two
+weeks, the Anointed shall be cut off, and [6] it shall not be his; but the
+people of a Prince to come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary: and
+the end thereof shall be with a flood, and unto the end of the war,
+desolations are determined_.
+
+'_Yet shall he confirm the covenant with many for one week: and in half a
+week he shall cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease: and upon a wing of
+abominations he shall make it desolate, even until the consummation, and
+that which is determined be poured upon the desolate_.'
+
+_Seventy weeks are cut out upon thy people, and upon thy holy city, to
+finish transgression_, &c. Here, by putting a week for seven years, are
+reckoned 490 years from the time that the dispersed _Jews_ should be
+re-incorporated into [7] a people and a holy city, until the death and
+resurrection of _Christ_; whereby _transgression should be finished, and
+sins ended, iniquity be expiated, and everlasting righteousness brought in,
+and this Vision be accomplished, and the Prophet consummated_, that Prophet
+whom the _Jews_ expected; and whereby _the most Holy_ should be _anointed_,
+he who is therefore in the next words called the _Anointed_, that is, the
+_Messiah_, or the _Christ_. For by joining the accomplishment of the vision
+with the expiation of sins, the 490 years are ended with the death of
+_Christ_. Now the dispersed _Jews_ became a people and city when they first
+returned into a polity or body politick; and this was in the seventh year
+of _Artaxerxes Longimanus_, when _Ezra_ returned with a body of _Jews_ from
+captivity, and revived the _Jewish_ worship; and by the King's commission
+created Magistrates in all the land, to judge and govern the people
+according to the laws of God and the King, _Ezra_ vii. 25. There were but
+two returns from captivity, _Zerubbabel_'s and _Ezra_'s; in _Zerubbabel_'s
+they had only commission to build the Temple, in _Ezra_'s they first became
+a polity or city by a government of their own. Now the years of this
+_Artaxerxes_ began about two or three months after the summer solstice, and
+his seventh year fell in with the third year of the eightieth _Olympiad_;
+and the latter part thereof, wherein _Ezra_ went up to _Jerusalem_, was in
+the year of the _Julian Period_ 4257. Count the time from thence to the
+death of _Christ_, and you will find it just 490 years. If you count in
+_Judaic_ years commencing in autumn, and date the reckoning from the first
+autumn after _Ezra_'s coming to _Jerusalem_, when he put the King's decree
+in execution; the death of _Christ_ will fall on the year of the _Julian
+Period_ 4747, _Anno Domini_ 34; and the weeks will be _Judaic_ weeks,
+ending with sabbatical years; and this I take to be the truth: but if you
+had rather place the death of _Christ_ in the year before, as is commonly
+done, you may take the year of _Ezra_'s journey into the reckoning.
+
+_Know also and understand, that from the going forth of the commandment to
+cause to return and to build _Jerusalem_, unto the Anointed the Prince,
+shall be seven weeks_. The former part of the Prophecy related to the first
+coming of _Christ_, being dated to his coming as a Prophet; this being
+dated to his coming to be Prince or King, seems to relate to his second
+coming. There, the Prophet was consummate, and the most holy anointed:
+here, he that was anointed comes to be Prince and to reign. For _Daniel_'s
+Prophecies reach to the end of the world; and there is scarce a Prophecy in
+the Old Testament concerning _Christ_, which doth not in something or other
+relate to his second coming. If divers of the antients, as [8] _Irenaeus_,
+[9] _Julius Africanus_, _Hippolytus_ the martyr, and _Apollinaris_ Bishop
+of _Laodicea_, applied the half week to the times of _Antichrist_; why may
+not we, by the same liberty of interpretation, apply the seven weeks to the
+time when _Antichrist_ shall be destroyed by the brightness of _Christ_'s
+coming?
+
+The _Israelites_ in the days of the antient Prophets, when the ten Tribes
+were led into captivity, expected a double return; and that at the first
+the _Jews_ should build a new Temple inferior to _Solomon_'s, until the
+time of that age should be fulfilled; and afterwards they should return
+from all places of their captivity, and build _Jerusalem_ and the Temple
+gloriously, _Tobit_ xiv. 4, 5, 6: and to express the glory and excellence
+of this city, it is figuratively said to be built of precious stones,
+_Tobit_ xiii. 16, 17, 18. _Isa._ liv. 11, 12. _Rev._ xi. and called the
+_New Jerusalem_, the _Heavenly Jerusalem_, the _Holy City_, the _Lamb's
+Wife_, the _City of the Great King_, the _City into which the Kings of the
+earth do bring their glory and honour_. _Now_ while such a return from
+captivity was the expectation of _Israel_, even before the times of
+_Daniel_, I know not why _Daniel_ should omit it in his Prophecy. This part
+of the Prophecy being therefore not yet fulfilled, I shall not attempt a
+particular interpretation of it, but content myself with observing, that as
+the _seventy_ and the _sixty two weeks_ were _Jewish_ weeks, ending with
+sabbatical years; so the _seven weeks_ are the compass of a _Jubilee_, and
+begin and end with actions proper for a _Jubilee_, and of the highest
+nature for which a _Jubilee_ can be kept: and that since _the commandment
+to return and to build _Jerusalem__, precedes the _Messiah the Prince_ 49
+years; it may perhaps come forth not from the _Jews_ themselves, but from
+some other kingdom friendly to them, and precede their return from
+captivity, and give occasion to it; and lastly, that this rebuilding of
+_Jerusalem_ and the waste places of _Judah_ is predicted in _Micah_ vii.
+11. _Amos_ ix. 11, 14. _Ezek._ xxxvi. 33, 35, 36, 38. _Isa._ liv. 3, 11,
+12. lv. 12. lxi. 4. lxv. 18, 21,22. and _Tobit_ xiv. 5. and that the return
+from captivity and coming of the _Messiah_ and his kingdom are described in
+_Daniel_ vii. _Rev._ xix. _Acts_ i. _Mat._ xxiv. _Joel_ iii. _Ezek._ xxxvi.
+xxxvii. _Isa._ lx. lxii. lxiii. lxv. and lxvi. and many other places of
+scripture. The manner I know not. Let time be the Interpreter.
+
+_Yet threescore and two weeks shall it return, and the street be built and
+the wall, but in troublesome times: and after the threescore and two weeks
+the _Messiah_ shall be cut off, and it shall not be his; but the people of
+a Prince to come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary_, &c. Having
+foretold both comings of _Christ_, and dated the last from their returning
+and building _Jerusalem_; to prevent the applying that to the building
+_Jerusalem_ by _Nehemiah_, he distinguishes this from that, by saying that
+from this period to the _Anointed_ shall be, not seven weeks, but
+threescore and two weeks, and this not in prosperous but in troublesome
+times; and at the end of these Weeks the _Messiah_ shall not be the Prince
+of the _Jews_, but be cut off; and _Jerusalem_ not be his, but the city and
+sanctuary be destroyed. Now _Nehemiah_ came to _Jerusalem_ in the 20th year
+of this same _Artaxerxes_, while _Ezra_ still continued there, _Nehem._
+xii. 36, and found the city lying waste, and the houses and wall unbuilt,
+_Nehem._ ii. 17. vii. 4, and finished the wall the 25th day of the month
+_Elul_, _Nehem._ vi. 15, in the 28th year of the King, that is, in
+_September_ in the year of the _Julian Period_ 4278. Count now from this
+year threescore and two weeks of years, that is 434 years, and the
+reckoning will end in _September_ in the year of the _Julian Period_ 4712
+which is the year in which _Christ_ was born, according to _Clemens
+Alexandrinus_, _Irenaeus_, _Eusebius_, _Epiphanius_, _Jerome_, _Orosius_,
+_Cassiodorus_, and other antients; and this was the general opinion, till
+_Dionysius Exiguus_ invented the vulgar account, in which _Christ_'s birth
+is placed two years later. If with some you reckon that _Christ_ was born
+three or four years before the vulgar account, yet his birth will fall in
+the latter part of the last week, which is enough. How after these weeks
+_Christ_ was cut off and the city and sanctuary destroyed by the _Romans_,
+is well known.
+
+_Yet shall he confirm the covenant with many for one week._ He kept it,
+notwithstanding his death, till the rejection of the _Jews_, and calling of
+_Cornelius_ and the _Gentiles_ in the seventh year after his passion.
+
+_And in half a week he shall cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease_;
+that is, by the war of the _Romans_ upon the _Jews_: which war, after some
+commotions, began in the 13th year of _Nero_, A.D. 67, in the spring, when
+_Vespasian_ with an army invaded them; and ended in the second year of
+_Vespasian_, A.D. 70, in autumn, _Sept._ 7, when _Titus_ took the city,
+having burnt the Temple 27 days before: so that it lasted three years and
+an half.
+
+_And upon a wing of abominations he shall cause desolation, even until the
+consummation, and that which is determined be poured upon the desolate._
+The Prophets, in representing kingdoms by Beasts and Birds, put their wings
+stretcht out over any country for their armies sent out to invade and rule
+over that country. Hence a wing of abominations is an army of false Gods:
+for an abomination is often put in scripture for a false God; as where
+_Chemosh_ is called [10] the abomination of _Moab_, and _Molech_ the
+abomination of _Ammon_. The meaning therefore is, that the people of a
+Prince to come shall destroy the sanctuary, and abolish the daily worship
+of the true God, and overspread the land with an army of false gods; and by
+setting up their dominion and worship, cause desolation to the _Jews_,
+until the times of the _Gentiles_ be fulfilled. For _Christ_ tells us, that
+the abomination of desolation spoken of by _Daniel_ was to be set up in the
+times of the _Roman Empire_, _Matth._ xxiv. 15.
+
+Thus have we in this short Prophecy, a prediction of all the main periods
+relating to the coming of the _Messiah_; the time of his birth, that of his
+death, that of the rejection of the _Jews_, the duration of the _Jewish_
+war whereby he caused the city and sanctuary to be destroyed, and the time
+of his second coming: and so the interpretation here given is more full and
+complete and adequate to the design, than if we should restrain it to his
+first coming only, as Interpreters usually do. We avoid also the doing
+violence to the language of _Daniel_, by taking the _seven weeks_ and
+_sixty two weeks_ for one number. Had that been _Daniel_'s meaning, he
+would have said _sixty and nine weeks_, and not _seven weeks_ and _sixty
+two weeks_, a way of numbring used by no nation. In our way the years are
+_Jewish Luni-solar years_, [11] as they ought to be; and the _seventy weeks
+of years_ are _Jewish weeks_ ending with _sabbatical years_, which is very
+remarkable. For they end either with the year of the birth of _Christ_, two
+years before the vulgar account, or with the year of his death, or with the
+seventh year after it: all which are _sabbatical years_. Others either
+count by Lunar years, or by weeks not _Judaic_: and, which is worst, they
+ground their interpretations on erroneous Chronology, excepting the opinion
+of _Funccius_ about the _seventy weeks_, which is the same with ours. For
+they place _Ezra_ and _Nehemiah_ in the reign of _Artaxerxes Mnemon_, and
+the building of the Temple in the reign of _Darius Nothus_, and date the
+weeks of _Daniel_ from those two reigns.
+
+The grounds of the Chronology here followed, I will now set down as briefly
+as I can.
+
+The _Peloponnesian_ war began in spring _An._ 1 _Olymp._ 87, as _Diodorus_,
+_Eusebius_, and all other authors agree. It began two months before
+_Pythodorus_ ceased to be _Archon_, _Thucyd._ l. 2. that is, in _April_,
+two months before the end of the _Olympic_ year. Now the years of this war
+are most certainly determined by the 50 years distance of its first year
+from the transit of _Xerxes_ inclusively, _Thucyd._ l. 2. or 48 years
+exclusively, _Eratosth. apud Clem. Alex._ by the 69 years distance of its
+end, or 27th year, from the beginning of _Alexander_'s reign in _Greece_;
+by the acting of the _Olympic_ games in its 4th and 12th years, _Thucyd._
+l. 5; and by three eclipses of the sun, and one of the moon, mentioned by
+_Thucydides_ and _Xenophon_. Now _Thucydides_, an unquestionable witness,
+tells us, that the news of the death of _Artaxerxes Longimanus_ was brought
+to _Ephesus_, and from thence by some _Athenians_ to _Athens_, in the 7th
+year of this _Peloponnesian_ war, when the winter half year was running;
+and therefore he died _An._ 4 _Olymp._ 88, in the end of _An. J.P._ 4289,
+suppose a month or two before midwinter; for so long the news would be in
+coming. Now _Artaxerxes Longimanus_ reigned 40 years, by the consent of
+_Diodorus_, _Eusebius_, _Jerome_, _Sulpitius_; or 41, according to _Ptol.
+in can. Clem. Alexand._ l. 1. _Strom. Chron. Alexandr_. _Abulpharagius_,
+_Nicephorus_, including therein the reign of his successors _Xerxes_ and
+_Sogdian_, as _Abulpharagius_ informs us. After _Artaxerxes_ reigned his
+son _Xerxes_ two months, and _Sogdian_ seven months; but their reign is not
+reckoned apart in summing up the years of the Kings, but is included in the
+40 or 41 years reign of _Artaxerxes_: omit these nine months, and the
+precise reign of _Artaxerxes_ will be thirty nine years and three months.
+And therefore since his reign ended in the beginning of winter _An. J.P._
+4289, it began between midsummer and autumn, _An. J.P._ 4250.
+
+The same thing I gather also thus. _Cambyses_ began his reign in spring
+_An. J.P._ 4185, and reigned eight years, including the five months of
+_Smerdes_; and then _Darius Hystaspis_ began in spring _An. J.P._ 4193, and
+reigned thirty six years, by the unanimous consent of all Chronologers. The
+reigns of these two Kings are determined by three eclipses of the moon
+observed at _Babylon_, and recorded by _Ptolemy_; so that it cannot be
+disputed. One was in the seventh year of _Cambyses_, _An. J.P._ 4191,
+_Jul._ 16, at 11 at night; another in the 20th year of _Darius_, _An. J.P._
+4212, _Nov._ 19, at 11h. 45' at night; a third in the 31st year of
+_Darius_, _An. J.P._ 4223, _Apr._ 25, at 11h. 30 at night. By these
+eclipses, and the Prophecies of _Haggai_ and _Zechary_ compared together,
+it is manifest that his years began after the 24th day of the 11th _Jewish_
+month, and before the 25th day of _April_, and by consequence about
+_March_. _Xerxes_ therefore began in spring _An. J.P._ 4229: for _Darius_
+died in the fifth year after the battle at _Marathon_, as _Herodotus_,
+_lib._ 7, and _Plutarch_ mention; and that battle was in _October_ _An.
+J.P._ 4224, ten years before the battle at _Salamis_. _Xerxes_ therefore
+began within less than a year after _October_ _An. J.P._ 4228, suppose in
+the spring following: for he spent his first five years, and something
+more, in preparations for his expedition against the _Greeks_; and this
+expedition was in the time of the _Olympic_ games, _An._ 1 _Olymp._ 75,
+_Calliade Athenis Archonte_, 28 years after the _Regifuge_, and Consulship
+of the first Consul _Junius Brutus_, _Anno Urbis conditae_ 273, _Fabio &
+Furio Coss._ The passage of _Xerxes_'s army over the _Hellespont_ began in
+the end of the fourth year of the 74th _Olympiad_, that is, in _June_ _An.
+J.P._ 4234, and took up one month: and in autumn, three months after, on
+the full moon, the 16th day of the month _Munychion_, was the battle at
+_Salamis_, and a little after that an eclipse of the sun, which by the
+calculation fell on _Octob._ 2. His sixth year therefore began a little
+before _June_, suppose in spring _An. J.P._ 4234, and his first year
+consequently in spring _An. J.P._ 4229, as above. Now he reigned almost
+twenty one years, by the consent of all writers. Add the 7 months of
+_Artabanus_, and the sum will be 21 years and about four or five months,
+which end between midsummer and autumn _An. J.P._ 4250. At this time
+therefore began the reign of his successor _Artaxerxes_, as was to be
+proved.
+
+The same thing is also confirmed by _Julius Africanus_, who informs us out
+of former writers, that the 20th year of this _Artaxerxes_ was the 115th
+year from the beginning of the reign of _Cyrus_ in _Persia,_ and fell in
+with _An._ 4 _Olymp._ 83. It began therefore with the _Olympic_ year, soon
+after the summer Solstice, _An. J.P._ 4269. Subduct nineteen years, and his
+first year will begin at the same time of the year _An. J.P._ 4250, as
+above.
+
+His 7th year therefore began after midsummer _An. J.P._ 4256; and the
+Journey of _Ezra_ to _Jerusalem_ in the spring following fell on the
+beginning of _An. J.P._ 4257, as above.
+
+Notes to Chap. X.
+
+[1] Chap. ix. 24, 25, 26, 27.
+
+[2] _Cut upon_. A phrase in _Hebrew_, taken from the practise of numbring
+by cutting notches.
+
+[3] Heb. _to seal_, i.e. to finish or consummate: a metaphor taken from
+sealing what is finished. So the _Jews_ compute, _ad obsignatum Misna, ad
+obsignatum Talmud_, that is, _ad absolutum_.
+
+[4] Heb. _the Prophet_, not the Prophecy.
+
+[5] Heb. _the Messiah_, that is, in _Greek_, _the Christ_; in _English_,
+_the Anointed_. I use the _English_ word, that the relation of this clause
+to the former may appear.
+
+[6] _Jerusalem_.
+
+[7] See _Isa._ xxiii. 13.
+
+[8] Iren. l. 5. Haer. c. 25.
+
+[9] Apud Hieron. in h. l.
+
+[10] 1 Kings xi. 7.
+
+[11] The antient solar years of the eastern nations consisted of 12 months,
+and every month of 30 days: and hence came the division of a circle into
+360 degrees. This year seems to be used by _Moses_ in his history of the
+Flood, and by _John_ in the _Apocalypse_, where a time, times and half a
+time, 42 months and 1260 days, are put equipollent. But in reckoning by
+many of these years together, an account is to be kept of the odd days
+which were added to the end of these years. For the _Egyptians_ added five
+days to the end of this year; and so did the _Chaldeans_ long before the
+times of _Daniel_, as appears by the _AEra_, of _Nabonassar_: and the
+_Persian_ Magi used the same year of 365 days, till the Empire of the
+_Arabians_. The antient _Greeks_ also used the same solar year of 12 equal
+months, or 360 days; but every other year added an intercalary month,
+consisting of 10 and 11 days alternately.
+
+The year of the _Jews_, even from their coming out of _Egypt_, was
+Luni-solar. It was solar, for the harvest always followed the Passover, and
+the fruits of the land were always gathered before the feast of
+Tabernacles, _Levit._ xxiii. But the months were lunar, for the people were
+commanded by _Moses_ in the beginning of every month to blow with trumpets,
+and offer burnt offerings with their drink offerings, _Num._ x. 10. xxviii.
+11, 14. and this solemnity was kept on the new moons, _Psal._ lxxxi. 3,4,5.
+1 _Chron._ xxiii. 31. These months were called by _Moses_ the first,
+second, third, fourth month, _&c._ and the first month was also called
+_Abib_, the second _Zif_, the seventh _Ethanim_, the eighth _Bull_, _Exod._
+xiii. 4. 1 _Kings_ vi. 37, 38. viii. 2. But in the _Babylonian_ captivity
+the _Jews_ used the names of the _Chaldean_ months, and by those names
+understood the months of their own year; so that the _Jewish_ months then
+lost their old names, and are now called by those of the _Chaldeans_.
+
+The _Jews_ began their civil year from the autumnal Equinox, and their
+sacred year from the vernal: and the first day of the first month was on
+the visible new moon, which was nearest the Equinox.
+
+Whether _Daniel_ used the _Chaldaick_ or _Jewish_ year, is not very
+material; the difference being but six hours in a year, and 4 months in 480
+years. But I take his months to be _Jewish_: first, because _Daniel_ was a
+_Jew_, and the _Jews_ even by the names of the _Chaldean_ months understood
+the months of their own year: secondly, because this Prophecy is grounded
+on _Jeremiah_'s concerning the 70 years captivity, and therefore must be
+understood of the same sort of years with the seventy; and those are
+_Jewish_, since that Prophecy was given in _Judea_ before the captivity:
+and lastly, because _Daniel_ reckons by weeks of years, which is a way of
+reckoning peculiar to the _Jewish_ years. For as their days ran by sevens,
+and the last day of every seven was a sabbath; so their years ran by
+sevens, and the last year of every seven was a sabbatical year, and seven
+such weeks of years made a _Jubilee_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. XI.
+
+_Of the Times of the Birth and Passion of _Christ__.
+
+The times of the Birth and Passion of _Christ_, with such like niceties,
+being not material to religion, were little regarded by the _Christians_ of
+the first age. They who began first to celebrate them, placed them in the
+cardinal periods of the year; as the annunciation of the Virgin _Mary_, on
+the 25th of _March_, which when _Julius Caesar_ corrected the Calendar was
+the vernal Equinox; the feast of _John_ Baptist on the 24th of _June_,
+which was the summer Solstice; the feast of St. _Michael_ on _Sept._ 29,
+which was the autumnal Equinox; and the birth of _Christ_ on the winter
+Solstice, _Decemb._ 25, with the feasts of St. _Stephen_, St. _John_ and
+the _Innocents_, as near it as they could place them. And because the
+Solstice in time removed from the 25th of _December_ to the 24th, the 23d,
+the 22d, and so on backwards, hence some in the following centuries placed
+the birth of _Christ_ on _Decemb._ 23, and at length on _Decemb._ 20: and
+for the same reason they seem to have set the feast of St. _Thomas_ on
+_Decemb._ 21, and that of St. _Matthew_ on _Sept._ 21. So also at the
+entrance of the Sun into all the signs in the _Julian_ Calendar, they
+placed the days of other Saints; as the conversion of _Paul_ on _Jan._ 25,
+when the Sun entred [Aquarius]; St. _Matthias_ on _Feb._ 25, when he entred
+[Pisces]; St. _Mark_ on _Apr._ 25, when he entred [Taurus]; _Corpus
+Christi_ on _May_ 26, when he entred [Gemini]; St. _James_ on _July_ 25,
+when he entred [Cancer]; St. _Bartholomew_ on _Aug._ 24, when he entred
+[Virgo]; _Simon_ and _Jude_ on _Octob._ 28, when he entred [Scorpio]: and
+if there were any other remarkable days in the _Julian_ Calendar, they
+placed the Saints upon them, as St. _Barnabas_ on _June_ 11, where _Ovid_
+seems to place the feast of _Vesta_ and _Fortuna_, and the goddess
+_Matuta_; and St. _Philip_ and _James_ on the first of _May_, a day
+dedicated both to the _Bona Dea_, or _Magna Mater_, and to the goddess
+_Flora_, and still celebrated with her rites. All which shews that these
+days were fixed in the first _Christian_ Calendars by Mathematicians at
+pleasure, without any ground in tradition; and that the _Christians_
+afterwards took up with what they found in the Calendars.
+
+Neither was there any certain tradition about the years of _Christ_. For
+the _Christians_ who first began to enquire into these things, as _Clemens
+Alexandrinus_, _Origen_, _Tertullian_, _Julius Africanus_, _Lactantius_,
+_Jerome_, St. _Austin_, _Sulpicius Severus_, _Prosper_, and as many as
+place the death of _Christ_ in the 15th or 16th year of _Tiberius_, make
+_Christ_ to have preached but one year, or at most but two. At length
+_Eusebius_ discovered four successive Passovers in the Gospel of _John_,
+and thereupon set on foot an opinion that he preacht three years and an
+half; and so died in the 19th year of _Tiberius_. Others afterwards,
+finding the opinion that he died in the Equinox _Mar._ 25, more consonant
+to the times of the _Jewish_ Passover, in the 17th and 20th years, have
+placed his death in one of those two years. Neither is there any greater
+certainty in the opinions about the time of his birth. The first
+_Christians_ placed his baptism near the beginning of the 15th year of
+_Tiberius_; and thence reckoning thirty years backwards, placed his birth
+in the 43d _Julian_ year, the 42d of _Augustus_ and 28th of the _Actiac_
+victory. This was the opinion which obtained in the first ages, till
+_Dionysius Exiguus_, placing the baptism of _Christ_ in the 16th year of
+_Tiberius_, and misinterpreting the text of _Luke_, iii. 23. as if _Jesus_
+was only beginning to be 30 years old when he was baptized, invented the
+vulgar account, in which his birth is placed two years later than before.
+As therefore relating to these things there is no tradition worth
+considering; let us lay aside all and examine what prejudices can be
+gathered from records of good account.
+
+The fifteenth year of _Tiberius_ began _Aug._ 28, _An. J.P._ 4727. So soon
+as the winter was over, and the weather became warm enough, we may reckon
+that _John_ began to baptize; and that before next winter his fame went
+abroad, and all the people came to his baptism, and _Jesus_ among the rest.
+Whence the first Passover after his baptism mentioned _John_ ii. 13. was in
+the 16th year of _Tiberius_. After this feast _Jesus_ came into the land of
+_Judea_, and staid there baptizing, whilst _John_ was baptizing in _AEnon_,
+_John_ iii. 22, 23. But when he heard that _John_ was cast into prison, he
+departed into _Galilee_, _Mat._ iii. 12. being afraid, because the
+Pharisees had heard that he baptized more disciples than _John_, _John_ iv.
+1. and in his journey he passed thro' _Samaria_ four months before the
+harvest, _John_ iv. 35. that is, about the time of the winter Solstice. For
+their harvest was between _Easter_ and _Whitsunday_, and began about a
+month after the vernal Equinox. _Say not ye_, saith he, _there are yet four
+months, and then cometh harvest? Behold I say unto you, lift up your eyes,
+and look on the fields, for they are white already to harvest_; meaning,
+that the people in the fields were ready for the Gospel, as his next words
+shew[1]. _John_ therefore was imprisoned about _November_, in the 17th year
+of _Tiberius_; and _Christ_ thereupon went from _Judea_ to _Cana_ of
+_Galilee_ in _December_, and was received there of the _Galileans_, who had
+seen all he did at _Jerusalem_ at the Passover: and when a Nobleman of
+_Capernaum_ heard he was returned into _Galilee_, and went to him and
+desired him to come and cure his son, he went not thither yet, but only
+said, _Go thy way, thy son liveth; and the Nobleman returned and found it
+so, and believed, he and his house_, John iv. This is the beginning of his
+miracles in _Galilee_; and thus far _John_ is full and distinct in relating
+the actions of his first year, omitted by the other Evangelists. The rest
+of his history is from this time related more fully by the other
+Evangelists than by _John_; for what they relate he omits.
+
+From this time therefore _Jesus_ taught in the Synagogues of _Galilee_ on
+the sabbath-days, being glorified of all: and coming to his own city
+_Nazareth_, and preaching in their Synagogue, they were offended, and
+thrust him out of the city, and led him to the brow of the hill on which
+the city was built to cast him headlong; but he passing thro' the midst of
+them, went his way, and came and dwelt at _Capernaum_, _Luke_ iv. And by
+this time we may reckon the second Passover was either past or at hand.
+
+All this time _Matthew_ passeth over in few words, and here begins to
+relate the preaching and miracles of _Christ_. _When _Jesus__, saith he,
+_had heard that _John_ was cast into prison, he departed into _Galilee_;
+and leaving _Nazareth_, he came and dwelt at _Capernaum_, and from that
+time began to preach and say, Repent, for the kingdom of heaven is at
+hand_, Matth. iv. 12. Afterwards he called his disciples _Peter_, _Andrew_,
+_James_ and _John_; and then _went about all_ Galilee, _teaching in the
+Synagogues,--and healing all manner of sickness:--and his fame went
+thro'out all _Syria_; and they brought unto him all sick people,--and there
+followed him great multitudes of people from _Galilee_, and from
+_Decapolis_, and from _Jerusalem_, and from _Judea_, and from beyond
+_Jordan__, Matth, iv. 18, 25. All this was done before the sermon in the
+mount: and therefore we may certainly reckon that the second Passover was
+past before the preaching of that sermon. The multitudes that followed him
+from _Jerusalem_ and _Judea_, shew that he had lately been there at the
+feast. The sermon in the mount was made when great multitudes came to him
+from all places, and followed him in the open fields; which is an argument
+of the summer-season: and in this sermon he pointed at the lilies of the
+field then in the flower before the eyes of his auditors. _Consider_, saith
+he, _the lilies of the field, how they grow; they toil not, neither do they
+spin; and yet _Solomon_ in all his glory was not arayed like one of these.
+Wherefore if God so clothe the grass of the field, which to day is and to
+morrow is cast into the oven_, &c. _Matth._ vi. 28. So therefore the grass
+of the field was now in the flower, and by consequence the month of _March_
+with the Passover was past.
+
+Let us see therefore how the rest of the feasts follow in order in
+_Matthew_'s Gospel: for he was an eye-witness of what he relates, and so
+tells all things in due order of time, which _Mark_ and _Luke_ do not.
+
+Some time after the sermon in the mount, when the time came that he should
+be received, that is, when the time of a feast came that he should be
+received by the _Jews_, he set his face to go to _Jerusalem_: and as he
+went with his disciples in the way, when the _Samaritans_ in his passage
+thro' _Samaria_ had denied him lodgings, and a certain Scribe said unto
+him, _Master, I will follow thee whithersoever thou goest_, Jesus _said
+unto him, The foxes have holes, and the birds of the air have nests, but
+the Son of man hath not where to lay his head_, Matth. viii. 19. Luke ix.
+51, 57. The Scribe told _Christ_ he would bear him company in his journey,
+and _Christ_ replied that he wanted a lodging. Now this feast I take to be
+the feast of Tabernacles, because soon after I find _Christ_ and his
+Apostles on the sea of _Tiberias_ in a storm so great, that the ship was
+covered with water and in danger of sinking, till _Christ rebuked the winds
+and the sea_, Matth. viii. 23. For this storm shews that winter was now
+come on.
+
+After this _Christ_ did many miracles, and _went about all the cities and
+villages of _Galilee_, teaching in their Synagogues, and preaching the
+gospel of the kingdom, and healing every sickness, and every disease among
+the people_, Matth. ix. he then sent forth the twelve to do the like,
+_Matth._ x. and at length when he had received a message from _John_, and
+answered it, he said to the multitudes, _From the days of _John_ the
+Baptist until now the kingdom of heaven suffereth violence_; and upbraided
+the cities, _Chorazin_, _Bethsaida_, and _Capernaum_, wherein most of his
+mighty works were done, because they repented not, _Matth._ xi. Which
+several passages shew, that from the imprisonment of _John_ till now there
+had been a considerable length of time: the winter was now past, and the
+next Passover was at hand; for immediately after this, _Matthew_, in chap.
+xii. subjoins, that _Jesus went on the sabbath-day thro' the corn, and his
+disciples were an hungred, and began to pluck the ears of corn and to
+eat,--rubbing them_, saith _Luke_, _in their hands_: the corn therefore was
+not only in the ear, but ripe; and consequently the Passover, in which the
+first-fruits were always offered before the harvest, was now come or past.
+_Luke_ calls this sabbath [Greek: deuteroproton], the second prime sabbath,
+that is, the second of the two great feasts of the Passover. As we call
+_Easter_ day high _Easter_, and its _octave_ low _Easter_ or _Lowsunday_:
+so _Luke_ calls the feast on the seventh day of the unlevened bread, the
+second of the two prime sabbaths.
+
+In one of the sabbaths following he went into a Synagogue, and healed a man
+with a withered hand, _Matth._ xii. 9. _Luke_ vi. 6. And when the Pharisees
+took counsel to destroy him, _he withdrew himself from thence, and great
+multitudes followed him; and he healed them all, and charged them that they
+should not make him known_, Matth. xii. 14. Afterwards being in a ship, and
+the multitude standing on the shore, he spake to them three parables
+together, taken from the seeds-men sowing the fields, _Matth._ xiii. by
+which we may know that it was now seed-time, and by consequence that the
+feast of Tabernacles was past. After this he went _into his own country,
+and taught them in their Synagogue_, but _did not many mighty works there
+because of their unbelief_. Then the twelve having been abroad a year,
+returned, and told _Jesus_ all that they had done: and at the same time
+_Herod_ beheaded _John_ in prison, and his disciples came and told _Jesus_;
+and when _Jesus_ heard it, he took the twelve and departed thence privately
+by ship into a desert place belonging to _Bethsaida_: and the people when
+they knew it, followed him on foot out of the cities, the winter being now
+past; and he healed their sick, and in the desert fed them to the number of
+five thousand men, besides women and children, with only five loaves and
+two fishes, _Matth._ xiv. _Luke_ ix. at the doing of which miracle the
+Passover of the _Jews_ was nigh, _John_ vi. 4. But _Jesus_ went not up to
+this feast; but _after these things walked in _Galilee_, because the
+_Jews__ at the Passover before had taken counsel to destroy him, and still
+_sought to kill him_, John vii. i. Henceforward therefore he is found first
+in the coast of _Tyre_ and _Sidon_, then by the sea of _Galilee_,
+afterwards in the coast of _Caesarea Philippi_; and lastly at _Capernaum_,
+_Matth._ xv. 21, 29. xvi. 13. xvii. 34.
+
+Afterwards when the feast of Tabernacles was at hand, his brethren
+upbraided him for walking secretly, and urged him to go up to the feast.
+But he went not till they were gone, and then went up privately, _John_
+vii. 2. and when the _Jews_ sought to stone him, he escaped, _John_ viii.
+59. After this he was at the feast of the Dedication in winter, _John_ x.
+22. and when they sought again to take him, he fled beyond _Jordan_, _John_
+x. 39, 40. _Matth_. xix. 1. where he stayed till the death of _Lazarus_,
+and then came to _Bethany_ near _Jerusalem_, and raised him, _John_ xi. 7,
+18. whereupon the _Jews_ took counsel from that time to kill him: and
+_therefore_ he _walked no more openly among the _Jews_, but went thence
+into a country near to the wilderness, into a city called _Ephraim_; and
+there continued with his disciples_ till the last Passover, in which the
+_Jews_ put him to death, _John_ xi. 53, 54.
+
+Thus have we, in the Gospels of _Matthew_ and _John_ compared together, the
+history of _Christ_'s actions in continual order during five Passovers.
+_John_ is more distinct in the beginning and end; _Matthew_ in the middle:
+what either omits, the other supplies. The first Passover was between the
+baptism of _Christ_ and the imprisonment of _John, John_ ii. 13. the second
+within four months after the imprisonment of _John_, and _Christ_'s
+beginning to preach in _Galilee_, _John_ iv. 35. and therefore it was
+either that feast to which _Jesus_ went up, when the Scribe desired to
+follow him, _Matth._ viii. 19. _Luke_ ix. 51, 57. or the feast before it.
+The third was the next feast after it, when the corn was eared and ripe,
+_Matth_, xii. 1. _Luke_ vi. 1. The fourth was that which was nigh at hand
+when _Christ_ wrought the miracle of the five loaves, _Matth_. xiv. 15.
+_John_ vi. 4, 5. and the fifth was that in which _Christ_ suffered,
+_Matth._ xx. 17. _John_ xii. 1.
+
+Between the first and second Passover _John_ and _Christ_ baptized
+together, till the imprisonment of _John_, which was four months before the
+second. Then _Christ_ began to preach, and call his disciples; and after he
+had instructed them a year, lent them to preach in the cities of the
+_Jews_: at the same time _John_ hearing of the fame of _Christ_, sent to
+him to know who he was. At the third, the chief Priests began to consult
+about the death of _Christ_. A little before the fourth, the twelve after
+they had preached a year in all the cities, returned to _Christ_; and at
+the same time _Herod_ beheaded _John_ in prison, after he had been in
+prison two years and a quarter: and thereupon _Christ_ fled into the desart
+for fear of _Herod_. The fourth _Christ_ went not up to _Jerusalem_ for
+fear of the _Jews_, who at the Passover before had consulted his death, and
+because his time was not yet come. Thenceforward therefore till the feast
+of Tabernacles he walked in _Galilee_, and that secretly for fear of
+_Herod_: and after the feast of Tabernacles he returned no more into
+_Galilee_, but sometimes was at _Jerusalem_, and sometimes retired beyond
+_Jordan_, or to the city _Ephraim_ by the wilderness, till the Passover in
+which he was betrayed, apprehended, and crucified.
+
+_John_ therefore baptized two summers, and _Christ_ preached three. The
+first summer _John_ preached to make himself known, in order to give
+testimony to _Christ_. Then, after _Christ_ came to his baptism and was
+made known to him, he baptized another summer, to make _Christ_ known by
+his testimony; and _Christ_ also baptized the same summer, to make himself
+the more known: and by reason of _John_'s testimony there came more to
+_Christ_'s baptism than to _John_'s. The winter following _John_ was
+imprisoned; and now his course being at an end, _Christ_ entered upon his
+proper office of preaching in the cities. In the beginning of his preaching
+he completed the number of the twelve Apostles, and instructed them all the
+first year in order to send them abroad. Before the end of this year, his
+fame by his preaching and miracles was so far spread abroad, that the
+_Jews_ at the Passover following consulted how to kill him. In the second
+year of his preaching, it being no longer safe for him to converse openly
+in _Judea_, he sent the twelve to preach in all their cities: and in the
+end of the year they returned to him, and told him all they had done. All
+the last year the twelve continued with him to be instructed more
+perfectly, in order to their preaching to all nations after his death. And
+upon the news of _John_'s death, being afraid of _Herod_ as well as of the
+_Jews_, he walked this year more secretly than before; frequenting desarts,
+and spending the last half of the year in _Judea_, without the dominions of
+_Herod_.
+
+Thus have we in the Gospels of _Matthew_ and _John_ all things told in due
+order, from the beginning of _John_'s preaching to the death of _Christ_,
+and the years distinguished from one another by such essential characters
+that they cannot be mistaken. The second Passover is distinguished from the
+first, by the interposition of _John_'s imprisonment. The third is
+distinguished from the second, by a double character: first, by the
+interposition of the feast to which _Christ_ went up, _Mat._ viii. 19.
+_Luke_ ix. 57. and secondly, by the distance of time from the beginning of
+_Christ_'s preaching: for the second was in the beginning of his preaching,
+and the third so long after, that before it came _Christ_ said, _from the
+days of _John_ the Baptist until now_, &c. and upbraided the cities of
+_Galilee_ for their not repenting at his preaching, and mighty works done
+in all that time. The fourth is distinguished from the third, by the
+mission of the twelve from _Christ_ to preach in the cities of _Judea_ in
+all the interval. The fifth is distinguished from all the former by the
+twelve's being returned from preaching, and continuing with _Christ_ during
+all the interval, between the fourth and fifth, and by the passion and
+other infallible characters.
+
+Now since the first summer of _John_'s baptizing fell in the fifteenth year
+of the Emperor _Tiberius_, and by consequence the first of these five
+Passovers in his sixteenth year; the last of them, in which _Jesus_
+suffered, will fall on the twentieth year of the same Emperor; and by
+consequence in the Consulship of _Fabius_ and _Vitellius_, in the 79th
+_Julian_ year, and year of _Christ_ 34, which was the sabbatical year of
+the _Jews_. And that it did so, I further confirm by these arguments.
+
+I take it for granted that the passion was on friday the 14th day of the
+month _Nisan_, the great feast of the Passover on saturday the 15th day of
+_Nisan_, and the resurrection on the day following. Now the 14th day of
+_Nisan_ always fell on the full moon next after the vernal Equinox; and the
+month began at the new moon before, not at the true conjunction, but at the
+first appearance of the new moon: for the _Jews_ referred all the time of
+the silent moon, as they phrased it, that is, of the moon's disappearing,
+to the old moon; and because the first appearance might usually be about 18
+hours after the true conjunction, they therefore began their month from the
+sixth hour at evening, that is, at sun set, next after the eighteenth hour
+from the conjunction. And this rule they called [Hebrew: YH] _Jah_,
+designing by the letters [Hebrew: Y] and [Hebrew: H] the number 18.
+
+I know that _Epiphanius_ tells us, if some interpret his words rightly,
+that the _Jews_ used a vicious cycle, and thereby anticipated the legal new
+moons by two days. But this surely he spake not as a witness, for he
+neither understood _Astronomy_ nor _Rabbinical_ learning, but as arguing
+from his erroneous hypothesis about the time of the passion. For the _Jews_
+did not anticipate, but postpone their months: they thought it lawful to
+begin their months a day later than the first appearance of the new moon,
+because the new moon continued for more days than one; but not a day
+sooner, lest they should celebrate the new moon before there was any. And
+the _Jews_ still keep a tradition in their books, that the _Sanhedrim_ used
+diligently to define the new moons by sight: sending witnesses into
+mountainous places, and examining them about the moon's appearing, and
+translating the new moon from the day they had agreed on to the day before,
+as often as witnesses came from distant regions, who had seen it a day
+sooner than it was seen at _Jerusalem_. Accordingly _Josephus_, one of the
+_Jewish_ Priests who ministred in the temple, tells us [2] that the
+Passover was kept _on the 14th day of_ Nisan, [Greek: kata selenen]
+_according to the moon, when the sun was in _Aries__. This is confirmed
+also by two instances, recorded by him, which totally overthrow the
+hypothesis of the _Jews_ using a vicious cycle. For that year in which
+_Jerusalem_ was taken and destroyed, he saith, the Passover was on the 14th
+day of the month _Xanticus_, which according to _Josephus_ is our _April_;
+and that five years before, it fell on the 8th day of the same month. Which
+two instances agree with the course of the moon.
+
+Computing therefore the new moons of the first month according to the
+course of the moon and the rule _Jah_, and thence counting 14 days, I find
+that the 14th day of this month in the year of _Christ_ 31, fell on tuesday
+_March_ 27; in the year 32, on sunday _Apr._ 13; in the year 33, on friday
+_Apr._ 3; in the year 34, on wednesday _March_ 24, or rather, for avoiding
+the Equinox which fell on the same day, and for having a fitter time for
+harvest, on thursday _Apr._ 22. also in the year 35, on tuesday _Apr._ 12.
+and in the year 36, on saturday _March_ 31.
+
+But because the 15th and 21st days of _Nisan_, and a day or two of
+_Pentecost_, and the 10th, 15th, and 22d of _Tisri_, were always sabbatical
+days or days of rest, and it was inconvenient on two sabbaths together to
+be prohibited burying their dead and making ready fresh meat, for in that
+hot region their meat would be apt in two days to corrupt: to avoid these
+and such like inconveniences, the _Jews_ postponed their months a day, as
+often as the first day of the month _Tisri_, or, which is all one, the
+third of the month _Nisan_, was sunday, wednesday or friday: and this rule
+they called [Hebrew: 'DW] _Adu_, by the letters [Hebrew: W , D , ']
+signifying the numbers 1, 4, 6; that is, the 1st, 4th, and 6th days of the
+week; which days we call sunday, wednesday and friday. Postponing therefore
+by this rule the months found above; the 14th day of the month _Nisan_ will
+fall in the year of _Christ_ 31, on wednesday _March_ 28; in the year 32,
+on monday _Apr._ 14; in the year 33, on friday _Apr._ 3; in the year 34, on
+friday _Apr._ 23; in the year 35, on wednesday _Apr._ 13, and in the year
+36, on saturday _March_ 31.
+
+By this computation therefore the year 32 is absolutely excluded, because
+the Passion cannot fall on friday without making it five days after the
+full moon, or two days before it; whereas it ought to be upon the day of
+the full moon, or the next day. For the same reason the years 31 and 35 are
+excluded, because in them the Passion cannot fall on friday, without making
+it three days after the full moon, or four days before it: errors so
+enormous, that they would be very conspicuous in the heavens to every
+vulgar eye. The year 36 is contended for by few or none, and both this and
+the year 35 may be thus excluded.
+
+_Tiberius_ in the beginning of his reign made _Valerius Gratus_ President
+of _Judea_; and after 11 years, substituted _Pontius Pilate_, who governed
+10 years. Then _Vitellius_, newly made President of _Syria_, deprived him
+of his honour, substituting _Marcellus_, and at length sent him to _Rome_:
+but, by reason of delays, _Tiberius_ died before _Pilate_ got thither. In
+the mean time _Vitellius_, after he had deposed _Pilate_, came to
+_Jerusalem_ in the time of the Passover, to visit that Province as well as
+others in the beginning of his office; and in the place of _Caiaphas_, then
+High Priest, created _Jonathas_ the son of _Ananus_, or _Annas_ as he is
+called in scripture. Afterwards, when _Vitellius_ was returned to
+_Antioch_, he received letters from _Tiberius_, to make peace with
+_Artabanus_ king of the _Parthians_. At the same time the _Alans_, by the
+sollicitation of _Tiberius_, invaded the kingdom of _Artabanus_; and his
+subjects also, by the procurement of _Vitellius_, soon after rebelled: for
+_Tiberius_ thought that _Artabanus_, thus pressed with difficulties, would
+more readily accept the conditions of peace. _Artabanus_ therefore
+straightway gathering a greater army, opprest the rebels; and then meeting
+_Vitellius_ at _Euphrates_, made a league with the _Romans_. After this
+_Tiberius_ commanded _Vitellius_ to make war upon _Aretas_ King of
+_Arabia_. He therefore leading his army against _Aretas_, went together
+with _Herod_ to _Jerusalem_, to sacrifice at the publick feast which was
+then to be celebrated. Where being received honourably, he stayed three
+days, and in the mean while translated the high Priesthood from _Jonathas_
+to his brother _Theophilus_: and the fourth day, receiving letters of the
+death of _Tiberius_, made the people swear allegiance to _Caius_ the new
+Emperor; and recalling his army, sent them into quarters. All this is
+related by _Josephus_ _Antiq._ _lib._ 18. _c._ 6, 7. Now _Tiberius_ reigned
+22 years and 7 months, and died _March_ 16, in the beginning of the year of
+_Christ_ 37; and the feast of the Passover fell on _April_ 20 following,
+that is, 35 days after the death of _Tiberius_: so that there were about 36
+or 38 days, for the news of his death to come from _Rome_ to _Vitellius_ at
+_Jerusalem_; which being a convenient time for that message, confirms that
+the feast which _Vitellius_ and _Herod_ now went up to was the Passover.
+For had it been the Pentecost, as is usually supposed, _Vitellius_ would
+have continued three months ignorant of the Emperor's death: which is not
+to be supposed. However, the things done between this feast and the
+Passover which _Vitellius_ was at before, namely, the stirring up a
+sedition in _Parthia_, the quieting that sedition, the making a league
+after that with the _Parthians_, the sending news of that league to _Rome_,
+the receiving new orders from thence to go against the _Arabians_, and the
+putting those orders in execution; required much more time than the fifty
+days between the Passover and Pentecost of the same year: and therefore the
+Passover which _Vitellius_ first went up to, was in the year before.
+Therefore _Pilate_ was deposed before the Passover A.C. 36, and by
+consequence the passion of _Christ_ was before that Passover: for he
+suffered not under _Vitellius_, nor under _Vitellius_ and _Pilate_
+together, but under _Pilate_ alone.
+
+Now it is observable that the high Priesthood was at this time become an
+annual office, and the Passover was the time of making a new high Priest.
+For _Gratus_ the predecessor of _Pilate_, saith _Josephus_, made _Ismael_
+high Priest after _Ananus_; and a while after, suppose a year, deposed him,
+and substituted _Eleazar_, and a year after _Simon_, and after another year
+_Caiaphas_; and then gave way to _Pilate_. So _Vitellius_ at one Passover
+made _Jonathas_ successor to _Caiaphas_, and at the next _Theophilus_ to
+_Jonathas_. Hence _Luke_ tells us, that in the 15th year of _Tiberius_,
+_Annas_ and _Caiaphas_ were high Priests, that is, _Annas_ till the
+Passover, and _Caiaphas_ afterwards. Accordingly _John_ speaks of the high
+Priesthood as an annual office: for he tells us again and again, in the
+last year of _Christ_'s preaching, that _Caiaphas_ was high Priest for that
+year, _John_ xi. 49, 51. xviii. 13. And the next year _Luke_ tells you,
+that _Annas_ was high Priest, _Acts_ iv. 6. _Theophilus_ was therefore made
+high Priest in the first year of _Caius_, _Jonathas_ in the 22d year of
+_Tiberius_, and _Caiaphas_ in the 21st year of the same Emperor: and
+therefore, allotting a year to each, the Passion, when _Annas_ succeeded
+_Caiaphas_, could not be later than the 20th year of _Tiberius_, A.C. 34.
+
+Thus there remain only the years 33 and 34 to be considered; and the year
+33 I exclude by this argument. In the Passover two years before the
+Passion, when _Christ_ went thro' the corn, and his disciples pluckt the
+ears, and rubbed them with their hands to eat; this ripeness of the corn
+shews that the Passover then fell late: and so did the Passover A.C. 32,
+_April 14_, but the Passover A.C. 31, _March 28th_, fell very early. It was
+not therefore two years after the year 31, but two years after 32 that
+_Christ_ suffered.
+
+Thus all the characters of the Passion agree to the year 34; and that is
+the only year to which they all agree.
+
+Notes to Chap. XI.
+
+[1] I observe, that _Christ_ and his forerunner _John_ in their parabolical
+discourses were wont to allude to things present. The old Prophets, when
+they would describe things emphatically, did not only draw parables from
+things which offered themselves, as from the rent of a garment, 1 _Sam._
+xv. from the sabbatic year, _Isa._ xxxvii. from the vessels of a Potter,
+_Jer._ xviii, &c. but also when such fit objects were wanting, they
+supplied them by their own actions, as by rending a garment, 1 _Kings_ xi.
+by shooting, 2 _Kings_ xiii. by making bare their body, _Isa._ xx. by
+imposing significant names to their sons, _Isa._ viii. _Hos._ i. by hiding
+a girdle in the bank of _Euphrates_, _Jer._ xiii. by breaking a potter's
+vessel, _Jer._ xix. by putting on fetters and yokes, _Jer._ xxvii. by
+binding a book to a stone, and casting them both into _Euphrates_, _Jer._
+li. by besieging a painted city, _Ezek._ iv. by dividing hair into three
+parts, _Ezek._ v. by making a chain, _Ezek._ vii. by carrying out houshold
+stuff like a captive and trembling, _Ezek._ xii, &c. By such kind of types
+the Prophets loved to speak. And _Christ_ being endued with a nobler
+prophetic spirit than the rest, excelled also in this kind of speaking, yet
+so as not to speak by his own actions, that was less grave and decent, but
+to turn into parables such things as offered themselves. On occasion of the
+harvest approaching, he admonishes his disciples once and again of the
+spiritual harvest, _John_ iv. 35. _Matth._ ix. 37. Seeing the lilies of the
+field, he admonishes his disciples about gay clothing, _Matth._ vi. 28. In
+allusion to the present season of fruits, he admonishes his disciples about
+knowing men by their fruits, _Matth._ vii. 16. In the time of the Passover,
+when trees put forth leaves, he bids his disciples _learn a parable from
+the fig tree: when its branch is yet tender and putteth forth leaves, ye
+know that summer is nigh_, &c. _Matth._ xxiv. 32. _Luke_ xxi. 29. The same
+day, alluding both to the season of the year and to his passion, which was
+to be two days after, he formed a parable of the time of fruits
+approaching, and the murdering of the heir, _Matth._ xxi. 33. Alluding at
+the same time, both to the money-changers whom he had newly driven out of
+the Temple, and to his passion at hand; he made a parable of a Noble-man
+going into a far country to receive a kingdom and return, and delivering
+his goods to his servants, and at his return condemning the slothful
+servant because he put not his money to the exchangers, _Matth._ xxv. 14.
+_Luke_ xix. 12. Being near the Temple where sheep were kept in folds to be
+sold for the sacrifices, he spake many things parabolically of sheep, of
+the shepherd, and of the door of the sheepfold; and discovers that he
+alluded to the sheepfolds which were to be hired in the market-place, by
+speaking of such folds as a thief could not enter by the door, nor the
+shepherd himself open, but a porter opened to the shepherd, _John_ x. 1, 3.
+Being in the mount of _Olives_, _Matth._ xxxvi. 30. _John_ xiv. 31. a place
+so fertile that it could not want vines, he spake many things mystically of
+the Husbandman, and of the vine and its branches, _John_ xv. Meeting a
+blind man, he admonished of spiritual blindness, _John_ ix. 39. At the
+sight of little children, he described once and again the innocence of the
+elect, _Matth._ xviii. 2. xix. 13. Knowing that _Lazarus_ was dead and
+should be raised again, he discoursed of the resurrection and life eternal,
+_John_ xi. 25, 26. Hearing of the slaughter of some whom _Pilate_ had
+slain, he admonished of eternal death, _Luke_ xiii. 1. To his fishermen he
+spake of fishers of men, _Matth._ iv. 10. and composed another parable
+about fishes. _Matth._ xiii. 47. Being by the Temple, he spake of the
+Temple of his body, _John_ ii. 19. At supper he spake a parable about the
+mystical supper to come in the kingdom of heaven, _Luke_ xiv. On occasion
+of temporal food, he admonished his disciples of spiritual food, and of
+eating his flesh and drinking his blood mystically, _John_ vi. 27, 53. When
+his disciples wanted bread, he bad them beware of the leven of the
+Pharisees, _Matth._ xvi. 6. Being desired to eat, he answered that he had
+other meat, _John_ iv. 31. In the great day of the feast of Tabernacles,
+when the _Jews_, as their custom was, brought a great quantity of waters
+from the river _Shiloah_ into the Temple, _Christ_ stood and cried, saying,
+_If any man thirst let him come unto me and drink. He that believeth in me,
+out of his belly shall flow rivers of living water_, John vii. 37. The next
+day, in allusion to the servants who by reason of the sabbatical year were
+newly set free, he said, _If ye continue in my word, the truth shall make
+you free_. Which the _Jews_ understanding literally with respect to the
+present manumission of servants, answered, _We be _Abraham_'s seed, and
+were never in bondage to any man: how sayeth thou, ye shall be made free?_
+John viii. They assert their freedom by a double argument: first, because
+they were the seed of _Abraham_, and therefore newly made free, had they
+been ever in bondage; and then, because they never were in bondage. In the
+last Passover, when _Herod_ led his army thro' _Judea_ against _Aretas_
+King of _Arabia_, because _Aretas_ was aggressor and the stronger in
+military forces, as appeared by the event; _Christ_ alluding to that state
+of things, composed the parable of a weaker King leading his army against a
+stronger who made war upon him, _Luke_ xiv. 31. And I doubt not but divers
+other parables were formed upon other occasions, the history of which we
+have not.
+
+[2] Joseph. Antiq. lib. 3. c. 10.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. XII.
+
+_Of the Prophecy of the Scripture of Truth._
+
+The kingdoms represented by the second and third Beasts, or the Bear and
+Leopard, are again described by _Daniel_ in his last Prophecy written in
+the third year of _Cyrus_ over _Babylon_, the year in which he conquered
+_Persia_. For this Prophecy is a commentary upon the Vision of the Ram and
+He-Goat.
+
+_Behold_, saith [1] he, _there shall stand up yet three kings in _Persia__,
+[_Cyrus_, _Cambyses_, and _Darius Hystaspes_] _and the fourth_ [_Xerxes_]
+_shall be far richer than they all: and by his strength thro' his riches he
+shall stir up all against the realm of _Grecia_. And a mighty king_
+[_Alexander_ the great] _shall stand up, that shall rule with great
+dominion, and do according to his will. And when he shall stand up, his
+kingdom shall be broken, and shall be divided towards the four winds of
+heaven; and not to his posterity_ [but after their death,] _nor according
+to his dominion which he ruled: for his kingdom shall be pluckt up, even
+for others besides those_. _Alexander_ the great having conquered all the
+_Persian_ Empire, and some part of _India_, died at _Babylon_ a month
+before the summer Solstice, in the year of _Nabonassar_ 425: and his
+captains gave the monarchy to his bastard brother _Philip Aridaeus_, a man
+disturbed in his understanding; and made _Perdiccas_ administrator of the
+kingdom. _Perdiccas_ with their consent made _Meleager_ commander of the
+army, _Seleucus_ master of the horse, _Craterus_ treasurer of the kingdom,
+_Antipater_ governor of _Macedon_ and _Greece_, _Ptolemy_ governor of
+_Egypt_; _Antigonus_ governor of _Pamphylia_, _Lycia_, _Lycaonia_, and
+_Phrygia major_; _Lysimachus_ governor of _Thrace_, and other captains
+governors of other Provinces; as many as had been so before in the days of
+_Alexander_ the great. The _Babylonians_ began now to count by a new _AEra_,
+which they called the _AEra_ of _Philip_, using the years of _Nabonassar_,
+and reckoning the 425th year of _Nabonassar_ to be the first year of
+_Philip_. _Roxana_ the wife of _Alexander_ being left big with child, and
+about three or four months after brought to bed of a son, they called him
+_Alexander_, saluted him King, and joined him with _Philip_, whom they had
+before placed in the throne. _Philip_ reigned three years under the
+administratorship of _Perdiccas_, two years more under the
+administratorship of _Antipater_, and above a year more under that of
+_Polyperchon_; in all six years and four months; and then was slain with
+his Queen _Eurydice_ in _September_ by the command of _Olympias_ the mother
+of _Alexander_ the great. The _Greeks_ being disgusted at the cruelties of
+_Olympias_, revolted to _Cassander_ the son and successor of _Antipater_.
+_Cassander_ affecting the dominion of _Greece_, slew _Olympias_; and soon
+after shut up the young king _Alexander_, with his mother _Roxana_, in the
+castle of _Amphipolis_, under the charge of _Glaucias_, _An. Nabonass._
+432. The next year _Ptolemy_, _Cassander_ and _Lysimachus_, by means of
+_Seleucus_, form'd a league against _Antigonus_; and after certain wars
+made peace with him, _An. Nabonass._ 438, upon these conditions: that
+_Cassander_ should command the forces of _Europe_ till _Alexander_ the son
+of _Roxana_ came to age; and that _Lysimachus_ should govern _Thrace_,
+_Ptolemy_ _Egypt_ and _Lybia_, and _Antigonus_ all _Asia_. _Seleucus_ had
+possest himself of _Mesopotamia_, _Babylonia_, _Sustana_ and _Media_, the
+year before. About three years after _Alexander_'s death he was made
+governor of _Babylon_ by _Antipater_; then was expelled by _Antigonus_; but
+now he recovered and enlarged his government over a great part of the
+_East_: which gave occasion to a new _AEra_, called _AEra Seleucidarum_. Not
+long after the peace made with _Antigonus_, _Diodorus_ saith the same
+_Olympic_ year; _Cassander_, seeing that _Alexander_ the son of _Roxana_
+grew up, and that it was discoursed thro'out _Macedonia_ that it was fit he
+should be set at liberty, and take upon him the government of his father's
+kingdom, commanded _Glaucias_ the governor of the castle to kill _Roxana_
+and the young king _Alexander_ her son, and conceal their deaths. Then
+_Polyperchon_ set up _Hercules_, the son of _Alexander_ the great by
+_Barsine_, to be king; and soon after, at the sollicitation of _Cassander_,
+caused him to be slain. Soon after that, upon a great victory at sea got by
+_Demetrius_ the son of _Antigonus_ over _Ptolemy_, _Antigonus_ took upon
+himself the title of king, and gave the same title to his son. This was
+_An. Nabonass._ 441. After his example, _Seleucus_, _Cassander_,
+_Lysimachus_ and _Ptolemy_, took upon themselves the title and dignity of
+kings, having abstained from this honour while there remained any of
+_Alexander_'s race to inherit the crown. Thus the monarchy of the _Greeks_
+for want of an heir was broken into several kingdoms; four of which, seated
+_to the four winds of heaven_, were very eminent. For _Ptolemy_ reigned
+over _Egypt_, _Lybia_ and _Ethiopia_; _Antigonus_ over _Syria_ and the
+lesser _Asia_; _Lysimachus_ over _Thrace_; and _Cassander_ over _Macedon_,
+_Greece_ and _Epirus_, as above.
+
+_Seleucus_ at this time reigned over the nations which were beyond
+_Euphrates_, and belonged to the bodies of the two first Beasts; but after
+six years he conquered _Antigonus_, and thereby became possest of one of
+the four kingdoms. For _Cassander_ being afraid of the power of
+_Antigonus_, combined with _Lysimachus_, _Ptolemy_ and _Seleucus_, against
+him: and while _Lysimachus_ invaded the parts of _Asia_ next the
+_Hellespont_, _Ptolemy_ subdued _Phoenicia_ and _Coelosyria_, with the
+sea-coasts of _Asia_.
+
+_Seleucus_ came down with a powerful army into _Cappadocia_, and joining
+the confederate forces, fought _Antigonus_ in _Phrygia_ and flew him, and
+seized his kingdom, _An. Nabonass._ 447. After which _Seleucus_ built
+_Antioch_, _Seleucia_, _Laodicea_, _Apamea_, _Berrhaea_, _Edessa_, and other
+cities in _Syria_ and _Asia_; and in them granted the _Jews_ equal
+privileges with the _Greeks_.
+
+_Demetrius_ the son of _Antigonus_ retained but a small part of his
+father's dominions, and at length lost _Cyprus_ to _Ptolemy_; but
+afterwards killing _Alexander_, the son and successor of _Cassander_ king
+of _Macedon_, he seized his kingdom, _An. Nabonass._ 454. Sometime after,
+preparing a very great army to recover his father's dominions in _Asia_;
+_Seleucus_, _Ptolemy_, _Lysimachus_ and _Pyrrhus_ king of _Epirus_,
+combined against him; and _Pyrrhus_ invading _Macedon_, corrupted the army
+of _Demetrius_, put him to flight, seized his kingdom, and shared it with
+_Lysimachus_. After seven months, _Lysimachus_ beating _Pyrrhus_, took
+_Macedon_ from him, and held it five years and a half, uniting the kingdoms
+of _Macedon_ and _Thrace_. _Lysimachus_ in his wars with _Antigonus_ and
+_Demetrius_, had taken from them _Caria_, _Lydia_, and _Phrygia_; and had a
+treasury in _Pergamus_, a castle on the top of a conical hill in _Phrygia_,
+by the river _Caicus_, the custody of which he had committed to one
+_Philetaerus_, who was at first faithful to him, but in the last year of his
+reign revolted. For _Lysimachus_, having at the instigation of his wife
+_Arsinoe_, slain first his own son _Agathocles_, and then several that
+lamented him; the wife of _Agathocles_ fled with her children and brothers,
+and some others of their friends, and sollicited _Seleucus_ to make war
+upon _Lysimachus_; whereupon _Philetaerus_ also, who grieved at the death of
+_Agathocles_, and was accused thereof by _Arsinoe_, took up arms, and sided
+with _Seleucus_. On this occasion _Seleucus_ and _Lysimachus_ met and
+fought in _Phrygia_; and _Lysimachus_ being slain in the battel, lost his
+kingdom to _Seleucus_, _An. Nabonass._ 465. Thus the Empire of the
+_Greeks_, which at first brake into four kingdoms, became now reduced into
+two notable ones, henceforward called by _Daniel_ the kings of the _South_
+and _North_. For _Ptolemy_ now reigned over _Egypt_, _Lybia_, _Ethiopia_,
+_Arabia_, _Phoenicia_, _Coelosyria_, and _Cyprus_; and _Seleucus_, having
+united three of the four kingdoms, had a dominion scarce inferior to that
+of the _Persian_ Empire, conquered by _Alexander_ the great. All which is
+thus represented by _Daniel_:[2] _And the king of the_ South [_Ptolemy_]
+_shall be strong, and one of his Princes_ [_Seleucus_, one of _Alexander_'s
+Princes] _shall be strong above him, and have dominion; his dominion shall
+be a great dominion_.
+
+After _Seleucus_ had reigned seven months over _Macedon_, _Greece_,
+_Thrace_, _Asia_, _Syria_, _Babylonia_, _Media_, and all the _East_ as far
+as _India_; _Ptolemy Ceraunus_, the younger brother of _Ptolemy
+Philadelphus_ king of _Egypt_, slew him treacherously, and seized his
+dominions in _Europe_: while _Antiochus Soter_, the son of _Seleucus_,
+succeeded his father in _Asia_, _Syria_, and most of the _East_; and after
+nineteen or twenty years was succeeded by his son _Antiochus Theos_; who
+having a lasting war with _Ptolemy Philadelphus_, at length composed the
+same by marrying _Berenice_ the daughter of _Philadelphus_: but after a
+reign of fifteen years, his first wife _Laodice_ poisoned him, and set her
+son _Seleucus Callinicus_ upon the throne. _Callinicus_ in the beginning of
+his reign, by the impulse of his mother _Laodice_, besieged _Berenice_ in
+_Daphne_ near _Antioch_, and slew her with her young son and many of her
+women. Whereupon _Ptolemy Euergetes_, the son and successor of
+_Philadelphus_, made war upon _Callinicus_; took from him _Phoenicia_,
+_Syria_, _Cilicia_, _Mesopotamia_, _Babylonia_, _Sustana_, and some other
+regions; and carried back into _Egypt_ 40000 talents of silver, and 2500
+images of the Gods, amongst which were the Gods of _Egypt_ carried away by
+_Cambyses_. _Antiochus Hierax_ at first assisted his brother _Callinicus_,
+but afterwards contended with him for _Asia_. In the mean time _Eumenes_
+governor of _Pergamus_ beat _Antiochus_, and took from them both all _Asia_
+westward of mount _Taurus_. This was in the fifth year of _Callinicus_, who
+after an inglorious reign of 20 years was succeeded by his son _Seleucus
+Ceraunus_; and _Euergetes_ after four years more, _An. Nabonass._ 527, was
+succeeded by his son _Ptolemy Philopator_. All which is thus signified by
+_Daniel_:[3] _And in the end of years they_ [the kings of the _South_ and
+_North_] _shall join themselves together: for the king's daughter of the_
+South [_Berenice_] _shall come to the king of the _North_ to make an
+agreement, but she shall not retain the power of the arm; neither shall she
+stand, nor her seed, but she shall be delivered up, and he_ [_Callinicus_]
+_that brought her, and he whom she brought forth, and they that strengthned
+her in_ [those] _times_, [or defended her in the siege of _Daphne_.] _But
+out of a branch of her roots shall one stand up in his seat_ [her brother
+_Euergetes_] _who shall come with an army, and shall enter into the
+fortress_ [or fenced cities] _of the king of the _North_, and shall act
+against them and prevail: and shall carry captives into _Egypt_, their Gods
+with their Princes and precious vessels of silver and gold; and he shall
+continue some years after the king of the_ North.
+
+_Seleucus Ceraunus_, inheriting the remains of his father's kingdom, and
+thinking to recover the rest, raised a great army against the governor of
+_Pergamus_, now King thereof, but died in the third year of his reign. His
+brother and successor, _Antiochus Magnus_, carrying on the war, took from
+the King of _Pergamus_ almost all the lesser _Asia_, recovering also the
+Provinces of _Media_, _Persia_ and _Babylonia_, from the governors who had
+revolted: and in the fifth year of his reign invading _Coelosyria_, he with
+little opposition possest himself of a good part thereof; and the next year
+returning to invade the rest of _Coelosyria_ and _Phoenicia_, beat the army
+of _Ptolemy Philopator_ near _Berytus_; he then invaded _Palestine_ and the
+neighbouring parts of _Arabia_, and the third year returned with an army of
+78000: but _Ptolemy_ coming out of _Egypt_ with an army of 75000, fought
+and routed him at _Raphia_ near _Gaza_, between _Palestine_ and _Egypt_;
+and recovered all _Phoenicia_ and _Coelosyria_, _Ann. Nabonass._ 532. Being
+puffed up with this victory, and living in all manner of luxury, the
+_Egyptians_ revolted, and had wars with him, but were overcome; and in the
+broils sixty thousand _Egyptian Jews_ were slain. All which is thus
+described by _Daniel_: [4] _But his sons_ [_Seleucus Ceraunus_, and
+_Antiochus Magnus_, the sons of _Callinicus_] _shall be stirred up, and
+shall gather a great army; and he_ [_Antiochus Magnus_] _shall come
+effectually and overflow, and pass thro' and return, and_ [again the next
+year] _be stirred up_ [marching even] _to his fortress_, [the frontier
+towns of _Egypt_;] _and the King of the _South_ shall be moved with choler,
+and come forth_ [the third year] _and fight with him, even with the King of
+the _North_; and he_ [the King of the _North_] _shall lead forth a great
+multitude, but the multitude shall be given into his hand. And the
+multitude being taken away, his heart shall be lifted up, and he shall cast
+down many ten thousands; but he shall not be strengthned by it: for the
+king of the _North_ shall return_, &c.
+
+About twelve years after the battle between _Philopator_ and _Antiochus_,
+_Philopator_ died; and left his kingdom to his young son _Ptolemy
+Epiphanes_, a child of five years old. Thereupon _Antiochus Magnus_
+confederated with _Philip_ king of _Macedon_, that they should each invade
+the dominions of _Epiphanes_ which lay next to them. Hence arose a various
+war between _Antiochus_ and _Epiphanes_, each of them seizing _Phoenicia_
+and _Coelosyria_ by turns; whereby those countries were much afflicted by
+both parties. First _Antiochus_ seized them; then one _Scopas_ being sent
+with the army of _Egypt_, recovered them from _Antiochus_: the next year,
+_An. Nabonass._ 550, _Antiochus_ fought and routed _Scopas_ near the
+fountains of _Jordan_, besieged him in _Sidon_, took the city, and
+recovered _Syria_ and _Phoenicia_ from _Egypt_, the _Jews_ coming over to
+him voluntarily. But about three years after, preparing for a war against
+the _Romans_, he came to _Raphia_ on the borders of _Egypt_; made peace
+with _Epiphanes_, and gave him his daughter _Cleopatra_: next autumn he
+passed the _Hellespont_ to invade the cities of _Greece_ under the _Roman_
+protection, and took some of them; but was beaten by the _Romans_ the
+summer following, and forced to return back with his army into _Asia_.
+Before the end of the year the fleet of _Antiochus_ was beaten by the fleet
+of the _Romans_ near _Phocaea_: and at the same time _Epiphanes_ and
+_Cleopatra_ sent an embassy to _Rome_ to congratulate the _Romans_ on their
+success against their father _Antiochus_, and to exhort them to prosecute
+the war against him into _Asia_. The _Romans_ beat _Antiochus_ again at sea
+near _Ephesus_, past their army over the _Hellespont_, and obtain'd a great
+victory over him by land, took from him all _Asia_ westward of mount
+_Taurus_, gave it to the King of _Pergamus_ who assisted them in the war;
+and imposed a large tribute upon _Antiochus_. Thus the King of _Pergamus_,
+by the power of the _Romans_, recovered what _Antiochus_ had taken from
+him; and _Antiochus_ retiring into the remainder of his kingdom, was slain
+two years after by the _Persians_, as he was robbing the Temple of _Jupiter
+Belus_ in _Elymais_, to raise money for the _Romans_. All which is thus
+described by _Daniel_. [5] _For the King of the_ North [_Antiochus_] _shall
+return, and shall set forth a multitude greater than the former; and shall
+certainly come, after certain years, with a great army and with much
+riches. And in those times there shall many stand up against the King of
+the_ South, [particularly the _Macedonians_;] _also the robbers of thy
+people_ [the _Samaritans_, &c.] _shall exalt themselves to establish the
+vision, but they shall fall. So the King of the _North_ shall come, and
+cast up a mount, and take the most fenced cities; and the arms of the
+_South_ shall not withstand, neither his chosen people, neither shall there
+he any strength to withstand. But he that cometh against him shall do
+according to his own will, and none shall stand before him: and he shall
+stand in the glorious land, which shall fail in his hand. He shall also set
+his face to go with the strength_ [or army] _of all his kingdom, and make
+an agreement with him_ [at _Raphia_;] _and he shall give him the daughter
+of women corrupting her; but she shall not stand his side, neither be for
+him. After this he shall turn his face unto the Isles, and shall take many:
+but a Prince for his own behalf_ [the _Romans_] _shall cause the reproach
+offered by him to cease; without his own reproach he shall cause it to turn
+upon him. Then he shall turn his face towards the fort of his own land: but
+he shall stumble and fall, and not be found._
+
+_Seleucus Philopator_ succeeded his father _Antiochus_, _Anno Nabonass._
+561, and reigned twelve years, but did nothing memorable, being sluggish,
+and intent upon raising money for the _Romans_ to whom he was tributary. He
+was slain by _Heliodorus_, whom he had sent to rob the Temple of
+_Jerusalem_. _Daniel_ thus describes his reign. [6] _Then shall stand up in
+his estate a raiser of taxes in the glory of the kingdom, but within few
+days be shall be destroyed, neither in anger nor in battle._
+
+A little before the death of _Philopator_, his son _Demetrius_ was sent
+hostage to _Rome_, in the place of _Antiochus Epiphanes_, the brother of
+_Philopator_; and _Antiochus_ was at _Athens_ in his way home from _Rome_,
+when _Philopator_ died: whereupon _Heliodorus_ the treasurer of the
+kingdom, stept into the throne. But _Antiochus_ so managed his affairs,
+that the _Romans_ kept _Demetrius_ at _Rome_; and their ally the King of
+_Pergamus_ expelled _Heliodorus_, and placed _Antiochus_ in the throne,
+while _Demetrius_ the right heir remained an hostage at _Rome_. _Antiochus_
+being thus made King by the friendship of the King of _Pergamus_ reigned
+powerfully over _Syria_ and the neighbouring nations: but carried himself
+much below his dignity, stealing privately out of his palace, rambling up
+and down the city in disguise with one or two of his companions; conversing
+and drinking with people of the lowest rank, foreigners and strangers;
+frequenting the meetings of dissolute persons to feast and revel; clothing
+himself like the _Roman_ candidates and officers, acting their parts like a
+mimick, and in publick festivals jesting and dancing with servants and
+light people, exposing himself by all manner of ridiculous gestures. This
+conduct made some take him for a madman, and call him _Antiochus_ [Greek:
+Epimenes]. In the first year of his reign he deposed _Onias_ the
+high-Priest, and sold the high-Priesthood to _Jason_ the younger brother of
+_Onias_: for _Jason_ had promised to give him 440 talents of silver for
+that office, and 15 more for a licence to erect a place of exercise for the
+training up of youth in the fashions of the heathen; which licence was
+granted by the King, and put in execution by _Jason_. Then the King sending
+one _Apollonius_ into _Egypt_ to the coronation of _Ptolemy Philometor_,
+the young son of _Philometor_ and _Cleopatra_, and knowing _Philometor_ not
+to be well affected to his affairs in _Phoenicia_, provided for his own
+safety in those parts; and for that end came to _Joppa_ and _Jerusalem_,
+where he was honourably received; from thence he went in like manner with
+his little army to the cities of _Phoenicia_, to establish himself against
+_Egypt_, by courting the people, and distributing extraordinary favours
+amongst them. All which is thus represented by _Daniel_. [7] _And in his_
+[_Philometor_'s] _estate shall stand up a vile person, to whom they_ [the
+_Syrians_ who set up _Heliodorus_] _shall not give the honour of the
+kingdom. Yet he shall come in peaceably, and obtain the kingdom by
+flatteries_ [made principally to the King of _Pergamus_;] _and the arms_
+[which in favour of _Heliodorus_ oppose him] _shall be overflowed with a
+food from before him, and be broken; yea also_ [_Onias_ the high-Priest]
+_the Prince of the covenant. And after the league made with him,_ [the King
+of _Egypt_, by sending _Apollonius_ to his coronation] _he shall work
+deceitfully_ [against the King of _Egypt_,] _for he shall come up and shall
+become strong_ [in _Phoenicia _] _with a small people. And he shall enter
+into the quiet and plentiful cities of the Province_ [of _Phoenicia_;]
+_and_ [to ingratiate himself with the _Jews_ of _Phoenicia_ and _Egypt_,
+and with their friends] _he shall do that which his fathers have not done,
+nor his fathers fathers: he shall scatter among them the prey and the
+spoil, and the riches_ [exacted from other places;] _and shall forecast his
+devices against the strong holds_ [of _Egypt_] _even for a time._
+
+These things were done in the first year of his reign, _An. Nabonass._ 573.
+And thenceforward he forecast his devices against the strong holds of
+_Egypt_, until the sixth year. For three years after, that is in the fourth
+year of his reign, _Menelaus_ bought the high-Priesthood from _Jason_, but
+not paying the price was sent for by the King; and the King, before he
+could hear the cause, went into _Cilicia_ to appease a sedition there, and
+left _Andronicus_ his deputy at _Antioch_; in the mean time the brother of
+_Menelaus_, to make up the money, conveyed several vessels out of the
+Temple, selling some of them at _Tyre_, and sending others to _Andronicus_.
+When _Menelaus_ was reproved for this by _Onias_, he caused _Onias_ to be
+slain by _Andronicus_: for which fact the King at his return from _Cilicia_
+caused _Andronicus_ to be put to death. Then _Antiochus_ prepared his
+second expedition against _Egypt_, which he performed in the sixth year of
+his reign, _An. Nabonass._ 578: for upon the death of _Cleopatra_, the
+governors of her son the young King of _Egypt_ claimed _Phoenicia_ and
+_Coelosyria_ from him as her dowry; and to recover those countries raised a
+great army. _Antiochus_ considering that his father had not quitted the
+possession of those countries[8], denied they were her dowry; and with
+another great army met and fought the _Egyptians_ on the borders of
+_Egypt_, between _Pelusium_ and the mountain _Casius_. He there beat them,
+and might have destroyed their whole army, but that he rode up and down,
+commanding his soldiers not to kill them, but to take them alive: by which
+humanity he gained _Pelusium_, and soon after all _Egypt_; entring it with
+a vast multitude of foot and chariots, elephants and horsemen, and a great
+navy. Then seizing the cities of _Egypt_ as a friend, he marched to
+_Memphis_, laid the whole blame of the war upon _Eulaeus_ the King's
+governor, entred into outward friendship with the young King, and took upon
+him to order the affairs of the kingdom. While _Aniochus_ was thus
+employ'd, a report being spread in _Phoenicia_ that he was dead, _Jason_ to
+recover the high-Priesthood assaulted _Jerusalem_ with above a thousand
+men, and took the city: hereupon the King thinking _Judea_ had revolted,
+came out of _Egypt_ in a furious manner, re-took the city, slew forty
+thousand of the people, made as many prisoners, and sold them to raise
+money; went into the Temple, spoiled it of its treasures, ornaments,
+utensils, and vessels of gold and silver, amounting to 1800 talents; and
+carried all away to _Antioch_. This was done in the year of _Nabonassar_
+578, and is thus described by _Daniel_. [9] _And he shall stir up his
+power, and his courage against the King of the _South_ with a great army;
+and the King of the _South_ shall be stirrd up to battle with a very great
+and mighty army; but he shall not stand: for they_, even _Antiochus_ and
+his friends, _shall forecast devices against him_, as is represented above;
+_yea, they that feed of the portion of his meat, shall_ betray and _destroy
+him, and his army shall be overthrown, and many shall fall down slain. And
+both these Kings hearts shall be to do mischief; and they_, being now made
+friends, _shall speak lyes at one table_, against the _Jews_ and against
+the holy covenant; _but it shall not prosper: for yet the end_, in which
+the setting up of the abomination of desolation is to prosper, _shall be at
+the time appointed. Then shall he return into his land with great riches,
+and his heart shall be against the holy covenant; and he shall act_,
+against it by spoiling the Temple, _and return into his own land_.
+
+The _Egyptians_ of _Alexandria_ seeing _Philometor_ first educated in
+luxury by the Eunuch _Eulaeus_, and now in the hands of _Antiochus_, gave
+the kingdom to _Euergetes_, the younger brother of _Philometor_. Whereupon
+_Antiochus_ pretending to restore _Philometor_, made war upon _Euergetes_;
+beat him at sea, and besieged him and his sister _Cleopatra_ in
+_Alexandria_: while the besieged Princes sent to _Rome_ to implore the
+assistance of the Senate. _Antiochus_ finding himself unable to take the
+city that year, returned into _Syria_, leaving _Philometor_ at _Memphis_ to
+govern _Egypt_ in his absence. But _Philometor_ made friendship with his
+brother that winter; and _Antiochus_, returning the next spring _An.
+Nabonass._ 580, to besiege both the brothers in _Alexandria_, was met in
+the way by the _Roman_ Ambassadors, _Popilius Laena_, _C. Decimius_, and _C.
+Hostilius_: he offered them his hand to kiss, but _Popilius_ delivering to
+him the tables wherein the message of the Senate was written, bad him read
+those first. When he had read them, he replied he would consider with his
+friends what was fit to be done; but _Popilius_ drawing a circle about him,
+bad him answer before he went out of it: _Antiochus_, astonished at this
+blunt and unusual imperiousness, made answer he would do what the _Romans_
+demanded; and then _Popilius_ gave the King his hand to kiss, and he
+returned out of _Egypt_. The same year, _An. Nabonass._ 580, his captains
+by his order spoiled and slaughtered the _Jews_, profaned the Temple, set
+up the worship of the heathen Gods in all _Judea_, and began to persecute
+and make war upon those who would not worship them: which actions are thus
+described by _Daniel_. [10] _At the time appointed he shall come_ again
+_towards the _South_, but the latter shall not be as the former. For the
+ships of _Chittim_ shall come_, with an embassy from _Rome_, _against him.
+Therefore he shall be grieved, and return, and have indignation against the
+holy covenant. So shall he do; he shall even return, and have intelligence
+with them that forsake the holy covenant._
+
+In the same year that _Antiochus_ by the command of the _Romans_ retired
+out of _Egypt_, and set up the worship of the _Greeks_ in _Judea_; the
+_Romans_ conquered the kingdom of _Macedon_, the fundamental kingdom of the
+Empire of the _Greeks_, and reduced it into a _Roman_ Province; and thereby
+began to put an end to the reign of _Daniel_'s third Beast. This is thus
+exprest by _Daniel_. _And after him Arms_, that is the _Romans_, _shall
+stand up_. As [Hebrew: MMLK] signifies _after the King_, Dan. xi. 8; so
+[Hebrew: MMNW] may signify _after him_. _Arms_ are every where in this
+Prophecy of _Daniel_ put for the military power of a kingdom: and they
+stand up when they conquer and grow powerful. Hitherto _Daniel_ described
+the actions of the Kings of the _North_ and _South_; but upon the conquest
+of _Macedon_ by the _Romans_, he left off describing the actions of the
+_Greeks_, and began to describe those of the _Romans_ in _Greece_. They
+conquered _Macedon_, _Illyricum_ and _Epirus_, in the year of _Nabonassar_
+580. 35 years after, by the last will and testament of _Attalus_ the last
+King of _Pergamus_, they inherited that rich and flourishing kingdom, that
+is, all _Asia_ westward of mount _Taurus_; 69 years after they conquered
+the kingdom of _Syria_, and reduced it into a Province, and 34 years after
+they did the like to _Egypt_. By all these steps the _Roman_ Arms stood up
+over the _Greeks_: and after 95 years more, by making war upon the _Jews_,
+_they polluted the sanctuary of strength, and took away the daily
+sacrifice, and then placed the abomination of desolation_. For this
+abomination was placed after the days of _Christ_, _Math._ xxiv. 15. In the
+16th year of the Emperor _Adrian_, A.C. 132, they placed this abomination
+by building a Temple to _Jupiter Capitolinus_, where the Temple of God in
+_Jerusalem_ had stood. Thereupon the _Jews_ under the conduct of
+_Barchochab_ rose up in arms against the _Romans_, and in the war had 50
+cities demolished, 985 of their best towns destroyed, and 580000 men slain
+by the sword; and in the end of the war, A.C. 136, were banished _Judea_
+upon pain of death, and thenceforward the land remained desolate of its old
+inhabitants.
+
+In the beginning of the _Jewish_ war in _Nero_'s reign, the Apostles fled
+out of _Judea_ with their flocks; some beyond _Jordan_ to _Pella_ and other
+places, some into _Egypt_, _Syria_, _Mesopotamia_, _Asia minor_, and
+elsewhere. _Peter_ and _John_ came into _Asia_, and _Peter_ went thence by
+_Corinth_ to _Rome_; but _John_ staying in _Asia_, was banished by the
+_Romans_ into _Patmos_, as the head of a party of the _Jews_, whose nation
+was in war with the _Romans_. By this dispersion of the _Christian Jews_,
+the _Christian_ religion, which was already propagated westward as far as
+_Rome_, spred fast into all the _Roman_ Empire, and suffered many
+persecutions under it till the days of _Constantine_ the great and his
+sons: all which is thus described by _Daniel_. [11] _And such as do
+wickedly against the covenant, shall he_, who places the abomination,
+_cause to dissemble_, and worship the heathen Gods; _but the people_ among
+them _who do know their God, shall be strong and act. And they that
+understand among the people, shall instruct many: yet they shall fall by
+the sword, and by flame, and by captivity, and by spoil many days. Now when
+they shall fall, they shall be holpen with a little help, viz._ in the
+reign of _Constantine_ the great; _and_ at that time by reason of their
+prosperity, _many shall_ come over to them from among the heathen, and
+_cleave to them with dissimulation. But of those of understanding there
+shall_ still _fall to try_ God's people _by them and to purge_ them from
+the dissemblers, _and to make them white even to the time of the end:
+because it is yet for a time appointed._
+
+Hitherto the _Roman_ Empire continued entire; and under this dominion, the
+little horn of the He-Goat continued _mighty, but not by his own power_.
+But now, by the building of _Constantinople_, and endowing it with a Senate
+and other like privileges with _Rome_; and by the division of the _Roman_
+Empire into the two Empires of the _Greeks_ and _Latins_, headed by those
+two cities; a new scene of things commences, in which which [12] _a King_,
+the Empire of the _Greeks_, _doth according to his will, and_, by setting
+his own laws above the laws of God, _exalts and magnifies himself above
+every God, and speaks marvellous things against the God of Gods, and shall
+prosper till the indignation be accomplished.--Neither shall he regard the
+God of his fathers, nor the_ lawful _desire of women_ in matrimony, _nor
+any God, but shall magnify himself above all. And in his seat he shall
+honour _Mahuzzims__, that is, strong guardians, the souls of the dead;
+_even with a God whom his fathers knew not shall he honour them_, in their
+Temples, _with gold and silver, and with precious stones and valuable
+things_. All which relates to the overspreading of the _Greek_ Empire with
+Monks and Nuns, who placed holiness in abstinence from marriage; and to the
+invocation of saints and veneration of their reliques, and such like
+superstitions, which these men introduced in the fourth and fifth
+centuries. [13] _And at the time of the end the King of the_ South, or the
+Empire of the _Saracens_, _shall push at him_; _and the King of the_ North,
+or Empire of the _Turks_, _shall come against him like a whirlwind, with
+chariots and with horsemen, and with many ships_; _and be shall enter into
+the countries_ of the _Greeks_, _and shall overflow and pass over. He shall
+enter also into the glorious land, and many countries shall be overthrown;
+but these shall escape out of his hand, even _Edom_ and _Moab_, and the
+chief of the children_ Ammon: that is, those to whom his Caravans pay
+tribute. _He shall stretch forth his hand also upon the countries, and the
+land of _Egypt_ shall not escape_; _but he shall have power over the
+treasures of gold and silver, and over all the precious things of _Egypt_;
+and the _Lybians_ and _Ethiopians_ shall be at his steps_. All these
+nations compose the Empire of the _Turks_, and therefore this Empire is
+here to be understood by the King of the _North_. They compose also the
+body of the He-Goat; and therefore the Goat still reigns in his last horn,
+but not by his own power.
+
+Notes to Chap. XII.
+
+[1] Chap. xi. 2, 3, 4.
+
+[2] Chap. xi. 5.
+
+[3] Chap. xi. 6, 7, 8.
+
+[4] Chap. xi. 10, &c.
+
+[5] Chap. xi. 13-19.
+
+[6] Chap. xi. 20.
+
+[7] Chap. xi. 21, &c.
+
+[8] 2 Maccab. iii. 5, 8. & iv. 4.
+
+[9] Chap. xi. 25, &c.
+
+[10] Chap. xi. 29, 30.
+
+[11] Chap. xi. 32, &c.
+
+[12] Chap. xi. 36, &c.
+
+[13] Chap. xi. 40, &c.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. XIII.
+
+_Of the King who did according to his will, and magnified himself above
+every God, and honoured _Mahuzzims_, and regarded not the desire of women_.
+
+In the first ages of the Christian religion the Christians of every city
+were governed by a Council of Presbyters, and the President of the Council
+was the Bishop of the city. The Bishop and Presbyters of one city meddled
+not with the affairs of another city, except by admonitory letters or
+messages. Nor did the Bishops of several cities meet together in Council
+before the time of the Emperor _Commodus_: for they could not meet together
+without the leave of the _Roman_ governors of the Provinces. But in the
+days of that Emperor they began to meet in Provincial Councils, by the
+leave of the governors; first in _Asia_, in opposition to the
+_Cataphrygian_ Heresy, and soon after in other places and upon other
+occasions. The Bishop of the chief city, or Metropolis of the _Roman_
+Province, was usually made President of the Council; and hence came the
+authority of Metropolitan Bishops above that of other Bishops within the
+same Province. Hence also it was that the Bishop of _Rome_ in _Cyprian_'s
+days called himself the Bishop of Bishops. As soon as the Empire became
+Christian, the _Roman_ Emperors began to call general Councils out of all
+the Provinces of the Empire; and by prescribing to them what points they
+should consider, and influencing them by their interest and power, they set
+up what party they pleased. Hereby the _Greek_ Empire, upon the division of
+the _Roman_ Empire into the _Greek_ and _Latin_ Empires, became _the King
+who_, in matters of religion, _did according to his will_; _and_, in
+legislature, _exalted and magnified himself above every God_: and at
+length, by the seventh general Council, established the worship of the
+images and souls of dead men, here called _Mahuzzims_.
+
+The same King placed holiness in abstinence from marriage. _Eusebius_ in
+his Ecclesiastical history [1] tells us, that _Musanus_ wrote a tract
+against those who fell away to the heresy of the _Encratites_, which was
+then newly risen, and had introduced pernicious errors; and that _Tatian_,
+the disciple of _Justin_, was the author thereof; and that _Irenaeus_ in his
+first book against heresies teaches this, writing of _Tatian_ and his
+heresy in these words: _A Saturnino & Marcione profecti qui vocantur
+Continentes, docuerunt non contrahendum esse matrimonium; reprobantes
+scilicet primitivum illud opificium Dei, & tacite accusantes Deum qui
+masculum & faeminam condidit ad procreationem generis humani. Induxerunt
+etiam abstinentiam ab esu eorum quae animalia appellant, ingratos se
+exhibentes ergo eum qui universa creavit Deum. Negant etiam primi hominis
+salutem. Atque hoc nuper apud illos excogitatum est, Tatiano quodam omnium
+primo hujus impietatis auctore: qui Justini auditor, quamdiu cum illo
+versatus est, nihil ejusmodi protulit. Post martyrium autem illius, ab
+Ecclesia se abrumpens, doctoris arrogantia elatus ac tumidus, tanquam
+praestantior caeteris, novam quandam formam doctrinae conflavit: AEonas
+invisibiles commentus perinde ac Valentinus: asserens quoque cum Saturnino
+& Marcione, matrimonium nihil aliud esse quam corruptionem ac stuprum: nova
+praeterea argumenta ad subvertendam Adami salutem excogitans. Haec Irenaeus de
+Haeresi quae tunc viguit Encratitarum._ Thus far _Eusebius_. But altho the
+followers of _Tatian_ were at first condemned as hereticks by the name of
+_Encratites_, or _Continentes_; their principles could not be yet quite
+exploded: for _Montanus_ refined upon them, and made only second marriages
+unlawful; he also introduced frequent fastings, and annual, fasting days,
+the keeping of _Lent_, and feeding upon dried meats. The _Apostolici_,
+about the middle of the third century, condemned marriage, and were a
+branch of the disciples of _Tatian_. The _Hierocitae_ in _Egypt_, in the
+latter end of the third century, also condemned marriage. _Paul_ the
+_Eremite_ fled into the wilderness from the persecution of _Decius_, and
+lived there a solitary life till the reign of _Constantine_ the great, but
+made no disciples. _Antony_ did the like in the persecution of
+_Dioclesian_, or a little before, and made disciples; and many others soon
+followed his example.
+
+Hitherto the principles of the _Encratites_ had been rejected by the
+Churches; but now being refined by the Monks, and imposed not upon all men,
+but only upon those who would voluntarily undertake a monastic life, they
+began to be admired, and to overflow first the _Greek_ Church, and then the
+_Latin_ also, like a torrent. _Eusebius_ tells us, [2] that _Constantine_
+the great had those men in the highest veneration, who dedicated themselves
+wholly to the divine philosophy; and that he almost venerated the most holy
+company of Virgins perpetually devoted to God; being certain that the God
+to whom he had consecrated himself did dwell in their minds. In his time
+and that of his sons, this profession of a single life was propagated in
+_Egypt_ by _Antony_, and in _Syria_ by _Hilarion_; and spred so fast, that
+soon after the time of _Julian_ the Apostate a third part of the
+_Egyptians_ were got into the desarts of _Egypt_. They lived first singly
+in cells, then associated into _coenobia_ or convents; and at length came
+into towns, and filled the Churches with Bishops, Presbyters and Deacons.
+_Athanasius_ in his younger days poured water upon the hands of his master
+_Antony_; and finding the Monks faithful to him, made many of them Bishops
+and Presbyters in _Egypt_: and these Bishops erected new Monasteries, out
+of which they chose Presbyters of their own cities, and sent Bishops to
+others. The like was done in _Syria_, the superstition being quickly
+propagated thither out of _Egypt_ by _Hilarion_ a disciple of _Antony_.
+_Spiridion_ and _Epiphanius_ of _Cyprus_, _James_ of _Nisibis_, _Cyril_ of
+_Jerusalem_, _Eustathius_ of _Sebastia_ in _Armenia_, _Eusebius_ of
+_Emisa_, _Titus_ of _Bostra_, _Basilius_ of _Ancyra_, _Acacius_ of
+_Caesarea_ in _Palestine_, _Elpidius_ of _Laodicea_, _Melitius_ and
+_Flavian_ of _Antioch_, _Theodorus_ of _Tyre_, _Protogenes_ of _Carrhae_,
+_Acacius_ of _Berrhaea_, _Theodotus_ of _Hierapolis_, _Eusebius_ of
+_Chalcedon_, _Amphilochius_ of _Iconium_, _Gregory Nazianzen_, _Gregory
+Nyssen_, and _John Chrysostom_ of _Constantinople_, were both Bishops and
+Monks in the fourth century. _Eustathius_, _Gregory Nazianzen_, _Gregory
+Nyssen_, _Basil_, &c. had Monasteries of Clergymen in their cities, out of
+which Bishops were sent to other cities; who in like manner erected
+Monasteries there, till the Churches were supplied with Bishops out of
+these Monasteries. Hence _Jerome_, in a Letter written about the year 385,
+[3] saith of the Clergy: _Quasi & ipsi aliud sint quam Monachi, & non
+quicquid in Monachos dicitur redundet in Clericos qui patres sunt
+Monachorum. Detrimentum pecoris pastoris ignominia est_. And in his book
+against _Vigilantius_: _Quid facient Orientis Ecclesiae? Quae aut Virgines
+Clericos accipiunt, aut Continentes, aut si uxores habuerint mariti esse
+desistunt_. Not long after even the Emperors commanded the Churches to
+chuse Clergymen out of the Monasteries by this Law.
+
+_Impp. Arcad & Honor. AA. Caesario PF. P._
+
+[4] _Si quos forte Episcopi deesse sibi Clericos arbitrantur, ex monachorum
+numero rectius ordinabunt: non obnoxios publicis privatisque rationibus cum
+invidia teneant, sed habeant jam probatos. Dat. _vii._ Kal. Aug. Honorio A.
+_iv._ & Eutychianio Coss._ A.C. 598. The _Greek_ Empire being now in the
+hands of these _Encratites_, and having them in great admiration, _Daniel_
+makes it a characteristick of the King who doth according to his will, that
+_he should not regard the desire of Women._
+
+Thus the Sect of the _Encratites_, set on foot by the _Gnosticks_, and
+propagated by _Tatian_ and _Montanus_ near the end of the second century;
+which was condemned by the Churches of that and the third century, and
+refined upon by their followers; overspread the _Eastern_ Churches in the
+fourth century, and before the end of it began to overspread the _Western_.
+Henceforward the Christian Churches having a form of godliness, but denying
+the power thereof, came into the hands of the _Encratites_: and the
+Heathens, who in the fourth century came over in great numbers to the
+Christians, embraced more readily this sort of Christianity, as having a
+greater affinity with their old superstitions, than that of the sincere
+Christians; who by the lamps of the seven Churches of _Asia_, and not by
+the lamps of the Monasteries, had illuminated the Church Catholic during
+the three first centuries.
+
+The _Cataphrygians_ brought in also several other superstitions: such as
+were the doctrine of Ghosts, and of their punishment in Purgatory, with
+prayers and oblations for mitigating that punishment, as _Tertullian_
+teaches in his books _De Anima_ and _De Monogamia_. They used also the sign
+of the cross as a charm. So _Tertullian_ in his book _de Corona militis_:
+_Ad omnem progressum atque promotum, ad omnem aditum & exitum, ad vestitum,
+ad calceatum, ad lavacra, ad mensas, ad lamina, ad cubilia, ad sedilia,
+quacunque nos conversatio exercet, frontem crucis signaculo terimus_. All
+these superstitions the Apostle refers to, where he saith: _Now the Spirit
+speaketh expresly, that in the latter times some shall depart from the
+faith, giving heed to seducing spirits, and doctrines of devils_, the
+_Daemons_ and Ghosts worshipped by the heathens, _speaking lyes in
+hypocrisy_, about their apparitions, the miracles done by them, their
+reliques, and the sign of the cross, _having consciences seared with a hot
+iron_; _forbidding to marry, and commanding to abstain from meats_, &c. 1
+Tim. iv. 1,2,3. From the _Cataphrygians_ these principles and practices
+were propagated down to posterity. _For the mystery of iniquity_ did
+_already work_ in the _Apostles_ days in the _Gnosticks_, continued to work
+very strongly in their offspring the _Tatianists_ and _Cataphrygians_, and
+was to work _till that man of sin_ should _be revealed_; _whose coming is
+after the working of Satan, with all power and signs, and lying wonders,
+and all deceivableness of unrighteousness_; coloured over with a form of
+_Christian_ godliness, but without the power thereof, 2 _Thess_. ii. 7-10.
+
+For tho some stop was put to the _Cataphrygian_ Christianity, by Provincial
+Councils, till the fourth century; yet the _Roman_ Emperors then turning
+_Christians_, and great multitudes of heathens coming over in outward
+profession, these found the _Cataphrygian_ Christianity more suitable to
+their old principles, of placing religion in outward forms and ceremonies,
+holy-days, and doctrines of Ghosts, than the religion of the sincere
+_Christians_: wherefore they readily sided with the _Cataphrygian
+Christians_, and established that Christianity before the end of the fourth
+century. By this means those of understanding, after they had been
+persecuted by the heathen Emperors in the three first centuries, and _were
+holpen with a little help_, by the conversion of _Constantine_ the great
+and his sons to the _Christian_ religion, fell under new persecutions, _to
+purge them_ from the dissemblers, _and to make them white, even to the time
+of the end_.
+
+Notes to Chap. XIII.
+
+[1] Lib. 4. c. 28, 29.
+
+[2] In vita Constantini, l. 4. c. 28.
+
+[3] Epist. 10.
+
+[4] L. 32. de Episcopis.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. XIV.
+
+_Of the _Mahuzzims_, honoured by the King who doth according to his will_.
+
+In scripture we are told of some _trusting in God_ and others _trusting in
+idols_, and that _God is our refuge, our strength, our defense_. In this
+sense God is _the rock of his people_, and false Gods are called _the rock
+of those that trust in them_, Deut. xxxii. 4, 15, 18, 30, 31, 37. In the
+same sense the Gods of _the King_ who _shall do according to his will_ are
+called _Mahuzzims_, munitions, fortresses, protectors, guardians, or
+defenders. _In his estate_, saith [1] _Daniel_, _shall he honour
+_Mahuzzims_; even with a God whom his fathers knew not, shall he honour
+them with gold and silver, and with precious stones, and things of value.
+Thus shall he do in the most strong holds_ or temples;--_and he shall cause
+them to rule over many, and divide the land_ among them _for a possession_.
+Now this came to pass by degrees in the following manner.
+
+_Gregory Nyssen_ [2] tells us, that after the persecution of the Emperor
+_Decius_, _Gregory_ Bishop of _Neocaesarea_ in _Pontus_, _instituted among
+all people, as an addition or corollary of devotion towards God, that
+festival days and assemblies should be celebrated to them who had contended
+for the faith_, that is, to the _Martyrs_. And he adds this reason for the
+institution: _When he observed_, saith _Nyssen_, _that the simple and
+unskilful multitude, by reason of corporeal delights, remained in the error
+of idols; that the principal thing might be corrected among them, namely,
+that instead of their vain worship they might turn their eyes upon God; he
+permitted that at the memories of the holy Martyrs they might make merry
+and delight themselves, and be dissolved into joy_. The heathens were
+delighted with the festivals of their Gods, and unwilling to part with
+those delights; and therefore _Gregory_, to facilitate their conversion,
+instituted annual festivals to the _Saints_ and _Martyrs_. Hence it came to
+pass, that for exploding the festivals of the heathens, the principal
+festivals of the _Christians_ succeeded in their room: as the keeping of
+_Christmas_ with ivy and feasting, and playing and sports, in the room of
+the _Bacchanalia_ and _Saturnalia_; the celebrating of _May-day_ with
+flowers, in the room of the _Floralia_; and the keeping of festivals to the
+Virgin _Mary_, _John_ the Baptist, and divers of the Apostles, in the room
+of the solemnities at the entrance of the Sun into the signs of the
+_Zodiac_ in the old _Julian_ Calendar. In the same persecution of _Decius_,
+_Cyprian_ ordered the passions of the Martyrs in _Africa_ to be registred,
+in order to celebrate their memories annually with oblations and
+sacrifices: and _Felix_ Bishop of _Rome_, a little after, as _Platina_
+relates, _Martyrum gloria consulens, constituit at quotannis sacrificia
+eorum nomine celebrarentur_; "consulting the glory of the Martyrs, ordained
+that sacrifices should be celebrated annually in their name." By the
+pleasures of these festivals the _Christians_ increased much in number, and
+decreased as much in virtue, until they were _purged and made white_ by the
+persecution of _Dioclesian_. This was the first step made in the
+_Christian_ religion towards the veneration of the Martyrs: and tho it did
+not yet amount to an unlawful worship; yet it disposed the _Christians_
+towards such a further veneration of the dead, as in a short time ended in
+the invocation of Saints.
+
+The next step was the affecting to pray at the sepulchres of the Martyrs:
+which practice began in _Dioclesian_'s persecution. The Council of
+_Eliberis_ in _Spain_, celebrated in the third or fourth year of
+_Dioclesian_'s persecution, A.C. 305, hath these Canons. Can. 34. _Cereos
+per diem placuit in Coemeterio non incendi: inquietandi enim spiritus
+sanctorum non sunt. Qui haec non observarint, arceantur ab Ecclesiae
+communione._ Can. 35. _Placuit prohiberi ne faeminae in Coemeterio
+pervigilent, eo quod saepe sub obtentu orationis latenter scelera
+committant._ Presently after that persecution, suppose about the year 314,
+the Council of _Laodicea_ in _Phrygia_, which then met for restoring the
+lapsed discipline of the Church, has the following Canons. Can. 9. _Those
+of the Church are not allowed to go into the _Coemeteries_ or _Martyries_,
+as they are called, of hereticks, for the sake of prayer or recovery of
+health: but such as go, if they be of the faithful, shall be excommunicated
+for a time_. Can. 34. _A _Christian_ must not leave the Martyrs of
+_Christ_, and go to false Martyrs_, that is, to the Martyrs of the
+hereticks; _for these are alien from God: and therefore let those be
+anathema who go to them_. Can. 51. _The birth-days of the Martyrs shall not
+be celebrated in _Lent_, but their commemoration shall be made on the
+Sabbath-days and Lords days_. The Council of _Paphlagonia_, celebrated in
+the year 324, made this Canon: _If any man being arrogant, abominates the
+congregations of the Martyrs, or the Liturgies performed therein, or the
+memories of the Martyrs, let him be anathema_. By all which it is manifest
+that the _Christians_ in the time of _Dioclesian_'s persecution used to
+pray in the _Coemeteries_ or burying-places of the dead; for avoiding the
+danger of the persecution, and for want of Churches, which were all thrown
+down: and after the persecution was over, continued that practice in honour
+of the Martyrs, till new Churches could be built: and by use affected it as
+advantageous to devotion, and for recovering the health of those that were
+sick. It also appears that in these burying-places they commemorated the
+Martyrs yearly upon days dedicated to them, and accounted all these
+practices pious and religious, and anathematized those men as arrogant who
+opposed them, or prayed in the _Martyries_ of the hereticks. They also
+lighted torches to the Martyrs in the day-time, as the heathens did to
+their Gods; which custom, before the end of the fourth century, prevailed
+much in the _West_. They sprinkled the worshipers of the Martyrs with
+holy-water, as the heathens did the worshipers of their Gods; and went in
+pilgrimage to see _Jerusalem_ and other holy places, as if those places
+conferred sanctity on the visiters. From the custom of praying in the
+_Coemeteries_ and _Martyries_, came the custom of translating the bodies of
+the Saints and Martyrs into such Churches as were new built: the Emperor
+_Constantius_ began this practice about the year 359, causing the bodies of
+_Andrew_ the Apostle, _Luke_ and _Timothy_, to be translated into a new
+Church at _Constantinople_: and before this act of _Constantius_, the
+_Egyptians_ kept the bodies of their Martyrs and Saints unburied upon beds
+in their private houses, and told stories of their souls appearing after
+death and ascending up to heaven, as _Athanasius_ relates in the life of
+_Antony_. All which gave occasion to the Emperor _Julian_, as _Cyril_
+relates, to accuse the _Christians_ in this manner: _Your adding to that
+antient dead man, Jesus, many new dead men, who can sufficiently abominate?
+You have filled all places with sepulchres and monuments, altho you are no
+where bidden to prostrate yourselves to sepulchres, and to respect them
+officiously._ And a little after: _Since _Jesus_ said that sepulchres are
+full of filthiness, how do you invoke God upon them_? and in another place
+he saith, that if _Christians_ had adhered to the precepts of the
+_Hebrews_, _they would have worshiped one God instead of many, and not a
+man, or rather not many unhappy men_: And that they _adored the wood of the
+cross, making its images on their foreheads, and before their houses_.
+
+After the sepulchres of Saints and Martyrs were thus converted into places
+of worship like the heathen temples, and the Churches into sepulchres, and
+a certain sort of sanctity attributed to the dead bodies of the Saints and
+Martyrs buried in them, and annual festivals were kept to them, with
+sacrifices offered to God in their name; the next step towards the
+invocation of Saints, was the attributing to their dead bodies, bones and
+other reliques, a power of working miracles, by means of the separate
+souls, who were supposed to know what we do or say, and to be able to do us
+good or hurt, and to work those miracles. This was the very notion the
+heathens had of the separate souls of their antient Kings and Heroes, whom
+they worshiped under the names of _Saturn_, _Rhea_, _Jupiter_, _Juno_,
+_Mars_, _Venus_, _Bacchus_, _Ceres_, _Osiris_, _Isis_, _Apollo_, _Diana_,
+and the rest of their Gods. For these Gods being male and female, husband
+and wife, son and daughter, brother and sister, are thereby discovered to
+be antient men and women. Now as the first step towards the invocation of
+Saints was set on foot by the persecution of _Decius_, and the second by
+the persecution of _Dioclesian_; so this third seems to have been owing to
+the proceedings of _Constantius_ and _Julian_ the Apostate. When _Julian_
+began to restore the worship of the heathen Gods, and to vilify the Saints
+and Martyrs; the _Christians_ of _Syria_ and _Egypt_ seem to have made a
+great noise about the miracles done by the reliques of the _Christian_
+Saints and Martyrs, in opposition to the powers attributed by _Julian_ and
+the heathens to their Idols. For _Sozomen_ and _Ruffinus_ tell us, that
+when he opened the heathen Temples, and consulted the Oracle of _Apollo
+Daphnaeus_ in the suburbs of _Antioch_, and pressed by many sacrifices for
+an answer; the Oracle at length told him that the bones of the Martyr
+_Babylas_ which were buried there hinder'd him from speaking. By which
+answer we may understand, that some _Christian_ was got into the place
+where the heathen Priests used to speak thro' a pipe in delivering their
+Oracles: and before this, _Hilary_ in his book against _Constantius_,
+written in the last year of that Emperor, makes the following mention of
+what was then doing in the _East_ where he was. _Sine martyrio persequeris.
+Plus crudelitati vestrae _Nero_, _Deci_, _Maximiane_, debemus. Diabolum enim
+per vos vicimus. Sanctus ubique beatorum martyrum sanguis exceptus est, dum
+in his Daemones mugiunt, dum aegritudines depelluntur, dum miraculorum opera
+cernuntur, elevari sine laqueis corpora, & dispensis pede faeminis vestes
+non defluere in faciem, uri sine ignibus spiritus, confiteri sine
+interrogantis incremento fidei_. And _Gregory Nazianzen_, in his first
+Oration against the Emperor _Julian_ then reigning, writes thus: _Martyres
+non extimuisti quibus praeclari honores & festa constituta, a quibus Daemones
+propelluntur & morbi curantur; quorum sunt apparitiones & praedictiones;
+quorum vel sola corpora idem possunt quod animae sanctae, sive manibus
+contrectentur, sive honorentur: quorum vel solae sanguinis guttae atque
+exigua passionis signa idem possunt quod corpora. Haec non colis sed
+contemnis & aspernaris_. These things made the heathens in the reign of the
+same Emperor demolish the sepulchre of _John_ the Baptist in _Phoenicia_,
+and burn his bones; when several _Christians_ mixing themselves with the
+heathens, gathered up some of his remains, which were sent to _Athanasius_,
+who hid them in the wall of a Church; foreseeing by a prophetic spirit, as
+_Ruffinus_ tells us, that they might be profitable to future generations.
+
+The cry of these miracles being once set on foot, continued for many years,
+and encreased and grew more general. _Chrysostom_, in his second Oration on
+St. _Babylas_, twenty years after the silencing of the Oracle of _Apollo
+Daphnaeus_ as above, viz. A.C. 382, saith of the miracles done by the Saints
+and their reliques [3]: _Nulla est nostri hujus Orbis seu regio, seu gens,
+seu urbs, ubi nova & inopinata miracula haec non decantentur; quae quidem si
+figmenta fuissent, prorsus in tantam hominum admirationem non venissent_.
+And a little after: _Abunde orationi nostrae fidem faciunt quae quotidiana a
+martyribus miracula eduntur, magna affatim ad illa hominum multitudine
+affluente_. And in his 66th Homily, describing how the Devils were
+tormented and cast out by the bones of the Martyrs, he adds: _Ob eam causam
+multi plerumque Reges peregre profecti sunt, ut hoc spectaculo fruerentur.
+Siquidem sanctorum martyrum templa futuri judicii vestigia & signa
+exhibent, dum nimirum Daemones flagris caeduntur, hominesque torquentur &
+liberantur. Vide quae sanctorum vita functorum vis sit?_ And _Jerom_ in his
+Epitaph on _Paula_, thus [4] mentions the same things. _Paula vidit
+Samariam: ibi siti sunt Elisaeus & Abdias prophetae, & Joannes Baptista, ubi
+multis intremuit consternata miraculis. Nam cernebat variis daemones rugire
+cruciatibus, & ante sepulchra sanctorum ululare, homines more luporum
+vocibus latrare canum, fremere leonum, sibilare serpentum, mugire taurorum,
+alios rotare caput & post tergum terram vertice tangere, suspensisque pede
+faeminis vestes non defluere in faciem_. This was about the year 384: and
+_Chrysostom_ in his Oration on the _Egyptian_ Martyrs, seems to make
+_Egypt_ the ringleader in these matters, saying [5]: _Benedictus Deus
+quandoquidem ex AEgypto prodeunt martyres, ex AEgypto illa cum Deo pugnante
+ac insanissima, & unde impia ora, unde linguae blasphemae; ex AEgypto martyres
+habentur; non in AEgypto tantum, nec in finitima vicinaque regione, sed
+_UBIQUE TERRARUM_. Et quemadmodum in annonae summa ubertate, cum viderunt
+urbium incolae majorem quam usus habitatorum postulat esse proventum, ad
+peregrinas etiam urbes transmittunt: cum & suam comitatem & liberalitatem
+ostendant, tum ut praeter horum abundantiam cum facilitate res quibus
+indigent rursus ab illis sibi comparent: sic & AEgyptii, quod attinet ad
+religionis athletas, fecerunt. Cum apud se multam eorum Dei benignitate
+copiam cernerent, nequaquam ingens Dei munus sua civitate concluserunt, sed
+in _OMNES TERRAE PARTES_ bonorum thesauros effuderunt: cum ut suum in
+fratres amorem ostenderent, tum ut communem omnium dominum honore
+afficerent, ac civitati suae gloriam apud omnes compararent, totiusque
+terrarum _ORBIS_ esse _METROPOLIN_ declararent.--Sanctorum enim illorum
+corpora quovis adamantino & inexpugnabili muro tutius nobis urbem
+communiunt, & tanquam excelsi quidam scopuli undique prominentes, non horum
+qui sub sensus cadunt & oculis cernuntur hostium impetus propulsant tantum,
+sed etiam invisibilium daemonum insidias, omnesque diaboli fraudes
+subvertunt ac dissipant.--Neque vero tantum adversus hominum insidias aut
+adversus fallacias daemonum utilis nobis est haec possessio, sed si nobis
+communis dominus ob peccatorum multitudinem irascatur, his objectis
+corporibus continuo poterimus eum propitium reddere civitati_. This Oration
+was written at _Antioch_, while _Alexandria_ was yet the Metropolis of the
+_East_, that is, before the year 381, in which _Constantinople_ became the
+Metropolis: and it was a work of some years for the _Egyptians_ to have
+distributed the miracle-working reliques of their Martyrs over all the
+world, as they had done before that year. _Egypt_ abounded most with the
+reliques of Saints and Martyrs, the _Egyptians_ keeping them embalmed upon
+beds even in their private houses; and _Alexandria_ was eminent above all
+other cities for dispersing them, so as on that account to acquire glory
+with all men, and manifest herself to be the _Metropolis_ of the world.
+_Antioch_ followed the example of _Egypt_, in dispersing the reliques of
+the forty Martyrs: and the examples of _Egypt_ and _Syria_ were soon
+followed by the rest of the world.
+
+The reliques of the forty Martyrs at _Antioch_ were distributed among the
+Churches before the year 373; for _Athanasius_ who died in that year, wrote
+an Oration upon them. This Oration is not yet published, but _Gerard
+Vossius_ saw it in MS. in the Library of Cardinal _Ascanius_ in _Italy_, as
+he says in his commentary upon the Oration of _Ephraem Syrus_ on the same
+forty Martyrs. Now since the Monks of _Alexandria_ sent the reliques of the
+Martyrs of _Egypt_ into all parts of the earth, and thereby acquired glory
+to their city, and declared her in these matters the Metropolis of the
+whole world, as we have observed out of _Chrysostom_; it may be concluded,
+that before _Alexandria_ received the forty Martyrs from _Antioch_, she
+began to send out the reliques of her own Martyrs into all parts, setting
+the first example to other cities. This practice therefore began in _Egypt_
+some years before the death of _Athanasius_. It began when the
+miracle-working bones of _John_ the Baptist were carried into _Egypt_, and
+hid in the wall of a Church, _that they might be profitable to future
+generations_. It was restrained in the reign of _Julian_ the Apostate: and
+then it spred from _Egypt_ into all the Empire, _Alexandria_ being the
+Metropolis of the whole world, according to _Chrysostom_, for propagating
+this sort of devotion, and _Antioch_ and other cities soon following her
+example.
+
+In propagating these superstitions, the ring-leaders were the Monks, and
+_Antony_ was at the head of them: for in the end of the life of _Antony_,
+_Athanasius_ relates that these were his dying words to his disciples who
+then attended him. _Do you take care_, said _Antony_, _to adhere to
+_Christ_ in the first place, and then to the Saints, that after death they
+may receive you as friends and acquaintance into the everlasting
+tabernacles, Think upon these things, perceive these things; and if you
+have any regard to me, remember me as a father_. This being delivered in
+charge to the Monks by _Antony_ at his death, A.C. 356, could not but
+inflame their whole body with devotion towards the Saints, as the ready way
+to be received, by them into the eternal Tabernacles after death. Hence
+came that noise about the miracles, done by the reliques of the Saints in
+the time of _Constantius_: hence came the dispersion of the miracle-working
+reliques into all the Empire; _Alexandria_ setting the example, and being
+renowned, for it above all other cities. Hence it came to pass in the days
+of _Julian_, A.C. 362, that _Athanasius_ by a prophetic spirit, as
+_Ruffinus_ tells us, hid the bones of _John_ the Baptist from the Heathens,
+not in the ground to be forgotten, but in the hollow wall of a Church
+before proper witnesses, that they might _be profitable to future
+generations_. Hence also came the invocation of the Saints for doing such
+miracles, and for assisting men in their devotions, and mediating with God.
+For _Athanasius_, even from his youth, looked upon the dead Saints and
+Martyrs as mediators of our prayers: in his Epistle to _Marcellinus_,
+written in the days of _Constantine_ the great, he saith that the words of
+the _Psalms_ are not to be transposed or any wise changed, but to be
+recited and sung without any artifice, as they are written, _that the holy
+men who delivered them, knowing them to be their own words, may pray with
+us; or rather, that the Holy Ghost who spake in the holy men, seeing his
+own words with which he inspired them, may join_ with them _in assisting
+us_.
+
+Whilst _Egypt_ abounded with Monks above any other country, the veneration
+of the Saints began sooner, and spred faster there than in other places.
+_Palladius_ going into _Egypt_ in the year 388 to visit the Monasteries,
+and the sepulchres of _Apollonius_ and other Martyrs of _Thebais_ who had
+suffered under _Maximinus_, saith of them: _Iis omnibus Christiani fecerunt
+aedem unam, ubi nunc multae virtutes peraguntur. Tanta autem fuit viri
+gratia, ut de iis quae esset precatus statim exaudiretur, eum sic honorante
+servatore: quem etiam nos in martyrio precati vidimus, cum iis qui cum ipso
+fuerunt martyrio affecti; & Deum adorantes, eorum corpora salutavimus._
+_Eunapius_ also, a heathen, yet a competent witness of what was done in his
+own times, relating how the soldiers delivered the temples of _Egypt_ into
+the hands of the Monks, which was done in the year 389, rails thus in an
+impious manner at the Martyrs, as succeeding in the room of the old Gods of
+_Egypt_. _Illi ipsi, _milites_, Monachos Canobi quoque collocarunt, ut pro
+Diis qui animo cernuntur, servos & quidem flagitiosos divinis honoribus
+percolerent, hominum mentibus ad cultum ceremoniasque obligatis. Ii namque
+condita & salita eorum capita, qui ob scelerum multitudinem a judicibus
+extremo judicio fuerant affecti, pro Divis ostentabant; iis genua
+submittebant, eos in Deorum numerum receptabant, ad illorum sepulchra
+pulvere sordibusque conspurcati. Martyres igitur vocabantur, & ministri
+quidem & legati arbitrique precum apud Deos; cum fuerint servilia infida &
+flagris pessime subacta, quae cicatrices scelerum ac nequitiae vestigia
+corporibus circumferunt; ejusmodi tamen Deos fert tellus_. By these
+instances we may understand the invocation of Saints was now of some
+standing in _Egypt_, and that it was already generally received and
+practised there by the common people.
+
+Thus _Basil_ a Monk, who was made Bishop of _Caesarea_ in the year 369, and
+died in the year 378, in his Oration on the Martyr _Mamas_, saith: _Be ye
+mindful of the Martyr; as many of you as have enjoyed him in your dreams,
+as many as in this place have been assisted by him in prayer, as many of
+you as upon invoking him by name have had him present in your works, as
+many as he has reduced into the way from wandering, as many as he has
+restored to health, as, many as have had their dead children restored by
+him to life, as many as have had their lives prolonged by him_: and a
+little after, he thus expresses the universality of this superstition in
+the regions of _Cappadocia_ and _Bithynia_: _At the memory of the Martyr_,
+saith he, _the whole region is moved; at his festival the whole city is
+transported with joy. Nor do the kindred of the rich turn aside to the
+sepulchres of their ancestors, but all go to the place of devotion._ Again,
+in the end of the Homily he prays, that _God would preserve the Church,
+thus fortified with the great towers of the Martyrs_: and in his Oration on
+the forty Martyrs; _These are they_, saith he, _who obtaining our country,
+like certain towers afford us safety against our enemies. Neither are they
+shut up in one place only, but being distributed are sent into many
+regions, and adorn many countries.--You have often endeavoured, you have
+often laboured to find one who might pray for you: here are forty, emitting
+one voice of prayer.--He that is in affliction flies to these, he that
+rejoices has recourse to these: the first, that he may be freed from evil,
+the last that he may continue in happiness. Here a woman praying for her
+children is heard; she obtains a safe return for her husband from abroad,
+and health for him in his sickness.--O ye common keepers of mankind, the
+best companions of our cares, suffragans and coadjutors of our prayers,
+most powerful embassadors to God_, &c. By all which it is manifest, that
+before the year 378, the Orations and Sermons upon the Saints went much
+beyond the bounds of mere oratorical flourishes, and that the common people
+in the _East_ were already generally corrupted by the Monks with
+Saint-worship.
+
+_Gregory Nazianzen_ a Monk, in his sixth Oration written A.C. 373, when he
+was newly made Bishop of _Sasima_, saith: _Let us purify ourselves to the
+Martyrs, or rather to the God of the Martyrs_: and a little after he calls
+the Martyrs _mediators of obtaining an ascension or divinity_. The same
+year, in the end of his Oration upon _Athanasius_ then newly dead, he thus
+invokes him: _Do thou look down upon us propitiously, and govern this
+people, as perfect adorers of the perfect Trinity, which in the Father,
+Son, and Holy Ghost, is contemplated and worshiped: if there shall be
+peace, preserve me, and feed my flock with me; but if war, bring me home,
+place me by thyself, and by those that are like thee; however great my
+request._ And in the end of the funeral Oration upon _Basil_, written A.C.
+378, he thus addresses him: _But thou, O divine and sacred Head, look down
+upon us from heaven; and by thy prayers either take away that thorn of the
+flesh which is given us by God for exercise, or obtain that we may bear it
+with courage, and direct all our life to that which is most fitting for us.
+When we depart this life, receive us there in your Tabernacles, that living
+together and beholding the holy and blessed Trinity more purely and
+perfectly, whereof we have now but an imperfect view, we may there come to
+the end of our desires, and receive this reward of the wars which we have
+waged or suffered_: and in his Oration upon _Cyprian_, not the Bishop of
+_Carthage_, but a _Greek_, he invokes him after the same manner; and tells
+us also how a pious Virgin named _Justina_, was protected by invoking the
+Virgin _Mary_, and how miracles were done by the ashes of _Cyprian_.
+
+_Gregory Nyssen_, another eminent Monk and Bishop, in the life of _Ephraem
+Syrus_, tells how a certain man returning from a far country, was in great
+danger, by reason all the ways were intercepted by the armies of barbarous
+nations; but upon invoking _Ephraem_ by name, and saying, _Holy _Ephraem_
+assist me_, he escaped the danger, neglected the fear of death, and beyond
+his hope got safe home. In the end of this Oration _Gregory_ calls upon
+_Ephraem_ after the following manner: _But thou, O Ephraem, assisting now at
+the divine altar, and sacrificing to the Prince of life, and to the most
+holy Trinity, together with the Angels; remember us all, and obtain for us
+pardon of our sins, that we may enjoy the eternal happiness of the kingdom
+of heaven._ The same _Gregory_, in his Oration on the Martyr _Theodorus_
+written A.C. 381, thus describes the power of that Martyr, and the practice
+of the people. _This Martyr_, saith he, _the last year quieted the
+barbarous tempest, and put a stop to the horrid war of the fierce and cruel
+_Scythians_.--If any one is permitted to carry away the dust with which the
+tomb is covered, wherein the body of the Martyr rests; the dust is accepted
+as a gift, and gathered to be laid up as a thing of great price. For to
+touch the reliques themselves, if any such prosperous fortune shall at any
+time happen; how great a favour that is, and not to be obtained without the
+most earnest prayers, they know well who have obtained it. For as a living
+and florid body, they who behold it embrace it, applying to it the eyes,
+mouth, ears, and all the organs of sense; and then with affection pouring
+tears upon the Martyr, as if he was whole and appeared to them: they offer
+prayers with supplication, that he would intercede for them as an advocate,
+praying to him as an Officer attending upon God, and invoking him as
+receiving gifts whenever he will._ At length _Gregory_ concludes the
+Oration with this prayer: _O Theodorus, we want many blessings; intercede
+and beseech for thy country before the common King and Lord: for the
+country of the Martyr is the place of his passion, and they are his
+citizens, brethren and kindred, who have him, defend, adorn and honour him.
+We fear afflictions, we expect dangers: the wicked _Scythians_ are not far
+off, ready to make war against us. As a soldier fight for us, as a Martyr
+use liberty of speech for thy fellow-servants. Pray for peace, that these
+publick meetings may not cease, that the furious and wicked barbarian may
+not rage against the temples and altars, that the profane and impious may
+not trample upon the holy things. We acknowledge it a benefit received from
+thee, that we are preserved safe and entire, we pray for freedom from
+danger in time to come: and if there shall be need of greater intercession
+and deprecation, call together the choir of thy brethren the Martyrs, and
+in conjunction with them all intercede for us. Let the prayers of many just
+ones attone for the sins of the multitudes and the people; exhort _Peter_,
+excite _Paul_, and also _John_ the divine and beloved disciple, that they
+may be sollicitous for the Churches which they have erected, for which they
+have been in chains, for which they have undergone dangers and deaths; that
+the worship of idols may not lift up its head against us, that heresies may
+not spring up like thorns in the vineyard, that tares grown up may not
+choak the wheat, that no rock void of the fatness of true dew may be
+against us, and render the fruitful power of the word void of a root; but
+by the power of the prayers of thyself and thy companions, O admirable man
+and eminent among the Martyrs, the commonwealth of _Christians_ may become
+a field of corn_. The same _Gregory Nyssen_, in his sermon upon the death
+of _Meletius_ Bishop of _Antioch_, preached at _Constantinople_ the same
+year, A.C. 381, before the Bishops of all the _East_ assembled in the
+second general Council, spake thus of _Meletius_. _The Bridegroom_, saith
+he, _is not taken from us: he stands in the midst of us, tho we do not see
+him: he is a Priest in the most inward places, and face to face intercedes
+before God for us and the sins of the people_. This was no oratorical
+flourish, but _Gregory_'s real opinion, as may be understood by what we
+have cited out of him concerning _Ephraem_ and _Theodorus_: and as _Gregory_
+preached this before the Council of _Constantinople_, you may thence know,
+saith [6] _Baronius_, that he professed what the whole Council, and
+therewith the whole Church of those parts believed, namely, that the Saints
+in heaven offer prayers for us before God.
+
+_Ephraem Syrus_, another eminent Monk, who was contemporary with _Basil_,
+and died the same year; in the end of his Encomium or Oration upon _Basil_
+then newly dead, invokes him after this manner: _Intercede for me, a very
+miserable man; and recal me by thy intercessions, O father; thou who art
+strong, pray for me who am weak; thou who art diligent, for me who am
+negligent; thou who art chearful, for me who am heavy; thou who art wise,
+for me who am foolish. Thou who hast treasured up a treasure of all
+virtues, be a guide to me who am empty of every good work_. In the
+beginning of his Encomium upon the forty Martyrs, written at the same time,
+he thus invokes them: _Help me therefore, O ye Saints, with your
+intercession; and O ye beloved, with your holy prayers, that _Christ_ by
+his grace may direct my tongue to speak_, &c. and afterwards mentioning the
+mother of one of these forty Martyrs, he concludes the Oration with this
+prayer: _I entreat thee, O holy, faithful, and blessed woman, pray for me
+to the Saints, saying; Intercede ye that triumph in _Christ_, for the most
+little and miserable _Ephraem_, that he may find mercy, and by the grace of
+_Christ_ may be saved_. Again, in his second Sermon or Oration on the
+praises of the holy Martyrs of _Christ_, he thus addresses them: _We
+entreat you most holy Martyrs, to intercede with the Lord for us miserable
+sinners, beset with the filthiness of negligence, that he would infuse his
+divine grace into us_: and afterwards, near the end of the same discourse;
+_Now ye most holy men and glorious Martyrs of God, help me a miserable
+sinner with your prayers, that in that dreadful hour I may obtain mercy,
+when the secrets of all hearts shall be made manifest. I am to day become
+to you, most holy Martyrs of _Christ_, as it were an unprofitable and
+unskilful cup-bearer: for I have delivered to the sons and brothers of your
+faith, a cup of the excellent wine of your warfare, with the excellent
+table of your victory, replenished with all sorts of dainties. I have
+endeavoured, with the whole affection and desire of my mind, to recreate
+your fathers and brothers, kindred and relations, who daily frequent the
+table. For behold they sing, and with exultation and jubilee glorify God,
+who has crown'd your virtues, by setting on your most sacred heads
+incorruptible and celestial crowns; they with excessive joy stand about the
+sacred reliques of your martyrdoms, wishing for a blessing, and desiring to
+bear away holy medicines both for the body and the mind. As good disciples
+and faithful ministers of our benign Lord and Saviour, bestow therefore a
+blessing on them all: and on me also, tho weak and feeble, who having
+received strength by your merits and intercessions, have with the whole
+devotion of my mind, sung a hymn to your praise and glory before your holy
+reliques. Wherefore I beseech you stand before the throne of the divine
+Majesty for me _Ephraem_, a vile and miserable sinner, that by your prayers
+I may deserve to obtain salvation, and with you enjoy eternal felicity by
+the grace and benignity and mercy of our Lord and Saviour _Jesus Christ_,
+to whom with the Father and Holy Ghost be praise, honour and glory for ever
+and ever_. Amen.
+
+By what has been cited out of _Basil_, the two _Gregories_ and _Ephraem_, we
+may understand that Saint-worship was established among the Monks and their
+admirers in _Egypt_, _Phoenicia_, _Syria_ and _Cappadocia_, before the year
+378, this being the year in which _Basil_ and _Ephraem_ died. _Chrysostom_
+was not much later; he preached at _Antioch_ almost all the time of
+_Theodosius_ the great, and in his Sermons are many exhortations to this
+sort of superstition, as may be seen in the end of his Orations on S.
+_Julia_, on St. _Pelagia_, on the Martyr _Ignatius_, on the _Egyptian_
+Martyrs, on Fate and Providence, on the Martyrs in general, on St.
+_Berenice_ and St. _Prosdoce_, on _Juventinus_ and _Maximus_, on the name
+of _Coemetery_, &c. Thus in his Sermon on _Berenice_ and _Prosdoce_:
+_Perhaps_, saith he, _you are inflamed with no small love towards these
+Martyrs; therefore with this ardour let us fall down before their reliques,
+let us embrace their coffins. For the coffins of the Martyrs have great
+virtue, even as the bones of the Martyrs have great power. Nor let us only
+on the day of this festival, but also on other days apply to them, invoke
+them, and beseech them to be our patrons: for they have great power and
+efficacy, not only whilst alive, but also after death; and much more after
+death than before. For now they bear the marks or brands of _Christ_; and
+when they shew these marks, they can obtain all things of the King. Seeing
+therefore they abound with such efficacy, and have so much friendship with
+him; we also, when by continual attendance and perpetual visitation of them
+we have insinuated ourselves into their familiarity, may by their
+assistance obtain the mercy of God_.
+
+_Constantinople_ was free from these superstitions till _Gregory Nazianzen_
+came thither A.D. 379; but in a few years it was also inflamed with it.
+_Ruffinus_ [7] tells us, that when the Emperor _Theodosius_ was setting out
+against the tyrant _Eugenius_, which was in the year 394, he went about
+with the Priests and people to all the places of prayer; lay prostrate in
+haircloth before the shrines of the Martyrs and Apostles, and pray'd for
+assistance by the intercession of the Saints. _Sozomen_ [8] adds, that when
+the Emperor was marched seven miles from _Constantinople_ against
+_Eugenius_, he went into a Church which he had built to _John_ the Baptist,
+_and invoked the Baptist for his assistance. Chrysostom_ [9] says: _He that
+is clothed in purple, approaches to embrace these sepulchres; and laying
+aside his dignity, stands supplicating the Saints to intercede for him with
+God: and he who goes crowned with a diadem, offers his prayers to the
+tent-maker and the fisher-man as his Protestors._ And in [10] another
+place: _The cities run together to the sepulchres of the Martyrs, and the
+people are inflamed with the love of them_.
+
+This practice of sending reliques from place to place for working miracles,
+and thereby inflaming the devotion of the nations towards the dead Saints
+and their reliques, and setting up the religion of invoking their souls,
+lasted only till the middle of the reign of the Emperor _Theodosius_ the
+great; for he then prohibited it by the following Edict. _Humatum corpus,
+nemo ad alterum locum transferat; nemo Martyrem distrahat, nemo mercetur:
+Habeant vero in potestate, si quolibet in loco sanctorum est aliquis
+conditus, pro ejus veneratione, quod _Martyrium_ vocandum sit, addant quod
+voluerint fabricarum. Dat. _iv._ Kal. Mart. Constantinopoli, Honorio nob.
+puero & Euodio Coss._ A.C. 386. After this they filled the fields and
+high-ways with altars erected to Martyrs, which they pretended to discover
+by dreams and revelations: and this occasioned the making the fourteenth
+Canon of the fifth Council of _Carthage_, A.C. 398. _Item placuit, ut
+altaria, quae passim per agros aut vias, tanquam memoriae Martyrum
+constituuntur, in quibus nullum corpus aut reliquiae Martyrum conditae
+probantur, ab Episcopis, qui illis locis praesunt, si fieri potest,
+evertantur. Si autem hoc propter tumultus populares non sinitur, plebes
+tamen admoneantur, ne illa loca frequentent, ut qui recte sapiunt, nulla
+ibi superstitione devincti teneantur. Et omnino nulla memoria Martyrum
+probabiliter acceptetur, nisi aut ibi corpus aut aliquae certae reliquiae
+sint, aut ubi origo alicujus habitationis, vel possessionis, vel passionis
+fidelissima origine traditur. Nam quae per somnia, & per inanes quasi
+revelationes quorumlibet hominum ubique constituuntur altaria, omnimode
+reprobentur._ These altars were for invoking the Saints or Martyrs buried
+or pretended to be buried under them. First they filled the Churches in all
+places with the reliques or pretended reliques of the Martyrs, for invoking
+them in the Churches; and then they filled the fields and high-ways with
+altars, for invoking them every where: and this new religion was set up by
+the Monks in all the _Greek_ Empire before the expedition of the Emperor
+_Theodosius_ against _Eugenius_, and I think before his above-mentioned
+Edict, A.C. 386.
+
+The same religion of worshiping _Mahuzzims_ quickly spred into the _Western
+Empire_ also: but _Daniel_ in this Prophecy describes chiefly the things
+done among the nations comprehended in the body of his third Beast.
+
+Notes to Chap. XIV.
+
+[1] Chap. xi. 38, 39
+
+[2] Orat. de vita Greg. Thaumaturg. T. 3. p. 574.
+
+[3] Vide Hom. 47. in. S. Julian.
+
+[4] Epist. 27. ad Eustochium.
+
+[5] Edit. Frontonis Ducaei, Tom. 1.
+
+[6] Ad. an. 381, Sect. 41.
+
+[7] Hist. Eccl. l. 2. c. 23.
+
+[8] L. 4. c. 24.
+
+[9] Hom. 66. ad. populum, circa finem. & Hom. 8, 27. in Matth. Hom. 42, 43.
+in Gen. Hom. 1. in 1 Thess.
+
+[10] Exposit. in Psal. 114. sub finem.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_The end of the first Part._
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART II.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+OBSERVATIONS
+UPON THE
+APOCALYPSE
+OF
+St. _JOHN_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. I.
+
+_Introduction, concerning the time when the _Apocalypse_ was written_.
+
+_Irenaeus_ introduced an opinion that the _Apocalypse_ was written in the
+time of _Domitian_; but then he also postponed the writing of some others
+of the sacred books, and was to place the _Apocalypse_ after them: he might
+perhaps have heard from his master _Polycarp_ that he had received this
+book from _John_ about the time of _Domitian_'s death; or indeed _John_
+might himself at that time have made a new publication of it, from whence
+_Irenaeus_ might imagine it was then but newly written. _Eusebius_ in his
+_Chronicle_ and _Ecclesiastical History_ follows _Irenoeus_; but afterwards
+[1] in his _Evangelical Demonstrations_, he conjoins the banishment of
+_John_ into _Patmos_, with the deaths of _Peter_ and _Paul_: and so do [2]
+_Tertullian_ and _Pseudo-Prochorus_, as well as the first author, whoever
+he was, of that very antient fable, that _John_ was put by _Nero_ into a
+vessel of hot oil, and coming out unhurt, was banished by him into
+_Patmos._ Tho this story be no more than a fiction yet was it founded on a
+tradition of the first churches, that _John_ was banished into _Patmos_ in
+the days of _Nero_. _Epiphanius_ represents the _Gospel of John_ as written
+in the time of _Domitian_, and the _Apocalypse_ even before that of _Nero_.
+[3] _Arethas_ in the beginning of his Commentary quotes the opinion of
+_Irenaeus_ from _Eusebius_, but follows it not: for he afterwards affirms
+the _Apocalypse_ was written before the destruction of _Jerusalem_, and
+that former commentators had expounded the sixth seal of that destruction.
+
+With the opinion of the first Commentators agrees the tradition of the
+Churches of _Syria_, preserved to this day in the title of the _Syriac_
+Version of the _Apocalypse_, which title is this: _The Revelation which was
+made to _John_ the Evangelist by God in the Island _Patmos_, into which he
+was banished by _Nero_ the _Caesar__. The fame is confirmed by a story told
+by [4] _Eusebius_ out of _Clemens Alexandrinus_, and other antient authors,
+concerning a youth, whom _John_ some time after his return from _Patmos_
+committed to the care of the Bishop of a certain city. The Bishop educated,
+instructed, and at length baptized him; but then remitting of his care, the
+young man thereupon got into ill company, and began by degrees first to
+revel and grow vitious, then to abuse and spoil those he met in the night;
+and at last grew so desperate, that his companions turning a band of
+high-way men, made him their Captain: and, saith [5] _Chrysostom_, he
+continued their Captain a long time. At length _John_ returning to that
+city, and hearing what was done, rode to the thief; and, when he out of
+reverence to his old master fled, _John_ rode after him, recalled him, and
+restored him to the Church. This is a story of many years, and requires
+that _John_ should have returned from _Patmos_ rather at the death of
+_Nero_ than at that of _Domitian_; because between the death of _Domitian_
+and that of _John_ there were but two years and an half; and _John_ in his
+old age was [6] so infirm as to be carried to Church, dying above 90 years
+old, and therefore could not be then suppos'd able to ride after the thief.
+
+This opinion is further supported by the allusions in the _Apocalypse_ to
+the Temple and Altar, and holy City, as then standing; and to the
+_Gentiles_, who were soon after to tread under foot the holy City and
+outward Court. 'Tis confirmed also by the style of the _Apocalypse_ itself,
+which is fuller of _Hebraisms_ than his Gospel. For thence it may be
+gathered, that it was written when _John_ was newly come out of _Judea_,
+where he had been used to the _Syriac_ tongue; and that he did not write
+his Gospel, till by long converse with the _Asiatick_ Greeks he had left
+off most of the _Hebraisms_. It is confirmed also by the many false
+_Apocalypses_, as those of _Peter_, _Paul_, _Thomas_, _Stephen_, _Elias_
+and _Cerinthus_, written in imitation of the true one. For as the many
+false Gospels, false Acts, and false Epistles were occasioned by true ones;
+and the writing many false _Apocalypses_, and ascribing them to Apostles
+and Prophets, argues that there was a true Apostolic one in great request
+with the first _Christians_: so this true one may well be suppos'd to have
+been written early, that there may be room in the Apostolic age for the
+writing of so many false ones afterwards, and fathering them upon _Peter_,
+_Paul_, _Thomas_ and others, who were dead before _John_. _Caius_, who was
+contemporary with _Tertullian_, [7] tells us that _Cerinthus_ wrote his
+Revelations as a great Apostle, and pretended the visions were shewn him by
+Angels, asserting a _millennium_ of carnal pleasures at _Jerusalem_ after
+the resurrection; so that his _Apocalypse_ was plainly written in imitation
+of _John_'s: and yet he lived so early, that [8] he resisted the Apostles
+at _Jerusalem_ in or before the first year of _Claudius_, that is, 26 years
+before the death of _Nero_, and [9] died before _John_.
+
+These reasons may suffice for determining the time; and yet there is one
+more, which to considering men may seem a good reason, to others not. I'll
+propound it, and leave it to every man's judgment. The _Apocalypse_ seems
+to be alluded to in the Epistles of _Peter_ and that to the _Hebrews_ and
+therefore to have been written before them. Such allusions in the Epistle
+to the _Hebrews_, I take to be the discourses concerning the High-Priest in
+the heavenly Tabernacle, who is both Priest and King, as was _Melchisedec_;
+and those concerning the _word of God_, with the _sharp two-edged sword_,
+the [Greek: sabbatismos], or _millennial_ rest, the _earth whose end is to
+be burned_, suppose by the lake of fire, _the judgment and fiery
+indignation which shall devour the adversaries_, the _heavenly City which
+hath foundations whose builder and maker is God_, the _cloud of witnesses,
+mount _Sion_, heavenly _Jerusalem_, general assembly, spirits of just men
+made perfect_, viz. by the resurrection, and _the shaking of heaven and
+earth, and removing them, that the new heaven, new earth and new kingdom
+which cannot be shaken, may remain_. In the first of _Peter_ occur these:
+[10] _The Revelation of Jesus Christ_, twice or thrice repeated; [11] the
+_blood of _Christ_ as of a Lamb foreordained before the foundation of the
+world_; [12] the _spiritual building_ in heaven, 1 Pet. ii. 5. _an
+inheritance incorruptible and undefiled and that fadeth not away, reserved
+in heaven for us, who are kept unto the salvation, ready to be revealed in
+the last time_, 1 Pet. i. 4, 5. [13] the _royal Priesthood_, [14] the _holy
+Priesthood_, [15] the _judgment beginning at the house of God_, and [16]
+_the Church at _Babylon__. These are indeed obscurer allusions; but the
+second Epistle, from the 19th verse of the first Chapter to the end, seems
+to be a continued Commentary upon the _Apocalypse_. There, in writing to
+the _Churches in _Asia__, to whom _John_ was commanded to send this
+Prophecy, he tells them, they _have a more sure word of Prophecy_, to be
+heeded by them, _as a light that shineth in a dark place, until the day
+dawn, and the day-star arise in their hearts_, that is, until they begin to
+understand it: for _no Prophecy_, saith he, _of the scripture is of any
+private interpretation; the Prophecy came not in old time by the will of
+man, but holy men of God spake, as they were moved by the Holy Ghost.
+Daniel_ [17] himself professes that he understood not his own _Prophecies_;
+and therefore the Churches were not to expect the interpretation from their
+Prophet _John_, but to study the Prophecies themselves. This is the
+substance of what _Peter_ says in the first chapter; and then in the second
+he proceeds to describe, out of this _sure word of Prophecy_, how there
+should arise in the Church _false Prophets_, or _false teachers_, expressed
+collectively in the _Apocalypse_ by the name of the false Prophet; who
+should _bring in damnable heresies, even denying the Lord that bought
+them_, which is the character of _Antichrist_: _And many_, saith he, _shall
+follow their lusts_ [18]; they that dwell on the earth [19] shall be
+deceived by the false Prophet, and be made drunk with the wine of the
+Whore's fornication, _by reason of whom the way of truth shall be
+blasphemed_; for [20] the Beast is full of blasphemy: _and thro'
+covetousness shall they with feigned words make merchandize of you_; for
+these are the Merchants of the Earth, who trade with the great Whore, and
+their merchandize [21] is all things of price, with the bodies and souls of
+men: _whose judgment--lingreth not, and their damnation [22] slumbreth
+not_, but shall surely come upon them at the last day suddenly, as the
+flood upon _the old world_, and fire and brimstone upon _Sodom_ and
+_Gomorrha_, when the just shall be delivered [23] like _Lot_; for _the Lord
+knoweth how to deliver the godly out of temptations, and to reserve the
+unjust unto the day of judgment to be punished_, in the lake of fire; _but
+chiefly them that walk after the flesh in the lust of uncleanness_, [24]
+being made drunk with the wine of the Whore's fornication; who _despise
+dominion, and are not afraid to blaspheme glories_; for the beast opened
+his mouth against God [25] to blaspheme his name and his tabernacle, and
+them that dwell in heaven. _These, as natural brute beasts_, the ten-horned
+beast and two-horned beast, or false Prophet, _made to be taken and
+destroyed_, in the lake of fire, _blaspheme the things they understand
+not_:--they count it pleasure to riot in the day-time--sporting themselves
+with their own deceivings, while they feast [26] with you, _having eyes
+full of an [27] Adulteress_: for the kingdoms of the beast live deliciously
+with the great Whore, and the nations are made drunk with the wine of her
+fornication. They _are gone astray, following the way of _Balaam_, the son
+of _Beor_, who loved the wages of unrighteousness_, the false Prophet [28]
+who taught _Balak_ to cast a stumbling-block before the children of
+_Israel_. _These are_, not fountains of living water, but _wells without
+water_; not such clouds of Saints as the two witnesses ascend in, but
+_clouds that are carried with a tempest_, &c. Thus does the author of this
+Epistle spend all the second Chapter in describing the qualities of the
+_Apocalyptic_ Beasts and false Prophet: and then in the third he goes on to
+describe their destruction more fully, and the future kingdom. He saith,
+that because the coming of _Christ_ should be long deferred, they should
+scoff, saying, _where is the promise of his coming_? Then he describes the
+sudden coming of the day of the Lord upon them, _as a thief in the night_,
+which is the _Apocalyptic_ phrase; and the _millennium_, or _thousand
+years_, which _are with God but as a day_; the _passing away of the old
+heavens_ and earth, by a conflagration in the lake of fire, and our
+_looking for new heavens and a new earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness_.
+
+Seeing therefore _Peter_ and _John_ were Apostles of the circumcision, it
+seems to me that they staid with their Churches in _Judea_ and _Syria_ till
+the _Romans_ made war upon their nation, that is, till the twelfth year of
+_Nero_; that they then followed the main body of their flying Churches into
+_Asia_, and that _Peter_ went thence by _Corinth_ to _Rome_; that the
+_Roman_ Empire looked upon those Churches as enemies, because _Jews_ by
+birth; and therefore to prevent insurrections, secured their leaders, and
+banished _John_ into _Patmos_. It seems also probable to me that the
+_Apocalypse_ was there composed, and that soon after the Epistle to the
+_Hebrews_ and those of _Peter_ were written to these Churches, with
+reference to this Prophecy as what they were particularly concerned in. For
+it appears by these Epistles, that they were written in times of general
+affliction and tribulation under the heathens, and by consequence when the
+Empire made war upon the _Jews_; for till then the heathens were at peace
+with the _Christian Jews_, as well as with the rest. The Epistle to the
+_Hebrews_, since it mentions _Timothy_ as related to those _Hebrews_, must
+be written to them after their flight into _Asia_, where _Timothy_ was
+Bishop; and by consequence after the war began, the _Hebrews_ in _Judea_
+being strangers to _Timothy_. _Peter_ seems also to call _Rome_ _Babylon_,
+as well with respect to the war made upon _Judea_, and the approaching
+captivity, like that under old _Babylon_, as with respect to that name in
+the _Apocalypse_: and in writing _to the strangers scattered thro'out
+_Pontus_, _Galatia_, _Cappadocia_, _Asia_ and _Bithynia__, he seems to
+intimate that they were the strangers newly scattered by the _Roman_ wars;
+for those were the only strangers there belonging to his care.
+
+This account of things agrees best with history when duly rectified. For
+[29] _Justin_ and [30] _Irenaeus_ say, that _Simon Magus_ came to _Rome_ in
+the reign of _Claudius_, and exercised juggling tricks there.
+_Pseudo-Clemens_ adds, that he endeavoured there to fly, but broke his neck
+thro' the prayers of _Peter_. Whence [31] _Eusebius_, or rather his
+interpolator _Jerom_, has recorded, that _Peter_ came to _Rome_ in the
+second year of _Claudius_: but [32] _Cyril_ Bishop of _Jerusalem_,
+_Philastrius_, _Sulpitius_, _Prosper_, _Maximus Taurinensis_, and
+_Hegesippus junior_, place this victory of _Peter_ in the time of _Nero_.
+Indeed the antienter tradition was, that _Peter_ came to _Rome_ in the days
+of this Emperor, as may be seen in [33] _Lactantius_. _Chrysostom_ [34]
+tells us, that the Apostles continued long in _Judea_, and that then being
+driven out by the _Jews_ they went to the _Gentiles_. This dispersion was
+in the first year of the _Jewish_ war, when the _Jews_, as _Josephus_ tells
+us, began to be tumultuous and violent in all places. For all agree that
+the Apostles were dispersed into several regions at once; and _Origen_ has
+set down the time, [35] telling us that in the beginning of the _Judaic_
+war, the Apostles and disciples of our Lord were scattered into all
+nations; _Thomas_ into _Parthia_, _Andrew_ into _Scythia_, _John_ into
+_Asia_, and _Peter_ first into _Asia_, where he preacht to the dispersion,
+and thence into _Italy_. [36] _Dionysius Corinthius_ saith, that _Peter_
+went from _Asia_ by _Corinth_ to _Rome_, and all antiquity agrees that
+_Peter_ and _Paul_ were martyred there in the end of _Nero_'s reign. _Mark_
+went with _Timothy_ to _Rome_, 2 _Tim._ iv. 11. _Colos._ iv. 10. _Sylvanus_
+was _Paul_'s assistant; and by the companions of _Peter_, mentioned in his
+first Epistle, we may know that he wrote from _Rome_; and the Antients
+generally agree, that in this Epistle he understood _Rome_ by _Babylon_.
+His second Epistle was writ to the same dispersed strangers with the first,
+2 _Pet._ iii. 1. and therein he saith, that _Paul_ had writ of the same
+things to them, and also in his other Epistles, _ver._ 15, 16. Now as there
+is no Epistle of _Paul_ to these strangers besides that to the _Hebrews_,
+so in this Epistle, chap. x. 11, 12. we find at large all those things
+which _Peter_ had been speaking of, and here refers to; particularly the
+_passing away of the old heavens and earth_, and _establishing an
+inheritance immoveable_, with an exhortation to grace, because _God_, to
+the wicked, _is a consuming fire_, Heb. xii. 25, 26, 28, 29.
+
+Having determined the time of writing the _Apocalyse_, I need not say much
+about the truth of it, since it was in such request with the first ages,
+that many endeavoured to imitate it, by feigning _Apocalypses_ under the
+Apostles names; and the Apostles themselves, as I have just now shewed,
+studied it, and used its phrases; by which means the style of the Epistle
+to the _Hebrews_ became more mystical than that of _Paul_'s other Epistles,
+and the style of _John_'s Gospel more figurative and majestical than that
+of the other Gospels. I do not apprehend that _Christ_ was called the word
+of God in any book of the New Testament written before the _Apocalypse_;
+and therefore am of opinion, the language was taken from this Prophecy, as
+were also many other phrases in this Gospel, such as those of _Christ_'s
+being _the light which enlightens the world, the lamb of God which taketh
+away the sins of the world, the bridegroom, he that testifieth, he that
+came down from heaven, the Son of God_, &c. _Justin Martyr_, who within
+thirty years after _John_'s death became a _Christian_, writes expresly
+that _a certain man among the _Christians_ whose name was _John_, one of
+the twelve Apostles of _Christ_, in the Revelation which was shewed him,
+prophesied that those who believed in _Christ_ should live a thousand years
+at _Jerusalem__. And a few lines before he saith: _But I, and as many as
+are _Christians_, in all things right in their opinions, believe both that
+there shall be a resurrection of the flesh, and a thousand years life at
+_Jerusalem_ built, adorned and enlarged_. Which is as much as to say, that
+all true _Christians_ in that early age received this Prophecy: for in all
+ages, as many as believed the thousand years, received the _Apocalypse_ as
+the foundation of their opinion: and I do not know one instance to the
+contrary. _Papias_ Bishop of _Hierapolis_, a man of the Apostolic age, and
+one of _John_'s own disciples, did not only teach the doctrine of the
+thousand years, but also [37] asserted the _Apocalypse_ as written by
+divine inspiration. _Melito_, who flourished next after _Justin_, [38]
+wrote a commentary upon this Prophecy; and he, being Bishop of _Sardis_ one
+of the seven Churches, could neither be ignorant of their tradition about
+it, nor impose upon them. _Irenaeus_, who was contemporary with _Melito_,
+wrote much upon it, and said, that _the number 666 was in all the antient
+and approved copies; and that he had it also confirmed to him by those who
+had seen _John_ face to face_, meaning no doubt his master _Polycarp_ for
+one. At the same time [39] _Theophilus_ Bishop of _Antioch_ asserted it,
+and so did _Tertullian_, _Clemens Alexandrinus_, and _Origen_ soon after;
+and their contemporary _Hippolytus_ the Martyr, Metropolitan of the
+_Arabians_, [40] wrote a commentary upon it. All these were antient men,
+flourishing within a hundred and twenty years after _John_'s death, and of
+greatest note in the Churches of those times. Soon after did _Victorinus
+Pictaviensis_ write another commentary upon it; and he lived in the time of
+_Dioclesian_. This may surely suffice to shew how the _Apocalypse_ was
+received and studied in the first ages: and I do not indeed find any other
+book of the New Testament so strongly attested, or commented upon so early
+as this. The Prophecy said: _Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear
+the words of this Prophecy, and keep the things which are written therein._
+This animated the first _Christians_ to study it so much, till the
+difficulty made them remit, and comment more upon the other books of the
+New Testament. This was the state of the _Apocalypse_, till the thousand
+years being misunderstood, brought a prejudice against it: and _Dionysius_
+of _Alexandria_, noting how it abounded with barbarisms, that is with
+_Hebraisms_, promoted that prejudice so far, as to cause many _Greeks_ in
+the fourth century to doubt of the book. But whilst the _Latins_, and a
+great part of the _Greeks_, always retained the _Apocalypse_, and the rest
+doubted only out of prejudice, it makes nothing against its authority.
+
+This Prophecy is called _the Revelation_, with respect to _the scripture of
+truth_, which _Daniel_ [41] was commanded to _shut up and seal, till the
+time of the end_. _Daniel_ sealed it _until the time of the end_; and until
+that time comes, the Lamb is opening the seals: and afterwards the two
+Witnesses prophesy out of it a long time in sack-cloth, before they ascend
+up to heaven in a cloud. All which is as much as to say, that these
+Prophecies of _Daniel_ and _John_ should not be understood till the time of
+the end: but then some should prophesy out of them in an afflicted and
+mournful state for a long time, and that but darkly, so as to convert but
+few. But in the very end, the Prophecy should be so far interpreted as to
+convince many. _Then_, saith _Daniel, many shall run to and fro, and
+knowledge shall be encreased_. For the Gospel must be preached in all
+nations before the great tribulation, and end of the world. The
+palm-bearing multitude, which come out of this great tribulation, cannot be
+innumerable out of all nations, unless they be made so by the preaching of
+the Gospel before it comes. There must be a stone cut out of a mountain
+without hands, before it can fall upon the toes of the Image, and become a
+great mountain and fill the earth. An Angel must fly thro' the midst of
+heaven with the everlasting Gospel to preach to all nations, before
+_Babylon_ falls, and the Son of man reaps his harvest. The two Prophets
+must ascend up to heaven in a cloud, before the kingdoms of this world
+become the kingdoms of _Christ_. 'Tis therefore a part of this Prophecy,
+that it should not be understood before the last age of the world; and
+therefore it makes for the credit of the Prophecy, that it is not yet
+understood. But if the last age, the age of opening these things, be now
+approaching, as by the great successes of late Interpreters it seems to be,
+we have more encouragement than ever to look into these things. If the
+general preaching of the Gospel be approaching, it is to us and our
+posterity that those words mainly belong: [42] _In the time of the end the
+wise shall understand, but none of the wicked shall understand. [43]
+Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear the words of this Prophecy,
+and keep those things which are written therein._
+
+The folly of Interpreters has been, to foretel times and things by this
+Prophecy, as if God designed to make them Prophets. By this rashness they
+have not only exposed themselves, but brought the Prophecy also into
+contempt. The design of God was much otherwise. He gave this and the
+Prophecies of the Old Testament, not to gratify men's curiosities by
+enabling them to foreknow things, but that after they were fulfilled they
+might be interpreted by the event, and his own Providence, not the
+Interpreters, be then manifested thereby to the world. For the event of
+things predicted many ages before, will then be a convincing argument that
+the world is governed by providence. For as the few and obscure Prophecies
+concerning _Christ_'s first coming were for setting up the _Christian_
+religion, which all nations have since corrupted; so the many and clear
+Prophecies concerning the things to be done at _Christ_'s second coming,
+are not only for predicting but also for effecting a recovery and
+re-establishment of the long-lost truth, and setting up a kingdom wherein
+dwells righteousness. The event will prove the _Apocalypse_; and this
+Prophecy, thus proved and understood, will open the old Prophets, and all
+together will make known the true religion, and establish it. For he that
+will understand the old Prophets, must begin with this; but the time is not
+yet come for understanding them perfectly, because the main revolution
+predicted in them is not yet come to pass. _In the days of the voice of the
+seventh Angel, when he shall begin to sound, the mystery of God shall be
+finished, as he hath declared to his servants the Prophets_: and then _the
+kingdoms of this world shall become the kingdoms of our Lord and his
+_Christ_, and he shall reign for ever_, Apoc. x. 7. xi. 15. There is
+already so much of the Prophecy fulfilled, that as many as will take pains
+in this study, may see sufficient instances of God's providence: but then
+the signal revolutions predicted by all the holy Prophets, will at once
+both turn mens eyes upon considering the predictions, and plainly interpret
+them. Till then we must content ourselves with interpreting what hath been
+already fulfilled.
+
+Amongst the Interpreters of the last age there is scarce one of note who
+hath not made some discovery worth knowing; and thence I seem to gather
+that God is about opening these mysteries. The success of others put me
+upon considering it; and if I have done any thing which may be useful to
+following writers, I have my design.
+
+Notes to Chap. I.
+
+[1] Dem. Evang. l. 3.
+
+[2] Vid. _Pamelium_ in notis ad _Tertull._ de Praescriptionbus, n. 215 &
+_Hieron_ l. 1. contra _Jovinianum_, c. 14. Edit._Erasmi._
+
+[3] Areth. c. 18, 19.
+
+[4] Hist. Eccl. l. 3. c. 23.
+
+[5] Chrysost. ad Theodorum lapsum.
+
+[6] Hieron. in Epist. ad Gal. l. 3. c. 6.
+
+[7] Apud Euseb. Eccl. Hist. l. 3. c. 28. Edit. _Valesii_.
+
+[8] Epiphan. Haeres. 28.
+
+[9] Hieron. adv. Lucif.
+
+[10] 1 Pet. i. 7, 13. iv. 13. & v. 1.
+
+[11] Apoc. xiii. 8.
+
+[12] Apoc. xxi.
+
+[13] Apoc. i. 6. & v. 10.
+
+[14] Apoc. xx. 6.
+
+[15] Apoc. xx. 4, 12.
+
+[16] Apoc. xvii.
+
+[17] Dan. viii. 15, 16, 27. & xii. 8, 9.
+
+[18] [Greek: aselgeias], _in many of the best MSS._
+
+[19] Apoc. xiii. 7, 12.
+
+[20] Apoc. xiii. 1, 5, 6.
+
+[21] Apoc. xviii. 12, 13.
+
+[22] Apoc. xix. 20.
+
+[23] Apoc. xxi. 3, 4.
+
+[24] Apoc. ix. 21. _and_ xvii. 2.
+
+[25] Apoc. xiii. 6.
+
+[26] Apoc. xviii. 3, 7, 9.
+
+[27] [Greek: moichalidos].
+
+[28] Apoc. ii. 14.
+
+[29] Apol. ad Antonin. Pium.
+
+[30] Haeres. l. 1. c. 20. Vide etiam Tertullianum, Apol. c. 13.
+
+[31] Euseb. Chron.
+
+[32] Cyril Catech. 6. Philastr. de haeres. cap. 30. Sulp. Hist. l. 2.
+Prosper de promiss. dimid. temp. cap. 13. Maximus serm. 5. in Natal. Apost.
+Hegesip. l. 2. c. 2.
+
+[33] Lactant de mortib. Persec. c. 2.
+
+[34] Hom. 70. in Matt. c. 22.
+
+[35] Apud Euseb. Eccl. Hist. l. 2. c. 25.
+
+[36] Euseb. Hist. l. 2. c. 25.
+
+[37] Arethas in Proaem. comment. in Apoc.
+
+[38] Euseb. Hist. l. 4. cap. 26. Hieron.
+
+[39] Euseb. Hist. l. 4. c. 24.
+
+[40] Hieron.
+
+[41] Dan. x. 21. xii. 4, 9.
+
+[42] Dan. xii. 4, 10.
+
+[43] Apoc. i. 3.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. II.
+
+_Of the relation which the _Apocalypse_ of _John_ hath to the Book of the
+Law of _Moses_, and to the worship of God in the Temple_.
+
+The _Apocalypse_ of _John_ is written in the same style and language with
+the Prophecies of _Daniel_, and hath the same relation to them which they
+have to one another, so that all of them together make but one complete
+Prophecy; and in like manner it consists of two parts, an introductory
+Prophecy, and an Interpretation thereof.
+
+The Prophecy is distinguish'd into seven successive parts, by the opening
+of the seven seals of the book which _Daniel_ was commanded to seal up: and
+hence it is called the _Apocalypse_ or _Revelation_ of _Jesus Christ_. The
+time of the seventh seal is sub-divided into eight successive parts by the
+silence in heaven for half an hour, and the sounding of seven trumpets
+successively: and the seventh trumpet sounds to the battle of the great day
+of God Almighty, whereby _the kingdoms of this world become the kingdoms of
+the Lord and of his Christ_, and those are destroyed that destroyed the
+earth.
+
+The Interpretation begins with the words, _And the temple of God was opened
+in heaven, and there was seen in his temple the Ark of his Testament_: and
+it continues to the end of the Prophecy. The Temple is the scene of the
+visions, and the visions in the Temple relate to the feast of the seventh
+month: for the feasts of the _Jews_ were typical of things to come. The
+Passover related to the first coming of _Christ_, and the feasts of the
+seventh month to his second coming: his first coming being therefore over
+before this Prophecy was given, the feasts of the seventh month are here
+only alluded unto.
+
+On the first day of that month, in the morning, the High-Priest dressed the
+lamps: and in allusion hereunto, this Prophecy begins with a vision of one
+like _the Son of man_ in the High-Priest's habit, appearing as it were in
+the midst of the seven golden candlesticks, or over against the midst of
+them, dressing the lamps, which appeared like a rod of seven stars in his
+right hand: and this dressing was perform'd by the sending seven Epistles
+to the Angels or Bishops of the seven Churches of _Asia_, which in the
+primitive times illuminated the Temple or Church Catholick. These Epistles
+contain admonitions against the approaching Apostacy, and therefore relate
+to the times when the Apostacy began to work strongly, and before it
+prevailed. It began to work in the Apostles days, and was to continue
+working _till the man of sin should be revealed_. It began to work in the
+disciples of _Simon_, _Menander_, _Carpocrates_, _Cerinthas_, and such
+sorts of men as had imbibed the metaphysical philosophy of the _Gentiles_
+and _Cabalistical Jews_, and were thence called _Gnosticks_. _John_ calls
+them _Antichrists_, saying that in his days there were many _Antichrists_.
+But these being condemned by the Apostles, and their immediate disciples,
+put the Churches in no danger during the opening of the first four seals.
+The visions at the opening of these seals relate only to the civil affairs
+of the heathen _Roman_ Empire. So long the Apostolic traditions prevailed,
+and preserved the Church in its purity: and therefore the affairs of the
+Church do not begin to be considered in this Prophecy before the opening of
+the fifth seal. She began then to decline, and to want admonitions; and
+therefore is admonished by these Epistles, till the Apostacy prevailed and
+took place, which was at the opening of the seventh seal. The admonitions
+therefore in these seven Epistles relate to the state of the Church in the
+times of the fifth and sixth seals. At the opening of the fifth seal, the
+Church is purged from hypocrites by a great persecution. At the opening of
+the sixth, that which letted is taken out of the way, namely the heathen
+_Roman_ Empire. At the opening of the seventh, the man of sin is revealed.
+And to these times the seven Epistles relate.
+
+The seven Angels, to whom these Epistles were written, answer to the seven
+_Amarc-holim_, who were Priests and chief Officers of the Temple, and had
+jointly the keys of the gates of the Temple, with those of the Treasuries,
+and the direction, appointment and oversight of all things in the Temple.
+
+After the lamps were dresed, _John_ saw _the door_ of the Temple _opened_;
+and by _the voice as it were of a trumpet_, was called up to the eastern
+gate of the great court, to see the visions: and _behold a throne was set_,
+viz. the mercy-seat upon the Ark of the Testament, which the _Jews_
+respected as _the throne of God between the _Cherubims__, _Exod._ xxv. 2.
+_Psal._ xcix. 1. _And he that sat on it was to look upon like _Jasper_ and
+_Sardine_ stone_, that is, of an olive colour, the people of _Judea_ being
+of that colour. _And_, the Sun being then in the _East, a rainbow was about
+the throne_, the emblem of glory. _And round about the throne were four and
+twenty seats_; answering to the chambers of the four and twenty Princes of
+the Priests, twelve on the south side, and twelve on the north side of the
+Priests Court. _And upon the seats were four and twenty Elders sitting,
+clothed in white rayment, with crowns on their heads_; representing the
+Princes of the four and twenty courses of the Priests clothed in linen.
+_And out of the throne proceeded lightnings and thunderings, and voices_,
+viz. the flashes of the fire upon the Altar at the morning-sacrifice, and
+the thundering voices of those that sounded the trumpets, and sung at the
+Eastern gate of the Priests Court; for these being between _John_ and the
+throne appeared to him as proceeding from the throne. _And there were seven
+lamps of fire burning_, in the Temple, _before the throne, which are the
+seven spirits of God_, or Angels of the seven Churches, represented in the
+beginning of this Prophecy by seven stars. _And before the throne was a sea
+of glass clear as chrystal_; the brazen sea between the porch of the Temple
+and the Altar, filled with clear water. _And in the midst of the throne,
+and round about the throne, were four Beasts full of eyes before and
+behind_: that is, one Beast before the throne and one behind it, appearing
+to _John_ as in the midst of the throne, and one on either side in the
+circle about it, to represent by the multitude of their eyes the people
+standing in the four sides of the peoples court. _And the first Beast was
+like a lion, and the second was like a calf, and the third had the face of
+a man, and the fourth was like a flying eagle_. The people of _Israel_ in
+the wilderness encamped round about the tabernacle, and on the east side
+were three tribes under the standard of _Judah_, on the west were three
+tribes under the standard of _Ephraim_, on the south were three tribes
+under the standard of _Reuben_, and on the north were three tribes under
+the standard of _Dan_, _Numb._ ii. And the standard of _Judah_ was a Lion,
+that of _Ephraim_ an Ox, that of _Reuben_ a Man, and that of _Dan_ an
+Eagle, as the _Jews_ affirm. Whence were framed the hieroglyphicks of
+_Cherubims_ and _Seraphims_, to represent the people of _Israel_. A
+_Cherubim_ had one body with four faces, the faces of a Lion, an Ox, a Man
+and an Eagle, looking to the four winds of heaven, without turning about,
+as in _Ezekiel_'s vision, chap. i. And four _Seraphims_ had the same four
+faces with four bodies, one face to every body. The four Beasts are
+therefore four _Seraphims_ standing in the four sides of the peoples court;
+the first in the eastern side with the head of a Lion, the second in the
+western side with the head of an Ox, the third in the southern side with
+the head of a Man, the fourth in the northern side with the head of an
+Eagle: and all four signify together the twelve tribes of _Israel_, out of
+whom the hundred forty and four thousand were sealed, _Apoc._ vii. 4. _And
+the four Beasts had each of them six wings_, two to a tribe, in all twenty
+and four wings, answering to the twenty and four stations of the people.
+_And they were full of eyes within_, or under their wings. _And they rest
+not day and night_, or at the morning and evening-sacrifices, _saying,
+holy, holy, holy Lord God Almighty, which was, and is, and is to come_.
+These animals are therefore the Seraphims, which appeared to _Isaiah_ [1]
+in a vision like this of the _Apocalypse_. For there also the Lord sat upon
+a throne in the temple; and the Seraphims each with six wings cried, _Holy,
+holy, holy Lord God of hosts. And when those animals give glory and honour
+and thanks to him that sitteth upon the throne, who liveth for ever and
+ever, the four and twenty Elders_ go into the Temple, and there _fall down
+before him that sitteth on the throne, and worship him that liveth for ever
+and ever, and cast their crowns before the throne, saying, Thou art worthy,
+O Lord, to receive glory and honour and power: for thou hast created all
+things, and for thy pleasure they are and were created_. At the morning and
+evening-sacrifices, so soon as the sacrifice was laid upon the Altar, and
+the drink-offering began to be poured out, the trumpets sounded, and the
+_Levites_ sang by course three times; and every time when the trumpets
+sounded, the people fell down and worshiped. Three times therefore did the
+people worship; to express which number, the Beasts cry _Holy, holy, holy_:
+and the song being ended, the people prayed standing, till the solemnity
+was finished. In the mean time the Priests went into the Temple, and there
+fell down before him that sat upon the throne, and worshiped.
+
+_And _John_ saw, in the right hand of him that sat upon the throne, a book
+written within and on the backside, sealed with seven seals_, viz. the book
+which _Daniel_ was commanded to seal up, and which is here represented by
+the prophetic book of the Law laid up on the right side of the Ark, as it
+were in the right hand of him that sat on the throne: for the festivals and
+ceremonies of the Law prescribed to the people in this book, adumbrated
+those things which were predicted in the book of _Daniel_; and the writing
+within and on the backside of this book, relates to the synchronal
+Prophecies. [2] _And none was found worthy to open the book_ but the Lamb
+of God. _And lo, in the midst of the throne and of the four Beasts, and in
+the midst of the Elders_, that is, at the foot of the Altar, _stood a lamb
+as it had been slain_, the morning-sacrifice; _having seven horns_, which
+are the seven Churches, _and seven eyes, which are the seven spirits of God
+sent forth into all the earth. And he came, and took the book out of the
+right hand of him that sat upon the throne: And when he had taken the book,
+the four Beasts and four and twenty Elders fell down before the Lamb,
+having every one of them harps, and golden vials full of odours, which are
+the prayers of saints. And they sung a new song, saying, Thou art worthy to
+take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and hast
+redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and
+people, and nation; and hast made us, unto our God, Kings and Priests, and
+we shall reign on the earth._ The Beasts and Elders therefore represent the
+primitive _Christians_ of all nations; and the worship of these
+_Christians_ in their Churches is here represented under the form of
+worshiping God and the Lamb in the Temple: God for his benefaction in
+creating all things, and the Lamb for his benefaction in redeeming us with
+his blood: God as sitting upon the throne and living for ever, and the Lamb
+as exalted above all by the merits of his death. _And I heard_, saith
+_John_, _the voice of many Angels round about the throne, and the Beasts
+and the Elders: and the number of them was ten thousand times ten thousand,
+and thousands of thousands; saying with a loud voice, Worthy is the Lamb
+that was slain to receive power, and riches, and wisdom, and strength, and
+honour, and glory, and blessing. And every creature which is in heaven, and
+on the earth, and under the earth, and such as are in the sea, and all that
+are in them, heard I, saying, Blessing, honour, glory, and power, be unto
+him that sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb for ever and ever. And
+the four Beasts said, _Amen_. And the four and twenty Elders fell down and
+worshiped him that liveth for ever and ever._ This was the worship of the
+primitive _Christians_.
+
+It was the custom for the High-Priest, seven days before the fast of the
+seventh month, to continue constantly in the Temple, and study the book of
+the Law, that he might be perfect in it against the day of expiation;
+wherein the service, which was various and intricate, was wholly to be
+performed by himself; part of which service was reading the Law to the
+people: and to promote his studying it, there were certain Priests
+appointed by the _Sanhedrim_ to be with him those seven days in one of his
+chambers in the Temple, and there to discourse with him about the Law, and
+read it to him, and put him in mind of reading and studying it himself.
+This his opening and reading the Law those seven days, is alluded unto in
+the Lamb's opening the seals. We are to conceive that those seven days
+begin in the evening before each day; for the _Jews_ began their day in the
+evening, and that the solemnity of the fast begins in the morning of the
+seventh day.
+
+The seventh seal was therefore opened on the day of expiation, and then
+_there was silence in heaven for half an hour. And an Angel_, the
+High-Priest, _stood at the Altar, having a golden Censer; and there was
+given him much incense, that he should offer it with the prayers of all
+Saints, upon the golden Altar which was before the throne_. The custom was
+on other days, for one of the Priests to take fire from the great Altar in
+a silver Censer; but on this day, for the High-Priest to take fire from the
+great Altar in a golden Censer: and when he was come down from the great
+Altar, he took incense from one of the Priests who brought it to him, and
+went with it to the golden Altar: and while he offered the incense, the
+people prayed without in silence, which is the silence in heaven for half
+an hour. When the High-Priest had laid the incense on the Altar, he carried
+a Censer of it burning in his hand, into the most holy place before the
+Ark. _And the smoke of the incense, with the prayers of the Saints,
+ascended up before God out of the Angel's hand._ On other days there was a
+certain measure of incense for the golden Altar: on this day there was a
+greater quantity for both the Altar and the most holy Place, and therefore
+it is called _much incense_. After this _the Angel took the Censer, and
+filled it with fire from the_ great _Altar, and cast it into the earth_;
+that is, by the hands of the Priests who belong to his mystical body, he
+cast it to the earth without the Temple, for burning the Goat which was the
+Lord's lot. _And_ at this and other concomitant sacrifices, until the
+evening-sacrifice was ended, _there were voices, and thundrings, and
+lightnings, and an earthquake_; that is, the voice of the High-Priest
+reading the Law to the people, and other voices and thundrings from the
+trumpets and temple-musick at the sacrifices, and lightnings from the fire
+of the Altar.
+
+The solemnity of the day of expiation being finished, the seven Angels
+found their trumpets at the great sacrifices of the seven days of the feast
+of tabernacles; and at the same sacrifices, the seven thunders utter their
+voices, which are the musick of the Temple, and singing of the _Levites_,
+intermixed with the soundings of the trumpets: and the seven Angels pour
+out their vials of wrath, which are the drink-offerings of those
+sacrifices.
+
+When six of the seals were opened, _John_ said: [3] _And after these
+things_, that is, after the visions of the sixth seal, _I saw four Angels
+standing on the four corners of the earth, holding the four winds of the
+earth, that the wind should not blow on the earth, nor on the sea, nor on
+any tree. And I saw another Angel ascending from the _East_, having the
+seal of the living God: and he cried with a loud voice to the four Angels,
+to whom it was given to hurt the earth and the sea, saying, Hurt not the
+earth, nor the sea, nor the trees, till we have sealed the servants of our
+God in their foreheads._ This sealing alludes to a tradition of the _Jews_,
+that upon the day of expiation all the people of _Israel_ are sealed up in
+the books of life and death. For the _Jews_ in their _Talmud_ [4] tell us,
+that in the beginning of every new year, or first day of the month _Tisri_,
+the seventh month of the sacred year, three books are opened in judgment;
+the book of life, in which the names of those are written who are perfectly
+just; the book of death, in which the names of those are written who are
+Atheists or very wicked; and a third book, of those whose judgment is
+suspended till the day of expiation, and whose names are not written in the
+book of life or death before that day. The first ten days of this month
+they call the penitential days; and all these days they fast and pray very
+much, and are very devout, that on the tenth day their sins may be
+remitted, and their names may be written in the book of life; which day is
+therefore called the day of expiation. And upon this tenth day, in
+returning home from the Synagogues, they say to one another, _God the
+creator seal you to a good year_. For they conceive that the books are now
+sealed up, and that the sentence of God remains unchanged henceforward to
+the end of the year. The same thing is signified by the two Goats, upon
+whose foreheads the High-Priest yearly, on the day of expiation, lays the
+two lots inscribed, _For God_ and _For _Azazel__; God's lot signifying the
+people who are sealed with the name of God in their foreheads; and the lot
+_Azazel_, which was sent into the wilderness, representing those who
+receive the mark and name of the Beast, and go into the wilderness with the
+great Whore.
+
+The servants of God being therefore sealed in the day of expiation, we may
+conceive that this sealing is synchronal to the visions which appear upon
+opening the seventh seal; and that when the Lamb had opened six of the
+seals and seen the visions relating to the inside of the sixth, he looked
+on the backside of the seventh leaf, and then saw _the four Angels holding
+the four winds of heaven, and another Angel ascending from the _East_ with
+the seal of God_. Conceive also, that the Angels which held the four winds
+were the first four of the seven Angels, who upon opening the seventh seal
+were seen standing before God; and that upon their holding the winds,
+_there was silence in heaven for half an hour_; and that while the servants
+of God were sealing, the Angel with the golden Censer offered their prayers
+with incense upon the golden Altar, and read the Law: and that so soon as
+they were sealed, the winds hurt the earth at the sounding of the first
+trumpet, and the sea at the sounding of the second; these winds signifying
+the wars, to which the first four trumpets sounded. For as the first four
+seals are distinguished from the three last by the appearance of four
+horsemen towards the four winds of heaven; so the wars of the first four
+trumpets are distinguished from those of the three last, by representing
+these by _four winds_, and the others by _three great woes_.
+
+In one of _Ezekiel_'s visions, when the _Babylonian_ captivity was at hand,
+_six men_ appeared _with slaughter-weapons_; _and a seventh_, who [5]
+appeared _among them clothed in white linen and a writer's ink-horn by his
+side_, is commanded to _go thro' the midst of _Jerusalem_, and set a mark
+upon the foreheads of the men that sigh and cry for all the abominations
+done in the midst thereof_: and then the six men, like the Angels of the
+first six trumpets, are commanded to slay those men who are not marked.
+Conceive therefore that the hundred forty and four thousand are sealed, to
+preserve them from the plagues of the first six trumpets; and that at
+length by the preaching of the everlasting gospel, they grow into _a great
+multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and
+people and tongues_: and at the sounding of the seventh trumpet come out of
+the great tribulation _with Palms in their hands: the kingdoms of this
+world_, by the war to which that trumpet sounds, _becoming the kingdoms of
+God and his _Christ__. For the solemnity of the great _Hosannah_ was kept
+by the _Jews_ upon the seventh or last day of the feast of tabernacles; the
+_Jews_ upon that day carrying Palms in their hands, and crying _Hosannah_.
+
+After six of the Angels, answering to the six men with slaughter-weapons,
+had sounded their trumpets, the Lamb in the form of _a mighty Angel cane
+down from heaven clothed with a cloud, and a rainbow was upon his head, and
+his face was as it were the Sun, and his feet as pillars of fire_, the
+shape in which _Christ_ appeared in the beginning of this Prophecy; _and he
+had in his hand a little book open_, the book which he had newly opened;
+for he received but one book from him that sitteth upon the throne, and he
+alone was worthy to open and look on this book. _And he set his right foot
+upon the sea and his left foot on the earth, and cried with a loud voice,
+as when a lion roareth_. It was the custom for the High-Priest on the day
+of expiation, to stand in an elevated place in the peoples court, at the
+Eastern gate of the Priests court, and read the Law to the people, while
+the Heifer and the Goat which was the Lord's lot, were burning without the
+Temple. We may therefore suppose him standing in such a manner, that his
+right foot might appear to _John_ as it were standing on the sea of glass,
+and his left foot on the ground of the house; and that he cried with a loud
+voice, in reading the Law on the day of expiation. _And when he had cried,
+seven thunders uttered their voices_. Thunders are the voice of a cloud,
+and a cloud signifies a multitude; and this multitude may be the _Levites_,
+who sang with thundering voices, and played with musical instruments at the
+great sacrifices, on the seven days of the feast of Tabernacles: at which
+times the trumpets also sounded. For the trumpets sounded, and the
+_Levites_ sang alternately, three times at every sacrifice. The Prophecy
+therefore of the seven thunders is nothing else than a repetition of the
+Prophecy of the seven trumpets in another form. _And the Angel which I saw
+stand upon the sea and upon the earth, lifted up his hand to heaven, and
+sware by him that liveth for ever and ever, that_ after the seven thunders
+_there should be time no longer; but in the days of the voice of the
+seventh Angel, when he shall begin to sound, the mystery of God should be
+finished, as he hath declared to his servants the Prophets_. The voices of
+the thunders therefore last to the end of this world, and so do those of
+the trumpets.
+
+_And the voice which I heard from heaven_, saith _John_, _spake unto me
+again and said, Go and take the little book, &c. And I took the little book
+out of the Angel's hand, and ate it up; and it was in my mouth sweet as
+honey, and as soon as I had eaten it, my belly was bitter. And he said unto
+me, Thou must prophesy again before many peoples, and nations, and tongues,
+and kings_. This is an introduction to a new Prophecy, to a repetition of
+the Prophecy of the whole book; and alludes to _Ezekiel_'s eating a roll or
+book spread open before him, and written within and without, full of
+lamentations and mourning and woe, but sweet in his mouth. Eating and
+drinking signify acquiring and possessing; and eating the book is becoming
+inspired with the Prophecy contained in it. It implies being inspired in a
+vigorous and extraordinary manner with the Prophecy of the whole book, and
+therefore signifies a lively repetition of the whole Prophecy by way of
+interpretation, and begins not till the first Prophecy, that of the seals
+and trumpets, is ended. It was sweet in _John_'s mouth, and therefore
+begins not with the bitter Prophecy of the _Babylonian_ captivity, and the
+_Gentiles_ being in the outward court of the Temple, and treading the holy
+city under foot; and the prophesying of the _two Witnesses_ in sackcloth,
+and their smiting the earth with all plagues, and being killed by the
+Beast; but so soon as the Prophecy of the trumpets is ended, it begins with
+the sweet Prophecy of the glorious _Woman in heaven_, and the victory of
+_Michael_ over the Dragon; and after that, it is bitter in _John_'s belly,
+by a large description of the times of the great Apostacy.
+
+_And the Angel stood_, upon the earth and sea, _saying, Rise and measure
+the Temple of God and the Altar, and them that worship therein_, that is,
+their courts with the buildings thereon, viz. the square court of the
+Temple called the separate place, and the square court of the Altar called
+the Priests court, and the court of them that worship in the Temple called
+the new court: _but the_ great _court which is without the Temple, leave
+out, and measure it not, for it is given to the _Gentiles_, and the holy
+city shall they tread under foot forty and two months_. This measuring hath
+reference to _Ezekiel_'s measuring the Temple _of Solomon_: there the whole
+Temple, including the outward court, was measured, to signify that it
+should be rebuilt in the latter days. Here the courts of the Temple and
+Altar, and they who worship therein, are only measured, to signify the
+building of a second Temple, for those that are sealed out of all the
+twelve tribes of _Israel_, and worship in the inward court of sincerity and
+truth: but _John_ is commanded to leave out the outward court, or outward
+form of religion and Church-government, because it is given to the
+_Babylonian Gentiles_. For the glorious woman in heaven, the remnant of
+whole seed kept the commandments of God, and had the testimony of _Jesus_,
+continued the same woman in outward form after her flight into the
+wilderness, whereby she quitted her former sincerity and piety, and became
+the great Whore. She lost her chastity, but kept her outward form and
+shape. And while the _Gentiles_ tread the holy city underfoot, and worship
+in the outward court, the two witnesses, represented perhaps by the two
+feet of the Angel standing on the sea and earth, prophesied against them,
+and _had power_, like _Elijah_ and _Moses_, _to consume their enemies with
+fire proceeding out of their mouth, and to shut heaven that it rain not in
+the days of their Prophecy, and to turn the waters into blood, and to smite
+the earth with all plagues as often as they will_, that is, with the
+plagues of the trumpets and vials of wrath; and at length they are slain,
+rise again from the dead, and ascend up to heaven in a cloud; and then the
+seventh trumpet sounds to the day of judgment.
+
+The Prophecy being finished, _John_ is inspired anew by the eaten book, and
+begins the Interpretation thereof with these words, _And the Temple of God
+was opened in heaven, and there was seen in his Temple the Ark of the
+Testament_. By the Ark, we may know that this was the first Temple; for the
+second Temple had no Ark. _And there were lightnings, and voices, and
+thundrings, and an earthquake, and great hail_. These answer to the wars in
+the _Roman_ Empire, during the reign of the four horsemen, who appeared
+upon opening the first four seals. _And there appeared a great wonder in
+heaven, a woman clothed with the Sun_. In the Prophecy, the affairs of the
+Church begin to be considered at the opening of the fifth seal; and in the
+Interpretation, they begin at the same time with the vision of the Church
+in the form of a woman in heaven: there she is persecuted, and here she is
+pained in travail. The Interpretation proceeds down first to the sealing of
+the servants of God, and marking the rest with the mark of the Beast; and
+then to the day of judgment, represented by a harvest and vintage. Then it
+returns back to the times of opening the seventh seal, and interprets the
+Prophecy of the seven trumpets by the pouring out of seven vials of wrath.
+The Angels who pour them out, come out of the _Temple of the Tabernacle_;
+that is, out of the second Temple, for the Tabernacle had no outward court.
+Then it returns back again to the times of measuring the Temple and Altar,
+and of the _Gentiles_ worshiping in the outward court, and of the Beast
+killing the witnesses in the streets of the great city; and interprets
+these things by the vision of _a woman sitting on the Beast, drunken with
+the blood of the Saints_; and proceeds in the interpretation downwards to
+the fall of the great city and the day of judgment.
+
+The whole Prophecy of the book, represented by the book of the Law, is
+therefore repeated, and interpreted in the visions which follow those of
+sounding the seventh trumpet, and begin with that of the Temple of God
+opened in heaven. Only the things, which the seven thunders uttered, were
+not written down, and therefore not interpreted.
+
+Notes to Chap. II.
+
+[1] Isa. vi.
+
+[2] Apoc. v.
+
+[3] Apoc. vii
+
+[4] Buxtorf in Synogoga Judaica, c. 18, 21.
+
+[5] Ezek. ix.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CHAP. III.
+
+_Of the relation which the Prophecy of _John_ hath to those of _Daniel_;
+and of the Subject of the Prophecy_.
+
+The whole scene of sacred Prophecy is composed of three principal parts:
+the regions beyond _Euphrates_, represented by the two first Beasts of
+_Daniel_; the Empire of the _Greeks_ on this side of _Euphrates_,
+represented by the Leopard and by the He-Goat; and the Empire of the
+_Latins_ on this side of _Greece_, represented by the Beast with ten horns.
+And to these three parts, the phrases of the _third part of the earth, sea,
+rivers, trees, ships, stars, sun, and moon_, relate. I place the body of
+the fourth Beast on this side of _Greece_, because the three first of the
+four Beasts had their lives prolonged after their dominion was taken away,
+and therefore belong not to the body of the fourth. He only stamped them
+with his feet.
+
+By the _earth_, the _Jews_ understood the great continent of all _Asia_ and
+_Africa_, to which they had access by land: and by the Isles of the _sea_,
+they understood the places to which they sailed by sea, particularly all
+_Europe_: and hence in this Prophecy, the _earth_ and _sea_ are put for the
+nations of the _Greek_ and _Latin_ Empires.
+
+The third and fourth Beasts of _Daniel_ are the same with the Dragon and
+ten-horned Beast of _John_, but with this difference: _John_ puts the
+Dragon for the whole _Roman_ Empire while it continued entire, because it
+was entire when that Prophecy was given; and the Beast he considers not
+till the Empire became divided: and then he puts the Dragon for the Empire
+of the _Greeks_, and the Beast for the Empire of the _Latins_. Hence it is
+that the Dragon and Beast have common heads and common horns: but the
+Dragon hath crowns only upon his heads, and the Beast only upon his horns;
+because the Beast and his horns reigned not before they were divided from
+the Dragon: and when the Dragon gave the Beast his throne, the ten horns
+received power as Kings, the same hour with the Beast. The heads are seven
+successive Kings. Four of them were the four horsemen which appeared at the
+opening of the first four seals. In the latter end of the sixth head, or
+seal, considered as present in the visions, it is said, _five_ of the seven
+Kings _are fallen, and one is, and another is not yet come; and the Beast
+that was and is not_, being wounded to death with a sword, _he is the
+eighth, and of the seven_: he was therefore a collateral part of the
+seventh. The horns are the same with those of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast,
+described above.
+
+The four horsemen which appear at the opening of the first four seals, have
+been well explained by Mr. _Mede_; excepting that I had rather continue the
+third to the end of the reign of the three _Gordians_ and _Philip_ the
+_Arabian_, those being Kings from the _South_, and begin the fourth with
+the reign of _Decius_, and continue it till the reign of _Dioclesian_. For
+the fourth horseman _sat upon a pale_ horse, _and his name was Death; and
+hell followed with him; and power was given them to kill unto the fourth
+part of the earth, with the sword, and with famine, and with the plague,
+and with the Beasts of the earth_, or armies of invaders and rebels: and as
+such were the times during all this interval. Hitherto the _Roman_ Empire
+continued in an undivided monarchical form, except rebellions; and such it
+is represented by the four horsemen. But _Dioclesian_ divided it between
+himself and _Maximianus_, A.C. 285; and it continued in that divided state,
+till the victory of _Constantine_ the great over _Licinius_, A.C. 323,
+which put an end to the heathen persecutions set on foot by _Dioclesian_
+and _Maximianus_, and described at the opening of the fifth seal. But this
+division of the Empire was imperfect, the whole being still under one and
+the same Senate. The same victory of _Constantine_ over _Licinius_ a
+heathen persecutor, began the fall of the heathen Empire, described at the
+opening of the sixth seal: and the visions of this seal continue till after
+the reign of _Julian_ the Apostate, he being a heathen Emperor, and
+reigning over the whole _Roman_ Empire.
+
+The affairs of the Church begin to be considered at the opening of the
+fifth seal, as was said above. Then she is represented by _a woman_ in the
+Temple of heaven, _clothed with the sun_ of righteousness, _and the moon_
+of _Jewish_ ceremonies _under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve
+stars_ relating to the twelve Apostles and to the twelve tribes of
+_Israel_. When she fled from the Temple into the wilderness, she left in
+the Temple a _remnant of her seed, who kept the commandments of God, and
+had the testimony of Jesus Christ_; and therefore before her flight she
+represented the true primitive Church of God, tho afterwards she
+degenerated like _Aholah_ and _Aholibah_. In _Diocesian_'s persecution _she
+cried, travelling in birth, and pained to be delivered_. And in the end of
+that persecution, by the victory of _Constantine_ over _Maxentius_ A.C.
+312, _she brought forth a man-child_, such a child as _was to rule all
+nations with a rod of iron_, a _Christian_ Empire. _And her child_, by the
+victory of _Constantine_ over _Licinius_, A.C. 323, _was caught up unto God
+and to his throne. And the woman_, by the division of the _Roman_ Empire
+into the _Greek_ and _Latin_ Empires, _fled_ from the first Temple _into
+the wilderness_, or spiritually barren Empire of the _Latins_, where she is
+found afterwards sitting upon the Beast and upon the seven mountains; and
+is called _the great city which reigneth over the Kings of the earth_, that
+is, over the ten Kings who give their kingdom to her Beast.
+
+But before her flight there was war in heaven between _Michael_ and the
+Dragon, the _Christian_ and the heathen religions; and the Dragon, _that
+old serpent, called the Devil and Satan, who deceiveth the whole world, was
+cast out to the earth, and his Angels were cast out with him_. And _John
+heard a voice in heaven, saying, Now is come salvation and strength, and
+the kingdom of our God, and the power of his _Christ_: for the accuser of
+our brethren is cast down. And they overcame him by the blood of the Lamb,
+and by the word of their testimony. And they loved not their lives unto the
+death. Therefore rejoice, ye heavens, and ye that dwell in them. Woe be to
+the inhabiters of the earth and sea_, or people of the _Greek_ and _Latin_
+Empires, _for the devil is come down amongst you, having great wrath,
+because he knoweth that he hath but a short time_.
+
+_And when the Dragon saw that he was cast down_ from the _Roman_ throne,
+and the man-child caught up thither, he _persecuted the woman which brought
+forth the man-child; and to her_, by the division of the _Roman_ Empire
+between the cities of _Rome_ and _Constantinople_ A.C. 330, _were given two
+wings of a great eagle_, the symbol of the _Roman_ Empire, _that she might
+flee_ from the first Temple _into the wilderness_ of _Arabia, to her place_
+at _Babylon_ mystically so called. _And the serpent_, by the division of
+the same Empire between the sons of _Constantine_ the great, A.C. 337,
+_cast out of his mouth water as a flood_, the _Western_ Empire, _after the
+woman; that he might cause her to be carried away by the flood. And the
+earth_, or _Greek_ Empire, _helped the woman, and the earth opened her
+mouth, and swallowed up the flood_, by the victory of _Constantius_ over
+_Magnentius_, A.C. 353, and thus the Beast was wounded to death with a
+sword. _And the Dragon was wroth with the woman_, in the reign of _Julian_
+the Apostate A.C. 361, _and_, by a new division of the Empire between
+_Valentinian_ and _Valens_, A.C. 364, _went_ from her into the _Eastern_
+Empire _to make war with the remnant of her seed_, which she left behind
+her when she fled: and thus the Beast revived. By the next division of the
+Empire, which was between _Gratian_ and _Theodosius_ A.C. 379, the _Beast_
+with ten horns _rose out of the sea_, and the _Beast_ with two horns _out
+of the earth_: and by the last division thereof, which was between the sons
+of _Theodosius_, A.C. 395, _the Dragon gave the Beast his power and throne,
+and great authority_. And the ten horns _received power as Kings, the same
+hour with the Beast_.
+
+At length the woman arrived at her place of temporal as well as spiritual
+dominion upon the back of the Beast, where she is nourished _a time, and
+times, and half a time, from the face of the serpent_; not in his kingdom,
+but at a distance from him. She is nourished by _the merchants of the
+earth_, three times or years and an half, or 42 months, or 1260 days: and
+in these Prophecies days are put for years. During all this time the Beast
+acted, and _she sat upon him_, that is, reigned over him, and over the ten
+Kings _who gave their power and strength_, that is, their kingdom _to the
+Beast_; and she was _drunken with the blood of the Saints_. By all these
+circumstances she is the eleventh horn of _Daniel_'s fourth Beast, who
+reigned with _a look more stout than his fellows_, and was of a different
+kind from the rest, and had eyes _and a mouth_ like the woman; _and made
+war with the saints, and prevailed against them_, and _wore them out_, and
+_thought to change times and laws_, and had them _given into his hand,
+until a time, and times, and half a time_. These characters of the woman,
+and little horn of the Beast, agree perfectly: in respect of her temporal
+dominion, she was a horn of the Beast; in respect of her spiritual
+dominion, she rode upon him in the form of a woman, and was his Church, and
+committed fornication with the ten Kings.
+
+The second Beast, which _rose up out of the earth_, was the Church of the
+_Greek_ Empire: for it _had two horns like those of the Lamb_, and
+therefore was a Church; and it _spake as the Dragon_, and therefore was of
+his religion; and it _came up out of the earth_, and by consequence in his
+kingdom. It is called also _the false Prophet_ who wrought miracles before
+the first Beast, by which he deceived them that received his mark, and
+worshiped his image. When the Dragon went from the woman to make war with
+the remnant of her seed, this Beast arising out of the earth assisted in
+that war, and _caused the earth and them which dwell therein to worship_
+the authority of _the first Beast, whose mortal wound was healed_, and to
+_make an Image to him_, that is, to assemble a body of men like him in
+point of religion. He had also _power to give life_ and authority _to the
+Image_, so that it could _both speak, and_ by dictating _cause that all_
+religious bodies of men, _who would not worship_ the authority of _the
+Image, should be_ mystically _killed. And he causeth all men to receive a
+mark in their right hand or in their forehead, and that no man might buy or
+sell save he that had the mark, or the name of the Beast, or the number of
+his name_; all the rest being excommunicated by the Beast with two horns.
+His mark is [Cross] [Cross] [Cross], and his name [Greek: LATEINOS], and
+the number of his name 666.
+
+Thus the Beast, after he was wounded to death with a sword and revived, was
+deified, as the heathens used to deify their Kings after death, and had an
+Image erected to him; and his worshipers were initiated in this new
+religion, by receiving the mark or name of this new God, or the number of
+his name. By killing all that will not worship him and his Image, the first
+Temple, illuminated by the lamps of the seven Churches, is demolished, and
+a new Temple built for them who will not worship him; and the outward court
+of this new Temple, or outward form of a Church, is given to the
+_Gentiles_, who worship the Beast and his Image: while they who will not
+worship him, are sealed with the name of God in their foreheads, and retire
+into the inward court of this new Temple. These are the 144000 sealed out
+of all the twelve tribes of _Israel_, and called the _two Witnesses_, as
+being derived from the two wings of the woman while she was flying into the
+wilderness, and represented by two of the seven candlesticks. These appear
+to _John_ in the inward court of the second Temple, standing on mount
+_Sion_ with the Lamb, and as it were on the sea of glass. These are _the
+Saints of the most High_, and _the host of heaven_, and _the holy people_
+spoken of by _Daniel_, as worn out and trampled under foot, and destroyed
+in the latter times by the little horns of his fourth Beast and He-Goat.
+
+While the _Gentiles_ tread the holy city under foot, God _gives power to
+his two Witnesses, and they prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore
+days clothed in sackcloth_. They are called _the two Olive-trees_, with
+relation to the two Olive-trees, which in _Zechary_'s vision, chap. iv.
+stand on either side of the golden candlestick to supply the lamps with
+oil: and Olive-trees, according to the Apostle _Paul_, represent Churches,
+_Rom._ xi. They supply the lamps with oil, by maintaining teachers. They
+are also called _the two candlesticks_; which in this Prophecy signify
+Churches, the seven Churches of _Asia_ being represented by seven
+candlesticks. Five of these Churches were found faulty, and threatned if
+they did not repent; the other two were without fault, and so their
+candlesticks were fit to be placed in the second Temple. These were the
+Churches in _Smyrna_ and _Philadelphia_. They were in a state of
+tribulation and persecution, and the only two of the seven in such a state:
+and so their candlesticks were fit to represent the Churches in affliction
+in the times of the second Temple, and the only two of the seven that were
+fit. The _two Witnesses_ are not new Churches: they are the posterity of
+the primitive Church, the posterity of the two wings of the woman, and so
+are fitly represented by two of the primitive candlesticks. We may conceive
+therefore, that when the first Temple was destroyed, and a new one built
+for them who worship in the inward court, two of the seven candlesticks
+were placed in this new Temple.
+
+The affairs of the Church are not considered during the opening of the
+first four seals. They begin to be consider'd at the opening of the fifth
+seal, as was said above; and are further considered at the opening of the
+sixth seal; and the seventh seal contains the times of the great Apostacy.
+And therefore I refer the Epistles to the seven Churches unto the times of
+the fifth and sixth seals: for they relate to the Church when she began to
+decline, and contain admonitions against the great Apostacy then
+approaching.
+
+When _Eusebius_ had brought down his _Ecclesiatical History_ to the reign
+of _Dioclesian_, he thus describes the state of the Church: _Qualem
+quantamque gloriam simul ac libertatem doctrina verae erga supremum Deum
+pietatis a Christo primum hominibus annunciata, apud omnes Graecos pariter &
+barbaros ante persecutionem nostra memoria excitatam, consecuta sit, nos
+certe pro merito explicare non possumus. Argumento esse possit Imperatorum
+benignitas erga nostros: quibus regendas etiam provincias committebant,
+omni sacrificandi metu eos liberantes ob singularem, qua in religionem
+nostram affecti erant, benevolentiam._ And a little after: _Jam vero quis
+innumerabilem hominum quotidie ad fidem Christi confugientium turbam, quis
+numerum ecclesiarum in singulis urbibus, quis illustres populorum concursus
+in aedibus sacris, cumulate possit describere? Quo factum est, ut priscis
+aedificiis jam non contenti, in singulis urbibus spatiosas ab ipsis
+fundamentis exstruerent ecclesias. Atque haec progressii temporis
+increscentia, & quotidie in majus & melius proficiscentia, nec livor ullus
+atterere, nec malignitas daemonis fascinare, nec hominum insidiae prohibere
+unquam potuerunt, quamdiu omnipotentis Dei dextra populum suum, utpote tali
+dignum praesidio, texit atque custodiit. Sed cum ex nimia libertate in
+negligentiam ac desidiam prolapsi essemus; cum alter alteri invidere atque
+obtrectare caepisset; cum inter nos quasi bella intestina gereremus, verbis,
+tanquam armis quibusdam hastisque, nos mutuo vulnerantes; cum Antistites
+adversus Antistites, populi in populos collisi, jurgia ac tumultus
+agitarent; denique cum fraus & simulatio ad summum malitiae culmen
+adolevisset: tum divina ultio, levi brachio ut solet, integro adhuc
+ecclesiae statu, & fidelium turbis libere convenientibus, sensim ac moderate
+in nos caepit animadvertere; orsa primum persecutione ab iis qui militabant.
+Cum vero sensu omni destituti de placando Dei numine ne cogitaremus quidem;
+quin potius instar impiorum quorundam res humanas nulla providentia
+gubernari rati, alia quotidie crimina aliis adjiceremus: cum Pastores
+nostri spreta religionis regula, mutuis inter se contentionibus
+decertarent, nihil aliud quam jurgia, minas, aemulationem, odia, ac mutuas
+inimicitias amplificare studentes; principatum quasi tyrannidem quandam
+contentissime sibi vindicantes: tunc demum juxta dictum Hieremiae,
+_obscuravit Dominus in ira sua filiam Sion, & dejecit de caelo gloriam
+Israel_,--per Ecclesiarum scilicet subversionem_, &c. This was the state of
+the Church just before the subversion of the Churches in the beginning of
+_Dioclesian_'s persecution: and to this state of the Church agrees the
+first of the seven Epistles to the Angel of the seven Churches, [1] that to
+the Church in _Ephesus_. _I have something against thee_, saith _Christ_ to
+the Angel of that Church, _because thou hast left thy first love. Remember
+therefore from whence thou art fallen, and repent, and do the first works;
+or else I will come unto thee quickly, and will remove thy candlestick out
+of its place, except thou repent. But this thou hast, that thou hatest the
+deeds of the _Nicolaitans_, which I also hate_. The _Nicolaitans_ are the
+_Continentes_ above described, who placed religion in abstinence from
+marriage, abandoning their wives if they had any. They are here called
+_Nicolaitans_, from _Nicolas_ one of the seven deacons of the primitive
+Church of _Jerusalem_; who having a beautiful wife, and being taxed with
+uxoriousness, abandoned her, and permitted her to marry whom she pleased,
+saying that we must disuse the flesh; and thenceforward lived a single life
+in continency, as his children also. The _Continentes_ afterwards embraced
+the doctrine of _AEons_ and Ghosts male and female, and were avoided by the
+Churches till the fourth century; and the Church of _Ephesus_ is here
+commended for hating their deeds.
+
+The persecution of _Dioclesian_ began in the year of _Christ_ 302, and
+lasted ten years in the _Eastern_ Empire and two years in the _Western_. To
+this state of the Church the second Epistle, to the Church of _Smyrna_,
+agrees. _I know_, saith [2] _Christ_, _thy works, and tribulation, and
+poverty, but thou art rich; and I know the blasphemy of them, which say
+they are _Jews_ and are not, but are the synagogue of Satan. Fear none of
+those things which thou shalt suffer: Behold, the Devil shall call some of
+you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten
+days. Be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee a crown of life._
+The tribulation of ten days can agree to no other persecution than that of
+_Dioclesian_, it being the only persecution which lasted ten years. By _the
+blasphemy of them which say they are _Jews_ and are not, but are the
+synagogue of Satan_, I understand the Idolatry of the _Nicolaitans_, who
+falsly said they were _Christians_.
+
+The _Nicolaitans_ are complained of also in [3] the third Epistle, as men
+that _held the doctrine of _Balaam_, who taught _Balac_ to cast a
+stumbling-block before the children of _Israel_, to eat things sacrificed
+to Idols, and [4] to commit_ spiritual _fornication_. For _Balaam_ taught
+the _Moabites_ and _Midianites_ to tempt and invite _Israel_ by their women
+to commit fornication, and to feast with them at the sacrifices of their
+Gods. The Dragon therefore began now to come down among the inhabitants of
+the earth and sea.
+
+The _Nicolaitans_ are also complained of in the fourth Epistle, under the
+name of the _woman _Jezabel_, who calleth herself a Prophetess, to teach
+and to seduce the servants of _Christ_ to commit fornication, and to eat
+things sacrificed to Idols_. The woman therefore began now to fly into the
+wilderness.
+
+The reign of _Constantine_ the great from the time of his conquering
+_Licinius_, was monarchical over the whole _Roman_ Empire. Then the Empire
+became divided between the sons of _Constantine_: and afterwards it was
+again united under _Constantius_, by his victory over _Magnentius_. To the
+affairs of the Church in these three successive periods of time, the third,
+fourth, and fifth Epistles, that is, those to the Angels of the Churches in
+_Pergamus_, _Thyatira_, and _Sardis_, seem to relate. The next Emperor was
+_Julian_ the Apostate.
+
+In the sixth Epistle, [5] to the Angel of the Church in _Philadelphia_,
+_Christ_ saith: _Because_ in the reign of the heathen Emperor _Julian_,
+_thou hast kept the word of my patience, I also will keep thee from the
+hour of temptation, which_ by the woman's flying into the wilderness, and
+the Dragon's making war with the remnant of her seed, and the killing of
+all who will not worship the Image of the Beast, _shall come upon all the
+world, to try them that dwell upon the earth_, and to distinguish them by
+sealing the one with the name of God in their foreheads, and marking the
+other with the mark of the Beast. _Him that overcometh, I will make a
+pillar in the Temple of my God; and he shall go no more out_ of it. _And I
+will write upon him the name of my God_ in his forehead. So the
+_Christians_ of the Church of _Philadelphia_, as many of them as overcome,
+are sealed with the seal of God, and placed in the second Temple, and go no
+more out. The same is to be understood of the Church in _Smyrna_, which
+also kept the word of God's patience, and was without fault. These two
+Churches, with their posterity, are therefore the _two Pillars_, and the
+_two Candlesticks_, and the _two Witnesses_ in the second Temple.
+
+After the reign of the Emperor _Julian,_ and his successor _Jovian_ who
+reigned but five months, the Empire became again divided between
+_Valentinian_ and _Valens_. Then the Church Catholick, in the Epistle to
+the Angel of the Church of _Laodicea_, is reprehended as _lukewarm_, and
+[6] threatned to be _spewed out of _Christ's_ mouth_. She said, that she
+was _rich and increased with goods, and had need of nothing_, being in
+outward prosperity; _and knew not that she was_ inwardly _wretched, and
+miserable, and poor, and blind, and naked_. She is therefore _spewed out of
+_Christ's_ mouth_ at the opening of the seventh seal: and this puts an end
+to the times of the first Temple.
+
+About one half of the _Roman_ Empire turned _Christians_ in the time of
+_Constantine_ the great and his sons. After _Julian_ had opened the
+Temples, and restored the worship of the heathens, the Emperors
+_Valentinian_ and _Valens_ tolerated it all their reign; and therefore the
+Prophecy of the sixth seal was not fully accomplished before the reign of
+their successor _Gratian_. It was the custom of the heathen Priests, in the
+beginning of the reign of every sovereign Emperor, to offer him the dignity
+and habit of the _Pontifex Maximus_. This dignity all Emperors had hitherto
+accepted: but _Gratian_ rejected it, threw down the idols, interdicted the
+sacrifices, and took away their revenues with the salaries and authority of
+the Priests. _Theodosius_ the great followed his example; and heathenism
+afterwards recovered itself no more, but decreased so fast, that
+_Prudentius_, about ten years after the death of _Theodosius_, called the
+heathens, _vix pauca ingenia & pars hominum rarissima_. Whence the affairs
+of the sixth seal ended with the reign of _Valens_, or rather with the
+beginning of the reign of _Theodosius_, when he, like his predecessor
+_Gratian_, rejected the dignity of _Pontifex Maximus_. For the _Romans_
+were very much infested by the invasions of foreign nations in the reign of
+_Valentinian_ and _Valens_: _Hoc tempore_, saith _Ammianus_, _velut per
+universum orbem Romanum bellicum canentibus buccinis, excitae gentes
+saevissimae limites sibi proximos persultabant: Gallias Rhaetiasque simul
+Alemanni populabantur: Sarmatae Pannonias & Quadi: Picti, Saxones, & Scoti &
+Attacotti Britannos aerumnis vexavere continuis: Austoriani, Mauricaeque aliae
+gentes Africam solito acrius incursabant: Thracias diripiebant praedatorii
+globi Gotthorum: Persarum Rex manus Armeniis injectabat_. And whilst the
+Emperors were busy in repelling these enemies, the _Hunns_ and _Alans_ and
+_Goths_ came over the _Danube_ in two bodies, overcame and slew _Valens_,
+and made so great a slaughter of the _Roman_ army, that _Ammianus_ saith:
+_Nec ulla Annalibus praeter Cannensem ita ad internecionem res legitur
+gesta_. These wars were not fully stopt on all sides till the beginning of
+the reign of _Theodosius_, A.C. 379 & 380: but thenceforward the Empire
+remained quiet from foreign armies, till his death, A.C. 395. So long the
+four winds were held: and so long there was silence in heaven. And the
+seventh seal was opened when this silence began.
+
+Mr. _Mede_ hath explained the Prophecy of the first six trumpets not much
+amiss: but if he had observed, that the Prophecy of pouring out the vials
+of wrath is synchronal to that of sounding the trumpets, his explanation
+would have been yet more complete.
+
+The name of _Woes_ is given to the wars to which the three last trumpets
+sound, to distinguish them from the wars of the four first. The sacrifices
+on the first four days of the feast of Tabernacles, at which the first four
+trumpets sound, and the first four vials of wrath are poured out, are
+slaughters in four great wars; and these wars are represented by four winds
+from the four corners of the earth. The first was an east wind, the second
+a west wind, the third a south wind, and the fourth a north wind, with
+respect to the city of _Rome_, the metropolis of the old _Roman_ Empire.
+These four plagues fell upon _the third part of the Earth, Sea, Rivers,
+Sun, Moon and Stars_; that is, upon the Earth, Sea, Rivers, Sun, Moon and
+Stars of the third part of the whole scene of these Prophecies of _Daniel_
+and _John_.
+
+The plague of the eastern wind [7] at the sounding of the first trumpet,
+was to fall upon the _Earth_, that is, upon the nations of the _Greek_
+Empire. Accordingly, after the death of _Theodosius_ the great, the
+_Goths_, _Sarmatians_, _Hunns_, _Isaurians_, and _Austorian_ Moors invaded
+and miserably wasted _Greece_, _Thrace_, _Asia minor_, _Armenia_, _Syria_,
+_Egypt_, _Lybia_, and _Illyricum_, for ten or twelve years together.
+
+The plague of the western wind at the sounding of the second trumpet, was
+to fall upon the _Sea_, or _Western_ Empire, by means of _a great mountain
+burning with fire_ cast into it, and _turning it to blood_. Accordingly in
+the year 407, that Empire began to be invaded by the _Visigoths_,
+_Vandals_, _Alans_, _Sueves_, _Burgundians_, _Ostrogoths_, _Heruli_,
+_Quadi_, _Gepides_; and by these wars it was broken into ten kingdoms, and
+miserably wasted: and _Rome_ itself, the burning mountain, was besieged and
+taken by the _Ostrogoths_, in the beginning of these miseries.
+
+The plague of the southern wind at the sounding of the third trumpet, was
+to cause _a great star, burning as it were a lamp, to fall from heaven upon
+the rivers and fountains of waters_, the _Western_ Empire now divided into
+many kingdoms, and to turn them to _wormwood_ and _blood_, and make them
+_bitter_. Accordingly _Genseric_, the King of the _Vandals_ and _Alans_ in
+_Spain_, A.C. 427, enter'd _Africa_ with an army of eighty thousand men;
+where he invaded the _Moors_, and made war upon the _Romans_, both there
+and on the sea-coasts of _Europe_, for fifty years together, almost without
+intermission, taking _Hippo_ A.C. 431, and _Carthage_ the capital of
+_Africa_ A.C. 439. In A.C. 455, with a numerous fleet and an army of three
+hundred thousand _Vandals_ and _Moors_, he invaded _Italy_, took and
+plundered _Rome_, _Naples_, _Capua_, and many other cities; carrying thence
+their wealth with the flower of the people into _Africa_: and the next
+year, A.C. 456, he rent all _Africa_ from the Empire, totally expelling the
+_Romans_. Then the _Vandals_ invaded and took the Islands of the
+_Mediterranean_, _Sicily_, _Sardinia_, _Corsica_, _Ebusus_, _Majorca_,
+_Minorca_, &c. and _Ricimer_ besieged the Emperer _Anthemius_ in _Rome_,
+took the city, and gave his soldiers the plunder, A.C. 472. The _Visigoths_
+about the same time drove the _Romans_ out of _Spain_: and now the
+_Western_ Emperor, the _great star which fell from heaven, burning as it
+were a lamp_, having by all these wars gradually lost almost all his
+dominions, was invaded, and conquered in one year by _Odoacer_ King of the
+_Heruli_, A.C. 476. After this the _Moors_ revolted A.C. 477, and weakned
+the _Vandals_ by several wars, and took _Mauritania_ from them. These wars
+continued till the _Vandals_ were conquered by _Belisarius_, A.C. 534. and
+by all these wars _Africa_ was almost depopulated, according to
+_Procopius_, who reckons that above five millions of men perished in them.
+When the _Vandals_ first invaded _Africa_, that country was very populous,
+consisting of about 700 bishopricks, more than were in all _France_,
+_Spain_ and _Italy_ together: but by the wars between the _Vandals_,
+_Romans_ and _Moors_, it was depopulated to that degree, that _Procopius_
+tells us, it was next to a miracle for a traveller to see a man.
+
+In pouring out the third vial it is [8] said: _Thou art righteous, O
+Lord,--because thou hast judged thus: for they have shed the blood of thy
+Saints and Prophets, and thou hast given them blood to drink, for they are
+worthy_. How they shed the blood of Saints, may be understood by the
+following Edict of the Emperor _Honorius_, procured by four Bishops sent to
+him by a Council of _African_ Bishops, who met at _Carthage_ 14 _June_,
+A.C. 410.
+
+_Impp. Honor. &. Theod. AA. Heracliano Com. Afric._
+
+_Oraculo penitus remoto, quo ad ritus suos haereticae superstitionis
+abrepserant, sciant omnes sanctae legis inimici, plectendos se poena &
+proscriptionis & sanguinis, si ultra convenire per publicum, execranda
+sceleris sui temeritate temptaverint. Dat. _viii._ Kal. Sept. Varano V.C.
+Cons._ A.C. 410.
+
+Which Edict was five years after fortified by the following.
+
+_Impp. Honor. & Theod. AA. Heracliano Com. Afric._
+
+_Sciant cuncti qui ad ritus suos haeresis superstitionibus obrepserant
+sacrosanctae legis inimici, plectendos se poena & proscriptionis &
+sanguinis, si ultra convenire per publicum exercendi sceleris sui
+temeritate temptaverint: ne qua vera divinaque reverentia contagione
+temeretur. Dat. _viii._ Kal. Sept. Honorio _x._ & Theod. _vi._ AA. Coss._
+A.C. 415.
+
+These Edicts being directed to the governor of _Africa_, extended only to
+the _Africans_. Before these there were many severe ones against the
+_Donatists_, but they did not extend to blood. These two were the first
+which made their meetings, and the meetings of all dissenters, capital: for
+by _hereticks_ in these Edicts are meant all dissenters, as is manifest by
+the following against _Euresius_ a _Luciferan_ Bishop.
+
+_Impp. Arcad. & Honor. AA. Aureliano Proc. Africae._
+
+_Haereticorum vocabulo continentur, & latis adversus eos sanctionibus debent
+succumbere, qui vel levi argumento a judicio Catholicae religionis & tramite
+detecti fuerint deviare: ideoque experientia tua Euresium haereticum esse
+cognoscat. Dat. _iii._ Non. Sept. Constantinop. Olybrio & Probino Coss._
+A.C. 395.
+
+The _Greek_ Emperor _Zeno_ adopted _Theoderic_ King of the _Ostrogoths_ to
+be his son, made him master of the horse and _Patricius_, and Consul of
+_Constantinople_; and recommending to him the _Roman_ people and Senate,
+gave him the _Western_ Empire, and sent him into _Italy_ against _Odoacer_
+King of the _Heruli_. _Theoderic_ thereupon led his nation into _Italy_,
+conquered _Odoacer_, and reigned over _Italy_, _Sicily_, _Rhaetia_,
+_Noricum_, _Dalmatia_, _Liburnia_, _Istria_, and part of _Suevia_,
+_Pannonia_ and _Gallia_. Whence _Ennodius_ said, in a Panegyric to
+_Theoderic_: _Ad limitem suum Romana regna remeasse._ _Theoderic_ reigned
+with great prudence, moderation and felicity; treated the _Romans_ with
+singular benevolence, governed them by their own laws, and restored their
+government under their Senate and Consuls, he himself supplying the place
+of Emperor, without assuming the title. _Ita sibi parentibus praefuit_,
+saith _Procopius_, _ut vere Imperatori conveniens decus nullum ipsi
+abesset: Justitiae magnus ei cultus, legumque diligens custodia: terras a
+vicinis barbaris servavit intactas_, &c. Whence I do not reckon the reign
+of this King, amongst the plagues of the four winds.
+
+The plague of the northern wind, at the sounding of the fourth trumpet, was
+to cause _the Sun, Moon and Stars_, that is, the King, kingdom and Princes
+of the _Western_ Empire, _to be darkned_, and to continue some time in
+darkness. Accordingly _Belisarius_, having conquered the _Vandals_, invaded
+_Italy_ A.C. 535, and made war upon the _Ostrogoths_ in _Dalmatia_,
+_Liburnia_, _Venetia_, _Lombardy_, _Tuscany_, and other regions northward
+from _Rome_, twenty years together. In this war many cities were taken and
+retaken. In retaking _Millain_ from the _Romans_, the _Ostrogoths_ slew all
+the males young and old, amounting, as _Procopius_ reckons, to three
+hundred thousand, and sent the women captives to their allies the
+_Burgundians_. _Rome_ itself was taken and retaken several times, and
+thereby the people were thinned; the old government by a Senate ceased, the
+nobles were ruined, and all the glory of the city was extinguish'd: and
+A.C. 552, after a war of seventeen years, the kingdom of the _Ostrogoths_
+fell; yet the remainder of the _Ostrogoths_, and an army of _Germans_
+called in to their assistance, continued the war three or four years
+longer. Then ensued the war of the _Heruli_, who, as _Anastasius_ tells us,
+_perimebant cunctam Italiam_, slew all _Italy_. This was followed by the
+war of the _Lombards_, the fiercest of all the _Barbarians_, which began
+A.C. 568, and lasted for thirty eight years together; _facta tali clade_,
+saith _Anastasius_, _qualem a saeculo nullus meminit_; ending at last in the
+Papacy of _Sabinian_, A.C. 605, by a peace then made with the _Lombards_.
+Three years before this war ended, _Gregory_ the great, then Bishop of
+_Rome_, thus speaks of it: _Qualiter enim & quotidianis gladiis & quantis
+Longobardorum incursionibus, ecce jam per triginta quinque annorum
+longitudinem premimur, nullis explere vocibus suggestionis valemus_: and in
+one of his Sermons to the people, he thus expresses the great consumption
+of the _Romans_ by these wars: _Ex illa plebe innumerabili quanti
+remanseritis aspicitis, & tamen adhuc quotidie flagella urgent, repentini
+casus opprimunt, novae res & improvisae clades affligunt_. In another Sermon
+he thus describes the desolations: _Destructae urbes, eversa sunt castra,
+depopulati agri, in solitudinem terra redacta est. Nullus in agris incola,
+pene nullus in urbibus habitator remansit. Et tamen ipsae parvae generis
+humani reliquiae adhuc quotidie & sine cessatione feriuntur, & finem non
+habent flagella coelestis justitiae. Ipsa autem quae aliquando mundi Domina
+esse videbatur, qualis remansit Roma conspicimus innumeris doloribus
+multipliciter attrita, defolatione civium, impressione hostium, frequentia
+ruinarum.--Ecce jam de illa omnes hujus faeculi potentes ablati sunt.--Ecce
+populi defecerunt.--Ubi enim Senatus? Ubi jam populus? Contabuerunt ossa,
+consumptae sunt carnes. Omnis enim saecularium dignitatum ordo extinctus est,
+& tamen ipsos vos paucos qui remansimus, adhuc quotidie gladii, adhuc
+quotidie innumerae tribulationes premunt.--Vacua jam ardet Roma. Quid autem
+ista de hominibus dicimus? Cum ruinis crebrescentibus ipsa quoque destrui
+aedificia videmus. Postquam defecerunt homines etiam parietes cadunt. Jam
+ecce desolata, ecce contrita, ecce gemitibus oppressa est,_ &c. All this
+was spoken by _Gregory_ to the people of _Rome_, who were witnesses of the
+truth of it. Thus by _the plagues of the four winds_, the Empire of the
+_Greeks_ was shaken, and the Empire of the _Latins_ fell; and _Rome_
+remained nothing more than the capital of a poor dukedom, subordinate to
+_Ravenna_, the seat of the Exarchs.
+
+The fifth trumpet sounded to the wars, which the _King of the_ South, as he
+is called by _Daniel_, made _in the time of the end_, in _pushing at the
+King who did according to his will_. This plague began with the _opening of
+the bottomless pit_, which denotes the letting out of a false religion: the
+_smoke which came out of the pit_, signifying the multitude which embraced
+that religion; and the _locusts which came out of the smoke_, the armies
+which came out of that multitude. This pit was opened, to let out smoke and
+locusts into the regions of the four monarchies, or some of them. _The King
+of these locusts_ was the _Angel of the bottomless pit_, being chief
+governor as well in religious as civil affairs, such as was the Caliph of
+the _Saracens_. Swarms of locusts often arise in _Arabia faelix_, and from
+thence infest the neighbouring nations: and so are a very fit type of the
+numerous armies of _Arabians_ invading the _Romans_. They began to invade
+them A.C. 634, and to reign at _Damascus_ A.C. 637. They built _Bagdad_
+A.C. 766, and reigned over _Persia_, _Syria_, _Arabia_, _Egypt_, _Africa_
+and _Spain_. They afterwards lost _Africa_ to _Mahades_, A.C. 910; _Media_,
+_Hircania_, _Chorasan_, and all _Persia_, to the _Dailamites_, between the
+years 927 and 935; _Mesopotamia_ and _Miafarekin_ to _Nasiruddaulas_, A.C.
+930; _Syria_ and _Egypt_ to _Achsjid_, A.C. 935, and now being in great
+distress, the Caliph of _Bagdad_, A.C. 936, surrendred all the rest of his
+temporal power to _Mahomet_ the son of _Rajici_, King of _Wasit_ in
+_Chaldea_, and made him Emperor of Emperors. But _Mahomet_ within two years
+lost _Bagdad_ to the _Turks_; and thenceforward _Bagdad_ was sometimes in
+the hands of the _Turks_, and sometimes in the hands of the _Saracens_,
+till _Togrul-beig_, called also _Togra_, _Dogrissa_, _Tangrolipix_, and
+_Sadoc_, conquered _Chorasan_ and _Persia_; and A.C. 1055, added _Bagdad_
+to his Empire, making it the seat thereof. His successors _Olub-Arflan_ and
+_Melechschah_, conquered the regions upon _Euphrates_; and these conquests,
+after the death of _Melechschah_, brake into the kingdoms of _Armenia_,
+_Mesopotamia_, _Syria_, and _Cappadocia_. The whole time that the Caliphs
+of the _Saracens_ reigned with a temporal dominion at _Damascus_ and
+_Bagdad_ together, was 300 years, viz. from the year 637 to the year 936
+inclusive. Now locusts live but five months; and therefore, for the decorum
+of the type, these locusts are said to _hurt men five months and five
+months_, as if they had lived about five months at _Damascus_, and again
+about five months at _Bagdad_; in all ten months, or 300 prophetic days,
+which are years.
+
+The sixth trumpet sounded to the wars, which _Daniel_'s King of the _North_
+made against the King above-mentioned, _who did according to his will_. In
+these wars the King of the _North_, according to _Daniel_, conquered the
+Empire of the _Greeks_, and also _Judea_, _Egypt_, _Lybia_, and _Ethiopia_:
+and by these conquests the Empire of the _Turks_ was set up, as may be
+known by the extent thereof. These wars commenced A.C. 1258, when the four
+kingdoms of the _Turks_ seated upon _Euphrates_, that of _Armenia major_
+seated at _Miyapharekin_, _Megarkin_ or _Martyropolis_, that of
+_Mesopotamia_ seated at _Mosul_, that of all _Syria_ seated at _Aleppo_,
+and that of _Cappadocia_ seated at _Iconium_, were invaded by the _Tartars_
+under _Hulacu_, and driven into the western parts of _Asia minor_, where
+they made war upon the _Greeks_, and began to erect the present Empire of
+the _Turks_. Upon the sounding of the sixth trumpet, [9] _John heard a
+voice from the four horns of the golden Altar which is before God, saying
+to the sixth Angel which had the trumpet, Loose the four Angels which are
+bound at the great river _Euphrates_. And the four Angels were loosed,
+which were prepared for an hour and a day, and a month and a year, for to
+slay the third part of men_. By the four horns of the golden Altar, is
+signified the situation of the head cities of the said four kingdoms,
+_Miyapharekin_, _Mosul_, _Aleppo_, and _Iconium_, which were in a
+quadrangle. They slew the third part of men, when they conquered the
+_Greek_ Empire, and took _Constantinople_, A.C. 1453. and they began to be
+prepared for this purpose, when _Olub-Arslan_ began to conquer the nations
+upon _Euphrates_, A.C. 1063. The interval is called an hour and a day, and
+a month and a year, or 391 prophetic days, which are years. In the first
+thirty years, _Olub-Arslan_ and _Melechschah_ conquered the nations upon
+_Euphrates_, and reigned over the whole. _Melechschah_ died A.C. 1092, and
+was succeeded by a little child; and then this kingdom broke into the four
+kingdoms above-mentioned.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Notes to Chap. III.
+
+[1] Apoc. ii. 4, &c.
+
+[2] Apoc. ii. 9, 10.
+
+[3] Ver. 14.
+
+[4] Numb. xxv. 1, 2, 18, & xxi. 16.
+
+[5] Apoc. iii. 10, 12.
+
+[6] Apoc. iii. 16, 17.
+
+[7] Apoc. viii. 7, &c.
+
+[8] Apoc. xvi. 5, 6.
+
+[9] Apoc. ix. 13, &c.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_THE END._
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Advertisement._
+
+_The last pages of these Observations having been differently drawn up by
+the Author in another copy of his Work; they are here inserted as they
+follow in that copy, after the 22d line of the 261st page foregoing._
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_And none was found worthy to open the book_ till the Lamb of God appeared;
+the great High-Priest represented by a lamb slain at the foot of the Altar
+in the morning-sacrifice. _And he came, and took the book out of the hand
+of him that sat upon the throne._ For the High-Priest, in the feast of the
+seventh month, went into the most holy place, and took the book of the law
+out of the right side of the Ark, to read it to the people: and in order to
+read it well, he studied it seven days, that is, upon the fourth, fifth,
+sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth days, being attended by some of the
+priests to hear him perform. These seven days are alluded to, by the Lamb's
+opening the seven seals successively.
+
+Upon the tenth day of the month, a young bullock was offered for a
+sin-offering for the High-Priest, and a goat for a sin-offering for the
+people: and lots were cast upon two goats to determine which of them should
+be God's lot for the sin-offering; and the other goat was called _Azazel_,
+the scape-goat. The High-Priest in his linen garments, took a censer full
+of burning coals of fire from the Altar, his hand being full of sweet
+incense beaten small; and went into the most holy place within the veil,
+and put the incense upon the fire, and sprinkled the blood of the bullock
+with his finger upon the mercy-seat and before the mercy-seat seven times;
+and then he killed the goat which fell to God's lot, for a sin-offering for
+the people, and brought his blood within the veil, and sprinkled it also
+seven times upon the mercy-seat and before the mercy-seat. Then he went out
+to the Altar, and sprinkled it also seven times with the blood of the
+bullock, and as often with the blood of the goat. After this _he laid both
+his hands upon the head of the live goat; and confessed over him all the
+iniquities of the children of _Israel_, and all their transgressions in all
+their sins, putting them upon the head of the goat; and sent him away into
+the wilderness by the hands of a fit man: and the goat bore upon him all
+their iniquities into a land not inhabited_, Levit. chap. iv. & chap. xvi.
+While the High-Priest was doing these things in the most holy place and at
+the Altar, the people continued at their devotion quietly and in silence.
+Then the High-Priest went into the holy place, put off his linen garments,
+and put on other garments; then came out, and sent the bullock and the goat
+of the sin-offering to be burnt without the camp, with fire taken in a
+censer from the Altar: and as the people returned home from the Temple,
+they said to one another, _God seal you to a good new year_.
+
+In allusion to all this, _when he had opened the seventh seal, there was
+silence in heaven about the space of half an hour. And an Angel stood at
+the Altar having a golden Censer, and there was given unto him much
+incense, that he should offer it with the prayers of all Saints, upon the
+golden Altar which was before the throne. And the smoke of the incense with
+the prayers of the Saints ascended up before God out of the Angel's hand.
+And the Angel took the Censer, and filled it with fire of the Altar, and
+cast it to the earth_, suppose without the camp, for sacrificing the goat
+which fell to God's lot. For the High-Priest being _Christ_ himself, the
+bullock is omitted. At this sacrifice _there were voices and thundrings_,
+of the musick of the Temple, _and lightnings_ of the sacred fire, _and an
+earthquake_: and synchronal to these things was the sealing of _the 144000
+out of all the twelve tribes of the children of _Israel_ with the seal of
+God in their foreheads_, while the rest of the twelve tribes received the
+mark of the Beast, and the Woman fled from the Temple into the wilderness
+to her place upon this Beast. For this sealing and marking was represented
+by casting lots upon the two goats, sacrificing God's lot on mount _Sion_,
+and sending the scape-goat into the wilderness loaden with the sins of the
+people.
+
+Upon the fifteenth day of the month, and the six following days, there were
+very great sacrifices. And in allusion to the sounding of trumpets, and
+singing with thundring voices, and pouring out drink-offerings at those
+sacrifices, _seven trumpets are sounded_, and _seven thunders utter their
+voices_, and _seven vials of wrath are poured out_. Wherefore the sounding
+of the _seven trumpets_, the voices of the _seven thunders_, and the
+pouring out of the _seven vials of wrath_, are synchronal, and relate to
+one and the same division of the time of the seventh seal following the
+silence, into seven successive parts. The seven days of this feast were
+called the feast of Tabernacles; and during these seven days the children
+of _Israel_ dwelt in booths, and rejoiced with palm-branches in their
+hands. To this alludes _the multitude with palms in their hands_, which
+appeared after the sealing of the 144000, and _came out of the great
+tribulation_ with triumph at the battle of the great day, to which the
+seventh trumpet sounds. The visions therefore of the 144000, and of the
+palm-bearing multitude, extend to the sounding of the seventh trumpet, and
+therefore are synchronal to the times of the seventh seal.
+
+When the 144000 _are sealed out of all the twelve tribes of _Israel__, and
+the rest receive _the mark of the Beast_, and thereby the first temple is
+destroyed; _John_ is bidden to _measure the temple and altar_, that is,
+their courts, _and them that worship therein_, that is, the 144000 standing
+on mount _Sion_ and on the sea of glass: _but the court that is without the
+temple_, that is, the peoples court, to _leave out and measure it not,
+because it is given to the_ Gentiles, those who receive the mark of the
+Beast; _and the holy city they shall tread under foot forty and two
+months_, that is, all the time that the Beast acts under the woman
+_Babylon_: and _the two witnesses prophesy 1260 days_, that is, all the
+same time, _clothed in sackcloth. These have power_, like _Elijah, to shut
+heaven that it rain not_, at the sounding of the first trumpet; and, like
+_Moses, to turn the waters into blood_ at the sounding of the second; _and
+to smite the earth with all plagues_, those of the trumpets, _as often as
+they will_. These prophesy at the building of the second temple, like
+_Haggai_ and _Zechary_. These are _the two Olive-trees_, or Churches, which
+_supplied the lamps with oil_, _Zech._ iv. These are _the two
+candlesticks_, or Churches, _standing before the God of the earth_. Five of
+the seven Churches of _Asia_, those in prosperity, are found fault with,
+and exhorted to repent, and threatned to be _removed out of their places_,
+or _spewed out of _Christ's_ mouth_, or _punished with the sword of
+_Christ's_ mouth, except they repent_: the other two, the Churches of
+_Smyrna_ and _Philadelphia_, which were under persecution, remain in a
+state of persecution, to illuminate the second temple. When the primitive
+Church catholick, represented by _the woman in heaven_, apostatized, and
+became divided into two corrupt Churches, represented by the _whore of
+_Babylon__ and the _two-horned Beast_, the 144000 _who were sealed out of
+all the twelve tribes_, became the _two Witnesses_, in opposition to those
+two false Churches: and the name of _two Witnesses_ once imposed, remains
+to the true Church of God in all times and places to the end of the
+Prophecy.
+
+In the interpretation of this Prophecy, _the woman in heaven clothed with
+the sun_, before she flies into the wilderness, represents the primitive
+Church catholick, illuminated with the _seven lamps_ in the _seven golden
+candlesticks_, which are the _seven Churches_ of _Asia_. The Dragon
+signifies the same Empire with _Daniel_'s He-goat in the reign of his last
+horn, that is, the whole _Roman_ Empire, until it became divided into the
+_Greek_ and _Latin_ Empires; and all the time of that division it signifies
+the _Greek_ Empire alone: and the Beast is _Daniel_'s fourth Beast, that
+is, the Empire of the _Latins_. Before the division of the _Roman_ Empire
+into the _Greek_ and _Latin_ Empires, the Beast is included in the body of
+the Dragon; and from the time of that division, the Beast is the _Latin_
+Empire only. Hence the Dragon and Beast have the same heads and horns; but
+the heads are crowned upon the Dragon, and the horns upon the Beast. The
+horns are ten kingdoms, into which the Beast becomes divided presently
+after his separation from the Dragon, as hath been described above. The
+heads are seven successive dynasties, or parts, into which the _Roman_
+Empire becomes divided by the opening of the seven seals. Before the woman
+fled into the wilderness, _she being with child_ of a Christian Empire,
+_cried travelling_, viz. in the ten years persecution of _Dioclesian_, _and
+pained to be delivered: and the Dragon_, the heathen _Roman_ Empire, _stood
+before her, to devour her child as soon as it was born. And she brought
+forth a man child, who_ at length _was to rule all nations with a rod of
+iron. And her child was caught up unto God, and to his throne_ in the
+Temple, by the victory of _Constantine_ the great over _Maxentius_: _and
+the woman fled_ from the Temple _into the wilderness_ of _Arabia_ to
+_Babylon_, _where she hath a place_ of riches and honour and dominion, upon
+the back of the Beast, _prepared of God, that they should feed her there
+1260 days. And there was war in heaven_, between the heathens under
+_Maximinus_ and the new Christian Empire; _and the great Dragon was cast
+out, that old serpent, which deceiveth the whole world_, the spirit of
+heathen idolatry; _he was cast out_ of the throne _into the earth. And they
+overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and by the word of their testimony;
+and they loved not their lives unto the death_.
+
+_And when the Dragon saw that he was cast unto the earth, he persecuted the
+woman which brought forth the man child_, stirring up a new persecution
+against her in the reign of _Licinius_. _And to the woman_, by the building
+of _Constantinople_ and equalling it to _Rome_, _were given two wings of a
+great eagle, that she might flee into the wilderness into her place_ upon
+the back of her Beast, _where she is nourished for a time, and times, and
+half a time, from the face of the serpent. And the serpent_, upon the death
+of _Constantine_ the great, _cast out of his mouth water as a flood_, viz.
+the _Western_ Empire under _Constantine junior_ and _Constans_, _after the
+woman: that he might cause her to be carried away of the flood. And the
+earth_, the nations of _Asia_ now under _Constantinople_, _helped the
+woman_; and by conquering the _Western_ Empire, now under _Magnentius_,
+_swallowed up the flood which the Dragon cast out of his mouth. And the
+Dragon was wroth with the woman, and went to make war with the remnant of
+her seed, which keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of
+_Jesus Christ_, which_ in that war _were sealed out of all the twelve
+tribes of _Israel__, and remained upon mount _Sion_ with the Lamb, being in
+number 144000, and having their father's name written in their foreheads.
+
+When the earth had swallowed up the flood, and the Dragon was gone to make
+war with the remnant of the woman's seed, _John stood upon the sand of the
+sea, and saw a Beast rise out of the sea, having seven heads and ten horns.
+And the Beast was like unto a Leopard, and his feet were as the feet of a
+Bear, and his mouth as the mouth of a Lion._ _John_ here names _Daniel_'s
+four Beasts in order, putting his Beast in the room of _Daniel_'s fourth
+Beast, to shew that they are the same. _And the Dragon gave_ this Beast
+_his power and his seat and great authority_, by relinquishing the
+_Western_ Empire to him. _And one of his heads_, the sixth, was _as it were
+wounded to death_, viz. by the sword of the earth, which swallowed up the
+waters cast out of the mouth of the Dragon; _and his deadly wound was
+healed_, by a new division of the Empire between _Valentinian_ and
+_Valens_, _An._ 364. _John_ saw the Beast rise out of the sea, at the
+division thereof between _Gratian_ and _Theodosius_, _An._ 379. The Dragon
+gave the Beast his power, and his seat and great authority, at the death of
+_Theodosius_, when _Theodosius_ gave the _Western_ Empire to his son
+_Honorius_. After which the two Empires were no more united: but the
+_Western_ Empire became presently divided into ten kingdoms, as above; and
+these kingdoms at length united in religion under the woman, and reign with
+her _forty and two months_.
+
+_And I beheld_, saith _John_, _another Beast coming up out of the earth._
+When the woman fled from the Dragon into the kingdom of the Beast, and
+became his Church, this other Beast rose up out of the earth, to represent
+the Church of the Dragon. For _he had two horns like the Lamb_, such as
+were the bishopricks of _Alexandria_ and _Antioch_: _and he spake as the
+Dragon_ in matters of religion: _and he causeth the earth_, or nations of
+the Dragon's kingdom, _to worship the first Beast, whose deadly wound was
+healed_, that is, to be of his religion. _And he doth great wonders, so
+that he maketh fire come down from heaven on the earth in the sight of
+men_; that is, he excommunicateth those who differ from him in point of
+religion: for in pronouncing their excommunications, they used to swing
+down a lighted torch from above. _And he said to them that dwell on the
+earth, that they should make an image to the Beast, which had the wound by
+a sword, and did live_; that is, that they should call a Council of men of
+the religion of this Beast. _And he had power to give life unto the image
+of the Beast, that the image of the Beast should both speak, and cause that
+as many as would not worship the image of the Beast should be killed_, viz.
+mystically, by dissolving their Churches. _And he causeth all both small
+and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right
+band or in their foreheads, and that no man might buy or sell, save he that
+had the mark, or the name of the Beast, or the number of his name_; that
+is, the mark [Cross], or the name [Greek: LATEINOS], or the number thereof
+[Greek: chxs], 666. All others were excommunicated.
+
+When the seven Angels had poured out the seven vials of wrath, and _John_
+had described them all in the present time, he is called up from the time
+of the seventh vial to the time of the sixth seal, to take a view of the
+woman and her Beast, who were to reign in the times of the seventh seal. In
+respect of the latter part of time of the sixth seal, then considered as
+present, the Angel tells _John_: _The Beast that thou sawest, was and is
+not, and shall ascend out of the abyss, and go into perdition_; that is, he
+was in the reign of _Constans_ and _Magnentius_, until _Constantius_
+conquered _Magnentius_, and re-united the _Western_ Empire to the
+_Eastern_. He is not during the reunion, and he shall ascend out of the
+abyss or sea at a following division of the Empire. The Angel tells him
+further: _Here is the mind which hath wisdom: the seven heads are seven
+mountains, on which the woman sitteth_; _Rome_ being built upon seven
+hills, and thence called the seven-hilled city. _Also there are seven
+Kings: five are fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet come; and when
+he cometh, he must continue a short space: and the Beast that was and is
+not, even he is the eighth, and is of the seven, and goeth into perdition_.
+Five are fallen, the times of the five first seals being past; and one is,
+the time of the sixth seal being considered as present; and another is not
+yet come, and when he cometh, which will be at the opening of the seventh
+seal, he must continue a short space: and the Beast that was and is not,
+even he is the eighth, by means of the division of the _Roman_ Empire into
+two collateral Empires; and is of the seven, being one half of the seventh,
+and shall go into perdition. The words, _five are fallen, and one is, and
+the other is not yet come_, are usually referred by interpreters to the
+time of _John_ the Apostle, when the Prophecy was given: but it is to be
+considered, that in this Prophecy many things are spoken of as present,
+which were not present when the Prophecy was given, but which would be
+present with respect to some future time, considered as present in the
+visions. Thus where it is said upon pouring out the seventh vial of wrath,
+that _great _Babylon_ came in remembrance before God, to give unto her the
+cup of the wine of the fierceness of his wrath_; this relates not to the
+time of _John_ the Apostle, but to the time of pouring out the seventh vial
+of wrath. So where it is said, _Babylon is fallen, is fallen_; and _thrust
+in thy sickle and reap, for the time is come for thee to reap_; and _the
+time of the dead is come, that they should be judged_; and again, _I saw
+the dead small and great stand before God_: these sayings relate not to the
+days of _John_ the Apostle, but to the latter times considered as present
+in the visions. In like manner the words, _five are fallen, and one is, and
+the other is not yet come_, and _the Beast that was and is not, he is the
+eighth_, are not to be referred to the age of _John_ the Apostle, but
+relate to the time when the Beast was to be wounded to death with a sword,
+and shew that this wound was to be given him in his sixth head: and without
+this reference we are not told in what head the Beast was wounded. _And the
+ten horns which thou sawest, are ten Kings, which have received no kingdom
+as yet, but receive power as Kings one hour with the Beast. These have one
+mind_, being all of the whore's religion, _and shall give their power and
+strength unto the Beast. These shall make war with the Lamb_, at the
+sounding of the seventh trumpet; _and the Lamb shall overcome them: for he
+is Lord of Lords and King of Kings; and they that are with him are called
+and chosen and faithful. And he saith unto me, the waters which thou sawest
+where the whore sitteth, are peoples and multitudes and nations and
+tongues_, composing her Beast. _And the ten horns which thou sawest upon
+the Beast, these shall hate the whore, and shall make her desolate and
+naked, and shall eat her flesh, and burn her with fire_, at the end of the
+1260 days. _For God hath put in their hearts to fulfil his will, and to
+agree and give their kingdom unto the Beast, until the words of God shall
+be fulfilled. And the woman which thou sawest, is that great city which
+reigneth over the Kings of the earth_, or the great city of the _Latins_,
+which reigneth over the ten Kings till the end of those days.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_FINIS_.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Observations upon the Prophecies of
+Daniel, and the Apocalypse of St. John, by Isaac Newton
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OBSERVATIONS UPON THE ***
+
+***** This file should be named 16878.txt or 16878.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/8/7/16878/
+
+Produced by Greg Alethoup, Robert Shimmin, Keith Edkins
+and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+
diff --git a/16878.zip b/16878.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fad17fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16878.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a41e5bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #16878 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/16878)